Skip to main content

Full text of "DanielFryArchive"

See other formats


Alien Base 

Earth’s Encounters with Extraterrestrials 

Timothy Good 


c 


Century • London 




Published by Century in 1998 
i3S79l08642 
Copyright© Timothy Good 1998 

Timothy Good has asserted his right under the Copyright, Designs and 
10 be identified as the author of this work. 

This book is sold subject to the condition that it shall not, by way of trai 









Contents 


Acknowledgements vi 

Introduction 1 

PART ONE 

1 Strategic Reconnaissance 11 

2 A Pantomime of Unrealities 29 

3 A Festival of Absurdities 45 

4 Steps to the Stars 57 

5 Proliferating Encounters 79 

6 The Space People 100 

7 Claims, Contradictions and Corroborations 126 

8 From the Benign to the Bristly 158 

9 Alien Fantasia? 177 

10 Cosmic Shock 197 

PART TWO 

11 Let Humanity Beware! 223 

12 Continuing Contacts 239 

13 Neither Rhyme nor Reason 258 

14 Contrasting Encounters 280 

15 The Plantation 301 

16 Perplexing Trends 327 

17 Disquieting Developments 344 

18 Beyond Belief 362 

19 Alien Base-Earth 286 

Appendix: Some Recommended UFO Journals 405 
Index 406 



To Gordon Creighton 



Acknowledgements 


It would be impracticable to acknowledge here all those who have con¬ 
tributed directly or indirectly to the production of Alien Base , but I 
would like to record my thanks in particular to the following individuals 
and organizations: 

The George Adamski Foundation; Walter Andrus and the Mutual 
UFO Network; Rafael Baerga; Margaret Barling; Juan Jose Benitez; Ted 
Bloecher; Ralph and Judy Blum; Jonathan Caplan QC; Filiberto Caponi; 
Gerry Casey and the Western Flyer (Tacoma, Washington); Ronald 
Caswell; the Central Intelligence Agency; Paul Cerny; Antonio 
Chiumiento; Jerome Clark and the J. Allen Hynck Center for UFO 
Studies; Arthur C. Clarke; Terence Collins; Stephen Darbishire; 
Domenica del Coniere; Britt and Lee Elders; the Federal Bureau of 
Investigation; Ugo Furlan; Bruno Ghibaudi; Dr Daniel Rebisso Giese; 
Horacio Gonzales; the Goteborg (Sweden) Information Centre on 
UFOs; Charles Gourain; Antonio Giudici; Jane Thomas Guma; Bill 
Gunston; Dr James Harder; Carol Honey; William E. Jones; Peter 
Jordan; Tony Kimery; Kevin McNeil; Carlos Manuel Mercado; 
Lawrence Moore and Central Independent Television; James W. 
Moseley; the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA); 
Hector Antonio Picco and Cranica (Buenos Aires); Norddeutscher 
Rundfunk (NDR ); Lieutenant Commander Rolan D. Powell, US Navy 
(Retired); the Public Record Office; Madeleine Rodeffer; Pedro 
Romaniuk; Herbert Schirmer; Dr Berthold E. Schwarz; Dr Irena Scott; 
William T. Sherwood; Warren Smith; Dr Leo Sprinkle; Lieutenant 
General Thomas P. Stafford, US Air Force (Retired); Ray Stanford; Hal 
Starr; Bill Steele; General Boris Surikov, Soviet Air Force (Retired); 
Neil Thomas and the Staffordshire Newsletter, Donald R. Todd; Marc 
Tolosano; the United States Departments of the Air Force, Army and 
Navy; Dr Jacques Vallee; Walter N. Webb; Don Worley; the Wroclaw 
(Poland) Club for UFO Popularization and Exploration. 

I am especially indebted to: Warren Aston, for his research material 
relating to the case of Udo Wartena; Jeannie Belleau, for terrific trans¬ 
portation around New Mexico in 1997; Mark Ian Birdsall, for research 



Acknowledgements 


material from his forthcoming book Flying Saucers of the Third Reich and 
for his report on the Jan Siedlecki case; Mark Booth, my editor at 
Century, for his unswerving loyalty; Lieutenant Colonel Philip Corso, 
US Army (Retired), William J. Birnes and Pocket Books (Simon & 
Schuster), for extracts from The Day After Roswell ; Gordon Creighton, 
to whom Alien Base is dedicated, for huge chunks of material from Flying 
Saucer Review, of which he is editor; Frederique, for advice and help 
relating to her mother Joelle’s contact story; Rachael Healey and Katie 
White, my publicists at Century, for first-rate promotion; Air Marshal 
Sir Peter Horsley and his publisher Leo Cooper, for lengthy extracts 
from Sir Peter’s autobiography, Sounds From Another Room; Desmond 
Leslie, for much material from Flying Saucers Have Landed (which he co¬ 
authored with George Adamski), a great deal of additional information, 
and for some unforgettable visits to Casde Leslie; Andrew Lownie, my 
agent, for his loyalty, support and sensible advice; Jorge Martin and his 
wife Marleen, for a great deal of material from their magazine Evidencia 
OVNI, for additional information, and for driving me around Puerto 
Rico to meet witnesses. Their courage and dedication, often in the face of 
adversity, are admirable; Howard Monger and his wife Connie, for much 
material from their books, in particular Howard’s From Outer Space to 
You; Joel Mesnard, editor of Lumieres Dans La Nuit, for articles and 
drawings; Carlos L. Moreno, for translations, and for acting as inter¬ 
preter and providing transportation in Puerto Rico; Ludwig F. Pallmann 
- wherever he may be - for the story of his remarkable encounters with 
extraterrestrials; Sue Phillpott, for superb proof-reading; Bob Pratt, for 
extracts from his book UFO Danger Zone; Walter Rizzi, for the report 
and sketches of his encounter; Liz Rowlinson, Mark Booth's assistant at 
Century, for her patience and professionalism; Jane Selley, for superb 
copy-editing; Captain Graham Sheppard, for his transcription of the 
voice tapes relating to the America West encounter over New Mexico, 
and for additional advice relating to matters aeronautical; Jean Sider, for 
the use of extracts from his book Ultra Top-Secret and for additional help 
and advice; Neville Spearman, publisher of Flying Saucers Have Landed 
(Leslie and Adamski) and Inside the Space Ships (Adamski), for lengthy 
extracts from these books; Lieutenant Colonel Wendelle C. Stevens, US 
Air Force (Retired), for accounts from several of his books; Mrs Leonard 
Stringfield, for reports from her late husband’s books; Sir Mark 
Thomson, for his contribution and support, including the funding of a 
reconnaissance flight to Dulce, New Mexico; Dorothee Walter, for help 
with word-processing and translations; Carroll and Rosemary Watts - 
wherever they may be - for their report and photographs of Carroll’s 



Acknowledgements 


encounters; Haroldo Westendorff, Michael Wysmierski of The Brazilian 
UFO Report and the Grupo de Pesquisas Cientifico-Ufologicas (GPCU, 
Pelotas, Brazil), for material relating to the Lagoa de los Patos incident. 

Finally, I am indebted to those who have contributed or helped but are 
not named. 



Introduction 


It seems that scarcely a week goes by without some sensationalist story in 
the media about little bug-eyed aliens abducting a hapless victim and per¬ 
forming all manner of sinister experiments upon his or her person* A 
proliferation of films, television documentaries, books and magazines on 
the subject has contributed not only to growing interest in the UFO 
phenomenon but also to an acceleration of wild claims. 

Following publication of best-selling books on alien abduction, such as 
those by Budd Hopkins, Whitley Strieber, Dr David Jacobs and Dr John 
Mack, many people began claiming that they, too, had been abducted by 
small, grey, bug-eyed creatures (the so-called ‘Greys’), sometimes even 
taken from their beds, beamed aboard spaceships and subjected to 
physical procedures such as the extraction of ova, for the aliens’ declared 
purpose of creating a hybrid race. 

Having met many abductees, I have no doubt that some of them have 
interacted with alien life-forms; however, while it is feasible that an 
explanation for the proliferation of such claims might be simply that 
witnesses feel more inclined to come forward due to increased public 
awareness, a corollary is that many such stories may be contaminated. Is 
it coincidental that in the United Kingdom, for example, abduction 
reports increased with the landing of The X Files television series on 
British shores? 

Another problem with the abduction phenomenon is the alarming 
increase in the number of ‘backstreet abductionists’; unqualified 
hypnotherapists with little or no knowledge of general medicine and 
psychiatry, who conduct hypnotic regression sessions with the thousands 
of people now claiming to have been abducted. Most leading invest¬ 
igators urge caution in this undefined area. ‘I feel that the present fad of 
hypnotizing “abductees”, which is being engaged in by untrained invest¬ 
igators, will inevitably lead to suffering,’ wrote Strieber. ‘These 
investigators usually make the devastating error of assuming that they 
understand this immense mystery.’ 1 In 1991, Strieber went further: ‘The 
“abduction reports” that they generate are not real,’ he wrote. ‘They are 
artifacts of hypnosis and cultural conditioning.’ 2 

Stories of alien abduction have become fashionable. This has led, in 



Alien Base 


my opinion, to an unbalanced perspective. One of the principal reasons 
for writing this book is to redress the balance, by recounting many stories 
of the so-called ‘contactees’, some dating back as far as 1920; accounts 
now either forgotten, confined to early literature collections, privately 
published, or taken from my own hitherto unpublished files. 

It is now mandatory to scorn contactees, due in part to sometimes 
banal and evangelical messages imparted to them by the ‘space brothers’, 
and because the extraterrestrials they have encountered do not conform 
to preconceived notions of alien appearance, behaviour, or purported 
planetary origin. Budd Hopkins, whom I admire for his pioneering work 
and intelligent approach to the abduction phenomenon, encapsulates this 
attitude succinctly in his important book, Witnessed: 

In the 1950s and earlyl960s a number of so-called contactees claimed to have 
ridden in flying saucers to Venus or Mars or elsewhere in our solar system, 
and there to have received from beautiful Space Brothers and Sisters antiwar 
messages and warnings about the environment . . virtually all of their 
accounts were designed to make them seem special - honoured Earthlings, 
proud recipients of the Space Brothers’ flattering attentions and intergalactic 
wisdom. 3 

This overstates the case. First, claims of non-abducting contacts with 
extraterrestrials not only pre-date the 1950s but, though increasingly 
rare, have continued to the present time. Secondly, most of the lesser- 
known contactees did not seek attention in any way; rather, the contrary. 
Thirdly, with respect to ‘antiwar messages and warnings about the 
environment’, Hopkins overlooks the fact that this is precisely what some 
abductees report having heard. Equally banal messages have sometimes 
been imparted to the abductees. In these and other respects, therefore, 
differences as between abductees and contactees can be marginal and 
confusing. 

It is not enough arbitrarily to dismiss reports by contactees in terms of 
ego-gratification, hallucinations, an overly vivid imagination, and so 
forth. There are too many such accounts from too wide a variety of 
sources and countries, all of which contain scientifically interesting data 
elements in common. These beg for analysis, interpretation and 
explication. ‘The statements of those who purportedly have had actual 
contact with “space people” should not be dismissed offhand as mere 
romance,’ declared Rear Admiral Herbert Knowles, a graduate of the US 
Naval Academy, in 1957. ‘Perhaps there is some real information here. 
One cannot afford to be dogmatic in this matter if the truth is to be 
found.* 4 

As I have stated in my previous books, it is my opinion that a secondary 
reason behind the reluctance of governments to acknowledge the alien 



Introduction 


presence is fear of ridicule. No one likes to look silly, least of all political 
and military leaders. Those few who have admitted to such a presence - 
such as President Ronald Reagan, who hinted at it during an important 
speech before the United Nations General Assembly in 1987, 5 and Javier 
Perez de Cuellar, former Secretary-General of the United Nations, who 
reportedly was abducted together with his security guards and others in 
1989'’ - invariably are mocked by the media, thus effectively stifling 
serious discussion on these matters and discouraging others in high office 
from coming forward. In 1997, Air Marshal Sir Peter Horsley, former 
Deputy Commander-in-Chief of Strike Command, and for seven years 
in the personal service of Her Majesty the Queen and HRH Prince Philip 
as Equerry, revealed in his autobiography 7 that in 19S4 he had had a 
meeting with an apparently extraterrestrial being (see Chapter 10). The 
reaction was predictable. ‘Oh God,’ commented a former Ministry of 
Defence senior officer. ‘How unfortunate that the public will learn that 
the man who had his finger on the button at Strike Command was seeing 
little green men.’ 8 In a patronizing article in The Times, entitled ‘Air 
marshal’s flight of fancy’, Dr Thomas Stuttaford suggested that the air 
marshal was either deluded or had suffered an hallucination, 9 over¬ 
looking the fact that the meeting had been arranged via a British Army 
general and that a witness had been present throughout the two-hour 
discourse. 

My own investigations show that delusion (as well as deception) does 
indeed feature in a number of reports by both abductees and contactees. 
One example will suffice. In 1981, I interviewed a South African 
contactee, the late Elizabeth Klarer, a cultured, striking lady who claimed 
to have given birth to a child fathered by a spaceman. KJarer’s initial 
encounter with ‘Akon’, her lover from Venus, supposedly occurred in the 
1950s. In her fascinating 1980 book, however, Akon’s origin changed to 
‘Meton, one of the planets of Proxima Centauri’ 10 (4.26 light years from 
Earth). During my interview with Klarer in Johannesburg, she men¬ 
tioned casually that Akon still visited her from time to time. ‘Do you have 
any kind of evidence to show me?’ 1 asked. ‘Oh yes,’ she replied, ‘he 
brought me this beautiful plant!’ I took some photographs. On my return 
to London, I soon discovered that the plant was the very terrestrial 
maidenhair fern (of the genus Adiantum), and I duly informed Elizabeth. 
I never heard from her again. Perhaps, like other claimants, she did have 
a genuine experience of some sort but later began to fantasize and 
embellish it. I believe that a number of well-known abductees and 
contactees have inflated their claims, either to nourish their egos or retain 
a following, or both. These motives alone do not negate the validity of all 
their claims. 

Another reason for this book is to show that alien species are more 



Alien Base 


varied than we commonly suppose, and that the little grey men appeared 
on the scene relatively recently. From gorgeous girls, through to 
grotesque goblins - and yes, even little green men - most types of alien 
species that have been reported are represented in this book. 

Objections are frequently raised regarding the anthropomorphic 
nature of reported aliens. ‘One of the chief reasons I have never been able 
to take reports of alien contact seriously,’ wrote the great space pioneer 
and science-fiction writer, Arthur C. Clarke, in 1997, ‘is that no 
spaceship ever contains aliens - the occupants are always human! Oh, 
yes, they do show a few minor variations such as large eyes, or pointed 
ears . . . but otherwise they are based on the same general design as you 
and I. Genuine extraterrestrials would be really alien . . Aside from 
the fact that some alien creatures, such as the so-called ‘chupacabras’, 
look like nothing on Earth, we cannot disregard the testimony of 
thousands of men and women from all walks of life who, throughout the 
twentieth century at least, have testified that the aliens they have 
encountered are indeed generally humanoid, though sometimes with 
unusual differences. ‘You certainly make a good case,' Clarke wrote to 
me, in response to my critique of his article. But, he added: ‘My main 
argument against ETs is that none have yet called on me, which seems a 
deplorable oversight.” 2 

As to the similarities, one reason could be that Homo sapiens is related 
to an extraterrestrial species. The idea may seem far-fetched, yet the 
probability that our galaxy has been colonized by other, more advanced 
races, cannot be dismissed out of hand. 

Much of the material in this book will be new, even to seasoned 
investigators. Interspersed with the contact encounters are new or little- 
known reports of sightings by military and civilian pilots as well as 
sightings of unidentified submergible objects reported by naval 
observers. I have also included some cases involving alien vehicles 
apparently grounded for repairs, as well as alleged retrievals, by military 
forces, of alien vehicles and bodies, occurring well before the so-called 
Roswell Incident. With all these varied claims, proof remains elusive. I 
believe, nonetheless, that the evidence is mounting. 

In 1997, the United States Air Force issued its third ‘final’ explanation 
for the Roswell, New Mexico, incident of July 1947, when an alien 
spacecraft and its occupants were recovered by military forces. The 
bodies, stated the Air Force in its 230-page report (timed to coincide with 
the 50th anniversary of the Roswell Incident), were really dummies used 
in experiments in the 1950s to test the effects of high-altitude parachute 
drops on human bodies. 13 This ‘down-to-earth’ explanation totally fails 
to account for the fact that no such dummies were dropped until several 
years after the Roswell Incident; moreover, only a dummy could confuse 



Introduction 


dummies with alien bodies. US Air Force ‘special planners’ in the 
Pentagon seem to be expending an extraordinary ‘public perception 
management’ effort aimed at destroying the central icon of ufology, the 
Roswell Incident, with the goal that, if successful, the whole fabric of 
ufology will come apart. Similarly, in August 1997, the Central 
Intelligence Agency released an article on its role in the study of UFOs 
(1947-90) in which it is stated that many UFO sightings in the 1950s and 
1960s actually were of Lockheed U-2 and SR-71 spy planes. 14 The CIA’s 
‘explanation’ is so flawed that even hard-core UFO sceptics are sceptical. 
With such shifting explanations, it is little wonder the public is becoming 
even more aware that it is being misled. ‘The old cover-up stories just 
don’t wash any more,’ said John E. Pike, director of space policy at the 
Washington-based Federation of American Scientists. ‘The UFO 
community is definitely on to something.’ 15 

Perhaps those few in authority who are aware of the alien presence will 
be more forthcoming in the near future: indeed, there are encouraging 
developments. In June 1997, a remarkable book (the first of a promised 
scries) was published which, despite its hyperbole and factual errors, 
seems to lift the lid off much that has been concealed by certain elements 
of the US intelligence community since 1947. Lieutenant Colonel Philip 
J, Corso, US Army (Retired), who served on President Dwight 
Eisenhower’s National Security Council staff 1 *’ and the Army staff’s 
Research and Development Foreign Technology desk at the Pentagon, 
claims not only that he saw the alien bodies recovered from the Roswell 
crash, but also that, from 1961 to 1963, he was steward of an Army 
project that ‘seeded’ alien technology at American companies such as 
IBM, Hughes Aircraft, Bell Labs and Dow Corning - without their 
knowledge of where the technology originated. Corso alleges that the 
materials found aboard the Roswell craft were precursors for today’s 
integrated circuit chips, fibre optics, lasers and super-tenacity fibres. He 
also discloses the role that alien technology played in shaping geopolitical 
policy and events; how it allowed the United States to surpass the 
Russians in the space programme, led to the Strategic Defense Initiative 
(‘Star Wars’), and ultimately brought about the end of the Cold War. 
Corso confirms that certain intelligence analysts were aware at that time 
that Earth was being ‘probed’ by one or more alien cultures, and that they 
posed a serious threat. ‘Maybe, in the 1960s,’ he points out, ‘we didn’t 
have the technology we have now to intercept their ships, but by using 
new satellite surveillance techniques we believed we’d be able to pick up 
the signatures of an alien presence on the face of our planet. If we made 
it too difficult for them to set up shop with bases on Earth, military 
intelligence planners speculated, maybe they would simply go away .. ." 7 

They have not gone away. 



Alien Base 


Alien Base is dedicated to Gordon Creighton, the indefatigable, multi¬ 
lingual editor of Britain’s Flying Saucer Review,™ established in 1955, 
from which I have selected a lot of the material in this book. Creighton is 
one of the few remaining pioneers, having become interested in UFOs as 
far back as 1941, when he saw one while serving in the British Embassy 
at Chongqing, China. In the 1950s, as an intelligence officer at the 
Ministry of Defence in Whitehall, he became aware of top-secret 
investigations into the phenomenon conducted jointly by the Royal Air 
Force and the United States Air Force. 19 Many of those interested in this 
enduring enigma have benefited from his scholarship. 


NOTES 

1 Strieber, Whitley, Transformation; The Breakthrough, Century, London, 
1988, p. 254. 

2 Strieber, Whitley, The Communion Letter, summer 1991. 

3 Hopkins, Budd, Witnessed: The True Story of the Brooklyn Bridge UFO 
Abductions, Pocket Books, Simon & Schuster, New York, 1996, p. 398. Also 
published by Bloomsbury, London, 1997. 

4 UFO Investigator, National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena, 
Washington, DC, vol. 1, no. 1, July 1957. 

5 Good, Timothy, Beyond Top Secret; The Worldwitle UFO Security Threat, 
Sidgwick & Jackson, London, 1996, p. 539. 

6 Hopkins, op. cit. (Hopkins does not reveal the name, Perez de Cuellar, to 
whom he refers as ‘the third man’, in this book: privately, he has confirmed 
it, however.) 

7 Horsley, Sir Peter, Sounds From Another Room; Memories of Planes, Princes 
and the Paranormal, Leo Cooper, London, 1997. 

8 Barton, Fiona, ‘Close encounter in a Chelsea flat', the Mail on Sunday, 
London, 10 August 1997. 

9 Stuttaford, Dr Thomas, ‘Air marshal’s flight of fancy’, The Times, 14 August 
1997. 

10 Klarer, Elizabeth, Beyond the Light Barrier , Howard Timmins, Cape Town, 
1980. 

11 Clarke, Arthur C., ‘Why ET will never call home', The Times, London, 5 
August 1997. 

12 Letters to the author from Arthur C. Clarke, CBE, 29 August and 2 October 
1997. 

13 McAndrew, Capt. James, The Roswell Report; Case Closed, Superintendent 
of Documents, US Government Printing Office, Mail Stop SSOP, 
Washington, DC 20402-9328, June 1997. 

14 Haines, Gerald K., ‘CIA’s Role in the Study of UFOs, 1947—90’, Studies in 




Introduction 


Intelligence, Centra) Intelligence Agency, spring 1997. 

15 The New York Times, 3 August 1997, quoted by Nick Hopkins tn the Daily 
Mail, London, 5 August 1997. 

16 Interestingly, Corso also served from 1954—57 on the National Security 
Council's Operations Coordination Board, later known as the ‘Special 
Group’ or ‘54/12 Committee’. This was the group which, spanning several 
Presidential Administrations, approved and evaluated the most sensitive 
covert operations ever mounted by the United States. 

17 Corso, Col. Philip J., with Birnes, William J., The Day After Roswell, Pocket 
Books, New York and London, 1997, p. 129 

18 Flying Saucer Review, FSR Publications Ltd., PO Box 162, High Wycombe, 
Bucks. HP13 SDZ, England. 

19 Good, op. cit., p. 25. 



PART ONE 



Chapter 1 


Strategic Reconnaissance 


It was the morning of 5 April 1943. US Army Air Forces flying instructor 
Gerry Casey, together with a student, had taken off in a Vultee Valiant 
BT-13 trainer from the USAAF Ferry Command Base at Long Beach, 
California. After climbing through the cloud deck they cruised back and 
forth at 5,000 feet for 40 minutes on the southeast-northwest legs of the 
Long Beach low-frequency radio range. Above the clouds, visibility was 
unlimited. At 09.50, looking east towards Santiago Mountain, Casey 
thought he saw a flash of light. ‘Peering intently, I saw an aircraft in a 
moderate dive aimed at our BT-13 with a perfect interception angle [and] 
I prepared to take evasive action if needed.’ 

The craft coming at us appeared to be painted an international orange and 
was now about to pass on our left side. Unable to determine the craft’s make 
or model, I knew it was unlike any airplane I'd ever seen. As 1 studied it, I was 
shocked to see it make a decidedly wobbly turn that quickly aligned it off our 
left wing in instant and perfect formation. 

Ordering his student to come out from under the hood used for 
practising ‘blind’ flying (preventing the student from seeing anything 
except his instruments), Casey exclaimed that he thought Lockheed’s 
new secret plane, rumoured to be propellerless (the Lockheed P-80 
Shooting Star jet, which first flew in January the following year), was 
flying in formation with them. Instinctively, Casey reached for his 
camera, but realizing he could get into serious trouble if he photographed 
a secret plane, he put it away. The unknown aircraft defied rational 
explanation: 

Td noticed that its turn appeared totally independent of air-reaction but that 
when it was off our wing, the adjustment to our altitude and course was 
perfect and instantaneous. Its position with us was held as if an iron bar had 
been welded between the two ... its color was a radiant orange, which 
appeared to shimmer in the bright sunlight. As we watched, its aft end made 
a slight adjustment and it shot away from our position, disappearing in a 
climbing turn toward the ocean. Later, both of us agreed that it was gone 
from sight in two seconds. 



Alien Base 


An Exotic Aircraft 

After landing, Casey and his student discussed the ‘exotic aircraft’. Both 
agreed that it was orange in colour, changing to white when it accelerated. 
No openings or signs of a cockpit could be detected, nor could the means 
of propulsion be determined. Size was difficult to estimate, but both 
pilots thought that if the object had been 10 feet in diameter, it would 
have been 35 to 50 feet off their wingtip; if 50 to 75 feet in diameter, it 
would have been 100 or more feet away. Casey felt certain the object was 
elliptical, while the student was certain it was circular. Both agreed it had 
a rounded hump on the top and a smaller hump on the bottom. Casey 
later computed its departure speed to be over 7,000 m.p.h. - a 
computation with which the student agreed. 

‘Trying to recapture the details of an event that had consumed less 
than 90 seconds kept my thoughts occupied,’ said Casey. ‘1 drew a pencil 
sketch of the craft’s profile to confirm my opinion that it had been 
designed and built of parabolic curves rather than compass-drawn arcs. I 
could not reconcile its wobbling flight nor its sudden and unbelievable 
acceleration.’ 

Conclusions 

Following the war, Gerry Casey became an inspector for the Civil 
Aeronautics Administration (CAA - later the Federal Aviation Admin¬ 
istration) at the Boeing Airplane Company in Seattle. He remained 
convinced that what he and his student had seen was a flying machine 
‘light years’ in advance of anything on Earth. For fear of ridicule he dared 
not discuss the incident with his colleagues. Then, in 1948, a memo came 
through the CAA concerning the United States Air Force’s Project Sign 
(later Project Grudge, still later Blue Book, USAF’s official UFO 
investigations), urging that any personnel who had a UFO experience 
should report it. ‘They added that the person and the date would be 
investigated,’ said Casey. ‘I did as suggested but never received any 
acknowledgement or contact.’ An enduring curiosity led him to make his 
own investigations and to form his own conclusions: 

Since that early time in UFO history, sightings throughout the world have 
been reported by too many credible witnesses to ignore . . . Airline and 
military pilots the world over have had similar brief encounters with exotic 
machines such as seen by my student and me in 1943 . . . For anyone to 
dismiss all sightings by professional airmen, scientists, and radar and air 
traffic personnel only displays the critic’s closed mind . . . For any airman 
who has had a similar experience to mine, the conscious event cannot be 
erased. Nor can it be rationalized through comparisons with any known thing 
on Earth... Credible scientists have noted that many sightings have occurred 
in the vicinity of our atomic plants or military installations. Other viewings 



Strategic Reconnaissance 


have indicated that close approaches were made in isolated areas. 

Casey explained that ‘the sorry state of mankind versus his environ¬ 
ment and his apparent headlong flight into self-destruction’ finally 
caused him to bare his soul by coming forward with this important 
report. ‘If it is true that we creatures are moving headlong into a self¬ 
destructive mode,’ he concluded, ‘possibly the failure of our planet could 
upset the balance of others in our, or a nearby, planetary system. If this 
is true, then any other superior race of creatures would be seriously 
concerned.’ 1 

ENCOUNTER OVER UKRAINE 

On an unspecified date in 1944, during a mission to Romania to bomb oil 
refineries used by the Germans, Boris Surikov and his commander, 
Major Bajenov, were flying at an altitude of five kilometres over 
southwest Ukraine when they had an encounter with a highly unusual 
aircraft. ‘In front of the plane, a large elliptical-shaped object flew 
towards us,’ Surikov told British television producers Lawrence Moore 
and Livia Russell in Moscow in 1994: 

We’d read in the newspapers about new German weapons, but we’d seen 
nothing like this. What happened was that our heavy plane [unspecified], of 
14.5 tonnes, started shaking, the oil pressure rose, and when I leaned towards 
the window I felt a strong electrostatic charge. I was worried that the plane 
would burst into flames. It passed us and disappeared, but our plane was still 
affected: I looked at the wings, and they were covered in electrical discharges. 

Major Bajenov, equally concerned that the plane was about to catch 
fire, ordered the crew to jettison the bomb load. ‘The whole plane was 
fluorescent and the wings were glowing like a rainbow,’ said Surikov. ‘If 
it had been up to me, I would have carried on and tried to fulfil the 
mission, and if the plane would have caught fire I would have jumped 
with a parachute.’ The commander, having more experience, believed 
there was real danger of the plane catching fire and the bombs exploding, 
so gave orders to jettison the two-tonne bomb load in southwest Ukraine 
instead of in Romania. 

Mentioning nothing about the incident in their report on the mission, 
Bajenov and Surikov stated merely that they had successfully bombed 
Romanian oil refineries, if we had said we had not carried out our 
mission,’ Surikov explained, ‘we could have been taken to court as 
cowards.’ 

Surikov described the unknown object as similar in some respects to 
the Russian and American space shuttles, it lit up the air around it It 
looked like a localized sunset, but in the centre was a strange-looking 
flying object. It didn’t look at all like the burst of an anti-aircraft shell, 



Alien Base 


which is about 10 metres in diameter. It was larger and longer than our 
Buran space shuttle -1 think about twice as long.’ 

Years later, Surikov asked scientists for their opinion as to what he had 
seen. ‘I was told that one could not rule out the possibility that the 
electrification of the plane was due to the dose proximity of a UFO with 
a new type of propulsion system which ionized the atmosphere.' 

Surikov later became a specialist in rockets and nuclear weapons. For 
a long time he worked at Soviet Army headquarters as its chief authority 
on weapons of mass destruction. ‘But I am proud,’ he points out, ‘to be 
one of those who developed a treaty on the restriction of anti-missile 
defence systems. For a long time I worked as an expert in Geneva, where 
we were trying to promote the disbanding of certain types of weapons of 
mass destruction - nuclear, radiological, and so on.’ 

Now retired from the Soviet Armed Forces with the rank of general- 
major, Surikov specializes in environment problems. He has also 
pondered the significance of the UFO phenomenon: 

We cannot rule out the possibility that creatures who may well be superior to 
us are interested in what is happening to our Earth.. - Scientists with whom 
I have discussed these matters think that in those civilizations new types of 
energy have been discovered which allow them to fly very far at great speed, 
so it is very important for us to study them in order to make use of these 
discoveries and to improve life on Earth. 2 

AN AERIAL MERRY-GO-ROUND 

During the German occupation of France, Daniel Leger, 19 years old at 
the time, lived in a little village in the department of Sarthe, 15 kilometres 
to the south of Le Mans, working at a butcher’s shop. On a hot afternoon 
in the summer of 1941, the exact date not recalled, Leger was in the street 
when he noticed a kind of ‘merry-go-round’ in the sky, beneath cirrus 
clouds and above the airfield occupied 1 by the Germans pt Raineries. 
About a dozen German aircraft were circling around a large, aluminium- 
coloured ‘cloud’, shaped like the handle of a frying pan and surrounded 
by puffs of cloud. It was moving slowly and horizontally, though 
somewhat tilted. Above all this hovered another, larger and luminous 
‘cloud’, moving at the same speed. 

Deciding to take a closer look at this spectacle, Leger jumped on his 
bike and raced towards the scene. A mile further on, together with many 
other curious people, he was stopped by a wall of soldiers. The German 
aircraft continued circling the ‘cloud’ and manoeuvred as if they were 
attacking, but without opening fire. When the aircraft came close to the 
cloud they appeared to fall down like leaves, only to rise again seconds 
later, as if their engines had been stopped momentarily. The witness 
observed this merry-go-round for an hour as it moved from west to east, 



Strategic Reconnaissance 


then he returned home. 

After the war, Leger visited the municipal library in Le Mans to search 
for press commentary on this extraordinary event: he found none. 
Perhaps Luftwaffe records pertaining to this incident, censored at the 
time, may one day be located, as well as testimony from other witnesses. 
Leger had insisted on anonymity, so in his book, Ultra Top-Secret, 
researcher and author Jean Sider used the pseudonym ‘S. Theau’. 3 
Following the death of the witness in 1993 or 1994, Sider kindly provided 
me with the source’s real name, which appears here for the first time. 
Important though this case is, it pales into relative insignificance when 
compared to an extraordinary encounter which befell Leger in 1943, to 
be described further on. 

Regarding the aircraft losing altitude when they approached the 
‘cloud’, it is interesting to note that, according to information disclosed 
to the well-known author, Jacques Vallce, by a former engineer with US 
intelligence in Germany, Americans were already aware by 1943 that 
UFOs (or ‘foo-fighters’, as they were then dubbed by USAAF air crews) 4 
could interfere at a distance with internal combustion engines. 
Investigators at the time suspected that electrostatic effects were the 
cause, A secret investigation into the phenomenon, including an 
investigation into German research on jet aircraft, was conducted in 1943 
by the then US National Bureau of Standards (now the National Institute 
of Standards and Technology), under the direction of Professor 
Dryden. 5 A distinguished aerodynamicist, Dr Hugh L. Dryden 
developed America’s first successful radar-guided missile. He was chief 
of the aerodynamics section of the National Bureau of Standards, later 
chief of the National Advisory Committee for Aeronautics, then the first 
deputy administrator of NASA. 

In 1944, American planes returning to England from bombing 
missions over the Continent were plagued repeatedly by engine cut-outs. 
The engines would suddenly become rough, cutting in and out,’ a 
former US intelligence officer explained to author Ralph Blum. ‘There 
was considerable discussion among intelligence people as to what should 
be done. The general feeling - that some new German device was causing 
the electrical problems - presented one major difficulty: the amount of 
electricity required to short out a B-29 engine was calculated as greater 
than all the known electrical energy output of Europe!’ 6 

FOO-FIGHTERS OVER ENGLAND 

In June 1944 the Germans began launching against London the first of 
their two Vergeltungswaffen (retaliation weapons) - the V-l. Dubbed 
‘doodle-bugs’ or ‘buzz bombs’ by the British, the V-Is, powered by a 
pulse-jet, were launched from ramps in northwestern France and 



16 


Alien Base 


directed to their target by a pre-set guidance system. Over 8,000 V-ls 
were launched against London alone, while thousands of others were 
launched against Allied-held targets on the Continent. Owing to their 
unreliability and relatively low speed (350 m.p.h.), about a quarter of 
them failed and about half were destroyed by countermeasures: aircraft 
interception, anti-aircraft fire and barrage balloons. Only a quarter 
reached their target areas and even then, some failed to explode. 7 

In the summer of 1944, Bill Steele, who frequently observed V-ls 
being attacked by Royal Air Force fighters, was operating an excavator at 
Fairlight Quarry near Hastings, Sussex. On clear days, he could see the 
aircraft patrolling, the V-ls approaching and the Observer Corps firing 
rocket signals to alert pilots. On two occasions, he told me, he noticed 
something very unusual: 

It was while watching one of these that I saw these curious discs. The impres¬ 
sion was of hub-caps, though a little larger, circling the V-l and running 
alongside with ease. I put them down to something the RAF were using. 
They had no effect whatsoever upon the V-ls. The odd thing was the curi¬ 
ous melodious whistle-like noise that I heard . . . 8 

HUMANOIDS IN FRANCE 

It was not just ‘foo-fighters’ that were observed during the Second World 
War. In the summer of 1944 a French witness claims to have observed an 
unknown flying machine together with its unusual occupants. Although 
only 13 years old at the time, Madeleine Arnoux retained a vivid recol¬ 
lection of the incident, which occurred while she was picking berries at a 
farm near the village of Le Verger, in the department of Saone et Loire. 

‘I was walking, slowly, looking for berries as I went,’ she recalled. ‘Up 
there ahead, something was standing beside the trees, and there were 
some beings quite near it. Looking back on it now, I think the machine 
must have been of about the size of one of our small cars today [and] it 
was of a dull metallic grey colour.’ 

The beings that were beside it must have been less than one metre in height, 
and were dressed in a sort of brown-coloured overalls. They made no gesture 
in my direction, and I, for my part, was rooted to the spot... I remember the 
oppressive atmosphere and the thundery state of the weather, and I remember 
how I had the feeling that I was unable to move. Then suddenly I was able to 
do so. I wanted to get my bike, which was lying a few metres from me. It took 
just the time needed for me to bend down as 1 got it, and then, when 1 looked 
up again towards the strange apparition, there was nothing there... All there 
was to be seen, at the spot where it had been, was a violent wind blowing the 
trees about. I didn’t think of looking up in the air, where, if I had done, I 
should no doubt have still been able to see the machine as it was flying away. 



Strategic Reconnaissance 


Terrified, the witness made off at full speed to the farm-house, 
where she mentioned nothing about her experience. Nor did she tell 
anyone when she arrived home, fearing to be branded a hoaxer. For a 
very long time, Madeleine Arnoux thought about her weird encounter, 
then forgot about it. It was only when people began to talk about 
soucoupes volantes (flying saucers) in the 1950s that she began to put two 
and two together. 

After all these years, the picture is still very clear in my memory and I know 
perfectly well that I wasn't dreaming and that what I saw that day in the 
woods wasn’t anything that is ‘known’... It was 1944, and the Maquis people 
of the [French] Resistance were quite plentiful in the area, but it couldn’t 
have been any of them. Nor could it have been German soldiers, and had it 
been either Maquis or Germans, unquestionably they would have challenged 
me. So one can only think that I must have been a witness of one of the earliest 
UFOvisits. 9 

This fascinating report was sent to the editor of the magazine Lumieres 
Dans La Nuit in 1972. It comes across as an account by a sincere, puzzled 
witness. Of particular significance is Madeleine Amoux’s reference to 
feeling paralysed, a feature increasingly evident in close encounters in the 
years following the Second World War. The ‘violent wind blowing the 
trees about’ during take-off is also reported in many other such cases. 

RETRIEVALS OF CRAFT AND BODIES 
While it is widely believed that the first recovery by US military forces of 
a crashed UFO took place in New Mexico in July 1947 (the so-called 
Roswell Incident), 10 there are intriguing stories of UFO recovery opera¬ 
tions some years earlier. 

Missouri, USA 

Raymond Fowler, a UFO researcher who once served in the United 
States Air Force (USAF) Security Service, learned of the recovery of a 
crashed UFO near Cape Girardeau, Missouri, in the spring of 1941. 
Fowler’s source was Charlotte Mann, granddaughter of a witness, 
Reverend William Huffman, a Baptist. In a letter to the late Leonard 
Stringfield, a former USAF intelligence officer and the leading special¬ 
ist in what he called ‘UFO crash/retrievals’, Mann shared her knowledge 
of the case: 

About 9 to 9;30 one evening, granddad got a telephone call from the police 
department, saying they had received reports that a plane had crashed out¬ 
side of town and would he go in case someone needed him ... A car was sent 
to get him, but grandmother said it wasn’t a police car. After grandfather 
returned that night, he explained what he had seen to my grandmother, my 



Alien Base 


father, Guy, and Uncle Wayne, but they were never to speak of it again as he 
had given his word. Grandmother said he never did talk about it after that. 

He said they drove out of town 13-15 miles or so, then parked the cars on 
the side of the road and had to walk a quarter of a mile or so into a field where 
he could see fire burning. Grandfather said it wasn’t an airplane or like any 
craft he’d ever seen. It was broken and scattered all around, but one large 
piece was still together and it appeared to have a rounded shape with no edges 
or seams. It had a very shiny metallic finish. You could see inside one section 
and see what looked like a metal chair with a panel with many dials and gauges 
- none familiar-looking to him. 

He said when he got there, men were already sifting through things. There 
were some police officers, plain-clothes people and military men. There were 
three bodies, not human, that had been taken from the wreckage and laid on 
the ground. Grandfather said prayers over them so he got a close look but 
didn't touch them. He didn't know what had killed them because they didn’t 
appear to have any injuries and they weren’t burnt. It was hard for him to tell 
if they had on suits or if it was their skin but they were covered head to foot 
in what looked like wrinkled aluminum foil .. . 

There were several people with cameras taking pictures of everything. 
Two of the plain-clothes men picked up one of the little men, held it under 
its arms. A picture was taken. That was the picture I later saw. Then, one of 
the military officers talked to granddad and told him he was not to talk about 
or repeat anything that had taken place for security reasons and so as not to 
alarm the people. Granddad returned home, told his family. That was it. 
About two weeks after it happened, he came home with a picture of the two 
men holding the little man . . . 

My recollection from what I saw in the picture was a small man about 4 
feet tall with a large head and long arms. He was thin and no bone structure 
was apparent; kind of soft-looking. He had no hair on his head or body, with 
large, oval, slightly slanted eyes but not like an oriental from left to right, 
more up and down. He had no ears at all and no nose like ours. There 
appeared to be only a couple of small holes where his nose should have been. 
His mouth was as if you had just cut a small straight line where it should have 
been. His skin or suit looked like crinkled-up tin foil and it covered all of him 
... I believe he had three fingers, all quite long, but I can’t be sure on this. 

One of the first checks Stringfield made was to establish whether the 
photograph seen by Charlotte Mann was identical to a bogus photograph 
released as an April Fool’s Day joke in Germany in 1950, showing some 
men in hats and coats holding a little silver man. It was in no way similar, 
as Mann confirmed. (The photo was lent by her grandfather to a friend, 
who never returned it.) 

If this event really occurred, one is left to wonder why no more wit¬ 
nesses have come forward. Were they all intimidated? Whatever the 
case, Stringfield was impressed. ‘After discussing the incident several 
times with Charlotte by phone, I felt increasingly comfortable with her 




Strategic Reconnaissance 19 

manner of response to my questions,’ he concluded. 'To me, she 
sounded sincere.’ 11 

Sonora, Mexico 

Dr James Harder, a professor of civil engineering and a UFO investig¬ 
ator, believes that a crashed spacecraft may have been recovered from the 
Sonoran desert in Mexico (south of Arizona) late in 1941. Reportedly, 
recovery was effected by a team from the US Office ofNaval Intelligence 
(ONI), One member of the team, unable to contain the importance of 
what had been discovered, brought home to share with his immediate 
family some photographs supposedly showing an unusual craft and small 
bodies. 12 

Dr Harder told me that the location of the incident was determined by 
one of his co-investigators, the late Jim Lorenzen, co-founder of the 
Aerial Phenomena Research Organization (APRO), to which Harder was 
a consultant. Together with another APRO consultant, Dr Leo Sprinkle, 
Harder interviewed a relative of the witness. He informed me that 
although the relative was only 10 years old or so at the time of the alleged 
incident, she seemed reliable and convincing. ‘She had been sitting on 
the information for a long time, and had decided that APRO was the 
organization to talk to,’ Harder explained. He continued: 

She was looking from a stair landing when she observed her uncle showing 
her family a sheaf of 8 x 10 prints of a UFO crashed horizontal on level 
ground. In one of the pictures, he himself was holding up a small spindly 
dead body, about 3.5 feet tall - the picture had been taken by a friend. A small 
pile of other small bodies was over to one side. The UFO took up nearly the 
entire frame. By various deductions from the witness’s age, etc., we estimated 
the time of her seeing the prints was about Halloween, 1941... Jim Lorenzen 
did send, against my advice, some local investigator around to question the 
retired officer [name supplied], who naturally clammed up, so at least he 
knows we know, if he is still alive. 13 

‘North of Georgia’, USA 

According to another of Leonard Stringfield’s sources, a crash of an 
unknown craft took place in a state ‘north of Georgia’ during the summer 
of 1942. The source, given the pseudonym Mary Nunn, served in a key 
civilian capacity in one of the two armed forces at the time of the incident. 

Nunn claimed that a spacecraft had crashed at an Army base, causing 
damage to a building and minor ruptures to the side of the craft. 
Described as generally round in shape, the craft was 15 feet wide and 10 
feet high, divided into three main sections: a control room, a compart¬ 
ment with four seats and a bottom bay equipped with a trap-door exit. In 
the control section was one large window and a number of smaller win- 



20 


Alien Base 


dows around the sides. The craft was silver in colour with markings on 
the inside as well as the outside. There also were crew members, 
Stringfield was told: 

The four crew members, taken alive, died about two weeks later of apparent 
starvation. Described as five feet tall, weighing about 90 to 100 pounds, the 
skin . . . was a milky white, smooth like a baby’s, and without hair. Facial 
features were generalized; the eyes large and black like bug eyes, ears were 
small, lips thin slits. The fingers, numbering five, were long, bony; the feet 
flat, about size 6 with half-inch bony toes. The female had small breasts and, 
according to the source, the race could reproduce but there was no hint as to 
their genitalia . .. They had teeth, very white, wide and short. I asked about 
nourishment, how it was digested and eliminated. No answers .. . 

Communications were telepathic but when 1 asked about other details, 
anatomical, organic or emotional or about their craft, propulsion and all the 
other usual questions, came silence; that was it.. , 14 

ENCOUNTER WITH A GROUNDED CRAFT AND 
AVIATRIX 

In 1943 Daniel Leger (whose 1941 observation of German aircraft in pur¬ 
suit of unknown objects is described earlier) was conscripted by the 
Germans for Service du Travail Obligatoire (compulsory working service) 
at a labour camp in Gdynia (renamed Gotcnhafen by the Germans), 
north of Gdansk, on the Baltic coast of Poland. Leger had obtained per¬ 
mission from the head of camp to visit Exelgroud, near Gdynia. Because 
transportation was not available, he set out on the sunny afternoon of 18 
July on foot, by way of a short cut over the sand dunes running along the 
beach. 

Reaching the top of a dune, Leger observed a peculiar metallic object, 
of a greyish aluminium hue, embedded in the sand. Approaching the 
device, he saw a human figure crouched on the ground, attempting man¬ 
ually to remove the sand that covered the lower part of the object. 
Although only the back of the figure was visible, Leger noted that it was 
a woman, with long blond hair, slim waist and broad hips. He assumed 
that she was a German Air Force pilot, because at that time there were a 
number of female Luftwaffe pilots in Exelgroud, as well as female tech¬ 
nicians who loaded and transported torpedoes at the local German naval 
base. Leger was reluctant to make his presence known, but the woman 
seemed to have been aware of him. She turned around and stood up, 
revealing her height to be about 1.75 metres - above average for her sex. 

The aviatrix wore a tight-fitting one-piece suit of dark-brown cloth, 
without pockets or fasteners, emphasizing her feminine form. The wit¬ 
ness also observed a pair of pads on each calf, the upper part of which 
appeared like boots, of the same colour, forming an integral part of the 



Strategic Reconnaissance 


suit. A four-inch-wide belt encircled her waist, the same colour as the 
suit, with the exception of a square silvery buckle. Her features were 
regular, with white skin, devoid of any kind of cosmetics, but with 
slightly slanted, Asian-like eyes. Her hair, parted equally, fell freely 
down her back. The only other visible part of her body was her long, slim 
hands, with short-cut nails, ‘like a pianist’, lacking any nail varnish. 

The craft, embedded in the sand, looked like a ‘colonial hat’. Later, as 
it took off, Leger could see that it was constructed like two plates joined 
together, separated by a middle section consisting of two rings with a 
black line between them. The craft was estimated to be about six metres 
in diameter and two metres in height. Several square portholes with 
rounded edges were spaced on the upper section, the exact number being 
indeterminable. No insignia, seams, weldings or connections were 
apparent on the upper part, which seemed to be made in one piece. 

The aviatrix began talking to Leger in a language he could not inter¬ 
pret. Although it sounded quite guttural, it corresponded with neither 
German nor Polish. Because the most common sounds were vowels and 
diphthongs, he assumed it was not Russian. (Years after the war, Leger 
met Tahitians, whose native tongue sounded similar, though by no 
means identical, to that of the aviatrix.) In any event, Leger had the 
impression that she understood his French (this was just an impression, 
not a certainty). Gesturing animatedly with her hands while talking, she 
gave him to understand from this that she wanted him to continue the 
work she had left off, removing sand from the craft. Leger, being accus¬ 
tomed to obeying orders from the Germans, went about this task, and 
after some 10 minutes succeeded in freeing the ‘new fighter plane’ from 
the sand. 

The woman appeared to be happy about this and, smiling contentedly, 
continued talking with Leger. Suddenly realizing with some surprise that 
he did not understand a word, she finally pointed to the sky, tapped her 
chest with the palm of her hand two or three times, and did the same to 
him. She then placed her hand on her buckle, whereupon a rectangular 
opening immediately became visible on the lower part of the craft’s hull. 
First, a panel appeared on the hitherto seamless hull, then the panel was 
withdrawn several centimetres into the object and slid aside. The woman 
entered her craft after indicating to Leger that he should move away. The 
panel closed, leaving the hull looking as if the door did not exist. 

Through one of the portholes, Leger observed that the interior was 
devoid of instruments. He saw the aviatrix sprawling ‘on all fours’ - or 
rather, in a stretched position - in the middle of the floor, as if she was 
driving a motorbike in a competition. (Investigator Jean Sider remarks 
that although this seemingly ludicrous detail tends to minimize credibil¬ 
ity in the report, it was precisely this detail that led him to believe in the 



22 


Alien Base 


reality of the incident, based on comparison with a little-known 1954 case 
- see p. 170.) A slight rumbling sound could be heard and two rings on 
the craft began to rotate at an ever-increasing speed; the lower one clock¬ 
wise and the upper one counterclockwise. The dark stripe separating the 
rings became luminous and began to vibrate, at which point the craft rose 
from the ground, slowly at first, then suddenly accelerated and dis¬ 
appeared in a northerly direction, at a speed far in excess of any German 
aircraft with which the witness was familiar. 

Although Leger had touched the hull of the craft a few times while 
removing the sand, he did not notice any untoward physiological effects, 
during neither the hours nor the days following his adventure. Con¬ 
vinced that he had just witnessed the landing of an experimental aircraft, 
he quietly continued on his walk to ExelgTOud, deciding not to discuss 
the experience with others. 

Later Developments 

After the Liberation, Leger got a job at an American Army Air Forces 
unit, where some USAAF gunners told him that during several missions 
they were accompanied by luminous disc-shaped objects - nicknamed 
‘foo-fighters’ - which they assumed were German or Russian in origin. 
This conversation later inspired Leger to discuss the 1943 report with his 
workshop leader, one Sergeant Chappedelaine. The latter informed the 
colonel commanding the unit, who asked Leger to relate the incident to 
him in person. 

At the end of 1945 Leger began to work with the Renault company in 
Le Mans, a job he held until his retirement in March 1982. After the war, 
he followed closely developments in aeronautics, hoping to find informa¬ 
tion about the unusual aircraft he had witnessed at Gdynia. He studied 
everything he could about the Peenemiinde experimental centre on the 
Baltic coast, 130 miles to the west of Gdynia, where the Germans devel¬ 
oped the V-l flying bomb, the V-2 rocket and other weapons under the 
direction of Dr Wernher von Braun. Of particular interest to him was 
Hanna Reitsch, the legendary German female test-pilot who had flown 
aircraft such as the V-le (a piloted version of the V-l flying bomb, 
developed to test control problems with the V-l) and the Messerschmitt 
Me-163 rocket-powered fighter. Facts Leger gathered about research by 
German aeronautical experts supported a growing conviction: he had 
seen a unique fighter aircraft, tested not by Hanna Reitsch, but by a col¬ 
league of hers. (Reitsch’s features, which he had seen in various maga¬ 
zines, did not match those of‘his’ aviatrix.) 

Because of the V-7 project - allegedly involving several convention¬ 
ally propelled German aircraft or helicopters, some with lenticular¬ 
shaped wings, which had been developed towards the end of the war - 



Strategic Reconnaissance 


23 


rumours circulated in the sensationalist press that Nazis exiled in South 
America after the war had developed these ‘flying saucers’, with which 
they were planning to avenge the Nazi defeat. Such rumours further 
confused Leger, who remained uncertain how to explain his own 
astonishing encounter.' 3 

Interestingly, there is circumstantial evidence that at least one of the 
V-7 project aircraft was prototyped. According to the researcher and 
author Mark Ian Birdsall, several projects involving a circular-wing air¬ 
craft were conceived during the war, the most elaborate of which was 
constructed by Dr Richard Miethe at facilities in Breslau (Wroclaw), 
Poland, and in Prague. A small prototype was rumoured to have flown 
over the Baltic Sea in January 1943, and two full-scale aircraft with a 
diameter of 135 feet were eventually built. Also, reports Birdsall, another 
V-7 project was a ‘spinning saucer’, based on helicopter principles, about 
35 feet in diameter, designed by Rudolf Schriever, a small prototype of 
which was allegedly first flown in 1943. 16 Could either of these small pro¬ 
totype aircraft have been the one seen by Leger in July 1943? It is 
unlikely. Apart from being of differing designs, small prototypes would 
have been unmanned. This is not to rule out the possibility that the 
Germans actually produced a number of circular flying machines at this 
time. The question remains: Did they actually fly? Though the majority 
of aviation experts are completely sceptical, it is difficult to disregard 
altogether the testimony of Professor Hermann Oberth, one of the great 
pioneers in astronautics and the teacher of Wcrnher von Braun, who 
claimed, rather extravagantly, that the V-7 and various modifications 
were responsible for many UFO reports during the closing stages of the 

At the end of the war we developed, first in Prague, then in Vienna, the V-7 
helicopter - this could easily have been mistaken for a flying saucer. Instead 
of having rotor blades like an ordinary helicopter, the V-7 had rotating tubes 
which released an ‘exhaust’ of flame. As the tubes rotated, the helicopter 
appeared to have a circle of flame round it, and at a distance it looked like a 
shining disc. When it hovered, the flame was dark-red and dim. At higher 
speeds the disc appeared lighter and the flame looked yellowish, then white. 
At its highest speed ... the V-7 tipped over and flew on its side. A significant 
feature is that it was extremely noisy in flight, and produced a thick trail in 
the stratosphere. 

Dr Oberth (who was firmly convinced that unexplained UFOs were 
extraterrestrial in origin) added that: ‘The V-7 certainly does not explain 
UFO reports before the end of the war.’ 17 Certainly too, from informa¬ 
tion provided by Oberth, the V-7 helicopter was nothing like the 
grounded disc reported by Leger, and a great deal noisier. Furthermore, 



despite Oberth’s claim, I doubt that a full-scale version of the V-7 ever 
flew. Science writer Brian Ford, author of a book on German secret 
weapons, believes that although some progress may have been made 
towards the construction of a small disc-like aircraft, the results were 
destroyed, before they could fall into enemy hands. 18 Ronald Humble, an 
aerospace and defence expert, also concludes that there is no hard evi¬ 
dence for German disc-aircraft having actually flown. 19 

It was not until the late 1950s, when Leger read about flying saucer 
sightings as well as the first artificial satellites, that he became divided in 
his opinion as to the origin of the craft he had seen, though he remained 
convinced that it was most likely a prototype of a revolutionary aircraft 
that the Germans were unable to develop in large numbers, owing to the 
intensive Allied bombing missions at that time. 

In spite of his many contacts with first-generation French UFO 
researchers, such as Rene Fouere and Marc Thirouin, Leger’s natural 
reserve prevented him from discussing his experiences with them. 
Furthermore, he had read about ridicule heaped on many UFO wit¬ 
nesses. Then, in June 1989, he approached Jean Sider. This led to several 
meetings, and so impressed was Sider that he published the accounts in 
Ultra Top-Secret. 

Comparisons with Adamskj’s Initial Encounter 
The description by George Adamski of the ‘man from Venus’ he claims 
to have encountered in the Californian desert in November 1952 
(Chapter 6) closely resembles Leger’s account. In his first book, Flying 
Saucers Have Landed , co-authored with Desmond Leslie, Adamski 
described the ‘Venusian’ as follows: 

His hands were slender, with long tapering fingers like the beautiful hands of 
an artistic woman. In fact, in different clothing he could easily have passed 
for an unusually beautiful woman; yet he definitely was a man. 

He was about five feet, six inches in height. . . and I would estimate him 
to be about twenty-eight years of age, although he could have been much 
older. He was round faced with an extremely high forehead; large, but calm, 
grey-green eyes, slightly aslant at the outer corners; with slightly higher 
cheek bones than an Occidental, but not so high as an Indian or an Oriental 
... As nearly as I can describe his skin the colouring would be an even, 
medium-coloured suntan. And it did not look to me as if he had ever had to 
shave, for there was no more hair on his face than a child’s. His hair was sandy 
in colour and hung in beautiful waves to his shoulders ... 

His clothing was a one-piece garment... Its colour was chocolate brown 
... A band about eight inches in width circled his waist... I saw no zippers, 
buttons, buckles, fasteners or pockets of any kind, nor did I notice seams as 
our garments show ... He wore no ring, watch, or any other ornament of any 
kind. 20 



Strategic Reconnaissance 


25 


In spite of some differences in attire (the man’s, for example, was not 
tight-fitting) and footwear (he wore unusual shoes, as opposed to 
'boots’) from that described by Leger, there are some extraordinary par¬ 
allels. It is of course possible that Leger fabricated his story, based on 
Adamski’s account: Leger was very well versed in UFO literature, 
having 90 books on the subject (in French). From the end of the war, he 
was driven by an irresistible desire to read anything concerning aerial 
mysteries. Asked for his opinion of Adamski, he replied immediately 
that he thought Adamski’s first meeting was authentic, but that since 
then he had gone on to tell fanciful stories. This may well be the case, as 
I shall discuss later. 

Leger’s experience, like so many other contact stories, contains 
apparent absurdities. Yet Jean Sider is convinced by the witness’s 
account. ‘I would like to stress the fact that during our first meeting on 
June 25,1989,1 got a very strong impression that I could rely on him,' he 
reports. ‘At no time did he give me the impression that he was fabricating 
.. . His account is very hard to believe, I must confess. But it was given 
by a man who appeared to me to be very down-to-earth. He was sixty- 
seven years old in 1989, but still very active, both physically and men¬ 
tally. He was quite frank and possessed an intellectual honesty, and he 
escaped from a few small traps I set for him to see if he would contradict 
himself at some point. Furthermore, I doubt that his intellectual faculties 
- and 1 must stress that they are really modest - would have allowed him 
to fabricate such a complicated case . . .’ 2l 

AN ENCOUNTER ABOVE THE WORLD’S FIRST ATOMIC 
PLANT 

Rolan D. Powell was serving at the US Naval Air Station, Pasco, 
Washington, in the summer of 1945, training new pilots in preparation 
for aircraft carrier operations in the Pacific. In addition, he and other 
pilots were detailed to protect the top-secret Hanford Engineering 
Works, the large plutonium-production facility, located 60 miles away 
from Pasco. Although few of the pilots expected a Japanese attack on the 
plant, aircraft were kept in a state of constant readiness. 

At noon on a certain date, estimated by Powell to have been about six 
weeks before the Japanese surrender on 2 September, Pasco radar 
detected a fast-moving object that assumed a holding pattern directly 
above the Hanford plant. Six Grumman F6F Hellcat fighters were 
scrambled to intercept. In an interview nearly fifty years later with 
Walter Andrus, a US Navy electronics technician programme instructor 
during the Second World War and currently International Director of 
the Mutual UFO Network (MUFON), Powell, a war hero who later 
became a test pilot for McDonnell Douglas, described the object as at an 



26 


Alien Base 


estimated altitude of 65,000 feet and ‘the size of three aircraft carriers 
side by side, very streamlined like a stretched-out egg and pinkish in 
colour’. Powell also reported that some kind of vapour was emitted 
around the edges from portholes or vents, which he speculated was for 
the purpose of camouflage. 

The Navy pilots were unable to believe what they were seeing. Under 
orders, they forced the Hellcats to 42,000 feet - well above their rated 
ceiling of 37,000 feet - but were unable to reach the unknown object’s 
altitude and so returned to base. After hovering in a fixed position above 
the Hanford plant for twenty minutes longer, the object disappeared 
vertically. 22 23 

THREE MYSTERIOUS STRANGERS 

During an air-raid warning a few days before the heavy bombardment of 
a central German city in January 1945, citizens gathered in an air-raid 
shelter were visited by three young men who asked to inspect the shelter. 
The visitors wore peculiar dark, tight-fitting, high-necked one-piece 
suits, and despite an outside temperature of eight degrees below zero, 
they wore neither headgear nor scarves. Their footwear reminded one 
witness of gym shoes, which hardly suited the snowy conditions. All pre¬ 
sent were struck by the fact that the shoes made no noise on the ground. 
A further striking factor was that the men did not speak to one another, 
and only one of them spoke at all, with an odd accent. All three looked 
similar, with ‘beautiful, symmetric features’ and dark hair. 

The mysterious strangers looked around the shelter briefly. Their 
‘spokesman’ remarked merely that, in the event of another air-raid warn¬ 
ing, everyone should be inside the shelter. They then left the building. 
Investigations later revealed that these three men had been seen only by 
those present in the shelter. In a nearby clearing, about 135 feet square, 
footprints were found in the snow, but no trails of cars or other vehicles 
led to the spot. Furthermore, officials stated that no inspectors had been 
sent to the air-raid shelter on the night in question. Suspicions arose that 
the three men might have been English spies, but would spies have made 
themselves so conspicuous? 

For fear of ridicule, the person who provided this story remains anony¬ 
mous. Years later, when reading Flying Saucers Have Landed , this person 
noticed that in a drawing of Adamski’s ‘Venusian’, the visitor’s footwear 
looked exactly like that of the three strangers in the shelter. Interestingly, 
during heavy bombardment a few days afterwards, the witness’s apart¬ 
ment block was completely destroyed, but all its occupants, heeding the 
strangers’ warning, were inside the air-raid shelter. 24 

Alternative interpretations might explain this event in prosaic terms, 
of course; yet there are parallels here with those reports of encounters 




Strategic Reconnaissance 


27 


with ‘angelic’ human beings dating back for thousands of years; parallels 
which become even more apparent when we examine encounters 
reported, increasingly, in the twentieth century. 


NOTES 

1 Casey, Gerry A,, ‘UFO: The time for telling has come’, Western Flyer, 
Tacoma, Washington, 7 July 1989. 

2 Interview with General-Major Boris Surikov by Lawrence Moore and Livia 
Russell, Moscow, February 1994. Part of this interview was shown in the 
documentary Network First: UFO, produced, written and directed by 
Lawrence Moore for Central Productions, 1994. 

3 Sider, Jean, Ultra Top-Secret: Ces ovms gut font peur. Axis Mundi, Avenue 
Calizzi, 20220 Ile-Rousse, France, 1990, pp. 369-70. 

4 For further information on ‘foo-fighters’ and UFOs reported during the 
Second World War, see Beyond Top Secret: The Worldwide UFO Security 
Threat by Timothy Good (Sidgwick & Jackson, London, 1996). 

5 Vallee, Jacques, Forbidden Science: Journals 1957-1969, North Atlantic 
Books, Berkeley, California, 1992, p. 309. 

6 Blum, Ralph, with Blum, Judy, Beyond Earth: Man's Contact with UFOs, 
Corgi Books, London, 1974, p. 67. 

7 Von Braun, Wernher, and Ordway III, Frederick L, History of Rocketry and 
Space Travel, Thomas Nelson & Sons, London, 1966, pp. 104—5. 

8 Letter to the author from Bill Steele, 19 August 1992. 

9 Lagarde, F., ‘A French Landing in 1944’, Lumieres Dans La Nuit, no. 118, 
June 1972, translated by Gordon Creighton and published in Flying Saucer 
Review Case Histories, supplement no. 12, December 1972, p, 8. 

10 Good, op. dr. 

11 Stringficld, Leonard H., UFO Crash/Retrievals: The Inner Sanctum, Status 
Report VI, July 1991, pp. 69-71. Published by Stringfield, 4412 Grove 
Avenue, Cincinnati, Ohio 45227. 

12 Harder, Dr James A, ‘The Ins and Outs of UFOs and Secrecy since 1940’, 
The APRO Bulletin, Aerial Phenomena Research Organization, Tucson, 
Arizona, vol. 32, no. 2,1984, p. 6. 

13 Letter to the author from Dr James Harder, 15 January 1997. 

14 Stringfield, Leonard H., UFO Crash/Retrievals: Search for Proof in a Hall 
of Mirrors, Status Report VIII, Stringfield, February 1994, pp. 5-6. 

15 Sider, op. cit., pp. 370-9. 

16 Birdsall, Mark Ian, Flying Saucers of the Third Reich: The Legacy ofPrague- 
Khely (pending publication). 

17 Obcrth, Professor Hermann, ‘They Come from Outer Space’, Flying Saucer 
Review, vol. 1, no. 2, May-June 1955, pp. 12-15. 




Alien Base 


18 Ford, Brian, German Secret Weapons: Blueprint for Mars, Ballantine Books, 
New York, 1969. 

19 Humble, Ronald D. t ‘The German Secret Weapon/UFO Connection’, 
UFO, vol. 10, no. 4,1995, pp. 21-5. 

20 Leslie, Desmond, and Adamski, George, Flying Saucers Have Landed. 
Werner Laurie, London, 1953, pp. 195—6, 

21 Sider, op. cit. 

22 Powell, Rolan D., Varner, Byron D., and Andrus, Walter, ‘UFO Sighting 
over Hanford Nuclear Reactor in 1945’, MUFON UFO Journal, no. 344, 
December 1996, pp. 13-14. 

23 Varner, Byron D., Living on the Edge: An American War Hero's Daring Feals 
as a Navy Fighter Pilot, Civilian Test Pilot, and CIA Mercenary, available 
from Rolan Powell, PO Box 1307, Round Rock, Texas 18680. 

24 UFO-Nachrichten, Wiesbaden, Germany, January 1961. 



Chapter 2 


A Pantomime of Unrealities 


For a few hundred years, rumours persisted that a strange group of 
people, who kept their distance from the local populace, resided in the 
vicinity of California’s majestic Mount Shasta. In the late nineteenth 
century, there were sporadic reports of individuals seen emerging from 
the forests in the vicinity of Shasta to visit local towns and trade nuggets 
and gold dust in exchange for basic commodities. Described as tall, 
graceful and agile, with distinctive features such as large foreheads and 
long curly hair, the strangers wore unusual clothes, including head¬ 
dresses with a special decoration that came down from the forehead to the 
bridge of the nose. 

On some occasions, powerful illuminations were observed in the 
forests, and strangely beautiful music could be heard. Invariably, when an 
investigator approached the area, he would be met by a ‘heavily covered 
and concealed person of a large size who would lift him up and turn him 
away’ from the area. Other intruders reportedly were affected by some 
invisible influence, causing them to become temporarily paralysed. 1 

All attempts by the local community to get close to or photograph 
these mysterious individuals proved fruitless. On some such occasions, it 
was alleged, the strangers would either run away or suddenly vanish into 
thin air. ‘Those who have come to stores in nearby cities, especially at 
Weed,’ reported author Wishar Cerve, ‘have spoken English in a perfect 
manner with perhaps a tinge of the British accent, and have been reluc¬ 
tant to answer questions or give any information about themselves. The 
goods they have purchased have always been paid for in gold nuggets of 
far greater value than the article purchased, and they have refused to 
accept any change, indicating that to them gold was of no value and that 
they had no need for money of any kind.’ 2 

Not only were powerful lights often seen emanating from certain areas 
- years before electricity was in use - but there were also reports, in the 
early twentieth century, of cars that stalled on approaching the remote 
area apparently inhabited by these beings; a curious circumstance that 
was to become common during close encounters with UFOs reported 
years later. ‘At an unexpected point where a light flashed before them the 
automobile refused to function properly,’ commented Cerve in 1931, ‘for 



30 


Alien Base 


the electric circuit seemed to lose its power and not until the passengers 
emerged from the car and backed it on the road for a hundred feet and 
turned it in the opposite direction, would the electric power give any 
manifestation and the engine function properly.’ 

Still others reported encountering strange cattle, ‘unlike anything seen 
in America’, which would run back towards the area inhabited by the 
mysterious group. Of particular relevance are the (undated) sightings of 
peculiar aerial vessels: 

There are hundreds of others who have testified to having seen peculiarly 
shaped boats which have flown out of this region high in the air over the hills 
and valleys of California and have been seen by others to come on to the 
waters of the Pacific Ocean at the shore and then continue out on the seas as 
vessels ... and others have seen these boats rise again in the air and go upon 
the land of some of the islands of the Pacific... Only recently a group of per¬ 
sons playing golf on one of the golf links of California near the foothills of the 
Sierra Nevada range saw a peculiar, silver-like vessel rise in the air and float 
over the mountaintops and disappear. It was unlike any airship that has ever 
been seen and there was absolutely no noise emanating from it to indicate that 
it was moved by a motor of any kind . 3 

Were these mysterious people the survivors of the mythical lost con¬ 
tinent of Lemuria - a theory espoused by Rosicrucian mystics, including 
Wishar Cerve - or might they have been of extraterrestrial origin? I do 
not have the answer to these questions, but evidently there are parallels 
with other, later accounts. 

ZRET AND THE NORCANS 

‘Oh help me, help me!’ It was June 1920, and 16-year-old Albert Coe was 
on a canoeing vacation in Ontario with his companion Rod. Alone at the 
time, Coe heard the muffled cry while clambering to the top of an out¬ 
cropping of rocks in remote and rough terrain on the Mattawa River. 
Looking around, Coe could see no one, so he let out a yell. Slightly to his 
right and ahead came an answer. ‘Oh help me, I’m down here.’ 

‘I still couldn’t see anyone,’ said Coe, ‘and had walked about 25 feet in 
the direction of the voice when I came to a five-foot-wide cleft in the base 
rock that ran diagonally toward the river. Wedged down this narrowing 
crevice was a young man with his blond head some two and a half feet 
from the surface. He only had one arm free, so I reached over and 
grabbed his wrist, but could not budge him. We always carried a coil of 
rope and a hunting knife, so I cut down a sapling about 10 or 15 feet long 
to use as a lever, and working my rope under the pit of his pinned arm, 
circled it around his back and chest, bringing a loop to ground level, at 
the same time telling him I would try to pry him out. If I failed, I told him 



A Pantomime of Unrealities 


31 


not to worry, for my pal was somewhere on the other side of the river, and 
between the two of us we would free him.’ 

Slipping the pole through the loop and using the opposite edge as a ful¬ 
crum point, Coe gave a heave and felt the stranger move. Raising the 
lever end higher he propped it on a tree branch, jumped the crevice and 
pulled the man out. His legs were so numb that he was unable to stand, 
and the left hip, knee and shin were badly lacerated. The first thing he 
asked for was water, so Coe clambered back down the rocks to the river 
and fetched some in his felt hat. Slitting two of his bandannas, Coe also 
bathed and dressed the wounds. Then some oddities became apparent: 

As I was helping him my curiosity was risingas to the identity of my ‘patient’. 

I told him of our trip and that 1 was searching for a way to open water, at the 
same time noticing he was wearing an odd silver-gray, tight jumper-type gar¬ 
ment that had a sheen of silk to it. It had a leathery feeling without a belt or 
visible fasteners attached, but just under the chest was a small instrument 
panel. Several of the knobs and dials were broken, from being jammed against 
the rock in his fall. Being so many miles from any form of civilization, 1 point¬ 
edly asked where he was from, if he was on a canoe trip, also when and what 
had happened to cause his misfortune. 

He said that he was not canoeing, but had a plane parked in a clearing, 
three or four hundred yards downstream, and had started out early the pre¬ 
vious morning to do some fishing. In attempting to jump over the crevice, the 
loose earth and moss had given way underfoot and he had just about given Up 
all thought of ever getting out alive when he heard some of the stones, loos¬ 
ened in my ascent, bouncing down the rock... he decided to cry out and said 
that my answering yell was like a miracle. 

‘Well, planes were very primitive in those days,’ Coe went on, ‘and if 
you can imagine the side of the mountain, coming down, and all those 
rocks and branches, how the heck did he manage to land a plane? So I 
didn’t say anything to him - I was thinking the guy was nuts. I thought 
maybe he’d banged his head and was having hallucinations.’ 

The stranger requested Coe’s name and address, expressing his eter¬ 
nal gratitude for having been saved. He asked Coe to look for his small 
tackle-box and fishing-rod which he had dropped when he fell down the 
crevice. Coe was unable to find the tackle-box, but he did locate the fish¬ 
ing-rod. ‘The mystery of this strange person deepened within me,’ said 
Coe, ‘the peculiar outfit, a plane landing in this rocky forest and now a 
fishing-rod, the likes of which I had never seen.’ 

The butt was about three-quarters of an inch in diameter and had the same 
leathery touch as his suit, but bright blue and formed in a slight rounded pro¬ 
tuberance just above it. It had a tiny slot in either side and continuance in a 
slender aluminum shaft. It had no guides or reel, for the fine line came 
directly out from the inside at its tip, as a fine filament, to which was attached 



32 


Alien Base 


a conventional dry fly. I asked where he had purchased such a rod and the 
question was partially parried with a reply that his father was a research 
engineer and it was one of his own design. 

By now, the circulation was beginning to return to the stranger’s 
numbed limbs. Although occasionally grimacing from pain, the man’s 
overall composure, without apparent reaction to the stress or shock from 
such a torturous ordeal, was astonishing. An offer to help the man back 
to his plane was at first declined. 

Coe and his companion, Rod, had come up against a lot of logs and 
other flotsam in the river and were anxious to find passage through or 
around it. The stranger said that, observed from his aircraft, five to six 
tough miles lay ahead, though he thought the teenagers could perhaps 
pull their canoe through some of the shallow, swampy water. ‘He did not 
want to impose upon me any further and said I had better think of start¬ 
ing back, for he had already been quite a burden,’ explained Coe. 

From the condition of his leg I doubted that he could even walk, but made no 
comment as I helped him up. He took two steps, swayed and grabbed a tree 
to keep from going down. I threw one arm around his waist, lifted his left arm 
over my shoulder and insisted again that he accept my aid ... He finally gave 
in, but on condition of a promise; asking for my solemn word that I would not 
divulge to anyone, not even my partner, anything that had taken place today, 
or what 1 may see. He then told me that his father had developed a new type 
plane that was still in an experimental stage and highly secret, but he often 
helped in the lab when home from schooL As sort of a test, his father had per¬ 
mitted him to use the plane for this fishing trip. In the future he would fully 
explain the reason for his request that I keep my promise. 

Agreeing to this request, Coe supported and half-carried the man 
downstream to his aircraft. 

The Craft 

In a clearing beside the river, no more than 70 or 80 feet wide, stood the 
aircraft. Fully expecting it to be some type of conventional plane, Coe 
was astounded by what he saw. 

A round silver disc, about 20 feet in diameter, was standing on three legs in 
the form of a tripod, without propeller, engine, wings or fuselage. As we 
approached, I noticed a number of small slots around the rim, and it sloped 
up to a rounded central dome. I had to duck to walk with him underneath, 
between the legs, although it was slightly concave and only about four and a 
half feet from the ground. 

He said, ‘Surprised?’ That wasn’t actually the word for it, but I did not 
press him with questions, realizing he was suffering a great deal of pain. The 
only thing I was trying to figure was, how the hell does the damn thing fly? 



A Pantomime of Unrealities 


33 


‘I grabbed hold of him and he said, “Take me toward the centre of the 
craft.” He reached into the end of one of three recessed panels in its 
bottom that fanned out ccnterwise from the base of each leg, pressed a 
button, and a door swung down with two ladder rungs moulded on its 
inner surface. I clasped my hands under his good foot and boosted him 
in. He peered down at me over the rim of the opening, and said, “I will 
never forget you for this day. Remember to keep your promise, and stand 
clear when I take off.” ’ Coe retraced his steps to just within the trees at 
the edge of the clearing and turned round to watch. 

I was musing over its lack of windows or portholes and wondered how he 
could see out, unless they were on the other side. Just then, the perimeter 
edge began to revolve. At first it gave off a low whistling sound, picked up 
speed mounting to a high-pitched whine, finally going above the audible 
capabilities of the ear. At that time I experienced a throbbing sensation, 
which was felt rather than heard. It seemed to compress me within myself. As 
it lifted a few feet above the ground, it paused with a slight fluttering, the legs 
folded into the recesses as it swiftly rose with the effortless ease of thistle¬ 
down caught in an updraft of air, and was gone. 

Coe set ofTback towards camp in a state of bewilderment. ‘It all seemed 
like a pantomime of unrealities,’ he commented. ‘It was an episode last¬ 
ing not much more than an hour that may have carried me a thousand 
years into the future, and yet left an uneasy feeling of witnessing some¬ 
thing that did not actually exist, an impression of disconnected sequences 
only found in dreams.’ 

He ran back to hunt for the tackle-box, without success, but part of a 
blood-stained bandanna, the lever pole, its stump and branches were all 
still there. 

Coe and Rod prepared for their journey along the Mattawa River, the 
conditions of which turned out exactly as the stranger had indicated. 
Eventually, they joined the Ottawa River and spent the next two weeks 
enjoying their vacation in the wilderness. 

One night, less than a day’s paddle from Ottawa, while Rod was inside 
the tent, Coe relaxed outside beside their camp fire. ‘My musing was 
interrupted as I caught a glint of silver over the tree-darkened outline of 
the hills across the river that disappeared for a few seconds, and then I 
was sure,’ said Coe. ‘Framed in a background of stars was my strange 
friend’s stranger plane. He hovered motionless, not more than 70 feet 
above me and just off the shoreline, then dipped from side to side in an 
unmistakable gesture of hello ... I knew that it was his way of telling me 
he was well again, and I made a mental note, if ever I did meet him, to 
surely question [him] as to how he could know my exact location in the 
darkness of the night.’ 



34 


Alien Base 


The Return 

Almost six months after this initial encounter, Coe received a note, 
signed ‘Xretsim’, requesting a meeting over lunch at the McAlpine 
Hotel, Ottawa. Coe felt certain that this was indeed the mysterious 
stranger whom he had befriended earlier in the year. 

'1 did have a few “butterflies” wondering if I would remember his 
face,’ said Coe. : I entered the lobby as he came toward me with out¬ 
stretched hand and the greeting of, “You surely look a lot different than 
when we first met,” which echoed my own thought, doubting very much 
if 1 would have recognized him in the conventional suit, white shirt and 
tie.’ 

There was something odd about the handshake on this occasion. The 
man held a small gadget as the two shook hands, which Coe learned later 
was a device that registered the ‘vibrational frequency’ of his body, the 
data from which could be shown on a television-like screen elsewhere. 
Once this ‘vibrational frequency’ was registered, Coe claimed, his every 
move could be monitored. ‘They did this to make sure I’d keep my 
promise,’ he explained. 

‘I first asked the pronunciation of his name and inquired about his 
injuries. With a mischievous chuckle he replied, “Just call me Zret for 
now. In the future you will figure it out. Thanks to your timely interven¬ 
tion with first aid, the leg and I are in good shape." ’ (Xretsim was simply 
Mister X spelled backwards.) 

‘There were a million questions on the tip of my tongue,’ Coe con¬ 
tinued, ‘but most remained unuttered as he carried a good part of the 
conversation, regarding my trip, my school work, activities, ambitions, 
etc. He told me that he had spot-checked our progress, as far as Ottawa, 
to be sure we were OK [and] cleared up the mystery of the night I saw his 
plane, explaining that he was fishing [1] on the opposite bank when we set 
up camp, and could see my outline by the embers’ glow 

Following lunch, Zret explained that Coe would not be hearing from 
him for two or three months, but promised that they would take a fishing 
trip together in late spring. In early May, the two met at Hastings Station 
in Ottawa, and drove in Zret’s (conventional) car to Lake Mahopac. 
During the drive, the alien angler gave Coe much of the information he 
had hoped and longed for. It was one of many such meetings, which were 
to span six decades. 

The Mission 

Zret began the conversation by asking Coe if he had told his parents 
about the encounter. Coe replied that he had not done so and would 
never betray the secret. Zret continued: 



A Pantomime of Unrealities 


35 


You probably already have an inkling that I’m a stranger to your modem 
world. This decision of explanation is a personal responsibility. Our mission 
here will forever be cloaked in the tightest secrecy. If the events that we fore¬ 
see do not come to pass, our presence will not become known. The great 
depth of gratitude that I feel toward you, coupled with the things that you 
have seen and know exist, has influenced a violation of [a] law of disclosure 
..lam sure, if you can be as tight-lipped in the future as you have been in 
the past, that I will have nothing to fear, but a breach of this trust could result 
in the direst of consequences. 

Zret went on to say that his true identity and address and details of his 
personal life had to remain secret, though he did explain that he was one 
of a group which had come to monitor Earth's scientific advances. While 
on Earth, he ‘doubled’ as a student majoring in electronic engineering. 
Man’s capacity for developing weapons of ever-increasing power was the 
prime motive for the visits to Earth. ‘Only recently,’ he continued, ‘many 
of the more “intelligent” and “cultural” nations of Earth have concluded 
a long, bloody war, and during its progress several innovations, designed 
specifically for the mass slaughter of humanity, were introduced ... As 
each new invention was applied to a military potential, its horizon broad¬ 
ened to the eventual horror, brutality and devastation that emerged as a 
“world war”. This conversion of inventive genius from the brain of 
Earth’s inhabitants, to ever greater devices of destruction, was the prime 
factor that motivated our mission .. .’ 

Later, Coe was to learn that in 1904, Zret’s people had paved the way 
for a hundred of them to infiltrate every major nation of our planet - as 
small groups of technicians - to observe and evaluate every step of our 
scientific advancement. Their main concern was that we were on the 
verge of discovering secrets of the atom which could have disastrous con¬ 
sequences for our planet. 

A Dweller on Three Planets 

Coe was anxious to learn about his friend’s origin. Here, as usual, we run 
into difficulties. Contactees frequently are given seemingly ludicrous 
points of alien origin which tend to devalue their accounts. Zret replied 
that his present homes were on two planets: *. . . one, the planet Mars, 
nearing the end of an evolutionary life, and the other, planet Venus, 
younger in evolutionary processes than Earth, but its higher regions are 
not too drastically different from the environment here’. Evidently, he 
also spent a considerable amount of time on planet Earth. 

In later meetings, Zret explained that his race had originated on a 
planet called ‘Norca’, slightly smaller than Earth, with four moons, orbit¬ 
ing 85 million miles around Tau Ceti (a star about 11 light years from 
ours, similar in age and type to our own). Fourteen thousand years ago, 



36 


Alien Base 


Norca began dehydrating slowly, inexorably, to the extent that drastic 
action was necessary to preserve the race. Everything was tried to coun¬ 
teract the effects of dehydration, but nothing worked. The only solution 
was to migrate to another solar system. Ours - having a similar sun - was 
chosen. Eventually, following a successful exploratory mission to Earth, 
during which contact was established briefly with Cro-Magnon humans, 
the expedition returned to Norca. It was decided that Norcans would col¬ 
onize Earth. Supposedly, 243,000 Norcans eventually left their planet in 
sixty-two huge spacecraft, together with various species of animals, 
plants and insects. Owing to unforeseen and tragic circumstances 
whereby nearly all of the ships were drawn into our Sun, only one 
'Norcans* Ark’ made it; even then, it crash-landed on Mars, killing many 
on board. Nonetheless, 3,700 out of the 5,000 or so on board survived. 

The Norcans, claimed Zret, overcame the challenge of Mars’ relatively 
hostile environment and spent about 900 years on the planet. ‘Succeed¬ 
ing generations,’ he explained, ‘once again advanced to the scientific 
potential of launching twin probes, to Venus and Earth, both of which 
were subsequently colonized. In the primary stages of this expansion, 
bases of research were established on Venus to study its peculiar atmos¬ 
phere, [but] the main colonization was concentrated on Earth.’ If Coe - 
and Zret - are to be believed, these colonization areas were, in chrono¬ 
logical order: the mythological continent of Atlantis; the Cuzco Valley in 
the Andes; the legendary continent of Lcmuria (at a point about 1,000 
miles east of what is now known as the Marshall Islands); northern Tibet; 
and, finally, Lebanon. Norcans reproduced with native inhabitants. 
Irrespective of skin pigmentation, Zret explained, the indigenous Earth 
people at that time had black or brown hair and eyes, and the interbreed¬ 
ing led to a blond-haired, fair-skinned people. 

‘On Venus, the man form had not appeared,’ said Zret. ‘Today our 
basic home is the high land of Venus, although a good part of our research 
is still conducted on Mars, especially electronic probe[s], for its thin 
atmosphere and peculiarity of magnetic fields lends itself, as an ideal 
laboratory, to almost distortion-free reception.’ 

The atmospheres of both Mars and Venus are known to be far too 
inhospitable for unprotected human existence. On Mars, the atmosphere 
is far too thin and cold, while Venus’s atmospheric pressure is said to be 
about 90 times that of Earth, with a temperature averaging around 470 
degrees Celsius and a massive carbon-dioxide atmosphere (97 per cent), 
with no water. Ten per cent of Venus’s terrain is highland, and the high¬ 
est point on the planet is the mountain known as Maxwell Montes, 
towering 35,400 feet above Venus’s ‘sea level’ and 27,000 feet above a 
huge highland region the size of Australia, known as Ishtar Terra, 
Because Venus has often been named as an abode of certain aliens - Coe 



A Pantomime of Unrealities 


37 


supposedly being the first to be told this - we are left with a paradox. 
Assuming that neither Coe nor Zret was lying, could it be that the 
Norcans, utilizing highly advanced technology, were able to convert the 
hostile environment - which in any case may be less extreme in the high¬ 
land regions - to suit their requirements? This idea is not wholly fanciful 
- even with terrestrial technology. The late Carl Sagan, a leading author¬ 
ity on planetary sciences, hypothesized that injection of appropriately 
grown algae into the Venusian atmosphere ‘would in time convert the 
present extremely hostile environment of Venus into one much more 
pleasant for human beings’. 4 

Further Explanations 

Zret explained that at around the time of his initial encounter with Coe 
he had been on summer vacation, and had taken advantage of this period 
to rejoin some of his own people ‘who operated one of their established 
bases off the planet’. With his craft, he was then able to ‘enjoy the won¬ 
derful fishing of the otherwise inaccessible rivers and lakes of Canada’. 
On leaving the base, he told his colleagues not to worry if they did not 
hear from him for a week, as long as the ‘all-clear’ radio signal emitted 
from the craft in its regular 20-minute cycle. This was an inexcusable 
error, admitted Zret: 

You probably remember the little control panel that was attached to the front 
of my flying suit. Well, attached within the suit are a series of what I will 
simply call electrodes, that come in contact with various nerve centres of the 
body. At the back of my neck, under the base of my brain, are two more, the 
left one receiving brain impulses and the right one receiving all signals from 
the pituitary gland, the ‘master switch’ of the body. Ail these comparatively 
weak waves feed into a section of that panel below my chest and any impulse 
of stress or emergency thought should have been transposed and amplified 
through it, to automatically record in the craft’s control and change the all- 
clear signal to a rapid tonal wave of distress. Help would have arrived in three 
or four hours. The manual controls of this panel also activate many of the 
functional duties of the craft, even to an unmanned flight back to its base . .. 

The control knobs on Zret’s suit panel were severely damaged when he 
fell into the crevice, and he was unable to operate them. He explained 
that, once on board his craft following the rescue by Coe, he immediately 
switched the ship’s transmitter to the emergency mode. Not many 
minutes after setting the craft’s automatic ‘homing’ device, he collapsed. 
Later, he learned, ‘I was “picked up” by one of our larger ships that had 
intercepted the distress call and taken me aboard, craft and all.’ 

Coe asked about Zret’s age. ‘My age is going to surprise you,’ replied 
the very youthful-looking Zret. ‘I am exactly 304 years older than you.’ 
Decades later, many contactees claimed that aliens enjoyed phenomenal 



Aliev Base 


longevity, so it is interesting that Coe was told {or said he was told) this 
in 1921. Zret explained that such longevity was achieved through a reju¬ 
venation process. 'We have to go through this system every 105 years. We 
have a life potential of about 630 years, but we must go through this reju¬ 
venation process. If we don’t, we die as you do. We go through this five 
different times, and then the internal mechanism, chemical decomposi¬ 
tion, and so on, wears out.’ 

In addition to their extraordinary technology, the Norcans apparently 
were equally advanced in mental skills, such as telepathy, and seemed to 
be highly advanced ethically. 

Later Developments 

Albert Coe’s meetings with Zret - and others of his group - continued 
into the late 1970s at the rate of 10-12 times a year. He kept his promise 
and told no one about these meetings; until 1958, that is, when, with the 
go-ahead from Zret, he told his wife. ‘She thought I was kidding at first,’ 
Coe told Dr Berthold Schwarz, a psychiatrist and UFO researcher, in 
1977. ‘And then she wanted to meet him. Of course, that’s a no-no. You 
see, these people are very secretive. They have very good reasons to be, 
and I wouldn’t want to be the one that let that secret out.’ 

Coe was also given permission to bring some of his story into the pub¬ 
lic arena. He began to give interviews on various radio and television 
stations in Washington, DC, and wrote a book detailing some of his ex¬ 
periences, privately published in 1969. He also claimed to have had 
several meetings with US Government officials in Washington. ‘And 
they’d pump me,’ he said, ‘always trying to break down my story.’ 

In 1958 Coe began to receive the attention of what he assumed were 
federal agents. ‘For one year, they followed me all over,’ he claimed. ‘I 
used to live in Beverly, New Jersey, and I had a little apartment next to a 
barber shop. The barber was a very good friend to me, and said these men 
used to pump him. They wanted to know where I went, what 1 did, who 
my friends were, and so on.’ Many contactees in the 1950s, such as 
George Adamski, were investigated by federal agents, as numerous FBI 
files - released under the Freedom of Information Act - show. 
Interestingly, when asked by Dr Schwarz what he thought of Adamski - 
whose much later encounters contain many parallels - Coe replied 
simply that he was a ‘faker’! 

What are we to make of Albert Coe’s outrageous story? Coe had an excel¬ 
lent work record as a mechanical engineer, and, so he told Dr Schwarz, 
had not suffered from delusions, encephalitis, hallucinations or paranoia, 
nor had he spent time in a mental hospital. Having listened carefully to 
the 90-minute interview with him conducted by Dr Schwarz, 5 and 





A Pantomime of Unrealities 


39 


studying his book, The Shocking Truth 1 ’ - both of which are used here as 
references - I conclude that he told the truth; at least, the truth as he 
believed it. 

GROUNDED FOR REPAIRS 

During the summer of 1933, numerous people in Nipawin, Sas¬ 
katchewan, Canada, reported strange lights in the sky and at ground 
level. One night, two men and a woman (whose names are known to the 
investigator, John Musgrave), determined to get to the bottom of the 
mystery, drove in a pick-up truck to the area. After driving as close as was 
practicable, the trio headed on foot towards the direction of a glow in the 
woods. Although a stretch of muskeg (bog) prevented them from getting 
closer than about a quarter of a mile away, the witnesses were able to 
observe that the light came from a large Oval-shaped craft, supported on 
landing legs, in the middle of a marsh. 



Fig. I. Sketch by one of the witnesses of the landed craft in Nipawin, 
Saskatchewan, Canada, in 1933. 


The craft was domed on top and slightly rounded on the bottom (see 
Fig. 1). From a central doorway or hatch, about a dozen figures could be 
seen going up and down a ladder. Appearing to be slighdy shorter than 
the average-sized man, wearing silver-coloured suits and helmets or ‘ski’ 
caps, the figures seemed to be busily running around ‘repairing’ their 
craft. As reported in numerous cases years later, a strange silence per¬ 
vaded the immediate area. A bright-orange glow emanated from the 
craft, lighting up the surrounding area. After about half an hour, the wit¬ 
nesses headed back to town, hoping to find a way around the marshy area 
to get a better look. Regrettably, when finally they did find a way through, 
they realized they did not have sufficient gasoline to take them there and 
back. 

A few nights later, the witnesses returned to the site. There was no sign 
of the craft itself, but traces could clearly be seen at the landing site. As 
John Musgrave reported: 



Alien Base 


Six large square imprints that must have been the bases of the legs that sup¬ 
ported the craft proved that there indeed had been something there that 
night. Each imprint was the same size - 2 to 1'h feet square, and approxi¬ 
mately 8 to 10 feet apart. The imprints were 2 to 3 inches deep, and reminded 
the three of them of a kind of mark that would be made by a boiler plate 
stomped into the ground. They could also see markings where the base of the 
stairway met ground. As if this wasn’t remarkable enough, a great bum mark 
in the centre of the area covered a circle approximately 12 feet in diameter. 
They looked for footprints but found none though there was some scuffing of 
the vegetation surrounding the spot where the craft had been. 7 


11m. 



Fig. 2. The flying disc observed by military witnesses at Guadalajara, Spain, in 
1938. (Terence Collins/FSR Publications) 


HUMANOIDS IN SPAIN 

Throughout the years, a number of cases have been reported of aliens 
being lowered from their craft on a platform (for example, the incident 
investigated by Lord Mountbatten on his estate in Hampshire, England, 
in 1955, described in my book, Beyond Top Secret). Additional cases will 
be cited later, but here follows the earliest example of which I am aware, 
given to the investigator Oscar Rey. 

At 23.30 on 25 July 1938, a military man and his assistant came across 
a dark, lenticular object, 11 metres in diameter, hovering about two 
metres above the ground, and only 60 metres away from them, at 
Guadalajara, Spain. Two humanoid figures descended silently on a plat¬ 
form at the bottom of a column (see Fig. 2). A circle of blue light focused 


A Pantomime of Unrealities 


on the witnesses, who felt chilled by it. The platform ascended, the two 
sections of the object began to spin in opposite directions and, glowing 
with an intense white light, the object took off. 8 

In the majority of such landing cases, the aliens beat a hasty retreat 
when humans appear on the scene. Nearly two years later, though, con¬ 
tact was allegedly established with some of the more approachable 
species, remarkably similar to those encountered by Albert Coe. 

A STRONG BOND OF FRIENDSHIP 

On a clear day in early May 1940, in remote country near the village of 
Townsend, southeast of Helena, Montana, 37-year-old Udo Wartena 
was moving some boulders at his gold-mining claim. Suddenly there 
came a loud, turbine-like droning sound, which at first he assumed to be 
an Army plane that flew periodically in the vicinity. Climbing to higher 
ground, he was astonished by the sight of an unusual craft, shaped like 
two soup plates of a stainless-steel colour. It was hovering a short dis¬ 
tance away, above a meadow where he had built a small dam using water 
diverted from a nearby stream. The craft measured over 100 feet in 
diameter and about 35 feet in height 
A circular stairway with a solid base, forming part of the craft’s hull, 
lowered, and a man came down and approached the miner. ‘I went to 
meet him,’ said Wartena. ‘He stopped when we were about 10 or 12 feet 
apart. He wore a light-grey pair of coveralls, a [circular] cap of the same 
material on his head, and on his feet were slippers or moccasins.’ The 
stranger shook hands with Wartena, explaining apologetically that it was 
not their normal policy to intrude or to allow themselves to be seen. 

‘He then asked me if it would be all right if they took some water from 
the stream,’ said Wartena, ‘and as I could not see why not, I said sure. He 
then gave a signal and a hose or pipe was let down. His English was like 
mine, but he spoke slowly, as if he were a linguist and had to pick his 
way.’ 

The stranger politely invited Wartena to board the craft. As the 
bemused witness came directly underneath it, he noticed that the dron¬ 
ing sound, though quieter now, seemed to go through him. Once inside, 
though, the noise was barely perceptible. 

We entered into a room about 12 feet by 15 feet, with a close-fitting sliding 
door on the farther end, indirect lighting near the ceiling, and nice up¬ 
holstered benches around the sides. There was an older man already in the 
room, plainly dressed, but his hair was snow-white ... the younger man’s hair 
was also white. 

Both men were extremely good-looking, with perfect, almost trans¬ 
lucent skin, and appeared to be very youthful and strong. Becoming sus- 



42 


Alien Base 


picious about their origin, the witness asked where they came from. ‘We 
live on a distant planet,’ they replied, pointing to the sky. 

Asked why they wanted to take water from the stream, rather than 
from a nearby lake, the younger man responded that stream water was 
purer, as it contained no algae, and that it was ‘convenient’ — which pre¬ 
supposes that they had taken water from there before. 

The younger man explained some details of the craft’s propulsion 
system: 

As you noticed, we are floating above the ground, and though the ground 
slopes, the ship is level. There are in the outside rim two flywheels, one turn¬ 
ing one way and the other in the opposite direction .. . this gives the ship its 
own gravitation; or rather, it overcomes the gravitational pull of the Earth and 
Other planets, the Sun and stars. Though this pull is but light, we use [it] to 
ride on, like you do when you sail on ice. 

The ‘flywheels’ or rings, about three feet wide and several inches thick, 
were separated by rods turned by motors and powered by ‘battery- or 
transformer-like’ units positioned around the inside perimeter of the 
craft. For interstellar travel, the craft supposedly could be ‘focused’ on a 
star and its energy, drawing itself through space at speeds faster than that 
of light (186,000 miles per second) - ‘skipping upon the light waves', as 
they put it. ‘They use gravity,’ Wartena declared, ‘they don’t just over¬ 
come it’ He then asked where they got the energy to run such a large 
ship. ‘They said from the Sun and other stars, and [they] could store this 
in [the] batteries, though this was for emergency use only. They carried 
another source, but did not explain this to me.’ Many years later, 
Wartena indicated to a family member that hydrogen extracted from the 
water provided the craft with its fuel source. 

As with many such accounts where extraterrestrials explain the capa¬ 
bilities of their crafts, it is not readily apparent how nullifying gravity in 
itself induces propulsion. In many cases, however, they have made clear 
their reluctance to elaborate, for the perfectly valid reason that Earthlings 
would misuse such revolutionary technology. Even so, in my estimation, 
Wartena seems to have obtained some important clues. 

Feeling completely at ease with the cosmonauts, Wartena accepted an 
invitation to be ‘monitored for impurities’, and a type of‘X-ray’ machine 
was passed over his body. Regrettably, no details as to the purpose or 
result of this physical examination are available. It is worth noting that 
other contactees, such as Carroll Watts (Chapter 14), have reported being 
physically examined. 

The witness asked his hosts their age. One claimed to be about 600 
years of age, and the other, who looked ‘slightly older’ - as well he might 
- said he was over 900 years old, as we measure time - impressive even by 




A Pantomime of Unrealities 


43 


Norcan standards. They said they spoke many of our languages, and were 
continually improving their knowledge of them. 

But why were they coming to Earth? ‘As you have noticed, we look 
pretty much as you do,’ they told Wartcna, ‘so we mingle with you 
people, gather information, leave instructions, or give help where 
needed.’ They further explained that they were monitoring the ‘progres¬ 
sion or retrogression’ of our society. A deeply committed Christian, 
Wartena asked if they knew about Jesus and religion. ‘We would like to 
speak of these things but are unable to do so,’ came the response. ‘We 
cannot interfere in any way.’ 

The friendly spacemen invited the witness to come with them, but he 
declined, explaining that it would inconvenience too many people. 
'Later, 1 wondered why 1 said that,’ he remarked. Perhaps his reluctance 
to accompany them was related to an incident two years earlier, when a 
young man vanished without trace in the vicinity. Had he gone with the 
visitors? 

Wartcna felt that it was now time to take his leave. The men advised 
him not to discuss his encounter with anyone, as no one would believe 
him, but said that he could do so in years to come. 

As in other such contact encounters, the witness was cautioned to stay 
well clear of the craft as it took off. ‘When I walked away from the ship, 
they raised the stairway, and when I got a couple of hundred feet away, I 
turned round. A number more portholes had opened up and though I 
could not see anyone, I felt sure they could see me; anyway I waved at 
them.’ Again came the loud, turbine-like noise, and he watched as the 
craft lifted off the ground, wobbled briefly, slowly retracted its landing 
legs, then shot off at high speed. 

Some type of ‘energy field’ permeated the area, preventing the witness 
from walking for several hours. 

This remarkable story came to me by way of the Australian investig¬ 
ator Warren Aston, who learnt about it from an American source who 
had known the witness. Udo Wartena, of Dutch descent, was described 
as unsophisticated and honest by all who knew him, including his wife, 
whom Aston met He wrote a full account of the experience but kept the 
story secret for nearly 30 years before confiding in his closest friend. He 
died in 1989. 

Perhaps the most impressive aspect of the encounter for the witness 
was the strong bond of friendship he felt towards the cosmonauts. They 
were men, he stressed, ‘just like us and very nice chaps’, and he felt even 
‘love, or comfort’ in their presence. Alas, some reported encounters with 
extraterrestrials around the world have proven to be less beneficial. 



Alien Base 


NOTES 

1 Cerve, Wishar S., Lemuria: The Lost Continent of the Pacific, The Rosicrucian 
Press, San Jose, California, 1980, pp. 250-2. 

2 Ibid., pp. 256-7. 

3 Ibid., pp. 259-61. 

4 Sagan, Carl, The Cosmic Connection: An Extraterrestrial Perspective, Coronet 
Books, London, 1975, pp. 151-2. 

5 Interview with Albert Coe by Dr Berthold Schwarz, Philadelphia, 8 May 
1977. 

6 Coe, H. Albert, The Shocking Truth, The Book Fund, Beverly, New Jersey, 
1969. 

7 Musgrave, John Brent, ‘Saskatchewan, 1933: UFO Stops for “Repairs’”, 
Flying Saucer Review, vol. 22, no. 6, November-Dccember 1976, pp. 16-17. 

8 Ballester Olmos, Vicente-Juan, ‘Survey oflberian Landings: A Preliminary 
Catalogue of 100 Cases’, Flying Saucer Review , Special Issue no, 4, August 
1971, p. 46. 



Chapter 3 


A Festival of Absurdities 


It was the late, great French researcher Aime Michel who described the 
UFO phenomenon as 'a festival of absurdities’ - which it often seems to 
be. No matter how diligently we try to define the phenomenon, it resists 
any single, adequate hypothesis to account for the plethora of craft and 
their occupants, as well as for their sometimes peculiar behaviour. Yet 
there are often parallels; concatenations that provide clues and patterns 
as to the nature and purpose of some of the encounters, ranging as they 
do from the deadly serious, to the silly, to the sublime. With few excep¬ 
tions, the varied encounters selected for this chapter took place during a 
sixteen-month period in 1946—47. 

A GHASTLY DEATH 

Of all countries, perhaps none has experienced as many disturbing 
encounters with extraterrestrials as Brazil, particularly in its more remote 
regions. One of the earliest known cases dates back to 1946. It is a story 
which reads like something from a 1950s Hollywood B-movie - or the 
wildest of The X Files - yet the incident was witnessed by a number 
of credible people, who were interviewed by several equally credible 
investigators. 

It was Shrove Tuesday, 5 March, in the little town of Aragariguama, 
in the administrative region of S5o Roque, State of Sao Paulo. At that 
time, the town lacked electricity and telephones, neither were there any 
physicians. For some time, strange lights had been seen which darted 
around in irregular manoeuvres above the mountains and forests of the 
region. At about 20.00, Joao Prestes Filho, a 40-year-old married farmer 
and businessman, returned home from a day’s fishing trip on the Rio 
Tiete. His wife was not in the house: she and the children were attending 
carnival celebrations in town, and Prestes had arranged for a window to 
be left slightly ajar so he could get in. Although there was a light mist, the 
sky was clear. 

Suddenly, as Prestes was lifting the window, he was struck by a beam 
oflight coming from some outside source. He put up his hands to protect 
his head and eyes, then fell to the ground, stunned, for a few moments. 
Picking himself up, he fled into the centre of town to seek help. He 



46 


Alien Base 


arrived in a state of terror at his sister Maria’s house and repeatedly 
explained what had happened. Neighbours were summoned, including 
Aracy Gomide, fiscal inspector of the Prefecture of Sao Roque, who was 
the principal witness to the events which ensued. Though not a physi¬ 
cian, Gomide was medically knowledgeable; thus he was charged with 
the job of caring for sick or injured patients in the region. 

Gomide noticed that although Prestes’s eyes were dilated and his voice 
distraught with terror, there were no traces of bum marks anywhere on 
his body. Then began a scene of incredible horror. According to the wit¬ 
nesses, who were interviewed by Dr Irineu Jose da Silveira, a dental 
surgeon, this is what happened: 

Prestes’ insides began to show, and the flesh started to look as though it had 
been cooked for many hours . . . The flesh began to come away from the 
bones, falling in lumps from his jaws, his chest, his arms, his hands, his 
fingers, from the lower parts of his legs, and from his feet and toes. Some 
scraps of flesh remained hanging to the tendons... Soon every part of Prestes 
had reached a state of deterioration beyond imagination. His teeth and his 
bones now stood revealed, utterly bare of flesh. 

Amazingly, while all this was going on, Prestes gave no signs of feeling 
any pain. Then his nose and ears fell off and slid down his body on to the 
floor. What remained of him was literally carted off to the nearest hospi¬ 
tal, Santa Casa, at Santana de Pamaiba. Six hours later, Prestes’ body was 
brought back to Ara9ariguama. He had died without reaching the hospi¬ 
tal. Right up to the end, said witnesses, guttural sounds continued to 
come from what was left of his mouth. 

The death certificate merely recorded that Prestes had died of ‘gener¬ 
alized bums’; a less than satisfactory explanation. Nothing was ever 
found outside or inside the victim’s house which might have yielded 
some clues as to the nature of the beam of light, nor were atmospheric 
conditions present at the time that might have accounted for the tragedy, 
such as ‘ball-lightning’. 1 According to a report published in a Brazilian 
newspaper many years later, the French Government requested the 
bones of Prestes for test purposes. 2 

It is, of course, impossible to establish that Prestes was killed by aliens; 
nevertheless, circumstantial evidence suggests that he was struck by a 
beam of light from an unknown source, causing a type of rapid, awesome 
deterioration. Furthermore, unusual flying lights had been seen in the 
vicinity at the time. 

SPACEMEN AND WOMEN IN SWEDEN 

Several months prior to the famous wave of sightings of the so-called 

‘ghost rockets’ - reported mostly from Scandinavia 3 - a most unusual 



A Festival of Absurdities 


47 


flying craft is said to have landed in Angeiholm, north of Helsingborg, 
Sweden. The witness was Gosta Carlsson, who later became a well- 
known industrialist. 

One evening in May 1946, Carlsson was walking home along the 
shores of the Kattegat. Owing to the gathering dark he used a forehead 
lamp. Spotting a light in a nearby clearing in the forest, he approached 
the area and was surprised to see a disc-shaped contraption on the 
ground. The object had a cupola that looked like a cabin with oval win¬ 
dows. Above the cabin was a ‘mast’, and beneath the disc could be seen a 
large oblong ‘fin’ stretching from the centre to the underside which, 
together with a small ladder and two landing legs, rested on the ground. 
Carlsson went on to describe further details: 

The object was approximately 16 metres in diameter and 4 metres from top 
to bottom at the middle. I know this because 1 measured the marks on the fol¬ 
lowing day. There were a lot of holes around the edge of the disc, like those 
of a turbine, and it was from these that jet-beams came which burned the 
grass when the object departed. The light came from the mast. It was about 
5 metres in height, and three antennae were suspended from its top. Lower 
down something like a lampshade was hanging. It was shining with a strange 
purple light which covered not only the whole object .but also the ground a 
couple of metres beyond it. The light was flowing and pulsating from the 
‘lampshade’ like water from a fountain. Where the light hit the ground [ 
could see a sparkling effect. 

On the ground, beyond the area of light, stood a man in closely fitting 
white overalls. He seemed to be some sort of guard, said Carlsson: 

He raised his hand towards me: it was a gesture that could not be misunder¬ 
stood, so I stopped. I was less than 10 metres from him. He was approxi¬ 
mately as tall as I am, maybe a few centimetres shorter, but he was thinner 
than me. There were others like him, but the strange thing was that nobody 
said a word. It seemed as if they had just finished repairing a window, because 
they put their tools away and looked at me. Everything was silent. The only 
thing I heard was the sound from the guard when he walked on the grass. 
There were three men working at the window, and two more were standing 
alongside. There were three women as well, and one more came out of the 
object later. On the far side there was another guard. In all I saw eleven 
persons. 

They wore short black boots and gloves, a black belt around the waist, and 
a transparent helmet. The women had ashen-coloured hair, but I could not 
see the hair of the men as they wore black caps. They were all brown- 
coloured, as if sunburned. 

I went a few steps closer, but then the guard raised his hand again. After 
that I stood still. The guard had a black box on his chest which was suspended 
by a chain around his neck. It looked like an old black camera. He turned it 



48 


Alien Base 


towards me and I thought he was going to take a picture of me, but nothing 
happened, except that I thought I heard a click from my forehead lamp. The 
lamp did not work after that, but that may have been purely coincidental. 
When I returned home I found that the battery had run out, although it was 

It seemed as if the ‘cheese-dish cover’ of light stood like a wall between us. 

I think it was created to isolate them from our world and atmosphere. One of 
the women came out of the cabin with an object in her hand. She went to the 
edge of the wall of light and threw the object beyond the area oflight. At the 
same time I heard her laugh. 

Carlsson later retrieved the object. (Analysis conducted in 1971 re¬ 
vealed nothing out of the ordinary, the object consisting, among other 
things, of silicon. Its shape had been changed by the witness, and it 
looked like a staff.) Carlsson then left the scene. 

... it is difficult to explain what one does, and why one does it. I thought the 
disc-like object could be some sort of military device. The whole scene 
seemed so strange. I never take alcohol, and I knew it was not an hallucina¬ 
tion, but nevertheless I decided to go back to the seashore, and from there 
return to the opening to see if the object was still present. I was aware of a 
smell like that from ozone (0 3 ) following an electrical discharge. 

Thirty minutes later Carlsson arrived back at the site, returning via 
another route so he could observe the object from the other side. Before 
he had time to leave the shoreline, he suddenly saw a bright-red light 
rising slowly with a whining sound above the tree-tops. The contraption 
ascended with a corona of red lights streaming from the ‘turbine holes’. 
At about 400-500 metres it slowed down and wobbled momentarily, the 
red light became brighter then turned to purple, and it accelerated into 
the distance at tremendous speed. 

Further Investigations 

The foregoing account was given by Gosta Carlsson to Eugen Semitjov, 
a prominent space-science journalist who wrote an article about the in¬ 
cident in a Swedish magazine. 4 Semitjov believed the witness was telling 
the truth as well as he could remember it, 25 years after the event. Alerted 
to the case, further investigations were carried out by the Goteborg 
Information Centre on UFOs (GICOFF). At the alleged landing site - 
about 30 to 40 metres in diameter - the investigators noted a large outer 
ring, a smaller ring, two small circles (presumably from the landing legs) 
and a straight line, almost half the diameter of the larger ring (perhaps 
from the ‘fin’). But something was wrong, explained investigator Sven- 
Olof Fredrickson: 



A Festival of Absurdities 


49 


What was strange, however, was that the marks had been made recently: 
someone had dug a circle 10 centimetres deep, 10 centimetres wide and 16 
metres in diameter, and then filled it in with sand. The same had happened 
with the marks of the supposed 'landing legs’ and ‘fin’. Mr Semitjov assured 
us that this had not been done by him, and that there were no signs of digging 
when he was there two months earlier. The original marks were still visible 
without digging them up, he said, so who had done it and why? 

Who and why, indeed? The GICOFF investigators learned from a 
reliable witness, who had been at the landing site a day after the Swedish 
magazine article was published, that the marks had already been dug up, 
by person or persons unknown. Had Carlsson wanted to fabricate any 
evidence, he surely would have done so prior to the interview with 
Semitjov. In any event, GICOFF discovered that some of the original 
marks (the outer and the inner rings) appear in aerial photographs taken 
in 1947 and 1963. Photos taken in 1939 do not show any such marks, 
which gives at least a modicum of support for Carlsson’s claims.’ 

By extraterrestrial standards, Carlsson’s contraption seems relatively 
primitive. We are told of ‘holes around the edge of the disc, like those of 
a turbine [from which red] jet-beams came which burned the grass’; a 
‘mast’; the occupants ‘repairing a window’; and what looked like ‘an old 
black camera’ suspended by a chain around the guard’s neck, One could 
argue that the craft was a post-war Russian variant of Germany’s V-7 jet- 
turbine-powered helicopter, reportedly developed towards the end of the 
war and described by the pioneering astrophysicist Dr Hermann Oberth 
as having ‘rotating tubes which released an “exhaust” of flame ... When 
it hovered, the flame was dark-red’ (see p. 23). It is a tempting argument, 
but I believe it to be a specious one, for the following reasons: 

First, though Oberth claimed in 1955 that ‘Russia has now obtained 
the plans and a model of the V-7, and has built some models of her own 
which could account for some UFO reports’, 6 he implies not only that 
this was a relatively recent development (that is, after the date of the 
Angelholm landing) but also that models, rather than full-scale craft, 
were test-flown. Secondly, I find it impossible to believe that the Soviets, 
presumably building the hypothetical V-7 variant with the aid of cap¬ 
tured German aeronautical engineers, could by 1946 have perfected the 
design to such an extent that it would have been able to fly with a crew of 
eleven, rather than a test-pilot or two. Thirdly, conventional jet-engines 
would leave a smell of kerosene, not ozone. Fourthly, Carlsson’s account 
refers to several peculiarities of design and performance which are not 
consistent with what we know about the V-7 and which simply do not 
correspond with contemporaneous technology. Finally, Bill Gunston, 
one of the world’s leading aviation authorities, told me: ‘I have asked two 
men who would have known, and I think I am on good ground in stating 





so 


Alien Base 


that nothing like the V-7 was ever tested in the Soviet Union,’ 7 The most 
likely hypothesis, therefore, is that the craft came from somewhere else. 
As Oberth himself put it: 

My own explanation of the unsolved percentage of UFOs is that they are 
machines built in some place other than Russia and countries on the Earth 
... 1 do not, in fact, think that Russia is building any UFOs at all; on the con¬ 
trary, I believe they originate exclusively from outside the Earth.® 

Interestingly, according to Lieutenant Colonel Philip Corso, the 
former head of the US Army staff’s Foreign Technology desk at the 
Pentagon who claims to have stewarded an Army project that seeded 
alien technology at various American companies (see p. 5), both Dr 
Oberth and Dr Wernher von Braun were consulted on the nature of the 
recovered alien materials. 9 So, presumably, both men were convinced of 
extraterrestrial visitation. And in an early 1960s report, Corso noted that: 
‘Dr Hermann Oberth suggests we consider the Roswell craft from the 
New Mexico desert not a spacecraft but a time machine .. .’ !0 

ANGELS UNAWARES? 

Shortly before his discharge from the United States Army in June 1946, 
Allan Edwards was admitted to an Army hospital at Camp Lee, Virginia, 
suffering from a minor ailment. The main ward being full, he was given 
a private room. After a night’s sleep he went down to the ward seeking 
someone to chat with. Of the patients, some of whom were sitting beside 
their beds, one stood out. Even from SO feet away, there was something 
unusual about this man, noted Edwards who, as an academically trained 
portrait painter, had made a thorough study of anatomy. 

'I arose and walked the length of the ward to get a closer look,’ said 
Edwards. ‘The bed at the end of the room on my left was vacant and, 
assuming it to be his, I asked him if he minded if I sat on it. He smiled 
and said, “Go right ahead.” I perched on the edge and, trying not to be 
too obvious, I studied this amazing man.’ He continued: 

Never in my life had I seen such beauty, yet there was absolutely nothing 
feminine about his features. They were perfectly formed. His forehead was 
extremely high, the fine veins showing faintly through the transparency of 
the skin at the temples. His blond hair seemed to glow with an inner light of 
its own; in fact, his entire head seemed to be radiant, whether from the beauty 
of his complexion or some mysterious (actor I did not know. His eyes were 
softly blue beneath the pure whiteness of his brow and seemed, to me, to be 
filled with great compassion. His nose was perfectly shaped and the colour¬ 
ing of his checks had a freshness and purity that I had never beheld in any 
human being. 

The extraordinary height of his forehead amazed me but the physical 



A Festival of Absurdities 


characteristic that I found even more unusual was the depth of his head from 
the forehead to the back. This was definitely an abnormality according to all 
rules of skeletal structure and yet, as I continued to stare, I realized that for 
the first time I was seeing perfection. 

Edwards then became aware of a strange sensation, a sensation 
reported by a number of contactees, such as George Adamski, in later 
years, ‘Somehow I seemed to be in two places at once, as though I were 
raised up into another dimension,’ he tried to explain. ‘The feeling of 
well-being was beyond description, almost in the nature of a spiritual 
experience, and I felt that in some way it was connected with the man 
seated near me.’ 

Hesitating to question the stranger, Edwards glanced at the bedside 
table, hoping to get some clue as to his identity. On it was a pitcher of 
water, a tumbler and a copy of a pocket magazine called Pageant. The 
magazine was opened at an article entitled ‘Easter in Oklahoma’, an 
article later to assume significance. 

Edwards was called away for a medical examination, then returned to 
his room. At around midnight, he heard a commotion in the corridor out¬ 
side. Peering out, he saw two attendants struggling with a young man 
who, they explained to Edwards, had been brought into the hospital by 
the military police, having been badly beaten up during a drunken brawl. 
Both eyes were black and swollen shut, his forehead was badly bruised, 
and his nose was a bleeding pulp. The young man was put into the room 
next to Edwards, who was unable to sleep for hours owing to the groans 
from the suffering man. 

At breakfast the following morning, Edwards sat near the strange man, 
on his right, then looked around the table at the other men. 

My eyes rested on a young lad seated at my left at the end of the table. This 
was the same boy who had been brought in the night before, the one who had 
been so badly beaten - yet it couldn't be, there was not a blemish on his face! 
... I felt strongly that the man seated on my right had been responsible for 
this miraculous transfiguration. Again I felt the odd sensation of being in two 
places at the same time. Was no one else at the table aware of what was tak¬ 
ing place? I looked about me at the others. Then I realized that an amazing 
thing had happened. Each one of the men seated at that table was changed 
... It was as though a grey veil had been lifted off my eyes and for the first 
time I saw true beauty of colour. I wondered if they were aware of their trans¬ 
figuration or whether it was some strange trick of my own vision. 

A Town Called Cement 

Edwards was profoundly moved by these experiences. He also began to 
have repetitious dreams about cement and concrete. ‘I seemed to be 
involved in mixing it, pouring it and even being buried in it,’ he wrote. 




52 


Alien Base 


Six weeks later, immediately after his discharge from the Army, he 
bought a copy of Pageant magazine with the article ‘Easter in Oklahoma’ 
This told about the annual pilgrimage to Lawton, a small town in the 
southern part of the state. Every Easter a pageant, depicting the last days 
of Christ, was held by the townspeople and attended by thousands from 
all over the country. Edwards wrote to the Lawton Chamber of Com¬ 
merce to learn more about the town, and soon received a package of 
brochures extolling its virtues. Because Edwards and his wife had no 
plans for the future, they decided to move to Lawton. It was, he said, ‘a 
decision based on nothing more than an article in a pocket magazine’. 

A few days before they were due to leave, Edwards was walking down 
the main street of Petersburg, Virginia, where he had been living during 
his Army service. Walking in the same direction on the other side of the 
street was the extraordinary man whom he had encountered at Camp 
Lee, accompanied by another man. Both were wearing US Army uni¬ 
forms. Edwards crossed the street and followed them. The men parted 
company when they reached the corner, and Edwards made his 
approach. 

I caught up with him, a thousand questions on my tongue. 1 found myself 
looking up at him: 1 am fairly tall but he towered above me. I managed to 
stammer out, ‘Do you remember me?’ He smiled and said, ‘Yes, you were in 
the hospital at Camp Lee.’ All the questions that I wanted to ask him sud¬ 
denly disappeared and I found myself saying, ‘We are going to move to 
Lawton, Oklahoma,’ ... he said, *1 come from a small town near Lawton 
called Cement.’ 

Edwards introduced himself, and the stranger gave his name as Sudcr. 
‘I cannot recall any further conversation [and] he walked away until I lost 
sight of him when he turned a corner.’ 

Within a few days, Edwards and his wife realized that Lawton was not 
the place they wanted to live in, so they packed their belongings and 
moved to Los Angeles. Several years later, Edwards returned to 
Oklahoma and made a point of visiting Cement. No one there had ever 
heard of a man called Suder, and there the matter ended. 

Further Encounters 

The following year, in Seattle, Washington, Edwards was once again 
hospitalized, this time for a respiratory ailment. During his stay in hos¬ 
pital, he became increasingly curious about two attendants. 

Both were quite young, one tall and blond, the other short and dark. 
Physically there was nothing extraordinary about them but I quickly dis¬ 
covered that both had the ability to read every thought that passed through 
my mind, an ability which proved quite disconcerting to me. To have a 


A Festival of Absurdities 


53 


question answered before it is put into words is an intriguing experience and 

I must admit that I was quite awed by it. 

At times, Edwards reported, he felt impelled, against his own will, to 
do things that would ameliorate the circumstances of those sicker than 
himself. ‘I had not had much experience with those who were in pain and 
yet I found myself administering to them with expert hands which did 
not somehow seem to belong to me. I regret, now, my reticence about 
questioning the two attendants, although 1 truly do not believe that I was 
meant to.’ 

Not long after his dismissal from hospital, Edwards felt impelled to go 
down to the street from his hotel room in Seattle. It was a clear, moonless 
night. ‘My gaze was drawn to one star which was unusually large . . it 
started to expand and gradually grew brighter and brighter until it was 
about half the size of a full moon [and] after a few moments it decreased 
in brilliance until it was back to its original size. I was startled and per¬ 
plexed. I had never heard of space ships or flying saucers and could only 
suppose that it was some strange phenomenon upon a distant planet or 
star.’ It was not until several years later, when Edwards was given a copy 
of George Adamski’s book Inside the Space Ships, that he began to won¬ 
der if there was a connection between this sighting and the strange 
encounters in Camp Lee, Petersburg and Seattle. 

Other sightings followed. One night in Virginia Beach, Virginia, 
Edwards and several others watched nine UFOs as they manoeuvred over 
the coast, describing sharp right-angled turns. Several years later, follow¬ 
ing sightings in Texas and Hawaii, Edwards saw a large glowing object in 
Puerto Rico. Numerous sightings and close encounters have been 
reported in Puerto Rico over the years; per capita, possibly more than in 
any other locale. A number of local people have told me they are con¬ 
vinced that an alien base has been established in the area (see Chapter 19). 

While in Puerto Rico, Edwards spoke with a man who, one evening, 
with several others, had seen a large fluorescent object, the size of a 
DC-6 airliner, on the landing strip of an abandoned military airfield on 
the southern side of the island. ‘It took off while they watched, accelerat¬ 
ing quickly, and disappeared,’ Edwards reported. ‘They were particu¬ 
larly impressed by the strange vibration which they claimed they felt 
within their own bodies. They were only about 300 feet away and yet 
heard no sound. The sugar cane beside the road trembled with the same 
vibration and they made note of the fact that there was no wind.’ 

Spiritual Motivations? 

In his attempt to rationalize earlier encounters, Allan Edwards remained 
objective. 



54 Alien Base 

I wish to make it clear that I do not claim to have been in contact with beings 
from outer space, since the people ... did not so identify themselves. I can 
only present the facts as I remember them and let the reader form his own 
conclusions. I have placed these people in the category of‘extraordinary’ due 
to the unusual powers that they possessed. It is quite possible that they arc of 
this earth but have reached a higher state of development than the average 
... I cannot help, however, but hope that my intuition is right and that there 
are those ffom other planets who are anxious to assist us in our present 
predicament here on this earth and who, being more spiritually inclined, may 
be able to guide us through the darkness that seems to lie ahead. In reference 
to this, a verse from Hebrews in the New Testament seems pertinent: ‘Let 
brotherly love continue. Be not forgetful to entertain strangers; for thereby 
some have entertained angels unawares.’ 11 

ALIEN ANTICS 

On 23 July 1947, Jose Higgins, a Brazilian topographer, together with a 
team of workers, was surveying an area ofland northeast of Pitanga, State 
of Sao Paulo, Brazil, when a piercing, high-pitched whistling sound was 
heard coming from the sky. Looking up, the men watched as a large disc 
appeared about to land. The workers fled, leaving Higgins to fend for 
himself. 

A ‘strange, circular airship with protruding edges’, as Higgins 
described it, landed about ISO feet away. It appeared to be made of a 
grey-white metal, was about ISO feet wide (not including the edges, 
which were about three feet in width) and was about 1S feet in height. ‘It 
was crossed by tubes in several directions,’ said Higgins, ‘but there was 
no smoke or fire, only that odd sound coming from the tubes.’ The object 
landed on curved metallic-looking poles which bent even more as it 
touched the ground. Higgins approached, and as he came closer he 
noticed a kind of thick window or porthole, through which he could see 
two strange-looking ‘people’ who were eyeing him closely. One turned 
his back as though talking to another in the craft. Suddenly Higgins 
heard a noise from inside and a hatch on the underside of the craft opened 
and three strange beings emerged. 

About seven feet tall, the beings were enclosed in a kind of inflated, 
transparent suit which enveloped them from head to foot. On their backs 
were metal boxes that seemed to be part of die suit. Through the trans¬ 
parent covering, Higgins saw that they were wearing shirts, shorts and 
sandals! The clothes appeared to be made not of cloth, but of a brilliantly 
coloured paper. They had large, round, almost hairless heads, as well as 
large, round, browless eyes, and appeared identical to each other - ‘like 
twins or brothers’. The length of their legs was greater in proportion to 
their bodies than those of normal human beings. 

One of the beings carried a metal tube, which was pointed at Higgins, 



A Festival of Absurdities 


55 


with no apparent effect. They moved around him with amazing agility 
for their size, speaking among themselves in an unknown tongue, then 
the one with the tube motioned for him to approach the entrance of the 
craft. He saw a small chamber with another ‘door’ on the inside, and the 
end of a pipe. He also noticed several round ‘beams’ on the protruding 
edge. Presuming that he was being invited for a trip, Higgins began 
questioning them (in Portuguese), using many gestures, asking where 
they intended to take him. Seeming to understand, one of them made a 
drawing on the ground with a round spot, encircled by seven circles, 
pointed to the Sun in the sky (uttering a word that sounded like ‘Alamo’), 
then to the central spot on the ground, then to their craft and finally to 
the seventh orbit (‘Orque’), repeating the latter gesture several times. 

At this point Higgins became frightened and began to plan his escape. 
He knew it would be useless to fight them but, noticing that the beings 
avoided direct sunlight for more than a few seconds, he walked towards 
the shadow. Taking out a photo of his wife from his wallet, he showed it 
to them, explaining by gestures that he wanted to bring his wife on the 
trip. They seemed to understand, so he casually walked away into the 
nearby forest. Having found a safe place from which he could observe the 
beings without being seen, Higgins was astonished to see them frolicking 
about like children, jumping in the air and throwing huge stones around! 
After about half an hour and a careful examination of their surroundings, 
they returned to their craft, which took off with a whistling sound. 

As researchers Coral and Jim Lorenzen noted, the size and apparent 
strength of the beings, plus their throwing of large stones, could indicate 
that they originated on a planet with a lesser gravitational pull than that 
of Earth; their gambolling antics possibly being experimentation with the 
novelty of the Earth’s gravitational pull. (I agree, and am reminded of the 
Apollo astronauts who performed similar antics when on the Moon.) 

‘1 will never know if they were men or women,’ Higgins told the press 
later. ‘Despite the characteristics I described, they were somehow beauti¬ 
ful and appeared in excellent health.' In company with many contactees, 
Higgins was thoroughly bemused by the experience. ‘Was it a dream? 
Was it real?’ he asked. ‘Sometimes I doubt that these things can happen, 
and then I think that if it was not for the workers together with me in the 
beginning, it might have been a strange and fascinating dream .. ,’ 12 



56 


Alien Base 


NOTES 

1 Machado Carrion, Professor Felipe, ‘The Terrible Death ofJoao Prestes at 
Arapiriguama’, translated from the French by Gordon Creighton, Flying 
Saucer Review, vol. 19, no. 2, March-April 1973, pp. 14-15. This article 
first appeared in Phenomenes Spaliaux, no. 30, December 1971. 

2 Notions Populates, 23 October 1972. 

3 For further details of the ‘ghost rocket’ sightings, see Beyond Top Secret: The 
Worldwide UFO Security Threat by Timothy Good (Sidgwick it Jackson, 
London, 1996). 

4 Alien, Sweden, no. 44, 30 October 1971. 

5 Fredrickson, Sven-Olof, ‘The Angelholm Landing Report', Flying Saucer 
Review, vol. 18, no. 2, March-April 1972, pp.15-17. 

6 Oberth, Professor Hermann, 'They Come from Outer Space', Flying Saucer 
Review, vol. 1, no. 2, May-June 1955, p. 13. 

7 Letter to the author from Bill Gunston, OBE, 24 August 1996. 

8 Oberth, op. cit., p. 14. 

9 Corso, Col. Philip J., with Bimes, William J., The Day After Roswell, Pocket 
Books, New York and London, 1997, p. 160. 

10 Ibid., p. 90. 

11 Edwards, Allan W., ‘An Angel Unawares?’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 7, no. 
1, January-February 1961, pp. 7-10. 

12 Lorenzen, Coral, and Lorenzen, Jim, ‘The Spacemen Threw Stones: 
Another Contact Story from Brazil’, The APRO Bulletin, May 1961, as 
republished in Flying Saucer Review, vol. 7, no. 6, Novcmber-Dcccmbcr 
1961. Higgins’s story was first published in Didrio da Turd*, Curitaba, 
Brazil, 8 August 1947. 




Chapter 4 


Steps to the Stars 


It was the evening of 4 July 1949. For Daniel Fry, a rocket test technician 
employed by Aerojet General Corporation at the vast and remote White 
Sands Proving Grounds in New Mexico, it was to be an Independence 
Day with a difference. 

Fry had planned on going into the town of Las Cruces to celebrate 
with colleagues, but having missed the last motor pool bus, he went back 
to his room and began reading a textbook on heat transfer, a problem of 
considerable relevance to the design of rocket motors. ‘I was soon to learn 
however,’ said Fry, ‘that the problems of heat transfer can become as 
uncomfortable physically as they are interesting academically.’ At 20.00 
the building’s air-conditioning system apparently broke down and it 
became unbearably hot. He decided to go for a walk, hoping it would be 
cooler outside. 

Heading in the direction of an old static test stand, where Aerojet at the 
time were mounting their largest rocket engine for tests, Fry then 
decided to take a different route that led off towards the base of the Organ 
Mountains. Scanning the evening sky, he was surprised to notice one 
star, then another, then two more, ‘going out’. Suddenly, the outline of 
an object of some sort, blending with the dark blue of the sky, appeared 
to be headed in his direction. ‘As it continued to come toward me, I felt 
a strong inclination to run,’ he explained, ‘but experience in rocketry had 
taught me that it is foolish to run from an approaching missile until you 
are sure of its trajectory, since there is no way to judge the trajectory of 
an approaching object if you are running. ’ 

The object was now less than a few hundred feet away, moving more 
slowly and seeming to decelerate. Its shape was an oblate spheroid with a 
diameter at its largest part of about 30 feet. ‘Somewhat reassured by its 
rapid deceleration,’ continued Fry, ‘I remained where I was and watched 
it glide, as lightly as a bit of thistledown floating in the breeze. About 70 
feet away from where I was standing, it settled to the ground without the 
slightest bump or jar. Except for the crackling of the brush upon which 
it had settled, there had been no sound at all. For what seemed a long time 

.1 stared at the now motionless object as a child might stare at the rab¬ 
bit which a stage magician has just pulled from his hat. I knew it was 



58 


Alien Base 


impossible, but there it was!’ 

Fry had been employed for many years in the burgeoning field of 
astronautics, yet never before had he seen such a device. As Vice- 
President of Crescent Engineering and Research Company in California, 
for example, he developed a number of parts for the guidance system of 
the Atlas missile, while at Aerojet he was in charge of installation of 
instruments for missile control and guidance systems. ‘Obviously, the 
intelligence and the technology that had designed and built this vehicle 
had found the answers to a number of questions which even our most 
advanced physicists have not yet learned to ask,’ Fry commented. He 
then cautiously approached to within a few feet of the landed craft and 
listened for any sign of life or sound from within. There was none. 

I began to circle slowly about the craft so that I could examine it more com¬ 
pletely. It was ... a spheroid, considerably flattened at the top and bottom. 
The vertical dimension was about 16 feet, and the horizontal dimension 
about 30 feet at the widest point, which was about seven feet from the ground. 
Its curvature was such that, if viewed from directly below, it might appear to 
be saucer-shaped, but actually it was more nearly like a soup bowl inverted 
over a sauce dish. 

The dark blue tint which it had seemed to have when in the air was gone 
now, and the surface appeared to be of highly polished metal, silvery in color, 
but with a slight violet sheen. I walked completely around the thing without 
seeing any sign of doors, windows or even seams ... 1 stepped forward and 
cautiously extended my index finger until it touched the metal surface. It was 
only a few degrees above the air temperature, but it had a quality of smooth¬ 
ness that seized my attention at once. It was simply impossible to produce any 
friction between my fingertip and the metal. No matter how firmly I pressed 
my finger on the metal, it drifted around on the surface as though there were 
a million tiny ball-bearings between my finger and the metal. I then began to 
stroke the metal with the palm of my hand, and could feel a slight but definite 
tingling in the tips of my fingers and the heel of my palm. 

THE VOICE 

Suddenly, a loud male voice came out of nowhere: ‘Better not touch the 
hull, pal, it’s still hot!’ Shocked, Fry leaped backwards several feet, catch¬ 
ing his heel in a low bush and sprawling full length in the sand. 
Something like a low chuckle was heard, then the voice came back: ‘Take 
it easy, pal, you’re among friends.’ Recovering himself, Fry looked 
around for some person or gadget from which the voice came, but could 
see none. He complained to the voice that it should turn the volume 
down. ‘Sorry, buddy, but you were in the process of killing yourself and 
there wasn’t time to diddle with controls,’ came the response. ‘Do you 
mean the hull is highly radioactive?’ asked Fry. ‘If so, I am much too 
close.’ 



Steps to the Stars 


‘It isn’t radioactive in the sense that you use the word,’ replied the 
voice. ‘I used the term “hot” because it was the only one I could think of 
in your language to explain the condition. The hull has a field about it 
which repels all other matter. Your physicists would describe the force 
involved as the “anti” particle of the binding energy of the atom.’ The 
‘voice’ expounded at length, and one must wonder at how Fry could have 
recalled so much detail: 

When certain elements such as platinum are properly prepared and treated 
with a saturation exposure to a beam of very high-energy photons, the anti¬ 
binding energy particle will be generated outside the nucleus. Since these 
particles tend to repel each other, as well as all other matter, they, like the 
electron, tend to migrate to the surface of the metal where they manifest as a 
repellent force. The particles have a fairly long half-life, so that the normal 
cosmic radiation received by the craft when in space is sufficient to maintain 
an effective charge. The field is very powerful at molecular distances but, like 
the binding energy, it follows the seventh power law so that the force becomes 
negligible a few microns away from the surface of the hull. 

Perhaps you noticed that the hull seemed unusually smooth and slippery. 
That is because your flesh did not actually come into contact with the metal 
but was held a short distance from it by the repulsion of the field. We use the 
field to protect the hull from being scratched or damaged during landings. It 
also lowers air friction greatly when it becomes necessary to travel at high 
speed through any atmosphere. The field produces an almost perfect laminar 
flow of air or any gas about the craft, and little heat is generated or transmit¬ 
ted to the hull. 

‘But how would this kill me?’ asked Fry. ‘I did touch the hull and felt 
only a slight tingle in my hand. And what did you mean by that remark 
about my language? You sound pretty much American to me.’ 

Replying to the first question, the voice explained that Fry would have 
probably died within a few months from exposure to the ‘force field’, 
which produces ‘what you would describe as “antibodies” ’ in the blood 
stream that are absorbed by the liver, causing the latter to become greatly 
enlarged and congested. ‘In your case,’ continued the voice, ‘the expo¬ 
sure was so short and over such a small area that you are not in any great 
danger, although you will probably feel some effects sooner or later, pro¬ 
vided, of course, that your biological functions are similar to ours, and we 
have good reason to believe they are.’ The voice continued: 

As to your second question, I am not an American such as you, nor even an 
‘Earthian’, although my present assignment requires me to become both. The 
feet that you believed me to be one of your countrymen is a testimonial to the 
effort I have expended to learn and to practise your language. If you talked 
with me for any length of time, however, you would begin to notice that my 
vocabulary is fer from complete, and many of my words would seem outdated 



60 


Alien Base 


and perhaps obsolete. As a matter of fact, I have never yet set foot upon your 
planet. It will require at least four more of your years for me to become 
adapted to your environment, including your stronger gravity, [and] your 
atmosphere ... I will also require the complete co-operation of someone like 
yourself who is already a resident of the planet. 

Fry stood silently for what seemed a long time, attempting to come to 
terms with the profound implications of what he had seen and heard. The 
conversation then continued, with Fry asking a variety of questions, the 
first dealing with his reactions to the experience. The voice was 
encouraging: 

One of the purposes of this visit is to determine the basic adaptability of the 
Earth’s peoples, particularly your ability to adjust your minds quickly to con¬ 
ditions and concepts completely foreign to your customary modes of thought. 
Previous expeditions by our ancestors, over a period of many centuries, met 
with almost total failure in this respect. This time there is hope that we may 
find minds somewhat more receptive so that we may assist you in the 
progress, or at least in the continued existence of your race... The fact that, 
in spite of being in circumstances completely unique in your experience, you 
are listening calmly to my voice and making logical replies is the best evidence 
that your mind is of the type we hoped to find. 

Fry thanked the voice, but pointed out that this statement implied that 
he was to be used in some project involving the advancement of the 
people of Earth. ‘Why me?’ he asked. ‘Is it just because I accidentally 
happened to be here when you landed? I could easily put you in touch 
with a number of men right here at the test base who could be of far more 
value to you than I.’ 

‘Perhaps they could,’ came the reply, ‘but would they?’ 

If you think you are here by accident, you greatly underestimate our abilities. 
Why do you think the dispatcher at your motor pool gave you incorrect infor¬ 
mation? Why did you think your air-conditioning system had failed tonight 
when, as a matter of fact, it was functioning perfectly? Why do you think you 
turned off on this small road, when your intention had been to go to your 
static test stand? And finally, why do you think you changed your mind about 
going back to your base to report [as had been Fry's initial intention] the 
arrival of our sampling carrier? It is seldom that we superimpose our will 
upon that of others... but this is a case of such urgency for your people that 
we felt an exception to the rule was warranted ... 

The voice went on to request Fry’s assistance in a planned programme 
for ‘the welfare, and in fact for the preservation of’ Earth’s people. 
Several years would pass, Fry was told, before his services would be 
required. ‘We will be glad to offer you a short test flight in the sampling 
craft if it will help you to decide that we are what we say, and that our 



Steps to the Stars 


61 


technology has much for you to learn,’ said the voice, and continued: 
The craft is a remotely controlled samplingdevice, or cargo carrier, and while 
I am speaking through its communication system, I am not in it. I am in a 
much larger deep space transport ship, or what you would call a ‘Mother 
Ship’. At present, it is some 900 of your miles above the surface of your 
planet, which is as close as ships of this size are permitted to approach any 
planet with an appreciable atmosphere. The cargo craft is being used to bring 
us samples of your atmosphere so that my lungs may gradually become accus- 

All of the previous atmosphere that was in the craft was allowed to escape 
while it was in space, by the opening of the remotely controlled valve in the 
top. There is now an almost perfect vacuum inside. When the port is again 
opened, which I shall do now, your air will rush in to fill the craft, and we will 
have a large-scale sample of your atmosphere, together with any micro¬ 
organisms which may be present in it. We need these also, for study and for 
immunization. Your breathing of the atmosphere during this short demon¬ 
stration flight will, of course, distort this particular sample somewhat, but we 
will have ample opportunity to obtain others before my adaptation to the 
environment of your planet is complete. 

INSIDE THE CRAFT 

A sound - partly a hiss and partly a murmur - came from the top of the 
craft. This lasted for about IS seconds, then all became quiet again. ‘Any 
port large enough to have filled a ship of that size with air in 15 seconds 
should have produced quite a roar,’ Fry reasoned. ‘I realized then that the 
walls of the ship were almost, if not entirely, soundproof, and since most 
of the sound of the entering air would be produced inside, very little 
would be audible outside.’ 

A single click was then heard coming from the lower wall of the craft, 
and a section of the lower side of the hull moved back on itself for a few 
inches then moved sideways, disappearing into the wall of the hull and 
leaving an oval-shaped opening about five feet in height and some three 
feet in width at its widest point. Fry walked towards the hatch and, duck¬ 
ing slightly, went inside the craft. With his feet still on the ground, owing 
to the curvature of the craft, he looked around. 

The compartment into which I was looking occupied only a small portion of 
the interior of the ship. It was a room about nine feet deep and seven feet 
wide, with a floor about 16 inches above the ground and a ceiling between six 
and seven feet above the floor. The walls were slightly curved and the inter¬ 
sections of the walls were bevelled so that there were no sharp angles or 

The room contained four seats; they looked much like our modern body 
contour chairs, except that they were somewhat smaller.. . The seats faced 
the opening in which I was standing, and were arranged in two rows of two 



62 


Alien Base 


each in the center of the room, leaving an aisle between the seats and either 
wall. In the center of the rear wall, where it joined the ceiling, there was a 
small box or cabinet with a tube and what appeared to be a lens arrangement- 
It was somewhat similar to a small motion picture camera or projector, except 
that no film spools or other moving parts were visible. Light was coming from 
the lens. It was not a beam of light such as would have come from a projec¬ 
tor, but a diffused glow ... it still furnished ample light for comfortable see¬ 
ing in the small compartment 



Fig. 3. A diagram of the remotely-controlled craft. 

Fry noted that the seats and the light seemed to be the only furnish¬ 
ings in an otherwise bare metal room. ‘Not a very inviting cabin,' he 
thought, ‘looks more like a cell.’ 

‘It’s only a sampling carrier,’ said the voice, in response to Fry’s un¬ 
spoken thought, ’and was not really designed or intended to carry pas¬ 
sengers: the small compartment was designed for emergencies only, but 
you will find the seats quite comfortable. Step in and take a seat if you 
wish to make this test flight.’ 

Fry stepped up on to the floor and headed towards the nearest seat. As 
he did so, he heard a click as the door began to slide out of the recess in 
the wall behind him. ‘Instinctively, I turned as though to leap out to the 
comparative safety of the open desert behind me, but the door was 
already closed. If this was a trap, I was in it now, and there was no point 
in struggling against the inevitable.’ 

‘Where would you like to go?’ asked the voice, now seeming to come 
from all around Fry, rather than beside him, as before. ‘I don’t know how 
far you can take me in whatever time you have,’ he replied. ‘And since 
this compartment has no windows, it won’t matter which way we go, as I 






Steps to the Stars 


63 


won’t be able to see anything.’ 

‘Vou will be able to see,’ came the reply, ‘at least, as much as you could 
see from any of your vehicles in the air at night. If you would like a sug¬ 
gestion, we can take you over the city of New York and return you here 
in about 30 minutes. At an elevation of about 20 of your miles, the light 
patterns of your major cities take on an especially fascinating appearance 
which we have never seen in connection with any other planet.’ 

‘To New York - and back - in 30 minutes?’ retorted Fry. ‘Your 
minutes must be very different from ours. New York is 2,000 miles from 
here. A round trip would be 4,000 miles. To do it in half an hour would 
require a speed of 8,000 miles per hour! How can you produce and apply 
energies of that order in a craft like this, and how can I take the accelera¬ 
tion? You don’t even have belts on these seats!’ 

‘You won’t feel the acceleration at all,’ came the reassuring reply. ‘Just 
take a scat and I will start the craft...’ 

Fry took the seat nearest to the door and found it to be quite comfort¬ 
able. ‘The material of which it was made felt like foam rubber with a 
vinylite covering. However, there were no seams or joints such as an 
outer covering would require, so the material, whatever it was, probably 
had been moulded directly into its frame in a single operation.’ 

ON RENDERING MATERIALS TRANSLUCENT 
‘I will now turn off the compartment light and activate the viewing 
beam,’ said the voice. For a moment the room became completely dark. 
Then a beam of light came from the projector. ‘The beam, or the part of 
it which was visible at all, was a deep violet, at the very top of the visible 
spectrum,’ Fry explained. ‘The beam was focused so as to exactly cover 
the door through which I had come, and under its influence the door 
became totally transparent. It was as though I were looking through the 
finest type of plate glass or lucite window.’ 

As the voice went on to say that a few of the basic technical principles 
would be explained, Fry began to realize that the words he had been hear¬ 
ing were probably not coming to his ears as sound waves but seemed to 
be originating directly in his brain. The voice continued: 

As you see, the door has become transparent. This startles you because you 
are accustomed to thinking of metals as being completely opaque. However, 
ordinary glass is just as dense as many metals and harder than most, and yet 
transmits light quite readily. Most matter is opaque to light because the pho¬ 
tons of light are captured and absorbed in the electron orbits of the atoms 
through which they pass. This capture will occur whenever the frequency of 
the photon matches one of the frequencies of the atom. The energy thus 
stored is soon re-emitted, but usually in the infra-red portion of the spec¬ 
trum, which is below the range of visibility, and so cannot be seen as light, 



64 


Alien Base 


There are several ways in which matter can be made transparent, or at least 
translucent. 

One method is to create a field matrix between the atoms which will tend 
to prevent the photon from being absorbed. Such a matrix develops in many 
substances during crystalization. Another is to raise the frequency of the pho¬ 
ton above the highest absorption frequency of the atoms. The beam of energy 
which is now acting upon the metal of the door is what you would call a ‘fre¬ 
quency multiplier'. The beam penetrates the metal and acts upon any light 
that reaches it in such a way that the resulting frequency is raised to that 
between the ranges which you describe as the ‘X-ray’ and the ‘Cosmic Ray’ 
spectrums. At these frequencies, the waves pass through the metal quite 
readily. Then, when these leave the metal on the inner side of the door, they 
again interact with the viewing beam, producing what you would describe as 
‘beat frequencies' which are identical with the original frequencies of the 
light. As a rough analogy, the system could be compared to the carrier wave 
of one of your radio broadcasting stations, except that the modulation is 
applied ‘upstream’ as it were, instead of at the source of the carrier. 

EARTH’S BROADCASTS MONITORED 

Fry remarked that, for one who had never set foot on Earth, his unseen 
host seemed extraordinarily familiar with our terrestrial technology. 
‘You are underestimating our technology,’ came the reply. 

You have no idea of the amount of close-range observation to which your 
planet has been subjected by passing space craft during the past few genera¬ 
tions. The radio messages and programs which you continually hurl into 
space can readily be monitored by our receiving equipment, at distances 
equal to several times the diameter of your solar system. Within such a 
volume of space there will always be at least a few ships either passing 
through the system or pausing to store up energy from its solar radiation. Any 
data received from earthly broadcasts which is considered to be of potential 
interest to other races will be recorded and relayed to more distant receiving 
points which will relay in turn, until the data is ultimately available to much 
of the galaxy. 

LIFT-OFF 

The voice announced the imminent departure of the craft. ‘A moment 
later, the ground suddenly fell away from the ship with almost incred¬ 
ible rapidity,’ said Fry. ‘I did not feel the slightest sense of motion 
myself, and the ship seemed to be as steady as a rock ... the lights of 
the army base at the proving ground, which had been hidden by a low 
hill, instantly came into sight... A few seconds later the lights of the 
town of Las Cruces came into view . . and 1 knew that we must have 
risen at least 1,000 feet in those few seconds. The ship was rotating 
slightly to my left as it rose, and I was able to see the highway from Las 



Steps to the Stars 


65 


Cruces to El Paso [Texas] ... I could even distinguish the very thin 
dark line of the Rio Grande... The surface of the Earth appeared to be 
glowing with a slightly greenish phosphorescence. The sky outside the 
ship had become much darker, and the stars seemed to have doubled in 
brilliance.’ He assumed that the craft had now entered the stratosphere, 
in which case an altitude of more than 10 miles must have been attained 
in no more than 20 seconds, and without the slightest sense of acceler- 

‘You are now about 13 miles above the surface,’ announced the voice, 
‘and you are rising at about one half-mile per second. We have brought 
you up rather slowly so that you might have a better opportunity to view 
your cities from the air. We will take you up 35 miles for the horizontal 
flight...’ 

GRAVITATIONAL FIELDS 

The voice explained the question of acceleration and why it had no effect 
on the occupants of their craft; a question ‘which seems to have come up 
quite often in the minds of the men of science, and many others of your 

Whenever our sampling devices or landing vehicles have been observed by 
them, and when the velocities and acceleration are described, disbelief is 
always apparent. .. This has been one of the causes of disappointment to us 
in our evaluation of the intelligence of the people of Earth ... The answer is 
simply that the force which we use to accelerate our vehicles is identical in 
nature to a gravitational field. It acts, not only upon every atom of the vehicle, 
but equally upon every atom of mass that is within it, including the mass of 
the pilot and any passengers. Regardless of the intensity of the field therefore, 
every particle of mass within the influence of the field is in a uniform state of 
acceleration or, as you would term it, free fall, with respect to the field. Under 
these circumstances acceleration has no effect upon the vehicle or anything 
within it. 

‘But in that case,’ asked Fry, ‘why am I not floating around in the air 
as things are supposed to do in a missile that is in free fall?’ Back came the 
answer: 

Before the ship’s own field was generated, it was resting upon the earth, and 
you were resting upon the seat. There was a force of one gravity acting 
between your body and your seat. Since the force which accelerates both the 
ship and your body acts in exact proportion to the mass, and since the Earth’s 
gravity continues to act upon both, the original force between your body and 
the seat will remain constant except that it will decrease as the force of grav¬ 
ity of the planet decreases with distance. When traveling between planetary 
or stellar bodies far from any natural gravity source, we find it necessary, for 
practical reasons, to reproduce this force artificially. 




66 


Alien Base 


The gravity to which we are accustomed is but little more than one-half 
that of Earth. It is one of the reasons that it will require so much time for one 
of us to become completely acclimatized to your environment. If I were to 
land now upon your planet, I could tolerate the doubled gravitational force 
for a time but the double weight of all my internal organs would cause them 
to be displaced downward, seriously hampering their functions. The differ¬ 
ence in blood pressure between head and feet when standing erect would be 
double that to which we are accustomed, and there would be several other 
complications ... If, on the other hand, I remain in my own ship, the gravi¬ 
tational force to which I am subject can be increased by small but regular 
increments: the supporting tissues will gradually increase in size and strength 
until, eventually, your gravity will become as normal to me as my own is now. 

Fry asked for an explanation of the craft’s propulsion system, specifi¬ 
cally as it related to the tremendous amount of energy presumably re¬ 
quired to accelerate the ship to such fantastic velocities. The voice began 
by saying that there were several concepts and words which did not yet 
exist in human vocabulary, or even in human consciousness, to allow for 
a complete explanation. But after several analogies by way of simplifica¬ 
tion, he continued: 

The large drum-like structure just above the central bulkhead is the differ¬ 
ential accumulator. It is essentially a storage battery that is capable of being 
charged from a number of natural energy sources. We can charge it from the 
energy banks of our own ship, but this is seldom necessary. In your strato¬ 
sphere, for example, there are several layers of ionized gas which, although 
they are rarefied, are also highly charged. By placing the ship in a planetary 
orbit at this level, it is able to collect, during each orbit, several times the 
energy required to place it in orbit It would also, of course, collect a signifi¬ 
cant number of high-energy electrons from the Sun. 

By the term ‘charging the differential accumulator’ I merely mean that a 
potential difference is created between two poles of the accumulator. The 
accumulator material has available free electrons in quantities beyond any¬ 
thing of which you could conceive. The control mechanism allows these elec¬ 
trons to flow through various segments of the force rings which you see at the 
top and bottom of the craft. . . The tremendous surge of electrons through 
the force rings creates a very strong magnetic field. Since the direction and 
amplitude of the flow can be controlled through either ring, and in several 
paths through a single ring, we can create a field which oscillates in a pattern 
of very precisely controlled modes. In this way we can create magnetic reson¬ 
ance between the two rings or between the several segments of a single ring. 

As you know, any magnetic field which is changing in intensity will create 
an electric field which, at any given instant, is equal in amplitude, opposite in 
sign and perpendicular to the magnetic field. If the two fields become mutu¬ 
ally resonant, a vector force will be generated. Unless the amplitude and the 
frequency of the resonance are quite high, the vector field will be very small, 



Steps lo the Stars 


67 


and may pass unnoticed. However, the amplitude of the vector field increases 
at a greater rate than the two fields which generate it and, at high resonance 
levels, becomes very strong. The vector field, whose direction is perpendic¬ 
ular to each of the other two, creates an effect similar to, and in fact identical 
with, a gravitational field. 

If the center of the field coincides with the craft’s center of mass, the only 
effect will be to increase the inertia, or mass, of the craft. If the center of mass 
does not coincide with the center of force, the craft will tend to accelerate 
toward that center. Since the system which creates the field is a part of the 
ship, it will, of course, move with the ship, and will continue constantly to 
generate a field whose center of attraction is just ahead of the ship's center of 
mass, so that the ship will continue to accelerate as long as the field is gener¬ 
ated ... To slow or stop the craft, the controls are adjusted so that the field is 
generated with its center just behind the center of mass, so that negative 
acceleration will result. 

UNCONVENTIONAL COMMUNICATION 

‘Incidentally,’ remarked Fry at one point, ‘I don’t even know your name, 

or do you people not have given names?’ 

'We have names, though there is seldom any occasion to use them 
among ourselves. If I become a member of your race, I shall use the name 
Alan, which is a common name in your country and is nearly the same as 
my given name, which is pronounced as though it were spelled “Ah- 
lahn”.’ 

Alan said that, whenever it became necessary, Fry would be contacted 
again, though not necessarily by conventional means. ‘We have recorded 
your exact frequency pattern,’ he said (a method reported by Albert 
Coe), and went on briefly to discuss mental telepathy, or ‘extra-sensory 
perception’: 

In the first place, it isn’t extra-sensory at all. It is just as much a part of the 
body’s normal perception equipment as any of the others, except that during 
one phase of the development of the race it falls into disuse because it is a 
rather public form of communication, and during this phase of development 
the individual requires a considerable degree of privacy in his words and 
thoughts. Most of your animals use the sense to a greater degree than your 
people, and for some of your insects, it is the only form of communication ... 

Communication could also be established by means of small, remotely 
controlled probes, as well as directly, using ‘electronic beam modulation 
of the auditory nerve’, Alan claimed. 

FREE FALL 

Prior to Alan’s elaborate explanation of propulsion, the craft had flown 
over New York City - at a reduced height of 20 miles and a reduced 



68 


Alien Base 


velocity of 600 m.p.h., affording Fry an excellent view. ‘The differing 
temperatures of the various air strata beneath me,’ he wrote, ‘caused the 
lights to twinkle violently, so that the entire city was a sea of pulsing, 
shimmering luminescence.’ 

Before the return trip, Alan offered Fry the chance of experiencing 
‘free fell’. ‘To reach this condition fully under the present circumstances 
would be somewhat dangerous,’ said Alan, ‘but we can approach it 
closely enough so that while you will still retain some stability, you will 
experience the sensation of weightlessness.’ 

‘Instantly the compartment light came on,’ said Fry. “While I was 
attempting to adjust my eyes to the light, my stomach suddenly leaped 
upward toward my chest.’ Although having been through steep dives and 
sharp pullouts in aircraft, and ridden in many devices at amusement 
parks, he had never experienced anything like this. 

‘There was no sensation of felling. It simply felt as though my organs, 
having been released from a heavy strain, were springing upward like 
elastic bands when released from tension... In a few seconds I felt almost 
normal again.’ Pushing down with his hands on the seat, he then rose 
slowly to the ceiling, though his body rotated and tipped forward so that 
he came to rest with his knees on the chair and his eyes only a few inches 
from the back cushion. 

PLANETARY INDEPENDENCE 

Fry was rather shocked to notice a very earthly symbol imprinted on the 
material of his seat. It was that of the tree and the serpent - the caduceus. 
‘It is found, in one form or another, in the legends, the inscriptions and 
the carvings of virtually every one of our early races,’ he said. ‘It has 
always seemed to me a peculiarly earthly symbol, and it was startling to 
see it appear from the depths of space, or from whatever planet you call 
home.’ Alan responded: 

It is difficult even to outline, in a few minutes of discussion, the events of 
many centuries. For it has been centuries since we have called any planet 
home. The space ships upon which we live, and work and learn, have been 
our only home for generations. Like all space-dwelling races, we are now 
essentially independent of planets. Some of our craft are very large, judged 
by your standards, since they are many times larger than your largest ships. 
We have no personal need to approach or land upon any planet, except occa¬ 
sionally to obtain raw materials for new construction, and that we usually 
obtain from asteroids or uninhabited satellites [moons]. 

Our ships are closed systems. That is, all matter within the craft remains 
there; nothing is emitted, ejected or lost from it. We have learned simple 
methods of reducing all compounds to their elements, and for recombining 
them in any form ... For example, we breathe in the same manner as you do. 


Steps to the Stars 


69 


That is, our lungs take in oxygen from the air, and some of that oxygen is con¬ 
verted to carbon-dioxide in the body processes. Therefore, the air in our ship 
is constantly passed through solutions which contain plant-like organisms 
which absorb carbon-dioxide, use the carbon in their own growth, and return 
the oxygen to the air. Eventually those plants become one of our foods... 

It may be difficult for you to conceive of a race of intelligent beings who 
spend all of their lives within the relatively restricted confines of a space ship. 
You may even be inclined to feel pity for such a race. We, on the other hand, 
are inclined to feel pity for the relatively primitive races which are still con¬ 
fined to the surface of a single planet, where they are unable to control . . , 
earthquakes, floods, tornadoes, tidal waves, blizzards, drought, and a dozen 
other hazards . .. 

While our bodies seldom leave the ship, our technology has provided us 
with almost unlimited extensions of our senses so that ... we can be intim¬ 
ately present at any time and at any place which we may choose, providing 
that the place is within a few thousand miles of our ship. Through a portion 
of our technology which your race has not yet begun to acquire, we are able 
to generate and apply simple forces at points quite remote from our craft. Our 
abilities may be somewhat startling and incredible to some of your people but 
they are not actually as startling and incredible as the scientific knowledge 
and abilities your people now have, compared to those which your ancestors 
possessed a few hundred years ago .. . 

A COMMON ANCESTRY 

Alan explained that the symbol of the tree and the serpent was not unique 
to Earth. It is a natural one, ‘perhaps because life is said to originate in the 
waters of a planet, and the undulations of a serpent are a convenient sym¬ 
bol for the waves of a sea. The tree is almost always the symbol of life, 
beginning in the sea, rising to the atmosphere, and finally into space.’ But 
there was another factor, he added, that perhaps was significant. 

Your people, and some of mine, including myself, have, at least in part, a 
common ancestry. Tens of thousands of years ago, some of our ancestors 
lived upon this planet, Earth. There was, at that time, a small continent in a 
part of the now sea-covered area which you have named the Pacific Ocean. 
Some of your ancient legends refer to this sunken land mass as the ‘Lost 
Continent of Lcmuria, or Mu’. 

Our ancestors had built a great empire and a mighty science upon this con¬ 
tinent. At the same time, there was another rapidly developing race upon a 
land mass in the south-west portion of the present Atlantic Ocean. In your 
legends, this continent has been named Atlantis. There was rivalry between 
the two cultures, in their material and technological progress. It was friendly 
at first, but became bitter ... In a few centuries their science had passed the 
point which your race has reached. Not content with releasing a few crumbs 
of the binding energy of the atom, as your science is now doing, they had 
learned to rotate entire masses upon the energy axis. Energies equal to 7S 



70 


Alien Base 


million of your kilowatt hours were released by the conversion of a bit of 
matter about the mass of one of your copper pennies. 

With the increasing bitterness between the two races... it was inevitable 
that they would eventually destroy each other. The energies released in that 
destruction were beyond all human imagination. They were sufficient to 
cause major shifts in the surface configuration of the planet, and the resulting 
nuclear radiation was so intense and so widespread that the entire surface 
became virtually unfit for habitation, for a number of generations. 

RETURN TO EARTH 

Alan told Fry that further discussion had to await another meeting, as 
time was up and they had landed back at White Sands. ‘It is on the 
ground now, and I will open the door,' he said. ‘We will wait until you 
are a little distance from the craft before we retrieve it. . . Take care of 
yourself until we return.’ 

Dazed after such a fantastic experience, Fry stepped down and stum¬ 
bled several paces through the sand before turning to look at the craft. 
The door had closed behind me and, as I turned, a horizontal band of orange- 
colored light appeared about the central, or widest part of the ship, and it 
leaped upward as though it had been released from a catapult. The air rush¬ 
ing in to replace that which had been displaced upward impelled me a full 
step forward and almost caused me to lose my balance. 1 managed to keep my 
eyes on the craft while the band of light went through the colors of the spec¬ 
trum from orange to violet. As the light went through the violet band, the 
craft had risen several thousands of feet in the air, and I could follow it no 
longer. 

Fry then became thoroughly depressed. It was as if his life’s work had 
lost all significance. ‘A few hours before, I had been a rather self-satisfied 
engineer, setting up instruments for the testing of one of the largest 
rocket motors in existence. While I realized that my part in the project 
was a small one, I felt that, through my work, I was traveling in the fore¬ 
front of progress. Now I knew that rocket motors ... had been obsolete 
for thousands of years. I felt like a small and insignificant cog in a clumsy 
and backward science, which was moving toward its own destruction.’ 

Fry did not report or mention his experience to anyone, partly because 
he had tacitly given his agreement to Alan not to do so, and also because 
he was convinced no one would believe him. He continued rather unen¬ 
thusiastically with his work, testing various types and sizes of rocket 
motor. Alan had said he would return in a few months, and Fry grew 
restless. After the first series of tests were completed, he went back home 
to California, then returned to the base for a second series of tests. 

One evening, after Fry had driven from his quarters at the ‘H’ build¬ 
ing to the test site’s instrument room, he saw an unusual glowing object. 



Steps to the Stars 


about a foot in diameter, Walking towards it, he suddenly heard Alan’s 
voice, as if beside him. ‘Yes, Dan, it’s ours, Since we are not using the 
sampling craft now, we thought it best to send down a small communi¬ 
cations amplifier. We could get along without it, but it does [reduce] the 
chance of error in our communications almost to zero.’ After allowing 
Fry to calm down following the shock, Alan went on to explain that he 
would eventually be able to successfully adapt his body to Earth’s 
environment, but that he would need help. 

‘If you do not wish to assist us,’ he continued, ‘all memory of this meet¬ 
ing and the previous one will be erased from your mind ... If, on the 
other hand, you do decide to assist us, you may find yourself in a situa¬ 
tion that is not easy to endure ... The only reward we can promise you 
is the inward satisfaction of having assisted in the survival of your race, 
and the acquisition of considerable knowledge and understanding that 
you would not otherwise be able to gain.’ Fry gave his consent. 

Alan first asked Fry to gather a number of textbooks dealing with the 
English language and mathematics. Regarding the latter, Alan explained 
that his system was based on multiples of 12, rather than 10, and that it 
would take him a while to master the ‘new’ system. These textbooks, he 
said, should be placed on a certain ledge at the test stand, where they 
would be ‘collected’ by a small sampling device, then analysed, copied, 
and returned 24 hours later. The arrangement worked well. On several 
occasions, Fry obtained books (including the Bible) for Alan from the 
base library, and on each occasion they were returned safely, 

FURTHER COMMUNICATION 

It was not until April 1954 that Alan once again re-established commu¬ 
nications with Daniel Fry. At the time, Fry was relaxing in his retreat, 
deep in the woods of southern Oregon. As before, Alan was not present 
in person, but his voice was unmistakable. No device was used on this 
occasion; instead, communication was supposedly achieved directly via 
‘electronically boosted telepathy’. 

Alan began by admonishing Fry for not having spoken publicly about 
his experience. Fry replied that, in the first place, he was afraid that any 
report by him might endanger Alan’s proposed visit to Earth; secondly, 
he was unknown, apart from within the rocket industry. How therefore 
could he reach the people? 

‘Those who are not blind to the truth can recognize the value of a mes¬ 
sage regardless of the status of the messenger,’ Alan responded. ‘Our 
estimate of four years for adaptation to your environment was over- 
optimistic. The actual time will be closer to five. In the meantime, one of 
your major problems is becoming critical. Unless some small balancing 
force is applied in the right quarters, your entire civilization may wipe 




72 


Alien Base 


itself out. ., before we are in a position to be of assistance.' 

Fry was asked to write down his experiences in a book, and to repeat 
through newspapers, radio and television what he had learned. ‘You 
don’t realize what you are asking,’ said Fry. ‘If I attempt to make public 
the information you have given me, it will only mean that I will be 
scorned and ridiculed ... If I give a statement to our newspapers, they 
will either ignore it or print a comic distorted version.’ 

‘Of course you will be ridiculed,’ was the reply. ‘Ridicule is the pro¬ 
tective barrier which the timid or the ignorant erect between themselves 
and any possibility which frightens or disturbs them ... It is the price 
exacted from every individual who is as much as one step in advance of 
his fellows.’ 

‘Why don’t you just set a small landing craft down on the White House 
lawn some morning, ask for worldwide communications facilities, and 
give your information and advice to the whole world at once?’ asked Fry. 
‘Such a simple solution is only wishful thinking on your part,’ replied 
Alan. ‘If you think a little, you will see that there are many reasons . 
why such a course would not be successful.’ 

.. If we were to appear as members of a superior race, coming from ‘above’ 
to lead the people of your world, our arrival would seriously disrupt the ego 
balance of your society. Tens of millions of your people, in their desperate 
need to avoid being demoted to second place in the universe, would go to any 
lengths to disprove, or simply deny, our existence. If we took steps to force 
the acceptance of our reality upon their consciousness, about 30 per cent of 
the people would insist upon considering us as Gods, and would attempt to 
place upon us all responsibility for their own welfare. This is a responsibility 
we would not be permitted to assume, even if we were able to discharge it... 
Most of the remaining 70 per cent would adopt the belief that we were plan¬ 
ning to enslave their world, and many would begin to seek means to destroy 
us. If any great and lasting good is to come from our efforts, they must be led 
by your own people, or at least by those who are accepted as such ... 

INFILTRATION 

To travel about the Earth, Alan explained, he would of course require a 
passport (!) - unobtainable without a birth certificate. ‘Since my origin 
was actually extraterrestrial, there is no legal way in which I can obtain 
cither a birth certificate or a passport, yet I must have both,’ he said. ‘It 
was therefore necessary to find a County Registrar who could understand 
the need for my being here, and be willing to assist, even at some risk to 
himself. . . We will arrange for you to meet him, and you must become 
well acquainted since it will be up to you to conduct the negotiations.’ He 
continued: 

We have made a careful analysis of the steps to be taken so that I may move 



Steps to the Stars 


cosily, and unnoticed, among your people ... I must have a profession, or at 
least a gainful occupation, preferably one which is generally known to and 
accepted by the public, but which is normally conducted in private . . . The 
ideal occupation would be that of a purchasing agent in an international trad¬ 
ing concern. Such a position would furnish a means of livelihood, a good 
background cover, and an excellent excuse to visit other countries whenever 
it might become necessary. It would also provide a non-political contact with 
most of the governments of your world, since every country, whether 
friendly or not, has things which it wishes either to buy or to sell. 

Another problem would involve opening a bank account. ‘It seems that 
most of your money systems are related to the value of gold,’ Alan went 
on. ‘I will therefore arrange to have a few pounds of the metal delivered 
to you here, so that you can exchange it for your currency and open an 
account in my name.’ 

‘Not gold,’ Fry objected. ‘Gold has too many legal strings attached, 
and anyone who offers it for sale must be able to prove its source. If you 
happen to have some small ingots of platinum handy, they will do nicely. 
The demand for platinum somewhat exceeds the supply, so that it is not 
difficult to sell, and its present value is several times that of gold.’ 

‘Very well,’ agreed Alan, ‘platinum it will be, although it seems strange 
to think of it as having so much value among your people ... While plat¬ 
inum is an excellent substance for the plating of surfaces that will be 
exposed to corrosion, and most of our space ships are plated with it, it has 
few other uses in our technology.’ 

THE SURVIVORS 

During this same lengthy communication in April 1954, Alan described 
what had happened to the survivors of the devastating conflict that had 
destroyed an entire civilization tens of thousands of years ago. On a high 
plateau in what is now Tibet, six of the surviving aerial craft were landed 
by their crews, to determine the fate of the survivors: 

It was suggested that an attempt be made to reach another planet. The aerial 
craft then in use were capable of traveling in space, and had frequently been 
used to reach elevations of hundreds of miles, but no attempt had yet been 
made to leap the vast gulf between the planets, and the crew members were 
far from certain that such an attempt could succeed. 

The planet which you now know as Mars was then in conjunction with the 
Earth, and preliminary estimates seemed to indicate that the crossing could 
be made. At that time, the surface conditions of temperature, atmosphere, 
water, etc. were somewhat better suited for human survival than the condi¬ 
tions your astronomers report to exist today. A vote was taken, and the mem¬ 
bers of the crews of four of the craft elected to take the huge gamble in the 
hope of preserving, thereby, at least a portion of the culture of the race. The 




74 


Alien Base 


remaining crews decided to remain on Earth. They believed that, because of 
the elevation of the plateau on which they were gathered, and the relatively 
low level of radiation at that point, they could continue to live in this area 
without suffering complete physical or mental degeneration in themselves or 
their descendants. 

I can see the question forming in your mind, so 1 will explain that this race 
had achieved perfect equality of the sexes, and both were equally represented 
in this council, and in the crews of the ships. Of the four craft which essayed 
the great leap, three arrived safely at their destination. There is no record 
in our history as to the fate of the fourth. For many generations the grim 
struggle for survival demanded the entire time and energy of the people . . . 
As the battle for survival against the harsh environment was gradually won, 
the development of the material science resumed its normal pattern, and 
technology spurted ahead. With the lessons of the past constantly before the 
people, however, the material values were carefully maintained in their 
proper relationship to the social and spiritual values. 

‘The greatest need of your race, your civilization and your society 
today,' concluded Alan, ‘is simple, basic understanding between man and 
his fellow man, between nation and nation, and between all men and that 
greater power and intelligence that pervades and controls all nature. 
Understanding is the key to survival for your race .. 

DISCUSSION 

Was Dan Fry really taken for a ride - or was he taking us for a ride? I have 
dwelled at length on his story for two reasons: first, because I believe it to 
be fundamental to the understanding of certain extraterrestrial en¬ 
counters; secondly, because I believe the story to be essentially true. That 
is not to say that I accept it unreservedly. There are a number of Fry’s 
claims that require critical commentary. 

I first met Fry in the early 1970s during a tour of the United States as 
a violinist with the London Symphony Orchestra. Then, in August 1976, 
he invited my friend and co-researcher Louise (Lou) Zinsstag and me to 
stay with him and his wife Florence at their home in Tonopah, Arizona. 
I recall that the temperature at the time went up as high as 113 degrees 
Fahrenheit, though, mercifully, the dry desert air made it feel less so. 
Dan and Florence were very kind hosts and gave us a lot of their time. 

During the stay, which lasted nearly a week, I asked Dan many 
questions about his claims. In the first place, I wanted to know why he is 
listed, in most of his publications, as ‘Dr Daniel Fry’, holding a ‘Ph.D. 
from St Andrews College of London, England’. There is no such college 
in London; furthermore, the ludicrous ‘dignity degree’ of ‘Doctor of 
Philosophy (Cosmism)’ was conferred on him in April 1960 by the ‘St 
Andrews Ecumenical University Intercollegiate’, as was evident when I 



Steps to the Stars 


75 


saw the framed ‘degree’ in his home. Enquiries by Philip Kiass, a vocal 
sceptic, revealed that the college was ‘a sort of correspondence school’, 
where anyone could apply for a Ph.D. by submitting a thesis and paying 
a modest fee. 2 

'I don’t think that you could buy a degree there,’ Dan replied. ‘I cer¬ 
tainly never paid anything for this one, neither was I ever asked to. It was 
given for the material in the first edition of my book, Steps to the Stars' 
‘But Dan,’ I argued, ‘a Ph.D. is normally associated with a recognized 
university. You can surely sympathize with scientists when they become 
suspicious of a man who is trying to make his Ph.D. look like an accred¬ 
ited doctorate?’ 

'I’ve never attempted to make it look like that, it’s been others who 
have done that,’ he answered, somewhat defensively. ‘It doesn’t . e 
any difference to me.’ 

It may not have made any difference to Fry, but by allowing the 
phoney Ph.D. to appear on the jackets of his books and publications, as 
well as on his stationery, it certainly made a huge difference to the degree 
of acceptance of his claims by the scientific community. Interestingly, 
though, Steps to the Stars 3 was taken seriously by at least one scientist. A 
letter to Fry from Parry Moon, Professor of Electrical Engineering at the 
Massachusetts Institute of Technology (a copy of which is in my posses¬ 
sion) endorses the book thus: 

Your book, Steps to the Stars , was called to my attention by Alexander 
Mebanc [who] had written a caustic criticism [and] I’m afraid I offended him 
by disagreeing completely with his analysis . . . Steps to the Stars seemed to 
me an admirable presentation for the layman. But, as in any popular exposi¬ 
tion, some of the ideas were necessarily vague. A more rigorous treatment 
might be of great value to scientists .. . 4 

Another of my questions dealt with the fact that, in all editions of his 
first book, The White Sands Incident (first published in 1954), 5 the date of 
the incident is given as 4 July 1950. Yet 10 years after publication he 
admitted that the incident actually occurred on 4 July 1949. 

‘I had to change it,’ he explained. ‘In the last edition, I told the pub¬ 
lisher to change it, but he decided this might not be good for publicity, 
and he kept it to 1950 after I’d said to change it, because there was now 
no need to hide the fact that it was 1949.’ 

‘So there was a reason?’ I asked. 

‘There was a reason,’ Dan replied, ‘because it turned out to be a year 
later than he had originally planned - that Alan could be here. He 
thought it could be done in four years; it actually took five years. Now, 
had the Pentagon, for example, taken this book seriously, at that time 
there was a pretty good chance they could have tracked him down. There 



76 


Alien Base 


had to be an escape mechanism. The fact is that on the evening of the 
Fourth of July 19501 was not at White Sands -1 didn’t arrive there until 
later in July. And everyone in White Sands Proving Grounds and in 
Aerojet knows that.’ 

Fry held several security clearances during his time at White Sands, 
and when The White Sands Incident was published, he immediately took 
the first copy to the security section at Aerojet. ‘1 said, “Read this over, 
and if you find any violation of security, speak now.” They read it over, 
and said there was no violation. And that copy was put into the Aerojet 
Technical Library - under non-fiction. It happened that the President of 
Aerojet served a term as Secretary of the Navy, and during that time was 
flying to Japan when he was supposedly buzzed by a UFO that circled his 
plane a number of times, in broad daylight and at close range. So this 
individual knew perfectly well that these things were not just swamp gas.’ 

Others at White Sands were equally convinced that UFOs were a 
reality. Commander Robert McLaughlin confirmed that on 21 April 
1949 (the year of Fry’s initial encounter) his team of US Navy scientists 
tracking a Skyhook balloon at the base observed an unusual silvery 
object. With the aid of a theodolite and a stopwatch, the scientists were 
able to ascertain that the UFO was at an altitude of 56 miles, was 40 feet 
long, 100 feet wide, and that its speed when first seen was seven miles per 
second. l I am convinced,’ said McLaughlin, ‘that it was a flying saucer, 
and further, that these discs are spaceships from another planet, operated 
by animate, intelligent beings.’ On another occasion, he reported, two 
small discs, tracked from five observation posts at White Sands, were 
seen to pace an Army high-altitude rocket. After circling it briefly, the 
discs shot off at high speed. 6 McLaughlin is also quoted as saying: ‘Many 
times I have seen flying discs following and overtaking missiles in flight 
at the experimental base at White Sands, New Mexico, where, as is 
known, the first American atom bomb was tried out.’ 7 

Regarding the initial contact, Lou had always been incredulous about 
the exceptional courage shown by Fry. ‘How could you just step into a 
dark contraption on a dark night,’ she asked him, ‘with nobody showing, 
and just a voice?’ 

He laughed. ‘I did not have alt that much courage; I mean, I tell you, 
my knees were knocking pretty well!’ 

‘Well, they told him it was a sampling device,' added Florence, ‘and he 
said after he got inside he wasn’t sure that he might not be the sample!’ 

I have always been dubious about the authenticity of Fry’s 16mm films 
of UFOs (copies of which are in my possession), particularly an object he 
said he saw in Oregon in May 1964, which to me looks like a couple of 
lampshades or similarly shaped devices fixed together and suspended 
with fine twine. He went into some detail as to the circumstances of the 



Steps to the Stars 


77 


filming, and claimed that some frames show the limb of a cloud coming 
in front of the saucer. I remain unconvinced; the movement of the craft 
gives every indication of being a suspended fake. Perhaps I am wrong. 
But does this prove that Fry was lying about all his previous experiences? 
I think not. Most probably, he thought that a few fabricated movie films 
of ‘saucers’ would bolster his improvable claims. I have come across a 
number of contactees who have done just that; Eduard (Billy) Meier 
being one. 8 

That aside, it seems to me that Fry did take at least one genuine photo¬ 
graph of a UFO (see plate section). The incident took place on the after¬ 
noon of 18 September 1954, as he was driving home from work on 
Garvey Boulevard, near Baldwin Park, California. He had no camera 
with him so, having just passed a drugstore, he made a U-turn and hastily 
purchased a Brownie box-camera and film. The UFO was photographed 
and within minutes the film given to the same store for processing. 9 

What is perhaps most striking about Dan Fry’s account is that part 
which concerns the technology of flying saucer energy and propulsion. 
Regardless of his credentials, not only is Fry’s description sophisticated 
because of his own technical career, but it is inherently more scientifically 
advanced and theoretically pristine than was anywhere available or stud¬ 
ied in 1949-50. The kind of even now hypothetical physics and engi¬ 
neering that Fry says he was told about by Alan only began to be seriously 
examined in the late 1980s and in this decade by a few prescient aca¬ 
demics and far-reaching experimental engineers (for example, Dr Hal 
PuthofT), writing in peer-reviewed and critically edited scientific jour¬ 
nals that are widely read and highly respected repositories of leading sci¬ 
entific thought, literally on the edge of the twenty-first century. 

Fry claimed to have had in-person meetings with Alan at about five- 
year intervals, but was reluctant to provide me with a description of the 
man. Concerning the success of his masquerade, Alan told Fry at their 
initial meeting, ‘My first real test will come when I walk down the street 
of any of your larger cities, and if anyone - anyone - turns their head to 
look at me, then it would mean that I had failed somewhere.’ Dan also 
remarked that the life expectancy of Alan’s race was about two and a half 
times that of ours, and that two other individuals would be taking Alan’s 
place eventually, in an attempt to keep a lid on the possibility of a nuclear 
holocaust. 

Finally, Fry discussed the confusing variety of alien species with 
which we are confronted. ‘Probably most of the confusion in the field,’ he 
commented, ‘has been caused by the need of many people to force all of 
the UFO phenomenon into one hole. Each individual case is an individ¬ 
ual event that should be judged on its own merits. To think that all beings 
visiting this planet come from the same place, with the same purpose, and 



78 


Alien Base 


in the same type of craft, is like standing on the corner of 42nd Street and 
Broadway, watching all the people go by and assuming they all come 
from the same place, with the same purpose, and the same habits. We live 
in a galaxy that teems with life and intelligence in every direction - once 
we get our egos under control enough to admit the fact. We’re just one of 
a series of evolutionary products - and by no means the leading one ... ,|0 


NOTES 

1 Fry, Daniel W., ‘The White Sands Incident’ (revised edition), in To Men of 
Earth, Merlin Publishing Co., Merlin, Oregon, 1973. 

2 Klass, Philip J., UFOs Explained, Random House, New York, 1974, pp. 
248-9. 

3 Fry, Daniel W., Steps to the Stars, CSA, Lakemont, Georgia, 1965. 

4 Letter to Daniel W. Fry from Parry Moon, Professor of Electrical 
Engineering, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 9 June 1958. 

5 Fry, Daniel W., The White Sands Incident, New Age, Los Angeles, 1954. 

6 McLaughlin, Robert B., ‘How Scientists Tracked a Flying Saucer’, True, 
March 1950. 

7 Flying Saucer Review, vol. 5, no. 5, September-October 1959, p. 10. 

8 See Spaceships of the Pleiades: The Billy Meier Story by Kal K. KorfT 
(Prometheus Books, Amherst, New York, 1995) for an expose of Meier’s 
photographs and film. When I first spoke to Meier in 1965 (having heard 
about his earlier extraterrestrial encounters when I was in India the previous 
year), he seemed sincere, but on meeting him at his home in Switzerland in 
1977 and examining the evidence, including film and photographs, I became 
deeply suspicious. For the record, I must also add that, in his interview with 
me published in Light Years: An Investigation into the Extraterrestrial 
Experiences of Eduard Meier (Atlantic Monthly Press, New York, 1987), 
author Gary Kinder excluded my negative conclusions about Meier’s 
claims. 

9 Norkin, Israel, Saucer Diary, Pageant Press, New York, 1957, p. 26. 

10 Interviews with the author, Tonopah, Arizona, 24-27 August 1976. 



Chapter 5 


Proliferating Encounters 


Bruno Facchini, a 40-year-old industrial worker, lived on the outskirts of 
Abbiate Guazzone, Italy, a short distance from the highway leading to 
Milan. On the evening of 24 April 1950, a violent storm struck the dis¬ 
trict of Varese in northern Italy. Just before 22.00 the rain stopped, and 
Facchini decided to take a breath of air outside his house. He was about 
to go inside when his attention was drawn to strange flashes in the sky a 
few hundred metres away. Because a high-voltage power line passed 
right over the spot and a pylon with electrical equipment stood in front 
of his house, Facchini became concerned that the storm might have 
damaged these structures. 

Proceeding cautiously to avoid stepping on any ‘live’ cables, Facchini 
arrived at the spot. Seeing nothing amiss, he was on the point of return¬ 
ing to his house when he saw the strange flashing again. ‘This time I 
could see that it was a little further away from where I stood,’ he told 
investigator Antonio Giudici, ‘so I decided to go closer.’ 

When 1 did get closer, I caught sight of an enormous black shadow, almost 
round in shape (it looked like a ball with the top part flattened). In the middle 
of it I could sec a little ladder, and from the top of the ladder was coming a 
greenish light. I was now able to have a close view of the source of the flash¬ 
ing; that is, I saw quite clearly an individual who, from the top of a pneumatic 
lift (of the type made with a base, an extensible shaft, and a platform on top), 
seemed to be standing and doing a welding job. I could see quite clearly that 
the individual. . . was wearing a diving suit and mask. 

My curiosity now aroused, I stepped closer, and now also saw two other 
individuals, likewise in diving suits and masks, moving about very slowly 
around the machine, which caused me to think that the suits they were wear¬ 
ing must be very heavy for them. The machine, which was of a dark colour, 
showed metallic reflections when lit up by the flashes coming from the 
welder. 

Since Milan’s La Malpensa airport, as well as the military airfields at 
Vergiate and Venegono, were not far away, Facchini presumed that an 
aircraft had made an emergency landing. ‘I told the men that I lived close 
by and asked them if they needed any help,’ he said. ‘The only reply 1 got 
were some incomprehensible guttural sounds.’ 



Alien Base 


The crew was wearing what looked like dark-grey, presumably heavy 
diving suits, with grey masks over their heads. A tube appeared to hang 
down from the level of the mouth, with an opening at the end, as if, 
Facchini reasoned, it could be joined to another tube or cylinder. During 
brief bursts of light from the welding, the skin of the crew looked to be 
light in colour. They were about 1.70 metres in height. 

1 tried to guess what their intentions were, and I got the impression that they 
wanted to invite me to go up into the machine. Then I heard a noise like the 
sound of a gigantic beehive, or perhaps it might be better to say like a big 
dynamo, and I saw, inside, another ladder going up, and all around - on the 
walls - tubes, cylinders and gauges. In that precise moment I realized that it 
couldn’t be an aircraft, and I was seized by a sensation of panic and fled. 

But after I had run a few paces I turned round, and saw one of the pilots 
grab a sort of camera that he was carrying round his neck and shoot a beam of 
light at me. I carried on running, and simultaneously I had the impression 
that I had been struck by a blunt instrument or, to put it better, by a power¬ 
ful jet of compressed air, and I fell to the ground, landing, for further 
measure, right on top of one of the boundary stones marking the edges of the 
fields. 

Suffering pain from his bruises, Facchini continued to watch the 
strange aircraft and its crew. ‘It seemed as though they were no longer 
interested in me,’ he said. ‘I was sure that they did not desire to do me 
any harm.’ Then it looked as if the crew was preparing to leave. 

The individual who had been welding had now come down (the lift on which 
he was standing had in fact descended, its tubes re-entering) and the two 
others who had remained on the ground picked up the lift, now reduced in 
size, put it into a small box and stowed it inside the machine, the ladder was 
drawn in, and the door closed. Everything became dark. The noise like a bee¬ 
hive continued. Then, all of a sudden, it grew louder, and more powerful, and 
the machine rose at fantastic speed and vanished into the darkness. 

All became silent. Facchini stood there, his eyes glued to the sky, but 
there was nothing to be seen. He returned home quietly and spent a 
sleepless night. 

Landing Traces 

The following day, Facchini returned to the landing site to look for his 
cigarette case which he had lost during the encounter. He discovered 
faint marks on the ground, consisting of four round impressions about 
one metre in diameter, set in a square, about six metres apart. He also 
noticed burnt grass and a few pieces of metal which he picked up, pre¬ 
suming them to be residue from the welding. Facchini reported the 
incident to police headquarters in Varese, and investigations were carried 



Proliferating Encounters 


out at the landing site. 

‘I had an analysis made of the metal, which turned out to be an “anti¬ 
friction metal”,’ Facchini explained to Antonio Giudici. ‘It was a shiny 
metal, with a granulous surface’ 1 (see plate section). As is often the case 
with metallic samples found at UFO landing sites, nothing abnormal 
showed up in analysis. In its report, the Experimental Institute for Light 
Metals stated that: 

the sample received consisted of three small metal fragments of a yellowish- 
white colour and with a total weight of 1.64 grams. The percent™! results of 
the chemical analyses made are as follows: 

Copper 74.33% 

Tin 19.38% 

Lead 4.92% 

Antimony 0.52% 

Zinc 0.33% 

Nickel 0.08% 

Iron 0.02% 

plus minimal traces of silver, aluminium, and magnesium. The fragments 
under consideration are thus of a ‘lead bronze’, with a high content of tin. 
The micrographics! structure seems perfectly normal for a bronze of the type 
in question, in a cast state. The presence of no rare or abnormal element for 
an alloy of this type was detected. It is very probable that the fragments pre¬ 
sented to us for examination come from the packing bed of a bearing that has 
had very heavy wear. 2 

It is unclear precisely what is expected when physical tests are taken of 
objects believed to have come from a craft of extraterrestrial origin. If 
they were not composed of material and elements that we otherwise know 
about from hundreds of years of scientific enquiry, then how would we 
be able to understand them? We have good reason to believe that the 10 
metals listed above are found throughout the universe and are desirable 
construction materials for vehicles, regardless of where found and fabri¬ 
cated in the universe. 

Trauma 

A few days after the experience, Facchini began to have pains in the part 
of his back where the beam of light had struck him, and the area gradu¬ 
ally turned black. The pain lasted for over a month. But it was the 
psychological trauma that persisted. ‘What is more important is the fact 
that I never got over the shock that I suffered,’ he said. ‘Even today, years 
after, from time to time I feel hot flushes on the face, without any signs 
of fever.’ 3 



82 


Alien Base 


In an interview in his home in 1981, Facchini - then 71 years old - dis¬ 
cussed some further details of the 1950 incident and its aftermath. ‘There 
seems to be no discrepancy in his fresh account as given to me,’ reported 
investigator Ezio Bcmardini. ‘Talking of the appearance of the crew of 
the UFO, he described to me vividly his amazement when, on television 
years later, he saw the American astronauts walking about on the Moon: 
“They looked just the same!” . . . One thing on which he was adamant 
was that they were not “little men”. They were of our size and build [and 
were] just like us, and they could pass anywhere here as men of our 
Earth.’ 

Over the past 30 years, said Facchini, many people, including en¬ 
gineers and technicians, had visited him to learn more about his experi¬ 
ence. Some military and civilian experts told him that attempts had been 
made to construct similar craft here, but that for various reasons all had 
been failures. ‘You must realize that that machine, that UFO, had not 
only all those tubes everywhere inside and outside, but also two big 
holes,’ Facchini expounded, ‘and the technical experts have explained to 
me that, by expelling and compressing the air in the tubes, the UFO 
could move laterally and, sending the air out through the two big holes, 
the machine could go up or down.’ 4 

Here we have a technical account not as aerodynamically sound nor as 
advanced as others reviewed in this book. However, just as several 
propulsive technologies co-exist in various states of sophistication in con¬ 
ventional use by mankind variously, so might unconventional technolo¬ 
gies co-exist on a broader planetary basis than just our own. 

Among Facchini’s visitors was a high-ranking Italian Navy officer 
who, after hearing his story, said: ‘You arc a lucky man! How much I’d 
have given to have been in your place and to have observed that marvel 
of technology!’ 

‘What, me a lucky man?’ said Facchini, bitterly. 'I’d have liked to pass 
on to him all that I’ve had to put up with!’ He went on to describe the 
tremendous upheaval in his life caused by the 1950 experience; the long- 
drawn-out mental trauma inflicted upon him by the authorities with 
their endless interrogations, by the hordes of curiosity-seekers, by the 
endless arguments with journalists, and by all the ridicule he had 
encountered. ‘If I’d have known all that was coming, I’d have kept jolly 
quiet about it.. .’ s 

DEVELOPMENTS IN ARGENTINA 

Leonard Stringfield, the former United States Air Force intelligence 
officer who later specialized, as a civilian, in cases involving crashed 
unidentified aerial craft, was given details of an extraordinary incident 
that took place in a remote area of Bahia Blanca, Argentina, on 10 May 



Proliferating Encounters 


1950. The witness. Dr Enrique Caretenuto Botta, Italian by birth, was an 
ex-Second World War pilot, an aeronautical engineer, and, at the time of 
the incident, an architectural engineer with a Venezuelan real-estate 
company engaged in a construction project on the pampas. Dr Botta first 
related his story to the Venezuelan researcher, Horacio Gonzales who, in 
turn, put Stringfield in contact with Botta. In the following account, I 
have incorporated some of the information supplied to the late UFO 
researcher Coral Lorenzen, of the former Aerial Phenomena Research 
Organization (APRO), by Gonzales, who was APRO’s representative in 
Caracas. 

Dr Botta was driving along the highway about 75 miles from his hotel 
(at a point he gave as 64° Longitude West Greenwich; 37° 45‘ South 
Latitude, 800 feet above sea level) when his attention was drawn to a 
metallic disc-shaped object resting on the ground off the highway, with a 
flashing light on top. He stopped to investigate. After a few moments 
waiting to see if anything would happen, he approached the object. 

‘The object was resting on the ground in an inclined position,' Dr 
Botta wrote to Stringfield in October 1955. ‘The disc was 32 feet in 
diameter, the surface was slippery and brilliant. The height was about 13 
feet, the tower [dome?] with windows was six feet high . . .’ Dr Botta 
decided to enter the vehicle through a small hatch in the side. 

Three little men were seated in soft armchairs. They were dead. One of the 
three, the pilot (I believe), was seated in the center of the tower. In front of 
him was a large panel with bright instruments. His hands were resting on two 
levers. They were about four feet in height. In appearance they were human, 
equal to ourselves with eyes, nose and mouth. The color of their hair was 
gray-chestnut, cut short. Their skin was bronze, their faces were dark (or 
charred]. They were dressed in overalls of a gray-lead color . .’ 6 

According to the information supplied by Dr Botta to Gonzales, the 
pilot sat on what appeared to be a ‘control chair’ while the other two 'were 
lying on lounges along the curved wall of the ship ... All three were 
dressed in brown, tight-fitting overalls that exposed only the hands and 
the face, and their feet were encased in some kind of boots . . . their skin 
[was] a tobacco-brown, their eyes light colored.’ 7 
Dr Botta’s report to Stringfield continues: 

I touched the bodies which were rigid. In the tower there was a smell [like] 
ozone and garlic. In the roof of the cabin there was an intermittent small light 
of orange-whitish color... 

There were no cables, no pipes, only the panel of the controls. Above the 
panel there was a small [glass-like] sphere with a circle. To the right of the 
pilot there was an apparatus similar to a TV screen. I remained five minutes 
in the tower but the absence of the [presumed] fourth person impressed me 



84 


Alien Base 


so much that I went out of the machine very stunned. 

Dr Botta headed straight back to his hotel and there related his adven¬ 
ture to two colleagues. Arming themselves with revolvers and taking a 
camera, the engineers at first considered going to the site immediately, 
but as night was approaching they decided to wait until morning. On 
reaching the spot then, all that could be seen was a pile of ashes. Dr Botta 
took a photograph of the ash and one of the group scooped up some of it. 
His hand turned purple, the colour remaining indelible for several days. 

As the engineers wandered around the site looking for more evidence, 
one of them glanced up and saw three objects: one cigar-shaped, high up, 
and the others smaller and disc-shaped. One of the discs, about 10 metres 
in diameter, was hovering above the group at an estimated altitude of 600 
metres. In haste, Dr Botta managed to take five photographs, only two of 
which showed the objects with sufficient clarity. The two discs then shot 
upwards, apparently merged with the cigar, which flew for a short dis¬ 
tance, turned ‘blood red’, made an 80-degree turn, and disappeared in 
seconds. 

Dr Botta said that although the craft had a metallic appearance, it felt 
(very untypically) ‘resilient, like rubber’. Also, there were holes or vents 
in the floor. ‘For weeks he suffered from a fever which no doctor in the 
area could diagnose, and his skin was covered with blisters,’ reported 
Gonzales. ‘He had entered the disc with dark green eyeglasses (used by 
pilots) and the outline of the glasses was marked around both eyes. A doc¬ 
tor tested him for radiation but could not find any traces .. . Because of 
the character of the man and his professional standing, it is difficult to 
believe the story is a hoax.’ 8 

Dr Botta’s observation that the faces of the aliens were ‘dark or 
charred’ is interesting. During a conversation with Dr Rolf Alexander at 
Mexico City airport in 1951, General George Marshall, US Army Chief 
of Staff in the Second World War and later US Secretary of State, 
allegedly revealed that American authorities had recovered alien craft 
and bodies. On three (unspecified) occasions, said Marshall, there had 
been landings which had proved disastrous for the occupants: breathing 
the heavily oxygenated atmosphere of Earth supposedly had incinerated 
the visitors from within. 9 (If General Marshall did say this, his remark is 
technically correct: what we call ‘burning’ or incineration is a process of 
rapid, often destructive oxidation.) 

Unidentified Submergible Objects 

One night in late June 1950, Romero Ernesto Suarez was walking along 
the coastal road between Rio Grande and San Sebastian in Tierra del 
Fuego, Argentina, when he heard an unusual noise of turbulence in the 



Proliferating Encounters 


85 


sea. Because there was no wind or storm that could have given rise to 
such activity, Suarez became alarmed. Peering into the darkness in the 
direction of the noise, he saw suddenly a huge, luminous, oval-shaped 
object emerge from the sea about 500 metres from the shore. The craft 
ascended vertically to a certain altitude, made an abrupt 90-degree turn, 
then disappeared rapidly towards the northwest. Fifteen days later, again 
at night, Suarez witnessed a similar occurrence, this time between Rio 
Gallegos and Santa Cruz. Four small, luminous domed discs emerged 
vertically from the sea in perfect formation, levelled, then flew up the 
coastline before turning in the direction of the Cordillera de los Andes. 10 

Over the years, many sightings of what I call unidentified submergible 
objects (USOs) have been reported from the coast of Argentina and else¬ 
where, examples of which appear in subsequent chapters. Lieutenant 
Colonel Philip Corso, who served on President Eisenhower’s National 
Security Council staff and who once headed the US Army’s Office of 
Research and Development’s Foreign Technology desk at the Pentagon, 
confirms that USOs were of considerable concern to military authorities: 

Unidentified Submerged Objects [were] a worry in naval circles, particularly 
as war planners advanced strategies for protracted submarine warfare in the 
event of a first strike. Whatever was flying circles around our jets since the 
1950s, evading radar at our top-secret missile bases... could plunge right into 
the ocean ... and surface halfway around the world without so much as leav¬ 
ing an underwater signature we could pick up. Were these USOs building 
bases at the bottom of the oceanic basins beyond the dive capacity of our best 
submarines...?" 

A BRIEF REPAIR STOP IN FRANCE 

Another ‘repair’ case from 1950 is alleged to have taken place on the night 
of 23 (or 24) July, in Guyancourt, 20 kilometres from Paris, France. At 
about 23.00, Claude Blondeau, the proprietor of a small cafe, was taking 
some air before retiring to bed when he heard a slight noise ‘like the 
wind’. Turning, he noticed two greyish discs hovering just above the 
ground about 100 metres away. 

Each disc had a row of rectangular ‘portholes’ that encircled the cir¬ 
cumference. As Blondeau watched, a thick oval hatch opened in the bot¬ 
tom part of each disc. From each hatch emerged a ‘man’ of about 1.7 
metres in height, dressed in dark-blue or brown ‘flying suits’. They wore 
no headgear and - as in the Facchini case - appeared quite like humans. 
Joining each other at one of the two discs, the men began to replace one 
of a number of ‘plates’ located on the underside of each disc. (A remark¬ 
ably similar operation was also observed in the USA in 1964 - see 
Chapter 13). This replacement of a presumably defective unit was car¬ 
ried out with bare hands and without the aid of any tools. 



Alien Base 


Although apprehensive, Blondeau approached the two pilots and 
asked if they had had to make a forced landing. ‘Yes, but not for long,’ 
one of them replied, in rather halting French. Through the open hatch, 
Blondeau had a brief view of the inside of the craft. A ‘formidable’ light 
filled the interior of the circular cabin, in the centre of which could be 
seen a chair, similar to a dentist’s chair, covered in red material. In front 
of the chair was something that looked like a radio transmitter with a 
number of buttons, and on a pillar was what appeared to be a large oval 
‘steering wheel’ or control column with projecting handles at opposite 
sides. Other apparatus was visible on ‘blocks’ or ‘panels’ around the ‘con¬ 
trol chair’. 

Blondeau asked some questions about the purpose of the buttons on 
the control panels. ‘Energy!’ came the curt response. Without further 
comment, the men re-entered their respective discs, took their places and 
r’osed the hatches. The portholes became luminous and within seconds 
the two craft tilted up on end and accelerated upwards at very high speed, 
making the same wind-like noise as when they had first appeared. The 
entire incident lasted no more than two minutes. 12 

NORTH ATLANTIC ENCOUNTER 

In his book Flying Saucers: Top Secret, Major Donald Keyhoe described 
an important sighting made ‘in 1956’ by the crew of a US Navy aircraft 
en route from Iceland to Newfoundland. Keyhoe’s source for the report 
was Captain James Taylor, a retired US Navy officer, whose name had 
been given to him by Admiral Delmcr S. Fahmey, a friend of the Major. 
Taylor learned of the incident from a Navy pilot who was one of the 
primary witnesses, a lieutenant at the time, identified in the book by the 
pseudonym, George Benton. 13 Years later, members of Keyhoe’s 
National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena (NICAP) con¬ 
ducted an interview with Commander ‘Benton’ to glean further details. 
It was the first time he had confided his experience to anyone other than 
military intelligence people and to his friends. 

The incident actually occurred in the early morning of 8 February 
1951 (Keyhoe gave the date in his book as 1956 perhaps to protect iden¬ 
tities, perhaps by mistake). Lieutenant Benton was piloting a Lockheed 
R5D four-engine transport aircraft - a Navy version of the famous 
Constellation airliner-on a flight from England to the United States, via 
Iceland and Newfoundland. The weather was excellent, the visibility 
good. Seated next to Benton in the co-pilot’s seat was the plane’s com¬ 
mander, Lieutenant Commander F.K. (identified as Peter Mooney in 
Keyhoe’s book). Back in the cabin, asleep, were two extra crews, one a 
relief crew for Benton's men and the other on board as passengers. The 
aircraft was flying at over 200 knots ground speed at an altitude of 10,000 



Proliferating Encounters 


87 


feet. About three and a half hours out of Iceland, the plane, on automatic 
pilot, passed over a weather ship off the coast of Greenland. The ship 
reported conditions normal. 14 Then it happened. Benton’s report 
follows: 

Lt. Cmdr. F.K. and myself were on constant watch for other aircraft. I 
observed a yellow glow in the distance about 30 to 35 miles away, at about the 
1 o’clock position and below the horizon. My impression was that there was 
a small city ahead, because it was the same glow you get from a group of lights 
on the surface before you get close enough to pick them out individually. 

Knowing that we had passed the tip of Greenland, my first thought was 
that we were behind schedule and had drifted north, but remembering that 
we had passed over the weather ship, 1 knew this was not the case. I called 
F.K.’s attention to the glow and asked him what he thought it was. He said 
that it looked like we were approaching land. I asked our navigator to check 
his navigation. He did, and replied that we were on flight plan and course. 

The lights were farther away than we thought because it took us from 8 to 
10 minutes to get close enough to where the lights had a pattern ... about 15 
or 18 miles away. At that time, due to the circular pattern of lights, I got the 
impression that possibly two ships were tied up together and that lights were 
strung between them for either transferring cargo from one to the other, or 
that one was in some kind of trouble. I asked the navigator to check his ship 
plot. He replied that there were no ships plotted in this area and that we were 
not close to the shipping lanes anyway. The radioman also went on the air to 
the weather ship, which verified that there were no ships in the area. 

Since it was time for Lt. J.’s crew to relieve us, I had the plane captain 
awaken them. When Lt. J. and Lt. M. came up forward, I pointed the lights 
out to them. Their only comment was that it had to be a ship because it was 
on the water and we were overtaking it fast. At this time, we were 5 to 7 miles 
away; it was about 30 degrees to our right, and we had to look down at about 
a 45-degree angle. The lights had a definite circular pattern and were bright 
white. 

Collision Course 

‘Suddenly, the lights went out,’ continued Benton. ‘There appeared a 
yellow halo on the water. It turned to an orange, to a fiery red, and then 
started movement toward us at a fantastic speed, turning to a blueish red 
around the perimeter.’ 

Due to its high speed, its direction of travel, and its size, it looked as though 
we were going to be engulfed. I quickly disengaged the automatic-pilot and 
stood by to push the nose of the plane over, in hopes that we could pass under 
it due to the angle it was ascending. The relief crew was standing behind us; 
everyone began ducking, and a few heads were hit on objects. 

It stopped its movement toward us and began moving along with us about 
45 degrees off the bow to the right, about 100 feet or so below us and about 



Alien Husc 


2(HI 10 300 feet in from of us. ll was nol in a level position; it was tilted about 
25 degrees. It stayed in this position for a minute or so. It appeared to be from 
200 to 300 feel in diameter, translucent or metallic, shaped like a saucer, a 
purple-red fiery ring around the perimeter and a frosted white glow around 
the entire object The purple-red glow around the perimeter was the same 
type of glow you get around the commutator of an auto-generator when you 
observe it at night. 

When the object moved away from us, it made no turns, as though it was 
backing up about 170 degrees from the direction it approached us, and was 
still tilted. It was only a few seconds before it was out of sight. [Speed esti¬ 
mated in excess of1,500 m.p.h.] All of our cameras were within reach, but no 
one was calm enough to think about taking a picture. Most of us were won¬ 
dering what it was. Our impression was that it was a controlled craft. It was 
either hovering over the water or sitting on it, then it detected us and came 
up to investigate. 


Military Intelligence Predilection 

‘After Lt J.’s crew had taken over,’ said Benton, ‘I proceeded aft and 
learned that most of the passengers had observed the same thing. Since I 
was unable to identify the object, I asked Dr M., Commander, US Navy, 
if he had observed the object. He replied that he had and that he did not 
look because it was a flying saucer and he did not believe in such things.’ 

I immediately returned to the cockpit and informed the crew to keep quiet 
about what we had observed because it might have been our first sighting of 
a saucer - during those years, when you mentioned you had such a sighting, 
you were believed to be crazy. Lt. J. informed me that it was too late because 
he had called Gander airfield in Newfoundland to see if the object could be 
tracked by radar. 

When we landed at Argentia (Newfoundland), we were met by intelligence 
officers. The types of questions they asked us were like Henry Ford asking 
about the Model T. You got the feeling that they were putting words in your 
mouth. It was obvious that there had been many sightings in the same area, 
and most of the observers did not let the cat out of the bag openly. When we 
arrived in the United States, we had to make a full report to Naval 
Intelligence. I found out a few months later that Gander radar did track the 
object in excess of 1,800 mph.. , 15 

During a two-hour interrogation by US Air Force intelligence officers, 
the pilots tried to obtain some information about the flying discs. ‘What’s 
behind all this?’ asked Lt. Cmdr. F.K. ‘Up to now, I believed the Air 
Force. You people say there aren’t any flying saucers. After a scare like 
that, we’ve got a right to know what’s going on.’ 

‘I’m sorry,’ replied the captain in charge of the interrogation, ‘I can't 
answer any questions.’ 

The completed intelligence reports were flashed to four commanders, 



Proliferating Encounters 


with an information copy to the Director of Naval Intelligence (DNI). 
After the aircraft reached its final destination at Patuxent Naval Air 
Station, Maryland, the crews were interviewed again, at the request of 
the Office of Naval Intelligence (ONI). 

Five days later, Benton received a phone call from a scientist in a gov¬ 
ernment agency, asking for a meeting to discuss the sighting in more 
detail. Benton agreed. The following day the scientist turned up, showed 
his credentials, and listened intently to the pilot’s report. He then 
unlocked a dispatch case and took out some photographs. ‘Was it like any 
of these?’ he asked. At the third photo, Benton recognized the same type 
of craft he and the other crew members had seen. ‘That’s it,’ he said. 
‘Somebody must know the answers, if you've got photographs of the 
things.’ Like the Air Force captain, the scientist apologized for being 
unable to discuss the matter, and left. 16 

This is a lucid, compelling account by a senior career military aviator. 
The operational and technical intelligence collection methods described 
are squarely in line with ordinary practices of that time and later. 
Interestingly, the account describes how another aviator became alarmed 
because he was unable to accept the novelty of flying saucers - as many 
contemporary aviators still do not. 

SECRET US NAVY INVESTIGATIONS 

According to information supplied by a navigator who formerly flew 
many secret strategic reconnaissance missions for the US Navy during 
the late 1940s and early 1950s, UFOs were the subject of frequent inves¬ 
tigations at that time. ‘Back in those days,’ the source told researchers 
William Jones and Dr Irena Scott, ‘UFOs were considered to be a very 
important matter. When the areas of the Soviet Union which were 
assigned to us were clouded over, we were frequently assigned to fly to 
various locations around the world to help indigenous personnel conduct 
UFO investigations. Many of these missions were to South America. 
There was a lot going on there, apparently.’ 

These assignments were for specific investigations. According to Jones 
and Scott: ‘They would fly into the country, pick up a team of investiga¬ 
tors and then fly them into the region where the report or reports were to 
be taken. He said he didn’t learn much about the reports since he spoke 
neither Spanish nor Portuguese.’ 

In effect, it seemed that his team acted as ‘truck drivers’ for groups of indi¬ 
genous military personnel who did not have access to their own aircraft. The 
final reports were flown back with them to Turkey [Adana] and then sent 
back to the Pentagon (apparently not to Project Blue Book) in Washington, 
DC, through Oslo, Norway. When asked why they were sent via this 
[unusual] route, he replied, ‘For diplomatic purposes.’ They were classified 




90 


Alien Base 


‘Secret’ before being forwarded. His group did no analysis of the reports they 
collected and no information about what they were used for ever came back 
to them. 17 

AERIAL ENCOUNTER NEAR MOUNT KILIMANJARO 
Another aerial encounter took place in February 19S1, when the crew and 
passengers aboard a Lockheed Lodestar of East African Airways 
observed a ‘bullet-shaped’ flying object near Mount Kilimanjaro, 
Tanganyika. The object was first seen by the radio operator, Dennis 
Mcrrifield, who pointed it out to Captain Jack Bicknell. As Captain 
Bicknell reported: 

The morning was clear and cloudless, visibility was good and the weather 
perfect. I timed the Saucer for 17 minutes while the Lodestar kept its course. 
Twice it rose vertically to a final height of 40,000 feet, then it moved east 
towards the coast at a terrific speed. There was a large fin-like object attached 
to the rear, although it wasn’t clearly defined. There was no apparent pro¬ 
pelling power [and] definitely no vapour trails. 

On landing, Bicknell prepared an affidavit and signed it, together with 
Merrifield and the nine passengers. One passenger, Captain H. B. 
Fussell, said that through his powerful binoculars the object appeared to 
be bullet-shaped. ‘Its colour was whitish-silver with three vertical black 
bands down the side,’ he reported. ‘For 10 minutes it remained station¬ 
ary, then it suddenly rose vertically by 5,000 feet. Again it became sta¬ 
tionary, and then a minute later it rose again and moved laterally away at 
a great speed ... the object was definitely metallic.’ Another passenger, 
Charles Vernon, said that the object must have been immense, 'two or 
three times the size of the largest passenger plane.’ 18 

Investigator Waveney Girvan learned that a cine film of the object had 
been taken by an American passenger, a Mr Overstreet, who had taken 
his film to the ‘authorities’ in the United States. Efforts to locate 
Overstreet or a copy of his film proved fruitless. 19 

A CONTACT NEAR CAPE TOWN 

Bizarre encounters with unknown flying machines and their occupants 
continued to occur in the early 1950s, though few were reported: it was 
not until 1953 that stories by ‘contactees’ began to spread into the public 
domain. The following case, for example, did not come to light until 
1977, when the Spanish journalist Juan Jose Benitez published his inter¬ 
view with a man who claimed to have established contact with extra¬ 
terrestrials in South Africa in 1951. 

The witness, identified only as ‘H.M.’ by Benitez, was a British 
engineer who, in 1977, had been working for twenty years as an engineer 



Proliferating Encounters 


specializing in instrumentation, such as development and construction of 
automatic pilots for aircraft. At the time of the interview, H.M. was 
employed by one of Spain’s leading firms dealing with advanced tech¬ 
nology. It was only after a great deal of effort that Benitez was able to per¬ 
suade the witness to talk about his experience, and even then, on 
condition that his identity was not revealed. 

At the time of the incident - in the early spring of 1951 - H.M. was 
working for Contactor, a subsidiary of the British Rheostat Company, 
and he was living with his wife in the small town of Paarl, some 32 kilo¬ 
metres outside Cape Town. One day, after their car had been out of use 
for some weeks, they found that the battery had run down, so H.M. 
decided to ‘jump-start’ the car down a slope near their house and charge 
the battery by taking a drive around the neighbourhood. He got into the 
little car and set off in the direction of the Drakensteen mountain, about 
10 to 12 kilometres away. ‘My idea was a simple one,’ said H.M. ‘It was 
just to go as far as a level area up near the top of this mountain and then 
come back. The run would be more than enough to top up the battery. 
And so, in fact, at about 11.15 p.m. I arrived on this mountain. The traf¬ 
fic along the road at that time of night was virtually nil. The area where I 
now was lay at an altitude of about 900 feet above sea-level, and forms a 
sort of small table-land running right up to the foot of one of the great 
cliff faces of the mountain. 

'There was a moon that night, and I remember how the vast shadow of 
the mountain fell across a large part of the table-land, so that this area was 
plunged into what, by contrast, seemed to be an accentuated darkness.’ 
Then began his encounter with the unknown: 

I was just about to start back for home when 1 saw a man waving his arm to 
me. He indicated that I should pull up ... I pulled up and asked him what 
was the matter. He came up to my window and said: ‘Have you any water?’ I 
replied that 1 hadn’t, except for what was in the radiator. The man looked 
upset when I said this, and went on: ‘You see, we need water!’ I could see how 
keen he was to get this water, so I suggested that 1 take him to a stream that 
crosses beneath the road a little further down the hill. Then the man asked: 
‘Is it far to this stream?’ I replied that it wasn’t, that it was, maybe, half a kilo¬ 
metre or so, and that [it] was a mountain stream. I told him that it was very 
good water too, because it came straight from the mountain above us. At that 
the man seemed satisfied. 

‘In what language did the man speak to you?’ asked Benitez. ‘In 
English,’ replied H.M. ‘But he had a rather strange accent... In South 
Africa, as you know, there are all sorts of people apart from the English- 
and Afrikaans-speaking folk; there are Americans, Germans, Dutch, 
Indians, French, Malays, Chinese, and so on. And pretty well everybody 




92 


Alien Base 


speaks English, each of them with a different sort of accent according to 
his nationality. But this man’s accent was strange. Anyway, I invited him 
to get in the car. Which he did. And we set off for the stream .. . 

‘I asked him if he had any sort of receptacle to hold the water. And he 
said he had not. “All right," I said. “I’ve got an oil-can with me which 
maybe will do.” My companion’s manner was brief. “That will be all 
right,” he said. So we arrived at the stream, and the two of us set about 
washing out the can and filling it with water. When the operation was 
completed, we returned to the car and set off back to the place where I 
had met him.’ 

The Craft and Cosmonauts 

‘I pulled up at a certain distance from the foot of the mountain,’ con¬ 
tinued H.M., ‘and the man pointed into the dark area formed by its 
shadow. “There, please, there!” he said, meaning that I should drive 
nearer to the rock face. And, as we moved into the shadow and my eyes 
got used to the darkness, 1 perceived that there was a strange object there 
... it was about 100 metres or so from the road, and in the zone of shadow 
cast by the mountain.’ 

It was quite big. Its diameter may have been between 10 and IS metres or so. 
It wasn’t very high. Maybe, from the feet up to the top it could have 
measured say four metres or so. In the under part I could see an opening 
which was lit up and some steps which, as I was able to ascertain shortly after¬ 
wards, led to the interior of the machine [see Fig. 4], I stood there, dumb¬ 
founded. 

The man invited me to enter ... I won’t deny that I felt afraid. So I just 
said nothing, like someone who feels distrust. But the man insisted, and with 
a friendly gesture invited me to go with him into the machine. And I stepped 
inside ahead of him. Inside the object, which was completely circular, there 
were other men. A total of four more, in fact. One of them was lying stretched 
out. Apparently, so my companion explained to me, they had had a slight 



Fig. 4. A sketch of the craft by the British engineer ‘H.M.’. 



Proliferating Encounters 


93 


accident, and the recumbent man had got burnt. Then I replied that 1 would 
like to get a bit closer so as to be able to see the wounded man. But my com¬ 
panion said no, that 1 must not move from the spot where I was. So there I 
stayed, just by the entrance ... It was a circular room. There were square 
windows all around it, and under these windows a sort of circular couch going 
all the way round. 

The men were all shorter than lam... maybe 1.50 metres or 1.60 metres. 
In the area where the windows were, the ceiling was somewhat curved. In the 
centre of the room there were some levers, like the ones used in railway sig¬ 
nalling boxes. These levers were set in a small rectangular area and were 
about one metre in height. The top of these levers ended in a sort of ‘fork’, 
like those on the hand-brakes in the older types of cars... Maybe there were 
eight, set in two rows. What 1 can say is that each lever emerged from the 
inside of the machine. I could see the rectangular slot quite clearly. And over 
on the other side of the room I saw a sort of table. But it wasn’t a table ... I 
thought it might possibly be an instrument-panel of some sort, but I could see 
no instruments on it. This is my own line of work, so I can assure you that I 
took a good look at it. 



Fig. 5. Sketches made by ‘H.M.’. 


Another detail which surprised the witness was the lighting - 
described as ‘very white’ — the source of which could not be discerned. ‘I 
couldn’t see any lights anywhere,’ he explained to Benitez. ‘It was just as 
though the light was coming from the walls or the ceiling or from every¬ 
where, all at once.’ This interesting feature correlates with descriptions 
given by a number of contactees over the years. 

'And what were the crew doing?’ asked Benitez. ‘Well,’ replied H.M., 
‘the man who had accompanied me set down the can of water near where 
the other four were, and then came back to where I was standing.’ 

The men were all dressed in a sort of beige-coloured laboratory over¬ 
all which fell to below the knees, fastened with a belt. The rest of the 
clothing was not ‘abnormal’ in any way - though perhaps abnormal in its 



94 


Alien Base 


normality! ‘They were wearing trousers and shoes,’ said H.M. ‘I imagine 
that if these had been different from ours I would have noticed it.' 

‘What might have been the age of the man who talked to you?’ asked 
Benitez. 

‘He was a bit older than the others,’ replied H.M., ‘maybe he might 
have been 40-plus.’ 

‘And how were their faces?’ 

‘I noticed nothing strange about them. Maybe their foreheads were a 
bit more pronounced ...’ 

‘And their hair?’ 

‘Not very long. And the same on all of them. It wasn’t black hair - 
maybe chestnut coloured. As I said, it wasn’t strange in any way.’ 

‘Were they muscular in their build?’ 

‘No. Rather on the slim side. Their hands reminded me somewhat of 
the hands of women.’ 

‘Did you notice if they had beards?’ 

‘No. They had no beards at all. It is curious; it seemed as though they 
had never had any beard.' 

‘And were their movements normal?’ 

■Yes, completely. As I have already said, there was nothing about them 
that might have caught my attention.’ 

‘Were they talking to each other?’ 

‘I don’t think so. One thing is certain, and that is that those four did 
not even turn to look at me when I entered the craft. They seemed to be 
engaged in attending to the injured man who, as I have said, was 
stretched out on the circular couch running round the whole interior of 
the machine. When my companion returned to where I was, I asked him 
if they needed a doctor. But he said they did not. It was he who then asked 
me whether there were any matters on which I would like to ask questions 
and be given information. And I said yes, naturally.’ 

Propulsion and Origin 

‘I said that, being an instrumentation engineer, I was puzzled to see no 
panels or navigation instruments,’ continued H.M. ‘I also asked him how 
the machine worked.’ 

I asked: ‘Where are the engines?’ To which he replied: ‘We don’t have any 
engines.’ So I asked: ‘Then how do you navigate?’ and at this he pointed to 
the levers and said: ‘We have a different system. We nullify gravity. That is 
how we rise.’ I asked him how they overcame gravity, and he replied that they 
used a very heavy fluid, which circulated in a tube. And with this system they 
created a magnet... That is to say, somewhat as we do with electromagnets, 
except that they, instead of using electricity, were using this fluid ... So then 
1 thought of mercury. Meanwhile, the man continued his explanation to me. 



Proliferating Encounters 


95 


Apparently this fluid was subjected to a velocity similar to the velocity of 
light; that is to say, the velocity of electricity. But, I answered: ‘That is im¬ 
possible inside a tube.’ 

‘No,’ he replied, ‘it is simple. When the fluid is leaving the tube, it is 
already entering at the other end. Thus, its relative speed is infinite ...’ So it 
seems that, on the basis of this system plus a few ‘magnets’ of a kind which 
clearly do not exist on our planet, these beings had achieved enormous 
velocities and were able to conquer gravity . .. 

I asked where they came from. He pointed towards the stars and said: 
‘From there.’ I even insisted on wanting to know from which cardinal point 
in the sky they came, but he simply kept repeating: ‘Prom there.’ And then 
he rapidly changed the subject. It was obvious that he did not want to say any 
more about that. So, after we had chatted for about 15 or 20 minutes, he 
pointed in a friendly manner towards the door and invited me to leave - and 
I did. I went down out of the machine and departed ... 

A Dream? 

The witness estimated that the entire episode had lasted for about 45 
minutes. ‘And I can assure you,’ he told Benitez, ‘that they were the 
strangest minutes of my whole life.’ Apparently, he simply left the craft 
standing there in the dark: there is no mention of his having observed it 
take off. ‘Next day,’ he said, ‘thinking it had all been a strange dream, I 
went back to the spot. And there were some very strange marks there. 
And, on top of that, there was the matter of my can, which we had to 
carry the water in, and which now was missing ... Had it been a dream, 

I would have forgotten about it straight away. But this was something 
very different from a dream. And I remember it all still with absolute per¬ 
fection, and in all its details.. .’ 20 

Absurdities and Correlations 

This fascinating story may yield some important clues as to the elusive 
nature of the UFO phenomenon. There is no reason to believe that the 
witness fabricated the story. The details are so striking as to be guaran¬ 
teed to inspire typical disbelief or even ridicule. What hoaxer would have 
described, for example, aliens dressed in very terrestrial-type coats and 
trousers, and a flying saucer with two rows of levers ‘like those on the 
hand-brakes in the older types of cars’? Even by 1951 standards, this 
seems primitive. Surely an alien race suflkiendy advanced to travel from 
another planet would have the wherewithal to locate and obtain such a 
basic requirement as water, without flagging down a passing motorist? If 
deception was involved, it is more likely that the aliens were responsible. 
On the other hand, we usually believe that aliens are omnipotent and 
omniscient. Why should that be axiomatic? 

Despite apparent absurdities, there are interesting correlations with 



96 


Alien Base 


other cases. H.M. said, for example, that the hands of the men reminded 
him ‘of the hands of women’; that their foreheads were ‘a bit more pro¬ 
nounced’; and that ‘it seemed as though they had never had any beard’. 
These descriptions — and there are others - closely correlate with those 
given by other contactees. The corollary could be, of course, that H.M. 
was familiar with the literature on the subject and had simply incorpo¬ 
rated some of its features into his yarn. I reject this hypothesis because it 
is unlikely that any hoaxer would incorporate so many unbelievable ter¬ 
restrial elements into the story. 

Why should it be incredible that something so fundamental to survival 
as water would be needed by the craft’s occupants? I am reminded here 
of the celebrated Eagle River, Wisconsin, contactee case of 18 April 1961, 
investigated by Dr J. Allen Hynek and Major Robert Friend of Project 
Blue Book. The witness, Joe Simonton, claimed that a flying saucer (see 
Fig. 6) hovered just above the ground on his property and one of two 
human-type occupants handed him a sort of jug and indicated they 
required water. Shortly after Simonton had obliged, he was handed some 
pancakes which the aliens had been cooking on a flameless grill! Absurd, 
to be sure, yet there is no evidence to suggest that Simonton made up the 
story. Moreover, certain features of his description of the aliens correlate 
well with some other contact stories; for example, he reported that: ‘They 
were about five feet tall and about 120 lbs and looked ... of Italian 
descent. Very nice-looking fellows about 25 to 30 years old. Each one was 
very well built in proportion to their size. [They] had a complexion much 
finer than any woman I ever saw.’ 21 

Regarding the instruments described by H.M., there are several 



Fig. 6. A sketch of the object encountered by Joe Simonton. 
(FSB Publications) 




Proliferating Encounters 


97 


accounts of exotic instrumentation, including putatively official ac¬ 
counts, but these are usually associated with operator-occupants whose 
morphology is unlike that of humans. This raises an interesting point that 
the contactee experiences tend to be with extraterrestrials whose 
morphology, dress and mannerisms are closely similar to those of 
ordinary humans, while the accounts of abductees usually involve aliens 
who, though humanoid, are still rather ‘other-worldly’ in physique and 
behaviour. 

THE THREE GIANTS 

The witness in the following case, identified as ‘Rose C.’, was 24 years old 
at the time of her initial encounter, which occurred on 11 April 1952, 
near the French town ofNimes (Gard). Living with her father at the time 
in one of his small outhouses, Rose was awoken in the middle of the night 
by the growling of their dogs. Concerned, she went outside. 

Rose found herself in the presence of four strangers: three very tall 
men of about 2.30 to 2.40 metres in height and one normal-sized man. 
The normal man, speaking in perfect French and acting as translator 
between Rose and the three ‘giants’, began by explaining that they had 
come from a faraway world. Apart from their extraordinary height, the 
giants could have passed for Hindus, claimed Rose. Two looked very ath¬ 
letic while the third, who acted as ‘leader’, seemed to be rather older. 
This man had what looked like a ‘black half-marble’ in the centre of his 
forehead, and around his neck he wore a strap holding a kind of box with 
buttons. Rose was shown their craft, which was hovering about a metre 
off the ground. It was enormous, slate-grey and shaped like a straw hat 
She declined an invitation to go with them, explaining that she had an 
elderly father and a young daughter to look after. 

The normal man, a former teacher, said that he himself had been con¬ 
tacted by these beings 20 years earlier (1932), at the age of 25, and, having 
no ties, had accepted an invitation to live with them. When Rose com¬ 
mented on his youthful appearance, he replied that ‘up there time passes 
much less quickly’. After explaining to Rose that she had nothing to fear, 
he went on to ask if they could take some books away with them! 
Obligingly, Rose took the visitors to her father’s other outhouse and gave 
them a copy of Alexandre Dumas’ The Count of Monte Cristo and some 
old magazines. 

While in the outhouse, the leader gave Rose a demonstration of their 
ability to levitate and teleport objects. Using the buttons on the small 
box, he dematerialized a rock, which then reappeared outside without the 
door having been opened. Furthermore, large rocks, lying at some dis¬ 
tance away from the outhouse, were made to float in the air like balloons. 
It was not just the technological tricks that impressed Rose. The leader 



98 


Alien Base 


also evinced telepathic ability, connected perhaps, she wondered, with 
the device on his forehead. He seemed also to emanate great wisdom. 

The teacher explained to Rose that the extraterrestrials had ‘estab¬ 
lished’ Earth for the use of its human inhabitants: this had been rather 
like a ‘penal colony’, consisting of banished individuals, from whom 
humans are descended. He went on to say that 11,357 years ago (9405 
BC), because of Man, there had been a cataclysm on Earth. (Many other 
contactees have been told that Earthmen destroyed their civilization 
thousands of years ago.) 

As to the purpose of their current visits, it was explained that the 
extraterrestrials were here to take vegetation and soil samples to evaluate 
the consequences of our atomic explosions. The destructive, senseless 
behaviour of humans, and disregard not only for our contemporaries but 
also for future generations on this beautiful planet, was commented on. 
Asked by Rose why the extraterrestrials did not intervene, the teacher 
replied that no good had ever come out of such attempts in the past. 

The visitors then told Rose that they had to go, owing to the fact that 
time spent on Earth exhausted the giants. Having warned Rose to stay 
clear of the craft and to hold the dogs, they boarded their craft and it took 
off, making a droning sound and creating a strong draught of warm 
wind. 2223 

There is a great deal more to this fascinating story, which was investi¬ 
gated by Charles Gourain and published in France. Gourain was 
impressed by Rose’s sincerity, as was Guy Tarade, who wrote the preface 
to the book. ‘I have known Rose for several years, and I don’t hesitate to 
say that hers is a unique case,’ he states, adding that, in his opinion, 
extraterrestrial encounters never seem to be accidental but are always 
predetermined. ‘It is,’ he says, ‘a genetic inheritance which motivates the 
encounters between the extraterrestrials and us . . .’ 24 


NOTES 

1 Giudici, Antonio, ‘The Case of Bruno Facchini’, translated by Gordon 
Creighton, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 20, no. 6, November-Deccmber 1974, 
pp. 30-1. 

2 ‘Examination of Some Metallic Fragments Attributed to a Flying Saucer’, 
Report No. I.S.M.L. N.530954/4I57, Istituto Sperimentale dei Metalli 
Leggeri, Novara, 30 September 1953. 

3 Giudici, op. ciL, p. 31. 

4 Bemardini, Ezio, ‘A Classic Case from 1950’, translated by Gordon 




Proliferating Encounters 99 

Creighton, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 32, no. 4, published June 1987, pp. 
12-13. 

5 Ibid. 

6 Stringfield, Leonard H-, Situation Red, The UFO Siege!, Doubleday, 
Garden City, New York, 1977, pp. 80-3. 

7 Lorenzen, Coral E., The Great Flying Saucer Hoax: The UFO Facts and 
Their Interpretation, William-Frederick, New York, 1962, pp. 54-6. As 
Lorenzen reports, Dr Botta’s story first appeared in the Caracas daily news¬ 
paper El Universal on 7 May 1955, which led Horacio Gonzales to interview 
the witness in depth. 

8 Stringfield, op. cit., pp. 83-4. 

9 Good, Timothy, Beyond Top Secret: The Worldwide UFO Security Threat, 
Sidgwick & Jackson, London, 1996, p. 511. 

10 Sanchez-Ocejo, Dr Virgilio, and Stevens, Lt-Col. Wendelle C., UFO 
Contact from Undersea, UFO Photo Archives, 3224 S. Winona Circle, 
Tucson, Arizona 85730,1982, pp. 165-6. 

11 Corso, Col. Philip J., with Birnes, William J,, The Day After Roswell, Pocket 
Books, New York and London, 1997, p. 54. 

12 Guieu, Jimmy, Les Soucoupes Volantes viennent dim autre Monde, Fleuve 
Noir, Paris, 1954, pp. 230-3. Translated by Lex Mebane and included in an 
article by Ted Bloecher, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 20, no.3, December 
1974, pp. 26-7, 

13 Keyhoe, Maj. Donald E., Flying Saucers: Top Secret, G.P. Putnam’s Sons, 
New York, 1960, pp.15-20.' 

14 UFO Investigator, National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena, 
September 1970, p. 3, 

15 Ibid., October 1970, p, 3. 

16 Keyhoe, op. cit., pp. 19-20. 

17 Jones, William E., and Scott, Dr Irena, ‘US Navy Support of UFO 
Research’, Mid-Ohio Research Associates (MORA), 5837 Karric. Square 
Drive, Box 162, Dublin, Ohio 43017. 

18 Sunday Dispatch , London, 25 February 1951. 

19 Girvan, Waveney, Flying Saucers and Common Sense, The Citadel Press, 
New York, 1956, pp. 80-1. 

20 Benitez, Juan Jose, ‘The Ufonaut’s Plea for Water’, translated from the 
Spanish by Gordon Creighton, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 24, no.2, 
March-April 1977, pp. 3-6. 

21 Clark, Jerome C., The UFO Encyclopedia, vol. 3, Omnigraphics, Penebscot 
Building, Detroit, Michigan 48226, 1996, pp. 168-77. 

22 Mesnard, Joel, ‘The French Abduction File’, translated by Claudia Yapp, 
MUFON UFO Journal, no. 309, January 1994, pp. 5-7. 

23 C., Rose, Rencontre avec les Extralerrestres, Editions du Rocher, 1979. 

24 Ibid. 



Chapter 6 


The Space People 


Nothing is more certain to provoke derision during a conversation about 
UFOs than the name of George Adamski, whose initial story of his con¬ 
tact with an extraterrestrial in 1952 was the first contactee case to become 
known to the general public. This fact alone is important. As we have 
seen, there have been a number of stories by others claiming contacts 
prior to 1952 but, as far as I am aware, none of these was published widely 
until the mid-1950s. 

Adamski’s ‘Aryan’ space people have never gone down well. Indeed, in 
some circles they inspired rumours that Hitler was alive and well and 
living in Patagonia, together with teams of Nazis who were building fleets 
of flying saucers in preparation for world domination. Adamski’s space 
people were not all fair-skinned, however. As he pointed out during a pri¬ 
vate meeting in Denmark in 1963: ‘People on other planets are coloured 
too, just like we find here. Orthon himself is dark: not as dark as a Negro, 
but darker than you and me.'' This brings to mind the ‘Hindu-looking’ 
spacemen reported by Rose C. and other contactees. 

BACKGROUND 

George Adamski was born in Poland (of Polish and Egyptian parents) in 
1891, and when he was two his parents emigrated to Dunkirk, New York 
State. In 1913 he joined the 13th US Cavalry Regiment, stationed at 
Columbus, New Mexico. According to his FBI file, he worked in 1916 as 
a caretaker and painter at the Yellowstone National Park, then in 1918 
entered the National Guard and was stationed at Portland, Oregon. 
Following discharge from the Army, his various jobs included working at 
a flour mill and in the concrete business. In 1921 he began lecturing on 
philosophy in California. 2 Adamski founded the monastery of the ‘Royal 
Order of Tibet’ at Laguna Beach in 1954, where he taught ‘Universal 
Laws’ and ‘Universal Progressive Christianity’. (Though some of 
Adamski’s philosophy is eclectic, much seems to be original.) A number 
of his talks were broadcast on radio stations in Los Angeles and Long 
Beach. At this time, Adamski’s students conferred on him the tide of 
‘Professor’. In 1940 he moved with his wife and some devotees to 
Palomar Gardens, on the southern slopes of Mount Palomar, California. 



The Space People 


101 


One of his students gave him a telescope - a six-inch Tinsley reflector - 
through which he took many remarkable photographs of spacecraft. 3 

Adamski also possessed a 15-inch reflector telescope, which was 
housed under a dome at Palomar Gardens. This gave rise to considerable 
confusion at times, since the famous Palomar Observatory at Mount 
Palomar - housing the 200-inch Hale telescope — was situated 11 miles 
from Adamski’s home. It is said by some detractors that, to give credence 
to his claims, ‘Professor’ Adamski used to boast that he was employed by 
the Observatory. It is true that duringa meeting with researchers Jim and 
Coral Lorenzen in the spring of 1951, he claimed full access to the 
Observatory’s telescopes. ‘A letter I wrote to the Director of the Palomar 
Observatory elicited an answer which was most revealing,’ wrote Coral 
Lorenzen. ‘Adamski’s claims of free access to the Palomar telescopes and 
his inferred relationship with the Observatory personnel had caused 
them considerable embarrassment and the added burden of answering 
correspondence to deny his claims.’ 4 

Adamski was the subject of a number of investigations by the FBI, 
partly as a consequence of allegedly unpatriotic and pro-Communist 
statements that were reported by various people and also because 
Adamski himself instigated meetings with the FBI to keep them 
informed about his experiences; on one occasion, ironically, to inform 
on a couple of his associates whom he considered might be unpatriotic! 
Regarding Adamski’s alleged claims of having been employed at the 
Observatory, one FBI document (see Fig. 7) is damning. It states in 
part: 

[name deleted] at the Palomar Observatory, advised that he had been 
acquainted with Adamski since 1943, at which time Adamski had called him¬ 
self ‘the Reverend Adamski’ and had held Easter services in the valley . . . 
[name deleted] further advised that Adamski claimed to have worked at the 
Observatory at Mount Palomar, but stated that Adamski had never been 
employed at the Observatory. 5 

In his first book, published in 1953, Adamski (presumably aware of the 
official denial) did state: ‘To correct a widespread error let me say here, I 
am not and have never been associated with the staff of the Observatory. 
1 am friendly with some of the staff members, but I do not work at the 
Observatory.’ 6 

Adamski has been referred to by his numerous detractors as a mere 
‘hamburger seller’. This is true, to the extent that he did indeed help 
serve at the Palomar Gardens Cafe, which was owned by one of his 
devotees, Alice Wells, though an FBI file mistakenly names him as owner 
and operator of the cafe. 7 




102 


Alien Base 


ENCOUNTER AT DESERT CENTER 

In Chapter 1,1 cited Adamski’s detailed description of ‘Orthon', who he 
claims stepped out of a flying saucer in the Californian desert, 10 miles 
from Desert Center, at 12.30 on 20 November 1952. Although the basic 
story is well known, most readers will be unfamiliar with the details, as 
published in Flying Saucers Have Landed , the best-selling book by 
Desmond Leslie and Adamski, which has long been out of print. 

The contact was partly observed from a distance by six friends of 
Adamski, all of whom signed affidavits testifying to this event. Adamski, 
who had already succeeded in taking some remarkable photographs 
through his telescope of what he called ‘scoutcraft’ and ‘mother ships’, 
had made a number of unsuccessful trips to the Californian desert in 
1952, in hope of making contact with the extraterrestrials. On 20 
November, he arranged for Alice Wells and Lucy McGinnis to drive him 
to a certain destination, which turned out to be the contact site near 
Desert Center. Accompanying them, in a separate car, were Alfred and 
Betty Bailey and George and Betty Hunt Williamson. They arrived at 
their destination shortly after 08.00, but it was not until after 12 noon that 
the adventure began. At this time, a twin-engined aircraft passed low 
overhead then disappeared in the distance. ‘Suddenly and simultan¬ 
eously we all turned as one,' related Adamski, ‘looking again toward the 
closest mountain ridge where just a few minutes before the first plane had 
crossed.’ And there it was: 

Riding high, and without sound, there was a gigantic cigar-shaped silvery 
ship, without wings or appendages of any kind. Slowly, almost as if it was 
drifting, it came in our direction, then seemed to stop, hovering motionless 
• At first glance it looked like a fuselage of a very large ship with the sun's 
rays reflecting brightly from its unpainted side, at an altitude and angle where 
wings might not be noticeable. 

Excitedly, binoculars were passed round and attempts were made to 
photograph the craft. Adamski considered unpacking his telescope (to 
which was attached a camera) from the car, but thought better of the idea, 
since his hunch was that this was not the place where contact would take 
place. 8 

On the twenty-seventh anniversary of this event, in 1979, I inter¬ 
viewed Lucy McGinnis, Adamski’s former secretary, whom I found to 
be honest and objective. ‘Here came this great big ship that looked like a 
dirigible,’ she confirmed. ‘And George said, “Quick, get me up there! 1 
want to go and set the telescope up.” So I drove him [and AI Bailey] up 
to where he said we should go.’ 

I kept looking out of the car. And that ship turned and just followed us. And 
he said, ‘Here. Stop!' So I stopped, and he got out, and that dirigible stopped 



The Space People 


103 


- quite a ways away. 1 couldn’t very well judge how far away it was. And he 
set up the telescope. And after he got everything set up, he said, ‘Now you go 
back.’ 9 

Adamski remained by himself at this new site (which I have visited), 
observed by the others from an estimated distance of between half a mile 
and a mile away. As the car left, the large cigar-shaped object turned its 
nose and was lost from sight, ‘but not before a number of our planes 
roared overhead in an apparent effort to circle this gigantic stranger,’ 
reported Adamski. Five minutes later, another craft appeared: 

... my attention was attracted by a flash in the sky and almost instantly a 
beautiful small craft appeared to be drifting through a saddle between two of 
the mountain peaks and settling silently into one of the coves about a half a 
mile from me. It did not lower itself entirely below the crest of the mountain. 
Only the lower portion setded below the crest, while the upper, or dome sec¬ 
tion, remained above the crest and in full sight of the rest of my party who 
were back there watching. Yet it was in such a position that I could see the 
entire ship. 10 

Meanwhile, the others strained to see the craft. 'It seemed to me like it 
was a kind of light,’ Lucy told me, ‘but it was so dim and the sun so bright 
that 1 couldn’t be sure. Anyway, I saw it come down ... I looked through 
the binoculars, but they weren’t adjusted to my eyes and I couldn’t tell 
for sure. I could see better without them, because I have very good eyes, 
and it wasn’t such a long distance away. Out there in the desert you can 
sec a long way.’ 11 

Without taking adequate time to focus through the ground glass on the 
back of the old German plate-camera which was attached to his telescope, 
Adamski began to take several photographic plates. Regrettably, these 
did not come out well, though some additional shots he took with a hand¬ 
held Brownie box-camera came out better, if rather indistinct owing to 
the distance of the object. As the small craft moved away and dis¬ 
appeared, two military aircraft roared overhead. 

The Spaceman 

A short while later, Adamski noticed a man standing at the entrance to a 
ravine between two hills, about a quarter of a mile away. ‘He was motion¬ 
ing to me to come to him,’ he said, ‘and I wondered who he was and 
where he had come from. I was sure he had not been there before.’ 

As I approached him a strange feeling came over me and I became cautious. 
At the same time I looked round to reassure myself that we were both in full 
sight of my companions. Outwardly there was no reason for this feeling, for 
the man looked like any other man, and I could see he was somewhat smaller 
than I and considerably younger. There were only two outstanding 



104 


Alien Base 


differences that I noticed as I neared him: 1. His trousers were not like mine. 
They were in style much like ski-trousers and with a passing thought I won¬ 
dered why he wore such out here on the desert. 2. His hair was long, reach¬ 
ing to his shoulders.. . But this was not too strange for I have seen a number 
of men who wore their hair almost that long. 

Suddenly, the feeling of caution left Adamski as the truth began to 
dawn on him. ‘By this time we were quite close,' he continued. ‘He took 
four steps toward me, bringing us within arm’s length of each other. 
Now, for the first time, I fully realized that I was in the presence of a man 
from space - a human being from another world! I had not seen his ship as 
I was walking toward him, nor did I look around for it now ... I was so 
stunned by this sudden realization that I was speechless.’ 

The beauty of his form surpassed anything I had ever seen. And the pleas¬ 
antness of his face freed me of all thought of my personal self. I felt like a little 
child in the presence of one with great wisdom and much love ... He 
extended his hand in a gesture toward shaking hands. I responded in our cus¬ 
tomary manner. But he rejected this with a smile and a slight shake of his 
head. Instead of grasping hands as we on Earth do, he placed the palm of his 
against the palm of my hand, just touching it but not too firmly. 

A full description of the spaceman appears in Chapter 1, but a repeti¬ 
tion here of salient details will not go amiss. Orthon was about five feet 
six inches in height, appearing to be about 28 years old, with an extremely 
high forehead, grey-green eyes slightly aslant at the corners, slightly high 
cheek bones, with a rather tanned complexion and no signs of any facial 
stubble. He wore a chocolate-brown seamless one-piece garment of a 
very fine woven material which had a sheen to it, with no signs of 
fasteners. 

Orthon’s shoes were described by Adamski as high, ‘like a man’s 
Oxford’, fitting closely around the foot, with the opening on the outer 
side about halfway back on the heel, between the arch and the back of the 
heel. They seemed to be fastened with two narrow straps, without 
buckles or fasteners. The heels were slightly lower than normal, and the 
toe of the shoe was blunt. 12 It was the soles of the shoes which were of 
great significance, for these left hieroglyph-type impressions in the desert 
sand, plaster casts of which were later made. 

Communications 

After Adamski’s various attempts at communication in English, sign lan¬ 
guage and telepathy, it was learned that the visitor supposedly came from 
the planet Venus. Orthon even pronounced this word (and occasionally 
others) in English, with a slightly high-pitched voice. (At a later meeting, 
he explained that he understood the language well, but was probing 



The Space People 


105 


Adamski’s telepathic abilities.) 

In response to Adamski’s question about the purpose of the extrater¬ 
restrials’ visit, Orthon indicated by means of gestures and expressions 
that they were concerned about radiation going out into space from our 
nuclear bombs. 

Questioned about his craft, Orthon indicated that it had been brought 
into the Earth’s atmosphere by the large carrier ship seen earlier by all the 
witnesses. Communication followed at some length about these craft and 
other matters. Orthon made Adamski understand that there were people 
coming to Earth from other planets in our solar system, as well as from 
planets of other systems. ‘I remembered reports of men being found dead 
in some saucers that have been found on Earth,’ said Adamski, ‘saucers 
that had apparently crashed. So I asked if any of their men had ever died 
coming to Earth. He nodded his head in the affirmative, and made me 
understand that things had on occasion gone wrong within their ships...’ 

Picking up his Brownie camera, Adamski asked if he could take a 
photograph of Orthon. ‘I am sure that he understood my desire, since he 
was so good at reading my mind. Also I am positive that he knew I would 
do him no harm because he showed no signs of fear when I picked up the 
Kodak. Nevertheless, he did object to having his picture taken.’ He 
added: 

1 have heard many times that men from other worlds are walking the streets 
of Earth. And if this be true, 1 could easily understand his desire not to be 
photographed, because there were a few distinguishing points about his facial 
features. Normally these would not be noticed. But in a photograph they 
would be conspicuous and serve as points of identification for his brothers 
who have come to Earth. 13 

Eventually, however, Adamski was able to obtain a photograph of 
Orthon, presumably on another occasion. During a conversation with 
Adamski in 1959, his co-worker Lou Zinsstag asked him about a painting 
of Orthon which depicted the spaceman as rather effeminate and undis¬ 
tinguished. ‘You’ve got a good hunch there,’ replied Adamski. ‘Orthon 
did not look like that at all. He had a very manly, highly intellectual face, 
but as his features were so distinct and characteristic it would have been 
dangerous for him to have had them published. He was in Los Angeles 
several times ...’ 

‘And to my great surprise,’ reported Lou, ‘George drew a little wallet 
from his pocket, and for a few moments I was allowed to gaze at a photo¬ 
graph of Orthon’s face in profile. It was indeed very different from the 
painted version.’ 14 Lou told me that Orthon’s most striking feature was 
his pronounced chin, a feature also reported, for instance, by the Spanish 
abductee Julio F. in 1978. 15 



106 


Alien Base 


Adamski continued communicating with Orthon. One of his many 
questions dealt with death. 

I wanted to know if they die, as Earth men die ... He pointed to his body and 
nodded in the affirmative - that bodies do die. But pointing to his head, 
which I assumed to mean his mind, or intelligence, he shook his head in nega¬ 
tion; this does not die. And with a motion of his hand, he gave me the impres¬ 
sion that this - the intelligence - goes on evolving. Then pointing to himself, 
he indicated that once he lived here on Earth, then pointing up into space, 
[that] now he is living out there ... 

Finally, Orthon kept pointing to his feet and talking in a language that 
was incomprehensible. ‘It sounded like a mixture of Chinese with a 
tongue that I felt could have sounded like one of the ancient languages 
spoken here on Earth,’ commented Adamski. ‘I have no way of knowing 
this as fact. It was only my reaction as I listened, and his voice was indeed 
musical to listen to.’ 

From his talk and his pointing to his feet, I felt there must be something very 
important there for me. And as he stepped to one side from the spot where he 
had been standing, I noticed strange markings from the print of his shoe left 
in the earth. He looked intently at me to see that I was understanding what he 
wanted me to do. And as I indicated that I did, and would comply, he stepped 
carefully on to another and another spot. Thus he made three sets of deep and 
distinct footprints. I believe his shoes must have been especially made for this 
trip and the markings heavily embossed on the soles to leave such deep 
imprints. 16 

The Scoutcraft 

Orthon then motioned for Adamski to follow him, and they both walked 
towards the waiting craft. ‘It was a beautiful small craft,’ said Adamski, 
‘shaped more like a heavy glass bell than a saucer. Yet I could not see 
through it [though] it was translucent and of exquisite colour.’ 

However, that no mistake may be given here, let me say that I definitely do 
not believe this ship was made of glass such as we know it. It was a specially 
processed metal... I believe they know how to bring their primary elements 
from the opaque stage to a translucent stage, yet practically indestructible in 
hardness, as is the diamond. And it was of such a material that this space craft 
was made... Also it is this translucent quality, along with the power they use, 
that makes them appear as different coloured lights without definite form. 

The ship was hovering above the ground, about a foot or two at the far side 
from me, and very near to the bank of the hill. But the slope of the hill was 
such that the front, or that part of it closest to me, was a good six feet above 
the earth. The three-ball landing gear was half lowered below the edge of the 
flange that covered them, and I had a feeling this was a precautionary act just 
in case they had definitely to land. Some of the gusts of wind were pretty 



The Space People 


107 


strong and caused the ship to wobble at times. When this took place, the sun 
reflecting on the surface of the ship caused beautiful prismatic rays of light to 
reflect out from it, as from a smoky diamond .. . 

Nearing the ship, 1 noticed a round ball at the very top that looked like a 
heavy lens of some kind. And it glowed . . . The top of the craft was dome 
shaped, with a ring of gears or heavy coil built into and encircling the side 
wall at the base of this domed top. This, too, glowed as though power was 
going through it. There were round portholes in the side wall, but not all the 
way round, because immediately above one of the balls of landing gear I 
noticed that the wall was solid. Whether this was true over the other two balls 
I cannot say because I did not walk around the ship. The covered portholes 
must have been made of a different quality or thickness of material for they 
were clear and transparent. And once, for a fleeting second, I saw a beautiful 
face appear and look out. I felt that whoever was inside was looking for the 
one who was still out with me, but no word was spoken ... 

The lower outside portion of the saucer was made like a flange, very shiny 
yet not smooth as a single piece of metal would appear. It seemed to have 
layers of a fashion, but they couldn’t be used as steps because they were in 
reverse to what steps should be... 

My space-man companion warned me not to get too close to [the craft] and 
he himself stopped a good foot away from it. But I must have stepped just a 
little closer than he, for as 1 turned to speak to him, my right shoulder came 
slightly under the outer edge of the flange and instantly my arm was jerked 
up, and almost at the same instant thrown back down against my body. The 
force was so strong that, although 1 could still move the arm, I had no feeling 
in it as 1 stepped dear of the ship. 

My companion was quite distressed about this accident. .. However, he 
did assure me that in time it would be all right. Three months later, his words 
have been proved true for feeling has returned and only an occasional shoot¬ 
ing pain as of a deeply-bruised bone returns to remind me of the incident. 

At the time, Adamski was more concerned about damage to the exposed 
negative plates still in his jacket pocket, on the side where he had been 
closest to the craft. As Adamski moved these to his other pocket, Orthon 
indicated that he would like one of the plates. ‘This he placed in the front 
of his blouse,’ said Adamski, ‘but I still didn’t see any opening or pocket 
of any kind. As he did this, he made me understand that he would return 
the holder to me, but I did not understand how, when, or where.’ 

A request by Adamski to take a ride in the ship was politely turned 
down. Then Orthon entered the craft. 

With a few graceful steps he reached the bank at the back of the ship and 
stepped up on to the flange. At least that is the way it looked to me. Where 
the entrance was, or how he went into the ship, I do not know for sure, but as 
it silently rose and moved away, it turned a little and I saw a small opening 
about the centre of the flange being closed by what looked like a sliding door. 





Alien Base 


Also I heard the two occupants talking together, and their voices were as 
music, but their words I could not understand. 

As the ship started moving, I noticed two rings under the flange and a third 
around the centre disk. This inner ring and the outer one appeared to be 
revolving clockwise, while the ring between these two moved in a counter 
clockwise motion. 17 

The Sequel 

After the craft had disappeared, Adamski returned to the footprints. ‘As 
I was walking back to them,’ he reported, ‘I noticed that both his foot¬ 
prints and mine were visible as we had walked toward the hovering ship. 
But his were deeper in every instance than mine.’ Adamski waved his hat 
to the others in a prearranged signal, and they came to meet him at a 
nearby roadside, leaving the cars there because of the rough terrain lead¬ 
ing to the contact site. The entire encounter had lasted for one hour. And 
all the while, military aircraft circled overhead - also for some time after¬ 
wards. 

George Hunt Williamson set about making plaster casts of the foot¬ 
prints. There was much excitement, and everyone wanted to ask ques¬ 
tions at once. Adamski was beside himself - literally. ‘I felt as though I 
was only moving bodily here on Earth,’ he said, ‘and my answers to the 
questions were given in a daze.” 8 

Lucy McGinnis’s affidavit, identical to those of the others, reads as 
follows: 

1, the undersigned, do solemnly state that 1 have read the account herein of 
the personal contact between George Adamski and a man from another 
world, brought here in his Flying Saucer - ‘Scout’ ship. And that 1 was party 
to, and witness to the event as herein recounted. 19 

I asked Lucy how much she had been able to see. ‘You couldn’t see 
very much detail that far away,’ she explained, ‘they were far away 
enough to look like fenceposts! But they stood talking to each other, and 
we saw them turn and go back up to the ship. Now, I didn’t see [Orthon] 
get into the ship.’ 

And when it left, it was just like a bubble or kind of like a bright light that 
lifted up. Then George went out on to the highway and he motioned for us 
to come out. He told us that he had got too close and his arm had got caught 
in the radiation from the craft. And he suffered from that for quite a while 
... You could see where the two of them had walked on the ground. There’s 
no question about that at all. 20 

Objections have been voiced concerning the fact that Adamski seemed 
rather too well prepared for the Desert Center contact (e.g., the plaster of 
Paris). A clue has been provided by Sergeant Jerrold Baker, a former Air 



The Space People 


109 


Force instructor who had been staying at Palomar Gardens at that time. 
Several days before the party left for the desert, Baker claims he inadver¬ 
tently heard a tape recording being replayed of a ‘psychic communica¬ 
tion’ received through Adamski. ‘From this brief behind-the-scenes 
listening,’ he said, ‘I was able to determine that the desert contact was not 
a mere stab in the dark or a picnic in the desert, but a planned operation.' 
Furthermore, Baker refuted Adamski’s claim to have spent untold hours 
watching the skies and waiting for a chance to photograph the space 
ships. ‘This is not true,’ he continued. ‘I know that he knows exactly 
when a ship is coming, and is there at the precise instant to snap the pic- 

Adamski was convinced that the symbols on the footprints (see plates) 
held important clues for mankind. He proffered that ancient civilizations 
once lived on Earth, whose development and understanding of the uni¬ 
verse were far superior to those of contemporary mankind. The symbols, 
he said, were probably of a universal nature and might be understood 
perhaps as ‘guideposts in space, presently being used by men of other 
Worlds in interplanetary travel. And thus a helpful hand is extended to 
Earthmcn as they turn their thoughts and efforts outwardly toward space 
travelling.’ 22 Similar symbols were reproduced and discussed by 
Professor Marcel Hornet in his book Sons of the Sun , first published in 
1958. Hornet held that the symbols dated back at least 10,000 and prob¬ 
ably 20,000 years. 23 

THE RETURN VISIT 

Because of Orthon’s promise to return the photographic plate, Adamski 
kept himself in a state of constant alertness. With the plate camera 
attached, he set up his telescope at a spot on the Palomar Gardens prop¬ 
erty giving an unobstructed view of the far distance, including a long 
expanse of the Pacific Ocean shoreline. 

On the morning of 13 December 1952 he was alerted by the roar of 
jets overhead. In the distance he saw a flash, and remarked to others with 
him at that time that it might be the spacecraft. Then, at 09.00, he saw 
another flash in the sky, and tried to aim his telescope at it. ‘Sure 
enough,’ he reported, ‘I was able to observe it gliding noiselessly in my 
direction - an iridescent glass-like craft flashing its brilliant colours in 
the morning sun . , .’ 

As it came over the nearby valley, it seemed to stop and hover motionlessly. 
With utmost will power I restrained my excitement in an effort to get a really 
good picture this time. Quickly I took two shots. Then realizing that the ship 
being that near was too large to get the whole thing in the picture with the 
camera in that position, I turned the camera on the eyepiece and took another 
shot while it was still hovering. I shot the fourth picture just as the ship was 



110 


Alien Base 


beginning to move again ... the first three of these pictures proved to show 
good detail, while the fourth - taken in motion - turned out fuzzy, but is still 
good. 

While changing the position of the camera on die eyepiece, Adamski 
made some quick calculations of the craft’s dimensions, comparing it 
with known distances. Instead of being 20 feet in diameter, as he had 
guessed three weeks earlier, he estimated that it was probably about 35 to 
36 feet in diameter and 15 to 20 feet in height. 

As it approached probably within 100 feet of me, and to one side, one of the 
portholes was opened slightly, a hand was extended and the selfsame holder 
which my space-man friend had carried away with him on November 20 was 
dropped to the ground. As the holder was released, the hand appeared to 
wave slightly just before the craft passed beyond me. I watched the holder 
drop and strike a rock as it hit the ground. 

Adamski picked up the holder, dented from its impact with the rock, 
and wrapped it in his handkerchief so as not to damage any potentially 
important evidence, such as fingerprints. Meanwhile, the craft crossed a 
small ravine on the Palomar Gardens property as it moved towards the 
base of the mountains to the north. Then dropping below the level of the 
treetops, it flew close to a cabin where it was allegedly seen by some other 
witnesses and photographed by one. 24 

The photograph, supposedly taken with a Brownie box-camera by 
Jerrold Baker, who had been staying on the property since the end of 
October, was (along with Adamski’s photos) the subject of much contro¬ 
versy. The saucer certainly looks blurred (see plates), but given the slow 
shutter speed of the Brownie, even slight movement of the craft would 
have led to this result. Baker signed a statement testifying to the event, 
which, in part, states: 

Suddenly in the comer of my eyes, I saw a circular object skim over the tree- 
tops from the general area where the Professor was located ... I waited 
momentarily, mostly because of shock I guess, as it continued coming closer. 
It then hung in the air not over 12 feet high at the most, and about 25 feet 
from where I was standing. It seemed as if it did this knowing I was there 
waiting to photograph it. I quickly snapped a picture and as I did it tilted 
slighdy and zoomed upwards over the tree faster than anyone can almost 
imagine... 

These things I know for certain: 1. The saucer made no sound. 2. It was 
guided by a superior intelligence. 3. There was a slight odor present as the 
saucer sped upwards. 4. It had portholes and three huge ball-bearings, pre¬ 
sumably landing gears. 25 

According to a later affidavit, Baker denied having taken the picture. ‘I 
did not take the alleged photograph accredited to me,’ he wrote. ‘The 



The Space People 


111 


alleged photograph was taken with the Brownie camera along with three 
or four similar photos by Mr George Adamski on the morning of Dec. 
12th 1952, and not on Dec. 13th, 1952.’ 26 
And in a letter to investigator James Moseley, Baker elaborated: 

It was my suggestion that [Adamski] be located at one spot with his telescope 
and camera while I or any other individual be located at another spot on the 
property with a different type of camera ... Much to my amazement, within 
a week after this suggestion, George Adamski early one morning disclosed 
the fact that he had taken pictures with the Brownie camera, adjacent to his 

Baker went on to give the names of two other people who he claimed 
could verify these matters. 27 While it is known that Baker later turned 
against Adamski, due in part to the latter’s displeasure at Baker’s behav¬ 
iour while staying at Palomar Gardens (including plans for operating a 
gadget to ’draw down flying saucers and airplanes’, which matter was 
reported to the FBI), 28 it is possible that Adamski may have twisted the 
evidence. Perhaps he took the Brownie photo and then asked Baker to 
take the credit for it, to bolster the evidence. However, Lucy McGinnis, 
who was there at the time, disagreed vehemently. ‘That whole thing was 
Baker’s doing,’ she told me. He was raring to do anything to prove the 
point. He didn’t deny it before me, that I remember.’ 29 

On the same day the photographs were taken, Adamski took the pho¬ 
tographic plates, with the exception of the one returned by Orthon, for 
developing and printing by a Mr D.J. Detwiler in Carlsbad, 40 miles 
away. All of the pictures turned out perfectly. Uncertain for a while as to 
who should develop the plate returned by Orthon, Adamski finally 
decided to take it to his local photographer. ‘When the finishing was 
done, and with witnesses present, and a print was made,’ wrote Adamski, 
‘there were indications of the original photo - which I had taken before 
the space visitor took the holder - being washed off; and this was replaced 
by a strange photograph and a symbolic message, which to this day has 
not been fully deciphered. Several scientists are working on it [and are] 
still working on deciphering the markings of the footprints.’ He decided 
against having any fingerprints taken. 

At Adamski’s request, representatives of two government agencies 
(the FBI and the Air Force’s Office of Special Investigations, OSI) came 
to visit him at Palomar Gardens. ‘These men listened intently to my 
detailed description of all that had taken place,’ he reported, ‘but they 
registered no surprise. Nor did they express any doubt regarding the 
truthfulness of my statements. They did not even question me ... They 
did take a couple of my photographs of the craft, as well as a print from 
the dropped negative, which I gave to them.’ 30 The FBI memorandum 





112 Alien Base 

pertaining to this meeting, sent to the Director, J. Edgar Hoover (Fig. 7), 
confirms that Adamski did indeed give the investigators a detailed 
description of the Desert Center encounter (and much else as well). 
Some extracts follow: 

Adamski stated that he took a picture of the space ship and the space man, but 
the space man could evidendy read his thoughts inasmuch as he motioned to 
him not to take the picture and when the space man left he took the ‘plate’ 
with the negative on it with him.. . 

This differs from Adamski’s probably more accurate version of events, 
as published in Flying Saucers Have Landed, wherein he stated that he did 
not actually take a photo of Orthon. The FBI memorandum continues: 
Adamski advised that on December 13, 1952, the space ship returned to the 
Palomar Gardens and came low enough to drop the plate which the space 
man had taken from him . . . and had then gone over the hill . . . Adamski 
stated that as the space ship was leaving, (Jerrold Baker] also took a picture of 
the ship .. . Adamski furnished the writer with copies of the space writing 
and photographs of the space ship. 

As to Adamski’s assertion that the agents expressed no doubts con¬ 
cerning the truthfulness of his statements, there is no such confirmation 
by either the FBI or theOSI. On the contrary. ‘No further investigation 
is being conducted,’ concludes the memo. ‘This case is being [sic] con¬ 
sidered closed.’ 31 Another FBI memo states that: ‘OSI of the Air Force 
has done considerable investigation . . . and lends no credence to the 
truthfulness of Adamski’s statements.’ 32 

AN ADMONISHMENT FROM THE FBI 
During a speech before the Corona, California, Lions Club, on 12 March 
1953, Adamski boasted that, according to a local newspaper report, his 
material had been ‘cleared 1 by the FBI and OSI, apparently supporting 
this extravagant claim on other occasions with a doctored copy of a paper 
signed by FBI and Air Force agents. For this misrepresentation, 
Adamski was visited by FBI agents from San Diego and soundly admon¬ 
ished. As FBI Director J. Edgar Hoover wrote: 

At the time of the interview, Mr Adamski denied making the statement. In 
the Agents’ presence he wrote a letter to the Editor of the Riverside 
’Enterprise’ pointing out the incorrectness of the article with respect to FBI 
and Air Force Intelligence clearance of his material... At the same time, 
Adamski, in a statement to the interviewing agents, advised he had not made 
and did not intend to make statements to the effect [that] the United States 
Air Force or Federal Bureau of Investigation have approved material used in 
his speeches. 33 



The Space People 


113 


ADAMSKI t 

1952, on the California 
miles from Desart Center 



























114 


Alien Base 


SD 100-8382 




THE SCOUTCRAFT PHOTOGRAPHS 

Most researchers have denounced Adamski’s famous ‘fifties’ scoutcraft 
photos as fakes. Descriptions of the ‘model’ used cover a wide range of 
utensils: ‘lampshade’; ‘operating theatre lamp’; ‘saucepan lid with ping- 
pong balls’; ‘tobacco humidor’; ‘chicken feeder’; ‘the top of a 1937 
canister-type vacuum cleaner’; and ‘a bottle-cooler made in Wigan, 
Lancashire’. The problem is that no one has yet produced examples of 
any of the above items which resemble proportionately the pictured craft. 
Adamski, incidentally, offered $2,000 to anyone who could prove his 
photos were fakes. There were no takers. 

Desmond Leslie, a former Second World War fighter pilot who wrote 





The Space People 


115 


the first (and longer) part of Flying Saucers Have Landed, made a strong 
case for the authenticity of the photographs: 

Anyone with experience of tele-photography who has obtained an original 
print made from the original Adamski negatives will at once notice a factor 
that has to be taken into account by all film directors using models to 
represent the full-size objects, a factor known sometimes as 'atmospheric 
softening’. This phenomenon is due to moisture and dust in the atmosphere, 
so that it is impossible to match up a foreground model with a distant back¬ 
ground (however sharp your depth of focus) unless certain partial gauzings 
and screenings are used. The effect through a tele-photo lens is to produce a 
certain greying and flattening which is practically impossible to reproduce 
artificially. Tele-photography also slightly alters the perspective, hence the 
flattening and greying effects clearly noticeable in Adamski’s pictures. 

Leslie also points out, based on his experiments using Adamski’s 
actual telescope at the site where the photographs were taken, that it is 
evident that atmospheric distortion was, in one of the photos, responsible 
for making one of the three balls under the craft appear to be larger than 
the others. This would not have happened if a model had been used. 
Leslie further adduces the fact that Adamski’s old German lhagee- 
Graphles plate-camera could only be used in conjunction with the six- 
inch telescopic lens: no other lenses were supplied with it and to fake a 
photo using a model, a much lower focal length would have been used. 

Leslie gave the Adamski enlargements to one of Hollywood’s most 
revered directors, John Ford, who stated his opinion that the saucer was 
a large object shot through a telephoto lens of about six inches focal 
length. These findings were confirmed by Joseph Mansour, whose job it 
was to make photos of model aircraft appear to be the real thing. 34 And 
Pev Marley, Cecil B. de Mille’s leading special-effects cameraman, who 
had served as a photographer with Enemy Intercept Command in the 
Second World War, reportedly testified at a meeting of US Air Force 
Reserve officers in 1953 that Adamski’s pictures, if faked, were the 
cleverest he had ever seen. 35 Later, he denied having made such a state¬ 
ment 36 

In Beyond Top Secret, I discussed the extraordinary 8mm colour movie 
film of a scoutcraft, identical to the one photographed at Palomar 
Gardens, taken by Adamski in the presence of Madeleine Rodeffer and 
three other witnesses at Silver Spring, Maryland, on 26 February 1965 (a 
frame from which is reproduced in the colour plates). According to 
William Sherwood, an optical physicist and former senior project devel¬ 
opment engineer at Eastman Kodak, the film is authentic. 37 My own 
investigations into the film began in 1966: I can state unequivocally, 
based on those investigations and a friendship with Madeleine which 



116 


Alien Base 


spans three decades, that the film is genuine. (Interestingly, as might have 
been the case with Jerrold Baker, Adamski asked Madeleine to take credit 
for the film.) 

Also in Beyond Top Secret , I cited the photographs taken by Stephen 
Darbishire, in the presence of his cousin Adrian Myers, at Coniston, 
Lancashire, in February 1954. The best of these two photographs shows 
a ‘glass-like’ craft which is identical in proportion to Adamski’s scout- 
craft." 8 I am not hesitant to say that this photograph also is authentic. 
Darbishire insisted that the craft had what appeared to be a series of port¬ 
holes arranged in sets of four, whereas the published photos of Adamski 
showed what appeared to be a set of only three. Adamski’s slightly 
blurred fourth photo of the scoutcraft, unpublished in 1954, shows a 
fourth porthole. Darbishire was unaware of this until Desmond Leslie 
showed him the photo. Another photograph of an identical craft, taken in 
1973 in Peru, shows a fourth porthole (sec plates). 

INSIDE THE SPACE SHIPS 

Following the Desert Center encounter and the return of the scoutcraft 
at Palomar Gardens, Adamski’s experiences with the space people pro¬ 
liferated. It was then that some of his claims became increasingly absurd. 
In his second book, Inside the Space Ships, also long out of print, he begins 
by describing how, on 18 February 1953, two unknown men approached 
him at a hotel in Los Angeles. 

I noted that both men were well proportioned. One was slightly over six feet 
and looked to be in his early thirties. His complexion was ruddy, his eyes dark 
brown, with the kind of sparkle that suggests great enjoyment of life. His gaze 
was extraordinarily penetrating. His black hair waved and was cut according 
to our style. He wore a dark brown business suit... 

The shorter man looked younger and I judged his height to be about five 
feet nine inches. He had a round boyish face, a fair complexion and eyes of 
greyish blue. His hair, also wavy and worn in our style, was sandy in colour. 
He was dressed in a grey suit and was also hadess. He smiled as he addressed 
me by name. As I acknowledged the greeting, the speaker extended his hand 
and when it touched mine a great joy filled me. The signal was the same as 
had been given by the man I had met on the desert... Consequently, 1 knew 
that these men were not inhabitants of Earth. 

After Adamski had accepted an invitation to accompany them, he was 
taken in a black Pontiac sedan to a destination some way out of Los 
Angeles. During the journey, the strangers introduced themselves as 
coming from ‘Mars’ and ‘Saturn’. Adamski asked himself how they man¬ 
aged to speak English so well. To this unspoken thought, one of the men 
responded: 




The Space People 


117 


We are what you on Earth might call ‘contact men*. We live and work here 
• ■ ■ We have lived on your planet now for several years. At first we did have 
a slight accent. But that has been overcome and, as you can see, we are unrec¬ 
ognized as other than Earth men. 

Adamski began to wonder to himself why he had been singled out by 
the space people, to which unspoken thought came the reply: 

You are neither the first nor the only man on this world with whom we have 
talked. There are many others living in different parts of the Earth to whom 
we have come. Some who have dared to speak of their experiences have been 
persecuted . . . Consequently, many have kept silent. But when the book on 
which you are now working reaches the public, the story of your first contact 
out in the desert... will encourage others from many countries to write you 
of their experiences. 

The Pontiac turned off the highway and went along a rough track in 
the desert, at which point Adamski caught sight of a craft, similar but 
larger than the one three months earlier, glowing soft white in the dis¬ 
tance. ‘As we came to a stop, I noticed that a man was standing beside the 
glowing craft,’ he said, ‘[who] appeared to be working on something con¬ 
nected with it. The three of us walked towards him and, to my great joy, 

1 recognized my friend of the first contact... He was dressed in the same 
ski-type flying suit that he had worn on the first occasion, but this suit 
was light brown in colour with orange stripes at top and bottom of the 
waistband.’ His hair, on this occasion, was cut short. 

After greetings were exchanged, Orthon explained that he was repair¬ 
ing a small part of the scoutcraft. As he did so, he emptied the contents 
of a small ‘crucible’ on the sand. ‘I stooped and cautiously touched what 
appeared to be a very small amount of molten metal which he had thrown 
out,’ Adamski reported. ‘Although still quite warm, it was not too hot to 
be handled, and I carefully wrapped it in my handkerchief...’ 

Asked by an amused Orthon why he wanted the material, Adamski 
explained that it might furnish proof of the reality of their visit; that 
people usually demanded concrete evidence. *¥6$,’ replied Orthon, ‘and 
you are a race of souvenir hunters, aren’t you! However, you will find that 
this alloy contains the same metals found on your Earth, since they are 
much the same on all planets.’ 39 Desmond Leslie gave this piece of metal 
to George Ward, Britain’s Air Minister at the time, who arranged for an 
analysis. The sample proved to be composed predominantly of a very 
high-grade aluminium, combined with trace elements probably collected 
when in the molten state.' 10 

No names were given to Adamski for any of the space people he met, 
the reason being, he claimed, that they had ‘an entirely different concept 
of names as we use them’. In Inside the Space Ships , pseudonyms were 



118 


Alien Base 


used for identification purposes, and these were thought up by Adamski 
together with Charlotte Dlodget, who was the book’s ghost-writer. They 
included ‘Firkon’ for the ‘Martian’ and ‘Ramu’ for the supposed 
Saturnian (though Adamski implies that this was the latter’s real name). 

The repair completed, Adamski was invited to enter the craft with the 
others. He found himself in a one-room cabin. 

I was aware of a very slight hum that seemed to come equally from beneath 
the floor and from a heavy coil that appeared to be built into the top of the cir¬ 
cular wall. The moment the hum started, this coil began to glow bright red 
but emitted no heat... 

I marvelled anew at the unbelievable way in which they were able to fit 
parts together so that the joinings were imperceptible .. . there was no sign 
of the door that had closed behind us ... I estimated the inside diameter of 
the inside cabin to be approximately eighteen feet. A pillar about two feet 
thick extended downward from the very top of the dome to the centre of the 
floor. Later I was told this was the magnetic pole of the ship, by means of 
which they drew on Nature’s forces for propulsion purposes ... 

I noticed that a good six feet of the central floor was occupied by a clear, 
round lens through which the magnetic pole was centred. On opposite sides 
of this huge lens, close to the edge, were two small but comfortable benches 
curved to follow the circumference. I was invited to sit on one of these and 
Firkon sat beside me to explain what was going on ... while Orthon went to 
the control panels. These were located against the outer wall between the two 
benches... a small flexible bar fell into place across our middles... 

‘Sometimes,’ explained Firkon, ‘when a ship is thoroughly grounded, 
a sharp jerk is experienced when breaking contact with Ear ’though 
this does not happen very often, we are always prepared.’ 

Adamski turned his attention to what appeared to be graphs and charts 
that covered the walls for about three feet on cither side of the invisible 
door. ‘They were fascinating,’ he said, ‘entirely different from anything 
I had seen on Earth.’ 

There were no needles or dials, but flashes of changing colours and in¬ 
tensities. Some of these were like coloured lines moving across the face of a 
particular chart. .. others took the forms of different geometric figures . . . 
The wall for a distance of about ten feet direedy behind the benches on which 
we sat appeared to be solid and blank, while on those beyond . . . were other 
charts somewhat similar, yet differing in certain ways from those I have 
described. 

The pilot’s instrument board was unlike anything I could have imagined 
... it looked rather like an organ. But instead of keys and stops there were 
rows of buttons. Small lights shone directly on these, so placed that each 
illuminated five buttons at a time. As far as I can remember, there were six 
rows of these buttons, each row about six feet long. 



The Space People 


119 


In front of the board was a pilot’s seat, similar in shape to the other 
benches. Close beside it was a peculiar instrument connected to the 
central pole, which apparently functioned as a sort of periscope. 

Adamski found it impossible to discern where the light came from. ‘It 
seemed to permeate every cavity and corner with a soft pleasing glow,’ he 
said. ‘There is no way of describing that light exactly... it seemed to con¬ 
sist of a mellow blend of all colours, though at times I fancied one or 
another seemed to predominate.’ 

Only a very slight sensation was felt as the craft left the ground. 
Adamski’s attention was drawn to the large lens at his feet. ‘We appeared 
to be skimming over the rooftops of a small town; I could identify objects 
as though we were no more than a hundred feet above the ground. It was 
explained to me that actually we were a good two miles up and still rising, 
but this optical device had such magnifying power that single persons 
could be picked out and studied, if so desired ...’ It was further explained 
that the central pillar not only served as a powerful telescope, with one 
end pointing at the ground and the other - in the dome - pointing at the 
sky, but also provided most of the power for the craft. 

Propulsion 

Four cables appeared to run through, or immediately below, the floor 
lens, joining the central pole in the form of a cross. Firkon explained their 
purpose: 

Three of those cables carry power from the magnetic pole to the three balls 
under the ship which, as you have seen, are sometimes used as landing-gear. 
These balls are hollow and, although they can be lowered for emergency 
landing and retracted when in flight, their most important purpose is as con¬ 
densers for the static electricity sent to them from the magnetic pole. This 
power is present everywhere in the Universe. One of its natural but concen¬ 
trated manifestations is seen displayed as lightning. 

The fourth cable extends from the pole to the two periscope-like instru¬ 
ments, the one beside the pilot’s seat and the other directly behind his seat 
but close to the edge of the centre lens .. . They can be switched on and off, 
or adjusted at will, so that both members of the usual crew can have full use 
of the telescope without interfering with each other. 41 

In his last book. Flying Saucers Farewell , Adamski expounded on the 
principles of what he called the ‘three-point electrostatic propulsion 
control system’. ‘As we use retro-rockets to steer a rocket vehicle,’ 
he explained, ‘the saucers use their variable three-point system to 
manoeuver by regulating the charge. In horizontal flight within a planet’s 
ionosphere, saucers travel along the planet’s geo-magnetic lines of force. 
They turn abruptly by shifting the ball-charge.’ 42 
In conversation with Captain Edward Ruppelt, the scientific and 




120 


Alien Base 


technical intelligence officer who had headed the Air Force’s Project 
Blue Book investigation into UFOs, Adamski claimed that the saucers 
only use 10 per cent of the power they harness from nature, the excess 
being dissipated from the skin of the ship. ‘Particles that would hit the 
ship are repelled by the negative radiation from the skin of the ship,’ he 
explained, ‘so they never touch anything, not even a meteorite.’ 

'But why the saucer shape?’ asked Ruppelt. 

‘You see, they don’t have to make a turn as we do,’ Adamski replied. 
‘To us it looks like they make a right-angled turn, but they don’t. They 
can cut one [ball-gear] off or the other. Whichever one they cut off, that’s 
the way the ship is going to go.’ 43 

Ann Grevler, who claimed to have been taken aboard a scoutcraft by a 
similar group of extraterrestrials in the then Eastern Transvaal, South 
Africa, in 1957, provides further details of this particular type of propul¬ 
sion system: 

The general idea of their propulsion is that cosmic power (electricity?) is 
drawn out of the surrounding air, through the top of the central column .. . 
This power is then irradiated via a pump at the bottom of the central pillar, 
over powdered quartz of a kind, which is spread over the largest possible field 
within the ship. The result is ionized air [which] is pumped through the three 
hollow rings around the outside base of the cabin structure as well as circu¬ 
lating through the three balls underneath - these latter being used for motive 
power and direction and not used primarily as landing gear. 44 

The machinery for motive power, Adamski claimed, was housed 
mostly beneath the floor of the cabin and under the lower exterior of the 
craft (see Fig. 8). ‘I did not actually see any of it,’ he explained, ‘but I was 
shown into a very small room which served both as an entrance to the 
compartment which contained the machinery, and as a workshop for 
emergency repairs.’ 45 

Earlier, Adamski had found it almost impossible to believe that the 
visitors could have accidents, or needed to repair their craft from time to 
time. ‘I had to remind myself that, after all, they too were human beings ,’ 
he wrote, ‘and, no matter how far advanced beyond us, must still be sub¬ 
ject to error and vicissitude.’ 44 

The Mother Ship 

Alerted by Orthon that the scout was about to land on the mother ship, 
Adamski watched in astonishment as, in the solid wall behind the bench, 
a round hole began to open out, similar to the iris of a camera, until it was 
about 18 inches wide. This turned out to be one of the portholes, 
arranged in series around the cabin. Adamski reasoned there must be 
four on each side of the craft, making a total of eight (though a total of 16 



The Space People 


121 




is indicated in the photographs taken in December 1952). Through the 
portholes, Adamski could see the giant carrier craft, 40,000 feet above the 
Earth. 

As we came nearer, its huge bulk seemed to stretch away almost out of sight, 
and I could see its vast sides curving outward and downward. Slowly, very 
slowly, we drew nearer until we were almost on top of the great carrier. 1 was 
not astonished when my companion told me she was about one hundred and 
fifty feet in diameter and close to two thousand feet in length. The spectacle 
of that giant cigar-shaped carrier ship hanging there motionless in the strato¬ 
sphere will never dim in my memory. 





122 


Alien Base 


The scoutcraft descended then entered a hatch which had appeared on 
top of the carrier ship and glided down on two rails, the rate of descent 
apparently controlled by friction and the magnetism of the saucer’s 
flange. The craft no longer under its own power, Adamski found himself 
subjected to the normal forces of gravity, and once nearly lost his balance. 
Arriving on the platform of a ‘huge hangar or storage deck’ inside the 
bowels of the carrier ship, the craft was met by a crew member - of a dark 
complexion and wearing a beret-type cap - holding something that 
looked like a clamp attached to a cable. This was connected to the flange 
of the scoutcraft in order to ‘recharge’ it. ‘These smaller craft are in¬ 
capable of generating their own power to any great extent,’ explained 
Firkon, ‘and make only relatively short trips from their carriers before 
returning for recharge. They are used for a kind of shuttle service 
between the large ships and any point of contact or observation, and are 
always dependent on full recharging from the power plant of the mother 
ship.’ 

Adamski and his companions proceeded to a large control room, rec¬ 
tangular in shape but with rounded corners. With the exception of two 
door openings, the entire room - about 45 feet long - was covered with 
coloured graphs and charts. Among other instruments in the room was a 
robot-type device which Adamski was cautioned not to describe, a minia¬ 
ture version of which he had observed in the scoutcraft. After a brief look 
round, he was shown into a lounge, the splendour yet simplicity of which 
took his breath away. 

Not less than 40 feet square and about 15 feet high, the room was filled 
with a ‘soft, mysterious blue-white light’, with no trace of its source. As 
he stepped in, Adamski was greeted by two ‘incredibly lovely young 
women’, who offered him a glass of water, of a denser type than found on 
Earth. His description of these women reads like something out of a fairy 
tale: 

The one who had brought me the water was about five feet three inches in 
height. Her skin was very fair and her golden hair hung in waves to just below 
her shoulders in a beautiful symmetry. Her eyes, too, were more golden than 
any other colour... Her almost transparent skin was without blemish of any 
kind, exquisitely delicate, though firm and possessed of a warm radiance. Her 
features were finely chiselled, the ears small, the white teeth beautifully even. 
She looked very young . . . Her hands were slender, with long, tapering 
fingers. I noticed that neither she nor her companion wore make-up of any 
kind ... 

Adamski called this ‘Venusian’ woman ‘Kalna’ and the other - a 
‘Martian’ - ‘Ilmuth’. The latter, a brunette, was taller than Kalna, with 
large black ‘luminous’ eyes. Both women wore robes of a veil-like 



The Space People 


123 


material which fell to their ankles, bound to their waists by a girdle of a 
contrasting colour, and tiny sandals. 

The room was furnished with a long table surrounded with chairs, 
divans and settees of different designs and sizes, but lower and more 
comfortable than those on Earth. ‘They were covered in a material of a 
deep soft nap with a brocade effect,’ Adamski claimed. ‘The colours 
varied ... rich, warm and subdued.’ Beside the chairs were low glass- or 
crystal-topped tables with decorative centre-pieces. The entire floor was 
covered by a single luxurious rug which reached to the walls, of a plain 
medium-brown colour. 

Various pictures were placed around the walls, evidently depicting 
scenes from another planet, with completely different architecture. One 
picture showed a large mother ship. As the thought passed through 
Adamski’s mind that this was the craft they were on, Kalna corrected it 
‘No, our ship is really very small in comparison,’ she said. ‘That one is 
more like a travelling city than a ship, since its length is several miles, 
while ours is only two thousand feet.’ Adamski struggled to comprehend 
such a fantastic size. ‘Many such ships have been built,’ Kalna continued. 
‘However, they are not intended for the exclusive use of any particular 
planet, but for the purpose of contributing to the education and pleasure 
of all citizens in the whole brotherhood of the Universe.’ 

Adamski was taken up one level to the flight deck, where Firkoi 
explained that the mother ship carried many pilots, working in shifts d 
four - two men and two women — as well as twelve scoutcraft and many 
mechanical devices, including pressurizing equipment installed between 
the walls. This particular ship, said Ilmuth (who was on the point of tak¬ 
ing the controls), had four such walls or skins. 

Suddenly, openings like portholes appeared in the walls, and both 
pilots took their places in small seats on opposite sides of the flight deck. 
*1 felt a slight movement and the ship seemed to nose upward,’ reported 
Adamski. ‘We are now about 50,000 miles from your Earth,’ said 
Ilmuth. 47 

Firkon then invited Adamski to look out of one of the portholes. What 
he said he saw in 1953 is corroborated by views described by some astro¬ 
nauts years later. With other corroborations, it persuades me that not all 
of George Adamski’s encounters with the ‘space people’ were fantasies - 
nor were they all the product of deception. 



124 


Alien Base 


NOTES 

1 Petersen, Hans C., Report from Europe, Scandinavian UFO Information 
(SUFOI), Jylland, Denmark, 1964, p. 91. 

2 FBI Office Memorandum to the Director, FBI, from the Special Agent in 
Charge, San Diego (100-8382), 28 January 1953. 

3 Zinsstag, Lou, and Good, Timothy, George Adamski: The Untold Story, Ceti 
Publications, Beckenham, Kent, UK, 1983 (out of print). 

4 Lorenzen, Coral E., ‘Looking Back - at Adamski’, The APRO Bulletin, 
Aerial Phenomena Research Organization, Tucson, Arizona, vol. 31, no. 6, 
1984, pp. 1-3. 

5 FBI Office Memorandum, 28 January 1953. 

6 Leslie, Desmond, and Adamski, George, Flying Saucers Have Landed, 
Werner Laurie, London, 1953, p. 171. 

7 FBI Office Memorandum to the Director, FBI, from the Special Agent in 
Charge, San Diego (100-8325), 28 May 1952. 

8 Leslie and Adamski, op. cit., pp. 187-9. 

9 Interview with the author, Escondido, California, 20 November 1979. 

10 Leslie and Adamski, op. cit., pp. 192-3. 

11 Interview with the author, 20 November 1979. 

12 Leslie and Adamski, op. cit., pp. 193-7. 

13 Ibid., pp. 197-203. 

14 Zinsstag and Good, op. cit., pp. 6-7. 

15 Ribera, Antonio, ‘The Soria Abduction’, Parts I, II and III, Flying Saucer 
Review, vol. 30, nos. 3,4 and 5, 1985. 

16 Leslie and Adamski, op. cit., pp. 204-5. 

17 Ibid., pp. 205-10. 

18 Ibid., pp. 210-13. 

19 Ibid., opposite p. 192. 

20 Interview with the author, 20 November 1979. 

21 Letter from Jerrold Baker to Frank Scully, 31 January 1954, published in 
Nexus, edited by James Moseley, January 1955, pp. 15-16. 

22 Leslie and Adamski, op. cit., pp. 212-13. 

23 Hornet, Marcel F., Sons of the Sun, Neville Spearman, London, 1963, p. 185. 

24 Leslie and Adamski, op. cit., pp. 217-18. 

25 ‘Adamski’s Answer to Baker’, Mystic Magazine, June 1955, pp. 96-7. 

26 Affidavit from Jerrold Baker, 29 June 1954, published in Nexus, vol. 2, no. 
1, January 1955, p. 14. 

27 Letter from Jerrold Baker to James Moseley, 18 November 1954, published 
in Nexus, vol. 2, no. 1, January 1955, pp. 14-15. 

28 FBI Office Memorandum to the Director, FBI, from the Special Agent in 
Charge, San Diego (100-8382), 28 January 1953. 

29 Interview with the author, 20 November 1979. 

30 Leslie and Adamski, op. cit., pp. 219-20. 

31 FBI Office Memorandum, 28 January 1953. 

32 FBI Office Memorandum to the Director, FBI, from the Special Agent in 
Charge, San Diego (100-8382), 15 December 1953. 



The Space People 


125 


33 Letter to an enquirer (name deleted) from John Edgar Hoover, Director, 
FBI, 17 December 1953. 

34 'Desmond Leslie Answers David Wightman’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 6, 
no. 5, 1960, pp. 3-5. 

35 Meeting at Veterans’ Administration Building, Quonlset T-26 (city not 
named), 1 June 1953, as published in Leslie and Adamski, op. cit., p. 229. 

36 Nexus, vol. 2, no. 1, January 1955, p.13. 

37 Good, Timothy, Beyond Top Secret: The Worldwide UFO Security Threat, 
Sidgwick Si Jackson, London, 1996, pp. 441^4. 

38 Ibid., pp. 444-5. 

39 Adamski, George, Inside the Space Ships, Arco Spearman, London, 1956, 
pp. 33-40. 

40 Leslie, Desmond, ‘Commentary on George Adamski’, in Flying Saucers 
Have Landed by Desmond Leslie and George Adamski, revised edition, 
Neville Spearman, London, 1970, p. 245. 

41 Adamski, op. cit., pp. 41-8. 

42 Adamski, George, Flying Saucers Farewell, Abelard-Schuman, London, p. 
39. 

43 Recorded discussion between George Adamski and Captain Edward 
Ruppelt, Palomar Terraces, 9 April 1955. 

44 ‘Anchor’, Transvaal Episode, The Esscnc Press, Corpus Christi, Texas, 
1958, p. 37. 

45 Adamski, Inside the Space Ships, p. 48. 

46 Ibid., p. 44. 

47 Ibid., pp. 48-67. 



Chapter 7 


Claims, Contradictions and 
Corroborations 


‘I was amazed to see that the background of space is totally dark,’ 
reported George Adamski, as he gazed in wonderment through one of the 
giant space carrier’s portholes. ‘Yet there were manifestations taking 
place all around us, as though billions upon billions of fireflies were 
flickering everywhere, moving in all directions, as fireflies do. However, 
these were of many colours, a gigantic celestial fireworks display that was 
beautiful to the point of being awesome.’ 1 

On 20 February 1962, nine years after Adamski’s first alleged flight in 
space, astronaut John Glenn, orbiting the Earth in the Mercury VI space 
capsule, described a similar scene: 

At the first light of sunrise - the first sunrise I came to -1 was still faced back 
towards the direction in which I had come from with normal orbit attitude 
and just as the first rays of sun came up on to the capsule 1 had glanced back 
down inside to check some instruments and do something and when 1 glanced 
back my reaction was that I was looking out into a complete star field - that 
the capsule had probably gone up while I wasn’t looking out the window and 
that I was looking into nothing but a new star field. But this wasn’t the case, 
because a lot of the little things that I thought were stars were actually a bright 
yellowish green about the size and intensity as looking at a firefly on a real 
dark night... there were literally thousands of them. 2 

Corroboration was provided by Soviet cosmonauts Vladimir 
Komarov, Konstantin Feoktistov and Boris Yegorov in Voskhod 1 on 12 
October 1964: 

The luminous particles were visible only against a black sky with the sun 
shining from the side... Their movement is strange. Sometimes we saw two 
particles moving towards each other. The general feeling was that these tiny 
particles came from our ship; apparently, these are simply dust particles that 
are found everywhere, even in the cosmos. 3 

There remain dissenting opinions regarding the nature of the ‘firefly 
effect’. Lieutenant General Thomas Stafford, US Air Force (Retired), 



Claims, Contradictions and Corroborations 


127 


who flew two Gemini missions in 196S/6 and was Commander of Apollo 
X, which orbited the Moon in May 1969, told me in 1996 that he believes 
the effect is caused by sunlight shining on sublimated particles ejected 
from the thrusters used for positioning the spacecraft, which (on 
Gemini) were fuelled by hydrogen-peroxide gas. He also pointed out that 
water and urine dumped from our manned spacecraft can give rise to 
similar effects. 4 This is true, though micrometeoroids (‘space dust’) 
remains the better explanation in other cases. 

A REMARKABLE DEVICE 

During this first flight on board one of the giant carrier craft, Adamski 
claimed he was shown an instrument, no larger than an ordinary (fifties) 
cabinet radio and with a screen similar to that of a television. ‘With this,’ 
explained Firkon, ‘we can picture and register anything taking place on 
the Earth, or on any planet over which we either pass or hover. Not only 
do we hear the spoken words, but pictures are picked up and shown on 
the screen. An internal mechanism breaks these down into sound vibra¬ 
tions, which are simultaneously translated into words of our own lan¬ 
guage, all of which arc recorded in a manner similar to your own 
tape-recordings.’ 

Firkon went on to explain that all words are made up of vibrations or 
scales similar to a musical octave, just as all melodies are composed of cer¬ 
tain notes, thus unknown languages can be learned in a relatively short 
time. When strange vibrations become apparent, these are transposed 
into picture form, showing exactly what the strange words or their vibra¬ 
tions mean. 5 

HARMFUL RADIATION BELTS 

Adamski was introduced by his hosts to an older man, described as ‘a 
greatly evolved being', unbelievably aged 'close to one thousand years’, 
who warned of the harmful effects of Earth’s nuclear detonations: 

Even though the power and radiation from the test explosions have not yet 
gone out beyond your Earth’s sphere of influence, these radiations are endan¬ 
gering the life of men on Earth. A decomposition will set in that, in time, will 
fill your atmosphere with the deadly elements which your scientists and your 
military men have confined into what you term ‘bombs’. 

The radiations released from those bombs are now only going out so far, 
since they are lighter than your own atmosphere and heavier than space itself. 
If, however, mankind on Earth should release such power against one another 
in full warfare, a large part of Earth’s population could be annihilated, your 
soil rendered sterile, your waters poisoned and barren to life for many years 
to come. It is possible that the body of your planet itself could be mutilated 
to an extent that would destroy her balance in our galaxy... For us, travelling 




128 


Alien Base 


through space could be made difficult and dangerous for a long time to come, 
since the energies released in such multiple explosions would then penetrate 
through your atmosphere into outer space. 6 

SECOND FLIGHT INTO SPACE 

During his second alleged flight into outer space, on 21 April 1953, 
Adamski was taken on board a different (‘Saturnian’!) scoutcraft, four 
times the diameter of the ‘Venusian’ one, prior to a flight in a larger car¬ 
rier ship. Shown into what he was told was a kitchen, Adamski could see 
no fittings or cupboards of any type. The appearance proved deceptive. 
‘Zuhl’, the host, explained that the walls were lined from top to bottom 
with cupboards and compartments which, like all doors on the craft, were 
invisible until opened. In these cupboards, food and everything necessary 
for its preparation was stored. A small glass-like door set into one of the 
walls proved to be an oven. No burners of any description could be dis¬ 
cerned. Zuhl explained: 

We do not cook our food in the same way as you. Ours is done quickly by 
means of rays or high frequencies, a method with which you are now experi¬ 
menting on Earth. However, we prefer most of our food in the state in which 
it is grown, and live chiefly on the delicious fruits and vegetables which 
abound on our planets. To all intents and purposes we are what you call ‘veg¬ 
etarians’, but in emergencies, if no other food is available, we do eat meat. 

Ushered into a nearby lounge, Adamski noted that the floor-covering 
was yellow-grey in colour, with a texture similar to thick sponge rubber. 
As before, couches and individual seats were scattered about. ‘I saw no 
books, papers or reading matter of any kind,’ he said, ‘nor did I see any 
shelves or cases in which something of this kind might be kept.’ 7 

On board the carrier ship were people similar to those he had en¬ 
countered on the previous trip. Although none of the women looked to 
be older than their early twenties, Adamski learnt later that their ages 
varied from thirty to two hundred years. On this occasion they were 
wearing ‘beautiful, sheer gowns’ with wide belts decorated with gems 
that ‘sparkled with a softness and vitality such as I had never seen on 
Earth’. The men wore ‘gleaming white blouses’ with long full sleeves 
drawn in tight at the wrists. The trousers were also loose, ‘very similar to 
our own styles', but made of an unknown material. 

The men’s height varied from about five to six feet, and all were splendidly 
formed, with weight in proportion. Like the women, they varied in colour¬ 
ing, but I noticed that the skin of one was definitely what we would call cop¬ 
per-coloured. All had neatly trimmed hair, although it differed in length and 
cut to some degree, as here on Earth. None wore long hair . . . The men’s 
features, though uniformly handsome, were not greatly different from those 



Claims , Contradictions and Corroborations 


129 


of Earth men, and I am positive that any of them could come amongst us and 
never be recognized as not belonging here. 8 

REMOTELY CONTROLLED DISCS 

On this carrier ship, one ‘laboratory room’ housed twelve small, un¬ 
manned discs (similar to the ‘foo-fighters’ discussed in Chapter 1). ‘I 
guessed immediately that these were the registering discs or small, 
remotely controlled devices sent out by the mother ships for close obser¬ 
vation,’ said Adamski. 

They were about three feet in diameter, of shiny, smooth material, and 
shaped rather like two shallow plates, or hub-caps, turned upside down and 
joined at the rims so that the central part was a few inches thick. I learned, 
however, that such discs varied in size from about ten inches to twelve feet in 
diameter, depending on the amount of equipment carried .. . they contained 
highly sensitive apparatus which not only guided each little saucer perfectly 
in its desired path of flight, but also transmitted back to the mother ship full 
information on every kind of vibration taking place in the area under obser¬ 
vation . . . sound, radio, light-and even thought waves .. . 

At a flight deck, six women worked quickly and nimbly as they fed 
instructions and flight data to the waiting discs. ‘I remember noting the 
resemblance to six women playing in a pantomime, a silent concerto,’ 
commented Adamski. ‘It was fascinating to see how, when a disc had 
received full “instructions”, one of the trap doors would open and the 
disc would slide smoothly into the orifice, passing through air-locks 
before hurtling away into outer space on its mission.’ 

Meanwhile, back at the laboratory, screens registered what the small 
discs were recording. ‘I noticed on one of the screens varying lines shap¬ 
ing, disappearing and reappearing in new formations,’ said Adamski. 
‘The lines would then be replaced by round dots and long dashes, which 
would quickly form into various geometrical figures.’ The purpose of 
these was explained by Adamski’s extraterrestrial companions: 

The discs are now hovering above a certain spot on Earth and registering the 
sounds emanating from that spot. This is what you are seeing on the screen 
as shown by the lines, dots and dashes. The other machines are assembling 
this information and interpreting it by producing pictures of the meanings of 
the signals, together with the original sounds . .. 

Everything in the Universe has its own particular pattern. For example, if 
someone speaks the word ‘house’, the mental image of a dwelling of one kind 
or another is in his mind. Many things, including human emotions, are 
registered in the same way. By the use of these machines, we know even what 
your people are thinking, and whether or not they are hostile toward us .. . 

On each side of the mother ship, just below the disc-launching ports, is a 
magnetic ray projector. When a disc goes out of control, a ray is projected to 




130 


Alien Base 


disintegrate it. This accounts for some of the mysterious explosions that take 
place in your skies... On the other hand, if a disc goes out of control near the 
surface of a planet where an explosion might cause damage, it is allowed to 
descend to the ground where a milder charge is sent into it [which] causes the 
metal to disintegrate in slow stages. First it softens, then turns into a kind of 
jelly, then a liquid, and finally it enters a free state as gases, leaving not a 
wrack behind. 9 

It was alleged that, by means of these discs, the space people were 
alerted to an abnormal condition building up on the fringe of our atmo¬ 
sphere— ‘a condition constantly increasing with every atomic or hydro¬ 
gen bomb that is exploded on Earth’. 10 

THE MOON 

It was on this second purported trip into space that Adamski was shown 
- on a viewing screen - the surface of our Moon. His descriptions have 
given rise to ridicule, yet some are intriguing: 

I was amazed to see how completely wrong we are in our ideas about this, our 
nearest neighbour. Many of the craters are actually large valleys surrounded 
with rugged mountains, created by some past terrific upheaval within the 
body of the Moon . . . True, some of the craters had been formed by 
meteorites hitting the Moon’s surface, but in every such case, these craters 
showed definite funnel bottoms. And as I studied the magnified surface of the 
Moon upon the screen before us, I noticed deep ruts through the ground and 
in some of the imbedded rock, which could have been made in no other way 
than by a heavy run-off of water in times past. In some of these places there 
was still a very small growth of vegetation perceptible. Part of the surface 
looked fine and powdery, while other portions appeared to consist of larger 
particles similar to coarse sand or fine gravel... 11 

With the obvious exception of the ‘very small growth of vegetation’, all 
these descriptions were confirmed years later. Prior to unmanned land¬ 
ings on the Moon, astronomers argued about its surface structure. Dr 
Thomas Gold of the Greenwich Royal Observatory, for example, stated 
in 1955 that the lunar maria (‘seas’) were covered with a layer of dust so 
thick that anyone attempting to land in one might be swallowed up. 12 
Neil Armstrong, speaking from first-hand (or first-foot) experience, dis¬ 
pelled those speculations as he stepped down from Apollo Xl’s lunar 
excursion module on that memorable 20 July 1969. ‘The surface is fine 
and powdery,’ he reported. 

Adamski’s most ardent detractors have to be impressed by the identi¬ 
cal descriptions in each case; however, his description of ‘a small animal 
... four-legged and furry’ 13 that he saw on the lunar surface through the 
viewing screen has not been confirmed! 




Claims, Contradictions and Corroborations 


131 


Adamski’s perhaps most outlandish claim was made relative to his 
third claimed flight into space, on 23 August 1954, when he was again 
shown the Moon on a viewing screen. On this occasion he was shown 
views of the other side, supposedly depicting a temperate section around 
the equator, with snow-capped mountains, forests, lakes, rivers and even 
a ‘fair-sized city’ where, he was informed, human beings could live com¬ 
fortably, given sufficient depressurization. M 

In defence of this claim, Desmond Leslie pointed out that several 
photographs taken by the Apollo VIII crew show pronounced greenish 
hues on the lunar surface, giving the impression that one is looking at 
high-altitude forests. One picture shows what looks like a beautiful blue 
lake. If the best cameras on Earth recorded the Moon in this way, Leslie 
argued, then Adamski can be forgiven for falling victim to an ‘optical illu¬ 
sion’. He also points out that Adamski had poor sight (he suffered from 
a cataract), but hated to admit it and never carried his glasses around with 
him. 15 The poor eyesight may explain some inconsistencies in his 
descriptions, but it hardly explains the fact that he claimed to have been 
told by his hosts about the forests, lakes and rivers, and so on. 

Adamski reported that during a trip to Holland in May 1959, he was 
listening in his hotel room to a BBC Radio programme - The News of 
Europe - when he was surprised to hear a report by a Russian scientist 
stating that the Moon was not composed of volcanic dust, but rather of 
granite formations similar to Earth. Furthermore, many green spots that 
looked like vegetation had been observed on the other side of the Moon. 16 

The greenish hues in some of the Apollo VIII photographs are remark¬ 
able. I have a superb exhibition print of the Schmidt crater. There is no 
denying the impression of possible ‘moss-type’ vegetation conveyed by 
the dark-green colour surrounding the crater, while the crater itself is a 
mixture of white, fawn and pinkish-coloured areas (see colour plates). 
Even astronomer Patrick Moore credited the possibility of vegetation on 
the lunar surface. ‘On the whole moon there is no living thing,’ he stated, 
‘apart perhaps from a few scattered patches of lichens or moss-type vege¬ 
tation on the floors of some of the craters.’ 17 

John McLeaish of NASA informed me that the greenish tint is due to 
a slight underexposure of the Ektachrome (SO-368) film: 

Color films tend to produce a color when viewing a slightly underexposed 
neutral subject ... In general the far side of the moon is topographically 
higher than the side we view from earth. A major exception is the crater 
Tsiolkovsky and its mare. It is the darkest location, densitometrically on the 
moon (greenish in some photos) and it is believed to be the lowest topo¬ 
graphic point on the moon by many scientists. 18 

While it is correct that improperly exposed film can produce false 



132 


Alien Base 


colour, the extent depicted in some Apollo VIII photos seems extreme, 
and my photograph of the Schmidt crater, for example, has been per¬ 
fectly exposed. 

A few weeks after hearing from McLeaish, I received an unsolicited 
letter from Paul D. Lowman Jr. of NASA’s Planetology Branch: 

Your interesting letter on the apparent green color of the lunar surface has 
been supplied to me ... I doubt if the green color is authentic. 1 base this 
opinion primarily on the eye-witness accounts given by the flight crews. For 
example, Bill Anders (Apollo 8) was emphatic that there was essentially no 
color on the lunar surface. Other crews have modified this, saying that it 
appears a brownish color. However, none have reported any green . . 

I asked General Thomas Stafford what colours, if any, he had seen 
while orbiting the Moon, He replied that in the early morning the moun¬ 
tain peaks showed a reddish glow as the sun came up; later, the surface 
assumed a light tan colour, changing to a dazzling white at noon. He 
reports never seeing green colours, and believes the Apollo photos show¬ 
ing such colours are caused by photographic processing effects. '* 

Fred Steckling, a staunch supporter of Adamski who claimed to have 
had several meetings with the ‘space people', 20 argued that the areas on 
the Moon which Adamski described as being inhabited were in fact pro¬ 
tected by giant invisible domes created by ‘magnetic rays’ which effect¬ 
ively maintained the air pressure at 7.5 pounds per square inch, thus 
shielding the occupants from the vicissitudes of the lunar environment 
(temperatures range from 230 degrees Fahrenheit at noon on the equator 
to -290 degrees Fahrenheit at night; the atmosphere is practically non¬ 
existent, and the gravity is one-sixth that of Earth’s). 

The French researcher Rene Fouere earlier proposed a similar 
hypothesis to account for Adamski’s description of rivers, lakes and 
forests. If the extraterrestrial colonists on the Moon were technologically 
superior to us, he argued, might they have been able to produce and con¬ 
tain an artificial atmosphere - ‘a giant atmospheric bubble, within which 
lakes could be created, rivers made to flow, and snow made to fall.. .’? 21 
Fouere proposes another interesting hypothesis to account for Adamski’s 
description; a hypothesis to which I shall return later in this chapter. 
Pointing out that the images of the Moon were projected on to a screen, 
Fouere goes on to speculate that these might have been faked. 

If Adamski really did meet extraterrestrials, one might have thought the lat¬ 
ter had deliberately shown him a false picture so that our men of science, 
reading Adamski’s books later, might be convinced of the author's intellec¬ 
tual folly and dishonesty and, at the same time, of the non-existence of 
extraterrestrial craft. After all, the extraterrestrials, if they exist, may perhaps 
not be so keen that we should believe in their existence... It is possible that 



Claims, Contradic 


and Corroborations 


133 


they are out not to draw attention to themselves and that, if they had indeed 
had dealings with Adamski, they might have been able to condition him psy¬ 
chically in such a manner that, once out of their hands, he would go off and 
spread incredible fables around the world . 22 

Lunar Anomalies 

Despite absurdities and contradictions in Adamski’s claims about the 
Moon, some mysteries remain. There are, for example, areas which 
suggest artificially constructed grooves or ‘rilles’. These are usually 
explained geologically in terms of ancient river beds, bygone seismic 
activity, or collapsed ‘lava tubes’; nonetheless, the rilles on the Gassendi 
crater (see plates) look artificial. 

Also of interest are so-called ‘Transient Lunar Phenomena’ (TLP). 
Astronomer Patrick Moore, who coined the term, speculatively attrib¬ 
uted the TLPs to ‘gaseous emissions caused by moonquakes’. Even more 
interesting is the fact that water vapour has been detected, ‘erupting like 
geysers through cracks on the lunar surface’, according to instruments 
put there by Apollo XI and XU. 23 A water vapour cloud of more than 10 
square miles was apparently discovered, and while Apollo VIII was in 
lunar orbit, astronaut Frank Borman was reported as having said: ‘It 
looks like clouds down there.’ 24 This bolsters Adamski’s assertion that 
tenuous clouds occasionally form. 

In late 1996 the Pentagon announced that radar soundings taken in 
mid-1995 by Clementine, an unmanned spacecraft, detected what 
seemed to be an enormous lake of frozen water at the bottom of the solar 
system’s largest crater, known as the Aitkin basin, on the Moon’s south 
pole. The crater itself is more than seven miles deep and the apparent ice 
lake is estimated to be tens of feet deep, covering an area of 30 to 50 
square miles. Scientists at the Pentagon’s Ballistic Missile Defense 
Organization, which sponsored Clementine, stated that the radar sound¬ 
ings of the Moon’s polar areas had convinced them that the substance in 
the crater is indeed water ice, though further data were needed before 
this can be confirmed. An immense and permanent shadow in the crater 
prevents the ice from evaporating. Nothing like it was found in the 
Moon’s north pole nor in another southern area exposed directly to the 
Sun. The presence of water on the otherwise apparently dry Moon is 
probably due to a collision with a comet (composed largely of ice) perhaps 
3.6 billion years ago, the scientists speculated. This important discovery 
will facilitate living on the Moon, when eventually we establish colonies 
there. 25 

Stranger still are what appear to be artificial constructions occasionally 
observed on the Moon. Frank Halstead, Curator of the Darling 
Observatory in Duluth, Minnesota, described an object he and his 




134 


Alien Base 


assistant observed through a telescope on 6 July 1954. It looked like a 
‘straight black line’ on the floor of the crater Piccolomini, where no such 
line had been noted before. It has not been seen since. The object was also 
confirmed by the Tulane Observatory. 26 Halstead also reported seeing a 
cigar-shaped craft about 800 feet long, later joined by a disc estimated to 
be 100 feet in diameter, while crossing the Mojave Desert in California 
by train with his wife, on 1 November 1955. 27 

Further evidence for constructions on the Moon came from the British 
astronomer Dr H. P. Wilkins (whose UFO sighting is described in 
Chapter 8), when he reported what looked like a curved ‘arch or bridge’, 
two miles long, on the Mare Crisium, following its discovery by the 
American science writer John O’Neill, in 1953. Using a less powerful 
telescope than Wilkins’s, O’Neill mistakenly assumed it had a span of 12 
miles. ‘It looks artificial,’ stated Wilkins on BBC Radio in December 
1953. ‘It’s almost incredible that such a thing could have been formed in 
the first instance (by nature), or if it was formed, could have lasted during 
the ages in which the moon has been in existence.’ 

The lunar ‘bridge’ was explained as an illusion caused by the Sun’s 
rays shining obliquely through a gap between two rocky promontories. 
Adamski had another, equally unlikely explanation: the bridge, he 
claimed, was a mile-long mother ship undergoing maintenance. When 
something goes wrong with one of these gigantic craft, he explained, it is 
brought down between two mountain tops. If some of the larger machin¬ 
ery needs to be moved, another mother ship straddles the two mountains 
and is used as a crane to lift the heavy machinery. ‘This will give the 
appearance of a bridge,’ he said, ‘but as soon as they have repaired the 
other ship, they both leave, so your so-called bridge has gone.’ 28 

On balance, some evidence supports Adamski’s claim that alien bases 
- if not rivers, lakes, forests and so on - exist on the Moon. Like others, 
it is a claim that we would be unwise to dismiss out of hand, ridiculous 
though it seems. Lieutenant Colonel Philip Corso, US Army (Retired), 
who served in the Army staff’s Research and Development directorate 
at the Pentagon in the early 1960s, claims that, in 1961, NASA ‘agreed 
to co-operate with military planners to work a “second-tier” space pro¬ 
gram within and covered up by the civilian scientific missions [and] to 
open up a confidential “back-channel” communications link to military 
intelligence regarding any hostile activities conducted by the EBEs 
[extraterrestrial biological entities] against our spacecraft even if those 
included only shadowing or surveillance’. Corso claims that the US 
Army and Air Force possessed at least 122 photos taken by astronauts 
on the Moon ‘that showed some evidence of an alien presence’. 29 He 
adds: 



Claims, Contradictions and Corroborations 135 

An extraterrestrial presence on the moon, whether it was true or not in the 
1950s, was an issue of such military importance that it was about to become a 
subject for National Security Council debate before Admiral Hillenkoetter 
and Generals Twining and Vandenberg pulled it back under their [UFO] 
working group's security classification. The issue never formally reached the 
National Security Council, although Army R&D [Research and Develop¬ 
ment] under the new command of General Trudeau in 1958 quickly devel¬ 
oped preliminary plans for Horizon, a moon base construction project 
designed to provide the United States with a military observation presence 
on the lunar surface ... Horizon was supposed to establish defensive fortifi¬ 
cations on the moon against a Soviet attempt to use it as a military base, an 
early-warning surveillance system against a Soviet missile attack, and, most 
importantly, a surveillance and defense against UFOs. 

‘Years later,’ continues Corso, ‘there was even some speculation 
among Army Intelligence analysts who had been out of the NASA 
strategy loop that the Apollo moon-landing program was ultimately 
abandoned because there was no way to protect the astronauts from 
possible alien threats.’ 30 

MEETINGS WITH VIPs 

Following the success of his books, Adamski became a celebrity. He was 
invited all over the world to lecture as well as to meet many prominent 
people. In 1959, he was invited by Queen Juliana of the Netherlands to 
Soestdijk Palace at The Hague. The meeting, which took place on 18 
May, was attended by dignitaries and experts, including Prince 
Bernhard; Lieutenant-General H. Schapcr, Chief of the Royal 
Netherlands Air Staff; and Professor Jongbloed, an expert in aviation 
medicine. 

After a question from the Queen about one of his trips around the 
Moon, Adamski was asked some facetious questions by General Schaper 
and by an astronomer. ‘I have known of no major officials of our Air 
Force, and few astronomers, who have told what they actually know 
about the visitors from space,’ he responded. ‘It is a known fact that the 
secret files and confidential reports of the Air Force have never been 
released to the public, or even to high officers in the government. 1 am 
inclined to believe this applies to all governments.’ 

Although many questions were asked about the space people, most 
questions dealt with mankind’s future in space. Going well over its 45- 
minute allotted time, the meeting lasted two hours. Later, on arrival at 
the hall where he was to give a lecture, Adamski was besieged by the press 
and members of the public determined to know what had been discussed 
at the meeting. ‘This I could not do,’ he said, ‘for the meeting had been 
on a level of dignity that denied me the privilege of speaking until the 





136 


Alien 


Queen spoke first.’ 31 The press was furious, and most of the newspapers 
heaped ridicule on the meeting - without knowing what had been dis¬ 
cussed. ’New Scandal in the Court of Holland’ was the banner headline 
in France, Belgium and Switzerland. 

Carol Honey, an aerospace engineer who was Adamski’s right-hand 
man for seven years, told me that although he did not accept all of the 
contacree’s claims, he was present on several occasions at Palomar 
Terraces (Palomar Gardens having been sold in the mid-1950s) when 
Adamski was visited by various government and military officials. 32 
Adamski also claimed that he was consulted by the Air Force regarding 
an incident in which one of their jets was three hours overdue. Eventually 
it came in for an unannounced landing, minus pilot and co-pilot! 
According to Adamski, the incident took place in Washington on 6 July 
1956, and the information came to him in the form of a letter from a base 
in the Panama Canal Zone. The Air Force wanted to know what had hap¬ 
pened. Adamski replied that he would check with ‘the boys’ (as he later 
called his space contacts), and two weeks later informed the Air Force 
that the pilots had been ‘picked up’ by a spacecraft and given the choice 
of returning to Earth or going with its crew. Apparently, they chose the 
latter option, because a number of pilots who had been similarly 
‘abducted’ in the past and then returned to tell their stories had been mis¬ 
treated and ridiculed. To show good faith, the ‘boys’ returned the aircraft 
back to its base under remote control. The Air Force purportedly con¬ 
firmed it had arrived at a similar conclusion. 33 

In March 1960, Adamski claimed to have received a telegram sum¬ 
moning him to official meetings in New York and Washington. One of 
these meetings, he related to his co-workers, was with an aide to Dag 
Hammarskjold, then Secretary-General of the United Nations, as well as 
others. ‘In New York,’ he wrote, ‘I had the great honor of dining and vis¬ 
iting for one and a half hours with Dag Hammarskjold’s right-hand man 
in the UN. Original arrangements had been made for me to meet Mr H. 
but the African conflict took him away at just that time. But I learned a 
great deal of interest to us all. . .’ 

During the same period, Adamski had a 15-minute meeting with 
Senator Margaret Chase-Smith (Maine), Chairman of the Senate 
Finance Committee for Space Research at the time. ‘I gave her as much 
information as possible,’ he reported, ‘for which she thanked me. This 
was an accomplishment that I little expected .. ,’ 34 

Pope John XXIII 

On 31 May 1963, Adamski claimed to have had a private meeting at the 
Vatican with the ill Pope John XXIII, to deliver an important package 
which he said had been given to him by one of the space people in 



Claims, Contradictions and Corroborations 


137 


Copenhagen. The claim has been roundly denounced, of course, yet cir¬ 
cumstantial evidence suggests that such a meeting did take place. 

Expected to be at a certain entrance at 11.00, Adamski was accom¬ 
panied as far as the steps of St Peter’s by his co-workers May Morlet from 
Belgium and Louise (Lou) Zinsstag from Switzerland. Lou, whom I 
knew as a close and trusted friend for nearly 20 years, described the occa¬ 
sion as follows: 

May and I got him there in good time. We walked slowly up the broad central 
stairway, looking around us. Within a few minutes, George cried out: ‘There 
he is -1 can see the man! Please wait for me here in about an hour’s time.' He 
descended the steps swiftly, turning to the left. I had looked to the right 
because I expected him to be admitted through the well-known gate where 
the Swiss Guards were posted. Yet, without any hesitation, he walked to the 
left of the Dome where I now noticed a high wooden entrance-gate behind 
the open doorway, with a small built-in door. This door was partly opened 
and a man was standing inside it, gesturing discreetly to George. He wore a 
black suit but not a priest’s robe. On his chest I noticed some kind of coloured 
material in white, green and red ... 1 made a mental note that Adamski’s 
being received at a gate other than the usual one where the Swiss Guards 
checked on every visitor meant that he would not be registered on the daily 
visitors’ list, and that his visit would probably not be recorded officially by the 
Vatican. This, I realized, was very interesting in itself but would not be help¬ 
ful if we had to look for proof. 

May and I returned an hour later. There was George already, grinning like 
a monkey. 1 never saw his face as happy as that; his eyes shining like beauti¬ 
ful topazes, something 1 shall never forget. ‘We have done it,’ he said. ‘I was 
received by the Pope. He gave me his blessing and I gave him the message.' 

When later in the day we lunched with George he told us that the Pope was 
not lying in the room above St Peter’s Square, as the people had been told, 
but that his bedroom faced the most beautiful part of the Vatican garden. And 
he added confidentially: ’If you ask me, the Pope is hardly a dying man. I have 
seen several people dying of cancer but the Pope’s skin has still got a fine tex¬ 
ture like a child’s. They haven’t yet tried to operate on him but I’m sure that’s 
what they will do soon. He is not too old for that.’ George added that the Pope 
even had rosy cheeks, and had said that he did not feel so bad. 

George had been helped on with a kind of cassock over his suit before he 
entered the bedroom. The Pope gave him a nice smile and said: ‘1 have been 
expecting you.’ When George handed him the sealed message from Copen¬ 
hagen, he said - also in English: ‘That is what I have been waiting for.’ He 
then spoke to his visitor in a very low and soft voice for a few minutes. 
Adamski had to bend his head down close to the Pope’s, whose last words 
were: ‘My son, don’t worry, we will make it.’ After receiving the papal bless¬ 
ing, Adamski was ushered out. 

During lunch, Adamski took out of his breast pocket a small plastic 
wallet, lilac in colour. ‘It bore the most singular inscription I have ever 



138 


Alien Base 


seen, protected by a transparent cover,’ said Lou. ‘The written characters 
were of a very unusual kind; certainly neither Roman nor Gothic, nor 
were they Russian, Chinese, Japanese, Arabic or Hebrew. But beneath 
the text was the date of the interview — 31 May 1963 - written in Roman 
letters. We sat spellbound when George opened the little wallet.’ 

Embedded in white cotton was a most beautiful golden coin with the Pope’s 
head in profile on it. As I discovered later, it was a new ecumenical coin, ready 
for sale but not yet on the market, the impending Ecumenical Council having 
been postponed due to the Pope’s illness. Weighing the coin in my hand I felt 
sure it was of at least 18- if not 22-carat gold (my father was a goldsmith). 
Two weeks later the coin was on sale in European banks and I went to have a 
look at it. Its price was between 300 and 400 Swiss francs. At the time of our 
visit to Rome, Adamski could not have bought it even if he had had the 
money, which he certainly did not, and, as in Basle, he had never left our 
hotel without us and he had never entered a shop. 33 

Two days later the Pope died. Not surprisingly, there has been no 
official confirmation of Adamski’s meeting. Following an ambiguous 
response from the Vatican to Ronald Caswell, one of Adamski’s British 
co-workers, stating that they were unable to provide the required infor¬ 
mation (see Fig. 9), I followed up with another request. ‘With regard to 
the alleged private audience granted by Pope John XXIII on 31 May 
1963,’ I was informed by an officer of the papal court, ‘I would assure you 
that no such private audience ever took place.’ 36 1 received no response to 
my enquiry as to how Adamski managed to obtain the coin, 

Despite Lou Zinsstag’s misgivings about a number of Adamski’s later 
claims, leading to her resignation as one of his co-workers, she remained 
convinced for the rest of her life that Adamski had been granted a papal 
audience. ‘I knew for certain that he was expected and received by Pope 
John XXIII,’ she wrote, ‘which also made me inclined to believe him 
when he told us of other secret meetings in other important buildings, 
such as the White House.’ 37 

President John F. Kennedy 

According to Madeleine Rodeffer, with whom he stayed for the last few 
months of his life in 1965, Adamski had at least one clandestine meeting 
with President John Kennedy. She related to me how in May 1963 
Kennedy allegedly visited Adamski late one night at the Willard Hotel, 
close to the White House. There is no substantiation for this claim, 
though Madeleine told me that she saw Adamski’s US Government 
ordnance card which gave him access to certain restricted areas, and this 
might conceivably lend support to his claim of having once visited there 
via a side door. Lou Zinsstag was also given the story: 



Claims , Contradictions and Corroborations 


139 



details of George Adamski’s private audience with Pope John XXVII in May 1963. 
(Ronald Caswell) 

He told me that he had been entrusted with a written invitation for President 
Kennedy to visit one of the space people’s huge motherships at a secret air¬ 
base in Desert Hot Springs, California, for a few days. In order to keep this 
visit absolutely secret, Adamski was to take the invitation direct to the White 
House through a side door... where a man he knew was ready to let him in. 
Adamski later learned that Kennedy had spent several hours at the airbase 
after having cancelled an important trip to New York, and that he had had a 
long talk with the ship’s crew, but that he had not been invited for a flight. 38 

A Well-Connected Gentleman 

That Adamski was well connected is supported by others. Dr Jacques 








140 


Alien Base 


Vallee, for example, learned from a man who hosted Adamski during his 
tour of Australia in 1959 that he was travelling with a passport bearing 
special privileges. 39 

Also remarkable were Adamski’s manners. ‘They were, quite simply, 
those of an English gentleman,’ said Lou Zinsstag, who recounted how a 
well-to-do couple in Basle once invited her and Adamski to a formal din¬ 
ner. There was quite a collection of precious silver cutlery beside each 
plate, indicating a dinner of four to five courses. ‘We were astonished at 
Adamski’s accomplished table manners,’ the host told Lou afterwards. 
‘He made use of his cutlery in the right way, without hesitation, and he 
ate and drank like a true gentleman. He could have accepted an invitation 
to Buckingham Palace.’' 10 

FURTHER ATTEMPTS TO SUBSTANTIATE THE CLAIMS 
On several occasions, witnesses have substantiated some of Adamski’s 
claims. On other occasions, he was less successful in providing evidence. 
For example, he reported that two scientists accompanied him on one of 
his trips into space. ‘Both are scientists who hold high positions,’ he wrote 
to Charlotte Blodgct. ‘However, the way things are nowadays with every¬ 
thing classified as security, for the time being they must remain in the 
shadow. When they believe that they can release the substantiation they 
have without jeopardizing either the national defense or themselves, they 
have said that they will do so through the press."" Regrettably, the two 
scientists have not come forward, and it is doubtful if they are still living. 
Researcher Richard Ogden alleged that his friend Dr David Turner was 
one of the scientists. 42 If so, he was backward in coming forward. 

In the postscript to Inside the Space Ships, Adamski wrote that on 24 
April 1955 he was taken for a ride into space, specifically to fulfil his 
request to take some photographs inside the space ships. ‘We can guar¬ 
antee nothing for reasons which will be clear to you later,’ one of his hosts 
told him, ‘but we shall try to get a picture of our ship with you in it. This 
would be simple enough if we could use our own method of photography, 
but that would not serve your purpose. Our cameras and film are entirely 
magnetic and you have no equipment on Earth that could reproduce such 
pictures. So we must use yours and see what we can get.’ 

Adamski had brought along a new Polaroid camera, and explained its 
workings to his hosts. Orthon and Adamski allegedly stood in the carrier 
ship, looking through the very thick glass portholes-an estimated six-foot 
gap Jay between the outer and inner windows - while a spaceman took 
photographs through a porthole of a nearby scoutcraft. ‘From her ball top,’ 
Adamski reported, ‘she was throwing a beam of bright light upon the larger 
craft. Sometimes this beam was very intense, and again not so intense.’ 



Claim, Contradictions and Corroborations 


141 



Fig. 10. A letter from Allen W. Dulles, Director of the CIA (1953-61), to the 
Honorable Gordon H. Scherer, House of Representatives, 4 October 1955, 
regarding an allegation by Thomas Eickhoff of‘mail fraud’ perpetrated by George 
Adamski relating to his statement in Inside the Space Ships of having on one occasion 
travelled aboard extraterrestrial spacecraft with two scientists. Nonetheless, as 
revealed in Beyond Top Secret, Dulles reportedly stated that he would prevent 
anyone from testifying in court concerning Adamski’s book ‘because maximum 
security exists concerning the subject of UFOS’. (CM) 

As the photographs show, they were experimenting with the amount of light 
necessary to show the mother ship and at the same time penetrate through the 
portholes to catch Orthon and myself behind them. While this was going on, 







142 


Alien Base 


radiation from both the mother ship and the Scout had been cut to a mini¬ 
mum. 1 learned later that the men had been obliged to put some sort of filter 
over the camera and lens in order to protect the film from the magnetic influ¬ 
ences of the craft. 

When the scoutcraft returned, Adamski studied the pictures. 
Although pleased, he cursed himself for not bringing more film along, 
and his hosts were less than satisfied with the results. While the four pic¬ 
tures (one of which is reproduced in the plate section) purportedly show 
the hull of the carrier craft (and one the edge of the scoutcraft’s porthole) 
the faces peering through the portholes are not clear. Nonetheless, I see 
no evidence of photographic trickery. 

The spacemen decided to attempt shots of the interior of a small flight 
deck with two pilots sitting at the controls. ‘But these two attempts failed, 
due to the greater magnetic power in the carrier in comparison to that in 
the Scout,’ Adamski explained. ‘Without some as yet undeveloped filter 
system for our film, it is impossible to get clear photographs within the 
space ships. When 1 asked if a better camera with a finer lens might be 
more successful, I was told that any appreciable improvement was un¬ 
likely because of the type of film used.* 43 

In addition to the metal ‘slag’ given him by Orthon, Adamski claimed 
to possess another sample of alien alloy, which he had had analysed 
chemically: 

When I first telephoned to ask the result, this man sounded very excited. But 
when I saw him later in his laboratory, he ... tried to brush the whole thing 
off lightly. When he said it was nothing that could not be picked up in any old 
scrapyard, naturally I persisted in demanding an explicit statement of his 
findings. He then admitted that there were ‘slight differences’ in composition 
from any usual alloy, but said that could have happened by a variation in heat¬ 
ing or some ‘slight accident’ which had gone unnoticed at the time, thereby 
making duplication of the alloy improbable.'* 4 

In December 1958 Adamski claimed that a spaceman picked him up by 
car from his delayed train near Kansas City, Missouri, and drove him a 
short distance to a grove of trees above which a craft was hovering. The 
method of boarding was dramatically different from anything hitherto, 
and is worth recording here because of the similarity to descriptions pro¬ 
vided in much later years by some abductees and contactecs: 

I had the experience to be lifted up into the space craft while the ship was 
hovering. It feels as if something is surrounding you like a transparent or 
plastic curtain, yet you can’t touch it and you don’t see it, and like a magnetic 
force it lifts you just like an elevator into the ship. And they can do this from 
a thousand miles away if they want, but usually it is only two to three hun¬ 
dred feet. You can take baggage and everything with you, as if you are stand- 



Claims, Contradictions and Corroborations 


143 


ing on a platform, even though you can’t see it. This only works in the open 
and the person being lifted is visible the whole time. 43 

Once aboard, Adamski asked his friends if they would lower the craft 
and land him during daylight so that hundreds of people could witness 
the event, but it was explained that although they themselves could 
escape harm from our military, he would be arrested and held incommu¬ 
nicado. Even if hundreds of people did sec him land and walk out of the 
ship they would quickly be silenced. The landing in Davenport, Iowa, 
where Adamski’s train was heading, was therefore reportedly delayed 
until nightfall. 46 

MORE CLAIMS, MOUNTING DOUBTS 
In 1960, according to Adamski, the US military exploded a nuclear device 
in the Earth’s upper atmosphere. The Russians had a similar idea, he told 
Lou Zinsstag, but after the first American test the project was cancelled 
on both sides, supposedly due to warnings from the space people. (In 
actuality, the US Navy’s Project Prime Argus exploded three such 
n uclcar devices, in 1958.) Adamski also claimed that the space people were 
involved in neutralizing harmful radiation from our nuclear tests. 

Prom one of their space laboratories in a mothership, green balls are being 
sent out (they have been observed all over the world). This is being done in 
order to counteract or neutralize or even absorb concentrations of radiation 
created through our bomb experiments. 47 

I do not know about the frequency of sightings of‘green balls’ in 1959, 
when Adamski made this statement, but I do know that from 1948 to 
1950, at least, there was a plethora of reports of ‘green fireballs’ - partic¬ 
ularly in the vicinity of nuclear test sites and installations - and that these 
were the subject of secret studies by military and scientific intelligence 
personnel, as I have recounted in Beyond Top Secret (see also Figs. 11, 
12). As an Army Intelligence memo from the period reveals: 

Agencies-in New Mexico are greatly concerned over these phenomena. They 
are of the opinion that some foreign power is making ‘sensing shots' with 
some super-stratosphere device designed to be self-disintegrating. 48 

Adamski further claimed in 1959 that secret studies were being con¬ 
ducted into various methods of cancelling gravity. ‘They already have 
models for anti-gravity propelled flying objects in disc form,’ he wrote, 
‘but none of these methods for application of a free kind of energy must 
be revealed to the public, because such a society in possession of these 
advanced methods would soon escape from economic control.’ 

From 1960 onwards Adamski began warning his co-workers about a 
new and ‘foreign’ group of space visitors. Though admitting that it was 





144 


Alien Base 



Fig. 11. A US Army Intelligence report, dated 13 January 1949, relating to 
sightings above Los Alamos. (US Army) 


not easy for him to guess their purpose nor to estimate their numbers, he 
nonetheless speculated: 

Who is to say that defense will not be needed? Since we are in the process of 
evolving, people of other planets throughout the Cosmos are likewise evolv¬ 
ing. We are not the lowest in the Cosmos! Beyond our solar system are whole 
systems whose people have not progressed, socially, as far as we on Earth; yet 
some of them have advanced beyond us scientifically, and do have space 








Claims, Contradictions and Corroborations 


145 



Fig. 12. The beginning of a lengthy US Array Intelligence report, dated 
18 February 1949, relating to a secret conference at Los Alamos to discuss the 
‘green fireballs’. (USArmy) 


While we were confined to our planet with the thought that space was an 
empty void, we naturally were of little interest to most outsiders. But now 
that we are sending rockets and satellites into space we are attracting their 
attention and natural curiosity, and this would cause them to investigate us. 
Since we on Earth are warlike, with a history of wars, why should we not sus¬ 
pect that people of lower evolution socially would not be like us, or even more 
so? Because they live on another planet and travel space as we are trying to 
do, this certainly does not make them angels! And while they might not try to 
attack the world as a whole at this time, our own space ships just might need, 





146 


Alien Base 


one day, the protection which our military-trained personnel could 
provide. 

Much to the surprise of the sixties peace groups, Adamski never acted 
as an apostle for peace and disarmament. ‘He was no dreamer,’ wrote Lou 
Zinsstag, ‘and knew that the time for disarmament had not yet come, and 
worse, that world-wide war preparations were the most serious obstacle 
to the promotion of contacts between space people and senior officials.’ 49 

By the early 1960s, Adamski’s claims and philosophical treatises be¬ 
came increasingly esoteric; a departure from his usual, down-to-earth 
self. l I must confess, I became tired of Adamski's articles on cosmic 
philosophy,’ said Lou Zinsstag, until then one of his staunchest co- 
workers. ‘They were moralizing and indulgent, and often singularly 
pointless I thought.’ 50 

Venus 

During his alleged flight into space in August 1954, Adamski described 
how scenes from the planet Venus were shown to him, beamed directly 
in three-dimensional form. ‘We have a certain type of projector that can 
send out and stop beams at any distance desired,' explained Orthon. ‘The 
stopping point serves as an invisible screen where the pictures are con¬ 
centrated with colour and dimensional qualities intact’ (The similarity to 
what later became laser-produced holograms is interesting.) 

Adamski described ‘magnificent mountains’, some topped with snow, 
others quite barren and rocky, and some thickly timbered. ‘We have 
many lakes and seven oceans,’ said Orthon, ‘all of which are connected by 
waterways, both natural and artificial.’ Several Venusian cities were 
shown, with people ‘going about their business’. Conveyances, varying in 
size and patterned somewhat after the mother ships, appeared to be glid¬ 
ing along just above the ground. Next came a beach scene beside a lake, 
complete with swimmers and ‘long, low waves’. Animal life was shown, 
including horses and cows, both slightly smaller than those of Earth but 
otherwise very similar. ‘This seemed to hold true of all animal life on 
Venus,’ Adamski reported. 

The constant cloudy atmosphere surrounding Venus was explained as 
a contributing factor towards an average life-span of 1,000 years. ‘When 
the Earth, too, had such an atmosphere,’ explained Orthon, ‘man’s years 
on your planet were correspondingly far greater than now.’ 51 

In Chapter 2, 1 alluded to the harsh atmospheric environment of 
Venus, which precludes unprotected human, animal or even vegetable 
life (the atmospheric pressure alone is said to be about 90 times that of 
Earth). It is of course possible - as with Adamski’s description of the 
Moon - that the areas shown might have been protected from the vicis- 



Claim, Contradictions and Corroborations 147 

situdes of the Venusian atmosphere by some advanced means, but the 
fact remains that the Venusians made no mention of such. And in 1961 
Adamski claimed to have made an actual trip to Venus - a journey taking 
some 12 hours - followed by a five-hour visit His description of the 
environment is equally fanciful: 

The day was warm with the sun shining brightly through a scattering of 
‘mackerel’ cloud. The air was fresh and clean smelling. 1 was told it had 
rained the day before . . . While 1 had done little walking, I noticed myself 
fatiguing . .. The atmospheric pressure on Venus, in the vicinity 1 was, could 
therefore be compared to that of Earth’s atmospheric pressure at the altitude 
and in a comparable location with Mexico City. 52 

In another (undated) report, Adamski went into further fanciful 

On Venus, as on Earth, 80% of the planet is covered with water. The cloud 
cover that does not permit us to see the surface of Venus is caused by constant 
evaporation of moisture. This permits a large tropical area where fruits and 
vegetables are plentiful. There are seasons when the rainfall is very heavy. 
And in some sections a light rain falls each day ... 

Moreover, Adamski was told that the rotation period of Venus is 23 
hours (versus Earth’s 24 hours), whereas in fact it is 243 daysl 

The Saturn Report 

Adamski’s most ludicrous claim at this time was his supposed visit to the 
planet Saturn. In March 1962 his co-workers received a copy of his 
report on the ‘Trip to the Twelve Counsellors’ Meeting of our Solar 
System’ that took place from 27 to 30 March that year. ‘The [space] ship 
had come in on the 24th to one of our air bases where a high official of the 
US Government had a conference with the crew,’ wrote Adamski. ‘After 
the conference, the craft was returning to its home planet Saturn. The 
trip took nine hours, at a speed greater than 200 million m.p.h.’ 

Adamski’s follow-up explanations were received with increasing scep¬ 
ticism by all but the most devoted co-workers. Lou Zinsstag regarded the 
Saturn story as a ‘personal mental experience’. Henk Hinfelaar, a New 
Zealand co-worker, was equally doubtful. He reported that shortly after 
release of the Saturn report, ‘many things began to happen which gave 
rise to doubts, and evidence began to pile up indicating that a great 
change was taking place as far as George Adamski was concerned . . he 
alone can resolve it. Until he does there is no alternative but to by-pass 
him as a source of information.’ 

Hinfelaar and Zinsstag came to the conclusion that Adamski had ‘got 
into the wrong hands’. He himself had admitted that he was now dealing 



148 


Alien Base 


with a ‘new set of boys’, as he put it. Lou elaborated: 

Either, we reasoned, his ‘new set of boys’ was an extremely clever fake 
organization, a group of secret agents (not necessarily governmental), trained 
experts in mind control and hypnosis, or else George was dealing with a new 
group of space people who were deliberately feeding him false information in 
order to confuse an issue which had been established by the earlier, friendlier 
group. Why not? ‘They are no angels’, George had said . 53 

DECEPTION 

Author John Keel is convinced that all contactees were lied to by the 
‘ufonauts’, this being ‘part of the bewildering smoke screen which they 
have established to cover up their real origin, purpose, and motivation’. 54 
Before full blame is put on alien deception, consideration must be given 
to the fact that Adamski himself sometimes deceived. In October 1962, 
for example, a silly letter was sent to the co-workers, purportedly written 
by one of his space contacts, in English but with transparently fake ‘alien’ 
symbols added, stating: ‘You are doing good work. George Adamski is 
the only one on Earth that we support.’ The letter was written by 
Adamski himself, sent from a post office box number rented for him by a 
friend, Martha Ulrich. This was the final straw for many of Adamski’s 
supporters. ‘Adamski himself is pulling down his original image,’ wrote 
Roy Russell, an Australian co-worker. 55 It is also relevant that Adamski’s 
1964 Science of Life Study Course, which he claimed contained informa¬ 
tion and philosophy revealed to him by the ‘space brothers’, was, in fact, 
a rewrite of his first book, Wisdom of the Masters of the Far East, published 
in 1936 by the ‘Royal Order of Tibet’. 56 

Former contactee Ray Stanford claims that in 1958, as a devoted 15- 
year-old follower of Adamski, he was visiting Palomar Terraces with his 
brother Rex one morning when Adamski started reminiscing: 

. . . during the Prohibition I had the [Royal] Order of Tibet. It was a front. 
Listen, I was able to make the wine. You know, we’re supposed to have the 
religious ceremonies; we make the wine for them, and the authorities can’t 
interfere with our religion. Hell, I made enough wine for half of Southern 
California. In fact, boys, I was the biggest bootlegger around ... If it hadn’t 
been for that man Roosevelt, I wouldn’t have [had] to get into all this saucer 

While I am inclined to believe that Adamski may have established the 
monastery of the Royal Order of Tibet to allow him to make wine in large 
quantities, I do not believe it was Prohibition that led him ‘to get into all 
this saucer crap’. If he did say as much, I would attribute the comment to 
his sometimes earthy sense of humour. Even some of Adamski’s most 
vociferous critics concede that he was a man totally dedicated to his mis- 



Claims, Contradictions and Corroborations 


149 


sion and his philosophy. Stanford himself found Adamski to be a likeable 
man. ‘1 also saw a gentle, benign, artistic side to him,’ he said. ‘He showed 
us many paintings he had done that were quite good.' Stanford further¬ 
more believes that there is much in favour of Adamski's original contact 
claim. 5 ® 

Although negative evidence from Carol Honey is often cited by 
Adamski’s detractors as conclusive proof of Adamski’s charlatanism, the 
positive evidence is invariably overlooked. In 1979, Honey wrote: 

In Adamski’s own words he did not ‘go off the beam’ until many years after 
his original contacts. Because I am interested only in the truth I told Adamski 
many times that I would support only that which had been proven to be true 
. . Adamski turned over to me many manuscripts, most of his library and 
nearly all of his original files. For several years every word Adamski pub¬ 
lished came through my typewriter. His unpublished manuscripts remain 
unpublished because in my opinion they were ‘off the beam’ and not com¬ 
patible with what I knew to be the truth ... 

On various occasions, Adamski produced photographs, artifacts, record¬ 
ings, laboratory reports, etc., which I examined closely. None was ever 
revealed to the public or press, so far as I am aware; yet all were more con¬ 
vincing than those things he did release. He claimed he was told not to 'reveal 
them until the proper time’. If he was fraudulent in all his claims, why didn’t 
he reveal this stronger material? What happened to these items when he died? 

George Adamski met men from other planets [and] his photographs were 
genuine . . . later, after his contacts had ended, he misled the public rather 
than admit that the initial phases of the ‘program’ were over. 59 

A PIONEER OF SPACE 

In 1949, a science-fiction book by ‘Professor George Adamski’ was pub¬ 
lished privately. Entitled Pioneers of Space: A Trip to the Moon, Mars and 
Venus , it was ghost-written by Lucy McGinnis and printed in a limited 
edition. In this book are striking similarities to Inside the Space Ships 
(1956), especially in Adamski’s descriptions of‘Venetians, Martonians 
[sir] and Saturnians’, though the majority of the descriptions in the 
earlier book bear little or no similarity to those appearing in the later one. 
Yet, for many, Pioneers of Space is a damning indictment of the later 
book. Interestingly, in the foreword, Adamski pointed out that: ‘While 
this is at present in the field of fiction, the advance of science is so rapid 
that it will not be long before all this will become a reality.’ 

In Pioneers , for instance, is a remarkable resemblance to his 1953 
description of the Moon: 

We find ... a belt-like section extending as far as we can see around the 
Moon that has a natural growth of trees and vegetation [and] we see a small 
lake.™ 




150 


Alien Base 


Likewise, his comparison of extraterrestrial lifespans conforms with 
the later book: 

this man looks to us to be around seventy years of age. Later wc leam that he 
is one hundred and ninety 61 ... On Mars the span of life is from five hundred 
to one thousand years. 62 

It is in its graphic accounts of Venus and the ‘Venetians’ that Pioneers 
comes closest to his later descriptions: 

They tell us they have nine oceans, many lakes and rivers, majestic, towering 
mountains and very beautiful woodlands . . [their cars] seem to be gliding 
right over the surface of the ground 62 ... Breathing at first was somewhat dif¬ 
ficult since the air is so light but we are able to quickly adjust ourselves .. . M 

In appearance they look more like men out of a dream than humans like 
ourselves . .. their hands are long and slender, rather delicate in structure... 
the women are far greater in beauty and expression 65 . . . We feel as though 
they are looking right through us and can actually read our minds. We have 
been told they are experts in the field of mental telepathy. 66 

Though it is obvious that Adamski embellished his later accounts with 
material probably drawn from Pioneers, there could be a less simplistic, if 
more incredible, explanation. In company with abductees decades later, 
Adamski claimed privately to have been contacted by extraterrestrials as 
a child, and to have received instruction from them in Tibet by way of 
preparation for his mission in later life. Publicly, Adamski made no such 
claims, though he hinted at having had ‘mental’ contact prior to the 
Desert Center encounter. ‘Speaking of visitors from other planets,’ he 
wrote to a correspondent in early 1952, ‘in the physical I have not con¬ 
tacted any of them, but since you have read Pioneers of Space you can see 
how I get my information about these people and their homelands.' 67 

In 1958 Adamski is reported to have made an interesting statement to 
Ray Stanford which has been interpreted as an admission of fraud. ‘Ray, 
listen,’ he said, ‘I did not ever have to go out into space to know about the 
spaceships. Hell, I knew about the spaceships and what was in ’em years 
ago ... Pioneers of Space will tell you everything, just like Inside the Space 
Ships. All I did was project my consciousness to the beings out there and 
I could see them and know what was in their ships.’ 68 

Does this necessarily mean that Adamski lied about all his ‘actual’ trips 
into space? I think not. Assuming that is precisely what he said, he does not 
deny having made such trips; he seemed to be implying rather that it 
simply was not absolutely necessary for him. Secondly, apart from those 
similarities already discussed, Inside the Space Ships is a very different book, 
full of much more richly detailed descriptions. Thirdly, those with whom 
I have spoken who knew Adamski well over many years told me that he 
remained adamant about actually having been inside the spaceships. 



Claim, Contradictions and Corroborations 


151 


I asked Lucy McGinnis, Adamski’s secretary for many years (until she 
‘defected’ in the early 1960s), how she reconciled the two books. ‘I have 
often wondered about that,’ she replied thoughtfully. ‘The first book was 
definitely written as fiction, and it might have been his way of breaking 
into the subject. He might have known something more -1 don’t know. 
It never bothered me to the extent that I made an issue of it because, you 
see, I could have made an issue of it if I hadn’t seen those ships.’ 

In addition to having witnessed the Desert Center contact, Lucy had 
another sighting of a craft - similar in configuration to the classic ‘scout’ 
- which she saw at Palomar Terraces several years later. As she related to 
me: 

I was in my room lying down one afternoon. I don’t know what date it was, 
but for some reason I got up and went out. As I got out the door, I looked up, 
and here was this great big saucer-like thing. I was amazed. As I looked up I 
could see through it. It was two stories; you could see the steps where they 
would go up and down. I don’t remember how many people I saw, but they 
were moving around. It seemed to me they had kind of ski-suits, fastened 
around the ankle ... Then suddenly it started just drifting away. 

I also asked Lucy for her opinion as to why Adamski had begun telling 
such ridiculous stories in the early 1960s. She replied that his oversized 
ego was to blame, and offered her belief that the original group of 
extraterrestrials had left him for just that reason. She also felt that he was 
simply lying about the trips to Saturn and Venus by way of bolstering his 
ego, which had become seriously deflated when the original group left 
him. 69 Although this explanation is convincing, it still falls short of 
answering all the questions about this complex man and his even more 
complex claims. 

An important clue to the Adamski mystery was provided for me by a 
friend whom I first met in 1952, and for whose integrity I can vouch. This 
person, whom I shall call Joelle, claimed that in 1963 she met the same, 
or a similar group of extraterrestrials that Adamski knew, through a series 
of fortuitous circumstances (see Chapter 12). According to what Joelle 
was told by the visitors, Adamski was indeed selected and contacted by 
this certain group of extraterrestrials, but at an early stage he disclosed 
some secret information with which he had been entrusted, and it there¬ 
fore became necessary for them to feed him with false information which 
would discredit him, thereby protecting their own interests. Exactly 
what this disinformation was, I do not know, but I can say that it began 
to make its appearance in Inside the Space Ships. Joelle told me that 
Adamski’s account of the Desert Center contact, as described in Flying 
Saucers Have Landed , is essentially true. Joelle’s contacts confirmed that 
Adamski had indeed been on board their craft, but they would not say 



152 


Alien Base 


where they had taken him. They were equally reluctant to reveal their 
origin, other than saying that they had bases within our solar system, 
including on Earth. It was not made clear to what extent Adamski was 
aware of the disinformation that he disseminated. 

Carol Honey told me that on one occasion Adamski had indeed 
betrayed such a confidence. 70 Assuming his earlier contacts were 
genuine, the pressures on him must have been great. ‘My heart is a 
graveyard of secrets,’ he once told Lou Zinsstag, 

Desmond Leslie, seeking to rehabilitate his friend, invokes an esoteric 
explanation to account for the ‘Venusians’, ‘Martians’, ‘Saturnians’, et al. 
The ‘brothers’, he says, are able to ‘materialize’ in our environment but 
their own planets are on a ‘higher vibratory frequency 5 than ours, hence 
life as we know it has not been discovered in our solar system. 71 1 do not 
reject the hypothesis: however, apart from the fact that the ‘brothers’ do 
not necessarily originate in our solar system (as even Adamski stated 
privately, according to Carol Honey, 72 and which is implied in the 
information given to Joelle), there is another point that can be over¬ 
looked. 

Leslie cites Paramahansa Yogananda, the great yogi teacher, and dis¬ 
cusses the extraordinary feats attributed to highly advanced avatars and 
masters said to be living on Earth who can levitate, render themselves 
invisible, project their images across vast distances, walk through walls, 
eta 73 But this in no way alters the fact that these remarkable people arc 
still flesh-and-blood human beings, albeit highly advanced physically, 
mentally and spiritually. It is my conviction that many extraterrestrials, 
too, are capable of these and other fantastic feats: indeed, in this respect 
I see little difference between highly evolved human beings said to live on 
this planet and those from any other. Adamski once told Leslie that we 
could not visit advanced civilizations on other planets ‘in our present 
bodily condition’. I believe there is much truth in this statement, but not 
for exclusively esoteric reasons. 

When Leslie asked about the solidity of the space people, Adamski, in 
alluding to his initial contact with Orthon, replied: ‘Those guys were no 
goddam spooks. The pilot scratched his hand on the rim when he 
grabbed my arm to save it from being torn off by the force field and I tell 
you it bled red blood, just like you or me.’ 74 On other occasions, Adamski 
would emphasize the point. ‘Why would a spook need a spaceship?’ he 
liked to ask. 

Assuming that there are no thriving indigenous civilizations within 
our solar system, there is no reason why temporary or even permanent 
bases could not be maintained on some planets and their satellites, even 
on Earth, by beings from other solar systems. Adamski was the first to 
state that the aliens had secret bases on our planet, known to a select few 














witnesses to Adamski's encounter with on extraterrestrial 
in November 1952. McGinnis worked as Adamski^ 
i years, but resigned in the early 60s. Like Lou Zinsstag, 
j! claims until her death. (© Timothy Guo/I) 




























Claim, Contradictions and Corroborations 


153 


in the military and intelligence community. I have uncovered much 
evidence for this allegation during my investigations. 

PERSONAL ENCOUNTERS 

The closest I came to meeting George Adamski was in November 1963, 
during my first tour of the United States with the Royal Philharmonic 
Orchestra. Because Los Angeles was on the itinerary I was determined to 
take a bus to his home in Vista. In the event, the bus schedule did not 
coincide with mine, and I had to abandon the idea. Yet a curious incident 
occurred en route to Los Angeles which left a deep and lasting impres- 

On 13 November we left Tucson, Arizona, for the 500-mile ride to Los 
Angeles, in a convoy of three buses. About halfway there, near the 
Arizona/Califomia border, we stopped at a roadside restaurant. Sitting 
at a table with some colleagues, casually surveying the customers waiting 
in line, my attention was drawn to an extraordinary-looking girl, with 
blond bobbed hair, delicate pale features and a petite figure. (Later, I was 
reminded of Adamski’s description of Kalna, with her ‘almost transpar¬ 
ent skin'.) 75 

Adamski was the first to proclaim that some people from other planets 
were actually living and working among us - illegal aliens, as it were- and 
stated that his contacts often took place in the anonymous surroundings 
of restaurants and hotel lobbies. Having spoken with a number of other 
witnesses who had related similar encounters, I decided to make an 
attempt at telepathic communication with this unknown girl, and trans¬ 
mitted the question: ‘Are you from another planet?’ 

There was no immediate response, but as she left the queue she made 
a point of walking past my table, pausing to give me a gracious smile and 
an actual bow of acknowledgement before proceeding to another part of 
the restaurant with a ‘dead-pan’ expression on her face. 

Although I cannot remember the precise location of the restaurant I do 
recall that one of the highway signs nearby indicated Desert Center, by 
coincidence not far from the site of Adamski’s initial encounter. 

Four years later I had another such experience while in the United 
States. In February 1967 I was in New York City for a series of concerts 
with the London Symphony Orchestra at the Carnegie Hall. One after¬ 
noon I decided, as an experiment, to attempt some further telepathic 
communication in the lobby of the Park-Sheraton Hotel, now the Omni 
Park Central, at 56th Street on Seventh Avenue, where we were staying. 
I had just returned from my first meeting with Madeleine Rodeffer in 
Washington, DC. Madeleine had told me that she had encounters with 
the ‘space people’, and that these most often took place in public places. 
I resolved to try and settle the matter once and for all. Settling back on a 



154 


Alien Base 


sofa in the lobby 1 transmitted a telepathic request, which went some¬ 
thing like this: 'If any of you people from elsewhere are in the New York 
vicinity, please come and sit down right next to me and prove it.’ 

New York is, of course, a busy city, and a hotel lobby seems the most 
incongruous of venues to conduct such an experiment. Many people (a 
few of them strange, if terrestrial) came and went during the ensuing 
half-hour or so. Suddenly a man entered the lobby whose demeanour put 
me on alert. Dressed in a charcoal-grey suit with a white shirt and dark 
tie, he could have passed for a businessman from Madison Avenue. He 
was five feet ten inches tall, with curly fair hair, a tanned complexion, and 
perfectly proportioned features, and he appeared to me to be about 35 
years of age. He came and sat down beside me. From an attache case he 
took out a copy of the New York Times. Unfolding this he began to turn 
the pages over in a rather deliberate and superficial manner. After he had 
refolded the paper I felt the time had come to ask him telepathically if he 
really was from another planet, and if so, would he please identify him¬ 
self by placing his right index finger on the right side of his nose. The 
response was immediate and dramatic, for no sooner had I transmitted 
the thought than he did precisely that! 

Sitting dumbfounded, I wondered what on earth the next move would 
be. I attempted more telepathy, but nothing else happened. Perhaps 1 
should have engaged him in conversation but, being British (clearly a 
drawback to interplanetary communications), I had reservations about 
such an approach. Also, I felt that if my expectations were well founded, 
it should be he and not I who would initiate any such conversation. 

Wc both sat silently for a few minutes. Then he stood up and walked 
over to some display windows behind and to my right, about 15 feet away. 
Observing him surreptitiously, I noticed that he appeared to be taking 
little interest in the merchandise displayed there, and after a few more 
minutes he gave me a long, penetrating look, then turned and walked out 
into Seventh Avenue. I never saw him again. 

Of course, it can logically be argued that this experience, like the one 
in 1963, was coincidental. Telepathy often is commonplace, as people 
who pick up the unspoken thoughts of a companion often know. For 
instance, Dr Dennis Ross, a physicist at Iowa State University, told me 
that he and his brother had communicated telepathically with one 
another until the age of 12. Perhaps, then, this man in New York was 
merely a receptive mortal who picked up my thoughts and responded 
accordingly. I am the first to accept the plausibility of this hypothesis, yet 
there was something oddly distinctive about him which I cannot erase. 

As far as I am concerned the experiment was a success. It is not the sort 
of experiment that would meet with the approval of radio astronomers. I 
believe that it was intended as personal proof and encouragement for me, 



Claims, Contradictions and Corroborations 1SS 

and, as such, was of no value to others. In any event, it had a cathartic 
effect on me. 

In my estimation, the evidence, taken as a whole, suggests that, 
although some of George Adamski’s claims were exaggerated, preposter¬ 
ous, or the result of disinformation by his contacts, many are sensible and 
verifiable. I take the view that his reported encounters with spacecraft 
and their operators were fundamentally accurately reported as to basic 
data, but were embellished both by Adamski and by friends and sup¬ 
porters to the extent that they later assumed mythical qualities. We need 
to re-evaluate not only his claims, but those of others claiming contact 
with quasi-human beings from other worlds, lest, in throwing out the 
proverbial baby with the bath-water, potentially important data may be 
lost to analysis. Apart from my own prejudices, I feel it is important to 
re-emphasize that a great deal of what Adamski spoke and wrote about 
the ‘space people’ and their technologies is now, on the verge of the 
twenty-first century, more plausible and more scientifically relevant than 
it Was some 40 years ago. 


NOTES 

1 Adamski, George, Inside the Space Ships , Arco Spearman, London, 19S6, p. 
67- 

2 Glenn, Lieutenant Colonel John H., ‘My Day of Miracles’, The Astronauts 
Book , Panther Books, London, 1966. 

3 Komarov, Vladimir, Feoktistov, Konstantin, and Yegorov, Boris, '24 Hours 
in Space’, The Astronauts Book. 

4 Interview with the author, London, 24 November 1996. 

5 Adamski, op. cit., pp. 71-2. 

6 Ibid., pp. 82-3. 

7 Ibid., pp. 110-12. 

8 Ibid., pp. 116-18. 

9 Ibid., pp. 130-4, 138. 

10 Ibid., p. 136. 

11 Ibid.,pp. 143-4. 

12 Wilford, John Noble, We Reach the Moon, Bantam, New York, 1969, p. 23. 

13 Adamski, op. cit., p. 144. 

14 Ibid., pp. 203-5. 

15 Leslie, Desmond, and Adamski, George, Flying Saucers Have Landed, 
revised edition, Neville Spearman, London, 1970, pp, 260-L 

16 Adamski, George, Flying Saucers Farewell, Abelard-Schuman, London, 
1961, pp. 156-7. 



156 


Alien Base 


17 Wilford, op. dt,, p. 21. 

18 Letter to the author from John McLcaish, NASA, Manned Spacecraft 
Center, Houston, 20 May 1970. 

19 Interview with the author, London, 24 November 1996. 

20 Steckling, Fred, Why Are They Here?, Vantage, New York, 1969. 

21 Fouere, Rene, ‘Adamski’s Last Chance: Will the Moon Vindicate Him?’, 
Flying Saucer Review, vol. 10, no. 5, September-October 1964, pp. 27-9. 

22 Ibid., p. 27. 

23 United Press International (UPl), Houston, 16 October 1971. 

24 Taylor, John W. R., Aircraft Seventy, Ian Allan, Shepperton, Middlesex, 
1970. 

25 Knowlton, Brian, ‘Frozen Water Found on the Moon, Reviving a Dream’, 
International Herald Tribune, London, 4 December 1996. 

26 Edwards, Frank, Flying Saucers - Serious Business, Lyle Stuart, New York, 
1966, pp. 39-40. 

27 Ibid., pp. 41-3. 

28 Petersen, Hans C., Report from Europe, Scandinavian UFO Information 
(SUFOI), Jylland, Denmark, 1964, p. 102. 

29 Corso, Col. Philip J.,with Birnes, William J., The Day After Roswell, Pocket 
Books, New York and London, 1997, pp. 128-9, 

30 Ibid., pp. 125-6. 

31 Adamski, Flying Saucers Farewell, pp. 151-6. 

32 Interview with the author, Ontario, California, 19 November 1979. 

33 Petersen, op. dt., pp. 131-2. 

34 Letter from George Adamski to his co-workers, 5 April 1960. 

35 Zinsstag, Lou, and Good, Timothy, George Adamski: The Untold Story , Ccti 
Publications, Beckenham, Kent, 1983, pp. 61-3 (out of print). 

36 Letter to the author from Monsignor G. Coppa, Secretariat of State, The 
Vatican, 14 May 1977. 

37 Zinsstag and Good, op. dt., p. 63. 

38 Ibid., pp. 63-4. 

39 Vallee, Jacques, Messengers of Deception: UFO Contacts and Culls, And/Or 
Press, Berkeley, California, 1979, p. 203. 

40 Zinsstag and Good, op. cit., p. 25. 

41 Adamski, Inside the Space Ships, p. 14. 

42 Saucer Smear, ed. James Moseley, vol. 29, no. 10,10 December 1982, p. 5. 

43 Adamski, Inside the Space Ships, pp. 222-6. 

44 Ibid., p. 16. 

45 Petersen, op. dt., p. 104. 

46 Letter from Lucy McGinnis to Major Donald Keyhoe, 20 July 1959. 

47 Zinsstag and Good, op. dt., pp. 95-6. 

48 Good, Timothy, Beyond Top Secret: The Worldwide UFO Security Threat, 
Sidgwick & Jackson, London, 1996, pp. 320-6. 

49 Zinsstag and Good, op. cit., pp. 95-7. 

50 Ibid., pp. 67-71. 

51 Adamski, Inside the Space Ships, pp. 212-15. 



Claims, Contradictions and Corroborations 


157 


52 Report from Adamski to his co-workers, 31 March 1961. 

53 Zinsstag and Good, op. rit., pp. 67-71. 

54 Keel, John A., Operation Trojan Horse, Souvenir Press, London, 1971, p. 
213. 

55 Zinsstag and Good, op. cit., pp. 72-5. 

56 Ibid., p. 191. 

57 Clark, Jerome, ‘Startling New Evidence in the Pascagoula and Adamski 
Abductions', UFO Report, vol. 6, no. 2, August 1978, p. 72. 

58 Ibid., pp. 74,76. 

59 Letter from Carol A. Honey, published in Fate, vol. 32, no. 3 (?), February 
1979, pp. 113-15. 

60 Adamski, George, Pioneers of Space: A Trip to the Moon, Mars and Venus, 
Leonard-Freefield Co., Los Angeles, 1949, p. 14. 

61 Ibid., p. 31. 

62 Ibid., p. 81. 

63 Ibid., p. 221. 

64 Ibid., p. 203. 

65 Ibid., p. 115. 

66 Ibid., p. 207. 

67 Letter to Emma Martinclli from George Adamski, 16 January 1952. 

68 Clark, op. cit., p. 72. 

69 Interview with the author, Escondido, California, 20 November 1979. 

70 Letter to the author from Carol Honey, 24 July 1979. 

71 Leslie, Desmond, ‘Commentary on George Adamski’, in Flying Saucers 
Have Landed by Desmond Leslie and George Adamski, revised edition, 
Neville Spearman, London, 1970. 

72 Interview with the author, 19 November 1979. 

73 Yog3nanda, Paramahansa. Autobiography of a Yogi, Self-Realization 
Fellowship, Los Angeles, 1946; revised 1951. 

74 Leslie, op. cit., p. 250. 

75 Adamski, Inside the Space Ships, p. 56. 

Note: Inside the Space Ships has now been republished, combining 
Adamski’s section from Flying Saucers Have Landed. In addition to some 
of Adamski’s books on philosophy, tapes of his lectures and photographs, 
it is available from the GAF International/Adamski Foundation, PO Box 
1722, Vista, California 92085. 



Chapter 8 


From the Benign to the Bristly 


We have sucks of reports of flying saucers. We have to take them seriously 
when you consider we have lost many men and planes trying to intercept 
them. 

Thus stated General Benjamin Chidlaw, Commanding General of Air 
Defense Command, in conversation with researcher Robert Gardner in 
1953.' 

In previous books I have alluded to some disturbing cases involving 
missing aircraft and pilots, including one which took place in the vicinity 
of Soo Locks, Michigan, on 23 November 1953, when an F-69C 
Scorpion jet was scrambled to intercept an unknown target, confirmed on 
radar by an Air Defense Command ground-control intercept (GC1) con¬ 
troller. As the interceptor approached the target, the two blips, of the 
F-89 and the UFO on the GCI radarscope merged into one, as if they had 
collided. For a moment a single blip remained on the scope but then dis¬ 
appeared. No trace of wreckage or the missing crew was ever found. 2 

In the previous chapter, I cited the claim by George Adamski that he 
had been consulted in 1956 by the Air Force regarding a jet which had 
landed by itself - minus pilots. While researching material for this book, 
I came across an equally outlandish story, from a reputable source, which 
in some respects compares well with both of the cases cited above. 

On an unspecified date in June 1953, Sergeant Clarence O. Dargie was 
working in the operations centre at Otis Air Force Base, Massachusetts, 
when radar detected a LIFO, and a jet was scrambled to intercept. As the 
plane levelled off at 1,500 feet, all systems on the aircraft suddenly failed. 
‘That was nearly impossible,’ said Dargie, ‘because each system [with the 
exception of the engine(s)] had a separate power source. If one source 
stopped working, the rest would continue to operate. But for some 
strange reason, all the systems were out.’ 

As the plane started to nose-dive, the pilot ordered his navigator to 
eject. Normal procedure in such a situation was for the navigator to pull 
the first lever which ejected the canopy and then a second lever for his 
seat ejection. On hearing the second ejection explosion, the pilot would 
then pull his own lever to eject himself from the cockpit. Because a crash 



From the Benign to the Bristly 


1S9 


was imminent, the pilot ejected after he heard the first explosion, taking 
a risk of colliding with the navigator. In this case, when the pilot ejected 
and landed in the back yard of a Cape Cod resident some moments later, 
no trace of either the aircraft or the navigator was found. The resident, 
said Dargie, did not report hearing any crash or even seeing a jet. ‘After 
three months of intensive search the government never did find any trace 
of the plane or the navigator,’ Dargie claimed. ‘If the plane had crashed 
there would have been an explosion. There was none, not a trace of it at 
all. Both the UFO and plane disappeared from the radar scope.’ 3 

A CONTACT IN MEXICO 

Between 17 and 20 August 1953, Mexican taxi-driver Salvador 
Villanueva was hired by two Texan tourists to drive them from Mexico 
City to the border of Texas. After about 60 miles, they had just passed 
Ciudad Valleys when the car ground to a halt. Oil had apparently leaked 
from the differential and it was obvious the car would go no further. The 
Texans angrily unloaded their baggage, hired another cab and drove off 
without paying. 

Villanueva tried unsuccessfully to flag down a car for help. Reluctantly 
he decided to stay with his car for the night and seek help in the morn¬ 
ing. It began to rain. At about 18.00 he crawled under the car to look at 
the damage again, and it was while in the prone position that he became 
aware of two pairs of feet. From what he could see of them, both feet and 
legs seemed normal, except that they were enclosed in what looked like a 
seamless grey corduroy. Scrambling up, Villanueva found himself con¬ 
fronted by a couple of plcasant-looking men, about four feet six inches in 
height. Because many Mexicans are short Villanueva was not unduly 
alarmed. 

Both men were dressed in a one-piece grey garment and a wide per¬ 
forated shiny belt. Around their necks were metal collars with what 
looked like small black shiny boxes on the back of their necks. The men 
carried helmets under their arms similar to those worn by jet-pilots or 
American football players. Villanueva assumed that they were pilots who 
had landed nearby. The men continued smiling. One of them opened a 
conversation by asking Villanueva if he was in trouble. The taxi-driver 
replied in the affirmative, explaining what had happened. The ‘pilot’ 
smiled sympathetically, then made small talk. It was at this point that 
Villanueva realized that the man had a peculiar accent, as though he were 
stringing words together. His companion said nothing but occasionally 
made expressions indicating that he understood. ‘Doesn’t your friend 
speak Spanish?’ asked Villanueva. 

‘No, but he is able to understand you,’ came the reply. 

It began to rain again, so Villanueva invited the men to shelter in his 



160 


Alien Base 


car, where the conversation was continued. It was confirmed that the men 
were indeed pilots. 

‘Is your plane near here?’ asked Villanueva. 

‘Not very far.’ 

•Where are you from, if I might ask?’ 

‘We have come from very far.’ 

By nightfall Villanueva felt there was something very strange about 
these men. In his conversation the spokesman betrayed that he knew far 
too much for an ordinary man, not only about this world but about others 
too. So around dawn, Villanueva asked if they really were aviators from 
our world. ‘No,’ came the reply. ‘We are not of this planet. We come 
from one far distant, but we know much about your world.’ 

Villanueva was incredulous, believing they were teasing him; he even 
accused them of such at one point. After sunrise, the men said they had 
to leave and asked the taxi-driver if he would like to accompany them to 
their craft. Expecting to see a conventional aeroplane, Villanueva fol¬ 
lowed them as they led him for about half a kilometre through a swampy 
area. Although he was sometimes sinking to his knees in muddy pools, he 
was astonished to notice that the men in front of him did not sink at all. 
‘When their grey-clad feet touched muddy pools,’ reported investigator 
Desmond Leslie, ‘the mud sprang away from them as if repelled by some 
nvisible force. No dirt ever seemed to come in contact with them and 
hey remained unspotted although his own boots were by now caked in 
mud.’ 

Villanueva also noticed that each time they walked over the muddy 
pools, their perforated belts glowed. He hesitated nervously, but the avi¬ 
ators turned round and smiled encouragingly. 

The Craft 

Suddenly, in a clearing, Villanueva caught sight of a large shiny craft, 
unlike anything he had ever seen. As Leslie wrote: 

In form it had the shape of two huge soup plates joined at the rim. Above it was 
a shallow dome with portholes. The entire structure, about 40 feet across, 
rested on three giant metal spheres or landing balls. Unless this was some secret 
invention from the United States, it was surely a ship from another world. 

As they approached, a faint humming came from within the craft and a 
portion of the lower hull opened outwards, much in the manner of the rear 
entrance to a Martin 404 airliner, so that the inner side of the panel formed a 
staircase to the craft and the supporting cables became handrails. The two 
men went up the short flight of steps, pausing on the top to turn and look at 
their earthly companion. 

‘Would you care to come inside with us?’ they asked. Fearing that he 



From the Benign to the Bristly 


161 


would not see his family again, Villanueva shook his head, turned, then 
ran for his life. Back on the road, he watched as the craft lifted off the 
ground. 

Something glowing white rose slowly into view, hovering for a moment, then 
gaining speed it began a kind of pendulum motion, a backwards and forwards 
arcing movement, like a falling leaf going up instead of down. It attained an 
altitude of several hundred feet by this method; then, glowing brighter, shot 
up vertically with incredible speed. In seconds it was lost from sight. Only a 
faint swishing sound marked its passage. 

When he finally reached his home in Mexico City, Villanueva told no 
one except his wife about the experience. Fortunately, she believed him. 

‘The Key’ 

Desmond Leslie visited Salvador Villanueva in Mexico in November 
1955 and came away with a very good impression of his character. ‘I 
found him quiet, unassuming, [and] well-mannered,’ he reported. ‘He 
gave me every impression of being a trustworthy, reliable human being, 
the kind you would trust to take your jewelry to a bank or to look after 
your children if suddenly called away. I liked him very much, and I 
thoroughly believe his story... All who have investigated him have come 
to the same conclusion. He related and re-enacted the story to his 
examiners without change or contradiction.’ 

Villanueva did not believe his Visitors were from Venus, he told Leslie. 
‘He had the impression from their talk, though they did not name any 
planet, that they had come from somewhere much farther than Venus, 
maybe from worlds beyond our vision entirely.’ 

Desmond Leslie claims to have been given (by George Adamski, I 
believe) what is known as ‘the Key’. ‘By this,’ he explained, ‘I mean that 
every man who has received a true and physical contact with men from 
other worlds has been given a certain “Key” whereby it shall be known 
that he is speaking truly. No man .. . could ever stumble upon this key 
by guess or chance; least of all a simple countryman. Unless Villanueva 
had spoken to a spaceman in truth he could not have known it. Possibly 
I am the only “layman” to hold it. It is the “Key” which all falsely claim¬ 
ing contacts through vain or neurotic reasons fail to give. Villanueva gave 
it without hesitation.’ 4 

A VERY CLOSE ENCOUNTER 

In the spring of 1954, a huge craft was observed at very close quarters 
near Bruyeres, in the department of Vosges, northeastern France. The 
incident occurred one afternoon towards the end of April in a sparsely 
inhabited forest area at Bois-de-Champ. 



162 


Alien Base 


Roger Mougeolle and Gilbert Doridant were engaged in logging when 
suddenly they heard a loud noise ‘like the sound of a train passing over a 
metal bridge’, a precursor sound reported in a number of such cases, fol¬ 
lowed by silence. Then three huge, cigar-shaped objects came into view. 
‘Two passed over in total silence but the third, equally silently, slowly 
descended over the clearing where the two men were,’ reported Joel 
Mesnard, who interviewed Mougeolle. 

Its surface was quite smooth, devoid of any structural appendages or protu¬ 
berances, and its general aspect was metallic and its colour grey. Its size was 
absolutely enormous. Over 200 metres long, Mougeolle thought, and perhaps 
80 or 100 metres wide and equally high, though he thought the height was a 
bit less than the width. The monster came to a halt with its base just a few 
tens of centimetres from the ground. 

Terrified, Doridant fled, and never again entered that part of the 
forest. Mougeolle, however, convinced that this was a conventional air¬ 
ship, stepped forward boldly until he was right underneath it. Then he 
put up his hand and actually touched the craft, which felt smooth and 
cold, like steel. To see what would happen, he struck the craft with the 
flat of his axe (Fig 13) It made a dull sound, ‘such as you get when you 
strike a great piece of steel’, but instantly Mougeolle was hurled a dis¬ 
tance of six metres or so. 



Fig. 13. ‘Just to see what would happen’, Roger Mougeolle bashed the craft with 
his axe, as his partner fled. He was instantly hurled six metres and lay paralysed 
until the craft took off. (Joel Mesnard/ Lumieres Dans La Nuil) 





From the Benign to the Bristly 


163 


‘Lying where he had been thrown, against the foot of a rock, 
Mougeolle found himself unable to move,’ related Mesnard. 'What had 
hurled him was no blast of air or anything like that, but something totally 
unknown to him, something that seemed to act uniformly upon every 
part of his body. And now, as he lay there, he realized that what was keep¬ 
ing him pinned down was the monster itself. ..’ 

The huge craft remained in this position for a few minutes, almost 
blocking out Mougeolle’s vision, then it lifted and disappeared. 
Fortunately, the witness suffered no ill effects from his exceptionally 
close encounter. 3 

AERIAL ENCOUNTERS 

The distinguished British astronomer. Dr H. Percy Wilkins, was on a 
lecture tour of the United States on 11 June 1954 when he caught sight 
of two strange aerial objects from the window at his seat on a Convair air¬ 
liner flying from Charleston, West Virginia, to Atlanta, Georgia. The 



Fig. 14. A sketch by Dr H. Percy Wilkins of the flying saucers he observed on 
11 June 1954. 

... my attention was caught by two brilliant, oval, sharp-edged objects appar¬ 
ently suspended or hovering above the tops of two particularly lofty cumulus 
masses of cloud, the sides of which were shadowed and at an estimated dis¬ 
tance of two miles. These two objects were of a yellow colour like polished 
brass or gold, and, quite apart from their colour, were very much brighter than 
the sunlit clouds on the other side of the aircraft. They looked like metal plates 
reflecting the sunlight, and were in slow motion northwards [see Fig. 14]... 


164 


Alien Base 


Suddenly a third and precisely similar oval object was seen against the shad¬ 
owed side of the cloud, but this object was dull and greyish, presumably 
because it was not in the sunshine. While the two brilliant objects continued 
their slow motion, the third one began to move with accelerated velocity; it 
described a curve, and vanished behind another and nearer cloud mass. The 
whole display was visible for nearly two minutes, but the grey object com¬ 
pleted its rapid motion in less than five seconds after it began to move. 4 

On landing in Atlanta, Dr Wilkins told reporters that he had seen three 
flying saucers, whose diameter he estimated at about 50 feet. 7 ‘One thing is 
certain,’ he wrote, ‘if they are solid objects, capable of moving in any desired 
direction and at any desired speed, then they must have been devised, and 
are operated and controlled, by intelligences superior to man.’ 8 

Less than three weeks later, at midday on 1 July 1954, Griffiss Air 
Force Base in New York State picked up a radar return from a craft 
approaching the base. No aircraft should have been in the area. A 
Lockheed F-94 Starfire all-weather interceptor was scrambled and vec¬ 
tored to the unknown target by the ground control intercept (GCI) con¬ 
troller. The radar intercept operator in the rear seat kept his eyes on the 
‘blip’ on his own radarscope. 

Within minutes of take-off, the pilot observed the UFO visually: a 
shining, disc-shaped object hovering several thousand feet above the 
F-94. Opening the throttle, the pilot headed for the target as the radar 
officer radioed the unknown craft for its identification. Suddenly, the 
jet’s engine cut out. As journalist Frank Edwards dramatically described 
the scene: 

... at that instant the cockpit of the plane became a veritable hell-hole. The 
pilot noted that the instruments showed no fire - but he told fellow airmen 
later that it was like a blast from a blowtorch right in his face. He started to 
report to Base but realized that he did not have time. .. instead, he yelled at 
the radarman to bail out. A few seconds later he felt the thump as the other 
man left the stricken jet. Half blinded and gasping, the pilot blew himself our 
of the jet and got a fleeting glimpse of the UFO as he went out on his back. 
The thing was huge and circular ... 

Both pilot and radar operator parachuted safely, landing near Wales- 
ville, New York. Unfortunately, their jet crashed into an automobile and 
two houses, killing two adults and their two children, and injuring a few 
others. 910 

At variance with these accounts is the Air Force version, which states 
that the incident actually took place on 2 July. There were reports which 
the Air Force received on 1 July of a UFO having the appearance of a bal¬ 
loon. On the following day an F-94C on a routine training mission was 
sent to investigate an unknown aircraft at 10,000 feet (which was identi- 



From the Benign to the Bristly 


16S 


fied) and another unknown aircraft apparently coming in to land at 
Griffiss AFB. At this point, ‘the cockpit temperature increased abruptly 
... the fire warning light was on [and] both crew members ejected suc¬ 
cessfully’. There is no mention of a UFO, as such, in this instance." 

Major Donald Keyhoe claimed that the dazed pilot spoke briefly to a 
reporter who had arrived on the scene, but Air Force officials turned up 
before he could tell the whole story, and further interviews were prohib¬ 
ited. The incident was classified ‘Secret’. Both Keyhoe and Edwards 
remained convinced that the incident occurred as it was described to 
them by their sources." 

A BENIGN ENCOUNTER IN NORWAY 
On 20 August 1954, two well-educated sisters, 24-year-old Edith 
Jacobsen and 32-year-old Asta Solvang, claimed to have met an extra¬ 
ordinary man and his flying machine near their home town of Mosjoen in 
northern Norway. 

It was a sunny afternoon and the women were picking berries. Sud¬ 
denly they saw a man in the distance whom they assumed at first to be 
another berry picker. ‘We walked towards him and wondered who he 
was,’ recounted Edith Jacobsen. 

As we got near him he smiled and stretched out his hand. I, too, smiled and 
held out my hand, but he only brushed my palm with his. Then he began to 
talk, but we didn't understand a word. It didn’t resemble any language I had 
heard [or] studied. The stranger’s language was very soft and melodious. It 
seemed to have few consonants and no gutturals at all. 

When we gathered that the man must be a foreigner from some distant 
country we took a closer look at him. He was of medium height, had pleasant, 
regular features and long hair with a natural wave. He was rather dark. We 
didn’t notice the colour of his eyes, but I believe they were slightly oblique. 
His hands were beautiful and expressive, with fine long fingers; rather like the 
hands I imagined a fine pianist would have. He wore no rings. 

He was clothed in a kind of overall, but as he wore a broad belt it could 
have been trousers and a blouse. The blouse fitted closely at the neck, but was 
otherwise loose. 1 could not see any buttons, zippers or fastenings. We didn’t 
notice how he was shod. 

What impressed the women particularly was the genuine friendliness 
the stranger emanated, giving them a sense of security. When it became 
evident that they did not understand each other, the man produced what 
they ‘took for granted’ to be paper and pencil and drew some circles, 
pointing out over the moor and then at the sisters, then pointing at him¬ 
self and another drawn circle. ‘I had at once the impression that he 
wanted to tell us something about the solar system,’ said Jacobsen, ‘but 
perhaps I was mistaken.’ 



166 


Alien Base 


The man then motioned to the sisters to follow him and turned and 
walked out along the fen. They followed, and not far away saw a curious 
contraption parked on the ground. 

It was grey-blue and looked like two giant pot-lids placed together. It was 
about 10 feet in diameter and about 4 'A feet in height Because the man was 
still so calm and convincingly friendly we were still not afraid, even though 
we thought this a very curious thing to find in the wilds. We approached the 
thing, but he made a sign that we were not to come too close. He then opened 
a kind of hatch on the top of the ‘rim' which encircled the thing, crawled in 
and shut himself in. 

Presently, we heard a feint humming, like the droning of a large bumble¬ 
bee, and the curious vessel rose slowly while rotating on its own axis. Then, 
and only then, did all I had read about flying saucers come to my mind. When 
the saucer reached about 100 feet it hovered for a moment and then started 
rotating very fast. Finally it rose at tremendous speed and disappeared. 

The sisters agreed not to discuss the incident with anyone, but even¬ 
tually Asta told her husband and the story spread around the community. 
A reporter asked to be taken to the site of the landing. No traces were 
found. Subsequently, the women were ridiculed and harassed. 'The 
whole thing is so fantastic that I can readily understand why people who 
have known me all my life refuse to believe me,’ said Edith Jacobsen. 
Finn Norstrom, who interviewed the sisters, found no discrepancies in 
their accounts. 13 Other journalists confirmed that all the people they 
spoke with in the town of Mosjeen found it difficult to believe that the 
sisters would have invented such a story. 14 

It is of course possible that, owing to its remarkable similarity to 
George Adamski’s description of his ‘Venusian’ in Flying Saucers Have 
Landed, the sisters could have invented their story; however, as Gordon 
Creighton pointed out, although many features in their account of the 
pilot are identical with those described by Adamski, ‘when they come to 
describe the UFO it is not Adamski’s [but] a contraption “like two giant 
pot-lids placed together”’. 15 

ANGELIC ALIENS 

It was about 16.45 on 21 October 1954, a beautiful, if cold and frosty day. 
Jessie Roestenburg’s husband Anthony was at work for the Staffordshire 
County Education Department, her two sons were still at school, and she 
was at home at Vicarage Farm Cottage in Ranton, Staffordshire, with her 
little girl and the dog. 

‘I took my little girl out for a walk, as usual,’ Jessie recalled. ‘I had to 
light the fire so I could make the evening meal. (We had no running water 
or electricity and it was hard going.) I started to get washed and changed 
in the outhouse, when I heard this noise - a sort of hiss like when a black- 



From the Benign to the Bristly 


167 


smith puts hot iron into water but much louder ... I thought it was a 
plane crashing.' 

I was worried because the boys hadn’t got home from school as they should 
have done by then. I went out to see what was happening and to my amaze¬ 
ment they were lying flat out on the ground. They shouted to me: ‘Mummy, 
there’s a flying saucer!’ 1 said what any mother would say: ‘Don't be silly!’ But 
they were as white as sheets so I could see there was something wrong. 

Then I found I wasn’t in control of myself. 1 walked up to the water pump 
in the garden and turned round, but it was as though somebody else was mak¬ 
ing me do it. I wanted to look at the boys and ask them if they were all right, 
but I couldn’t. Then I saw, suspended in the air, a massive disc - bright silver 
and shaped like a Mexican hat. In the middle was a tubular light going round 
very slowly. It had a dome, like glass, and inside it were two beings looking 
down at us. They were the most beautiful people I have seen, but they 
weren’t human. 

Their foreheads were large in proportion to the rest of their faces and they 
had long golden hair. I could only see them from the chest upwards, and they 
were wearing what looked like vivid blue polo-neck jumpers and what looked 
like fish bowls over their heads. 

The craft was hovering at a tilted angle. Jessie Roestenburg recalls that 
although the figures looked like women, she felt sure they were men. 
They gazed down at the witnesses with a seemingly stern, though com¬ 
passionate expression. ‘I couldn’t move. I was absolutely paralysed. I 
wasn’t frightened at that stage but 1 was mesmerized. It seemed to last for 
ages but it could only be for a few minutes. I felt all the tension go from 
me and I felt a sense of peace 1 have never felt since.’ 

I asked the boys if they had seen the same thing and they said yes. We ran into 
the field to see if we could still see it and I thought it had gone but one of the 
boys said: ‘Look, there it is.' It circled the cottage and then shot up vertically 
and disappeared. 

By now we were scared to death. We went into the cottage where I locked 
all the doors and hid under the table until my husband came home. 

When Tony Roestenburg arrived home, Jessie told him what had hap¬ 
pened. *1 could see he didn’t believe me. He questioned the boys 
separately and decided to report it to the police. The whole of Ranton had 
never seen so many policemen. We had people from all over the place - 
newspapers, the lot.’ 

Jessie’s health began to deteriorate. ‘I went to see my doctor, who had 
read about what happened,’ she said, ‘but he just thought I was round the 
twist. I insisted on seeing a psychiatrist and he said: “There is nothing 
wrong with your mind but you do need to go to hospital." He took me 
himself and they did a blood count. [It] was so low they couldn’t under¬ 
stand how 1 was still alive. They said they wouldn’t be surprised if I was 



168 


Alien Base 


suffering from radiation sickness. For a while, 1 was in a terrible mess but 
gradually 1 got better.’ 

Having met Jessie Roestenburg on a number of occasions and dis¬ 
cussed her case at length, I am convinced of her honesty. She still retains 
a sense of awe and wonder about the incident. ‘To this day I don’t know 
what they were,’ she told reporter Neil Thomas in 1996. ‘I don’t believe 
they wanted to do us any harm. They are far more intelligent than we are. 
We must have looked a pitiful sight, standing there next to a water pump 
while they were in a space ship.’ 1617 

LONG-HAIRED INTERLOPERS 

In Porto Alegre, Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil, an agricultural engineer and 
his family were taking a drive on 10 November 1954 when they saw a 
landed disc, from which alighted two normal-sized men with long hair and 
dressed in overall-like clothing. They approached the car with their arms 
held above their heads. The engineer’s wife and daughter were so fright¬ 
ened that they insisted on fleeing the scene. As they looked back, they 
watched the men board their craft and take off at a tremendous speed. 18 

One month later, on 9 December, Olmira da Costa c Rosa was culti¬ 
vating his crops at Linha Bela Vista, two and a half miles from Venancio 
Aires - also in Rio Grande do Sul - when he heard something ‘like a 
sewing machine’, as animals in a nearby field panicked. Looking up, he 
saw a strange-looking man. Further away, hovering just above the 
ground, was an object shaped like an explorer’s hat and enveloped in a 
smoky haze. There were two other men, one in the craft, his head and 
shoulders sticking out, the other examining a barbed-wire fence. Costa e 
Rosa dropped his hoe in shock. The stranger nearest him raised his hand, 
smiled and picked up the hoe, which he examined carefully before hand¬ 
ing it back. Then the man bent down, uprooted some plants, joined the 
others and walked back to the craft. 

Costa e Rosa stood as though paralysed, but to assure himself that 
these strangers meant no harm, he approached the craft. Although the 
man who had examined the hoe and the man in the craft made no move 
to stop him, the one who had been studying the fence made a gesture 
indicating that he should halt. He did so. Some of the farmer’s animals 
then approached the strangers, who looked at them with great interest. 
‘With words and gestures the farmer tried to tell them he would be happy 
to make a gift of one of his animals,’ reported investigator Coral 
Lorenzen. ‘The strangers didn’t seem enthused about the offer.’ 
Suddenly the spacemen trooped into their craft, which (as so often) lifted 
off slowly at first then accelerated away at fantastic speed. 

The farmer, who was practically illiterate and knew nothing about 
flying saucers, provided a detailed description of the visitors (whom he 



From the Benign to the Bristly 169 

believed to be simply aviators from another country), as reported by 
Lorenzen: 

They appeared to be of medium height, broad-shouldered, with long blond 
hair which blew in the wind. With their extremely pale skin and slanted eyes 
they were not normal looking by Earth standards. Their clothing consisted of 
light brown coverall-like garments fastened to their shoes. Afterward Costa e 
Rosa said the shoes seemed especially strange because they had no heels. 
When the craft had gone, Costa e Rosa searched the ground under 
which it had hovered, but found nothing. However, a smell ‘like burning 
coal’ permeated the air for some time afterwards. Two days later, Pedro 
Morais, who lived less than a mile from Costa e Rosa, also saw an object 
making a sound like a sewing machine, oscillating as it hovered. Nearby 
could be seen two humanoid figures. Angered by the trespass, he headed 
in their direction. One of the humanoids came running towards him as the 
other gestured that he should come no closer, then uprooted a tobacco 
plant. Morais ignored the warning, but there were no repercussions. The 
beings, who seemed to be enveloped in a kind of yellow-coloured ‘sack’, 
obscuring facial details, returned to their craft and took off. 19 

In commenting on the close similarity between Costa e Rosa’s space¬ 
men and George Adamski’s ‘Venusian’, Gordon Creighton wrote: 
‘Honesty requires that this case, and the other Latin American cases of 
“long-haired” men, be very carefully investigated. It does not seem that 
this has been done.’ 20 

HAIRY DWARFS 

The year 1954 also saw a proliferation of reports of‘hairy dwarfs’ associ¬ 
ated with landed craft. One interesting report from the United States, 
unearthed a few years ago by Jean Sider, was given to the French Catholic 
newspaper La Croix by an anonymous source, believed by the newspaper 
to be reliable. In his statement, the unnamed American technician 
described the incidents—which were alleged to have occurred in the vicin¬ 
ity of a military helicopter base in October of that year - as follows: 

One day, as 1 was just finishing my work, 1 saw in the distance an unknown 
object [which then came closer and landed nearby]. It resembled the classic 
saucer. A human-looking being emerged from it, picked up some pebbles, 
earth and grass, and took a nest from a bush. Then the strange being went back 
into its vehicle and disappeared within a few seconds. The personnel at the 
base had not been able to intervene, because it all happened so quickly ... 

A few days later, a saucer landed in the middle of the airfield. As on the 
previous occasion, its pilot emerged from it and leant over it as if he wanted 
to check it.. . We hastened toward the saucer [and] were a few metres away 
from the stranger when he straightened up, saw us, and immobilized us with 
an unknown fluid [gas?]. Then, after watching us for a moment, he walked 



170 


Alien Base 


around the saucer, climbed into a kind of‘cigar’ which had parked next to the 
saucer, and took off vertically. [Then] we recovered our freedom of move- 

The saucer remained on the ground. We didn’t know what to do, still 
having the image of the fleeing being in mind. It was of a small size, very 
stocky, with an ape-like appearance. Its body or clothes were covered with 
long hair. Of its face, we were able to observe only extremely sharp and bril¬ 
liant-looking eyes. But - the saucer was right there in front of us. What could 
it contain? Our engineers decided to investigate it on the field. 

We noticed right away that the saucer had been closed hermetically, there 
was practically no opening. It had a dome and portholes but no visible engine. 
It rested on three legs which were attached to little ‘skis’. We had to use a 
welding-torch in order to cut out the door, which caused problems, [because] 
the unknown metal, which formed the exterior shell of the saucer, was 
extremely smooth, resistant, and couldn’t be raised either by stamping or 
adjustment. Our chemical engineers analysed a fragment of it: they found a 
very heavy alloy of gold, lead and iron. But... they were incapable of recon¬ 
structing the alloy, considering the proportions analysed. 

The interior of the saucer was upholstered entirely with a sort of fibre, 
resembling rubber. A fairly heavy gas filled two-thirds of the object an arti¬ 
ficial atmosphere? Fuel? Above the portholes were some ‘throttles’, but we 
couldn’t make anything out of them. Also, we couldn’t find any engine. It 
seems that the pilot had been traveling ‘on all fours’ on the floor, we found 
sort of‘suction pads’ where the ‘hands' and ‘knees’ would have been. But in 
each of these we discovered six imprints .. . 

This is what I witnessed with a few of my colleagues . . . The American 
authorities ordered a ‘black out’ on the affair, which hadn’t yet ‘filtered’ out 
to US newspapers... Need it be mentioned that we were profoundly affected 
by everything we had seen, and will never be able to forget it? 21 

The American engineer’s observation of‘suction caps’, which led him 
to believe that the pilot had been travelling ‘on all fours’, as well as the 
description of the hermetically sealed door, provides remarkable corrob¬ 
oration for the 1943 report by Daniel Leger, who claimed that the female 
pilot he encountered boarded her craft via a panel in an apparently seam¬ 
less hull, then assumed a stretched position ‘on all fours’ inside the cabin 
(see Chapter 1). As Jean Sider confirms, Leger had no knowledge at all of 
the American incident. 22 

Venezuela 

The most dramatic encounters with hairy dwarfs in 1954 were reported 
from Venezuela. 

At 02.00 on 28 November, Gustavo Gonzalez and Jose Ponce were 
driving in a panel truck in the suburbs of Caracas when they encountered 
a luminous sphere, eight to ten feet in diameter, which hovered about six 



From the Benign to the Bristly 


171 


feet above the road, blocking their passage. The men got out of their 
truck to investigate and a dwarf-like creature came towards them. With 
the intention of taking it to a nearby police station (!), Gonzalez grabbed 
the dwarf, whereupon he noticed that it was incredibly light (about 35 
pounds), extremely hard, and covered with stiff, bristly hair. It gave 
Gonzalez a push, throwing him for about 15 feet. As two other entities 
emerged from bushes carrying chunks of dirt or rock, and entered the 
sphere, Ponce ran to the police station. Meanwhile, the creature who had 
pushed Gonzalez headed towards him once again, with eyes glowing and 
claws extended. Panicking, Gonzalez took out his knife and stabbed its 
shoulder. The knife glanced off as though it had struck steel. Then 
another hairy dwarf emerged from the sphere and beamed a ray of light 
at Gonzalez from a hand-held tube, blinding him momentarily. Finally, 
the creatures climbed into the sphere and rapidly took off. 

Gonzalez staggered to the police station, where he joined Ponce. The 
police initially thought the two men were drunk, but examination proved 
otherwise. Gonzalez suffered a long red scratch on his side, where the 
creature had clawed him. Both men were given sedatives. 23 

On the night of 10 December, two youths, Lorenzo Flores and Jesus 
Gomez, who had been rabbit hunting near the Trans-Andean Highway 
between Chico and Cerro de las Tres Torres, encountered a bright object 
some distance off the highway which at first they took to be a car. As they 
approached, however, it appeared like two huge washbowls placed one on 
top of the other, hovering a few feet above the ground. The object was 
about nine feet in diameter, with ‘fire’ emitting from the bottom. Flores 
described what followed: 

Then we saw four little men coming out of it. They were approximately three 
feet tall. When they realized we were there the four of them got Jesus and 
tried to drag him toward the thing. I could do nothing but take my shotgun, 
which was Unloaded, and strike at one of them. The gun seemed to have 
struck rock or something harder, as it broke into two pieces. 

We could see no [facial] details, as it was dark, but what we did notice was 
the abundant hair on their bodies and their great strength. 

Gomez, who apparently had become unconscious during the episode, 
was unable to recall much. Neither of the youths saw the object leave, for 
as soon as Gomez regained consciousness they both ran to the highway 
and stopped a car. Seeing their scratches and bruises, and shirts torn to 
shreds, the driver rushed them to the nearest police station. Police in¬ 
vestigators, doctors and psychiatrists found the youths to be ‘sane and 
responsible’. 24 

On 16 December, Jesus Paz and two friends were returning from din¬ 
ing in San Carlos, when Paz asked the driver to stop while he went into 



172 


Alien Base 


the bushes to relieve himself. Suddenly a piercing scream was heard by 
the men in the car. Rushing into the bushes, they found Paz lying uncon¬ 
scious. A short distance away, a small hairy man was running towards a 
flat, shiny object hovering just above the ground. One of the men, Luis 
Mejia, a member of the National Guard, reached for his gun, but realiz¬ 
ing that he had left it at the barracks he picked up a stone and threw it at 
the object - to no avail. The craft took off with a ‘deafening buzzing 
sound’. 

In a state of shock, Paz was rushed to the San Carlos hospital, where 
he was found to have several long, deep scratches on one side and along 
his spine, ‘as if he had been clawed by a wild animal’. 25 

On that same day, President Dwight Eisenhower was quoted as having 
stated at a press conference that a trusted Air Force official had told him 
that the notion that flying saucers came ‘from any outside planet or any 
other place’ was ‘completely inaccurate’. 26 

One of the doctors who had examined Flores and Gomez (described in 
the second report) admitted later that he had actually witnessed the 
incident in the suburbs of Caracas on 28 November. Out on a night call 
at the time, he had been in the same street where Gonzalez and Ponce had 
stopped their truck. He stayed only long enough to see what happened, 
he said, but then left, concerned about undesirable publicity. In an 
official statement prepared for the Venezuelan authorities, the doctor 
confirmed the incident, though he stipulated that his name should not be 
associated with the story. Following the statement, the doctor was invited 
to Washington, DC, to discuss the matter with ‘American authorities’. 27 
President Eisenhower’s statement notwithstanding, some officials took 
the subject seriously. 

THE MICHELIN MEN 

Returning from the cinema one evening in May 1955 in Dinan, Cdtes- 
du-Nord, France, Monsieur Droguet was about to lock the door leading 
to one of the courtyards of the girls’ college, where he lived on the 
premises, when he was temporarily blinded by a bluish-green beam of 
light. He became extremely frightened; his knees knocked and his hair 
literally stood up. 

Droguet discerned an enormous circular object, hanging motionless at 
a height of about 1.5 metres above the courtyard. He could hear no 
sound, though he was aware of a constant ‘vibration’. The witness then 
became aware of two beings dose to the machine, who apparently had not 
noticed him (see Fig. 15). Growing even more frightened, Droguet tried 
to escape, but found himsdf glued to the spot. The beings were dressed 
in a type of metallic one-piece grey suit, which somewhat resembled the 
suit worn by the little man in the famous Michelin tyre advertisement. 



From the Benign to the Bristly 


173 


The witness was unable to see the beings’ heads, enclosed as they were in 
bulky helmets. Their hands were covered with gloves of a kind. On the 
abdomen, each being had a black box with many leads coming out of it. 
One of the beings was picking up something from the ground - probably 
pebbles - while the other one inspected the surroundings. Droguet had 
the feeling that someone was watching him from inside the machine. 

The two beings walked towards their craft, on the underside of which 
was a dark hole with a metallic ladder hanging down. No more than 1.6 
metres in height, the beings walked with obvious difficulty, ‘like divers 
with their leaden soles’ — an observation corroborated in other cases. As 
investigator J. Cresson continues in his report on the case: 

Just as they were entering the craft, M. Droguet distinctly heard a metallic 
sound emanating from their feet as they trod. When they had entered the 
craft, the ladder was drawn in and there was a sound like the intake of air. He 
felt a displacement of the air, a sensation of suction. The machine, still lit up, 
rose vertically to above treetop height, without any sound. He was now able 



to see the black hole in the centre of the underpart of the craft, and to per¬ 
ceive that [it] was circular. The craft was rotating very rapidly, but the black 
hole did not seem to be moving. When the machine had reached treetop 
height, its lights went out. 

On recovering mobility, the witness ran to his quarters. He told only 
his wife and a few trusted friends what had happened. On learning about 
the encounter, the headmistress of the girls’ college advised M. Droguet 




174 


Alien Base 


not to let the affair become known, to avoid a ‘scandal’. 28 

There were further reports of the 'Michclin men’ in France in 1954. 
Had these been reported exclusively in France, there might be reason to 
suspect a publicity stunt, but the Michelin men have been observed in 
other countries - and well beyond 1954. 

THE KELLY SPACE CREATURES 

It was a hot night on 21 August 1955. Shortly after 23.00, Cecil ‘Lucky’ 
Sutton and members of his family and other witnesses rushed in two cars 
to the police station at Hopkinsville, Kentucky, where he told Police 
Chief Russell Greenwell that they had just escaped from an invasion by 
at least one creature which had landed in a spaceship at the Sutton home 
near Kelly, seven miles away. ‘For God’s sake, chief, get us some help,’ 
pleaded Sutton, ‘we’ve been fighting ’em for four hours.’ 

According to the family, a visitor to the Sutton farm, Billy Ray Taylor, 
had been getting water from the well in the back yard earlier that evening 
when he noticed a coloured light streak across the sky and descend into 
the trees along a ravine about a quarter of a mile away. Shortly after¬ 
wards, Sutton’s mother, Glennie Lankford, saw a creature with very long 
arms and talon hands raised in the air approaching the back of the house. 
Sutton and Taylor armed themselves with a .22 rifle and a 20-gauge shot¬ 
gun and fired a shot at one of the creatures, which flipped backwards then 
seemed to rise up and ‘float’ into the underbrush. 

The siege continued throughout the night, as the ‘luminous’ creatures 
repeatedly approached the house (with arms raised) and were driven back 
by gunfire, a total of about 50 rounds expended. When one creature was 
shot at extremely close range, the pellets sounded as if they had hit a 
metal bucket. At one stage, Taylor was tapped on the head by the talon 
of one of the creatures which was perched on the roof of the house. 

The creatures appeared to be made of a silvery metal, and were 
described as three and a half feet tall, with oversized heads and large, 
floppy, pointed ears. Their eyes were large, glowing yellow, and set 
halfway between the front and side of the head. They had wide, thin 
mouths (which never opened). Their legs were spindly and inflexible; in 
fact, the creatures seemed to propel themselves more with their arms. 

Within minutes of Sutton’s plea for help, local police, state police, a 
deputy sheriff, newspaper staff, an Army reservist from nearby Fort 
Campbell, and others arrived on the scene. There was little physical 
evidence at the site, beyond empty shotgun cartridges, a hole in the 
screen through which one of the shots had been fired, and a strange lumi¬ 
nous patch on the ground near the fence from which one of the creatures 
fell after it was shot. After the police and all the others had left the house, 
not long after 02.00, there were further sporadic sightings of the weird 



From the Benign to the Bristly 


175 


creatures until about 04.45. 

In all, seven adults and three children - all of whom were found cred¬ 
ible by the police and most of the other investigators - witnessed these 
incredible events. The case is listed as ‘Unidentified’ in the Air Force’s 
Project Blue Book files. 2930 

In a chapter about unidentified flying objects in a text of the United 
States Air Force Academy’s Department of Physics, Introductory Space 
Science , author Major Donald Carpenter points out some of the dangers 
faced by aliens contacting or trying to establish contact with human 
beings: 

Let me point out that in very ancient times, possible extraterrestrials may have 
been treated as Gods, but in the last two thousand years the evidence is that 
any possible aliens have been ripped apart by mobs, shot and shot at, physi¬ 
cally assaulted (in South America there is a well-documented case), and in 
general treated with fear and aggression. In Ireland about 1000 ad, supposed 
airships were treated as ‘demon-ships'. In Lyons, France, ‘admitted' space 
travellers were killed. More recently, on 24 July 1957, Russian anti-aircraft 
batteries on the [Kirile] Islands opened fire on UFOs. Although all Soviet 
anti-aircraft batteries on the Islands were in action, no hits were made. The 
UFOs were luminous and moved very fast. We too have fired on UFOs . . . 

Major Carpenter confirms that a US Air Force F-86 fighter also tried 
to shoot down a flying saucer. 31 The Kelly incident, in particular, he 
wrote, supported the contention that ‘humans are dangerous’. ‘At no 
time in the story did the supposed aliens shoot back,’ he remarked, 
‘although one is left with the impression that the described creatures 
were having fun scaring humans .. .’ 3Z 


NOTES 

1 Good, Timothy, Beyond Top Secret: The Worldwide UFO Security Threat, 
Sidgwick & Jackson, London, 1996, p. 337. 

2 Ibid., p.339. 

3 Gribble, Bob, ‘Looking Back’, MUFON UFO Journal, no. 242, June 1988, 

p. 20. 

4 Leslie, Desmond, ‘Mexican Taxi Driver Meets Saucer Crewl’, Flying 
Saucer Review , vol. 2, no. 2, March-April 1956, pp. 8-11. 

5 Mesnard, Joel, ‘The “Steel Airship” at Bois-de-Champ’, Lumiires Dans La 
Nuit, nos. 275/6, May-June 1987, translated by Gordon Creighton and pub¬ 
lished in Flying Saucer Review, vol. 32, no. 5, November 1987, pp. 16-17. 

6 Wilkins, H. Percy, Ph.D., Mysteries of Time and Space, Frederick Muller, 
London, 1955, pp. 40-1. 




176 


Alien Base 


7 Edwards, Frank, Flying Saucers - Serious Business, Lyle Stuart, New York, 
1966, p. 47. 

8 Wilkins, op. cit., p. 44. 

9 Edwards, op. cit., pp. 56-7. 

10 Keyhoe, Maj. Donald E., Aliens from Space: The Real Story of Unidentified 
Flying Objects, Panther, St Albans, Herts., 1975, p, 35, 

11 Thayer, Gordon D., ‘Optical and Radar Analyses of Field Cases', Scientific 
Study of Unidentified Flying Objects, ed. Dr Edward U. Condon, Bantam, 
New York, 1969, p. 161. 

12 Keyhoe, op. cit., p.35. 

13 ‘Spaceman Lands in Norway?’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 1, no. 4, 
September-October 1955, pp. 6-7, reprinted from the Norwegian magazine 
NA (‘Now’). 

14 Lidstrem, Anton, ‘UFO Report from Norway: A Norwegian Close 
Encounter of the Third Kind: Mosjoen 1954', Flying Saucer Review, vol. 34, 
no. 2, March-April 1989, pp. 3-4. 

15 Creighton, Gordon, comment in Lidstrem, op. cit., p. 7. 

16 Thomas, Neil, ‘Close encounter with outer space: Jessica Roestenburg, face 
to face with aliens’, Staffordshire Newsletter, Stafford, 30 August 1996. 

17 Personal communications with the author. 

18 Lorenzen, Coral E., The Great Flying Saucer Hoax: The UFO Facts and 
Their Interpretation, William-Frederick, New York, 1962, p. 42. 

19 Ibid., pp. 46-8. 

20 Creighton, Gordon, ‘The Humanoids in Latin America', in Charles Bowen 
(ed.), The Humanoids, Neville Spearman, London, 1969, p. 95. 

21 Le Rouergue Republicain, 7/8 November 1954, p. 4. 

22 Sider.Jean, Ultra Top-Secret: Cesovnisquifontpeur, Axis Mundi, 20220 Ile- 
Rausse, France, 1990. 

23 Lorenzen, op. cit., pp. 52-4. 

24 Ibid., pp. 51-2. 

25 Ibid., pp. 50-2. 

26 New York Times, 16 December 1954, pp. 1,24,26 

27 Lorenzen, op. cit., pp. 53-4. 

28 Cresson, J., ‘Spectacular Landing at Dinan’, Lumieres Dans La Nuit, no. 
106, June 1970, translated by Gordon Creighton and published in Flying 
Saucer Review Case Histories, supplement no. 1, October 1970, pp. 13-14. 

29 Brown, Jennifer P., ‘World won't let community forget Kelly space crea¬ 
tures’, Kentucky New Era, Hopkinsville, Kentucky, 30 October 1995. 

30 Clark, Jerome, The UFO Encyclopedia, vol. II, Omnigraphics, Penebscot 
Building, Detroit, Michigan 48226, 1992, pp. 214-15. 

31 See Good, op. cit., pp. 336-7. Original report cited by Capt. Edward J. 
Ruppelt in The Report on Unidentified Flying Objects, Doubleday, New York, 
1956, pp. 2-5. 

32 Carpenter, Maj. Donald J., ‘Unidentified Flying Objects’, Introductory 
Space Science, vol. II, Department of Physics, United States Air Force 
Academy, 1968, pp. 462-3. 




Chapter 9 


Alien Fantasia? 


There, sitting on a rock by the brook, was the most exquisite woman my young 
eyes had ever beheld! The warm sunlight caught the highlights of her long 
golden hair as it cascaded around her face and shoulders. The curves of her 
lovely body were delicately contoured - revealed through the translucent 
material of clothing which reminded me of the habit of skiers . . . She seemed 
to radiate and glow as she sat on the rock, and I wondered if it were due to the 
unusual quality of the material she wore, which had a shimmering, shiny 
texture not unlike but far surpassing the sheen of nylon. The clothing had no 
buttons, fasteners or seams I could discern. She wore no make-up; which would 
have been unnecessary to the fragile transparency of her Camellia-like skin ...' 

Thus wrote Howard Menger, describing his first claimed encounter 
with an extraterrestrial, in High Bridge, New Jersey, in 1932, when he 
was but 10 years old. Menger, who rose to prominence as a charismatic 
contactee in the late 1950s, has been widely dismissed as a charlatan who 
simply jumped on the bandwagon in the wake of publicity following 
George Adamski’s stories. For me, this is too dismissive a judgement. As 
with Adamski, I am unable to reject arbitrarily all of Menger’s claimed 
experiences, though I believe some of them to be delusional. 

The lovely lady explained to Menger that she had ‘come a long way 1 to 
see him, because she and her people had been observing him, and that she 
had known him for a ‘long, long time’. ‘We are contacting our own,’ she 
added cryptically, implying perhaps that Menger had been linked with 
her people in the past. She impressed on the pubescent youngster that 
though he would not understand much of what she told him, he would 
begin to do so later in his life. 

Menger had no idea who she was or where she came from: he knew 
nothing about extraterrestrials, even though already he had had several 
sightings of peculiar flying discs, including one that landed briefly, 
mostly in the company of his brother. In any event, no spacecraft could 
be seen nearby. After giving further information to Menger about his 
future role in life, to include meetings with others of her people, the lady 
asked the boy to leave first. He simply walked slowly away from the 
scene, pausing to look back at her as she sat smiling on the rock. 2 



178 


Alien Base 


FURTHER EARLY ENCOUNTERS 

Howard Mengcr’s second self-reported encounter with an extra¬ 
terrestrial being occurred in 1942, while he was serving in the US Army 
in an armour division near El Paso, Texas. He was wandering through 
the nearby Mexican town of Ciudad Juarez one night when a taxi pulled 
over to the kerb and the driver pointed to a man sitting in the back seat. 

The man had long blond hair which hung over his shoulders, and 
suntanned skin. Taller and heavier than the average Mexican, he spoke 
in English with a slight Mexican accent, inviting Menger to get inside the 
cab with him as he needed to talk to him. Menger declined, but later 
wondered if he had made a mistake. Could this man have been one of the 
‘others’ referred to by the lady on the rock? 

Some time later, while posted in military service at Camp Cook, 
California, Menger was greeted by a uniformed man who initially 
addressed him telepathically, then verbally, confirming that he knew 
about both the earlier encounters with his people. In appearance, the man 
was rather unusual, said Menger: 

He was a fine looking man. Although there was something definitely unusual 
about him, he could have passed - and did - for an ordinary GI. The singularity 
of the man probably was not because of the finely chiseled features and the 
luminous, almost liquid quality of his eyes, but in the communication I felt. I 
could sense that the man was kind, wise, emotionally and spiritually developed 
beyond anyone I had ever met. Although a kind of reserve he wore as if a part 
of him set him apart from an ordinary person, I somehow accepted with no 
surprise the emergence of an underplayed, yet natural sense of humor ... 

In referring to the Juarez contact with one of his people, the spaceman 
began by saying that he fully understood Menger’s reluctance to get 
inside the cab with such a man (‘We told him he should cut his hair’!). He 
also appreciated the fact that Army regulations encouraged caution in 
such areas and that Juarez was hardly the best place for an interplanetary 
meeting. 

The stranger went on to explain that his people had established contact 
with humans in Mexico many centuries earlier. 

Long before the time of the Conquistadorcs, we made contact with the 
Aztecs. We helped these people in many ways, and it is too bad the 
conquerors came in war instead of good will and friendship; for there were 
many things the Aztecs could have taught them. Instead, they withheld these 
secrets, and these perished with the civilization. 

Some of these secrets supposedly related to the use of sound and light 
to produce power and run machinery. A number of the space people 
came from a planet (which he did not name) to contact ‘remnants of his 
own people still living on Earth, descendants of an ancient race which 



Alien Fantasia? 


179 


originally came here from his own planet’. 

The spaceman told Menger that his Army unit would soon be moved 
to Hawaii, and that he would be put on detached service with special 
duties which would give him more free time for ‘certain tasks’ he was to 
perform, and where he would have yet another contact. These events, as 
it transpired, came to pass. 3 

In Hawaii, Menger became a battalion topographical draughtsman. 
Later, he told me, he was transferred by regimental headquarters and put 
on detached service working with Naval Intelligence and his Army 
battalion on various top-secret inventions. 4 On ‘impulse’ one evening, he 
borrowed a jeep and headed for a cavern area several miles away from the 
battalion headquarters, where he encountered yet another gorgeous girl 
from elsewhere. 

She was dressed in a sort of flowing outfit of pastel shades. Under a kind of 
flowing tunic, translucent and pinkish, she wore loosely fitted pajama-type 
pantaloons. She stood about five feet six inches, with the dark, wavy hair 
falling over her shoulders and the tunic floating gracefully around the shapely 
contour of her body ... this girl, too, exuded the same expression of spiritual 
love and deep understanding. Standing in her presence I was filled with awe 
and humility, but not without a strong physical attraction one finds 
impossible to allay when in the presence of these women. 

Menger emphasized that the space people he claims to have met, 
though far superior to us in terms of physical, mental and spiritual 
abilities, were still much like us. At first he found it daunting that these 
visitors were able to read his every thought, but ‘one suddenly realizes he 
cannot hide anything, and becomes completely honest, both with himself 
and the visitors’. During the lengthy discourse, the ‘Martian’ space- 
woman foretold, correctly, that Menger would be posted in early April 
1945 to Okinawa, where he served with the 713th Tank Battalion. 5 

Menger had his first close encounter with the horrors of war when 
shrapnel from an exploding shell entered his eye, causing infection and 
temporary blindness. During his stay in hospital, he relates that one of 
the Army nurses who looked after him, whom he believes may have been 
from somewhere else, assured him that his sight would be restored. She 
also predicted correctly another contact near the time of his release from 
hospital. 

Two weeks after his release, Menger claims he was nearly bayoneted 
by three Japanese soldiers, but managed to overpower them. During the 
skirmish, he was filled with a strong impression that he should not kill the 
soldiers - an impression he attributed to the mental influence of his space 
contacts. 

Menger alleges that the following night he had yet another contact, in 
the northern part of Okinawa, with a very tall man dressed in Army 



180 


Alien Base 


khaki. Eventually, the man claimed that he came from Venus. One of his 
predictions, according to Menger, was that the Japanese would soon 
surrender, ‘for they are about to be blasted into submission by a power 
which will shock the world’. A few weeks later came the atomic bombing 
of Hiroshima and Nagasaki. 6 

After the war, Menger says he had his first encounter with a landed 
spaceship and its crew. In June 1946 he was visiting his parents in High 
Bridge, New Jersey, when a craft, similar to Adamski’s famous ‘scout’, 
landed. Two men, dressed in blue-grey ski-type uniforms and with long 
blond hair, stepped out of the craft through an opening on the flange, 
followed by the same girl Menger had encountered in 1932. ‘This lovely 
creature had not changed at all,’ said Menger. Although looking only 
about 25, she claimed to be ‘more than 500 years old’! (In later contacts, 
the space people generally were much ‘younger’, e.g., 79 Earth years.) 
During the ensuing conversation, Menger was told that he would have 
continuing contacts which would ‘further instruct and condition’ him. 7 

In late 1947, two supposed space people met Menger and showed him 
to a secluded farm area, one of several sites to be used for future landings 
and contacts, where no one could be harmed by ‘the electromagnetic 
force which emanates from our craft’. Menger would be advised of these 
appointments by telephone. 8 

ALIEN LIAISON 

Howard Menger’s incredible experiences continued into the 1950s, as he 
became increasingly involved in helping the space people establish 
themselves on our planet. Such tasks were not without their moments of 
humour, Menger recalled: 

Often 1 purchased clothing and took it to the points of contact. Visitors just 
arriving from other planets had to be attired in terrestrial clothing so they 
could pass unnoticed among people ... 1 remember one time when I was 
asked to purchase several complete outfits of female clothing. Feeling it 
would be embarrassing and somewhat difficult to explain why I was buying 
so many outfits, I purchased them in separate shops. 

I bought what I thought was the appropriate size and showed up at the 
point of contact. The women went into the next room from which I soon 
heard a series of giggles and groans. Finally the door opened and the bras 
were flung out. They apologized, saying they just could not wear them, and 
they never had .. - They [also had] difficulties with high heels. They teetered 
and wobbled and suffered, but took it in good humor. They realized they 
would have to learn how to wear them, though they often complained, ‘Why 
can’t your women wear sensible shoes!’ 

On several occasions, Menger says he acted as barber for some of the 
new male arrivals. ‘I don’t know if they save their hair or not,' he 



Alien Fantasia? 


181 


remarked, ‘however, all evidence of the meetings was always carefully 
gathered up by the space people before they departed.’ Some of the men 
had unusually fair skin, without hair on their arms or faces, and 
apparently they had no need to shave. ‘After three months on Earth, 
however, they became hairy and grew beards.’ 

Some of the visitors requested dark glasses; some specifically of red 
glass, though the reason for this was not given. 

‘Thus I had the opportunity to meet people from other planets in all 
stages of progress and development,’ claimed Menger, ‘from those who 
spoke no word of our language to those who spoke it fluently; scientists 
and technicians to helpers and assistants. I briefed them on our customs, 
slang and habits. Although they utilized instruments to learn a language 
quickly, the machines couldn’t always cope with colloquialisms.’ 

Although acting as one of the space people’s liaison men, Menger says 
that he was never asked to obtain identification papers, nor to seek jobs 
for them. 9 

FOOD 

Occasionally, Menger was asked to bring food for the space people. 

They asked mainly for frozen fruit juices, canned fruit and vegetables, whole 
wheat bread, wheat germ and the like. They refused to drink milk, avoided 
fresh oranges, lemons and grapefruit. They preferred tree-ripened fruit when 
1 could find it... 1 remember one time I bought five bushels of tree-ripened 
apples from a local orchard. They tested the apples and found the mineral 
and vitamin content much lower than similar fruits of their planets. This was 
due, they said, to our poor soil. They explained that chemical fertilizers were 
not the correct answer to the problem ... because they did not replenish the 
organic materials our soil sadly lacks. 

While chemical fertilizers have widely been regarded as unhealthy for 
many years, it should be pointed out that this was not the prevalent view 
in 1959, when the above information was published in Menger’s first 
book, From Outer Space to You. He continued: 

Most of the time they brought their own food, in a dried, preserved state. 1 
sampled some of it and while it was tasty, it was hard and dry. 1 tasted other 
food which was delicious. They had put the dry foods through some sort of 
processing which returned the moisture and at the same time expanded it to 
its natural size and state. I ate one of their tubers which was far superior in 
protein and mineral content than any vegetable we now have. We could grow 
the same here, they said, if our soil were healthy ...'° 

AN OBSERVATION DISC 

During a contact at one of the landing sites in April 1956, Menger claims 



182 


Alien Base 


to have been shown an ‘observation disc’ at close quarters, similar to 
those reported by George Adamski. The object seemed to be lying on the 
ground. ‘It appeared to be a circular, translucent object about a foot thick 
and three or four feet in diameter,’ he reported. ‘It was pulsating 
different warm colors. As we approached it, the colors changed from 
white to blue and back to white with a tinge of yellow.’ 

According to Monger's contact man, the disc was controlled remotely 
from a nearby spaceship, and was capable of recording all emotions, 
thoughts and intentions. ‘Don’t worry, it’s white,’ said the spaceman. 
‘When it changed to white I knew you were all right’, adding that the 
same colours were being displayed on an instrument panel in the ship and 
would be recorded permanently. 11 

PHOTOGRAPHIC ATTEMPTS 

During several contacts, Menger was able to take a number of 
photographs and films of the spacecraft and on a couple of occasions their 
occupants; alas, only in silhouette, owing to the darkness (see plates). At 
00.45 on 2 August 1956, for instance, he took Polaroid photos of one of 
the craft as it came in for a landing. 

I snapped away, hardly able to wait for even a minute while the pictures 
developed, but in the darkness could not see just how 1 was doing. 

1 noticed [that] one of the three ball-like objects under the craft became 
distorted and looked like rubber as it seemed to stretch and grasp the ground. 
1 could see the other two balls through the translucent flange. I wondered 
how they could make metal appear translucent, and also become plastic, 
certainly alien to our earthly physics .. . 

An opening appeared and a man stepped out. He stood tall and straight, 
his long, blond hair blowing in the soft warm summer breeze. I could see the 
beautiful structure of his body; his broad shoulders, slim waist, and long, 
straight legs. He approached and when he was about 50 feet away I snapped 
his picture. He . . . was silhouetted against the glowing craft, a dramatic pose 
which I hoped would turn out better than my previous picture. But in the 
picture the craft seemed distorted and looked as if a gaseous, swirling haze 
encircled it [see plates]. 

The spaceman explained that the pictures had come out slightly dis¬ 
torted ‘due to the electromagnetic flux around the craft’, 12 an effect which 
is seen clearly in the frames from the 8mm movie film taken by George 
Adamski in Silver Spring, Maryland, in 1965. 

INSIDE THE SPACECRAFT 

The following evening, Menger was taken on board one of the spacecraft 
for the first time; a short hop from one of the landing sites to another. Just 



Alien Fantasia? 


183 


before entering the craft, one of the spacemen pointed an instrument at 
Menger and a bluish beam of light struck his head, producing a rather 
pleasant tingling sensation. ‘We projected the beam on you to condition 
and process your body quickly so you could enter the craft,’ Menger was 
told. ‘What actually happened was that the beam changed your body 
frequency to equal that of the craft. Thus you felt entirely comfortable 
inside the craft and suffered no ill effects.’ 13 

In the small hours of 5 August 1956, Menger says, he was taken for a 
longer ride. 

We stepped into a large circular room. In the center of it was an ample-sized 
round table made of translucent material. Under the table-top pulsating 
lights of many colors moved. The dowel-shaped stem supporting the table 
was set in what appeared to be a huge magnifying glass, itself set into the 
floor. Approximately one third of the circular room was devoted to 
instrument panels containing many colored lights blinking on and off. In 
front of the control board was a frame containing what I guessed was some 
kind of viewing screen. 

One of the spacemen waved his hand over a section of the tableand two 
chairs came out of the floor. Menger and his guide sat down, and on the 
screen appeared a scene on Earth. After take-off, the magnifying lens on 
the floor zoomed in to reveal another terrestrial scene, with two people - 
whom Menger knew - driving along a highway. ‘The image appeared as 
if in broad daylight,’ said Menger. ‘I could see everything clearly . - . 
[and] I could hear the two voices as if the people were in the ship with 
us.. . ,1+ 

In the second week of August 1956, in the Blue Mountains area of 
Pennsylvania, Menger claims that, together with two other people he 
knew (not named), he was taken into space aboard another craft and 
shown the Moon, as well as large meteorites, through a viewing screen. 
Like Adamski, Menger reported seeing colours (blues and greens) in a 
crater on the Moon. But his description of what Earth looked like is 
interesting, in that it conforms to what our planet does actually look like 
in photographs taken years later by the astronauts: ‘At one time we 
caught sight of Earth in the distance, glowing bluish-white with tinges of 
red, floating like a tennis ball in an inky black pool...’ 

Menger took five photographs of Earth and the Moon through a 
porthole, of which three came out. Unfortunately, as he himself admits, 
these particular photographs are blurred and do not furnish satisfactory 
evidence. 15 

A TRIP TO THE MOON? 

In September 1956, also in the company of Earth people (again, not 



184 


Alien Base 


named), Menger says he was taken for a trip to the Moon. This trip, it was 
pointed out by the extraterrestrial hosts, would be longer than the others, 
and would require ‘processing’ the humans' bodies. ‘Each atom of your 
physical body will undergo a processing which will change its polarity, 
frequency and vibration, to adjust your body from its balance to the 
earth’s attractive inertial mass to that of the moon’s,’ the hosts explained. 
‘This will require approximately a week and one half, Earth time.’ 

Modern Conveniences 

Menger and the others were led to their sleeping quarters on the craft, 
consisting of three bunk-beds per compartment. ‘The bed did not feel 
overly soft,’ Menger reported, ‘instead it seemed to give just the correct 
extent to support the contour of the body. I laid my head on a flat pad of 
soft material, [and] pulled the single warm (but extremely light) coverlet 
over myself.’ 

In the morning, the guests showered in a compartment containing 
three or four cubicles, partitioned by translucent walls. ‘When I stepped 
inside one of the cubicles the door dosed behind me and lights went on 
automatically,’ Menger reported. ‘Three shower heads, one above me 
and two at waist level, could be operated separately or all together.’ 

I pushed a button and a flow of water, apparently mixed with warm air for it 
was quite bubbly, fell over my body. I had never had a shower so invigorating. 
I looked around for soap, but there was none. Seeing another button I had not 
previously pushed, I put my finger on it and a stream of colorless solution 
came from the shower heads and completely lathered my body; at the same 
time the water was turned off. I pushed the ‘soap’ button, then the ‘water’ 
button, alternately, enjoying the novelty like a small boy would have done. 

The lavatory bowl reportedly looked ‘very much like one on Earth, 
except that the bowl was lower to the floor and was made of a hard white 
translucent material, not a ceramic’. 

In a mirror above a kind of basin, Menger was surprised to notice that 
he did not need to shave, which was just as well, since he had not brought 
a razor with him. And - interestingly - throughout the estimated 10-day 
trip, he said, the guests found it unnecessary to shave. 

Food was served in the main compartment of the spacecraft. 

Our instructor opened a compartment in the wall and withdrew some items of 
processed food, which he put into a deep well, or pot, set into a sink-like unit. 
He pushed a button and the pot filled with liquid. He allowed the food to steep 
in the liquid for about five minutes, then he drained the liquid from the pot. 
He pushed another button and almost instantly the appearance of the food 
changed and steam rose from it. It had been cooked in litde more than a second! 

. . He removed the food from the pot by means of a large, deep strainer and 



Alien Fantasia? 


185 


transferred it to plastic-like plates which he said were disposable... 

The food supposedly consisted of vegetables such as potatoes with ‘a 
meaty, nut-like flavor’, cabbage, carrots, parsley (‘much larger than our 
variety’), ‘green mineral salt’ for seasoning, ‘very large wheat kernels’, nuts 
of various kinds, served in slices, and a fruit about six inches in diameter, 
orange-red in colour, that tasted like a combination of peach and plum. 

‘I am not certain how long we spent,’ Menger reported, ‘but, 
estimating by my watch, I believed it to be about ten days. I have often 
thought that time might have been different [on board], possibly because 
my beard didn’t seem to grow; but that could have been a result of our 
conditioning - however, all our other bodily functions seemed to 
progress normally.’ 16 

The Lunar Excursion 

On arrival at the Moon, Menger began to take more photos, with the aid 
of some coloured filters given him by his hosts. These particular Polaroid 
pictures - showing a domed structure rising out of hilly terrain and a 
saucer hovering above-are interesting, though not unequivocal because 
they might have been fabricated. 

After the spacecraft landed at a dome-shaped building, about 150 feet 
wide and 50 feet high, the guests were taken, in different groups, for a 
guided tour of the Moon, in a ‘long train-like vehicle with ten or fifteen 
coaches with plastic domes over them’ which glided noiselessly about a 
foot above a ‘copper highway’. Mcnger’s description of his alleged lunar 
visit understandably provoked as much ridicule as that heaped on 
Adamski’s story. 

We passed mountains, went through valleys, visited underground instal¬ 
lations . .. Huge cliffs and mountains made our own look like ant hills. One 
particular desert locale brought to mind ‘The Valley of Fire’ in Nevada. 
There we stopped long enough for our guide to open the door and permit us 
to stick our heads out for a brief moment, which was all one could take, for it 
was terribly hot outside - like a blast furnace. I was certain no one could have 
lived outside very long... 

Finally we came to another large dome-shaped building, where we halted 
and our guide told us we could get out on the moon's surface where we could 
breathe the air with little or no difficulty ... My first impression was that I 
was in the desert. The air was warm and dry. I could see little wind funnels 
forming on the ground, drawing up dust particles like tiny whirlwinds. I 
looked up at the sky. It was a yellowish color. When looking I had the queer 
impression that if I walked some distance I would fall off, since the horizon 
seemed foreshortened . . . The ground beneath our feet was like yellowish- 
white powdery sand, with stones and boulders and some minute plant life 
showing here and there as we looked around us. 



186 


Alien Base 


In addition to the group of‘learned’ Earth people he travelled with in 
the spacecraft, Menger professes to have spotted ‘hundreds of Russians, 
Japanese, Germans and other people from other nations’ who also were 
being taken on a guided tour of the Moon. 17 This seems absurd, because, 
if true, surely by now at least one other tourist would have come out and 
spoken about his or her experiences. 

WITNESS TESTIMONY 

Howard Menger’s claimed liaison with the space people - and there were 
many more contacts - continued until the late 1950s. A month after his 
assumed visit to the Moon, Menger met Marla (Connie) Baxter, whom 
he married after divorcing Rose, his wife of 17 years, in 1958. Connie 
helped Howard run his sign-painting shop in Somerville, New Jersey, 
and also became deeply involved in his less down-to-earth pursuits. In 
company with many people in Menger’s study group, she had some 
extraordinary experiences which tend to support some of her husband’s 
claims, and which are now published, together with a fully updated 
version of the original book, entitled The High Bridge Incident . 18 

Several individuals claiming to have witnessed some of Mengcr’s 
contacts came forward and spoke on The Long John Party Line, hosted by 
‘Long’John Nebel on radio station WOR, New York City. One of these 
witnesses was Menger’s father. Here follows part of that interview: 

NEBEL: Would you say these were normal-sized people? 

MENGER Sr.: Oh, no. I would say one was about six-feet-two or three, 
and the other was about six feet. 

NEBEL: Were you close enough to observe their features? 

MENGER Sr.: No, that I wasn’t. 

NEBEL: Did you notice what they wore? 

MENGER Sr.: To a certain extent, yes. As far as I could see, they wore 
something similar to ski-suits, tight at the wrists and ankles ... It was a dark 
night. . . but these people seemed to have a glow to them. That is how we 
discovered they were coming toward us —by the glow. When these people left 
us, the grass there (and I know positively because I had cut some of it) was 
three feet high. And they went through that grass like it was a nice concrete 
walk, with no exertion at all. .. 

NEBEL: You have seen the ships, too, haven’t you? 

MENGER Sr.: Oh, yes, I have seen them in the air and in the daytime I 
saw them, and at first I was very sceptical. 19 

Witnesses were not restricted to Menger’s family. ‘I had many wit¬ 
nesses - sane witnesses,’ Howard told me when I interviewed him in 
1978. 

One was a doctor’s wife, one was a physicist at Princeton University, and they 



Alien Fantasia? 


187 


all saw it. They all said the same - which is unusual - on radio, to back me 
up. I had photos and movies. In other words, in my case, there was definitely 
proof that we were being visited, not necessarily by aliens from another 
planet, but people who were more advanced than we were in technology, 
spirituality, and general human engineering, and that all this evidence would 
be admissible in a court of law .. - M 

The physicist referred to was ‘Dr Tom Richards’, at the time a 
graduate student at Princeton (and whose real name is Richard Berry, 
Menger told me). In September of that year, with the permission of the 
space people, he and others were invited by Menger to witness one of his 
contacts. ‘The visitors landed about a quarter of a mile to the rear of the 
house in a secluded wooded area,’ wrote Menger. According to 
investigator Peter Jordan, Richards first sighted two disc-shaped objects, 
about six feet in diameter, which pulsated irregularly and hovered 
silently only 20 feet in front of him, radiating a variety of bright colours. 
These were also observed for nearly twenty minutes by Menger and his 
wife, Rose, and a young high-school student named Hotchkins. 

Because Menger had not permitted any of the witnesses to come closer 
than 20 feet to the objects (due to the potentially dangerous level of 
electromagnetic energy he believed surrounded them), Richards’ 
scientific scepticism was never completely dispelled. ‘But,’ said Jordai 
‘Richards admits that he did find the experience striking, and finds i 
difficult, given the incredible sophistication of the display, to accept 
allegations of fraud freely advanced by so many of Menger’s detractors.’ 21 

Alien Acrobatics 

Later that night, Richards was treated to an even more impressive 
demonstration. The visitors reportedly walked down to where the 
witnesses were standing, hurdling a fence in an apple orchard, where 
Menger advanced and spoke to them in full view of the witnesses. ‘These 
men from another planet were very tall, close to seven feet,’ said Menger, 
'and T defy any Earthman to equal the physical abilities they displayed.’ 22 

According to Jordan, Richards watched for over 15 minutes as three 
beings of above average height ‘ran, bounded, and jumped in a swift 
fashion across a yard, at times . . . attaining almost “superhuman” 
speeds’ 

The entities, surrounded by a whitish glow, hurdled fences over five feet tall, 
and exhibited incredible gymnastic prowess in their movements. This 
demonstration, said Richards, could have been duplicated only had Menger 
enlisted the services of professional gymnasts ... the experiences that 
evening persuaded him that Menger’s claims, unacceptable as they appeared 
to many others, may have contained more truth than is generally assumed. 23 



Alien Base 


A Contact Witnessed? 

Another of the many witnesses to some of the phenomena which seemed 
literally to surround Menger at that time was ‘Mr X’, a physicist who 
later became a businessman. On 10 January 1957 he testified on The Long 
John Party Line that on one occasion, together with three other witnesses, 
he had seen and heard Menger apparently communicating with extra¬ 
terrestrials. 

Mr X:... the five of us went out and [Menger] took us through very rough 
terrain. The underbrush was kind of high ... and Rose Menger pointed out 
a glowing light between the trees ... It would take about 15 seconds to grow 
dim, and another 30 seconds to get brighter again. It was pulsating at about 
that rate .. . about 200 or 300 feet away. And it could be seen only through 
the trees. We were in an open clearing about 50 feet in diameter, and at the 
end of this clearing were the trees . .. Howard Menger suddenly said, ‘Wait 
here’, and he walked off toward the light. He didn’t go very far. It must have 
been about 40 feet, and then he stopped and we heard two male voices talking 

.. [Menger] walked right into the trees. He was probably about 15 or 20 feet 
into the trees ... 

NEBEL: Now, you heard two voices, one that you recognized as Mr 
Menger’s - and do you feel the other voice could possibly have been Mr 
Menger’s? 

MR X: No, it had a different quality to it. It was more sing-songy than his 
voice ... I couldn't make out any words. I listened as acutely as I could ... 
And this conversation went on for at least half an hour . . . While he was 
talking we were facing Mr Menger and this person — whomever he was 
talking to. 

NEBEL: You could not see him, could you? 

Mr X: You could see a silhouette, a dark shadow. 

NEBEL: Do you know it was another form there? 

Mr X: It looked like two forms. I could not distinguish any facial 
characteristics. But I could pick out two forms ... the other individual was 
slightly taller. While we were looking in that direction we heard somebody 
walking along the edge of the trees, walking toward our right, and stopping 
. . . Then we heard another person walking. We could hear the underbrush 
crackling and they walked around almost to the rear of us among the trees. In 
other words, we were surrounded... I am quite sure there were three of them 
. . . then Howard Menger came back and he said, 'Gee, I’m awfully sorry, I 
know how you feel, but I can’t take you up there’ ... he looked very, very 
disappointed. I am sure he wanted us to see what was going on. 

NEBEL: Did he imply that these people were from outer space? 

Mr X: Yes. He did say there were three people: two men and a woman. 1 
asked him what they said, but he said, ‘I can’t tell you ... I would like to tell 
you but cannot’, and it seemed to be something very personal. 

NEBEL: Could this have been a ‘set-up’? 

Mr X: Well, we had a difficult job finding that spot. Howard Menger had 



Alien Fantasia? 


not been there before. It was obvious we were lost when we started. And wc 
had a lot of difficulty getting to this spot. Wc were going through underbrush 
and actually had to fight our way through. I am quite sure he had never been 
there before. 2 '* 

The physicist, Menger told me in 1997, is now in his eighties and lives 
in Arizona. He prefers to remain anonymous. 2S 

A ‘HOT POTATO’ 

Yet another witness to a number of weird events was Richard Thompson 
(pseudonym) who, like Dr Richards, suspected that the heavy con¬ 
centration of reported phenomena in the High Bridge area during the 
mid- to late 1950s was something more than coincidence. He could not 
comprehend how Menger, hampered as he was by his limited income as 
a sign-painter, ‘could possibly have perpetuated such a combination of 
hoaxes, each perfectly timed, and brilliantly executed’. 

In 1957, a large number of dehydrated vegetables, fruits and nuts were 
found in Thompson’s home at Plukemin, New Jersey, as well as in open 
fields near High Bridge, which he says he was ‘drawn to by apparent 
telepathic means’. The food appeared to have undergone an odd, 'freeze- 
fried' process. 26 A potato (believed to have come from the Moon!) was 
given to Menger, who suggested that it should be analysed by a 
professional laboratory. Samples were taken to LaWall-Harrisson 
Consultants in Philadelphia. Analysis revealed: 


Total weight of sample 5.20 grams 

Moisture 7-23% 

Ash 4.49% 

Fat (ether extract) 0.95% 

‘N’as Protein (NX 6.25) 15.12% 


Owing to the abnormally high protein content (terrestrial potatoes-at 
least undehydrated ones - typically contain no more than 3 per cent) 
Menger decided to obtain a carbon-14 test (to date the samples) at 
LaWall-Harrisson, but the latter explained that this would cost about 
32,000. Balking at such a fee, Menger declined. The consultants then 
recommended that Menger take the samples and their report to a certain 
doctor at a certain government agency (CIA) which, they said, would 
continue the research at no cost. At the agency laboratory, Menger and 
Thompson spoke to the doctor, a ‘polite, intelligent man who appeared 
to be completely fascinated with the specimens,’ wrote Menger, ‘Wc left 
the samples with him, feeling we were on the right road.’ 

Two weeks later Howard and Connie went back to the laboratory to see 
how the analysis was progressing. As Menger reported: 



190 


Alien Base 


We were shown into a room where a piece of a specimen was in a container of 
water, another piece was in another container and a small fragment was under 
a huge microscope. We took turns looking through the microscope . . . the 
outer surface of the specimen appeared like a crystalline beach of sand 

[possibly] due to an intense contraction of structure. I then told Dr-what 

had been explained to me about the method of collapsing the molecular 
structure, which probably gave the specimen a dehydrated nature . . . We 
were told they would run all sorts of tests on the specimens left with them and 
keep us informed ... Since my friend had been given the potatoes in the first 
place, we left the arrangements in his hands. That was in June, 1958, and the 
last we heard from the laboratory. I understand that this may have become 


Thompson believes that the potato was ‘impervious’ to radioactivity; 
that it was intended to warn him of the dangers of ‘impending nuclear 
catastrophe’; and that the agency deliberately withheld information on its 
analysis for fear that publicity would have produced ‘panic and scientific 
disorder’ - a veritable ‘hot potato’! He saved a few of the remaining 
samples, which he claims remained in their original state, thus testifying 
to their unique method of preservation. 28 

BILOCATION 

One of Howard Menger’s more exotic claims, one ‘endorsed’ by a court 
of law, relates to an incident which occurred one night in the spring of 
1957. This incident suggests that during his contacts with the extra¬ 
terrestrials, he seemed to become imbued with some of their phenomenal 
abilities. 

During a coffee break at a gathering of his study group in Plukemin, he 
allowed his mind to wander back sentimentally to his light-green 1950 
Plymouth station wagon which he had recently traded for a new model. 
‘In my mind’s eye I drove it along on a blacktop road, picturing many 
things in vivid detail. Then I left the reverie, returned mentally to the 
group, and becoming aware of the discussion, joined in, without giving 
another thought to my vivid mental experience.’ 

At the next meeting, the police station in Bedminster Township, a few 
miles from Plukemin, telephoned to advise Menger that he had a driving 
summons awaiting collection. ‘Sergeant Cramer claims you were speed¬ 
ing and went through a red light in his district about 11.40 p.m. on [he 
named the date of the last meeting],’ Menger was informed. 

‘It couldn’t have been me,’ Menger responded, ‘because I was here at 
that time and there were at least twenty people here with me. Besides, I 
do not have a 1950 station wagon, sir; I have a 1957 Plymouth station 
wagon, and incidentally, it could not have left the premises because it was 
blocked in by other cars, and I had the keys in ray pocket.’ 



Alien Fantasia? 


191 


The police officer was unconvinced: finally, the summons was deliv¬ 
ered personally to Menger by Police Chief Kicc. Menger opted to appear 
in court, taking along seven witnesses, and pleaded not guilty. According 
to Sergeant Cramer, he saw a light-green Plymouth station wagon 
(licence number WR E79) speed past him. With Cramer in pursuit, the 
car went straight through the red light without stopping, then ‘disap¬ 
peared’! After commenting tersely on the ‘phantom car’ and listening to 
the testimony of the witnesses, the judge declared a verdict of not guilty. 

A check with the auto agency in Philadelphia where Menger had 
traded in the 1950 Plymouth established the fact that it was still in the 
shop undergoing repairs prior to resale. So what had happened? In view 
of the fact that he had been thinking about driving his old station wagon 
at the precise time it was spotted ‘speeding’, Menger believes in the pos¬ 
sibility that his thoughts ‘had manifested into an actual projection’. 29 

RECANTATION AND RECONSIDERATION 
In 1961, following a period of seclusion, Howard Menger returned to the 
public eye on The Long John Nebel Television Show. Paris Flammonde, 
producer of the show and later the author of two scholarly books on the 
UFO phenomenon, wrote that Menger, ‘to the astonishment of sup¬ 
porters and opponents alike, recanted the vast majority of his personal 
legend, suggesting that all of his experiences may well have been 
"psychic” . . .’ 30 

As author John Keel quotes Flammonde: ‘Vaguely, aimlessly, rather 
embarrassingly, he avoided and vacillated ...’ 

Howard Menger, Saturnian husband to a Venusian traveler in space [he 
believed at one time that he and his wife were reincarnated from those 
planets], friend of extraterrestrials, annotator of ‘authentic music from 
another planet’, master of teleportation, and saucerological sage extra¬ 
ordinaire - recanted! . . . His saucers might have been psychic, his space 
people visions, his and Marla’s other planethood, metaphoric. 

Later, in letters to investigators Jim Moseley and Gray Barker (pub¬ 
lisher of From Outer Space to You), Menger described his book as ‘fiction- 
fact’ and implied that the Pentagon had given him the films of saucers 
and requested that he participate in an experiment to test the public’s 
reaction to extraterrestrial contact. ‘He has helped us, therefore, to dis¬ 
miss his entire story as not only a hoax, but a hoax perpetrated by the US 
government,’ wrote Keel. 31 It is not that simple. For one thing, Menger 
has not recanted to the extent implied here. In 1967, for instance, during 
a rare appearance at a convention in New York, he confirmed at least one 
of his purported encounters with extraterrestrials, in High Bridge in 
August of 1956: 



192 


Alien Base 


The craft came down from the west. It looked like a huge fireball. I was fright¬ 
ened. Gradually, as it came closer, it slowed down. The pulsations subsided 
... it turned into what looked like a man-made craft, reflecting the sun as it 
came close to the ground. It was a beautiful sight... It stopped about a foot 
and a half from the ground. An opening appeared in the side of the craft. There 
was a small incline or platform. Two men stepped out, very nicely dressed in 
shiny space suits... One man stepped to the left, and the other stepped to the 
right, and then another man stepped out, a man I will never forget as long as I 
live. He was approximately six feet one, maybe six feet two. He had long blond 
hair over his shoulders - yes, long blond hair. He stepped toward me, and the 
message he gave, of course, was what most people don’t want to hear, a mes¬ 
sage of love and understanding. He said he had come from outer space, which 
is what most people really don’t believe in. Someday they will. 

Menger went on to stress the hardships faced by contactccs following 
public disclosure of their claims. ‘If you realize what people go through 
when this happens to them. If you really think you have guts enough to 
come out and tell people. Of course, nowadays it might be a little easier, 
but in the early Fifties it was very, very rough, especially when you are in 
business and you are trying to act like a reputable citizen.’ 32 

So what really happened to Howard Menger? For several days in 1978 
I interviewed Howard at his home in Vero Beach, Florida, in the 
presence of his wife, Connie, and my friend and co-investigator Lou 
Zinsstag. I found Howard, as always, to be a gentleman. 

‘Howard, when I first met you in 1969,’ I began, ‘you told me that you 
stood by the story in your book, but that you no longer knew where the 
space people came from nor what they were doing here. You also said to 
me that you’d swear on the Bible, to God, or whatever, that that book was 
true - that it happened to you.’ 

‘Of course it was true,’ he replied. 

What I wrote in there and what I photographed and everything is absolutely 
true. However, at that time, I think I made some mistakes. In one case, they 
said, ‘We have just come from the planet you call Venus.’ I believe it’s a pos¬ 
sibility that I might have distorted that. It doesn’t mean that they’re 
Venusians. That means they might have a base there. There’s evidence 
they’ve had bases on the Moon, and they could have bases anywhere. In a 
craft, I saw [on a viewing screen] something which I thought was the surface 
of Venus - they led me to believe it... 

Menger gives serious consideration to the possibility that the visitors 
he encountered might have originated from Earth, rather than on other 
planets. 

There are so many theories - this thing is so complex. One theory is that the 
Earth is the only one in this solar system which was given the gift of life, and 



Alien Fantasia? 


193 


this life developed a long time ago on this planet, and reached a civilization 
far beyond ours, in technology and spiritual ideas, thousands, maybe millions 
of years ago, and they have left, perhaps because of a cataclysm ... those that 
survived probably would go underground, or under the ocean. Let’s call 
them ‘Atlanteans’. Most of this is myth, but suppose Atlantis was real? The 
people might have gone under the ocean and have cities there. It’s very pos¬ 
sible. UFOs have been seen going into the ocean, and coming out... It’s pos¬ 
sible they don’t want us to know that they live here on this planet, that they 
would probably throw us off the track by telling us, you know, -Venus’ or 
‘Mars’. 

‘Are you sure that you actually went to the Moon?’ I asked, in¬ 
credulously. 

‘Well, over the years I've given it much thought,’ he replied. ‘I 
believed at the time that it was the Moon. They said it was one of our 
satellites. I don't know what they meant by that - we have only one! I 
think it was the Moon, yes. I took a picture from a porthole: that was the 
Moon I took a picture of!’ 

‘But how did you manage to survive in the airless atmosphere, when 
they opened that door in the “train” and you were struck by a blast of hot 
air?’ 

‘I don’t know. But I was under their control, which would make a lot 
of difference. Their technology is so advanced .. ,’ 33 

AN ALIEN BASE? 

In her section of The High Bridge Incident (much of which she published 
originally in a quasi-fictional book in 19S8) 34 Connie Menger claims that 
Howard told her about an alien base, located about 150 miles from High 
Bridge, in the Blue Mountains of Pennsylvania, where supposedly 
Howard had made ‘periodic trips’. It was there, he said, that he saw 
Connie’s ‘psychological chart’ - ‘a flat square, about a quarter of an inch 
thick, made of a plastic-like material . . . Across the face of this chart, a 
series of colored globes of light appear when it is connected to the 
machines, and this indicates the emotional and mental state of an indi¬ 
vidual.’ 35 

Howard made no such claim during our interviews, but he did talk 
about having seen the alleged base. 

In the Blue Mountains, when I was out there one night, I see this huge slit in 
the mountain. I’m watching this slit, and the light coming out of it - it started 
to light up the whole area. It’s getting bigger and bigger ... There was a sec¬ 
tion in the mountain -1 would say 100 feet of mountain - with trees on it and 
everything, opening up like a garage door, only opening out. It's blinding me 
because 1 hadn’t been used to the light: I’d been there for an hour, with my 
camera, waiting for a UFO to come down. I couldn’t even take a picture, it’s 




194 


Alien Base 


so bright. When I finally got used to it, I dropped the camera! And I see 
spaceships - at least three of them - in this cotton-picking mountain garage! 
And men walking around in shiny silver suits - they’ve got these tight-fitting 
suits - walking around, doing maintenance and work and everything. And a 
couple of guys came out in some kind of a vehicle, like a motorcycle without 
wheels. He’s sitting on it and he’s coming toward me! That’s one time I did¬ 
n’t stay -1 got in my station wagon and took off. 

'I think that one of the main reasons they’re here is mining,’ Howard 
continued. ‘I think they’re mining some stuff. We don’t even know what 
the stuff is, and if we did we’d probably be way ahead in our technology. 
It’s something that they use - maybe for energy.’ 36 

Menger’s hypothesis is not entirely uncorroborated. In her book, 
Silent Invasion , researcher Ellen Crystall claims that two US government 
agents told her that aliens were mining beryllium, titanium and zirco¬ 
nium in the area of her investigations around Pine Bush, New York. Both 
Crystall’s and independent research has discovered that such ores are 
found in that region (and elsewhere). All three ores are used in nuclear 
engineering projects. 3 ' Of particular interest here is that zircon is found 
in Berks County, Pennsylvania, among several other locations. While this 
area is only about 60 air miles southwest of High Bridge, New Jersey, it 
is also just to the south of the northeastern end of the great Blue 
Mountain ridge in central eastern Pennsylvania. 

FACT, FANTASY OR FRAUD? 

In talking with Howard Monger, 1 found him convincing when dis¬ 
cussing some of his original claims. At other times I had the impression 
that he was fantasizing. This impression was reinforced when he began 
regaling us with incredible tales of having been involved in building and 
flying a saucer, together with scientists and military personnel who had 
hired him to help them out, utilizing the knowledge gained from his 
extraterrestrial friends. He also professes to have put ‘thousands of dol¬ 
lars’ of his own money into the top-secret project. 

‘We built a huge craft,’ he stated. ‘My part in this thing was the design 
of the skin of the craft - the power system. And I did design the manual 
control, and from the manual schematics the other guy computerized it 
... I took it up with the four other fellows, I’d guess about 1,000 miles 
in five minutes. Of course, we didn’t take any trips out of the atmo¬ 
sphere .. .’ 3S 

If this is pure fantasy - as I believe to be the case - why do I not reject 
all of Howard Menger’s claims? Because, as with George Adamski, 
some of the evidence suggests that he did indeed have encounters with 
apparent extraterrestrials, some of which were observed by credible wit¬ 
nesses. And regarding the photographic and cine film evidence (he took 



Alien Fantasia? 


19S 


both 16mm and 8mm movies), my feeling is that some of it is genuine. 

As to allegations of fraud, Richard Thompson suspects that elements 
of‘untruth’ may have been woven into Menger’s story to promulgate a 
more widespread belief in extraterrestrial life. ‘But [Thompson] does 
not believe, based on his own experience,’ stated Peter Jordan, ‘that 
deception was as pervasive an ingredient in Menger’s story as his detrac¬ 
tors were later to maintain.’ 39 

Perhaps the last word in this chapter on Howard Menger’s claims 
should go to Berthold E. Schwarz, MD, a distinguished psychiatrist and 
investigator of the paranormal, with whom I have discussed the case, 
and who also lives in the Mcngers’ home town. In his introduction to 
The High Bridge Incident , he writes that, for Menger: ‘There have been 
no rewards except the ivory chisels of ridicule, harassment, sometimes 
persecution, and even an alleged attempt at assassination. Throughout 
the years Howard has remained an honorable, outstanding citizen of his 
community ... He has (by choice) avoided the spotlight for decades and 
never sought to profit from his extraordinary experiences ... 

‘How influential, specific and relevant to his UFO adventures were 
the horrors and traumas of his son’s, his brother’s and his mother’s 
deaths - all within a short period of time [in the mid-1950s]? Did these 
tragedies carve and prepare him for the UFO events and kindred disso¬ 
ciative paranormal happenings?’ Dr Schwarz continues: 

Both Howard and I have lived in northern New Jersey ... my own profes¬ 
sional studies of [him] have involved interviews [with] the Princeton physics 
student and his friend who were witnesses to the discs [and] several of the 
New Jersey State Police who, when they realized that my purposes were 
confidential and scientific, recalled the furor and unexplained mysteries at 
that time ... 

Although the Howard Menger story is sometimes seemingly bizarre, even 
by Fortean standards, Howard never deviates from his original, fundamen¬ 
tal assertions which are voiced again and again like a hymn, a gesture of 
communion: contact with the unknown has occurred.. . 40 


NOTES 

1 Menger, Howard, From Outer Space to You, Saucerian Books, Clarksburg, 
West Virginia, 1959, p. 26. 

2 Ibid., pp. 26-8. 

3 Ibid., pp. 31-4. 

4 Letter to the author from Howard Menger, 14 September 1997. 


K K 


196 


Alien Base 


5 Monger, op. cit., pp. 35-8. 

6 Ibid., pp. 40-8. 

7 Ibid., pp. 50-3. 

8 Ibid., pp. 55-6,59. 

9 Ibid., pp. 71-3. 

10 Ibid., p. 73. 

11 Ibid., pp. 74-5, 

12 Ibid., pp, 79-80. 

13 Ibid., pp. 82-4. 

14 Ibid., pp. 89-91. 

15 Ibid., pp. 145-7. 

16 Ibid., pp. 148-52. 

17 Ibid., pp. 153-6. 

18 Menger, Howard, and Menger, Connie, The High Bridge Incident, P0 Box 
1405, Vero Beach, Florida 32961, 1991. 

19 Menger, op. cit., pp. 104-5. 

20 Interview with the author, Vero Beach, Florida, 27 October 1978. 

21 Jordan, Peter A., ‘The Enigma of Howard Menger’, UFO Update, no. 11, 
summer 1981, Beyond Reality Magazine, PO Box 428, Nanuet, New York 
10954, p. 46. 

Menger, op. cit., pp. 102-3. 

Jordan, op. cit., p. 46. 

24 Menger, op. cit., pp. 192—4. 

25 Letter to the author from Howard Menger, 14 September 1997. 

26 Jordan, op. cit., p. 48. 

27 Menger and Menger, op. cit., pp. 55-6, 104-5. 

28 Jordan, op. cit., p. 48. 

29 Menger, op. cit., pp. 112-14. 

30 Flammonde, Paris, The Age of Flying Saucers, Hawthorn, New York, 1971, 
p. 157. 

31 Keel, John A., Operation Trojan Horse, Souvenir Press, London, 1970, pp. 
206-7. 

32 Ibid., pp. 207-8. 

33 Interviews with the author, 27/28 October 1978. 

34 Baxter, Marla, My Saturnian Lover , Vantage, New York, 1958. 

35 Menger and Menger, op. cit., p, 90. 

36 Interview with the author, 28 October 1978. 

37 Crystall, Ellen, Silent Invasion: The Shocking Discoveries of a UFO 
Researcher, Paragon House, New York, 1991, pp. 119-20. 

38 Interview with the author, 28 October 1978. 

39 Jordan, op. cit, p. 48. 

40 Menger and Menger, op. cit. 



Chapter 10 


Cosmic Shock 


One morning in April 1957, at about 07.30, a resident of Cordoba, 
Argentina, was riding his motorcycle towards Rio Ceballos. He had just 
reached a point some IS kilometres from the airport at Pajas Blancas 
when his engine cut out. Dismounting to check the fault, he noticed a 
huge disc-shaped object hovering motionless about SO feet above the 
road. Shocked, he ran and hid in a ditch. 

The object appeared to be about 60 feet in diameter and about IS feet 
high. It descended, hovering some seven feet above the road, emitting a 
sound ‘like air escaping from the valve of a tyre*. Suddenly, a device 
described as a lift, or ‘transparent stairway’, began to come down from the 
lower part of the craft, carrying a human-shaped figure who stepped down 
when the lift had stopped about a foot above the ground. The figure was 
approximately five feet eight inches tall, dressed in attire resembling a 
diver’s neoprene suit, which seemed made of a plastic material. 

After glancing around at various plants, the being came towards the 
witness, who made further attempts to conceal himself - to no avail. 
Silently and gracefully, the stranger reached out to help the witness from 
the ditch. As the two stood side by side in the road, the being pointed 
towards the hovering craft, indicating that the witness should follow him. 
To calm the panic-stricken Cordoban, the being gently stroked the man’s 
forehead. The two then went to the craft and entered the ‘lift’. 

Around the wall of the cabin were five or six panels, each about six feet 
wide and covered with an intricate mass of equipment, including TV-like 
monitor screens. At each of the panels sat a similar being, dressed exactly 
like the first. They paid no attention to their surprised visitor. The 
Cordoban later commented that he had been particularly impressed by a 
series of large square windows around the walls above the panels, having 
observed no trace of windows on the outside of the craft. In addition to 
the light coming through the windows, a dull phosphorescent light per¬ 
vaded the cabin, though yet again, no lamp was seen. The colour of the 
craft was somewhat indistinct: in parts it had a greenish tinge, elsewhere 
blue, the combined effect being that of metallic iridescence. 

The witness was invited to enter the lift-shaft, which descended. As it 
did so, he struck the wall with his knuckles. This caused a metallic sound. 



Alien Base 


Once on the ground, the Cordoban asked the being, in sign language, 
how the craft managed to remain suspended. The being responded by 
passing the palm of one hand flat over the other - a gesture which meant 
nothing to the witness. The motorcycle was examined closely by the 
being, who indicated that it would not start while the craft was present. 

Finally, the visitor turned to the C6rdoban, placed a hand on his 
shoulder in a farewell gesture, then went back inside the craft via the lift- 
shaft. Shortly afterwards, the craft took off, heading in a northwesterly 
direction. There were several sightings of what was presumably the same 
craft that morning.' It is unfortunate that the newspaper which reported 
this story did not mention the name of the witness; but that omission may 
have been stipulated by the motorcyclist. The story itself seems con¬ 
vincing, if only because of the technical details, which closely correspond 
with those of many similar encounters. 

Oscar Galindez, the Argentine investigator who supplied the original 
report, believed (together with many of his countrymen) that there were 
UFO bases in the Andes, the most probable locations being in the high 
mountains around Salta (northwest Argentina) and the Puna de 
Atacama, a desolate area to the west of Salta. 1 

AN ALIEN BASE IN ARGENTINA? 

In August 1957 an Argentine newspaper published an extraordinary 
story, supplied by an Air Force guard who reported an encounter with 
extraterrestrials on 20 August. The following, translated by Gordon 
Creighton, appeared under the headline ‘UFO Base near Salta': 

Two days ago, at Quilino (Province of Cordoba), an aircraft made a forced 
landing. Air Force personnel were sent to guard the machine, and they 
installed themselves in a tent nearby. One of the Air Force men was on guard, 
while the other two went to a store several kilometres distant to get supplies. 

Suddenly, the man on guard - whose name we omit for reasons that are 
obvious - was aware of a strange humming sound. This was so persistent that 
he went out of the tent, but on looking around he could sec nothing that was 
out of the ordinary. He went back inside the tent, and once again he heard the 
hum; this time it was loud and high-pitched. He stepped outside once more, 
and to his astonishment he saw a disc-shaped machine suspended at a height 
of some 90 metres from the ground. The strange machine descended slowly 
until it was only a few metres from the ground. The grass and plants became 
violently agitated beneath the craft. Alarmed at the sight, the serviceman 
tried to draw his revolver, but was unable to do so; the revolver appeared to 
be stuck in the holster, perhaps through some influence from the machine. 

The next thing he knew was that a clear soft voice was speaking to him 
from the machine. He was told not to be afraid; that they were there in order 
to make the world aware of the existence of the ‘interplanetary ships’. The 
voice also told him that they, the occupants of the interplanetary ships, had 



Cosmic Shock 


199 


set up a special base or station in the province of Salta, and that from this base 
their crews would go forth to establish peaceful contact with Earthmen. The 
voice said furthermore that their aim was to help us, for the wrong use of 
atomic energy threatened to destroy us. Finally, before departing, the voice 
assured him that very soon the rest of the world would know even more about 
them. Then the bushes began to blow to and fro, and the craft rose vertically 
to a height of some 40 or 50 metres, before moving off towards the north. 3 

PLAIN-CLOTHES ANGELS 

In June 1962 the Italian magazine Domenica della Sera published an inter¬ 
view with a 42-year-old engineer named Luciano Galli, who claimed to 
have encountered human-type extraterrestrials in 1957 (or 1959; he was 
unable to recall which of those two years). Although Galli’s account par¬ 
allels the experiences of George Adamski to a remarkable degree, he was 
prepared to take an oath stating that at the time of his experience he had 
not heard even the name of Adamski. The following is taken from the 
interview with Galli conducted by the reporter Renate Albanese, trans¬ 
lated by Gordon Creighton. 

At 14.20 on 7 July 1957 (or 1959), Galli left his home in Bologna to 
return to work after lunch. He was nearing his workshop, situated off the 
Via Castiglione, when suddenly a black Fiat 1100 stopped in front of him. 
Out stepped a tall, dark man with regular features and very black eyes. 
'His face was of the kind which invites you to be friendly,’ said Galli. 
The man wore a double-breasted grey suit complete with collar and tie. 
He spoke perfect Italian. At the wheel of the car sat another man, with 
delicate features, dressed in a light-coloured costume: he wore no mous¬ 
tache like the dark one and never spoke a word. 

‘I knew the man with the moustache from sight,’ Galli told Albanese. 

I had noticed him several times in town; he even seemed to follow me. Once, 

1 remember, I walked with a friend through the arcades of Via Castiglione 
when 1 again saw this man. As always, he looked straight into my eyes and this 
time I wanted to address him, but suddenly he disappeared. And now this 
very stranger was standing before me, asking me if I remembered him. I said 
yes. ‘Won't you come with us?’ ‘Where to?’ ‘Have confidence, nothing will 
happen to you.’ 

Galli took a seat in the Fiat and drove with the men to the Croara ridge, 
57 kilometres from Bologna.There, he claimed, a ‘shining grey’ flying 
saucer awaited them, hovering about two metres off the ground. From 
the bottom a metal cylinder with an opening in it came out, through 
which Galli and the men entered. Although initially afraid, Galli became 
calm as soon as he was inside the craft. Just prior to entry, two lights 
flashed. 'Don’t be afraid,’ said the man with the moustache, ‘you were 
only being photographed.’ Galli continued: 



200 


Alien Base 


The pilot’s cabin was spacious 3nd round with a lot of instruments around, 
panels with pointers and needles. There were also hatches, and the seats were 
fixed somehow to the ground. In the middle of the floor was a kind of circular 
window, about one metre wide. Through it we could see the earth fall away 
from us. First she looked as though viewed from one of our own planes, then 
- when we were already in the dark zone - she looked like the Moon and later 
like Venus or Mars. 

’Were you able to talk to the man you call commander?’ asked 
Alban ese. 

‘Yes, very well. He spoke a perfect Italian. I asked him how he had 
managed to learn our language so well. He answered that he had used a 
very good method.’ 

Suddenly, Galli saw the silhouette of an enormous ‘dirigible’. 

Its length was at least 600 metres. The one end was cut like the end of a cigar. 
The [craft] emitted a phosphorous light and on top of that it looked as if 
strong light beams were directed toward it. Underneath the cut end six open¬ 
ings came into view, out of which and into which small flying discs were seen 
coming and going. Every opening was divided by a partition wall into six 
smaller cubicles, every one wide open. 

As they approached the giant ship it became evident that the openings 
were large hangars, capable of accommodating at least 50 saucers. Inside 
the ship could be seen no fewer than 400 or 500 men and women, stand¬ 
ing or walking around the hangars. ‘This is what Galli said on oath,’ 
reported Albanese. ‘All those people wore overalls of a shining plastic or 
silky material. When they passed by them, they smiled. The women were 
very beautiful and friendly.’ 

Spellbound, Galli asked his companions where the ship came from. 
‘From the planet you call Venus,' came the reply. 

Later on, Galli said that he was shown through a large hall, a kind of 
library, and into another large room which he believed to be the com¬ 
mander’s. Eventually he was shown back to one of the hangars and into 
the same saucer - ‘always in company of the man with the moustache and 
a face like an angel in plain clothes’. He was brought back to the same spot 
on the Croara ridge. ‘The whole trip was completed within three hours 
and ten minutes,’ Galli claimed. 

Renate Albanese asked Luciano Galli if he was certain that these fan¬ 
tastic events had not happened to him while he was in a trance, or under 
hypnosis. I have never been hypnotized,’ he replied. ‘I took this trip in 
my physical body, this is indeed so ... I do not want people to say that I 
made up this story in order to gain publicity or money. What I have told 
is the naked truth.’ 4 



Cosmic Shock 


201 


AERIAL ENCOUNTERS IN BRAZIL 

Numerous encounters with unknown flying machines were reported 
worldwide by military and civilian pilots in 1957, some of the more dis¬ 
turbing encounters occurring in Brazil. 

Just before 21.00 on the night of 14 August, Commander Jorge 
Campos Araujo was at the controls of a VARIG airlines 047 cargo plane, 
en route from Porto Alegre to Rio de Janeiro, when the co-pilot, Edgar 
Onofre Soares, spotted a luminous object left of the plane. Suddenly the 
object manoeuvred so that it was ahead of the plane, crossed to the right 
on a horizontal trajectory, stopped momentarily, then abruptly dived and 
disappeared in the cloud bank below. All the crew described the object as 
saucer-shaped, with a dome on top that glowed with an intense green 
light while the flattened base emitted a less intense yellowish luminosity. 
Commander Araujo estimated the saucer’s speed to be several times the 
speed of sound. 

Although the encounter made headline news in Brazil, the most 
important part of the event was not publicized. After landing, Com¬ 
mander Araujo and the crew told a colleague, an air traffic chief for 
another airline company, that when the object had reached the right side 
of the airliner, the engines began coughing and missing and the cabin 
lights dimmed and almost went out. Fortunately, everything came back 
to normal when the object disappeared. 5 

Another disturbing incident also occurred in Brazilian airspace on 4 
November 1957 at 01.40, when a C-46 cargo plane of VARIG, bound 
from Porto Alegre to Sao Paulo, encountered an unknown flying 
machine. At first, it looked like just a red light to the left side of the air¬ 
craft. Commander Jean Vincent de Beyssac joked to his co-pilot that at 
last they were seeing a real flying saucer, but then the object seemed to 
become larger, and de Beyssac decided to investigate. Commander 
Auriphebo Simoes, who interviewed de Beyssac, reported as follows: 

He started to put his plane into a left bank, but just before he pressed his rud¬ 
der the object jumped a 45-degree arc on the horizon and became larger. De 
Beyssac started pursuit and was about midway on his left 80-degree turn 
when the object became even brighter and suddenly he smelled something 
burning ... all at once his ADF [automatic direction finder], right generator 
and transmitter ‘burned’ out. The ‘thing’ disappeared almost instantly, while 
the crew looked for fire. De Beyssac turned on his emergency transmitter and 
reported the incident to Porto Alegre control; then he turned his ship around 
and headed back to Porto Alegre, where he landed an hour later. 

After submitting a written report, de Beyssac went home and ‘got 
soused’. That same day, VARIG issued an order forbidding its pilots to 
discuss UFO sightings with the media. 6 



202 


Alien Base 


OUTRIGHT HOSTILITY 

A quarter of an hour or so after the VARIG C-46 encounter, at 02.00 on 
4 November 1957, an even more alarming incident occurred at the 
Brazilian Army’s Itaipu Fortress at Sao Vicente, near Santos, Brazil, 
when two sentries were struck by an unbearable wave of heat emanating 
from a large disc-shaped object hovering above them while emitting a 
humming sound. One sentry fainted and the other yelled for help. Inside 
the garrison, the electrical systems failed completely; even the back-up 
system would not work. Both soldiers received first- and second-degree 
bums. The authorities reacted desperately, as investigator Dr Olavo 
Fontes reported: 

Next day the commander of the fortress (an army colonel) issued orders for¬ 
bidding the whole garrison to tell anything about the incident to anyone - not 
even to their relatives. Intelligence officers came and took charge, working 
frantically to question and silence everyone with information pertaining to 
the matter . . . The fortress was placed in a state of martial law and a top- 
secret report was sent to the QG [headquarters]. Days later, American 
officers from the US Army Military Mission arrived at the fortress together 
with officers from the Brazilian Air Force, to question the sentries and other 
witnesses involved. Afterwards a special [Air Force] plane was chartered to 
bring the two burned sentries to Rio de Janeiro [where] they were put in the 
Army’s Central Hospital (HCE), completely isolated from the world behind 
a tight security curtain. 7 

Dr Olavo Fontes, a world-leading UFO investigator of that period, 
spent a great deal of time investigating this case. In a paper discussing 
UFO-induced effects, he theorized that these were ‘not merely side- 
effects of the powerful electromagnetic fields that exist around UFOs, 
but the result of purposeful interference by a weapon used as a means of 
defense or attack’. 

Existing evidence suggests that such a weapon is not an alternating magnetic 
field in itself, but a high-frequency, long-range electromagnetic beam of 
some sort, i.e., a radio-electric wave concentrated into a narrow, powerful 
beam. After a careful analysis of the data I came to the conclusion that this 
weapon might be a microwave ionizer — a generator of odd-shaped micro- 
waves that ionize the air where they strike. They would make the air a high- 
resistance conductor; nothing more than that. 

The ‘heat-wave’ which burned the two sentries at Itaipu, he asserted, 
was a different kind of weapon, ‘produced only by ultrasonics’. 

This is due to the fact that the longitudinal ultrasonic oscillations are trans¬ 
formed into transverse waves (shear waves) at interfaces between mediums of 
different acoustic impedance as, for example, between the clothes and the 
skin. These resulting transverse waves are more rapidly absorbed than the 



Cosmic Shock 


203 


longitudinal ones, with a subsequent increased heat development at interface 
areas.. . Only an ultrasonic beam could produce the peculiar characteristics 
of the ‘heat wave’ that struck the Itaipu sentries. 8 

‘DANGERS THREATENING HUMANITY 1 
‘The statements of those who purportedly have had actual contact with 
“space people” should not be dismissed offhand as merely romance,’ 
stated Rear Admiral Herbert Knowles of the United States Navy, in July 
1957. ‘Perhaps there is some real information here .. .’ 9 

That same month, an extraordinary contact was reported by a highly 
credible witness, Professor Joao de Freitas Guimaraes, a lawyer and 
Professor of Ancient Roman Law in the Catholic Faculty of Law at 
Santos, Brazil. Interestingly, the encounter took place near Fort Itaipu. 
The following is based on a transcription of a television interview with 
the professor on Brazilian television (TV-13) on 27 August 1957, trans¬ 
lated by Gordon Creighton. 

In the course of his duties as a military advocate, Dr Guimaraes was 
visiting Sao Sebastian, northeast of Santos on the Atlantic coast in the 
State of Sao Paulo, when one evening he decided to take a stroll along the 
beach. The sky was overcast and there was no visible moon. As he was sit¬ 
ting on the beach at about 19.15 (another report gives 21.15) he noticed 
that, in the direction of Ilhabela (Bela Island), the colouring of the sea 
seemed to be getting lighter, then a spout of water shot up into the air, 
reminding him of the ‘blowing’ of a whale. Some sort of ‘high-bellied 
craft’ (shaped like a hat) headed for the beach and as it arrived, threw out 
a landing line to which were attached some 'spheres’, unlike conventional 
buoys. A metallic stairway also came down and two men stepped out and 
approached the professor. Both appeared to be completely human. 

By now he could see that they were tall beings, over 1.80 metres in height, 
with long fair hair extending to their shoulders. Their complexions were fair, 
they had eyebrows, and their appearance was youthful and they had light- 
coloured, wise and understanding eyes. They wore greenish one-piece suits 
fitting closely at the neck, wrists and the ankles. 

Though frightened, Dr Guimaraes stood up, holding his ground. He 
asked in Portuguese whether there was something wrong with their craft 
or if they were looking for somebody. He also asked them whence they 
came. There was no reply, so he repeated the question in French, then 
English, Spanish and Italian - to no avail. Then the professor received 
the impression, telepathically, that he was being invited to board their 
craft. (Subsequently, he discovered that they also made verbal speech.) 
He became seized with an irresistible desire to know more and decided to 
accept the unspoken invitation. One of the men headed towards the disc. 



204 


Alien Base 


followed by the professor and the other man. The man in front leapt up 
the stairway to the entrance with ease, using one hand to hold on, though 
Guimaraes needed both hands to do so. Standing in the entrance was a 
third man, possibly one or two others. 

Space Flight 

On board, Dr Guimaraes found himself in a brilliantly illuminated com¬ 
partment, one of several in the craft. Together with the crew, he sat on a 
bench that encircled the compartment. As the craft lifted, the professor 
noticed what looked like rain on the portholes. ‘Is it raining?’ he asked. To 
this he received a reply from one of the crew, tclepathically, to the effect 
that it was not rain, but water produced by the rotation, in opposite direc¬ 
tions, of parts of the craft. Surrounding the machine was a ‘ray-filtration 
rube, which produced the effect of a semi-vacuum in each of its parts’. 

Gazing out through the portholes, the professor beheld a vast, intensely black 
zone all around, in which the stars were shining with astonishing brightness. 
Then came areas where the stars seemed to be in even greater swarms, shin¬ 
ing with an incomparable splendour, followed by other areas which seemed 
darker, with fewer stars. Then they passed through a belt of violet-coloured 
atmosphere, and after that another, similar belt, but of a more violet shade, 
and of a most refulgent brightness, and during this stage the professor felt the 
craft shuddering strongly, and he showed his fear, whereupon one of them 
said to him telepathically: ‘Our machine has just left the atmosphere of your 
planet.’ 

In the compartment was a circular instrument with three very sensi¬ 
tive needles which trembled in the Earth’s atmosphere but vibrated more 
intensely when outside of it. As one of the crew members explained, the 
craft was being driven by ‘the effects resulting from the magnetic forces 
present in space’. 

On returning to Earth, Dr Guimaraes noticed that his watch had 
stopped working at the time he boarded the craft, thus he was unable to 
determine how long the trip had lasted, though he estimated that it had 
been for about 30 to 40 minutes, judging from the hotel clock on his 
return. 

Dr Guimaraes believed that the crews of extraterrestrial craft were 
anxious to alert the inhabitants of Earth to dangers threatening human¬ 
ity. In his opinion, some of our scientific experiments were being con¬ 
ducted frivolously, such as the indiscriminate explosion of atomic bombs 
which not only added to contamination of the atmosphere but also 
destroyed those layers of our atmosphere that filter out dangerous radia¬ 
tion. If more care is not taken, we shall all suffer from the consequences 
of the explosions, he warned. 



Cosmic Shock 


205 


Aftermath 

Though barely able to contain himself, Dr Guimaraes at first told no one 
(with the exception of his wife) about his fantastic experience. Many 
months later he informed three friends and colleagues: Dr Alberto 
Franco, a S3o Paulo judge; a Dr Nilson, a lawyer; and later, Dr Lincoln 
Feliciano, who contacted the media. Dr Guimaraes was besieged from all 
sides by people wanting to hear more, but he found it difficult to explain 
what precisely had occurred because, he said, his experience related to 
matters far above and beyond his knowledge. 

During his trip, the professor said, an appointment had been made for 
him to meet the crew of the craft again, on 12 August 1957. The crew 
had shown him a Zodiac of 12 constellations: a wheel indicated the year, 
and the repetition of the number ‘8’ twelve times gave him the impres¬ 
sion of August. He did not keep the appointment, he said, owing partly 
to the fact that a party of people - including the town’s deputy sheriff and 
Major Paulo Salema of the Brazilian Air Force, who had got wind of the ' 
meeting - had planned to go along to the beach. Also, he said, the Air 
Force had advised him not to keep the appointment; moreover, it had 
been arranged for some jet-fighters to put in an appearance. Had these 
fired on the disc, Dr Guimaraes felt that it would have appeared like an 
act of treachery on his part. In any event, the craft did not make a repeat 
appearance. 

Although Professor Guimaraes agreed that he was of an ‘idealistic turn 
of mind’, he insisted he was practical too, and stressed that he had been 
fully conscious throughout the experience, and not a victim of an hallu¬ 
cination. 10 1112 

CHILD-SIZED HUMANOIDS 

Miguel Espanol, a Spanish naval officer, was travelling with a companion 
by truck to Ceres, Brazil, on 10 October 1957, when about three miles 
from Quebracoco village he noticed a strong gleam of light over a hill 
ahead. Just after the truck surmounted the hill, a huge luminous object 
could be seen about a mile away, hovering in the air, brilliantly illumin¬ 
ating the surrounding countryside. 

As it descended to a height of about 20 feet from the ground, some 40 
yards away, the object seemed to cause the truck’s engine to stall. It then 
cut out all its lights, except for a reddish one in an antenna on the dome. 
Estimated to have a diameter of about 500 feet and a depth of about 130 
feet, the craft was oval-shaped, but like two superimposed saucers 
separated by a circular area of about 16 feet. A door opened and two 
beings emerged, followed by another two pairs, then a seventh one, who 
walked down the centre of two lines made by the others. 

Espanol described the beings as looking like child-sized humans, with 



206 


Alien Base 


long hair and dressed in what appeared to be luminous suits. The truck 
engine would not work during this whole period, despite frantic efforts 
to make it start. After silently observing the truck and its two occupants 
for about three minutes, the space visitors climbed back into their craft 
and the door shut. The huge ship took off, climbed to a height of about 
1,600 feet, at which altitude it released a small disc, then disappeared to 
the south. ,J 

THE VENUSIANS COME TO ENGLAND 
During the course of my nearly 40 years’ research into contact cases, I 
have come across a number of accounts involving encounters with extra¬ 
terrestrials whose alleged origin is Venus. Some of these accounts have 
never been published, such as the following, which was incorporated in a 
manuscript given to me by the pioneering researcher Tony Wedd, a 
former Royal Air Force flying instructor, designer and artist who taught 
me much about this arcane subject. 

Early one Sunday morning in November 1957, newsagent Hubert 
Lewis was cycling to the town of Church Stretton in Shropshire to col¬ 
lect newspapers. It was miserably cold, dark, wet and windy, and he was 
cursing and swearing at his lot in life. ‘I was really browned off,’ he told 
Wedd. All at once in the half-light a tall figure appeared in the road in 
front of him. Hovering to Lewis’s right was a large object of‘a dull light¬ 
ness’, which seemed to rotate, although part of it was still. 

Replying to Lewis’s question as to who he was and whence he sprang, 
the stranger answered that there was no need to be alarmed. ‘I must admit 
the whole circumstance at first did scare me,’ said Lewis. ‘I also remem¬ 
ber noticing how the wind had dropped, although 1 could still hear it, but 
from away from us, and around us.’ 

The phenomenon of localized silence has occurred in many close 
encounter cases, such as that claimed by the Italian engineer Gianpietro 
Monguzzi, who together with his wife witnessed a landed UFO and its 
occupant in July 1952 on the Cherchen Glacier in the Italian Alps; he 
succeeded in obtaining several remarkable (and generally discredited) 
photographs before it flew off. As in Lewis’s encounter, a howling gale 
suddenly subsided, and all became silent during the landing. 14 Lewis 
continued: 

My visitor spoke quite clear English, but with a slight lisp it appeared, and he 
first rebuked me for my language, pointing out that everybody on this earth 
had troubles and difficulties to face, and that this life is merely a probation¬ 
ary period for a further life after. He knew of my difficulties and troubles; he 
spoke of my previous employment, and mentioned names of people whom I 
had once known. 



Cosmic Shock 


207 


Lewis estimated that the conversation lasted nearly 30 minutes, during 
which time the circular object, thought to be about 60 to 100 feet in 
diameter, hovered above him and to the right, approximately 100 feet 
away. A slight whistling sound emanated from it. The stranger gave no 
indication of his origin at this stage, but was 'kindly, understanding and 
gentle’. The tone of the conversation then became somewhat more 
didactic, as Lewis was treated to the Sunday-morning sermon of his life. 

He told me I had nothing to fear in the future from any evil. If I would only 
keep calm and faithful, all would be well. He promised I should be looked 
after and guided along the right path if I kept faith. My [deceased] sons and 
my wife were still with me in spirit, as were my friends (he mentioned one 
whom I had forgotten, of forty years ago)... He wished me well, then sud¬ 
denly vanished, just like that. Here I would like to add that this did puzzle me 
until Mr Cooke [James Cooke, a contemporary English contactee] gave me 
the answer, and that was that my visitor was projected before me but was 
really away from me, possibly in the machine; and this could be what hap¬ 
pened. 15 

Projected Images 

It is apposite to note here that in the case of Birmingham housewife 
Cynthia Appleton, an encounter which took place during the same 
month as that of Lewis (and about 40 miles from Church Stretton), an 
image of a tall, fair man, dressed in a tight-fitting silvery garment with an 
'Elizabethan’ collar, and with straight hair almost to the shoulders, cut in 
‘page-boy’ fashion, appeared in her home ‘just like a TV picture on the 
screen’ with an accompanying ‘whistle’. The image was blurred at first, 
then became sharp. 

Without voicing her question, Mrs Appleton wondered whence came 
this man. ‘From another world,’ came the response, received telepathi- 
cally. ‘Like yours, it is governed by the Sun. We have to visit your world 
to obtain something of which we are running short. It is at the bottom of 
the sea.’ Mrs Appleton thought the required substance was something 
that sounded like ‘titium’, which her husband later suggested might be 
titanium. (Although I have often wondered if that might have been a mis¬ 
understood or mispronounced reference to lithium, the lightest of solids, 
recourse to the book by Ellen Crystall mentioned in the previous chapter 
suggests that the alien’s reference might well have been to titanium.) 
‘You are stripping bark from the wrong tree to line the wrong boat,’ the 
man continued. ‘You are concentrating on the wrong power. You are try¬ 
ing to go “up” [i.e., against the force of gravity]. We go like this,’ and he 
made a sweeping lateral movement with both his hands and suddenly 
between his outstretched fingers appeared a type of television screen, on 
which could be seen a circular craft with a transparent top half (with 


208 


Alien Base 


several figures inside looking at her) and some much larger ships with 
several smaller, circular craft attached underneath. Before the image dis¬ 
appeared, the visitor said he would return in January. 

On the second occasion, Cynthia Appleton was visited in precisely the 
same manner by the same man, this time with a companion. Com¬ 
municating verbally on this occasion, with careful, clipped articulation, 
they informed her that they came from ‘Ghanas Valin’ (or so it sounded, 
pronounced with their guttural accent) on Venus. Other people’s brains, 
they said, were not suitable, as was hers, to witness this type of projec¬ 
tion. The image appeared to be quite solid. ‘You could not see through 
them although the light of the window was behind them,’ explained Mrs 
Appleton. When she asked if she could touch the image, she was told that 
to do so would be very injurious to her health. 16 

From another contactee (Joelle, whose experiences are recounted in 
Chapter 12), I have learned that this manner of projected image is but one 
of a host of mental and technical feats of which certain extraterrestrials - 
and some terrestrials, such as advanced yogis - are capable. 17 This par¬ 
ticular phenomenon does not negate the physical reality of the source of 
the projection. 

A Link with the Spirit World? 

Hubert Lewis went on to explain that his psychic faculties had been stim¬ 
ulated by the experience. ‘Such things of which my visitor had spoken 
had never appealed to me previously, things such as an after-world,’ he 
commented. 

Personally, I had little faith; I always held the view that once you were dead, 
that was the end. In my life I had seen so much badness and the exploitation 
of man by man that no normal person could have convinced me that life held 
anything but sorrow for many and happiness for a few. Looking back, this 
shock was the only thing which could have altered my views of life. 

Now I have faith. I have seen my wife, who appeared one morning to me. 
I have had several conversations with my sons, more especially with my 
youngest, who was an intellectual and has made quite clear many things 
which I previously had no idea could possibly be . . . There is a connection 
between a spirit world and the planets and our after-life - please be assured 
of this. I now have no fear of death. 

Further Encounters 

During May 1958, Lewis claimed to have been visited by ‘a high official 
of the police and another gentleman’, who asked many questions. ‘1 was 
advised to forget certain matters and carry on my normal work and way 
of life.' Lewis decided to accept this advice, but early one Sunday morn¬ 
ing in the summer of 1958 he had another contact, this time with a 



Cosmic Shock 


209 


different being. The craft in which he arrived was in the distance, and to 
meet Lewis, the man had apparently walked across some fields. Lewis 
was told that people from Venus are living on Earth among us. Lewis 
went on: 

I can assure you I have no fear of our friends (and I say this with perfect con¬ 
fidence) for they are our friends (so God help me and all of us) and if only our 
leaders and persons of importance and authority would only meet them and 
guarantee them safety and guarantee that their knowledge and age-old 
abilities would not be exploited and imposed upon, then I who know them 
and have been with them on this Earth can say with truth and confidence that 
all of us who inhabit this planet can be assured of a perfect life . .. 

In July 1958 Lewis travelled by rail to Paddington Station, London, 
where he met by prior arrangement with his contact, who escorted 
him to a car in which he was introduced to a woman of appearance similar 
to that of the man. As it was a pleasant evening, they drove into Hyde 
Park, and walked by the Serpentine for about an hour. Later, the trio 
drove to Wanstead Flats, and then to Forest Gate, where Lewis had a 
meal and the others tea and sandwiches (!). At one stage the aliens 
engaged each other in conversation in their own language, unintelligible 
to Lewis, but soon joined him for a fascinating discussion which lasted 
until midnight. 

After having spent the night with a friend in Stratford, Lewis met the 
same man, without his female companion, at 18.00 the following day. A 
visit to the Spiritualist Association of Great Britain at Belgrave Square, 
in central London, was suggested. The two attended a demonstration of 
clairvoyance by the famous medium Rebecca Williams. Further meet¬ 
ings took place in London that week, including a trip to St Paul’s 
Cathedral, and finally both companions bade Lewis farewell and saw him 
on to his train at Paddington. 

Lewis described the appearance of the ‘Venusians’ as well dressed but 
not overdressed, with a ‘likeness to continental folk, dark, Jewish or per¬ 
haps Grecian. The male friend as tall as I, more than six feet. Well built, 
athletic, very strong I should say. Lady also tall, similar features. Both 
very healthy-looking.’ 

There is much that I have learnt, much I am not yet allowed to say. I have also 
been urged to be careful with whom I discuss this excursion of mine, for there 
are many forces who desire to know many things which could be of great 
advantage to the few ... Although I don’t know anything about this subject, 
it is magnetic power which drives these craft - points of magnetic pole. Each 
craft and space ship works to a purpose, whatever they do. Many space craft 
land on Earth in various countries ... Some are huge but these never land . .. 
and the planets have many contacts on Earth. Also many are living among us, 



210 


Alien Base 


and one cannot tell the difference. Medical men could, however, so I under¬ 
stand. 18 

I have known personally several contactees whose experiences parallel 
those of Hubert Lewis in cases where the possibility of collusion is very 
small, because, firstly, I made a point of not introducing the parties to 
each other until I had completed my independent investigations; while 
secondly, none of the stories had been published. 

Lewis’s comment that medical men could distinguish between an alien 
and a terrestrial is interesting, especially because it is now a matter of 
official record that a qualified physician has claimed to have physically 
examined an alleged extraterrestrial. As described in my book Alien 
Liaison , in 1976 a Mexican paediatrics and anaesthesia specialist, the late 
Dr Leopoldo Diaz, examined a man who said he came from another 
(unspecified) planet. The man proved to be normal in all respects, with 
the exception of his very white skin, extraordinary eyes with a wider iris 
than normal, and a claimed age of eighty-four, while otherwise appearing 
not older than in his forties or fifties. So taken aback was Dr Diaz by this 
encounter that he contacted the United Nations in New York and spoke 
there with a delegation. One of the delegates was Robert Muller, then 
UN Under-Secretary of Economic and Social Development, who told 
me that unfortunately he was subsequently unable to gain the interest of 
anyone in the UN in the case. 19 

THE OBSERVER 

Air Marshal Sir Peter Horsley, former Deputy Commander-in-Chief of 
Strike Command, has flown 90 types of aircraft, ranging from the 
Mosquito (in the Second World War), to the Spitfire, Meteor, Hunter, 
Lightning and Vulcan. He spent seven years in the service of Her 
Majesty the Queen and HRH Prince Philip as Equerry, and it was during 
this period that he had an experience which had a profound effect on him 
- an encounter with an apparently extraterrestrial being. 

In his fascinating autobiography, Sounds From Another Room , Sir 
Peter devotes a lengthy chapter to the subject of UFOs, including details 
of his investigations into sightings reported by pilots; details which he 
relayed to Prince Philip, who shared his interest in the phenomenon. 
Another enthusiast was Air Chief Marshal Sir Arthur Barratt, who 
retired from the RAF at the end of the war. Barratt introduced Sir Peter 
to a friend of his, a General Martin, who believed that flying saucers 
were extraterrestrial vehicles from another planet whose inhabitants 
were trying to warn us of the perils of nuclear war. Sir Peter was not 
convinced. 

One day in 1954, General Martin phoned Sir Peter, inviting him to 




Comic Shock 


211 


meet a Mrs Markham that night at her London flat in Smith Street, 
Chelsea. General Martin himself did not attend the meeting. There, in a 
dimly lit room, he was introduced to a ‘Mr Janus’. ‘Without any pre¬ 
liminaries,’ writes Sir Peter, ‘Mr Janus dived straight into the deep end 
by asking me to tell him all I knew about UFOs. He listened patiently ... 
At the end I thought I might be equally as direct and asked Janus what his 
interest was. He answered me quite simply, “I would like to meet the 
Duke of Edinburgh.” ’ Somewhat taken aback, Sir Peter replied that this 
would not be easy. ‘1 was about to add particularly for security reasons but 
thought better of it,’ he writes. ‘But it was here the strangeness of it all 
started - the man’s extraordinary ability to read my thoughts.’ Asked why 
he wanted to meet Prince Philip, Janus replied: ‘[He] is a man of great 
vision . . . who believes strongly in the proper relationship between man 
and nature which will prove of great importance in future galactic har¬ 
mony . . . perhaps you and I can discuss the subject first and you will be 
able to judge whether I am dangerous or not.’ Sir Peter devotes 14 pages 
to the ensuing two-hour discourse, of which selected excerpts follow, 

Per Ardua Ad Astra* 

Janus began by pointing out that Man was ‘now striving to break his 
earthly bonds and travel to the moon and the planets beyond’. He 
continued: 

But flight to the stars is Man’s ultimate dream, although knowledge of the 
vast distances involved in interstellar flight makes it appear only a dream. Yet 
perhaps after a hundred years or so . .. exploration of his own solar system 
may be complete and it is just not in Man’s nature to stop there . . . Just as 
tribes found other tribes and Christopher Columbus discovered on his trav¬ 
els unknown centres of ancient civilizations, so Man in his journeys through 
the universe may find innumerable centres of culture far more ancient than 
his own ... He will discover a wealth of experiences infinitely more startling 
and beautiful than can be imagined: an infinite variety of agencies and forces 
as yet unknown: great fields of gravity and anti-gravity where objects are 
accelerated across space like giant sling shots, even other universes with dif¬ 
ferent space and time formulae . . . 

Why does Man reach for the stars? His energies have never been solely 
directed towards material benefits alone. From the beginning of Man’s 
history he has striven . . . towards a spirituality and grace of which he was 
aware but could not fully comprehend. This drive to reach out beyond him¬ 
self has been the motive power behind some of Man’s finest achievements. 

So Man invading space for material gain or personal glorification alone will 
gain nothing, but Man searching to enrich his own spirituality and nature will 
come closer to understanding that God is Universal. 

•'Through hardship to the stars' - the RAF motto. 


212 


Alien Base 


A Dark Age 

‘The Earth is going through a Dark Age at the moment,’ Janus went on. 
‘Material possessions count more than a Man’s soul.’ 

Like a child, Man is preoccupied with his technological toys, which he 
believes will bring him riches and happiness. This shows up in the superfi¬ 
ciality of his culture and a careless disregard for nature. In his greedy quest 
for more complex machines Man is prepared to sacrifice almost anything - 
his natural environment, animals and even his fellow humans. The dreadful 
spectre of blowing up his world hardly makes him falter in this headlong 
rush. 

Cosmogony 

Janus expounded on cosmogony - the origin of life in the universe - 
seemingly lending support to the so-called ‘Big Bang’ theory, which he 
referred to as ‘the generally accepted theory’ of an expanding universe 
that ‘originated from the giant explosion of a vast area of high density gas 
which contained all the elements necessary for life and matter’ 

‘If you accept this theory,’ he went on, ‘then all galaxies contain the 
elements necessary for life and matter; even at the very boundaries of the 
expansion, the original explosion is still distributing these elements ... If 
you accept the theory of the expanding universe you accept that it is an 
ocean of galaxies with solar and planetary systems similar to our own. By 
the laws of probability there must be millions of planets in the universe 
supporting life, and within our own galaxy thousands supporting life 
more advanced than on Earth.' 

Earth is a young planet with its Sun a young mother. We may hazard a guess 
that other planets in [this] solar system are unlikely to support life except in 
possibly rudimentary cellular form and are no more than uninhabited and 
hostile islands. But imagine a galactic solar system somewhere in space with 
conditions similar to Earth except that its Sun is in the autumn of its life. 
Provided its inhabitants have survived wars and alien invasion, it is imposs¬ 
ible to imagine what super-technology and cultural advancement they have 
reached.. . 

A Prediction 

Janus predicted correctly that ‘perhaps in twenty years’ time manned 
rockets will be commonplace and the Earth will be girdled by satellites of 
all sorts and sizes’, and that there would be ‘great strides in the miniatur¬ 
ization of all our present technology, advances in navigational guidance 
and communication over vast distances’. 

Non-Interference 

Why then were aliens coming here? ‘The answer is that this traffic is only 



Cosmic Shock 


213 


a thin trickle in the vast highways of the universe,’ explained Janus. ‘The 
Earth after all is a galactic backwater inhabited by only half-civilized 
men, dangerous even to their neighbours . . 

Most of these vehicles are robot-controlled space probes monitoring what is 
going on. Some are manned in order to oversee the whole programme and to 
ensure the probes do not land or crash by accident. They must also ensure that 
evidence of their existence is kept away from the vast majority of Earth’s pop¬ 
ulation. You must be well aware of the damage which your own explorers have 
done by appearing and living among simple tribes, often leading to a complete 
disintegration of their society and culture . . . Such impact is far too indi¬ 
gestible and only the most developed societies can cope with such contact... 
The basic principle of responsible space exploration is that you do not inter¬ 
fere with the natural development and order of life in the universe any more 
than you should upset or destroy an ant heap or bee-hive ... You will have to 
grow a lot older and learn how to behave on your own planet, if indeed you do 
not blow yourselves up between times, before you are ready for galactic travel. 

The Observers 

‘Since time immemorial,’Janus continued, ‘there have been tales of ves¬ 
sels coming out of the sky bringing strange visitors. Observers do come 
among you and make contact on a very selective basis where they judge 
that such contact could not harm either party.’ 

These observers have studied Earth for a long time. With advanced medical 
science they have been fitted with the right sort of internal equipment to 
allow their bodies to operate normally until they leave. It is not very difficult 
to obtain the right sort of clothes and means to move around quite freely ... 
The observers are not interested in interfering in your affairs, but once you 
are ready to escape from your own solar system it is of paramount importance 
that you have learnt your responsibilities for the preservation of life every¬ 
where ... While you are still far away from travelling in deep space, such con¬ 
tacts will be infrequent and must be conducted with great secrecy .. . 

The observers have very highly developed mental powers, including 
extra-sensory, thought reading, hypnosis and the ability to use different 
dimensions . . . and rely solely on their special powers to look after them¬ 
selves. They make contact only with selected people where secrecy can be 
maintained. In the loosely-knit societies of the Western world, particularly in 
England and America, it is fairly easy with the help of friends to do this but 
not in police and dictator states. 

The discourse ended. Sir Peter bade Mr Janus farewell, saying that he 
would give consideration to the request to meet Prince Philip. 

‘What was Janus?’ asks Sir Peter. ‘Was he part of an elaborate hoax or 
plot, was he a teacher, an imaginative prophet of the future or what he 
had insinuated - an observer? Whatever else he was, Janus left me with 



214 


Alien Base 


the impression of a force to be reckoned with. He appeared to know a 
great deal and spoke with authority about space technology. If he was 
part of any kind of plot, it was my duty to report the meeting to the 
security authorities, particularly if it had anything to do with the Royal 
Family.' 

Immediately following the meeting, Sir Peter wrote a verbatim report 
and gave it to Lieutenant-General Sir Frederick ‘Boy’ Browning, 
Treasurer to Prince Philip. By this time. Browning had become 
fascinated by the subject, and was keen to arrange another meeting with 
Janus. Sir Peter was not so sure, but nonetheless made several phone 
calls to Mrs Markham over the next few days. There was no answer. 
Eventually he contacted General Martin, ‘who suddenly became distant 
and evasive’. Finally, Sir Peter went round to Mrs Markham’s flat in 
Chelsea. There was no sign of life. According to her neighbours, Mrs 
Markham had left in a hurry. ‘The curtain had dropped,’ writes Sir 
Peter. ‘Had Janus sensed that I was in two minds about informing the 
security authorities of my meeting? I never saw General Martin, Mrs 
Markham or Janus again.’ 20 

‘I thought I would see them again and discuss it further, and I thought 
it very odd that the flat was empty,’ Sir Peter told me in 1997, in the 
peaceful garden of his Hampshire home beside the River Test. I asked 
him for more details of the meeting with Mr Janus. ‘It was a winter 
evening,’ he began. ‘Mrs Markham’s flat was on the first floor and she 
introduced me to Janus in the drawing room, which was dimly lit by two 
standard lamps. He sat in an easy chair by the side of the fire. He didn’t 
get up when we shook hands. I sat in an easy chair on the opposite side of 
the fire and Mrs Markham sat on a sofa between us.’ 

Somehow, he was difficult to describe. What made it strange is that I have no 
lasting impression of him; he seemed to fit perfeedy in his surroundings. If I 
have any impression of him, it was his quiet voice which had a rich quality to 
it. He looked about 45 to 50 years old, with thinnish, slightly grey hair, and 
he was dressed in a suit and tie. He was quite normal in every way, except that 
he seemed to be tuning in to my mind, and gradually seemed to take over the 
conversation. Mrs Markham offered me coffee and didn’t interrupt the con¬ 
versation at any point. My inidal reaction was one of scepticism, but by the 
end of the meeting, I was quite disturbed, really. 

‘And what of the reaction at Buckingham Palace - apart from that of 
General Browning?’ I queried. 

‘Michael Parker, Prince Philip’s Private Secretary, thought it a joke,’ 
he replied. ‘But Prince Philip had an open mind.’ 21 

In 1969, Sir Peter Horsley was posted to the Ministry of Defence as 
Assistant Chief of Air Staff (Operations), responsible for the manage- 




Cosmic Shock 


215 


ment of air operations worldwide and reporting to the Vice Chief of Air 
Staff. In his remarkable autobiography, he reveals that in the Air Force 
Operations Room (AFOR) he discovered ‘a rich vein of UFO reports in 
the form of an Annexe to a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) where 
every report of a UFO, from whatever source, was logged, examined and 
filed; those which might have either public or political repercussions 
came to my desk’. 22 

‘There were a great many reports,’ he told me. ‘Of course, 95 per cent 
were explainable. Our main concern was the Soviets invading our air¬ 
space. But they were sent to the RAF’s scientific [and technical intelli¬ 
gence] branch for detailed analysis. I also learned that the Americans 
were treating the subject with great secrecy.’ 

‘I admire your courage in coming forward with such a story,’ I said. 
‘How do you feel about the ridicule you received from the press when the 
Janus story came out, particularly the article in The Times by Dr Thomas 
Stuttaford, wherein he states that you must have suffered an hallucina¬ 
tion or delusion?’ 23 

it didn’t take much courage, as I was only reporting what actually hap¬ 
pened,' he responded. ‘I've met a number of senior RAF officers who 
agree that something strange is going on. It's only the papers that make 
up that you’re hallucinating or have had an illusion ...' 

As to the incredible Mr Janus, the very credible Sir Peter Horsley 
retains an open mind. 23 

COSMIC CULTURE SHOCK 

In April 1961, the respected Italian journalist Bruno Ghibaudi took a 
series of photographs purporting to show several unusual flying craft on 
the shores of the Adriatic coast at Pescara. One of the pictures is of a craft 
so unusual as to render fakery irrelevant (see plates). At that time, 
Ghibaudi was well known to the Italian television and radio public as a 
reporter on scientific subjects, especially aviation and space travel. 

A year or so before taking the photographs, Ghibaudi had been asked 
by his superiors to prepare a television programme about people claim¬ 
ing to have seen flying saucers. Hitherto, he had paid little heed to the 
subject, but as he began to travel around Italy interviewing people, he was 
astonished to discover just how many had seen them, or taken photos, or 
met the occupants, or had recovered pieces of metal and other materials 
left by craft that had landed. He also learnt that many witnesses who had 
spoken out had either lost their jobs or had been subjected to such a bar¬ 
rage of ridicule or hours of grilling by officialdom that they had become 
thoroughly fed up with the whole matter and thus were loath to relate 
their experiences any further - especially to a journalist. Before embark¬ 
ing on his second tour of Italy, however, Ghibaudi was told by his bosses 



216 


Alien Base 


that the projected programme had been cancelled. By then Ghibaudi had 
become so impressed by the evidence he had gathered that he continued 
the investigation on his own. 

In the summer of 1961, a few months after taking the photographs in 
Pescara, Ghibaudi claimed that he had been invited to meet some of the 
‘space people’. As with Sir Peter Horsley, the meeting took place in a 
house, the location of which Ghibaudi declined to reveal. Several wit¬ 
nesses were present, including the ‘go-between’ who had arranged the 
meeting. In an interview with Le Ore in January 1963, translated by 
Gordon Creighton, Ghibaudi provided no detailed description of the vis¬ 
itors, confining himself mostly to what he had learnt from them, though 
he did say that some of them are so much like us in appearance that they 
were able to infiltrate. In their chance meetings with Earth people, he 
said, they sometimes communicate by gesture or telepathy, and some¬ 
times in the language of the person contacted. After all, he surmised, 
people who are so advanced technically are unlikely ro have any difficulty 
in learning our languages. 

The human form is ‘universal throughout the Cosmos,’ said Ghibaudi, 
‘and yet the idea of this has generally been rejected by Earthmen as 
impossible, no doubt because, as almost always, the truth is too simple to 
be accepted’. Apart from various superficial differences, beings through¬ 
out the universe resemble Homo sapiens, though Ghibaudi conceded that 
some of their internal organs may well be different; even perhaps per¬ 
forming quite different functions. 

These space visitors, Ghibaudi continued, were coming to our planet 
from many different worlds; hence some differences in body sizes, for 
example. What is happening now, he claimed, is simply that the ‘infant 
civilization of Earth-Man being at a point of particularly grave crisis, the 
space beings are prepared to reveal themselves to us more’. He con¬ 
firmed that the people he met, at least, were benevolent and desirous of 
helping us: their aim, to prevent nuclear catastrophe by intervening if it 
became unavoidable. He added that although these beings are many 
thousands of years ahead of us technically and scientifically, as well as 
ethically, they are not omnipotent. ‘They are men,’ stressed Ghibaudi, 
‘so we must not rely on them to get us out of our difficulties. For, not 
being infallible, even their efforts and their concern might not always suf¬ 
fice to avert disaster if something went wrong or some accident nullified 
their plans to avert the worst.’ 

On the subject of nuclear weapons, Ghibaudi pointed out that al¬ 
though extraterrestrials are capable of destroying such weapons, ‘the 
human heart would nevertheless remain unchanged. We would still 
retain the ability and, above all, the intention, to build fresh nuclear 
devices.’ Hence the extraterrestrials he met were working in a more sub- 



Cosmic Shock 


217 


tie manner to influence the minds of men. ‘They fully realize the dangers 
of any kind of broad prohibitive action. They know that in the last analy¬ 
sis Earth-Man must make his own way . ..’ 

Negative Comparisons 

Although nuclear weapons remained one of the principal reasons why 
the extraterrestrials were revealing themselves more to Earth people, 
Ghibaudi emphasized that there were also other reasons, which he was 
forbidden to disclose. 

The principal consideration in the minds of the benevolent visitors in 
adopting so reticent a policy towards us, claimed Bruno Ghibaudi, was 
not only the great danger that would ensue from panic - ‘tremendous as 
these dangers would no doubt be, where primitive and backward crea¬ 
tures like ourselves were concerned’ - but also that their open appearance 
among Earth people would lead inevitably to negative comparisons. 
Humankind might feel so deflated and inferior that it might lose hope. 
And how could politicians possibly cope with such a scenario? ‘Our 
masses are not yet ready for a revelation of this kind,’ Ghibaudi asserted. 
Do not let us forget that between their science and ours there is a gap of thou¬ 
sands of years, and that for this reason an ‘official’ mass descent of space 
beings from other planets would inevitably bring about comparisons between 
their worlds and ours. How could such an encounter be permitted? At an 
inner level, we should quite certainly be severely shaken as a result of it, and 
they do not want to alarm us in any way. And this is all the more so, inasmuch 
as there are cosmic laws which prevent the more evolved races from interfer¬ 
ing, beyond certain limits, in the evolution and development of the more 
backward races. For every race must be the maker of its own progress, pay¬ 
ing the price for it with its sacrifices, its failures, and its victories .. . u 


NOTES 

1 Didrio dc Cordoba, 1 May 1957, translated by Gordon Creighton, in Flying 
Saucer Review, vol. 11, no. 1, January-February 1965, pp. 19-20. 

2 Bowen, Charles, ‘A South American Trio’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 11, 
no. 1, January-February 1965, p. 20. 

3 Didrio de Cordoba, 22 August 1957, translated by Gordon Creighton, ‘UFO 
Bases in South America?’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 11, no. 4, July-August 
1965, pp. 30-1. 

4 Albanese, Renate, ‘Luciano Galli’s Contact Claim’, translated by Gordon 
Creighton from Domenico della Sera, June 1962, in Flying Saucer Review, 
vol. 8, no. 5, Scptember-October 1962, pp. 29-30. 



218 


Alien Base 


5 Lorenzen, Coral E., The Great Flying Saucer Hoax: The UFO Facts and 
Their Interpretation, William-Frederick, New York, 1962, pp. 146-7. 

6 Ibid., pp. 147-8. 

7 Fontes, Dr Olavo T., The APRO Bulletin, September 1957, Aerial 
Phenomena Research Organization, Alamogordo, New Mexico, in Jules 
Lemaitre, ‘A Strange Story from Brazil’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 6, no. 1, 
January-February 1960, pp. 9-11. 

8 Lorenzen, op. cit., pp. 150-3. 

9 UFO Investigator, vol. 1, no. 1, National Investigations Committee on Aerial 
Phenomena, Washington 6, DC, July 1957. 

10 Biihler, Dr Walter, SBEDV Bulletin, no. 4, Rio de Janeiro, 1 July 1958, 
translated by Gordon Creighton, in ‘A Brazilian Contact Claim’, Flying 
Saucer Review, vol. 7, no. 5, September-October 1961, pp.18-20. 

11 Biihler, op. cit., translated by Gordon Creighton, in ‘Remarkable Con¬ 
firmation for Adamski?’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 29. no. 4, July-August 
1983 (pub. April 1984), pp. 13-16. 

12 Creighton, Gordon, ‘The Humanoids in Latin America’, in Charles Bowen 
(ed.), The Humanoids, Neville Spearman, London, 1969, pp. 99-100. 

13 Faria, J. Escobar (ed.), UFO Critical Bulletin, Sao Paulo, in ‘Giant Space 
Ship lands in Brazil’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 4, no. 3, May-June 1958, p. 
24. 

14 Zinsstag, Lou, 'Monguzzi Takes Saucer Photos of the Century', Flying 
Saucer Review, vol. 4, no. 5, September-October 1958, pp. 2-4, and infor¬ 
mation supplied to the author by Lou Zinsstag. 

15 Letter to Anthony Wedd from Hubert Lewis, 27 May 1958. 

16 Trench, Brinsley le Poer, ‘Birmingham Woman Meets Spacemen’, Flying 
Saucer Review, vol. 4, no. 2, March-April 1958, pp. 5-6. 

17 Yogananda, Paramahansa, Autobiography of a Yogi, Self-Realization Fellow¬ 
ship, Los Angeles, 1951. 

18 Letters to Anthony Wedd from Hubert Lewis, 27 May and 8 August 1958, 

19 Good, Timothy, Alien Liaison: The Ultimate Secret, Century, London, 
1991, pp. 74-6. 

20 Horsley, Sir Peter, Sounds From Another Room: Memories of Planes, Princes 
and the Paranormal, Leo Cooper, London, 1997, pp. 180-96. 

21 Interview with the author, Hampshire, 21 September 1997. 

22 Horsley, op. cit., p. 201. 

23 Stuttaford, Dr Thomas, ‘Air marshal’s flight of fancy’, The Times, 14 August 
1997. 

24 Interview with the author, Hampshire, 21 September 1997. 

25 Creighton, Gordon, The Italian Scene - Part 3’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 
9, no. 3, May-June 1963, pp. 18-20, translated from Le Ore, 24/31 January 
1963. 



PART TWO 




Chapter 11 


Let Humanity Beware! 


Even if not all accounts of encounters with extraterrestrials are be¬ 
lievable, many reports are consistent, and the claimants remain con¬ 
vinced, sometimes after many years have passed, that something 
exceptional happened to them - something that changed their lives for 
ever. The following story from Argentina is a case in point that involves 
a witness of apparently irreproachable character. This case was investi¬ 
gated by Hector Antonio Picco, as well as by three of his colleagues (Jorge 
H. Cosso, Sotero Caraballo and Eduardo R. Rando), over a period of 
eight years. Translation is by Jane Thomas Guma. 

THE POSEIDON ADVENTURE 

One night in August 1956, Orlando Jorge Ferraudi was fishing as usual 
on the then deserted coast of the Northern Resort, where University City 
is now located, near Buenos Aires. 

It was about 11.30 p.m. and while I was getting my gear ready, I suddenly 
started to feel as if someone was observing me. I thought it was a ‘bum’ who 
usually hangs around that place but when I turned my head I saw ‘him’; a 
strange individual observing me. Comparing him with my 1.90 meters, I at 
once estimated he was more than two meters tall. His skin was very white and 
he had very light-colored eyes, no beard nor mustache, had short and neat 
hair, and he wore some kind of tight-fitting ‘overall’. 

It was a very dark night and I noticed him telling me mentally: ‘Take it 
easy, don’t be afraid, you mustn't be scared.’ Then he turned around, taking 
my arm, and placed some kind of‘powder box’ on top of the wall which, when 
opened, gave off a phosphorescent luminosity. This allowed me to see more 
details: his suit was a yellow-mustard color, had no wrinkles, zippers or but¬ 
tons; it had a hood in the back of its head. He was repeating: ‘Don’t be afraid, 
you will come with me, we will take a long trip.’ 

He picked up his device and we went down the steps towards the Rio de 
la Plata. I followed him like an automaton. He suddenly pointed his ‘little 
machine’ and I could see that a strange craft in the shape of an inverted saucer 
was approaching from the water. It stopped and a little door opened from 
which a ramp came out and a similar being walked towards both of us. Taking 
my hand very gently, he invited me to go inside the craft. 



224 


Alien Base 


On Board 

As soon as Ferraudi entered the craft, he noticed a girl who was five or six 
years younger than him (he was 18 at the time). By her clothes, he 
deduced that she was not one of‘them’, 

‘Don’t be afraid, they won’t hurt us, they are good,’ the girl said. ‘I 
came into this thing a while before you. My name is Elena, I’m from Villa 
Mercedes [San Luis province].’ Ferraudi continued: 

Suddenly ‘they’ came and told us, always telepathically, 'Don’t worry, you 
will have to undress and change clothes because the things that you wear have 
elements and germs that are alien to us.’ A woman appeared - taking Elena 
into another room - identical to several who came later: a beautifully propor¬ 
tioned body and dressed in the same clothes as the men; mouth, nose and ears 
were normal, but her eyes, which also seemed normal, were almost yellow. 
The haircut was like that of the ‘Valiant Prince’. 

They took the clothes I had taken off, following an order I could not dis¬ 
obey because their control over me was complete, and put [them] inside a 
machine that looked like a TV set, inside of which was a thick green smoke. 
They gave me an overall like the one they wore, ordering me [to] put it on. 
I told them that I couldn’t because it was too narrow, but they insisted. I 
saw it had a hole where the neck would be and put a leg inside, then the 
other, and the overall expanded and covered me completely! I also felt like 
I was wearing comfortable shoes when 1 walked, even though 1 was bare¬ 
foot. 

By this time Elena had returned, and the two were told that they would 
be taken for a trip underwater, to a place called Samborombon Bay. 
‘From there,’ continued Ferraudi, ‘we would emerge and fly at low alti¬ 
tude until we reached the coast of Uruguay, then we would cross the 
Atlantic Ocean to Africa, and then we would go up.’ 

‘We must take these precautions so we won’t be detected and thus 
avoid being seen as invaders or conquerors,’ the cosmonauts explained. 
‘We want your people to get used to us slowly, to see us as anybody else, 
because we are not strangers in this part of the universe.’ 

During his interviews with Picco, Ferraudi would ask that the sound 
recorder be turned off at instances when asked if he knew where his 
‘abductors’ came from. His off-the-record reply - though he now admits 
it openly - is interesting. ‘I’m not supposed to say it yet: they come from 
inside the Earth.' According to Ferraudi, in about 1950 the aliens had 
built two underwater bases, one on the Uruguayan coast in front of the 
Barra de San Juan, 45 kilometres from Buenos Aires, and the other in 
the Bahia Samborombon, about 150 kilometres southwest of 
Montevideo.' Supposedly another base had been established in the Gulf 
of Mexico, and it was there that Orlando and Elena were then taken for 
a brief visit. 



Let Humanity Beware! 


225 


An Underwater Base 

‘When the craft gained altitude,’ continued Ferraudi, ‘I noticed that the 
inner walls were smooth, and the only remarkable thing in its structure 
was the oblong windows: they took us, the little girl and me, close to one 
of them.’ 

We could see our beautiful planet, blue enormous, round, with white spots 
and some clouds, ‘hanging’ in a dark and silent space. Our Moon was an 
opaque grey. They told us: ‘We will now project a force-field that will attract 
us as if we were inside a tube.’ And immediately the Earth became as small as 
an orange. I felt no fear, no jolt to justify such a movement. They told us we 
would return at the same speed. 

When we started to return I screamed, ‘Careful, we will crash!' ‘Don’t 
worry,’ they said. ‘When we get very close we will create a field so as not to 
collide with Earth.' We entered the ocean, maybe through the Gulf of 
Mexico, and after a few minutes of travelling underwater, we saw an immense 
sub-aquatic dome, similar to a giant Eskimo ‘igloo’, where buildings, people 
in motion and several ships similar to ours, could be seen. One of‘them’ said: 
‘It is a base to recondition our ships.’ 

After leaving behind these five or six blocks of buildings submerged in 
the bottom of the ocean, Orlando and Elena were told that they would be 
submitted to a ‘test’, and that they should relax, so the result would be 
accurate. 

The Test 

One of the female crew members brought a tray with ten small ‘eggs', 
Ferraudi continued. ‘Five were for Elena, the other five for me, they said.’ 
The colors were red, yellow, brown, green and another I don’t remember. We 
had to chew and eat them, and we also had to drink a clear, thick liquid. When 
we swallowed them, neither of those things had any taste. 

We were ordered to lie down on some stretchers that were padded and had 
a U-shaped headrest, dotted with lights that were the same color as the little 
eggs we ate. We fell deeply asleep and when we woke up, Elena and I could 
read our mutual thoughts, which we thought was quite funny. We were told 
that the results from the test were good, that both of us were very healthy and 
that in this way they had thoroughly learned about our physical and mental 
states, and even the date of our deaths. We were also informed that they had 
reactivated what we call our pineal gland, and this is when they said (I realize 
that now) what was maybe the most important part of the experience: 

‘You will be useful to us in the future, because this gland is the only legacy 
that remained here from us, since of the five races that inhabit this planet, 
none is originally from Earth, they are only remnants of civilizations from 
other planets. The Earth has been known for a long time to be the zoo of the 
solar system. The races that exist today have suffered genetic mutations due 




226 


Alien Base 


to their own fault; when they mixed they caused hybridization, destroying 
the stock, but what remains from what they once were is the pineal gland. 
That is why we reactivated it, so when we think about you, you will immedi¬ 
ately hear a kind of hum inside your heads.’ 2 

In physiological terms, the pineal gland (or body) is defined as; 

A pea-sized mass of nerve tissue attached by a stalk to the posterior wall of 
the third ventricle of the brain, deep between the cerebral hemispheres at the 
back of the skull. It functions as a gland, secreting the hormone melatonin 2 
.. Some evidence suggests that it is a vestigial organ, the remnant of a third 
eye. 4 

Energy, God and Death 

Orlando and Elena were then invited to see the rest of the craft. A 
remarkable detail, corroborating what many others have reported, was 
that it was impossible to discern where the ‘perfect illumination’ came 
from. ‘It was as if the air was “turned on”,’ remarked Ferraudi. 

They showed us the engine: it was round, surrounding the edge of the whole 
ship, which was some 70 metres in diameter. It was formed by a scries of huge 
interlinked bobbins, and we could see other beings there, but wearing blue 
clothes, gloves and a kind of visor that covered their faces. Surprised, I asked 
them, ‘Is that what you fly with?’ The being that accompanied us answered: 
‘No, we don’t fly, we simply slide along a force-field. We use three energies: 
cosmic, magnetic and solar. We can move in space using all three or only one 
of them. With regard to our ship, which you call a flying saucer, it is built in 
one piece because when we built it, it is as if we molded it, and the windows 
are “adhered” .. .’* 

In response to a question about ‘God and death’, the ‘Gentleman from 
Poseidon’ (as Ferraudi called him) responded briefly: 

For us, what you call God is a form of absolute Energy, and as to death, it is 
only a change in molecular structure, a change of state. We only use sex to 
procreate, but we also have families and know love. Our lifespan is much 
longer than yours. Our children are already born with all the knowledge and 
keep perfecting it as they grow. 

The discussion then focused on the ‘indiscriminate and irrational use 
of nuclear energy on our part’, said Ferraudi, ‘which endangers not only 
our habitat which we share with “them”, but also the cosmic equilibrium. 
And showing us an instrument that one of them held in his hands, they 
made us look towards a window where a solid body was floating.’ 

The being pointed the device at it and a beam shot out which blew it up as 
soon as it made contact. He said to us: ‘This is pure energy; when it touches 
its objective it disintegrates it, it completely dissolves everything it touches.’ 



Let Humanity Beware/ 


111 


And finally, his last and unforgettable warning: ‘We want you to know this: 
| this] power is what we will regrettably use if you should endanger the stellar 
harmony. . 

Return to Earth 

Finally, Orlando and Elena were informed that they would be returned 
to the place from where they had been taken, and that for a time they 
would remember nothing. Later, memories of these events came back. 
For example, Ferraudi recalls that on arrival the beings asked him to 
bend down, then they pointed a very bright light at him, causing him to 
fall asleep. He woke up with the sun almost up and his body feeling very 
numb, without remembering whether he had caught any fish. He 
gathered up his fishing-tackle and went home. 

Fifteen days later, when he was again getting his fishing-tackle ready 
for another Saturday night of fishing at the same spot, Ferraudi reasoned 
to himself: ‘1 don’t know why I should go fishing, if I end up falling 
asleep.’ Suddenly, it ‘clicked’. ‘No! I didn’t fall asleep! I travelled in a 
flying saucer!’ 

‘I am sure I did not dream all this,’ Ferraudi told Hector Antonio 
Picco, the principal investigator. After questioning the witness repeat¬ 
edly over an eight-year period, all the while carefully studying his body 
language, Picco has concluded that Ferraudi is totally truthful. 
Furthermore, Picco is impressed by the fact that the beings evidently 
imparted to Ferraudi scientific and medical information well beyond his 
own knowledge. For instance, Ferraudi wanted to create a ‘machine’ to 
cure cancer. In the beginning of his manuscript, ‘Cancer: its origin and 
development’, he writes: 

The origin of this disease lies in the altered functions of the ductless glands, 
which due to their bioelcctrical balance having been upset, drain into the 
blood incomplete humors that lead to the irrational forming of the cells. This 
phenomenon leads to the immediate consequence of these humours circulat¬ 
ing throughout the whole body, since blood is a vehicle; thus incomplete 
humors look for the weakest organs where they can exert their influence 
within a favorable field. 

In July 1975, years after Orlando Ferraudi outlined this theory, Nobel 
Prize-winner (1937) Dr Albert Szenr-Gyorgyi came out with his ‘elec¬ 
tromagnetic theory’ of cancer, which was expressed in a very similar way 
to that of Ferraudi - despite the fact that the abductee had only the most 
rudimentary knowledge of medicine, 6 

A SUBTERRANEAN SPACE-BASE 

While walking and studying in an isolated area near Halmstad, Sweden, 




228 


Alien Base 


on the afternoon of IS August 1960, Olaf Nielsen, a student of agricul¬ 
ture, claims to have been abducted by extraterrestrials and taken to a 
‘subterranean space-base’. This is his incredible, fascinating story, as 
related in 1962 to an Italian businessman, Paulo Bracci: 

Suddenly I felt myself as it were in a dizziness and sucked up into the air. 
Despite my terror I had the presence of mind to note what was happening. At 
a height of some 20 metres from the ground was a flying saucer, and I was 
being drawn straight up to it. Finding myself in empty space like this, and 
carried off in such a manner, I lost consciousness. 

When I came round again I found myself stretched out on a very soft 
couch, inside a small cabin. The cabin was of a pale green colour, lit by a dif¬ 
fused light that had no source. One would have said that the light came from 
the walls themselves. Suddenly a door opened and a being came in. He was 
in every way similar to us, except that he was wearing an overall. He 
approached, smiled at me, and, in my own language, begged my pardon for 
the way in which I had been carried off. 

Nielsen went on to assert that he had been taken very rapidly to a sub¬ 
terranean space-base. 

It seemed at first as though I was out in the open, but instead of that I found 
that I was in a large brightly-lit cavern. In my curiosity, I asked the guide 
whether there were many of these bases on Earth. After a moment of hesita¬ 
tion, he replied that such bases had existed on the Earth for very many years 
past. Some were in Central Asia, where thousands of years ago, the guide 
added, there used to be flourishing cities. Others, he said, are on the high 
plateau of the Pamirs, and in Central Africa, and in South America, where the 
space visitors had adapted for their own purposes ‘secret pre-lncan cities’. 

Olaf Nielsen said that he was shown several saucers, as well as an 
apparatus for setting up a protective ‘magnetic curtain’ at the entrance to 
the base. His guide explained that these were precautionary measures, 
directed not against the people of our Earth, but against the ‘Dark Ones’, 
i.e., bellicose space-beings who supposedly came from the vicinity of 
Orion and who were desirous of conquering the Earth. 

Gordon Creighton shares my feeling that this case contains important 
information. ‘It is a fact,’ he states, ‘that Central Asia, now desiccated, 
once had great civilizations, and there is a persistent [native] tradition, 
not entirely supported by any evidence, that there still exist undiscovered 
Incan or pre-lncan cities in the Andes.’ 7 

FLYING SUBMARINES IN THE MEDITERRANEAN 
It was 06.35 on 3 June 1961. Giacomo Barra and three friends were in a 
motorboat off Savona in the Gulf of Genoa. The men had shut down the 
engine and were enjoying the early-morning breeze when suddenly the 



Let Humanity Beware! 229 

rocking motion of the waves increased and the boat began to roll badly. 

As Barra reported: 

We looked around, thinking it must be due to the proximity of one of the 
many tankers that put into our port. But nothing of the sort. At a distance of 
a kilometre from us, the surface of the sea was bulging like an enormous ball, 
with long billows going out from it on all sides. Dumbfounded, we were still 
wondering what it was when, suddenly, a strange contraption rose up from 
the bulge of the water. Perhaps it was one of the celebrated ‘flying saucers’, 
for the lower part of it looked like a plate upside down, and the upper part 
ended in a cone. While it was emerging from the sea, the water was thrust 
away all round it, as by a cushion of air. After it had emerged completely from 
the sea, it stopped still for a few seconds, at a height of 10 metres or so, and 
then rocked slightly a few times. Then a halo formed round the base of it, and 
the thing shot away very fast across the sea and vanished towards the north- 


A Report from Three Men in Two Boats 
The following is one of a number of reports of unknown ‘flying sub¬ 
marines’ collected from fishermen at the French fishing port of Le Brusc, 
between Marseilles and Nice. None of the fishermen was prepared to 
have his name revealed. This incident took place on 1 August 1962, 
between 23.00 and 23.30, on a warm, clear night. Here follows a report 
by the first witness: 

Suddenly, at about 300 metres from me, I saw a large metallic body, elong¬ 
ated in shape, and with a sort of chimney or turret in the middle. It seemed 
to be moving along slowly on the surface of the sea. Then finally it stopped. 
I said to my companions in the other boat: ‘A submarine has surfaced over 
there quite close to us. It doesn’t seem to worry them!’ 

One of the others replied: ‘It must be a foreign sub. It’s a model that I don’t 
know.’ Then there was some disturbance and waves coming around the sub¬ 
marine, and I was able to make out some frogmen coming out of the sea and 
climbing up on to the craft. We shouted to them. But at first they didn’t even 
turn round to look at us. My two companions, who had also seen them, and 
had heard me hailing them, also called to them with their loud-speaker ... 

There was no reply from their side. I had a good view of them. 1 counted 
about a dozen of them getting up onto the submarine. Then three or four of 
them did look around, and hesitated for a few moments, before vanishing into 
the ship. Finally, before rejoining the rest, the last man turned towards us and 
raised his right arm above his head and waved it for a few seconds in greet¬ 
ing, to say he had seen us, and then he disappeared into the craft like the rest. 

Up to this point, the three men had been convinced that the craft was 
merely a foreign submarine engaged in manoeuvres; that is, until it began 
to rise into the air. 




230 


Alien Base 


We saw the machine rise right up out of the water and hang there just above 
the waves. Then we saw lights go on; red, green, and a beam of white light 
shot out and reached as far as our boats. This beam was from a searchlight, 
and gave off no heat or anything unpleasant. Then [it] went out... the craft 
was lit up with an orange-sort of glow, and the red and green lights Went out. 
The machine started to rotate very slowly, from left to right, and rose to about 
20 metres above the sea. 

Its appearance was, as we now saw, like an oval or almost round dish, and 
of the dimensions of a medium-sized submarine. It hung there stationary 
for a few minutes. Then it began to rotate faster, its light grew brighter, and 
suddenly it shot off horizontally at high speed over the sea, amid a vast 
silence. Its light now took on the colour of red flame and it flattened out and 
came back right round over us in a beautiful curve while climbing all the 
while and increasing speed, and then it vanished as a tiny dot among the 
stars . . . Apart from the sound of the waves, we had heard no sound from 
it, and you can well imagine that we asked ourselves what it could possibly 
have been. 9 

A CRYPTIC ENCOUNTER NEAR FLORENCE 
Mario Zuccala had just returned home by bus to San Casciano, Val di 
Pesa, Italy, from Florence (20 kilometres away), where he worked as a tai¬ 
lor. It was 10 April 1962, a clear, starry night. Shortly before 21.30, as he 
was walking through some open ground in the district of Cidinella where 
he lived, the 26-year-old man felt himself‘struck and lifted up slightly by 
a sharp gust of wind.’ 



Fig. 16. (FSR Publications) 


An object, resembling two plates joined together with a diameter of 
about 8.5 metres, could be seen hovering some six metres above the 
ground. A cylinder of about 1.5 metres in width came down from the 
lower side of the machine until it touched the ground. Zuccala later con¬ 
jectured that the cylinder, once it had touched the ground, re-entered the 
machine again, leaving exposed one side of the cylinder in which a door 
opened slowly, while two small doors were gliding towards the outside, 
therefore they may have been two cylinders moving, one within the other 
(see Fig.16). In any event, from the opened door appeared an empty 


Let Humanity Beware! 


231 


space, illuminated by a diffused, brilliant white light. Three steps, about 
40 centimetres high, could also be seen. Then, as investigator Ceccarelli 
Silvano relates, two beings, about 1.5 metres tall, came out of the 
opening. 

Their bodies resembled ours in so far as they could be seen, i.e., as to exterior 
form, because as for the rest they were completely covered by an ‘armour’ of 
shining metal. Two antennae came out from their heads. .. These two little 
men took hold of him gently under his armpits and took him inside the object. 
Signor Zuccala went up the three steps and went inside. The interior was 
empty and shining all over with the same light which he had seen from out¬ 
side. [He] did not notice any detail in the interior of the object. The two 
beings left hold of him and Signor Zuccala remembers that he asked where 
that light came from but he does not remember having had a reply. He then 
heard a voice which did not come from the two beings with him but from the 
inner part of the object; according to Signor Zuccala this voice was like one 
amplified by a microphone and as if resounding in a vast space. 

The voice, speaking in Italian, gave Zuccala the following cryptic and 
rather silly message; 

At the fourth moon we shall come at one o’clock in the morning to bring you 
a message for humanity. We shall give notice of this to another person in 
order to confirm that that which you have seen is true. 

Whether the ‘fourth moon’ was supposed to have meant the fourth 
from the beginning of the year, which would have been the full moon of 
20 April 1962, or whether it meant four moons reckoning from the day of 
the sighting, was not clear. In any case, there was no return visit. 

The two beings escorted Zuccala from the craft. Suddenly he found 
himself at home at about 21.45, with no recollection as to how he had 
arrived there. His wife heard four strong knocks at the door and went to 
open it, rather alarmed because her husband usually knocked only once, 
and then lightly, and Zuccala himself could not remember having 
knocked four times. He looked dazed and frightened, and at first seemed 
unable to make up his mind whether to stay outside or go into the house. 
He told his wife about what had happened then went to bed, sleeping fit¬ 
fully. 

The next morning, Zuccala spoke to a colleague at work who tele¬ 
phoned a newspaper. The story appeared in all the papers that evening 
and on ensuing days. Journalists pointed out that there was not the slight¬ 
est evidence on the ground where the strange object had been, but by all 
accounts Zuccala, the father of four children, was an honest man. ‘He 
speaks with calm assurance of what he has seen,' reported Silvano. T 
asked him whether in his life he has had any hallucinations - to which he 
replied in the negative.’ 19 



232 


Alien Bose 


SPACIAL DILATION 

Cases such as the foregoing, involving a craft with a central cylindrical 
column containing the entrance, have been reported in numerous 
instances. The following case involves a similar such column, but one 
which led into a bizarre interior. The encounter, investigated principally 
by Joel Mesnard, is said to have occurred one Sunday evening in 
November of 1961 or 1962. 

The witness, Michel, about 19 years old at the time, came out of the 
local cinema at 17.30. It was already dark. Because his adoptive father was 
playing cards in a nearby cafe, Michel decided to return by himself on his 
bicycle to their isolated farm, near Bray-sur-Seine, 80 kilometres south¬ 
east of Paris. He had at least a kilometre left to ride when, coming from 
the left of the farm courtyard, he noticed a steady beam of light rising 
vertically to the sky. ‘The light was orange-red,’ reported Mesnard, ‘and 
the cylinder of light, with defined edges, rose very high in the sky. The 
closer Michel came to the farm, the less he understood what was going on 
... he put down his bike and walked around the buildings from the out¬ 
side of the surrounding wall.’ And there it was. 

He came upon an enormous object sitting on the ground, about 50 metres 
away. The upper cupola, which had portholes, was turning. The lower part 
was cylindrical and had a large vertical opening. He could see the brightly 
illuminated inside. It seemed that the lower side of the cylinder was not rest¬ 
ing directly on the ground, but that the device was suspended in the air. 
Michel continued to approach. He slipped under the flat, central part of the 
object to where he could look through the opening to the interior. 

Amazingly, like the ‘Tardis’ (telephone kiosk) in the British TV series 
Dr Who, the interior was immense, ‘incomparably larger than the 
cylinder seen from the outside’. It seems to me that this effect may have 
been due to a local distortion of the ‘space-time continuum’, a phenom¬ 
enon of a highly advanced technology, and one reported by several other 
witnesses coming in close proximity to or claiming to have gone inside 
extraterrestrial craft. Michel stopped just short of the opening, but did 
not go in. The interior of the cylinder is described thus: 

It was immense - at least six metres in diameter, which was about four times 
the diameter of the exterior. When he looked up, he could see nothing resem¬ 
bling a ceiling. All around the huge cylindrical room, he saw a variety of appa¬ 
ratuses holding moving lights, ‘luminous dials in many colours with 
characters that moved'. The dominant colors were ‘light violet and deep 
salmon’. Near, but not at the center, was a vertical column that seemed 
between 70 centimetres and one metre in diameter and that turned around its 
axis. What made this rotation visible was something like a cable, wound like 
a helix around the column, “like a snake’ 



Let Humanity Beware! 


233 


According to Michel's memory, he was watching this incredible spectacle 
when the sound of a fan, coming apparently from above, began and increased 
in intensity as the rotation of the column increased and the dials became 
brighter. That was when he was thrown back about four or five metres. The 
portholes on the cupola turned very fast. The opening closed and the cylin¬ 
der went up into the body of the object. The object became luminous - a 
bright orange. It tipped, rose, and in an instant disappeared toward the south. 
In five seconds, it looked like an ordinary star. 

Michel did not discuss his encounter with anyone until 1978. Ten 
years later, he spoke to Joel Mesnard, who points out that, despite the 
bizarre nature of the report, ‘Michel appears to be as credible as anyone 
can be and his story is clear and coherent.’ 11 

A TALE FROM THE VIENNA WOODS 
Bobby is a Filipino pianist, to whom 1 was introduced in 1962 by my 
friend John Bingham, the now well-known pianist, when we were fellow- 
students at the Royal Academy of Music in London. Though Bobby was 
aware at the time of my interest in the subject of UFOs - knowledge 
which may bear on the validity of his story - I include his alleged 
encounter here because not only did he seem genuinely disturbed by it, 
but also because there are parallels with certain other encounters which 
he could not have known about at the time. He described his experiences 
in a handwritten manuscript and gave it to me to do with as I wished, 
with the proviso that I never publish his full name. 

‘It is not that I could not bear to expose myself to a barrage of questions 
and cross-examinations under the trained eye of psychologists, psychi¬ 
atrists, medical doctors, priests, scientists and space experts,’ he wrote, 
‘but rather because the prevailing controversy would definitely affect my 
parents. I don’t want to hurt them because they want to lead a simple and 
peaceful life.’ 

From 1961 to 1963, Bobby studied piano at the Vienna Akademie. At 
the beginning of October 1962, he began to hear a peculiar, high-pitched 
sound from time to time. ‘It had a certain frequency of its own, and was 
immensely soothing,’ he wrote. At other times he would feel restless, 
accompanied by a presentiment that something was about to happen. 
Most peculiar were the ‘telepathic messages and mental pictures’ he 
began receiving at frequent intervals. 

I could not decipher the source, but I felt strongly that I was being contacted 
mysteriously through my brain and heart. How I knew this, I could not say. 
All I know is that I was under the control of some strange, mysterious power 
- evil or good, I didn’t know ... Sometimes, as I practised during the day, I 
would suddenly stop, because right in front of me, on the music, was super¬ 
imposed a picture of a place, a lovely green forest. I could not understand the 



234 


Alien Base 


significance of this picture, but deep down it had somehow a strong influence 
over me. The only thing that bothered me was that I didn't know where the 

These images and presentiments culminated in an encounter with a 
landed craft and its occupants on 8 October 1962. At around 16.00, Bobby 
found himself‘impressed’ to leave his flat. ‘A tram came by and 1 boarded 
it,’ he wrote. ‘People gazed at me sitting quietly, yet looking nervous. My 
mind went whirling round and round and my heart was thumping fast. I 
alighted at Schottentor and took another tram to Grinzing. I began to 
sense that something was going to happen before evening. How could I 
explain this strong feeling? Alighting at Grinzing, I took a bus to the 
Vienna Woods. Was I being guided toward a particular place?’ 

It was several minutes before I reached the place, in nice countryside, quiet 
and peaceful. It was a weekday and so very few people were strolling around. 
I went on, walking aimlessly, though it was as if I was being guided in a par¬ 
ticular direction. My mind suddenly went blank and my heart began to beat 
normally: I felt so calm and collected. After half an hour of aimless walking, 
1 found myself in a forest. My sense of direction told me I was no longer in 
the Vienna Woods. Where then? I could not pinpoint the exact location, but 
it must have been in one of the forests beyond the Vienna Woods. 

It was strange that being lost did not bother me at the time. Instead of 
going back, I went deeper into the forest. I looked up at the tall, forbidding- 
looking trees and saw that the sky was overcast and the wind blowing in gusts. 
I suddenly noticed and felt around me a strange stillness, like that before a 
storm, with no sound of birds twittering to break the sinister and deadly 
silence. The air was cold and biting and the mist arising... 

After several minutes of walking on in the gathering dusk, Bobby came 
to a small clearing in the forest. It was then that he heard a peculiar swish¬ 
ing sound behind a clump of trees. 

I looked up and saw the leaves and branches of the trees shaking, disturbed 
by the sudden rushing of air coming out from a strange object. I could hear 
the whistling sound the object made as it glided smoothly and nearer towards 
where 1 stood. I watched in awe, in great fear and deep curiosity... I wanted 
to run away but my feet were tied to the ground. I tried to scream in fright 
but my voice didn’t come out. I even attempted to close my eyes to blot out 
this unreality, but they continued gazing straight at the object. Was I being 
controlled by some power behind it? Was I seeing visions that were only 
created by my imagination? Or were they real? Thank God! It was real. 

The object, which was a flying saucer, landed on legs about 100 feet from 
me. A sliding door opened and a steel stairway protruded outwards then 
dropped to the ground. A figure came out, accompanied by two others. They 
were all dressed in a tight-fitting, black-brown suit which extended from 
their black, heavy-looking shoes up to their head. The only parts not covered 



Lei Humanity Beware! 


235 


by this suit were their faces and hands, which were covered by a thin, trans¬ 
parent, black material. Around their faces they wore a glass visor with two 
tube-like things starting under their chins, hanging on their shoulder blades 
and extending to their back, ending in a sort of oxygen tank, from where they 
took their supply to breathe. They had the faces of human beings and must 
have been about five feet five inches to six feet tall, with lean but strong-look¬ 
ing bodies. I could not judge the exact height because they were not all of the 
same size. 

Someone said something which seemed like a question, but I couldn’t 
understand a word. I remained quiet and watched for further developments. 
Hearing no reply from me, the leader pressed a button on a small box he was 
carrying and presently the box gave out a red light whose beams fell right 
before my eyes. I did not feel any effect at all, except that it was soothing to 
the eyes ... Maybe it did have an effect on me after all, because after a few 
seconds the leader switched off the red light and asked me a question in 
English, though he had a slight accent, rather similar to that of Germans. 

‘Would you like to be one of us?’ he said. 

‘No,’ I answered unemotionally, in a dry and uninterested tone. 

‘Would you like to visit our place?’ the leader asked, in a kind, gentle tone 
with no element of threat, harm or evil in it. 

I still answered, ‘No.’ Maybe I replied automatically, without stopping to 
think, or maybe it was because I was frightened out of my wits, but I cannot 
describe the exact feeling I had at that moment. All I can say is that I was 
somewhere between reality and unreality. 

The leader looked at me as I reached for something inside my coat pocket. 
‘Stop!’ he shouted, and I did so immediately, out of fear. A beam of red light 
fell on my pocket. Shortly afterwards he said, ‘You can take out your eye¬ 
glasses.’ How could he know my glasses were in my pocket? Was the red light 
responsible for this strange information? I put on my glasses and observed 
their countenance. The leader’s companions were all quiet, absorbed possi¬ 
bly in their own thoughts, sizing me up and the immediate surroundings. 

Tinally, the leader ventured forth a message which I have put down in 
writing as best as I can remember,’ Bobby continued. ‘The message may 
be interpreted by people in different ways, according to their own liking 
and thinking; however, I believe it has great significance.’ 

We come to your planet not for a visit but to deliver a message which may well 
serve as a warning to mankind. We cannot and must not reveal from which 
planet, star or moon we come from, because of the imminent danger of your 
people contriving all possible means and resources to conquer space and 
eventually to try and conquer us, although we could fight back and wipe out 
your mean and selfish humanity. 

Within your planet, there is continuous strife among nations for power and 
domination, and within every nation there is dissension and dissatisfaction 
among the masses. Within a family and family relations there is still enmity, 
intrigues and conspiracies, and within an individual’s mind there is still a 



236 


Alien Base 


continuous struggle between good and bad, evil and purity, generosity and 
selfishness. Why? Because there is so much selfishness on your planet, mean¬ 
ness, cruelty, wickedness and evil; more than good, purity and generosity. 

Observe carefully the great mass of humanity killing each other through 
centuries of war and strife. And for what purpose? For power and domina¬ 
tion; the intense desire to dominate and subjugate... There are thousands of 
good people on your planet, but the mean and selfish humanity outnumbers 
the good by millions and millions. 

Unless there is a radical change starting now, from an individual’s mind, 
within a family and family relations, within a nation and between nations, 
your people will all be destroyed by their own selfishness for power and dom¬ 
ination. Not until your humanity is completely wiped out will there ever be 
peace on Earth. The danger of atomic war between nations is imminent.. . 
It may not be now, it may be centuries from now, but the end will still come. 
There is no turning back for your people. Some day you will all be wiped out 
by your own greediness, and if a few good people live through, then they will 
propagate and breed an unselfish humanity and no longer will there be a con¬ 
tinuous strife between nations, within a nation, within a family and family 
relations, and within an individual mind, and there will be peace on Earth at 

There is a great and possible danger, too, that your humanity’s intense 
desire to conquer, eventually seeking power and domination over the other 
planets, will mean only a complete massacre for Earthmen, because other 
planets will retaliate with terrifying power and force, only because of their 
fear of your selfish humanity coming to their planets and spreading greed and 
evil around. This is our message. Transmit it and let humanity beware! 

‘The leader looked at me after he had finished his message and smiled. 
Was it out of pity, friendliness or mockery? I am sure it was a smile of pity 
because of the inevitable end the Earth will come to some day.’ 

As the leader was on the point of re-entering the craft, he turned round 
to address Bobby with a final message: 

Your seeing us will greatly affect your body as well as your life a great deal. 
There are three possible consequences for you: you might die in April 1963 
because of shock; we may take you to visit our place; or you might not die in 
April 1963, in which case you will lead a normal life again but with occasional 
mental and visual contacts from us until such time as we decide not to bother 
you again. 

‘The leader gave me a last farewell smile and went inside. The steel 
stairs went up, and the saucer got ready to leave,’ wrote Bobby. ‘I stood 
in the dusk and watched it whisk away, leaving me in a predicament I felt 
that something had gone away from my life. 1 cannot describe how lonely 
and helpless I felt 

Not technically-minded, Bobby provided few configurational details 



Let Humanity Beware! 


237 


of the craft, though he did tell me that a series of what looked like rec¬ 
tangular windows surrounded the central section, where the door opened 
out. I made a sketch in 1964, with his guidance. Interestingly, it accords 
with that made by the British engineer ‘H.M.’ in South Africa in 1951 
(see p. 92), whose account was not published until 1977. Also, his 
description of the box held by the leader — presumably a translating 
device — is reported in a number of other cases, such as the Leeds 
encounter in 1976 (see Chapter 17). 

Assuming some substance to this story, one can only wonder at the lack 
of perspicacity displayed by these particular extraterrestrials. Why select 
an individual of a nervous disposition who would hardly dare to tell even 
his own family - much less humanity at large - about his experience? 
Even if he had broadcast the message to all and sundry, would it have 
made the slightest difference? Of course not In any event, it is published 
here for the first time, nearly four decades after the event. 

*1 had to write down my strange experiences because only by writing 
could I attain peace of mind,’ wrote Bobby. ‘I seek no publicity of any 
kind because it will surely ruin me in my own country.’ 

Bobby was affected deeply by his experiences. Sometime in the spring 
of 1963 he did indeed suffer a mild heart attack in Vienna, as he had been 
warned might happen. Fortunately, he made a full recovery. Although no 
further physical contacts ensued, he told me that from the end of 1962 to 
July 1964, the extraterrestrials communicated with him by means of 
images, projected on to the mirror of his room in the house in 
Beckenham, southeast London, where he lived at the time with a number 
of other students, including John Bingham. The images seemed to be 
generated by, or projected from, a red light in the sky. From a small point 
on the window pane, a beam of red light fanned out until it struck the 
mirror on the wardrobe opposite. Within a circular image of about one 
foot in diameter, a face was seen and a voice heard. The discourses were 
mainly philosophical, Bobby told me, though he was reluctant to disclose 
any of the information he received in that way. 

During the time I knew Bobby personally, I found him to be a gentle 
and honest soul, not lacking in a keen sense of humour. He is, incident¬ 
ally, also a fine pianist who for many years was professor of piano at a 
certain university on the east coast of the United States. I find it difficult 
to believe that he fabricated the story, if only for the reason that he was 
invariably reluctant to discuss it - even with me. 

I asked John Bingham, who had known Bobby for longer than I had, if 
he believed the story. ‘I would say that I know he was telling the truth,’ 
he responded, ‘because of a certain extraordinary experience I had when 
he was having those communications, when I also saw an identical pro¬ 
jected image. That proved to me he was not telling lies.’ 12 



238 


Alien Base 


Bobby believed that most people who have had the ‘rare privilege’ of 
witnessing ‘strange beings or visions from other planets’ suffer from 
depression and other sequelae, owing to the futility of trying to prove 
their experience to others. Others can be driven to the point of madness 
or even suicide. ‘A few tend to laugh off these strange happenings, only 
to fail in the end,’ he wrote. ‘Others who are strong-willed and full of 
initiative and drive are able to forget about these incidents by erasing 
them from their minds, and are then able to settle back to normal 
lives. ..’ 


NOTES 

1 Picco, Hector Antonio, ‘Trip on board a UFO’, Cronica, Buenos Aires, 14 
December 1995, translated by Jane Thomas Guma. 

2 Picco, H.A., ‘UFO base in the Gulf of Mexico’, Cronica, 15 December 1995 

3 Concise Medical Dictionary , Oxford University Press, fourth edition, 
London, 1994, p. 511. 

4 Frohse, F., Brodel, M., and Schlossbcrg, L., Atlas of Human Anatomy, fifth 
edition, Barnes & Noble, New York, 1959, p. 150. 

5 Picco,‘UFO base in the Gulf of Mexico’. 

6 Picco, H.A., ‘God, UFOs and the Absolute Energy’, Cronica , 16 December 
1995. 

7 Creighton, Gordon, ‘The Italian Scene - Part 4’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 
9, no. 4, July-August 1963, pp. 10-11. 

8 Ibid., pp. 11-12. 

9 Bowen, Charles (ed.), ‘Sindbad the Sailor’, Flying Saucer Review Case 
Histories , supplement no. 14, April 1973, pp. 14-15, translated from 
Lumieres Dans La Nuit, Contacts Lecteurs, series 3, no. 5, January 1971. 

10 Silvano, Ceccarelli, 'Mario Zuccala’s Strange Encounter’, Flying Saucer 
Review, vol. 8, no. 4, July-August 1962, pp. 5-6. 

11 Mesnard, Joel, ‘The French Abduction File’, translated by Claudia Yapp, 
MUFON UFO Journal, no. 309, January 1994, pp. 7-9. 

12 Interview with the author, 9 February 1997. 



Chapter 12 


Continuing Contacts 


While some extraterrestrials in the 1950s and 1960s dropped by occa¬ 
sionally delivering doom-laden lectures to hapless contactees, most 
seemed determined to avoid any contact. Whatever their agenda, they 
continued to evince as much interest in rivers, lakes, seas and oceans (the 
‘hydrosphere’) as they did in drier lands. This should not be surprising, 
given that the hydrosphere constitutes nearly three-quarters of planet 
Earth. 

‘Having been a pilot in the Fleet Air Arm, I always was a firm believer 
in UFOs because of radar,’ Sir Mark Thomson, now a company chair¬ 
man and private pilot, informed me in 1995. ‘Even 30 years ago, military 
radars were sufficiently reliable and sophisticated as to be able to deter¬ 
mine whether an object was a UFO, a weather balloon, an aircraft - or 
somebody’s imagination!’ Sir Mark went on to relate an incident that 
occurred circa 1963, when he was a Royal Navy lieutenant flying twin-jet 
Sea Vixens, in the aircraft carrier HMS Victorious: 

During one foul night in the Indian Ocean an ‘object’ approached the carrier 
task force at extremely high speed and executed some extraordinary manoeu¬ 
vres physically impossible for any known man-made machine. Although 1 
was not a witness to the incident, 1 did learn that the object was tracked for 
some time by numerous radars in several ships. 1 2 

Other naval encounters occurred in 1963, some especially interesting 
ones involving unidentified submarines. According to former British 
naval intelligence officer and biologist the late Ivan Sanderson, sometime 
in that year the US Navy conducted a series of exercises off the coast of 
Puerto Rico to train personnel in the detection and tracking of sub¬ 
marines. More than five surface ships were involved, including the air¬ 
craft carrier USS Wasp , the command ship, as well as several submarines 
and aircraft. 

Sanderson learned that a sonar operator on a destroyer reported that 
one of the submarines had broken formation in an apparent attempt to 
pursue an unknown underwater object. Similar reports came in from all 
the other ships and from the sonar-equipped aircraft. According to one 
of Sanderson’s sources: 




240 


Alien Base 


no less than thirteen aircraft (including submersibles and aircraft, one must 
suppose) noted in their official logs that their underwater tracking devices 
had latched on to [a] high-speed submersible. All of which is said to have 
immediately been reported to COMLANT [sir] in Norfolk, Virginia. At this 
point, all the reports become somewhat vague and obscure. Various numbers 
of people, in various numbers of ships, are alleged to have observed or heard 
the sonar blips caught by their own operators, and all to have concurred in the 
fact that this object was being driven by a single [screw] al more than ISO knots 
■ . Thus, the object recorded above beat anything that we can do at the 
present stage of our technological development, by nearly four times in speed. 

Sanderson also learned that the unknown submarine was tracked for 
four days as it manoeuvred, including to depths of 27,000 feet. 3 (The 
greatest measured depth in the Atlantic Ocean is the Puerto Rico Trench, 
found just north of that island, at 30,246 feet, about which more later.) 

Yet another incident said to have occurred at sea in 1963 is reported by 
Dr Jacques Vallee, the distinguished UFO researcher, who learned that 
a US Polaris nuclear-powered submarine interrupted its lengthy sub¬ 
merged mission in the Atlantic to surface while all personnel were 
ordered to remain below. 

A few superior officers went up to the tower. They are said to have come back 
down with three humanoid bodies in clear plastic bags. The sub dived again 
and rallied to the East Coast at top speed. The [submarine] had accomplished 
none of its stated objectives, which included the test firing of several missiles. 
As for the beings, they looked like shaved monkeys. Perhaps they were indeed 
monkeys, recovered from a classified space experiment. 3 

Perhaps so. Unfortunately, Dr Vallee could not provide me with 
details that might help determine if that was or was not the case. Given 
the highly secure and single-purpose nature of the operations of ballistic- 
missile-armed nuclear-powered submarines of this period (and later), it 
seems odd indeed that such a mission would have been interrupted and, 
in effect, aborted in the manner described by Vallee. Only events quite 
exceptional would have led to such a change in the normal pattern of 
those operations. 

We return now to cases involving contact with extraterrestrials where, 
in contrast, the witnesses have provided an abundance of details, the 
better to verify the purported encounters. 

CONTACTS FROM COMA BERENICES 

Among the most frequently published photographs of flying saucers are 
those taken in New Mexico in the 1960s by the contactee Paul Villa. 
Curiously, little has been published either about the details of the pic¬ 
tures or about Villa and his claimed encounters. 



Continuing Contacts 


241 


Apolinar (Paul) Alberto Villa Jr. was born in 1916, of Native 
American, Spanish, German and Scottish descent. He claimed to have 
been taught telepathically by extraterrestrial intelligences from the age of 
five, and though failing to complete the tenth grade of school, he seemed 
to have been well versed in subjects such as mathematics, electricity, 
physics and mechanics. He also had an unusual talent for detecting 
defects in engines, generators and other such machines, a talent that 
served him well in his profession as a mechanic, first in the Air Force and 
later as a private citizen. 

First Contact 

Villa claimed that ten years prior to photographing his first series of 
saucers in 1963, he had been contacted by extraterrestrials while he was 
working for the Department of Water and Power in Los Angeles. At 
Long Beach one day in 1953, a strong inclination suddenly came over 
him to go down to the beach, a feeling he did not understand at the time. 
There, he said, he met a man about seven feet tall. Initially, Villa was 
afraid and wanted to run away, but the man called him by name and told 
him many personal things about himself. Villa realized that he was com¬ 
municating with a 'very superior intelligence’, and he then became aware 
that this being was a 'spaceman’. 

He knew everything I had in my mind and told me many things that had 
taken place in my life. He then told me to look out beyond the reef. I saw a 
metallic-looking, disc-shaped object that seemed to be floating on the water. 
Then the spaceman asked me if I would like to go aboard the craft and look 
around, and I went with him. 

Villa reported that the saucer occupants were human-like in appear¬ 
ance, though more refined in face and body. Also, they had an advanced 
knowledge of science, as evidenced by their craft and from the informa¬ 
tion given by them. 

Villa was informed that the galaxy to which our Earth belongs is as a 
grain of sand on a huge beach, in relation to the unfathomable number of 
inhabited galaxies in the entire universe. Because of the aliens’ techno¬ 
logical advancement, their spaceships could penetrate the Earth’s radar 
detection systems, so that they were picked up on our radar screens only 
when they chose to call attention to their presence in our skies. Their 
craft were constantly active around our planet, and more and more sight¬ 
ings and landings would take place to increase public awareness of their 
existence. They said they were here on a friendly mission to help our 
people; that they had bases on the Moon; that Phobos, one of the two 
moons of Mars, was hollow and had been artificially constructed, and 
that a Superior Intelligence governed the universe and everything in it. 5 




242 


Alien Base 


Second Contact 

On 16 June 1963, Villa’s space contacts telepathically told him to drive 
alone in his pickup truck to a site near the town of Peralta, about 15 miles 
south of Albuquerque. There, at 14.00, he claimed to have seen a flying 
saucer which he estimated to be about 160-170 feet in diameter. (In an 
earlier estimate he gave it as 70 feet.) The ship ‘posed’ and hovered at low 
altitude and at various distances as Villa took photographs of it framed by 
the trees, and sometimes showing his truck in the foreground. He used a 
Japanese-made Apus folding camera with a Rokuoh-sha f4.6 75mm lens 
(which I have examined), with 120 format Kodacolor film. 

Two of the photos show the ship as it flipped on edge with its lower 
part rotating, apparently, according to Villa, to indicate that the space 
people had created an artificial gravity-field within the craft; thus they 
remained completely comfortable no matter what attitude the craft 
assumed relative to a planet’s surface. According to the late Coral and Jim 
Lorenzen of the Aerial Phenomena Research Organization (APRO), one 
of these images (see photo no. 3 in colour plates) fails to show the 
branches of a tree in front of the craft as it should do were it 170 (or even 
70) feet in diameter as claimed, indicating that the ‘craft’ might be a small 
fake. It could be the case, though I have been unable to establish this to 
my own satisfaction, working from enlargements I personally repro¬ 
duced. Villa himself claimed that the branches of the tree were swaying 
from a ‘huge rush of wind’ generated locally by the craft, which might 
have accounted for the apparent inconsistency. In other photos from this 
series, where nearby vegetation and also Villa’s truck provide useful ref¬ 
erence points, the saucer appears to be a large object at considerable dis¬ 
tance from the camera, thus reducing the likelihood of fraud. 

At one point, Villa said, the craft hovered about 300 feet above his 
truck and caused it to rise slowly into the air to three or four feet for a few 
minutes. Also, when the craft was about a quarter of a mile away, a flex¬ 
ible, controlled ‘rod’ could be seen, apparently probing the ground and 
trees at different angles and curving into different shapes. While this was 
going on, a small, shiny, remotely controlled sphere, six to nine feet in 
diameter, exited from the main craft and disappeared behind trees, then 
reappeared and shot off at terrific speed, while glowing a reddish colour. 

When the craft hovered a few hundred yards away, according to Villa, 
between the tree tops, the bottom section was tinted ‘amber red, like hot 
metal’, but the colours changed from a ‘shiny chrome to a dull aluminum’ 
back to amber. At one point it became so bright that it shone almost 
unbearably. As it passed over Villa’s head, he felt not only heat from it 
but also ‘a prickly or tingling sensation all over my body’. 

Although the upper, domed structure of the craft could be turned 
independently from the lower section, Villa learned, it appeared to 



Continuing Contacts 


243 


remain stationary during flight, while the lower section rotated at differ¬ 
ent speeds. It made a whirring noise that sounded something like a ‘giant 
electric motor or generator’. At other times it gave off either a buzzing, 
‘pulsating’ noise, or it suddenly became totally silent as it moved about in 
different directions. 

At about 14.30, the craft landed on tripod legs and nine ‘beautiful’ 
crew members - five men and four women - disembarked through a pre¬ 
viously invisible door. These beings ranged in height from seven to nine 
feet, said Villa, and were well proportioned, immaculately groomed and 
dressed in tight-fitting one-piece uniforms. The colour of their hair 
ranged from ‘fiery golden’ to ‘polished copper’ to black. Villa was told 
that they came from the ‘constellation of Coma Berenices, many light 
years distant’. (Coma Berenices is a constellation notable for the large 
number of galaxies it contains.) In addition to communicating telepathi- 
cally, they were also able to speak many of our languages. During the 90- 
minute conversation with Villa, they spoke in both English and Spanish 
(Villa’s native tongue), but when conversing among themselves, they 
spoke in their own tongue, which sounded like ‘something akin to 
Hebrew and Indian’. 

The craft operated as a mother ship for nine remotely controlled mon¬ 
itoring discs, manoeuvred from instrument panels in the mother ship, 
Villa was informed. These could pick up imagery and sound from areas 
to which they were directed, and relay them to TV-monitor panels in the 
mother craft, a remote-viewing technology first described by George 
Adamski. 

The ‘vents’, clearly seen in some photos surrounding the central sec¬ 
tion of the craft, were openings possibly used for ‘collecting and ionizing 
atmospheric gases’. These vents were not used nor left open outside a 
planet’s atmosphere, where the magnetic lines of force are further apart, 
but, like the ‘door’ underneath the craft, were ‘hermetically sealed’, 
either manually or automatically, after leaving the atmosphere. 

The hermetic sealing is accomplished by removing all foreign substances 
from the basic elements of the parent metals, and a device is used to charge 
both pieces that are to be sealed together, either positively or negatively, 
depending on how a certain metal is naturally charged. The hermetic sealing 
of two or more metals cannot be accomplished unless they are first neutral¬ 
ized and then all charged with the same polarity. The carbon elements, how¬ 
ever, being amphoteric [chemically reacting as ‘acidic’ to strong ‘bases’ and 
as ‘basic’ towards strong acids] and combining equally well with positively or 
negatively charged elements, cannot be charged. 'Tubes’ are used to achieve 
hermetic sealing, using this carbon principle. 

Villa reported that some crew members carried a miniature version of 
these tubes that appeared made of an aluminium-like material, about 



244 


Alien Bast 


eight inches long and one inch in diameter, tapering slightly from the 
centre outwards, These devices could be used to paralyse any animal life 
form, including man. 

The ‘Coma Berenicians’ were peaceful and expressed a desire for 
Earthlings to rise above their aggressive, warlike instincts. Love, they 
said, is ‘the most powerful force in all the universe’ which, used correctly, 
could transform the hearts of men. ‘When the law of love rules the minds 
of the men of Earth,’ Villa learned, ‘then the people of other worlds will 
come in great numbers and share with us their advanced sciences .. . 6 7 

Third Contact 

Paul Villa’s second series of colour photographs was exposed at several 
locations in April 1965. The most interesting photographs from this 
series were those taken on Easter Sunday, 18 April, at about 16.00, in an 
area 20 miles south of Albuquerque, close to the bed of the Rio Grande 
river, one of several areas I visited together with Villa in 1976. At one 
point the craft, which he told me he estimated at about 150 feet in 
diameter, projected a beam of light that caused a small bush fire (a 
Biblical ‘burning bush’!), then another beam shot out and extinguished 
it. Smoke from the fire is visible in trees just below the craft, and just 
above and to the left of the tailgate of Villa’s truck (see photo 9). The craft 
also produced a ‘miniature tornado’, causing the lower branches of some 
trees to appear blurred. The turbulence was so high, Villa reported, that 
he thought he and his truck would be blown away. Suddenly, the wind 
ceased, as if it had been ‘switched off’, and the surrounding air became 
quite hot and there was dead silence. 8 

Based on the atmospheric hazing or ‘thickening’ effect, whereby an 
object becomes increasingly less well defined in imagery the greater its 
distance from a camera, these photographs show a large craft at con¬ 
siderable distance from Villa’s camera. 

The ship landed on telescopic tripod landing gear that can be seen pro¬ 
truding from the bottom of the craft in photos 7-8. The three crewmen 
had light-brown hair and tan skin and appeared to be about five feet eight 
inches tall. Villa claimed to have talked with them for nearly two hours 
about personal as well as general matters.' 1 

Villa told me that three scientists from the University of New Mexico, 
Drs Klein, Ulrich and Lincoln LaPaz, whose earlier and official UFO 
investigations are described in Beyond Top Secret, surveyed the landing 
site with a Geiger-counter and a magnetron, with negative results. 10 

Remotely Controlled Probes 

Among Villa’s most remarkable colour photographs are those showing 
various remotely controlled discs and spheres, which had been launched 



Continuing Contacts 


245 


from a manned disc, about 42 feet in diameter. This series was taken on 
19 June 1966, three miles west of Algodones and 30 miles north of 
Albuquerque. Photo 10, for example, shows a disc on the ground, one of 
several said to be from three to six feet in diameter, complete with tripod 
landing struts. According to Villa, the struts did not telescope into the 
saucer as in several other cases, but instead seemed just to shoot in or out 
of the bottom. Allegedly, the contraption protruding from the top of the 
dome was an optical device incorporating a combination of prisms and 
lenses. The entire unit could be retracted into the dome and could also 
swivel from the bottom in a circular motion, or oscillate from side to side. 

In photos 11 and 12, a similar craft is seen in the air and on the ground, 
accompanied by four or five spheres. The disc was said to be about three 
feet in diameter. On landing, it bounced, shot up in the air, then landed 
again in almost the same place. It made no noise while on the ground, but 
when it shot into the air, it gave off a sound ‘like an electric motor under 
load; an unsteady sound which seemed to pulsate’. The small spheres, no 
more than three inches in diameter, rotated around the larger, six-inch 
sphere when away from the disc. When close to the disc, however, the 
larger sphere always remained near the top, and the other spheres 
whirled around it at different speeds and orbits. The following is Villa’s 
additional, non-verbatim description of the appearance and behaviour of 
the spheres: 

They also manifest in a cascade of changing colors, from a shining aluminum 
to a gleaming chrome then to a bright red or the sparkling blue of a welder’s 
torch. With the smaller spheres, this change in coloration did not take place 
rapidly but was a gradual modulation from one color to another in a pulsat¬ 
ing rhythm. But with the larger sphere the manifestation was different: as the 
small spheres careened about the larger one, the latter would change instantly 
from its shining chrome-plated luminescence to red, blue, green and even 
yellow. At times, too, the spheres would get glowing hot, resembling the fre¬ 
quently seen and often reported ‘fireballs’. Their speed and maneuverability 
were incredible, for they flitted about like butterflies or raced crazily at high 
velocity in an array of orbital patterns. 

Some of the discs and spheres had ‘flexible, probing antennas resem¬ 
bling the antennae of certain insects’, though these are not visible in the 
photos." 

One of the many controversial aspects of Villa’s claims is his assertion 
that he himself made one of the remotely controlled discs, which is 
shown in photographs 14 and 15. This ‘experimental craft’, a few feet in 
diameter - similar to the others though lacking landing struts - was made 
according to ‘exact specifications’ given him by his ‘space friends’. The 
photos show the craft in flight, ‘monitored’ by one of the spheres. During 
this test flight, said Villa, the disc fell to the ground due to a ‘slight error’ 



246 


Alien Base 


on his part, though the fault was soon rectified. 12 

The problem here, of course, is that, apart from the absence of landing 
struts, it is practically impossible to differentiate between this disc and all 
the others, a corollary being that all the discs and spheres were manufac¬ 
tured by Villa. 1 do not believe that a useful argument is as simple as that. 
Even were this the case, one would have to ask how it was that Villa could 
have managed such an elaborate, impressive hoax, inasmuch as the discs 
and spheres evince no indication of being suspended or superimposed. 
William Sherwood, formerly an optical physicist for Eastman-Kodak, 
told me that, based on his studies of the prints and on his discussions with 
Villa, all three series of photographs are genuine. 

What became of the experimental disc? Villa told me that it had been 
destroyed when his house had burned down some time after the 1966 
contacts. He did show me a later experimental craft, also supposedly 
made with the guidance of his space friends, of a much deeper shape than 
the earlier one and 18-20 inches in diameter, which he had photographed 
during a test flight. Regrettably, perhaps suspiciously, he seemed re¬ 
luctant to let me examine it at close quarters, though it no longer 
functioned. 13 

Discussion 

In personal discussions and in correspondence with Paul Villa, I pointed 
out the inaccuracy of certain prophecies he claimed to have been given by 
his space friends, such as that 17 nations would have the atomic bomb by 
1966 (30 years later, however, one could make the case that 17 nations 
had some approach, at least, to an atom bomb), and that Ronald Reagan 
would be elected president in 1976 (though he was thus elected four years 
later). Furthermore, some of the information supposedly imparted to 
Villa is spurious. Mars, purportedly used as a base by his space friends, 
had ‘canals’ and even ‘pumping stations’ as well as ‘cacti and other plants’ 
in certain locations. Atmospheric pressure at ground level, he told me in 
1976, was equivalent to that at 12,000 feet on Earth (it is actually less 
than one-hundredth of the Earth’s), and there were some high stratus 
clouds (true, but this was already known). 14 Undaunted, Villa passed on 
the information he had acquired, as well as his photographs, to a certain 
Mr Martin at the Jet Propulsion Laboratory (JPL) in Pasadena, 
California, which runs NASA's unmanned space programmes, includ¬ 
ing the 1964 Mariner, the 1976 Viking and the 1997 Pathfinder probes 
of Mars. 

Was it possible, I asked Villa, that his space people had lied to him? 
‘No,’ he replied, ‘the space people, as you write, are not lying to so-called 
contactees, they just don’t divulge hardly anything about their plans. 
Why should they? People would just make money from that info; besides, 



Continuing Contacts 247 

how can humanity appreciate anything if it is beyond their capacity to 
understand?" 5 

Accusations that Villa made money with his photographs are without 
foundation: he lived in very modest circumstances, spending much of his 
time and money sending free copies of his colour photographs to all and 
sundry. ‘We write to premiers, kings, governors, leaders all over the 
world,’ he wrote to me. 16 In 1967, with Villa’s permission, Ben Blazs of 
UFO International copyrighted and sold sets of the photos, but Villa 
himself saw very little of the money, he told me. 

Villa claimed that the Walt Disney Studios, as well as the US Air 
Force, had studied the negatives of his photographs and could not fault 
them. Dr Edward Condon, who headed the University of Colorado’s 
investigation team which, sponsored by the Air Force, studied the sub¬ 
ject of UFOs from 1966 to 1968, reportedly said ‘they were the best he 
had ever seen’, Villa told me. 17 There is no mention of either Villa or his 
photos in the Scientific Study of Unidentified Flying Objects , edited by Dr 
Condon. 11 Villa reported to William Sherwood that after studying his 
camera and the negatives. Dr Robert Low, co-ordinator of the Colorado 
project, said that although the team knew that his pictures were ‘good’, 
they could not use them because the committee was committed to an 
essentially negative conclusion. 19 

Villa, who died of cancer in 1981, shunned publicity throughout hi! 
life, avoiding interviews with the media and rarely granting meetings, 
even to researchers. Perhaps this was due in part to some disturbing 
threats: he claimed, for instance, that he had been shot at once in his 
pickup truck (1 saw the bullet hole in the side window), and that heli¬ 
copters frequently hovered around him. Most researchers who did man¬ 
age to spend time with him found him genuine. ‘He certainly never tried 
to use his unusual personal experiences for monetary gain,’ wrote Bill 
Sherwood. ‘To me he seemed always humble and sincere, unimpressed 
by the attention he received from the Secretary-General of the United 
Nations, U Thant, who called him at his workshop to discuss his experi¬ 
ences with the extraterrestrials. ,2 ° During the 40-minute telephone call in 
1970, U Thant reportedly also discussed the worldwide UFO situation. 21 

In my own correspondence with him, Villa sometimes waxed effusive 
about politics and religion, seldom decisively addressing questions I 
posed. Our discussions in person in 1976 proved more fruitful. Three 
different groups of extraterrestrial beings were coming to Earth, includ¬ 
ing ‘certainly one that is good’, he asserted. ‘We are not under observa¬ 
tion, since they are here all the time.’ The space people had hundreds of 
bases within our solar system, including many on Earth, Mars and 
Venus. Some groups came here simply as tourists. Villa’s group liaised 
with about 70 contactees in the United States and about 300 worldwide. 



248 


Alien Base 


Their craft, when not completely silent, made sounds like a ‘musical saw’ 
or an ‘enormous generator’, or a ‘clanking noise’. Unlike some other 
craft, those belonging to Villa’s group did not ionize air as a by-product 
of propulsion. Water was as essential to them as it is to us, and it was first 
vaporized before being taken on board the craft. In spite of their ‘phe¬ 
nomenal abilities’, the space people were not superhuman, which brings 
forward an interesting point. 

Villa drove Lou Zinsstag and me to those sites in the vicinity of 
Albuquerque where he had taken photographs of craft and conversed 
with the crew (who would not allow themselves to be photographed). 
Though some were dressed in the traditional one-piece suits, he said, 
most were dressed in more typical human clothing. At one of these sites, 
beside the Rio Grande near Algodones, I asked him what the other crew 
members were doing while he conversed briefly with a man he assumed 
to be the pilot. ‘Oh, they were just bathing their feet in the river,’ he 
replied, without hesitation. 22 

At the time, that reply, delivered without so much as the bat of an eye¬ 
lid, astonished me. Eventually, though, it contributed to a growing con¬ 
viction that Paul Villa's story contains essential elements of truth. As so 
often is the case, contactees’ stories seem to mix truth and fiction, and 
something of a problem is presented, then, in sorting out the wheat from 
the chaff. 

A COMPELLING CASE FOR CONTACT 
Of all my case files involving extended contact with extraterrestrial, 
quasi-human beings, there are few which I have found to be completely 
convincing. The following one involves a witness whom I knew as a 
friend for 30 years; a compelling case for contact, and one in which I 
believe the extraterrestrials did not impart any false information. That 
is not to say that I believe every word, for a few inconsistencies in the 
witness’s story, owing to a tendency to embellish at times, emerged 
over the years. Because she was reluctant even to have the story pub¬ 
lished after her death, which occurred in 1995, 1 will refer to her only 
as Joelle. 

Joelle was bom in St Petersburg, Russia, of French and Russian 
parents, in 1914. During the Second World War she became a passive 
member of the Maquis, the French resistance to the Nazi occupation 
of France. After the war, she worked in Paris for the Ministry of 
Armaments, then came with her family to live in London. By a strange 
coincidence, her two daughters, Fredcriquc and Isabelle, were form- 
mates and friends of mine at the Arts Educational School, where, in addi¬ 
tion to the usual curriculum, we studied acting and dance (1952-53), and 
it was then that I first met Joelle. We were not to meet again until 1967, 



Continuing Contacts 249 

in the company of her husband and Lou Zinsstag, from whom I learned 
of Joelle’s contact story. 

It was in September 1963, when Joelle was in the Sheffield area con¬ 
ducting a house-to-house field survey for a market research company, of 
which she was a senior partner, that her extraordinary adventures began. 
The survey included questions relating to domestic appliances, and at 
one house she was struck by the number of very modem-looking gadgets 
in the living room, none of which was on the market. Queried about 
these, the lady of the house (whom I shall call Rosamund) responded that 
her husband was a scientist who regularly tested the latest devices to 
assess their practicability. 

Joelle noticed a large radio transceiver, and was informed by 
Rosamund that her husband was an amateur radio ham who talked with 
people all over the world. To demonstrate, Rosamund turned the set on, 
then left the room temporarily. Hearing a very brief message in English, 
Joelle wrote it down on the back of her survey notepad. When Rosamund 
returned, Joelle said that a message had come through, but did not say 
that she had written it down. Looking suddenly shocked, Rosamund 
switched the set off, explaining that her husband would never forgive her 
if he knew she had turned it on without his permission. 

Later, back at her hotel, Joelle pondered the message. ‘Will be at Blue 
John tomorrow, 4.30 p.m. - Mark’, it read. It meant nothing to her at 
first, but later she became intrigued and made a few enquiries. ‘Blue 
John’ turned out to be the Blue John Caves, near Castleton, in 
Derbyshire’s Peak District, the name deriving from the French bleu- 
jaunt, given to the blue fluorspar mineral found in Derbyshire. 
Wondering if perhaps she had uncovered a spy-ring, Joelle determined 
to find out what was going on. 

The Blue John Encounter 

On the afternoon of Monday 16 September 1963, Joelle set off by car to 
return to London, via the Blue John Caves. Arriving in the vicinity of the 
caves at around 14.30, she parked in a vantage spot overlooking a mildly 
sloping valley, ate her packed lunch, then waited to see what might 
happen. 

Shortly before 16.30, Joelle noticed a brilliant light in the sky, which 
she first took to be the Sun. It was moving, though, and when it came to 
rest, several hundred yards from her position, the brilliant glow ceased, 
and she could now see that it was a highly unusual disc-shaped aircraft, 
approximately 20 feet or so in diameter, supported on tripod landing legs 
with inverted mushroom-shaped pads on their earth-contacting ends. 
Beneath a cupola could be seen several circular windows. After a pause, 
a man - presumably ‘Mark’ - stepped out from the other side, dressed in 



250 


Alien Base 


a blue one-piece suit and a cloth helmet of some sort. Simultaneously, a 
man came out of a car parked some distance away and began walking 
down the slope towards the craft. Joelle recognized the car as the one that 
had been parked outside Rosamund’s house. After the two men had 
greeted each other warmly, Mark turned towards the craft and signalled 
briefly to the other (presumed) crew member(s), then both men headed 
towards the car and drove away. The craft began to glow and lift off the 
ground, retracted its landing gear, hovering momentarily before shooting 
off at a fantastic speed. 

A Safe House 

At that time, Joelle did not accept the fact of flying saucers. She assumed 
that this was a highly advanced aircraft, perhaps of Soviet origin, its 
occupant a spy liaising secretly with Rosamund’s husband. So she 
decided to wait before driving to Rosamund’s house, finding out what she 
could, then perhaps reporting the matter to the police. 

Half an hour later, she knocked at Rosamund’s door. The scientist 
(whom I shall call jack) opened the door cautiously and asked what she 
wanted. Joelle gave the excuse that she had interviewed his wife the day 
before and needed to double-check some questions. Jack made as if to 
close the door, but at that point Mark - now dressed in terrestrial clothes 
- interjected. ‘That’s alright, Jack,’ he said, ‘let her in.’ Reluctantly, Jack 
opened the door and showed Joelle into the living room. 

‘Why don’t you tell us the real reason you’re here?’ began Mark. 

‘Because I need to check some questions with Rosamund for my mar¬ 
ket research survey.’ 

‘That’s not true, Mrs-.’ 

Joelle swore to herself. 

‘Tut, tut,’ said Mark, teasingly. “You shouldn’t swear like that.’ 

How had he known that she had sworn? 

‘You came here,’ continued Mark, ‘because you saw my craft and 
wanted to find out what was going on, didn’t you?’ 

Reluctantly, Joelle admitted the truth. And from then on, she was ‘let 
in’ on the alleged alien liaison. The discussion that night lasted well into 
the small hours. At first incredulous, she gradually accepted the sensa¬ 
tional truth: that Mark was indeed a man from another world. For the 
next 15 months or so, Joelle had a total of about eight and a half hours of 
meetings with Mark and another member of his race, a man who, because 
his deep voice sounded like that of the actor Valentine Dyall, was given 
the name of‘Val’. These meetings reportedly took place at several loca¬ 
tions in England, including at least two in Joelle’s London flat, near Earls 
Court. 



Continuing Contacts 


251 


Alien Bases 

Joelle told me that, having no knowledge of the subject at the time, she 
began by asking some ‘rather stupid’ questions. Later, after reading a few 
books, she was able to make more sophisticated enquiries. Her first 
question, naturally, related to the origin of the visitors. This was one of a 
number of things that Mark and Val politely refused to discuss in precise 
terms: they responded merely that they came from a planet, similar in 
many ways to Earth, located in another solar system. They also stated 
that we are not alone in our solar system, and implied that they had bases 
on two (unspecified) moons of Jupiter. Interestingly, it was reported in 
1997 that signs of life, in the form of molecules containing carbon and 
nitrogen, had been detected on two of Jupiter’s largest moons, 
Ganymede and Callisto, based on data gathered by NASA’s Galileo 
spacecraft. For many years, some astrophysicists have speculated that life 
might exist in the warm water lying beneath the frozen surface of Europa, 
the smallest of Jupiter’s moons. 23 Thousands of years ago, said Mark and 
Val, their people had bases on Mars and on the Moon. They also revealed 
that they had a number of bases on Earth, located in South America, 
Australia, the Soviet Union and elsewhere (though not in the United 
Kingdom). 

Although Homo sapiens originated on Earth, the visitors explained 
that, to speed up human evolution, they had on two occasions genetically 
‘interfered’ with us. While similar in appearance, Earth humans and 
extraterrestrial humans evolved separately. Because of their advanced 
evolution, aliens live longer than Earth people. Val and Mark were 
extremely refined, fair-skinned, with perfect teeth and a not immediately 
noticeable peculiarity about the eyes. On one occasion, Joelle says she 
saw, though did not meet, a dark-skinned man who was a member of the 
same group. 

Mark and Val said they were liaising in great secrecy with a team of sci¬ 
entists from several nations, having initially established their English 
contacts through Jack eight years earlier. None of those names was ever 
revealed to me. In addition to Jack, Joelle met two other such scientists, 
one of whom worked at the Woomera rocket range in Australia, set up 
jointly with Britain at the end of the Second World War. As to the pur¬ 
pose of the extraterrestrial missions, this was another question that they 
declined to answer precisely. ‘We are not here for entirely philanthropic 
purposes,’ was all they volunteered on one occasion. Whatever the mis¬ 
sion, it demanded considerable dedication from the scientists, some of 
whom ostensibly worked with the aliens at the bases, or even (on rare 
occasions) travelled to their planet, necessitating their going ‘missing’. 
Ideally, therefore, those without family responsibilities were involved. 

In Alien Liaison , I discussed an alleged alien base located at, or in the 



252 


Alien Base 


vicinity of, Pine Gap, America’s most secret facility in Australia, some 1S 
miles from Alice Springs. According to information supplied by 
Professor J.D. Frodsham in 1989, three hunters returning from an all- 
night trip witnessed a ‘camouflaged door open up in the grounds of the 
base and a metallic circular disk ascend vertically and soundlessly into the 
air before disappearing at great speed’. 24 

Officially a ‘Joint Defense Space Research Facility’ sponsored by both 
the American and the Australian defence departments, Pine Gap serves 
principally as a downlink site for reconnaissance and surveillance satel¬ 
lites. 23 It was established by the Central Intelligence Agency in 1966 and 
is run jointly by the CIA and the National Security Agency (NSA). 
According to one American observer: ‘The Australians have accorded the 
[Pine Gap] facility remarkable hospitality. People and cargo routinely fly 
in and out, entering and exiting without the burden of customs or immi¬ 
gration checks. The place enjoys almost extra-territorial status.’ 26 
According to one of my sources, formerly a CIA employee, Alice Springs 
is considered to be a ‘reward’ posting - which is not to say that an actual 
alien base exists, or did exist, at Pine Gap. Nevertheless, there are some 
intriguing early references to the alleged existence of such a base, located 
‘1,400 miles from Sydney’ (which could place it in the Alice Springs 
area), in letters written by George Adamski. In 1951, for example, he 
wrote to a correspondent as follows: 

Under very interesting circumstances I had previously been told of a big 
space laboratory 1,400 miles from Sydney [which] has been in operation for 
the past three years. I was made to understand that space ships could be land¬ 
ing there [and that] a communication system could be going on through this 
laboratory between earthmen and spacemen ... It wasn’t given to me as def¬ 
inite fact, but as a possibility from which I was to draw my own conclusions. 22 

If there is any truth to this rumour, the implication is that the labora¬ 
tory was functioning in about 1948, years before Pine Gap was officially 
known as a satellite intelligence-gathering and relay base. In replies to 
questions from the same correspondent a few months later, Adamski 
explained that he had acquired the information in 1949 from a scientist 
attached to the Chilean government, a former commanding officer in the 
Chilean Air Force. ‘A communication system is definitely going on,’ 
wrote Adamski, ‘not only there but in [the United States] as well.’ 28 29 

Regarding the existence of alien bases in the United States, in January 
1952, prior to his first contact in the Californian desert in November that 
year, Adamski spoke with a marine engineer from Alaska who claimed 
that spacecraft regularly landed in a certain area in that state. According 
to the unnamed engineer, the ‘space people’ he saw ranged in height from 
three to six and a half feet. 30 



Continuing Contacts 


253 


I include the foregoing information from Adamski for three reasons: 
first, it pre-dates any publication relating to the existence of alien bases 
on our planet. Secondly, as discussed in Chapter 7, Joelle claimed to have 
met a similar group of extraterrestrials to those who contacted Adamski 
in 1952 (and who regrettably were obliged to discredit him). Joelle’s con¬ 
tacts also informed her that they had a base in Australia, location not 
specified, where they liaised with a team of human scientists. Finally, one 
of my most reliable and well-connected sources has learned that a 
number of such bases exist worldwide, and that a limited liaison between 
extraterrestrials and our people was established in the late 1940s. 
Interestingly, the locations of two of these bases were given as somewhere 
in Alaska - and Pine Gap. 

Continuing Contacts 

On one occasion, Joelle said she was invited to inspect a spacecraft at 
close quarters. This turned out to be the same craft as the one she saw at 
a distance in September 1963. On this occasion, in the vicinity of the 
Welsh border, one of the scientists was being taken to a base in South 
America. Joelle told me she was poor at judging sizes, but estimated that 
the width of the landing legs was about three inches and that the inverted 
mushroom-shaped pads were possibly an inch or so wider. Apart from ; 
series of round portholes, no further details of the craft could be dis¬ 
cerned, as it was dark at the time. Also, the entry point was out of her 
view. She was not allowed to go aboard, though she did touch the hull, 
which later caused her to feel ‘slightly ill’. Shortly afterwards, she and 
Rosamund drove up to the top of a nearby hill to watch the craft take off. 
With a sound as of a swarm of bees, it rose vertically, slowly at first, then 
shot off, illuminated, at an angle. 

Joelle said she helped the visitors in a number of ways. Once, they 
asked her to translate a certain Russian manuscript at the British 
Museum. Also, on more than one occasion, she cooked meals for them at 
her London flat. Both Mark and Val had ‘perfect manners’, enjoyed 
drinking wine with their food, and had a great sense of humour. They 
stressed a desire to be treated normally. ‘We may be thousands of years 
in advance of your people,’ they said once, ‘but please don’t look on us as 
angels.’ 

Mark and Val did not rely on telepathy to communicate between them¬ 
selves; they also spoke their own language. When communicating at a 
distance with the scientists, they used a type of radio system with pre¬ 
arranged ‘secure’ frequencies, using tiny radios strapped to their wrists. 
More sophisticated methods of communication could be used, as Joelle 
was to discover. Arriving back at her flat on one occasion, she was 
astonished to see Val standing in the living room. 



2S4 


Alien Base 


‘How on earth did you get in?’ she asked, as she went to greet him. 

‘Don’t come near me - don’t touch me!’ he said. ‘Just calm down. I'm 
not actually here.' 

Val went on to explain that what she saw before her was a projected 
image, effected mentally between minds as a means of enhancing com¬ 
munication from a distance. ‘Maybe it was, as he said, just a picture in my 
mind,’Joelle told me. After a short discussion and a farewell, the ‘picture’ 
simply faded out. This particular phenomenon has been reported in a 
number of contact cases, including that of Cynthia Appleton (see pp. 
207-8). 

Thf. Home Planet 

On one occasion at her flat, by means of a certain technical device, Joelle 
said that her friends projected for her some three-dimensional still 
images (similar to our holograms, though more realistic) of their home 
planet. Certain kinds of trees could be seen, as well as houses, mostly 
circular in shape though not all of identical design. Tubular-shaped 
vehicles, which travelled just above the ground, were shown. These 
could hold up to four people and were programmed to stop at certain 
points, unless otherwise desired. Animals shown included cows, similar 
to certain of our breeds, though smaller. 

Joelle learned that weather on the home planet was not as drastically 
contrasted, neither were the seasons the same, as on Earth. The aliens did 
not eat as much as we do, and consumed a great deal more fish than 
mammal meat, which was seldom eaten. Fruits were plentiful, and a 
fermented drink similar to wine was produced. 

No separate countries or governments existed, as such, though from 
what Joelle could gather, there was a type of‘council’. No social or racial 
divisions existed. Though there was no money, a system of‘credits’ was 
used. One did not get something for nothing and everyone had to con¬ 
tribute to society in some way. Even those normally engaged in, for 
instance, scientific work, took their turn at performing more menial tasks. 
Couples restricted themselves to two children, who matured much 
earlier than do humans. There were no hospitals: injuries caused by 
accidents, for example, could be healed by sophisticated machines. 

Music was enjoyed, though different from ours. Stringed (not bowed) 
instruments were mentioned. Val and Mark made a point of emphasizing 
how much they liked our music. 

It was implied that travel between the visitors’ solar system and ours 
was ‘virtually instantaneous’, Joelle told me, though they declined to give 
her any details as to how this was effected. In any case, she felt that she 
probably would have been unable to understand the modus operands. 
They did explain, however, that certain differences in their planetary 



Continuing Contacts 


255 


environment made it difficult for them to live on Earth without periodic 
‘re-conditioning’, a process similarly reported by some other contactees, 
such as Howard Menger. From what little Joelle was told about this, I 
infer that these difficulties related principally, perhaps not wholly, to 
atmospheric pressure and gravity. While Mark and Val were working 
here, it was necessary for them to undergo re-conditioning or ‘decom¬ 
pression’ about every four days, either in the spacecraft (including a giant 
carrier craft) or at their bases. They required no more than four hours’ 
sleep a night. 

The visitors pointed out to Joelle that, were she to visit their planet, 
‘you may not see us’. This could imply that they existed in another 
dimension or ‘frequency’, though Joelle was inclined to the view that our 
less well-developed physical senses, vis-a-vis our limited perception of 
the electromagnetic spectrum, would be responsible for this condition. 
She always emphasized to me that, in spite of their technical, mental and 
spiritual advancement, her extraterrestrial friends were physical beings, 
requiring physical sustenance and transport. She also had the impression 
that they were not necessarily dependent on planets, their carrier craft 
being completely self-sufficient. 

The Home Office 

In 1967, three years after the last of her meetings with Mark and Val, 
Joelle claimed to have received a visit from two representatives of the 
Home Office in London. The men began by asking questions relating to 
the ‘disappearance’ of Jack and Rosamund and some of the other scien¬ 
tists, who by this time were supposedly living ‘elsewhere’, perhaps at a 
base in South America. Joelle presumed the men had located her from 
one of the missing scientists’ address books they found at his home. In 
any event, they were knowledgeable about the story. Joelle politely 
refused to answer certain questions. ‘You don’t really expect me to 
answer that, do you?’ she would reply; a response which seemed to please 
the investigators. 

A Spiritual Link 

During the course of her meetings with Mark and Val, Joelle learned a 
great deal. She did not tell me everything, and on a few occasions I noticed 
that when she might have been on the point of a keen revelation, she sud¬ 
denly stuttered to a halt. She believed that somehow she had been hypno¬ 
tized to prevent her disclosing any sensitive information; a hypnotic block 
effected without recourse to any conventional induction method. 

If Mark and Val were reluctant to discuss their origin and technology 
and the actual purpose of their mission, they were sometimes more forth¬ 
coming on other subjects of discussion. Generally, they explained once, 





256 Alien Base 

they preferred to exert their formidable powers of telepathy when influ¬ 
encing humanity, though on occasions they had interfered directly. They 
would do so in future, for instance, in the event that a nuclear catastro¬ 
phe threatened to destroy our planet—perhaps with severe consequences 
extending beyond it which might impinge on them. Other extraterres¬ 
trial beings were coming here, they said, who were not so well disposed 
towards us, though no further information was made available. 

In addition to the visitors being responsible for genetically ‘upgrading’ 
the human race on two occasions in our distant past, it was alleged that a 
few of our great spiritual leaders, including Jesus, were genetically 
‘engineered’ by a type of artificial insemination, in an attempt to instil 
Earth people with spiritual concepts. The reluctance of this particular 
group of extraterrestrials to communicate with humanity at large was due 
mainly to the fact that we simply are not psychologically or spiritually 
ready for contact with a higher civilization, and it is necessary for us to 
evolve independently. Essentially, Joelle was informed, we are spiritual 
beings, surviving beyond death. 

For Joelle, the experiences with her friends remained a treasured and 
vivid memory for the rest of her life. 

Seldom do we hear nowadays of encounters with spiritually advanced 
extraterrestrials. Have they left our planet for ever? Are they alive and 
well but engaged in less ambitious projects? In any event, I often wonder 
if a principal reason behind their presence here on Earth is related to the 
very survival of our planet - as an alien base. 

'What a beautiful planet,’ they once remarked to Joelle. ‘Such a pity 
you’re destroying it...' 


NOTES 

1 Letter to the author from Sir Mark Thomson, Bt., 31 January 1995. 

2 Interview with the author, 14 February 1997. 

3 Sanderson, Ivan T., Invisible Residents: A Disquisition upon Certain Mailers 
Maritime, and the Possibility of Intelligent Life under the Waters of the Earth , 
The World Publishing Co., New York, 1970, pp. 20-2, 

4 Vallee, Jacques, Forbidden Science: Journals 1957—1969, North Atlantic 
Books, Berkeley, California, 1992, p. 309. 

5 Green, Gabriel, "The Paul Villa Saucer Photos’, UFO International, The 
Amalgamated Flying Saucer Clubs of America, Los Angeles, no. 21, 1964, 
p. 3. 

6 Ibid. 

7 Blazs, Ben, ‘Villa Set No. 1* (fact sheet), UFO International, PO Box 552, 



Continuing Contacts 


257 


Detroit, Michigan 48232,1967. 

8 Blazs, Ben, 'Villa Set No. 2’, UFO International, PO Box 552, Detroit, 
Michigan 48232, 1967. 

9 Green, op. cit., p. 4. 

10 Interviews with the author, Albuquerque, New Mexico, 1-2 September 
1976. 

11 Blazs, Ben, ‘Villa Set No. 3’, UFO International, PO Box 552, Detroit, 
Michigan 48232, 1967. 

12 Ibid. 

13 Interviews with the author, 1-2 September 1976. 

14 Letter to the author from A.A. Villa, 1 June 1977. 

15 Letter to the author from Villa, 25 June 1975. 

16 Letter to the author from Villa, 17 July 1976. 

17 Letter to the author from Villa, 24 August 1976. 

18 Condon, Dr Edward U. (Ed.), Scientific Study of Unidentified Flying Objects, 
Bantam Books, New York, 1969. 

19 Saunders, David R., and Harkins, R. Roger, UFOs? Yes! Where the Condon 
Committee Went Wrong, Signet Books, New York, 1968. 

20 Letter to the author from William T. Sherwood, 1 June 1970. 

21 Letter to the author from Sherwood, 28 January 1982. 

22 Letter to the author from Sherwood, 1 June 1970. 

23 Arthur, Charles, ‘Vital ingredients of life are discovered in Jupiter’s 
moonfs]’, the Independent, London, 3 April 1997. 

24 Letter to John Lear from J.D. Frodsham, then Foundation Professor of 
English and Comparative Literature, Murdoch University, Western 
Australia, 13 December 1989. The story was additionally confirmed to the 
author by Professor Frodsham. 

25 Burrows, William E., Deep Black: The Secrets of Space Espionage, Bantam 
Press, London, 1988, p. 190. 

26 Pilger, John, A Secret Country, Vintage, London, 1992, p. 199. 

27 Letter from George Adamski to Emma Martinelli, 30 September 1951. 

28 Letter from Adamski to Martinelli, 24 November 1951. 

29 Letter from Adamski to Martinelli, 16 January 1952. 

30 Ibid. 



Chapter 13 


Neither Rhyme nor Reason 


So conditioned are we to the notion of alien omnipotence and the perfec¬ 
tion of their technology that when something goes wrong, as reported in a 
number of cases described earlier, we are inclined to doubt, or to wonder 
if the event was staged as pan of an elaborate deception. Why should this 
be so? The following case, reported by two witnesses, is unique inasmuch 
as it involves the observation for over four hours of humanoid operators 
carrying out repairs to a landed disc, followed by the arrival later of another 
disc whose operators rendered assistance to the disabled craft. The 
incident, investigated in depth by Ted Bloecher and Dr Berthold 
Schwarz, occurred in an area one mile north of New Berlin, New York. 

Mary Merryweather (pseudonym), who majored in music at Ithaca 
College, was staying with her mother-in-law at the latter’s home when 
the incidents occurred, on 25 November 1964. At 00.30, Mary stepped 
out on to the porch and noticed what she took to be a shooting star, fol¬ 
lowed by another, more unusual light, which came down and ‘followed 
along the brook’ a few hundred yards away from the house. ‘It occurred 
to me that this was an unusually bright light, a brightness and intensity I 
had never seen before,’ Mary told Bloecher. ‘Not only was the visible part 
[of the sighting] strange, but there was a kind of low hum, like a drone- 
hum combination [that] never changed pitch.’ She called her mother-in- 
law to join her on the porch. 

During the next half-hour, three cars passed by: two slowed down, one 
stopped briefly, with the light hovering above or following them. The 
occupants of the cars, apparently frightened, accelerated away from the 
scene. Before the arrival of the third car, the lighted object had come to a 
stop several hundred feet directly across the road from the house. ‘Then 
it kept going north north-west and went up on the side of this mountain 
about 3,800 feet away,’ said Mary. ‘Then it settled down just below the 
ridge of this hill.’ Because of the cold night air, Mary returned to observe 
the lighted object from inside the house, together with her mother-in- 
law, as their English springer spaniel lay quivering at their feet. 

The Humanoids 

The two women took turns observing the object through five-power 



Neither Rhyme nor Reason 259 

binoculars. There seemed to be movement around the landed object. 
Mary reported that; 

the light seemed to be underneath it and it apparently was sitting on legs, 
because the bottom of the object was up from the ground, far enough so that 
these - I’ll call them ‘men’ for lack of knowing who they were or what they 
were, because they were built like men - could get under this thing, if they 
got down on their hands and knees, or sitting down; they lay down under it 
like a man does working under a truck or a car . .. 

I could see them coming around this vehicle and they brought with them 
their boxes of tools, like tool chests or something, and one of these chests took 
two men to carry it.. . They appeared to be coming around something in a 
semi-circular movement, as if they were walking around a round vehicle ... 
a light on the bottom of the object [was] so intensely bright I couldn’t make 
out the form of the object... 

There were about five or six [men]. They seemed to be dressed in some¬ 
thing like a skin diver’s wetsuit. It was a dark colour, and their hands were 
visible apart or out from the wrist of the suit; their skin was lighter than the 
suit they were wearing... I could see the muscular build of them, their spinal 
column; they were standing on two legs like we do, and they worked with arms 
and hands that were like ours. The only difference was that they were slightly 
taller than we’re accustomed to seeing people [an estimate based on the size of 
the bushes she could see in the lower part of the field on the hillside]. 

The only ones I could see well were the ones up close to the vehicle where 
the light was shining on them, and most had their backs to me, or their sides 
... They seemed to have hair, like we do [which] seemed to be well-barbered, 
fairly close to their heads. The profile of their faces... was like the profile of 
a man’s face. 

Tice Repairs Begin 

The men seemed to be working with tools ‘like a man would use to work 
on a piece of machinery that had gone bad, or [on] a motor,’ Mary con¬ 
tinued. ‘They took something out from underneath the center of their 
vehicle and let it down, gently, with their hands.’ Sometime prior to this, 
another vehicle was seen to land on the crest of the ridge, just above the 
first one. 

Four or five more ‘men’ joined the ones who were working on the ground. It 
was just after [the first crew] had removed whatever they took out of the cen¬ 
ter of it, which seemed to be like a motor or a power supply . . . The four or 
five other ‘men’ joined them and they also began to work. I could see ‘men’ 
standing in the foreground, down the hill a little way. I could see them cut¬ 
ting long - what looked like - heavy cable, because it arced, or fell in a loop 
as they were holding it between them. They were cutting it in exact lengths 
and they worked quite hard at doing this ... the cable appeared to be dark, 
and they used it in fixing this piece of machinery. 



260 


Alien Base 


It was by now 01.15. The men left the motor or power source directly 
underneath where they took it from and set to work on it. ‘And while I 
watched them work, and cut and struggle,’ said Mary, ‘they were walk¬ 
ing around, were sitting or half-lying down, leaning on an elbow, and 
kneeling. There were about ten or twelve men in total - 1 couldn’t be 
absolutely sure, because they were coming and going, and bringing 
things and taking things back to the vehicles. I couldn’t see the figures 
without the binoculars . ..’ 

Frightened, Mary's mother-in-law wondered whether she should call 
the police or some government agency. ‘Well, I hate to,’ Mary 
responded. ‘You know, if we call someone, they’re going to come up here 
with guns and firearms and bother them, and they just want to get that 
thing fixed and get away.’ 

I’m sure they saw me after that car decided it would go away ... My mother- 
in-law [also] felt that we were watched. She said, ‘1 am sure that they realized 
that we did not call the authorities, that we weren’t going to, and wouldn't.’ 

At exaedy four-thirty by our kitchen clock, the ‘men’ got down in a team 
and there were nine of them - there were some behind, a group of three, that 
were evenly spaced around this piece of machinery, and there was a line of six 
‘men’ behind them; they seemed to be holding something, or seemed to be 
ready with something .. . Then, all together, they picked this thing up and 
moved it directly upwards and tried to fit it into the bottom of this vehicle. It 
went right up, maybe eight inches, and then it seemed to go off at an angle. 
You could see the bottom, like a plate, or like the bottom of a motor [which] 
was tilted, instead of being level. As they tried to get it in, they were turning 
it, too, like screwing a screw in; they turned it a little, and it went back a little 
bit, but it wouldn’t go up there the way it should. 

They got it up into the vehicle, I think, except for the last three, maybe 
four, inches of it, and it was just off, it wouldn't fit, it wouldn't go... so then 
they carefully retraced everything they had done and set the thing back down 
on the ground again. They worked on it another ten minutes, and then they 
tried it again, the same method, and it wouldn’t go . . . They retraced their 
steps again and put it back down on the ground and worked pn it another ten 
minutes. These ‘men’ that had been cutting cable, cut something else that 
was like cable, only it seemed to be a little lighter, and they cut shorter pieces. 
They worked, and they were hurrying ... 

This attempt also failed. Finally the men took out the piece of 
machinery, set it on the ground and worked on it yet again, for about 
three minutes. ‘And they very carefully picked the thing up and it went 
back in.’ 

The Departure 

There was just enough light for Mary to see that the part of the vehicle 



Neither Rhyme nor Reason 


261 


facing the witnesses was round, and that the bottom section tapered 
upwards. She estimated its diameter at 25 to 30 feet, and the length of the 
landing legs (which also tapered) at six to seven feet. ‘Now, whether it 
tapered up to a cone-shape or was rounded on top, I don’t know,’ Mary 
added. ‘Just before they got this thing into the centre - and it seemed to 
be cylindrical, I don’t know what the top was like - this intense light came 
out from underneath the vehicle ...’ 

It was a minute before five minutes off five. I could see them quickly pick up 
everything they could pick up and the ‘men’ from the vehicle above them on 
the hill ran with their material up there; these ‘men’ were running like a man 
running with something extremely heavy, two‘men’ with the tool boxes-the 
one that required two to carry. There were at least two more tool boxes . . 
because there were two other ‘men’ who were laboriously running. They ran 
around the side and I didn’t see them after that. It looked like they were pick¬ 
ing up cable pieces these other men had left just before that; they ran up the 
hill with them, and T didn’t see them any more, either. 

At five minutes off five, the vehicle on top of the hill left. It went straight 
up -1 don’t know how many feet - and it shot off, almost like an instantan¬ 
eous disappearance, in the direction that it had come from, west south-west. 
A minute later the other vehicle rose straight up, went to the crest of the hill, 
rose a little further again, and shot off in the same direction that the other one 
had left in, at the same speed. And that was it. It had been a long night... 

Traces 

The following afternoon, Mary and her mother-in-law went up to the 
site where the incident had taken place. Mary found three places where 
‘something cone-shaped and round at the bottom, very heavy and spaced 
in a triangle about 15 to 20 feet to a side, had set into the ground’. 

They were at an angle like they were the legs of a tripod, [with] something on 
it that was very, very heavy, because one of them had set on a rock and broken 
it, and gone down a little ways into the ground where it was bedrock, or 
maybe shale. The impressions on the bare ground that didn't have any rock 
underneath were about 14 inches wide and up to 18 inches deep. The shal¬ 
lowest hole was about four inches deep. There were two sets of these, one at 
the top of the hill and one down the slope. They were set like an equilateral 
triangle - one hole wasn’t any further from the other two. 

On the Monday after the sighting, Mary went with her husband to 
search for traces of the cable, and about 50 or 60 feet below the lower set 
of holes he found a three-inch piece of peculiar wrapping. 

It looked like a strip of something they had missed. The outer part of it looked 
like the wrapping, something like a brown paper towel, only it wasn’t like our 
paper towels ... And in the center of it - it had been cut out laterally - you 
could see the strip, maybe an inch long more or less, something that looked 



262 


Alien Base 


like very finely shredded aluminum strips [about Via of an inch thick] laid in 
there, and it was as long as the piece of paper and had been cut, and had the 
color and feel of aluminum, although it wasn't aluminum [and] didn’t behave 
like aluminum. Aluminum will crumple and this didn’t crumple. You 
couldn't crease it. 

Though Mary’s husband was a chemical engineer, he did not press for 
analysis of the material, and although the family searched for the sample 
when Bloccher interviewed Mary in 1973, unfortunately it was not 
found. Interestingly, a number of UFO landing sites elsewhere in the 
United States in the 1960s involved residue of aluminium-like strips. 
These strips were often found in bundles, and in some cases may relate 
to aluminium ‘chafT discharged from Air Force planes for radar counter¬ 
measures, though it is either coincidental or curious that some have been 
found near UFO landing sites (and, in one instance, inside the mouth of 
a cow believed to have been mutilated by aliens). Investigator Don 
Worley sent me samples from a 1968 landing site he investigated in 
Indiana. I arranged for analysis of a sample at the Oak Ridge laboratories 
in Tennessee. Unfortunately it was lost, so I then sent two more samples 
to a private laboratory in Kent, England. According to Dr Anthony Fish, 
the samples consisted of aluminium with trace impurities of iron and sil¬ 
icon, similar in composition to 99.5 per cent aluminium cooking foil, the 
major impurities of which are silicon and iron. 

‘Mary Merryweather has at no time sought publicity as a result of her 
unusual observation,’ Ted Bloecher commented. ‘To the contrary, she 
has gone out of her way to avoid it and has discussed the incident with no 
more than a dozen people, most of whom were family members or close 
friends.’ 1 2 3 

OF ROBOTS AND HUMANOIDS 

Encounters with human-type beings accompanied by apparent robots 
have been reported all over the world. One of the most intriguing such 
cases occurred in the Cisco Grove area of Placer County, near the Loch 
Laven lakes of Northern California, in September 1964. A thorough 
investigation was conducted by Ted Bloecher and Paul Cerny, whose 
report I summarize here. 

During a hunting trip on 4 September, 28-year-old Donald Smythe 
became separated from his companions. For protection, he decided to 
spend the night in a tree on a mountain ridge. After about two hours, he 
noticed a light moving in a ziz-zag manner. Believing it might be a heli¬ 
copter, he climbed down and lit three fires on large rocks to attract atten¬ 
tion. The light made no noise. It made a sweeping half-circle around the 
witness, moving over a canyon on the south side of the ridge. In addition 










264 


Alien Base 


to the bright light, Smythc could see three illuminated rectangular ‘pan¬ 
els’, which remained motionless for four or five minutes. From one of 
these panels came a flash, and a dark object of some sort, with a flashing 
light on top of what looked like a dome, came down, appeared to move 
around the witness, then landed. Shortly afterwards, Smythe heard 
sounds of something ‘crashing through the brush’ on the mountainside. 

A few minutes later, two ‘humanoid’ figures emerged, one followed by 
the other, dressed in ‘some kind of light-coloured, silver or whitish-look¬ 
ing uniform, with puffs around the sleeves and joints’, wearing a kind of 
hood and with what appeared to be large, dark eyes (see Fig. 17). The 
beings came and stood under Smythe’s tree. 

Not long afterwards, more noises were heard in the brush. A ‘robot¬ 
like’ being, about five feet in height, with glowing reddish-orange eyes, 
dressed in a kind of metallic uniform, approached the tree. Moving in a 
less articulated manner than the others, it scattered the embers of the fire 
with its arms, then returned to the foot of the tree. As the humanoids 
watched, the robot emitted a puff of odourless white vapour from its 
mechanical-looking mouth, rendering the witness unconscious for a few 
minutes. 

On coming back to his senses, Smythe, alarmed, began to set fire to 
some match books, then his hat, and threw them at the robot. The latter 
backed off, together with the humanoids, but they all returned once the 
fire had died down. This process was repeated for several hours. In des¬ 
peration, the witness shot three arrows at the robot, causing a flash of 
light, but no apparent damage, each time. For further security, Smythe 
tied himself to the top of the tree with his belt. At one stage of the night, 
the robot was joined by another, similar entity. Again, a puff of gaseous 
vapour was directed at Smythe, who once more blacked out for a short 
period. The two humanoids then tried to climb the tree, but Smythe 
managed to keep them at bay by shaking the tree violently. The first robot 
continued emitting puffs of vapour, with the same effect on the witness. 

‘And I tried all kind of goofy things, you know; just tried to distract 
them,’ Smythe recounted. ‘I tried yelling and making all kinds of noises 
.. They didn’t seem to hear, [though] when I would shout, these two in 
human form would look up ... All I could see was a black patch of face, 
and the eyes. I couldn’t make out any features of the face.’ 

Finally, at dawn, following further harrowing events and the sounds 
and temporary appearance of at least one more white-clad humanoid, 
both robots and humanoids departed in a ‘cloud of fog’. 

Shock 

On Smythe’s return home, his wife was shocked by his appearance and 
demeanour: 



Neither Rhyme nor Reason 


265 


I knew something was wrong when I saw him. He was as white as a sheet 
[and] his eyes were dazed looking. He spoke to me in a very shaky voice. He 
had dark circles under his eyes. He looked terrible. His arms were covered in 
pitch, also his pants and T-shirt. He had small scratches all over his arms. He 
came in and didn’t even say hi, hello or anything ... He then proceeded to 
tell me about his Cisco Grove experience. His hands shook and his voice was 
subdued ... he was on the verge of crying [and] was so badly shaken that he 
took a week off from work. 

Suffering from chest pains and breathing difficulty, Smythe went to 
his doctor for a check-up, but nothing wrong was found. For a year and 
a half after the incident, Smythe suffered from terrible nightmares about 
the robots. Beginning in 1969, he began to experience occasional loud 
buzzing noises in his cars, which he believed were associated with the 
beings he had encountered. On one occasion, while camping with his 
wife, the buzzing sounds preceded a sighting of a ‘big light’ which moved 
swiftly over a ridge, followed a few seconds later by another, smaller 
light. 

Investigations 

Donald Smythe made out a report of the incident which initially was sent 
to Victor Killick, a retired professor of astronomy, who forwarded it to 
officials at Mather Air Force Base. On 25 September 1964, Smythe was 
interviewed at his home by a Captain McCloud and Sergeant R. Barnes 
of McClellan Air Force Base. Smythe offered his full co-operation and 
handed over one of his arrowheads for analysis. Nothing unusual was 
found. He also provided the Air Force investigators with a map of the 
area. Before leaving, the investigators suggested the following possible 
explanations for the incident: (a) a group of Japanese; (b) a group of 
teenagers playing a prank; or (c) a group of Air Force trainees. 
Suggestions of drinking and hallucination were also voiced by McCloud. 

Two or three weekends later, Smythe returned to the scene of the 
incident, together with his brother, a friend, and one of the hunters. 
Apart from a few of his cigarette butts, none of the materials he had left 
there could be seen. 

Gvilian investigators were impressed by Smythe. ‘Having just re¬ 
viewed the case files on this fascinating and unusual encounter,’ wrote 
Paul Cemy in 1995, 'there is absolutely no doubt in my mind that this 
incident is factual and authentic. I have spent considerable time and 
many visits with the main witness, and along with the testimony of the 
other witnesses, I can rule out any possibility of a hoax.’ 4 


AERIAL ENCOUNTER OVER JAPAN 

Captain Yoshiharu Inaba was flying a TOA Airlines Convair 240 from 



266 


Alien Base 


Osaka to Hiroshima, Japan, on 18 March 1965, at 19,06, when a 
‘mysterious, elliptical, luminous object’ appeared, just after the plane 
passed Himeji. 

‘I was flying at the time at an altitude of about 2,000 metres,’ reported 
Captain Inaba. ‘The object followed for a while, and then stopped for 
about three minutes, and then followed along my left wing across the 
Inland Sea for a distance of about 91) kilometres until we reached 
Matsuyama on Shikoku Island. It then disappeared.’ 

Initially fearing a collision, Inaba made a 60-degree turn to the right, 
but it was at that point that the object made an abrupt turn and positioned 
itself alongside the port wing. It emitted a greenish-coloured light and 
affected the automatic direction finder (ADF) as well as the radio. As the 
co-pilot, Tetsu Majima, tried unsuccessfully to contact the Matsuyama 
tower to report the observation, he heard frantic calls from the pilot of a 
Tokyo Airlines Piper Apache, Joji Negishi, who said he was being chased 
by a mysterious luminous object while flying along the northern edge of 
Matsuyama City. 

Captain Inaba, a veteran pilot with over 8,600 flying hours, said that it 
was the first time he had encountered such an object Weather conditions 
were good that evening, with a full moon. A test carried out two nights 
later by TOA Airlines ruled out the possibility that the pilots had seen 
the reflection of light from their plane. 

At around 19.00 on the same evening, three workers from the Chokoku 
Electric Power Company in Fuchu, near Hiroshima, reported sighting a 
strange object over Yuki Town. ‘It was shaped like a triangle whose top 
radiated a brilliant light,’ said one of the witnesses. 

According to a message relayed from the New York Times office in 
Tokyo to the TOA Airlines office, a group of‘flying saucer experts’ from 
the US Defense Department, the Federal Aviation Administration and 
the Palomar Observatory was being sent to Japan to interview Inaba and 
Negishi. ‘The American mission is believed to be interested in the case,’ 
it was reported, ‘because there have been several mysterious aviation 
accidents and flying saucers might have been involved.’ 5 6 7 

ALIEN BASES RUMOURED IN ARGENTINA 
In 1965, rumours of an alien base in Argentina flourished following 
numerous sightings of peculiar craft in the Valley of Loretani and a 
nearby ravine, located 60 kilometres southwest of Cordoba. 

The first incident occurred at 20.00 on 15 July, when Ruben Busquets, 
the owner of a tree plantation, together with his wife Diana Loretani and 
daughter Marcela, noticed an unusual object as they were returning 
home from the Hotel de la Entrada. As Senor Busquets described it: 



Neither Rhyme nor Reason 


267 


The object was big and very luminous, of a bluish colour, but varying from 
moment to moment, sometimes to orangeish-red. Its shape was that of a trun¬ 
cated cone, though we were unable to see clearly where the Upper part of it 
ended owing to the beam of light directed upwards out of the object. The 
lower part was circular and convex. Taking the nearby hills as my gauge, I 
reckon that it was some 10 to 15 metres in diameter. It was motionless and 
made no sound. At one moment it shone a beam of light on to us . .. 

After a long pause, it dropped down vertically, and the terrain hid it from 
us, but we could still see the glow from it. Then finally the glow went out. Wc 
went on up to the house, but before we reached it we met one of our peones 
who was lying on the ground, having been thrown by his horse... this peas¬ 
ant had seen it too, and his horse had been so terrified by it that it had thrown 
him. 

Thereafter, sightings of UFOs flying over the valley and dropping 
down into the ravine became a regular occurrence for the Busquets 
family. A circular mark, some seven metres in diameter, was discovered 
at a spot where one of the craft seemed to have landed. On another occa¬ 
sion, Scnora Busquets was able clearly to see windows on one of the craft. 
The family was not alone: by this time, labourers on the plantation had 
become quite accustomed to seeing the phenomena. 

One day, as Senor Busquets sat in his car beneath some power-lines 
watching one of the UFOs, he received a powerful electric shock 
Concerned that the UFO might bring down the power-lines, he movet 
his car away from the area. The UFO immediately turned off its light, 
leaving only a reddish glow that eventually faded out. On 24 July 1965, 
the Busquets invited a group of people to observe the strange craft. All of 
them saw a ‘shining cigar with a black band around it’ which remained 
stationary for about 10 seconds before plunging down into the ravine. 
The witnesses included two lawyers, Dr Felix Cochero and Dr 
Fortunato Columba. On 5 September 1965, Captain Omar Pagani, who 
then headed the Argentine Navy’s UFO investigations, observed a UFO 
through a telescope as it approached and dazzled witnesses (including 
two meteorologists), blocking out the entire field of view of the telescope 
as it did so. 8 

MISSING TIME IN MADAGASCAR 

The witness in the following case, a certain Monsieur Wolf, was bom in 
Germany but took up French nationality after serving in the French 
Foreign Legion. The remarkable story which follows is taken from an 
interview with Wolf by H. Julicn, an investigator for the French journal 
Lumieres Dans La Nuit. 

‘It was in May 1967,’ began Wolf. ‘I was in Madagascar, and serving in 
the Foreign Legion. Wc had just been on a reconnaissance exercise in 




268 


Alien Base 


bush terrain. We were in hourly radio contact with Central Head¬ 
quarters. We had halted at noon in a clearing about 100 metres wide and 
began to eat. The weather was fine.’ Then it happened. 

Suddenly we observed the arrival and descent of a machine of indefinable 
colouring. I am colour-blind myself, but I can state definitely that the thing 
shone very brightly, and was of the colour of a new coin shining in the sun¬ 
light. Around it there was an intense, dazzling glow. It came down with the 
motion of a falling leaf, and you would have said that there must have been 
some sort of accident - it was like a shining egg on the end of a piece of string. 
It came down very rapidly. And we felt a powerful ground shock when it 
landed. And then a piercing whistling sound. By now the craft was no longer 
luminous. 

After that the whole thing was unbelievable. There were twenty-three of 
us Legionnaires, with one officer and four non-commissioned officers. And 
we were all paralysed. All of us saw the machine land and take off again, but 
none of us perceived the lapse of lime. Let me explain: when the machine had 
departed, we all recovered the use of our limbs. We were all in exactly the 
same positions and the same places as we were when it had landed. But when 
we checked up on the time, we realized that it was now 3.15 p.m. Two and 
three-quarter hours had passed without our perceiving it. We had missed three 
radio rendezvous with Headquarters. Our officer got a fearful ticking off for 
it, for he was incapable of giving any effective explanation. 

The Machine 

The machine was smooth, with no visible doors or windows. It appeared to 
bear no markings. No antenna. It was like a smooth egg, twice as high as it 
was wide. I can’t say what its exact size was, given the amount of vegetation 
in the clearing. But, comparing it with the height of the trees as it was 
taking off, you could reckon that it was between seven and eight metres high. 
In its base it had several openings, of which we were able to get a good view 
as it took off. There were flames coming from them - not normal flames.. . 
One could have taken them for flames, but they must surely have been some¬ 
thing else. Something like what you see when you use a welding machine to 
cut metal. Each of the openings emitted a ‘flame’; the whole thing produc¬ 
ing one big thick short flame about one-twentieth of the length of the 
machine itself. 

It had legs. I did not see them, because of the vegetation, but on the ground 
there were three marks, set in a triangle, where it had stood. In the middle of 
the triangle there was a charred crater three metres deep - a crater which 
widened out towards it base. At the bottom of the crater there were some 
crystals of all colours, like bits of broken glass. The bottom of the crater was 
full of them, especially in the corners. It was like a vitrified ring. 

When the craft departed, it rose up slowly until it was above the trees. 
Then it vanished at a fantastic speed, as though sucked up into the sky. It left 
a sort of trail behind it. 



Neither Rhyme nor Reason 


269 


Sworn to Secrecy 

Headquarters ordered us not to approach the landing site and not to discuss 
the matter among ourselves. Some specialists arrived by plane from Paris to 
interrogate us. We were made to swear on oath that we would keep it secret. 
We were visited by the doctors and we were made to undergo tests. For two 
days after the event we all had violent headaches, with a buzzing in the ears 
and a powerful beating in the area of the temples. We were not told the results 
of the tests made on us. 9 

Not the least surprising aspect of this important case is the missing 
time experienced by the Legionnaires, with not one of them being aware 
of the fact until afterwards; a classic side-effect reported in abduction 
cases. But were any of the men actually abducted into the craft? Was 
there any interaction at all? We may never know. The ‘buzzing in the 
ears’ brings to mind the case of Donald Smythe, described earlier, who 
suffered similarly following his harrowing experience in 1964. 

This case is also important in that it lends weight in several respects to 
the theories of UFO propulsion propounded by the British aeronautical 
engineer Leonard Cramp, in his remarkable book, Piece for a Jig-Saw, 
published a year earlier (and now republished in the United States). 10 

MORE MYSTERIOUS SUBMARINES 

At about 18.15 on 30 July 1967, the Argentine steamer Naviero was some 
120 miles off the coast of Brazil, opposite Cape Santa Marte Grande (Lat. 
28 48 S, Long. 46 43 W) in the State of Santa Catarina. As the officers 
and crew were taking their evening meal, Captain Julian Lucas Ardanza 
was notified on the intercom by one of the officers that something strange 
was near the ship. 

Arriving on deck, Captain Ardanza could see a shining object in the 
sea, no more than 50 feet off the starboard side. Cigar-shaped, with an 
estimated length of 105 to 110 feet, it emitted a powerful blue and white 
glow. No noise could be heard and no wake could be seen in the water, 
neither was there any sign of a periscope, railing, conning tower or any 
other superstructure, such as would be expected of conventional sub¬ 
marines. 

The mystery craft paced Naviero for 15 minutes at a speed estimated 
by Captain Ardanza at 25 knots, as against the 17 knots of his own vessel. 
Suddenly, the unidentified submarine dived, passed right underneath 
Naviero and vanished rapidly in the depths, glowing brightly as it 
went. 

Because the Naviero was carrying explosives, and in case the crew 
might panic about being ‘pursued’ on account of this cargo, Captain 
Ardanza and his officers assembled the crew to tell them what had 



270 


Alien Base 


happened In subsequent interviews with the Argentine press, Ardanza 
said that he had seen nothing like it during his 20 years at sea. Chief 
Officer Carlos Lasca described the object as 'a submergible UFO with its 
own illumination’. The Argentine maritime authorities officially classi¬ 
fied it as an ‘Unidentified Submarine Object’." 

For three weeks in February 1960, it was reported that the Argentine 
Navy, aided by United States experts, depth-bombed and called for the 
surrender of two mysterious submarines. The submarines lay in the bot¬ 
tom of Golfo Nuevo, a bay north of Rawson, separated from the ocean by 
a narrow entrance. They were chased by the Argentines all over the bay 
and each time they were trapped they managed to slip away mysteriously. 
Finally, Argentine Navy Secretary Gaston Clemente told newsmen that 
the patrol would be called off. Intrigued by these events, contactee 
George Adamski later asked his space friends for an explanation. ‘The 
answer,’ he asserted, ‘was that they were spacecraft.’ 

They were studying the bottom of the ocean to learn about conditions on our 
planet that are not yet indicated on dry land areas. A number of such craft are 
making a thorough study of underwater lands and naval ships of many 
nations have encountered them. For the most part, confidential, official 
reports of such encounters have been described as ‘fantastic’. But here again, 
although our friends would like to surface and make themselves, and what 
they are doing, known, our fears keep us in a state of hostility that prevents 
their doing so. Instead, they pass their findings on to others of their people 
who are working among our scientists and in other important places through¬ 
out the world. In turn, and in time, this information will be given to the 
people as findings from IGY [International Geophysical Year] research. 12 

A TRAGIC ENCOUNTER 

It was 16.00 on 13 August 1967. Inacio de Souza, manager of a large 
fazenda (plantation) between Crixas and Pilar de Goias, about 100 miles 
northwest of Brasilia, was returning to the house with his wife, Luiza, 
when they saw three strange-looking figures playing about like children 
on the fazenda landing strip. At first, Inacio thought the people were 
naked, but his wife had the impression that they were dressed in skin¬ 
tight pale-yellow clothes. They appeared to have no hair. 

On spotting Inacio and his wife, the strangers began running towards 
them. It was then that Inacio saw a peculiar ‘aircraft’, shaped like an 
inverted wash-basin, at the end of the landing strip. It appeared to be 
over 100 feet in width and was touching, or almost touching, the ground. 
Frightened, Inacio sent his wife into the house, reached for his 0.44 
calibre carbine, took aim at the nearest figure and fired. Almost instantly, 
the ‘aircraft’ emitted a beam of green light which struck Inacio on the 
head and shoulder. He fell to the ground unconscious. As his wife came 



Neither Rhyme nor Reason 


271 


rushing out of the house to help him, the three strangers ran back to their 
‘aircraft’, which took off vertically, making a sound like the swarming of 
bees. 

The owner of the fazenda , a wealthy and well-known man (who asked 
that his name not be revealed), flew to the property three days later, 
having been informed about the incident in Sao Paulo, where he lived. 
He learned that for the previous two days, Inacio had complained of 
numbness and tingling of the body, as well as headaches and nausea. On 
the third day, in addition to these symptoms, Inacio began to suffer from 
continuous tremors of the hands and head. The owner took the sick man 
to a doctor in Goiana, about 120 miles to the south. Bum marks, in the 
form of a perfect circle 15 centimetres in diameter, were found on de 
Souza’s torso and head. Blood tests revealed that he was suffering from 
‘malignant alterations of the blood’, i.e. leukaemia. The doctor warned 
the owner that the patient had about 60 days to live. 

Inacio’s weight began to decrease. He suffered great pain, and yellow¬ 
ish-white spots, the size of a fingernail, appeared all over his body, just 
underneath the skin. He died on 11 October 1967, aged 41. In accordance 
with her husband’s wishes, Luiza burned his bed, mattress, bedclothes 
and clothes, as he was afraid that whatever had caused his terminal illness 
might be transmitted to his family. 

‘So far as I am concerned it was just another case of cancer,’ stated the 
sceptical doctor at Goiana, in response to questions from investigators. ‘I 
advised the fazendeiro to “forget" what his employee said had happened, 
since he (the fazendeiro) had not been an eye-witness.’ Unable to accept 
that Inacio’s condition was the result of an encounter with space beings, 
the doctor attributed the story to a hallucination brought on by 
leukaemia. 1314 

There seems little likelihood that this disturbing encounter was in fact 
the product of a hallucination. A hoax seems equally far-fetched. Inacio 
de Souza was described as a simple, honest and trustworthy man, with no 
motive for such a hoax. Would he and his wife have compromised his life 
and their livelihood by making up such a story? 

The figures initially seen ‘playing about like children’ bring to mind a 
number of similar cases, such as that of Jose Higgins, whose 1947 
encounter with aliens in Brazil is described in Chapter 3. Had Inacio not 
taken the drastic action of shooting at one of the figures, perhaps the out¬ 
come of this encounter might not have been so tragic. 

A POLICEMAN ABDUCTED 

One of the most fascinating and, for me, compelling alien contact reports 
is that of Nebraska police patrolman Herbert Schirmer, who encountered 
a landed craft and its crew in Ashland, Nebraska, in the small hours of 3 



272 


Alien Base 


December 1967. Initially, Schirmer recalled having seen a ‘flying saucer' 
on the edge of the highway at 02.30, reporting it as such in the police log¬ 
book. Further details emerged six months later, during time-regression 
hypnosis with a professional hypnotist, Loring Williams. 

As Schirmer got out of his patrol car to investigate, quasi-human 
beings approached, paralysed him temporarily with a ‘greenish gas’, then 
took him on board the football-shaped craft, which rested on tripod land¬ 
ing legs. A small exterior catwalk surrounded the centre of the craft. He 
found himself in a room about 26 feet by 20 feet and about six feet high, 
with portholes, ‘computer-like’ screens, and two triangular-backed 
chairs. The four crew members were nearly five feet tall, dressed in tight- 
fitting silver-grey uniforms that enclosed their long, thin heads, with a 
short aerial-type antenna coming from one side, belts with a flashlight¬ 
like ‘gas-gun’ in a holster, and gloves and boots. They had an emblem on 
their large chests that looked similar to that of the ancient winged serpent 
(akin to the caduceus reported by Dan Fry -see p. 68). ‘The skin on their 
faces was sort of grey-white, a pasty dough colour,’ Schirmer told the 
journalist Warren Smith. They had thin, slanting eyebrows above large, 
oriental-type eyes. ‘These eyes were not actually like oriental eyes,’ he 
explained, ‘they looked more like cat’s eyes.’ The nose was longer, flatter 
and more prominent than those of humans. ‘There wasn’t much lip to 
them. They were more of a slit in the face . . .’ IS 

One, who appeared to be the crew leader, communicated to Schirmer 
that they were extracting electricity from a nearby power-line, an opera¬ 
tion he observed through a porthole. Later, the electricity token was 
replaced. ‘When they land, an invisible [electromagnetic] force field is 
thrown around the ship in a circular pattern [as] a defence mechanism,' 
said Schirmer under hypnosis. ‘In some way which I do not understand, 
they draw a type of power from water. This is why we see them over 
rivers, lakes and large bodies of water.” 6 

The craft, just over 100 feet in diameter, was propelled by ‘reversible 
electro-magnetic energy’, creating inertia-less, gravity-free flight. A 
crystal-like rotor in the centre of the craft was linked to two large 
columns. ‘He said those were the reactors,’ Schirmer recounted under 
hypnosis. ‘Reversing magnetic and electrical energy allows them to con¬ 
trol matter and overcome the forces of gravity.’ The craft supposedly was 

Schirmer was shown a small, saucer-shaped device that could be 
launched from the larger craft. As also described identically by George 
Adamski, the device could transmit real-time audiovisual data. ‘They 
send the little saucer down to check out an area before they bring the big 
ship back in,’ Schirmer told Smith. ‘The pictures from the little baby 
saucer show up on the vision screen inside the ship. The best way 1 can 



Neither Rhyme nor Reason 


273 


describe [it] is to compare it with a baby moon hub-cap, which the kids 
buy to dress up their cars.' 

Allegedly, the aliens came from a nearby galaxy, but had bases in our 
solar system, including on Earth (see Chapter 19). ‘I’m not certain they 
are from the places they said,’ explained Schirmer. ‘This might be some¬ 
thing to throw us off guard.’ The crew leader said that, to protect them¬ 
selves, the aliens deliberately confused us; that contacts were selected on 
a random basis for that very reason. ‘He said they left things to pure 
chance. If there isn’t any rhyme or reason to something, it is bound to 
puzzle the governments of the world and UFO investigators ... I was 
very impressed by their security.’ 

After about 20 minutes, Schirmer was escorted off the craft, and he 
recalls watching it take off. Accompanied by a high-pitched whine, a red¬ 
dish-orange glow appeared on the bottom of the ship, the tripod legs 
retracted and the craft shot into the sky. 

‘I had a bad headache that morning,’ Schirmer told Warren Smith. 
‘There was a weird sort of buzzing sound in my head. If I started to fall 
off to sleep, the buzzing noise got louder. 1 also had a red Welt running 
down the nerve cord on my neck, right below my left ear. ’ For a long time 
after the encounter, Schirmer suffered from severe headaches. 

Schirmer’s case was brought before the University of Colorado UFO 
study group. He was flown to Colorado for standard psychological tests, 
including a hypnosis session, attended by Dr Edward Condon himself, 
head of the study group. Staff members told Schirmer that a negative 
report on his experience would be given. ‘They said their work was being 
checked by the Air Force and other government agencies before it was 
published. 1 was told that the whole Condon Committee was a cover-up 
designed to get the Air Force off the hook following so many sightings in 
1966.’ Schirmer continues: 

Some of those guys felt that the Central Intelligence Agency was messing 
around. One staff member had done a lot of the field investigations. He was 
picked up on a narcotics charge. The police went right to his house and 
directly to a cache of marijuana. I know police work. You have to have a tip- 
off to know where to find something like that. Several people believed that 
this fellow was probably set up, framed, because of something he had found 
out during his field work. 17 

MORE LONG-HAIRED INTERLOPERS 

Another landing of humanoids at a fazenda in Brazil took place in the 
early part of January 1968, at the Lagoa Negra Fazenda, near Lagoa dos 
Patos, in the Brazilian state of Rio Grande do SuL This time, there were 
five witnesses: the owner of the fazenda, his wife, son and daughter, and 
the fazenda manager. 


274 


Alien Base 


The incident occurred sometime between 20.00 and 22.00, on a clear 
night. Initially, a disc-shaped object, about 10 metres in diameter and 
three metres high, was seen ‘floating’ two metres above the ground, 
beside a grove of eucalyptus trees, observed at a distance of less than 400 
metres from inside the fazenda house. With a cupola on top and a sort of 
protuberance underneath, the craft had a metallic gleam and emitted a 
powerful, cold, reddish light that penetrated through the chinks in the 
windows and the doors of the house, causing the witnesses’ eyes to bum. 

The first two figures to appear beside the disc seemed about two 
metres tall, dressed in white overalls with a broad white band at the waist, 
and high, dark-coloured collars. The faces of the beings were described 
as full, white, with long hair hanging down to their shoulders. The beings 
also had large bare feet, long hands, and a rather rigid manner of walking, 
without bending their legs. 

Afterwards, three more beings appeared. These were no more than 
1.4 metres in height, wearing chestnut-brown overalls with a similar- 
coloured band around the waist, hair as long as the previous two, and 
shod in small boots. They walked rapidly, though not leaving the area 
beneath the disc. Momentarily, the two taller beings moved away from 
the disc and went towards a wire fence, getting as far as a ditch that ran 
beside it. After following this until they were at a point halfway between 
the disc and the gate, they retraced their steps. They then walked away 
from the disc a second time, went up to the gate via a different route, 
halted in front of a small wooden bridge over the ditch, and returned once 
again to the disc. For a third time, the taller beings left the area of the 
disc, following the route they had first taken. This time they crossed the 
bridge, came to the gate and opened it, entered, closed the gate, then 
headed towards the house. 

By this time, the fazenda -owner and his manager had left the house 
and taken up a position lying under two palm trees, enabling them to 
observe the disc and its occupants without themselves being seen. The 
wife and children stayed inside the house. Frightened by the red light 
that had penetrated the house, the son lay in bed and covered himself 
with the bedclothes. The five household dogs, normally fierce towards 
strangers, at no time seemed to be disturbed, even when the interlopers 
approached the house. The manager, who was armed, decided to chal¬ 
lenge the intruders, but the owner ordered him to keep quiet. 

‘When the beings had got to about 60 metres from the house,’ reported 
investigator Jader Pereira, ‘the daughter was able to see their features 
clearly because the whole area around about was completely lit up by the 
light from the disc, and she exclaimed: “Mother, they look like Saints!” ’ 
This exclamation frightened the mother, who decided to call her hus¬ 
band to come back inside the house. As she opened the door and called 



Fig. 18. The long-haired interlopers who landed in full view of five witnesses at a 
fazenda near Lagoa dos Patos, in the Brazilian state of Rio Grande do Sul, in 
January 1968. (Terence Collins/PSR Publications) 

him, the two beings halted. ‘They did this several times,’ said Pereira, 
‘until finally they turned round and went back to the disc along the same 
route by which they had come. Then all five of them entered the object, 
which rose up vertically, apparently with a slight rotary movement.’ The 
entire incident lasted for about twenty minutes. 

The following day, the witnesses discovered two kinds of footprints: 
one large, as though from bare feet, with very long toes and angular heels; 
the other prints small, with a smooth heel, while the forepart of the sole 
showed ‘a sort of five-pointed star’ in the centre. Unfortunately, no plas¬ 
ter-casts were taken.' 8 

The humanoids described in this case compare interestingly with 
earlier descriptions of similar beings, such as George Adamski’s 
‘Orthon’, with his long hair and ‘chocolate-brown’ overalls. According to 
the investigators: ‘The family are people who are held in high regard 
locally and in the Municipality of Viamao. None of them had ever hith¬ 
erto had any interest in the subject of flying saucers.’ 19 

RUMOURS OF ALIEN BASES IN PERU 

During the summer of 1968, the rural populace in the Peruvian Andes 

became so alarmed by numerous ‘flying saucer apparitions’ in their area 



276 


Alien Base 


that the district authorities of Huaraz dispatched a commission, accom¬ 
panied by armed police, to investigate reports that the ‘saucers’ were 
using a particular area close to Lake Yanacocha, in central Peru, as a base. 
Many farmers claimed to have seen luminous objects ‘shooting down¬ 
wards at great speed’, as though to land, on an extensive plain lying 
between Lake Yanacocha and Lake Pumacocha. Twice weekly, it was 
alleged, the ‘saucers’ appeared in broad daylight, then vanished swiftly, 
leaving landing traces on the ground. 20 

According to UFO investigator and engineer Antonio Ponce de Leon, 
a ‘saucerdrome’ (plalillodromo ), had been discovered at Chumo, in the 
Sicuani area of southern Peru. De Leon reported that he had learned 
about the ‘saucerdrome’ from the local Indians. 21 Rumours proliferated 
in 1968 that an alien base existed in the depths of Lake Titicaca. Many 
local witnesses reported sightings of‘saucers’ heading towards the lake 
and vanishing therein. 22 

In 1993, many inhabitants of Huaraz, capital of the department of 
Ancash, north of Lima, claimed that flying saucers had bases in the high¬ 
est peaks of the Cordillera Blanca, a stretch of the Andes. The highest 
such peak, El Huascaran, is 7,000 metres; others vary from 5,000 to 6,000 
metres. According to witnesses, flying saucers were regularly seen to 
emerge from the lakes in this area. On 28 October 1993, for example, 
numerous farmers, shepherds and others reported sighting a UFO 
emerge from the lake on Mount Carhuac. According to Osterling 
Obregon, a teacher, Mount Carhuac was lit up with different colours 
when the UFO rose up from the 5,000-metre peak. 

‘For four minutes I watched the UFO rise slowly above the Cordillera 
Blanca,’ stated Obregon. By the time the teacher returned with his 
camera, the object had disappeared. Ten minutes later, what appeared to 
be the same object was seen by another teacher, Juan Gomez. The object 
emitted brilliant lights and described a series of aerobatic manoeuvres. 13 

CLAMP-DOWN 

It was Sunday 9 September 1968. Professor Wilton Ribeiro was walking 
on the beach at Itaipu, near Niteroi, to the east of Rio de Janeiro, when a 
strange object, emitting beams of orange light, suddenly descended 
silently about 200 metres away. The object came closer and hovered 
about 10 metres above the sea, spinning on its vertical axis while making 
a humming sound. Other witnesses included Joao Abud, juridical asses¬ 
sor of the Secretariat of Justice of the State of Rio de Janeiro, and 
Professor Sohail Saud, a teacher of business studies. Professor Saud said 
that the object, which he described as a large disc, made a number of low- 
level passes over the beach before landing briefly. Occupants could be 
seen inside the craft, he claimed, though he was unable to describe them 



Neither Rhyme nor Reason 


111 


A 



Fig. 19. The landed craft near Macedo, State of Sao Paulo, Brazil: A, Antenna 
with red light. B. Dome, in segments. C. Skirt, seemed to be spinning clockwise. 

D. Patch of violet light beneath. (Terence Collins/FSR Publications) 

in detail, other than that they were wearing ‘helmets’. Several witnesses 
were reported as having suffered from shock. M 

On 21 November 1968, a young Brazilian woman claimed to have wit¬ 
nessed a landed craft and its occupants at a bus stop near Macedo, in the 
State of Sao Paulo. The bus had halted while the driver took a customary 
break. On waste ground about 40 metres away, the witness noticed a 
shining, metallic object, standing or hovering close to the ground. It was 
of a similar shape to that reported by George Adamski and others, with 
several exceptions: the cupola appeared to be divided into four segments, 
with an antenna at the top; a row of circular, ever-changing lights sur¬ 
rounded the rim or ‘skirt’; and there was a set of three steps beneath a 
large (stationary) entrance in the rim (see Fig. 19). Standing in front of 
the craft were three ‘men’, about two metres in height, wearing skin¬ 
tight, shining black suits, leaving only the faces bare. One of the entities 
held ‘a sort of tube’ under one arm, about 60 centimetres in length and 
seven centimetres in diameter, surrounded by a spiral coil. Two thin pro¬ 
tuberances came out of one end of the tube. 

Between the witness and the entities, about 20 metres from the bus and 
with their backs towards her, a crowd of about twenty people, grouped 
behind three armed policemen, confronted the entities. On the side of the 
road opposite the bus were parked two police radio-patrol cars. As the 
two parties continued facing each other, a brilliant, silver-coloured beam 


278 


Alien Base 


of light suddenly shot out from the tube. As investigator Nigel Rimes 
reported: 

The beam was directed at the party of Brazilian police and bystanders, the 
front ranks of whom (including the policemen) immediately ceased all move¬ 
ment and were ‘paralysed’. She noticed however that a number of the others 
who were not in the forefront were also affected, and she saw several fall as 
though in a faint. She also noticed that the entity did not swing the tube itself, 
but swung his whole body round, still holding the tube in position under his 


The entities walked calmly and slowly back to their craft, which then 
took off and climbed away rapidly. 

Though no corroboration of this extraordinary report came forth, to 
my knowledge, both the investigators - one of whom was Willi Wirz, 
managing director of the Brazil Herald- were impressed by the witness. 
‘Our young lady seemed to be an entirely sincere and truthful person,’ 
reported Nigel Rimes. ‘She made it clear that she desired no publicity 
and that she had only come forward with this information because she felt 
that it was her duty to do so. 

'Our conclusion so far is that this case certainly seems to be genuine, 
and that the military authorities have clamped down on other wit¬ 
nesses . . .’ 2S 


NOTES 

1 Bloecher, Ted, ‘UFO Landing and Repair by Crew: Part P, Flying Saucer 
Review, vol. 20, no. 2, March-April 1974, pp. 21-6. 

2 Bloecher, Ted, ‘UFO Landing and Repair by Crew: Part IT, Flying Saucer 
Review, vol. 20, no. 3 (published December 1974), pp. 24-7. 

3 Schwarz, Berthold Eric, MD, ‘New Berlin UFO Landing and Repair by 
Crew’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 21, nos. 3/4, 1975, pp. 22-8. 

4 Bloecher, Ted, and Cerny, Paul, ‘The Cisco Grove Bow and Arrow Case of 
1964’, International UFO Reporter, vol. 20, no. 5, winter 1995, pp. 16-22,32. 

5 Japan Times, Tokyo, 21 March 1965. 

6 Maimchi Daily News, Tokyo, 22 March 1965. 

7 Mainichi Daily News, Tokyo, 23 March 1965. 

8 Creighton, Gordon, ‘Further Reports of UFO Bases’, Flying Saucer Review, 
vol. 15, no. 2, March-April 1969, pp. 15-16. The original account appeared 
in Asi, Buenos Aires, 7 September 1965. 

9 Julien, H., *A 1967 Landing in Madagascar’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 23, 
no, l, January-Fcbruary 1977, pp. 29-30, translated by Gordon Creighton. 



279 


Neither Rhyme nor Reason 

The original article appeared in Lumiires Dans La Nuit, no. 160, December 
1976. 

10 Cramp, Leonard, G., UFOs and Anti-Gravity: Piece for a Jig-Saw, 
Adventures Unlimited Press, One Adventure Place, Kempton, Illinois 
60646,1996. 

11 Galindez, Oscar A., ‘Crew of Argentine Ship See Submarine UFO’, Flying 
Saucer Review, vol. 14, no. 2, March-April 1968, p. 22. 

12 Adamski, George, Flying Saucers Farewell, Abelard-Schuman, London, 
1961, pp. 44-5. 

13 Bowen, Charles, ‘A Fatal Encounter’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 15, no. 2, 
March-April 1969, pp. 13-14. 

14 Brazil in Throes of Big Flap’, The APRO Bulletin, March-April 1969, pp. 1, 
5. 

15 Norman, Eric, Gods, Demons and UFOs, Lancer Books, New York, 1970, pp. 
169-93. 

16 Blum, Ralph, with Blum, Judy, Beyond Earth: Man's Contact with UFOs , 
Corgi Books, London, 1974, p. 117. 

17 Norman, op. cit. 

18 Pereira, Jader U., ‘The Remarkable Landing at Lagoa Ncgra’, translated by 
Gordon Creighton, Flying Saucer Review Case Histories, supplement no. 5, 
1971, pp. 3-4. 

19 Ibid., p. 3. 

20 Creighton, op. cit., p. 16, translated from an EFE report, Ureos, Peru, 31 
July 1968, as published in Stir, Malaga, Spain, 1 August 1968. 

21 Ibid., translated from Expreso, Lima, Peru, 27/29 September 1968. 

22 Ibid., pp. 16, 19, translated from an Agence Frauce-Presse despatch, Buenos 
Aires, 11 November 1968. 

23 ‘UFO Base in Highest Mountains in Peru’, EFE, Lima, 31 October 1993. 

24 ‘Brazil: Landing on a Beach near Rio de Janeiro', Flying Saucer Review, vol. 
17, no. 2, March-April 1971, p. 30, translated by Gordon Creighton from O 
Dia, Rio de Janeiro, 10, 11 September 1968. 

25 Rimes, Nigel, ‘Baleia Entities Seen Again?’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 15, 
no. 2, March-April 1969, pp. 6-8. 




Chapter 14 


Contrasting Encounters 


CaiToll Wayne Watts, a 39-year-old cotton farmer living in Loco, near 
Wellington, Texas, saw his first ‘spaceship’ on the morning of 8 February 
1967. Together with another sighting six weeks later, it was to be a pre¬ 
lude to one of the most bizarre, fascinating encounters ever reported; an 
encounter that led to nationwide press coverage, though with a sinister 
sequel of events for Watts and his family. Perhaps owing to the seemingly 
ludicrous nature of the encounter, and Watts’s subsequent ‘confession’ 
to having perpetrated a hoax, it is seldom cited in the literature. Here fol¬ 
lows the story, based largely on an unpublished report he wrote together 
with his wife, Rosemary. 

At about 11.00, Watts saw what he first took to be a fast-moving air¬ 
craft, flying from the northwest on a southeast heading, at an estimated 
altitude of about 1,300 feet. ‘I thought it to be a jet at first until 1 noticed 
that it didn’t have any wings and didn’t leave exhaust streams,’ said 
Watts. ‘It looked like a long cylinder shape at that height.’ 

On 21 March, at about 15.00, Watts was measuring cotton land on one 
of his farms when he noticed another peculiar aerial object. This time it 
was much closer. ‘It was about 200 feet off the ground, traveling about 50 
miles per hour,’ he recalled. 

The front of it was raised at about a 30-degree angle. When it passed me at 
the closest point of about 200 yards, I could see an opening in the front which 
looked to be a window. There was also a window on the side which was 
oblong. The ship looked to be shaped like a cylinder about 100 feet long and 
eight to ten feet across. The color was a light dull gray which did not reflect 
the sunlight. It traveled about three-fourths of a mile northwest and turned 
northeast and set about a 70-degrcc angle and completely vanished in about 
30 seconds. It didn’t make any noise nor did it leave a vapor trail. 

A Closer Encounter 

On the evening of 31 March, Watts’s wife had gone with their children 
to a church meeting. At around 22.30, returning home after visiting his 
parents. Watts spotted a light in a field by an old house on his farmland. 
‘There was some equipment stored in the house so I thought that I 
should go up and take a look around,’ he said, ‘The light at first looked 



Contrasting Encounters 


281 


like a car with four headlights on bright. As I approached, I noticed the 
lights were much brighter.’ 

1 stopped within 200 feet of the vehicle when I noticed it was something other 
than a car. It was about 100 feet long, eight to ten feet high and ten feet across. 
It was shaped something like a .38 bullet, long and round on one end and the 
front end came to a point where the light was and sloped a little downward. 
It was between a dull gray and aluminum in color. It didn’t reflect light. 

Watts pulled up about 50 feet from the craft and got out of his truck to 
take a closer look. He walked around behind it, then for about 20 feet 
along its left side. Here he noticed a slight ridge where he assumed there 
might be an opening. 1 In an interview with reporter Tony Kimcry, Watts 
described what followed: 

I thought it must be some new aircraft the Air Force had developed and that 
it must have made an emergency landing, or something. I also thought that 
there might be injured crewmen aboard, and I wondered how to find out, 
since there weren’t any windows or doors. I scrounged around and found an 
old rotting fence post and pulled it out of the mud, and started banging and 
sounding out the machine by hitting it with the post. 2 

Suddenly, a door he had not seen slid open. ‘The door opened from 
the top and came down to make steps,' Watts explained. 3 

Inside, there were no crew or anything, just machinery and all kinds of meters 
and dials, lit up by this strange bluish light. Then there was a loud crackling, 
like the beginning of a Victrola record, and then a voice, sounding like it came 
from a machine or was recorded, began talking to me. It knew my name and 
everything and it told me that it wanted to give me a physical examination. 4 

‘I asked them what was the reason for the physical and they said [that] 
a man had to pass a rigid physical before he could stand the flight. They 
told me to stand in front of this machine if I would take the physical. The 
machine reached almost from the floor to the ceiling. They also told me 
that they had a machine that could go within 300 yards of a building or 
house and could tell how many were in the house and also what age [the 
occupants] were. 

‘After they told me this, they asked me again if I wanted to step inside, 
take the physical, and experience some of these things. I told them “no”, 
that I didn’t think that I wanted to. The only other things that I could see 
in this compartment were some gauges on the ceiling, which I couldn’t 
read, and some maps on the wall.’ 

The maps were about three feet square but only about 12 inches from the 
floor. The complete map was a light gray color. It looked like they were large 
scale maps of land. There were seven or eight crooked lines running diagon¬ 
ally that looked like rivers and also moon-shaped markings that could have 



282 


Alien Base 


represented mountains. It had latitude and longitude lines on it. 

'After I was asked the third time to take a physical, I got a little jumpy 
and decided that I had better leave,’ continued Watts. ‘After I left, it 
raised about three feet and turned south down in a pasture. There was no 
noise at all coming from it except for the time when the door opened. 
When it was standing still, it never did touch the ground. When it took 
off, its lights changed from a fluorescent light to an amber or soft red 
light. It had only this one large light on the front. . . about 20 inches 
across.’ 5 

Without bothering to turn his truck around in the thick mud, Watts 
ran back the half-mile to his home. After hearing her husband rather 
incoherently explaining what had just happened to him, Rosemary Watts 
called the police in Wellington, 11 miles to the northeast of their farm. 
Chief of Police Donald Nunnelly, a relative of Watts, together with 
Collingsworth County Sheriff John Rainey, arrived and accompanied 
Watts to the scene of the incident. Nothing could be found, except 
Watts’s truck, stuck in the mud. 

Sheriff Rainey informed the Air Force, and a lieutenant interviewed 
Watts. The lieutenant was unable to reassure Watts or offer any helpful 
advice in the event that another, similar incident should occur. 6 

On Board 

On 11 April 1967, at about 20.30, Watts saw a light, similar to the one he 
had seen on 31 March, and in about the same location. An hour later, he 
left his house to see if he could find the 'spaceship’ again. ‘Since I 
couldn’t get any information from the Air Force or any other source as to 
what the other ship was,’ he explained, ‘I wanted to find out more about 
it myself.’ After driving around slowly for about a quarter of an hour in a 
three-mile radius of where he had seen the light, he turned into a road 
leading to an old vacant house to turn around. 

Just as he started to back up. Watts noticed that the area around him 
was getting lighter. At first he paid little heed because there was a lot of 
lightning that night. The light became brighter; simultaneously, the 
engine of his pickup ‘made three or four vibrations and died’. He tried 
unsuccessfully to start the engine. ‘About that time, 1 looked in my rear¬ 
view mirror and saw a light reflected in it. 1 stepped out of the pick-up 
and turned and faced the back of the pick-up.’ There he saw an object, 
different from the others he had seen. 

About 10 feet from the rear of the pick-up was an object shaped similar to an 
egg. However, the bottom wasn’t as round as the top. It was about 30 feet in 
length and about 15 feet in height in the center. (At times, these smaller crafts 
jerk about 10 feet from side to side. They have two antenna-type rods extend- 



Contrasting Encounters 


283 


ing down about three feet. When they landed and picked me up, these rods 
were about six inches from the ground. This made the ship about three and 
one-half feet from the ground.) 

There were three lights attached to it; one on each end and one in the cen¬ 
ter close to the top. These lights rotated from red to yellow to green, but each 
time that they changed there was only one on red, one on yellow, and one on 
green, and then they would start over with each one a different color at the 
same time. 

This small craft had a dear bubble on the top, about three feet high and 
four feet in diameter. The door opened down from the top and formed steps. 
There were two men standing on the steps and two men standing in the door¬ 
way. 

One of the men said, ‘Let’s go and let you take your physical examination.’ 
I hesitated a minute before I answered. I asked them if they would harm me 
in any way, and they said, ‘No.’ I also asked them if they would bring me 
back, and they said that they would bring me directly back. Since I had the 
choice of either running across the field or getting aboard with them, I chose 
to go with them. 

I had to stoop down a little to get through the doorway. I’m five feet eleven 
inches, and the doorway [was] about five and one-half feet in height and about 
30 inches wide. The room into which I walked was about 12 by 10 feet. There 
was a door in each end. I didn’t notice a handle on either door. I didn’t get t| 
look into these other two rooms. The floor was flat. 

As I stepped through the door into the spaceship, the two men who wert 
already in the room motioned for me to sit down in a reclining chair that was 
in the center of the room. There were also four chairs on the opposite side of 
the room. There were two in each corner, made similar to an automobile 
bucket scat. When the four men sat down in these chairs, the chairs tilted 
back so that their heads were about one foot from the wall.' 

The main door or hatch slammed shut, making a sound similar to that 
of a heavy car door being closed. 8 

Take-Off 

When the ‘men’ sat down, one of them pushed a button on a small con¬ 
trol-panel and a light came on underneath the button. 9 The lighting 
dimmed to near-darkness, and there was a slight jolt. 10 Immediately after 
the ship had taken off, a high-pitched whine could be heard, which by 
Watts’s estimation lasted for about one and a half minutes. 

A few seconds after this button was pushed, the ship moved forward, and 
since I didn’t sit down in the chair as I was told to do, I was thrown backward 
against a partition. One of the men pushed a button on the panel again, and 
the ship slowed down. They then got up and helped me get into the chair and 
strapped it across my chest and above my knees. 11 

The metallic-looking chair turned out to be extremely flexible and 



284 


Alien Base 


comfortable, adjusting itself to Watts’s body contours. 12 

We had been traveling about five minutes and it got real cold. They didn't 
seem to react to the cold as 1 did. It got down around freezing. He pushed 
another button on the panel and in a few minutes it started getting a little 
warmer. It took about 10 minutes for it to get warm enough for me to quit 
shaking from the sudden drop in temperature. 

We traveled about 20 minutes from the time of take-off when the ship 
started slowing down and stopped. I heard four metallic clicks, and the wall 
opposite me between the two chairs slid back to reveal a round-shaped tun¬ 
nel... about five feet high. When I first heard the clicks, the men got up and 
unbuckled the belts. The nearest man to me said, ‘Let’s go over here’, and led 
the way through about an eight-foot tunnel into another ship. 

Weapons? 

‘As we stepped from the tunnel into the first room, in the left end of it 
was something that resembled shelves or racks of some type [which] 
reached from the ceiling to the floor. There were four shelves which had 
eight to ten “weapons” on each shelf.’ 

The weapons were made similar to a rifle or shotgun; however, the overall 
length was about 28 or 30 inches long. The ‘stock’ was about 12 inches in 
■ length. Where our guns have a receiver and trigger, these had neither, but a 
hand-grip on the stock. In place of a receiver, there were three oval-type discs 
about one-half inch thick about one and one-half inches apart and five inches 
around. The barrel started there and was about three inches round. On the 
opposite wall from these weapons was some kind of cabinet that had pigeon¬ 
holes in it [in which] were sucks of these round, slotted discs. 

The ‘Physical’ 

‘We turned right and walked through an opening which I didn’t see as a 
door,’ Watts’s report continues. ‘This man stepped to the side of the door 
and remained on the outside of the room. I was met a short distance 
inside the room by two more men who explained to me that they were 
conducting a survey and would appreciate it if I would co-operate and 
submit myself to a physical. This room looked like the same room that I 
looked into on March 31 when I saw the larger ship.’ 

In this room, there was a strong odor that smelled like sulphur. It burned my 
eyes and I could feel it going down my lungs a little. I could see it every once 
in a while coming in from a vent around the floor. I had noticed this odor a 
little before in the small craft and some in the first room that 1 walked into on 
this large craft. 

They had me walk on to the center of the room where the machine was 
located, to undress and take the physical. This machine was about six feet tall 
and 36 inches wide, and cupped in front. They put me in a position in front 



Contrasting Encounters 


285 


of the machine, about one and one-half inches from it. There was a large 
throw-switch about a foot from the top of the machine. They pulled this 
switch down and a light came on on each side of this machine, about five 
inches from the top. There was a narrow band of glass between each light, 
about three-eighths of an inch wide. There was also a round control-knob on 
the left side, about three feet from the floor, which they turned until these two 
lights came together. 

There were four gauges over this machine that were molded into the ceil¬ 
ing. I conldn’t read any of them. Each one had a needle on it, but I couldn’t 
read the writing. While they were adjusting the machine, there were round, 
flexible needles coming out, one about every inch. The needles were about 
the size of a hypodermic needle. Instead of piercing the skin, they came out 
and just laid down against the skin. I stood and faced the machine about five 
minutes and then they turned me around. They put me in position again and 
re-adjusted it until the lights came together again. 

During this time, the machine transferred its information into another 
machine, starting at the side and extending out about five feet. Out of the 
other end came a paper about 18 inches wide. One of the two men who 
seemed to be in control of my taking the physical walked back and forth from 
me to this paper, about every two minutes. I stood there about five more 
minutes, and they turned the switch off and said that it was complete. They 
walked down and got the paper and came back by me, and I asked them hovj 
it turned out. He said, ‘All 1 can tell now is that you are about eight pounf I 
over-weight.’ 

An Attempt at Verification 

Watts was told to get dressed. The beings walked into another room 
where the four others were, gathered in a close group and examined the 
paper. After Watts had re-dressed, he looked around and noticed a desk 
and chair on the right side of the room. On the desk lay a stack of maps, 
about three inches thick and a yard square. One map lay directly in front 
of the chair, as if the beings had been studying it. ‘On the other corner of 
the desk,’ claimed Watts, ‘was a stack of papers and pencils and also a 
paperweight.’ 

Like the famous Brazilian abductee Antonio Villas Boas, who tried to 
take a ‘clock-like instrument’ to furnish proof of his experience 10 years 
earlier, Watts felt he ought to purloin the paperweight. 

The paperweight was about two by three inches, with squared comers and 
about three-eighths of an inch thick. It looked like metal to me, but wasn’t 
heavy like steel. I looked to see if all the men were in the other room and 
picked up the paperweight and put it in my pocket underneath my billfold. I 
stood there a short length of time when one of the men who took me up there 
walked into the room and came direedy over to me. He lifted the paperweight 
out of my pocket without saying a thing. I caught his arm with my left hand, 



286 


Alien Base 


and he hit me across the back of the head. I was unconscious for about IS to 
20 minutes. 

The Return 

On recovering consciousness. Watts found himself back in the small craft 
again, strapped in the chair. ‘And we were moving,’ he added. He asked 
the man closest to him what the purpose of the physical was. ‘We are 
conducting a survey,’ came the blunt reply. Asked to explain the purpose 
of the survey, the man merely responded that ‘they would make maps of 
the complete planet before they were through’, because, said Watts, ‘the 
people on Earth would in a short time reach the Moon and eventually 
build better and bigger equipment to go out farther, and that’s when they 
would step in. 

‘They said they didn’t have wars where they came from; that they put 
all their energy to work for scientific matters. I asked him if they were 
more intelligent than we, and he said, “Yes, lam 162 years old. I have 
already lived three times longer than you will live.” He said that they 
were from the planet that we call Mars. 

‘About that time the ship slowed down, and they unstrapped me and 
opened the door for me to leave. The last thing they said to me was, “If 
we need you, we’ll contact you." They brought me back to the same spot 
where they picked me up where my pick-up was. I was on the two ships 
about one and a half hours in all.’ 13 

Meanwhile, back at the farmhouse, Rosemary worried about her hus¬ 
band. She had seen the light of the ‘spaceship’ in the distance, and tele¬ 
phoned the Wellington Police Department. Donald Nunnelly and John 
Rainey came to her house and began looking for Watts, who eventually 
arrived back home, too disturbed to go into details about his latest ex¬ 
perience that night. Nunnelly noticed that Wans had an unusual twitch 
in his face and that he was nervously massaging the back of his neck. 14 

The Beings 

In Watts’s report, the entities are described in great detail; 

The four men in the small ship that took me up were dressed in white cover¬ 
alls. Their shoes were of material or soft leather that resembled a high moc¬ 
casin, with soft soles that didn’t make any noise when they walked, like mine 
did [a peculiarity reported in other cases]. 

The two men who gave me the physical were dressed in white, two-piece 
suits. The coats had a flap down the front so that I couldn’t tell what kind of 
closure was on them. They also had a pocket on each side of the flap, just 
below the waistline on the coat The one who seemed to be in charge had [an] 
insignia on his collar. 

These men were about four feet high [or so], They varied two or three 



Contrasting Encounters 


287 


inches at the most and weighed from 1 IS to 130 pounds. They were a little 
thicker than ordinary through the chest. The color of the skin was between a 
white and a very light gray. They had no hair on their heads nor eyebrows. 

Their facial features differ from ours. They had only a small slit about one- 
half inch long for an ear. Their eyes started in the center, about where ours 
do, but go around the side of their head to about where our hairline starts. 
Their eyes are about one inch up and down at the thickest point, which is the 
center, and tapered to each end. They can see to the side as well as to the 
front. The pupil in their eyes is oblong and about one inch long. You could 
see about three-fourths of an inch of white on each end of their eyes. Three 
of the men had brown eyes, one had green, one blue, and one, who seemed to 
be in charge of the ship, had blood-red eyes. He also had something on a little 
white belt around his waist which I took to be some type of weapon. It was 
about four or five inches long and two inches wide, with a round handle, but 
I didn’t see a trigger or barrel like we have on our guns. 

Their nose didn’t protrude out from their face like ours. It curved over 
some type of bone structure which had two slits below it, about one-half inch 
long with a small hole about the size of a kitchen match beneath each. 

Their mouth was more of a straight line with very thin lips. The only 
expression that they ever made with their mouth was to smile. I never did see 
one with his mouth open. Their conversation was done through mental tele¬ 
pathy, and they can read your thoughts. However, I talked to them naturally, 
and their thoughts just came to me someway. I never could hear the conver¬ 
sation between them, only when one was sending thoughts directly to me. 15 


Further Encounters 

At about 22.00 on 21 May 1967, Carroll Watts looked out of his front 
door and saw the light and outline of the same, or a similar, cigar-shaped 
craft, less than a mile away. ‘My wife and I watched it for about one and 
a half hours that night,’ said Watts, it would dart sideways a few minutes 
and go back each time to the same spot where we first noticed it. The light 
was bright enough that we could see the outline of the ship, but it wasn’t 
a glaring light. It was still there when we retired that night. We debated 
about going down there, but decided against it since our children were 
already asleep, and it was too late to take them to my parents' house to 
stay.’ 

The following night, Watts spotted the ‘spaceship’ above a field about 
200 yards away, so he decided to take some 8mm movie film of it. ‘Two 
weeks later we saw them across the road from our house in a pasture,’ said 
Watts, ‘and I went out and took a picture of the ship.’ 

On 7 June 1967 at 11.00, while repairing a fence on a farm he owned, 
about a mile northwest of his house in Loco, Watts saw the large ship 
approaching from the north. He ran to his car, grabbed his Polaroid 
camera and managed to take seven black-and-white pictures. ‘The ship 



288 


Alien Base 


was about 300 feet in the air when it came over me, made a circle and left,’ 
said Watts. Of the seven photographs, four developed clearly. 

At about 15.00 on 11 June 1967, Watts spotted the ship again, on the 
farm where he had encountered the ‘Martians’ on 11 April. He was plant¬ 
ing cotton at the time. As before, the ship approached from the north and 
headed south. Later, Watts claims, it returned and landed on a ridge in a 
pasture. One of the beings got out of the ship for a short time and walked 
around. ‘During this time I was down in a low place west of this ridge. I 
was able to get one picture of the man before he ran and got back into the 
ship and left, going north.’ 

Watts took seven Polaroid colour photos of the ship, most of which 
came out satisfactorily. The eighth is less so. ‘Since it was a very bright 
sunny day,’ explained Watts, ‘the man appears to have hair, but it was a 
shadow on the back of his head. He was facing toward the sun which 
accounts for the shadow. 1 was about 60 yards from him when this pic¬ 
ture was taken. He is rather broad-shouldered for his height, and their 
neck is a little thick compared to ours.’ 16 

My enlargement of this photo, supplied by Rosemary Watts, shows 
what can be construed as the head and top half of the trunk of a being of 
indeterminate type: unfortunately, it is out of focus or blurred. ‘We 
would certainly have liked to have had a full view of him and also one that 
was more clear,’ wrote Mrs Watts to Henry Johnson, the then husband 
of Madeleine Rodeffer, ‘but it was the last of the film in the [pack] and he 
didn’t have time to reload the camera to take another one.’ 17 Nonetheless, 
the photo is interesting. Another photo, one of those showing the large 
cigar-shaped ship, is excellent (see plates). 

The Disturbing Aftermath 

Learning of the Air Force-sponsored UFO study at the University of 
Colorado, Watts decided to inform the study team about his experiences, 
and to show them his photographs. Reportedly, the two investigators who 
came to interview him were the late Robert Loftin, author of a pro-UFO 
book, 18 and William Courter, a private detective. 19 According to Rosemary 
Watts, while these two men were interviewing Watts at his home, on the 
morning of 26 February 1968, ‘their motel room in Wellington was entered 
and a lot of material pertaining to this case was stolen.’ 20 

On the night of 26 February, the story of Watts’s experiences hit the 
Associated Press (AP) newsrooms. Watts had decided to make a press 
statement. The following morning came the headlines: ‘Farmer Talks 
With UFO Occupants’; ‘Farmer Who Rode with Spacemen Wants Story 
Tested’; ‘Everyone Loco in Loco? Citizens Vouch for Man Who Rode in 
UFO’ - and so on. 

The AP story reported that a set of some of Watts’s Polaroid prints had 



Contrasting Encounters 


289 


been given to the astronomer Dr J. Allen Hynek, at the time an adviser to 
the Air Force’s Project Blue Book. Hynek told AP that preliminary 
examination showed no signs of fraud. ‘If this is a hoax, it is a very clever 
one,’ he said. ‘There’s no question the story is preposterous,’ he added. 
'The question is, is it true?’ 21 

In March 1968, Watts’s original Polaroid colour prints were sent by 
registered mail to the University of Colorado. Subsequent attempts to 
have the photos returned were unsuccessful. The photos, it seemed, had 
been lost. As Tony Kimery elaborated: 

The only available prints were a set of black-and-white copies that were made 
by Dr Condon [head of the University of Colorado UFO study] and sent to 
Mr Loftin. These copies were in his possession and, presumably, lost during 
the motel break-in. Loftin had made copies of three of the photographs, 
which he distributed to the news media. These three photos are the only 
remaining from the original series of seven [and] are of poor quality due to 
the fact that they are second generation prints. 

Soon after the story appeared across the United States, Watts issued 
an oral statement to the press to the effect that the entire story had been 
an elaborate fabrication. He gave the reasons to Kimery: 

1 had full intentions of trying to prove my story to be true before anything was 
released, and had been working with the Associated Press for several days 
when the UP1 heard of the case and butted in. They released a short rundown 
of the story that same night, and as soon as the story hit the wires, I received 
my first threat to forget about trying to prove it. Therefore, I decided to call 
it a hoax and forget the whole thing. There were several serious threats made 
to me and my family, and I found out that I had stumbled on to something 
far more serious than I had expected. 

It was Dr Allen Hynek who suggested to Watts that he undergo a poly¬ 
graph examination. Watts readily agreed. The test was administered by 
L.R. Wynne, owner of the Amarillo Security Control Company in 
Amarillo, Texas. According to several delayed news reports, Watts failed 
the test. In spite of the examination results, however, Wans stated that 
Wynne believed his story to be true. After Watts’s ‘confession’, Wynne 
told reporters that he considered the Watts story to be a fabrication. 

The night before Watts went to Amarillo, an unidentified caller advised 
him not to make the trip. Watts ignored the advice. The following after¬ 
noon, as he was driving to Amarillo, he noticed a blue-green Plymouth 
parked beside the road with the hood up. An attractive young blonde lady 
was trying to wave him down. Assuming she needed assistance with her 
car, Watts pulled over. As he stepped from the cab of his pickup, he was 
stunned by a blow to the back of his neck. He fell to the ground, dazed, 
and rolled over, though he managed to focus on his aggressors: two men, 





290 


Alien Base 


both about six feet tall, weighing 190 pounds, and in their early thirties. 
Wearing turtleneck sweaters underneath rather expensive-looking suits, 
they were very tanned, clean-shaven, with a rather ‘Greek’ appearance. 
Both were holding exotic-looking rifles of an unknown make. They spoke 
with precise voices. The young lady, evidently the decoy, smiled as the 
two aggressors threatened Watts: he was to fail the polygraph examination 
or face ‘possible consequences’ on his return home. 

That night, a large black car, with no lights, passed slowly by the Watts 
residence, drove up the road a short distance, then returned, opening fire 
with a shotgun. The shot did not hit the house. According to a report by 
investigator Steve McNallen, based on an interview with Police Chief 
Donald Nunnelly, Rosemary Watts called the police, who arrived on the 
scene later. Watts had apparently rushed out of the house and returned 
the fire with his M-l carbine. It is not known whether any of the shots hit 
the car or its passengers. 

Watts and his family were not the only residents of Loco to be threat¬ 
ened. Investigators learned of other cases involving UFO witnesses who 
had been approached by unidentified authorities and told to keep quiet 
about anything they might have seen, ‘for reasons of national security’. 22 

Support 

In interviews with the Associated Press, Police Chief Donald Nunnelly 
and other law enforcement officers in Collingsworth County described 
Carroll Wayne Watts as ‘a stable family man, a church-goer, out of debt, 
and with no motive for fabricating his story’. Furthermore, Nunnelly 
said he knew of as many as 50 people who had seen similar strange lights 
in the area, and four or five who had glimpsed a cigar-shaped object. 
‘This is the sort of thing they will talk about, but only over coffee with 
their very closest friends,’ added Nunnelly. ‘They don’t want to wind up 
in an institution. I’ve known of some law officers who got mixed up in 
things like this and lost their jobs and everything.’ 23 

At 04.00 on 11 April 1967, the day Watts was taken aboard the craft for 
his ‘physical’, Mickey Kendricks was awakened by what he thought was 
a truck driving into the freight depot behind his home. When he looked 
out of the window, however, he saw a cylindrical-shaped object, 
estimated to be 20 to 30 feet long, with red and yellow lights revolving 
around it. 

On 3 November 1967, Hazel McKinney and two female companions 
were driving to work at Childress, Texas, when they noticed a huge 
bright light in a field beside the road. Suddenly, the object, now appear¬ 
ing silver-grey in colour, ‘angled-up’ and disappeared. 'It was big enough 
to drive a car in,’ said Mrs McKinney. ‘It was shaped like a cigar - one 
end was round.’ 



Contrasting Encounters 


291 


Sometime after Watts’s story hit the headlines, Childress Police Chief 
Alvin Maddox had been laughing about it with two colleagues. Shortly 
afterwards, driving ten miles north of Childress and eight miles south of 
Loco, Maddox observed a large bright light hovering in the sky at about 
S00 to 1,000 feet. ‘I took after it in my car, driving about 105 miles per 
hour,’ said Maddox. ‘I followed it about 14 miles, but it left me.’ 24 

So concerned was Watts about his experiences that he asked for a 
Congressional investigation. Nothing came of it, of course, following his 
confession. 

There are many parallels in Watts’s story, not just with published cases 
but also with reports which remained unpublished until many years later. 
Watts had little or no interest in the phenomenon, and by all accounts 
had not read any books on the subject prior to 1967.1 have not met him, 
though I did speak on the telephone to his wife a few years after the in¬ 
cident. I found her to be sincere, and genuinely concerned about the 
whole affair. Surprisingly, both Carroll and Rosemary Watts temporar¬ 
ily retained a positive attitude towards what must rank as one of the most 
bizarre encounters with extraterrestrials. As the couple concluded in 
their report: 

What you have just read is a true story, and we have tried in every way to tell 
it as near to what happened as possible ... We feel like if the public can hear 
about these things and know about what to expect, before they come face to 
face with them as we did, it will make it easier for them to understand and 
accept. We have written this because of the nightmare we lived when we had 
our first experiences with these UFOs. 

Since we have found out that these people mean no harm, we are not afraid 
of them anymore; instead, [we] accept them as friends unless they prove 
themselves otherwise. Only time will tell the outcome of this, but we pray 
that God will have His way in seeing that things turn out for the best.. , 25 
Things did not turn out for the best. Some years after these events. 
Watts began to have behavioural problems. His brother told investigator 
Don Worley that Carroll had become ‘influenced’ by a stranger. Paranoia 
set in, and Watts began to believe that certain people were out to ‘get 
him’. Finally, out of mistaken fear, he pulled his gun on a law officer, for 
which he received a prison sentence. From his cell in Texas State Prison, 
Watts wrote to Worley: 

‘The incident cost me my wife, my children, $285,000, my freedom, 
my health [heart trouble] and nearly my life. Simply because something 
happened to me that I didn’t understand, and that I talked about, and I 
think now that I would have been better off myself if I had died in the 
incident.’ 26 

Sinister incidents such as these should serve as a salutary reminder of 
the dangers that can be involved in encounters with extraterrestrials - 



292 


Alien Base 


particularly in their aftermath. But now, by way of contrast, let us turn to 
another, quite different kind of contact. 

CATMAN AND ROBOT 

During the Second World War, Walter Marino Rizzi served as an aircraft 
mechanic and as an interpreter for the Italian and German air forces. 
Later, he worked as a sales representative for a car firm in Bolzano, Italy, 
his territory including the Dolomite Mountains in the South Tyrol. At 
midnight one Saturday in July 1968, having spent the evening with a 
Dutch girlfriend in San Cassiano, he set off by car via the Gardena and 
Sella Passes to Campitello, where his aunt managed the Sport Hotel. 
Here he planned to spend the night. 

‘The weather was not very good, and I seldom saw a star in the sky,’ 
Rizzi begins in his own report, an English version of which he gave to 
Lou Zinsstag in 1980. ‘There were always dense fog-banks, and more 
than once I had to stop because I couldn’t see the road. So I decided to 
stop at the first possible place and sleep in the car.’ After driving through 
the Grddner Pass, he found a suitable spot - a sand-dump beside the road 
- and settled down in his car for the night. 

At around 01.00, he awoke with a start. There was a strong smell of 
burning. Thinking that his Fiat 600 was about to catch fire, owing prob¬ 
ably to a short-circuit, he checked the engine but found everything in 
order. While walking around the car, however, he noticed below him on 
the opposite side of the road, about 500 metres away, a powerful light 
shining through a gap in the fog, 

‘It looked like an illuminated hotel terrace,’ Rizzi continued, ‘but there 
are no hotels around there -nothing at all. I knew the place very well and 
had passed that way hundreds of times. Then, in a moment of clear visi¬ 
bility, I saw an enormous object bathed in a strange white light. 



Fig. 20. A drawing by Walter Rizzi of the craft he encountered in the Dolomite 
Mountains ofltaly in July 1968. (Walter Rizzi) 





Contrasting Encounters 


293 



Fig. 21. ‘Catman’. A drawing by Waiter Rizzi of the alien being with whom he 
claims to have communicated. At left is the apparatus worn on its back. 

{Waller Rizzi) 

‘A slope went down from the edge of the road, and, taking the torch, I 
descended and made my way towards the plateau where this huge object 
was. As I approached, I could see it more and more clearly, the fog 
becoming less thick. My heart was thumping painfully. I was not afraid 
(I have never been afraid of anything), but terribly excited.’ 

The ‘saucer’ was a beautiful silver colour, about 70 to 80 metres in diameter, 
resting on three legs about two metres from the ground. The legs were about 
two metres in diameter at the base. Everything was bathed in a fleecy white 
light and there was an intense smell of burning. As soon as I got within three 
metres of the disc 1 felt suddenly blocked, as if my body weighed 1,000 kilos; 
I was unable to move and had great difficulty in breathing. 



294 


Alien Base 


The glass dome on top was brightly lit and I saw two 'beings’ looking 
down. On the right side of the disc was a [cylindrical] robot, about 2.5 metres 
tall, with three ‘legs’ and four ‘arms’, holding the outside of the disc and turn¬ 
ing it round. A circular ‘trap-door’ opened in the underside of the disc, giving 
out a violet and orange light, and someone emerged, dressed in a close-fitting 
suit and a glass helmet. The figure seemed to be about five feet four inches 
tall. ‘He’ approached to within a little more than a metre from me and raised 
his right hand. 

I cannot describe my feelings when I looked at that creature with [its] 
beautiful eyes: it was a strange, gentle sensation; I felt as free and light as a 
feather, and was perfectly calm ... As his head and neck were free beneath 
the glass helmet, which was a round globe reaching the shoulders (with two 
flat tubes leading upwards from behind), I was able to see him very clearly. 

Physiognomy and Origin 

His hair was very short and light brown in colour, looking almost like fur. He 
had beautiful eyes, wider apart than ours, slightly oblique, like a cat’s, the 
whites being light hazel, the irises a greenish blue, and pupils that contracted 
continually (when they dilated they were round, and when they contracted 
they were oval, like a cat’s). The nose was very small, also like a cat’s. His lips 
were small and very tight, reminding me somewhat of Greta Garbo, and 
when he smiled he showed his teeth, which were very white and regular. His 
skin was light olive and as smooth as rubber; when he turned his head (he 
could turn it right round), there were no creases on his neck. 

He had very wide shoulders and narrow hips. His arms and legs were the 
first parts of him to hold my attention because they were a bit different from 
ours: from the hip to the knee they were much longer than below the knee, 
and the ankle seemed to me to be articulated like that of a horse. The arms, 
too, were very long - the upper part much longer than the lower - but I was 
unable to see the hands very well because he was wearing gloves, although he 
appeared to have very long fingers. 

1 asked him in Italian where he came from, and no sooner had I framed my 
question than the answer was already in my mind, as if I had always known 
it. The planet he came from was very far from our galaxy and about 10 times 
the size of ours, with two suns, one big, the other small. Their day is longer 
than ours and one third less light, while their night is very short. Their vege¬ 
tation is quite similar to ours, but they have enormous trees and very high 
mountains. They have two frozen poles as we have, stony deserts, and 
animals similar to ours, though with some differences in structure and size. 

I thought of asking him how they live and on what, and immediately I 
received my answer: he moved his mouth a little, but I did not hear his voice. 
The answer appeared in my mind — I suppose, by mental telepathy. He told 
me they do not work; everything is automatic, they are all equal and every¬ 
body has what he wants. There are creatures like apes, which do menial jobs 
such as cultivating fruit and vegetables, harvesting, and so on ... He 



Contrasting Encounters 


295 


explained that they don’t need their teeth as much as we do, as they don’t eat 
meat, adding that, compared with them, we are like animals. They nourish 
themselves on fruit, cereals and seeds, and have, in addition, apparatuses that 
generate energy. Disease does not exist. 

I ‘asked’ him why he had an olive-green skin, and he told me that the 
colour I saw was not the real one, because our system of magnetic colour 
receptivity was not like theirs (I did not understand exactly what he meant). 
[The colours we see represent slightly differing frequencies in the electro¬ 
magnetic spectrum.] 

He told me that their organism is much simpler than ours: they have only 
one digestive tract without all the paraphernalia [entrails] that we have. Their 
heart and lungs, however, are well developed because they need a large intake 
of air to feed the brain and purify the liquid that runs in their veins, which is 
of a different composition from our blood. Moreover, they have very power¬ 
ful muscles in order to withstand the strong atmospheric pressure on their 
planet. In fact, when he emerged from the disc and came towards me, he had 
a leaping or loping gait, like the astronauts walking on the Moon, 

I was continuously struck by the beauty of his eyes and wanted to ask ‘him’ 
if 'he' was a man or a woman. His eyes twinkled for a moment and he 
explained, with a smile, that he was neither; that their system of propagation 
was not through mating, like us. 

Since 1 was examining him closely to see how he was built, he gave me to 
understand that his build was in conformity with the exigencies of life on his 
planet. The top of his head was bigger than ours because his brain was double 
the size of ours. Simply by means of thought and the emanation of [thought] 
waves they could do things that we cannot even imagine,.. 

Space Technology 

As I was only a metre or so from him, I tried a couple of times to reach out 
and touch him, and each time I was impeded. Meanwhile, on the right of the 
disc, the robot was working on the outside of the disc, where there was a kind 
of‘rotor’ or ‘ring’ . . . projecting two metres [from the craft]. 27 

‘It looked like a multi-coloured, ring-like rainbow,’ Rizzi told me in 

1997. 28 

Every now and then it tilted down and the centre sharpened to a point, one 
half turning in one direction and the other in the opposite direction. I asked 
him whether the sharp point was to destroy meteorites ... He smiled again, 
and explained that they do not destroy meteorites; they avoid them ... In any 
case, the function of the external ring is merely to enable them to enter the 
atmosphere of the planets they are visiting . . . 

In space, they travel by the main [carrier] disc, which is outside any mag¬ 
netic field, using another source of energy: it has the same shape, but is very 
big, with a diameter of, I think, five kilometres. It is fitted with ledges for 
smaller discs such as the one I was privileged to see, or a number of very small 




296 


Alien Base 


discs without equipment, which are used for exploration purposes, since they 
have a system of magnetic propulsion with no speed limit in any atmosphere, 
and [which is] immune from temperature and other conditions. In the main 
disc, hundreds of their people can live as on their planet; they have an inex¬ 
haustible supply of energy and everything else that they need. Furthermore, 
they travel in ‘neutral channels’ through space, so that there is no danger of 
their being attracted by other planets, and also to avoid [asteroids] and 
defunct planets. 

I asked him what defensive weapons they had, to which he replied that 
they could disintegrate anything, even at enormous distances. He indicated 
that I should pick up a stone about two metres away and throw it at the dome 
of the disc. I picked it up - it was [shaped] like a large potato and it weighed 
about a kilo - stepped back a bit to get a better angle, and hurled it. As soon 
as the stone approached the disc, a ray of violet light shot out and the stone 
exploded with a thud, disintegrating completely. 

A Disturbing Message 

I asked him why they didn’t give us the benefit of their technical knowledge 
and stay with us for a while on our planet, and how long it would take to 
acquire their technical proficiency. He replied that, in the first place, it was 
impossible for them to interfere with the evolution of any other planet; that 
spending any time in our solar system would age them prematurely, and 
finally that we would never reach their standard of evolution, because the 
crust of our planet is too different, and in the near future there would be a 
shifting of the poles. This would result in a vast opening in the Earth’s crust, 
bringing about the cataclysmic destruction of 80 per cent of the population, 
and leaving only a narrow strip of land still inhabitable for the few survivors. 

God and Death 

At this point I asked him if he believed in God. He looked a little abashed at 
first, then told me that God is everywhere; in us, plants, stones, grass, and 
nature - everything that exists. 

I asked him how they die and how long they live. They die, he said, of 
exhaustion of cosmic energy, and live about a hundred times as long as wc do, 
according to our concept of time. 

Time to Go 

Meanwhile, the robot had finished its job; it became smaller, the cylinder 
became narrower, and it moved to the centre of the disc, whereupon an 
orange light went on, and it seemed to float up and board the disc. It was clear 
that they were leaving. 

In the dome, the other individual waved to me from time to time. I could 
not see ‘him’ very well, but he was like the one who was standing in front of 
me. All the while, the disc had been bathed in that fleecy white light, which 



Contrasting Encounters 


297 


did not cast shadows or hurt the eyes. I asked if I might have something of 
theirs, but he refused, saying it would be harmful to me. 

I was so fascinated by that individual that I asked him to take me with 
them; that it didn’t matter to me if I never returned. I was so upset at the 
thought that I should never see him again that I started to cry: I even went 
down on my knees and begged him to take me. Every time I made to embrace 
him I felt ‘blocked’. Then he indicated to me to get up, his eyes shining in a 
strange way that made me feel warm all over, and he communicated to me as 

‘You arc very courageous, and you have been doubly lucky; firstly because 
if you had approached a metre nearer, right under the disc, you would have 
disintegrated; because the rotor was being checked, the magnetic field did not 
extend beyond the diameter of the disc; secondly, because you have had the 
chance to see us close up, and speak to us. However, neither you nor anyone 
else from this planet could ever remain with us - much less travel in our space 

He then raised his hand as before. I felt myself pushed away from the disc 
by some unknown force, then he arrived beneath the disc and disappeared 
into the illuminated circular opening. In the dome there was still the other 
one who waved to me with those long arms. The white light began to dim, as 
I stopped - or, rather, I was allowed to stop - about 300 metres from the disc, 
the dome gave off a violet light, and also the outside of the disc became suf¬ 
fused with violet and orange. 

At this point, there was a noise like a circular saw, the disc rose two or three 
metres, the feet folded in, then the light changed to light violet, becoming 
whiter and whiter. For a moment there was a whistle that I thought would shat¬ 
ter my eardrums; the disc began rocking, as though bidding me farewell, rose 
slowly to about 300 metres, then suddenly shot away at a terrifying speed. 

‘Back to Earth’ 

1 remained there, shaken, the tears streaming down my face, feeling totally 
desolate. I became aware that 1 was soaking with sweat, and the air seemed 
warm. I touched the ground, which also felt warm. The fog had disappeared, 
the sky was starry, and it was pitch-dark. I tried to switch on my torch, but it 
didn’t work, so I groped my way back to the car. I tried to pull myself together 
after what had occurred. I pricked myself with a pin to see if I was awake, then 
relieved myself. Finally, I drove off towards the Sella Pass to get to my aunt’s 
in the Fassa Valley. 

The following morning in the hotel, Rizzi began making notes and 
sketches. He tried to tell some family members and friends what had 
happened to him, but they ridiculed him. 

Three weeks later, Rizzi returned to the site of the encounter to take 
photographs of the marks of the three legs which had sunk into the 
ground under the weight of the disc. ‘Much to my surprise,’ he reported, 



Alien Base 


'in the area covered by the light that had been shining from inside the 
disc, the grass had grown to three times the height of the surrounding 
grass. I took a screwdriver from the car and dug up one of the longest 
blades of grass, together with roots and earth, and put it in a plastic bag 
to have it analysed in America.’ 

Two days later, Rizzi left for California, where his daughter lived with 
her American husband, a director of Pan American World Airways. 
When he passed through Customs at San Francisco Airport, an official 
asked him if the plant was marijuana. *1 told him it was a chrysanthemum 
shoot I intended to plant on my father-in-law’s grave. He said okay, and 
let me go without analysing the plant.’ 

Rizzi and his daughter sent out a pile of letters describing his experi¬ 
ence to all the addresses they had found in UFO magazines. ‘Nobody 
answered, however, so I decided to keep my adventure to myself. I took 
a deeper interest in UFOs and from time to time read articles on the sub¬ 
ject, often laughing at the rubbish people wrote.’ 29 

*1 should mention that my watch was losing as much as two hours a 
day,’ added Rizzi. ‘I took it to the watch-maker to put right, but it was no 
use, so I had to buy a new one. For about a month, I felt very tired the 
whole time, and I lost a lot of my hair, [but] before two months were up 
I was in good shape again and my hair had begun to grow back.' 30 
Interviewed in 1997 at his flat in Bolzano, looking out on the spectacular 
Dolomites, Rizzi - a youthful-looking 77 years old - told me that it was 
as if his whole body had developed an allergy. Moreover, he became 
impotent for five months. 31 

Discussion 

Here we have another incredible yet intriguing and important encounter, 
one that begs all sorts of questions, of which the first must be: Ho w truth¬ 
ful is the witness? 

To begin with, owing to the ridicule incurred by Rizzi when discussing 
his experience with friends and relatives, he did not make his story pub¬ 
lic until 1979, in an interview for Radio Nord Bolzano. The story was first 
published in 1980 in Flying Saucer Review, based on a report written in 
less than accurate German by Rizzi (who is of Austrian-ltalian parentage, 
Italian being his mother-tongue) and given to the investigators Hans and 
Daphne Markert, who subsequently passed it to Gordon Creighton. 
(With a few exceptions, the report I have used is the English version 
which Rizzi gave to Lou Zinsstag.) At their first meeting with Rizzi, in 
Germany, the Markerts were left with a very strong impression that he 
was telling the truth. 32 Lou Zinsstag was equally impressed, she told me. 

Responding to the article in Flying Saucer Review , an incredulous 
Willy Smith, of the Center for UFO Studies, objected: 



Contrasting Encounters 


299 


We [arc told] that the [being’s] planet is 'ten times the size of our Earth’, 
although no indication is given whether this ten-fold increase refers to mass, 
volume or diameter. At any rate, it would certainly imply a much stronger 
gravitational pull, requiring a corresponding increase in cross section of the 
bone structure in order to cope with the additional weight. Yet, the creature is 
described as ‘just like us', with a height of 1.60 metres, and not particularly 
sturdy. The same reasoning applies to the ‘immensely tall trees’, which in such 
a heavy gravitational field would tend to have a wide base and limited height. 33 

Rizzi told me that the home planet was larger in terms of volume, and 
that the aliens inhabited only the central, equatorial region. 34 It is only of 
academic interest whether the putative planet is larger in any measure, 
inasmuch as mass, volume and diameter are simply different measure¬ 
ments of a planet’s (or any sphere’s) size. ‘Ten times larger’ does not 
imply greater gravity than that of Earth, and in classical physics, I am 
told, the gravity of a planet is a function of its density, whereas mass, per 
se, is the inverse of gravity. 

Among other objections, Smith notes that the landing site is described 
as completely uninhabited, whereas a photograph of Rizzi and others 
taken there shows a house in the upper left corner. I asked Rizzi about 
this. ‘That’s not a house,’ he replied, laughing. ‘It may look like a house, 
bur in fact it’s one of several huts used to store hay. Nobody lives there!’ 35 

Some of what Rizzi claims to have been telepathically informed by the 
androgynous alien is inconsistent with the same kind of information in 
several other contactee accounts. I find it impossible to accept, for 
example, that the aliens’ life-span is 100 times that of ours and that their 
galaxy is ‘millions of light years away’, as Rizzi told me. And although an 
estimated half of the stars in our galaxy are binary (where two suns move 
in an elliptical orbit around a common centre of mass), we have no proof 
so far for the existence of component planets in such systems. 

These stumbling blocks do not devalue Rizzi’s story for me. In the face 
of ridicule, he insists that this was the information conveyed to him. His 
story contains much that is new - and it has not changed over the years. 
In company with many other contactees, though, the encounter changed 
him. ‘The experience changed my character greatly and had a profound 
effect on my attitude to all questions of religion or politics,’ he declared. 36 
‘It was the greatest experience of my life .. .’ 37 


NOTES 

1 Typewritten draft by Carroll and Rosemary Watts (undated). 

2 Kimery, Tony L-, ‘Carroll Wayne Watts - Contactee, Hoaxer or Innocent 
Bystander?’, Official UFO , vol. 1, no. 11, October 1976, Countrywide 
Publications, New York, p. 36. 





300 


Alien Base 


3 Watts and Watts, op. cit. 

4 Kimery, op. cit., p. 36. 

5 Watts and Watts, op. cit. 

6 Kimery, op. cit., p. 36. 

7 Watts and Watts, op. cit. 

8 Kimery, op. cit., p. 36. 

9 Watts and Warts, op. cit. 

10 Kimery, op. cit., p. 36. 

11 Watts and Watts, op. cit. 

12 Kimery, op. cit., p. 36. 

13 Watts and Watts, op. cit. 

14 Kimery, op. cit., p. 37. 

15 Watts and Watts, op. cit. 

16 Ibid. 

17 Letter to Henry Johnson from Rosemary Wans (undated - early 1970s). 

18 Lofdn, Robert, Identified Flying Saucers, David McKay Company, New 
York, 1968. 

19 Kimery, op. at., p. 37, 

20 Letter to Henry Johnson from Rosemary Watts (undated). 

21 Associated Press, Loco, Texas, 26 February 1968. 

22 Kimery, op. cit., pp. 37,64. 

23 Associated Press, 26 February 1968. 

24 Kimery, op. cit., pp. 33, 36. 

25 Watts and Watts, op. cit. 

26 Worley, Don, ‘Some Denizens of the “Black Nether-World” and their 
Abductee Victims’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 42, no. 2, summer 1997, p. 10. 

27 Rizzi, Walter Marino, ‘Flying Saucer Seen in the Dolomites’, July 1968 
(manuscript). 

28 Interview with the author, Bolzano, 3 May 1997. 

29 Rizzi, op. cit. 

30 Rizzi, Walter, ‘Close Encounter in the Dolomites’, translated from the 
German by Gordon Creighton, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 26, no. 3, 
May-June 1980, p. 27. 

31 Interview with the author, 3 May 1997. 

32 Creighton, Gordon, ‘Introductory Comments on the Rizzi Case’, Flying 
Saucer Review, vol. 26, no. 3,1980, pp. 21-2. 

33 Letter to the editor (Charles Bowen) from Willy Smith, Flying Saucer 
Review, vol. 26, no. 6, November-December 1980, p. 31. 

34 Interview with the author, 3 May 1997. 

35 Ibid. 

36 Rizzi, ‘Flying Saucer Seen in the Dolomites’, July 1968. 

37 Interview with the author, 3 May 1997. 



Chapter 15 


The Plantation 


The two passengers settled themselves down in their compartment for 
the train journey from Bombay to Madras on the night express. It was 
October 1964. Ludwig F. Pallmann, a German businessman dealing with 
the sale and installation of heavy machinery used in the large-scale pro¬ 
duction of food, eyed his travelling companion. The man was obviously 
a sahib left over from the British occupation, thought Pallmann. ‘He was 
very well dressed, and had the unmistakable stamp of authority in his 
bearing.’ About five feet ten inches or so in height, the stranger had a slim 
build and extremely long legs. 

Pallmann struck up a conversation in English with the stranger and 
offered him a glass of whisky. ‘My companion and I were the only two 
travelling in this compartment,’ explained Pallmann, ‘and after the intro¬ 
ductory drinks we settled ourselves down in opposite corners and 
watched the landscape go by.’ 

It was not long before Pallmann noticed some unusual features about 
his companion, not least, the eyes, which were exceptionally expressive. 
In addition, the man had unusually long, slender fingers, the fingertips 
covered by some kind of protection, the like of which Pallmann had never 
seen before. ‘For the rest, he was off-white in colour ... a very light 
brown indeed; even his hair was light brown. I doubt if he weighed 100 
pounds fully dressed, but for all his slim build he did not give the appear¬ 
ance of being physically weak. Indeed, on the contrary.’ Something else 
attracted Pallmann’s attention. 

I could not help observing that every time he inhaled, so he contracted his 
hands. Indeed, it seemed that he had to have recourse to deep inhalation with 
every breath, rather as though he suffered from respiratory trouble. Not that 
there was any external evidence of this, for, as I have said, he looked a very 
healthy specimen indeed. 

When the stranger spoke, Pallmann was astonished to note that his 
voice did not appear to come from his mouth, but rather from a small 
‘speaking device’ clipped to his chest. His speech, too, was peculiar. 
Although his English was impeccable, there was always a slight hesitation 
before he spoke. ‘It was as if he was making the mental effort to say the 



302 


Alien Base 


first word, after which all the others would come spontaneously,’ 
Pallmann elaborated. ‘But that first word was laboured. It was a trick of 
speech that was not at all unpleasant.. .’ 

The stranger introduced himself as ‘Satu Ra’. 

At nightfall, the train pulled into a large station. On the platform were 
throngs of hungry-looking and miserable people, including an emaciated, 
ragged woman and her fretful baby, who seemed to be suffering from 
chronic malnutrition. Without a word, Satu left the compartment, made 
towards the pair, and pressed a coin into the woman’s hand and a tablet 
into the baby’s mouth. He then returned to the compartment. ‘Please 
come with me,’ he said quietly to Pallmann. ‘There is much to be done.’ 

Satu led the way to the last (third-class) compartment in the train, 
which was swarming with passengers. Arriving at a group of young chil¬ 
dren, Satu began dispensing his tablets, at the same time speaking to 
them in faultless Hindi. Then, seeing an old man squatting on the floor, 
Satu spoke gently to him and also handed him one of his tablets. And so 
it went on. Whatever the ingredients in the tablets, they seemed to have 
a miraculously beneficial effect on the recipients. 1 

On arrival in Madras, Pallmann asked Satu where he came from, 
having been unable to place his origin. ‘There’s no real mystery about 
me, my friend,’ came the response. ‘I come from Cotosoti,' 

‘I’ve never heard of that,’ said Pallmann. ‘Where is it? In Central 
America?’ 

‘No, no, my friend. It is on Itibi Ra II.’ 

‘Now I know you’re joking.' 

‘I assure you I’m not.’ 

‘I’ve travelled the world extensively,’ said Pallmann, ‘and I’ve never 
heard of such a place. Whereabouts is it?’ 

Satu Ra merely pointed towards the eastern sky. 2 

‘A SERVANT OF GOD’ 

•What he inferred,’ continued Pallmann, ‘was that he came from another 
world, from another planet away out there in distant space. All my life I 
had dealt with concrete things, concrete facts ... Anything beyond that, 
and I would be the first to admit that I was getting out of my depth. Yet 
undoubtedly I had spent the last twenty-four hours in the company of a 
flesh and blood person, albeit one with many remarkable attributes.’ 

Later, at his hotel, Pallmann received an invitation from a distin¬ 
guished-looking Indian to visit a certain address in Madras, adding the 
name of‘Mr Satu Ra’. So, the following morning, Pallman took a taxi and 
found himself deposited at a palatial mansion, which turned out to be a 
rauseum-cum-art gallery, where Satu was staying. 

After greeting Pallmann, Satu pointed to an image of Lord Vishnu, 



The Plantation 


303 


one of the principal Hindu deities, with images of strange aerial craft 
painted on to the sacred cloth. 3 ‘This is proof that earlier generations 
have observed the effigy of our out-of-space crafts having made an earlier 
landing,’ he said to the bemused Pallmann, who was yet to be convinced 
of Satu’s alleged origin. Perhaps ‘Itibi Ra’ might be an equivalent of the 
mythical Shangri-La, he wondered. Was Satu deluded? Or, more likely, 
was he trying to sell something? 

'At the back of my mind was the thought that there must be a com¬ 
mercial reason for this invitation, and I expected some sales-talk from my 
host,’ Pallmann continued. ‘However, nothing of the sort happened.’ 
The two spent a pleasant afternoon together, during which Pallmann was 
able to observe his host in a better light than hitherto. 

He had the light brown skin of a Eurasian, huge dark eyes, a rather small 
mouth and an unusual chin line. The lower part of the jaw looked slightly 
deformed. Then, there were those finger-tip gloves which he seemed to wear 
at all times, even though the weather was extremely hot. Above all, there was 
this peculiarity of speech, this complete reliance upon an electronic gadget to 
reproduce his voice. 

Before the meeting concluded, Pallmann informed Satu of his travel 
plans, which included Kashmir, Calcutta and Benares. Benares, said 
Satu, would be the place where the two would meet again. But how? Satu 
handed Pallmann a curious ring, apparently made of solid gold, in the 
middle of which was what appeared to be a small piece of metal, sparkling 
like a diamond (see plates). ‘Maybe this will indicate our presence in 
Benares,’ said Satu cryptically, adding that the ages-old ring was ‘the 
symbol of a human religion very close to ours’. 

After thanking Satu profusely for the unexpected gift, Pallmann ven¬ 
tured to ask what profession his host was occupied in; a question that had 
been on his mind since the first meeting. 

‘I am a servant,’ replied Satu, smiling. ‘A servant of God, as are all my 
people. ..’ + 

XITI 

On the evening of his second day in Benares, Pallmann was enjoying the 
night air in the garden of his hotel when the metal piece in the middle of 
the ring began to glow. Convinced it was a trick of the light, he tried 
moving it this way and that, but to no avail. If anything, the glow inten¬ 
sified. Suddenly, a mental image of Satu Ra came into his mind. ‘The 
whole thing was ridiculous,’ said Pallmann. ‘It just could not happen. 
But there it was .. .’ 

Shortly after 21.30, the unmistakable figure of Satu approached 
Pallmann and greeted him warmly. The two engaged in a lengthy con- 



304 


Alien Base 


versation covering a wide range of topics. Satu had a keen sense of 
humour, and evinced a perfect understanding of Spanish when Pallmann 
lapsed into that language from time to time. Although Satu’s voice itself 
was not peculiar, Pallmann noted, there was a quality about it ‘that made 
the hearer feel the inner meaning of words’. 

If he spoke of pain, then you almost winced at the word. If he spoke of love, 
then you were blanketed in the sensation of love. It is a difficult thing to 
explain. The gadget gave the voice a new dimension, a subtlety such as 1 had 
not heard in any other human voice. Again, this set me pondering. . 

Pallmann showed Satu some photographs of various temples he had 
visited in Kashmir; different effigies to the numerous gods, pictures of 
priests and worshippers, and so on. ‘You have been there?’ Pallmann 
enquired. 

‘Yes,’ replied Satu. ‘But you know, my friend,' he added sadly, ‘reli¬ 
gion is blind, just like love.’ 

The two men sat down on a bench near the main entrance to the hotel 
which afforded them a clear view of the bystanders. A group of uni¬ 
formed hotel staff was loitering around the entrance, watching the girls 
go by. When a particularly attractive girl, an airline hostess, walked down 
the stairs, the reaction of the girl-watchers drew a smile from Satu. ‘What 
men won’t do for the sight of a pretty face and figure,’ he remarked. ‘It is 
the same in all the Universe ...’ 

Asked by Satu if he could invite his sister, Xiti, along for the evening, 
Pallmann readily agreed to the idea. ‘Then I will summon her,’ said Satu. 
Naturally assuming that Satu would go to the reception area to telephone 
Xiti, Pallmann was shocked to see him go into what looked like a trance. 
‘The expression on his face changed. It seemed as if that different chin 
was suddenly possessed by lock-jaw . . . The eyes, too, were widely 
dilated. Curiously, the light seemed to leave his eyes, as though someone 
had turned off a switch at the back of the retina.’ Just as suddenly, Satu 
came back to normal, as if nothing unusual had happened 

‘I for my part felt in need of a drink,’ commented Pallmann, ‘so I called 
a servant across and ordered Scotch and soda for both of us.’ As the ser¬ 
vant departed, an attractive lady advanced upon the two men, whom 
Pallmann assumed to be Xiti. As she approached, he thought it peculiar 
that he had not noticed her before. It was almost as if she had ‘material¬ 
ized’ in front of the men. ‘My subconscious choice of mental words stag¬ 
gered me,’ he continued. ‘I had thought in terms of materialization. She 
had come from a well-lit area. I could see everything and everybody in 
the vicinity of the hotel entrance. Yet I had not seen her until she neared 
the bench on which Satu Ra and I were sitting.’ 

Xiti, however, proved to be very much a material girl, and from the 



The Plantation 


305 


start, Pallmann found himself irresistibly attracted to her. She walked 
with a ‘gliding, undulating movement, a movement in which body and 
arms moved rhythmically in a way that I had only noticed before with her 
brother’. 

There could be little doubt that this was Satu Ra’s sister. There was that same 
different chin formation, those same compelling eyes, that same air of charm 
and of authority. And when we were introduced, she looked me straight in 
the eyes in a way that few women do. But there was no pert boldness in that 
look, merely fearlessness and utter frankness. 

Her every movement was a study in gracefulness. She was dressed in a 
glittering evening gown, as though she had just left a very formal reception. 
But although the ensemble was exotic in the extreme, there was no hint of the 
oriental about it, except that her tiny feet were enhanced by golden sandals. 
An orange half-veil accentuated rather than hid her matchless beauty. 

Although Xiti spoke normally, it was evident that she employed the 
same technique for communicating as did her brother. On a small be¬ 
jewelled brooch around her neck was presumably an electronic gadget of 
some type. ‘Her voice came from the heart of this fine, small brooch,’ 
Pallmann elaborated, ‘yet the sound synchronized with her lip move¬ 
ments. This was one of the refinements of the gadget. Never were lip 
movements out of phase with the sound.’ 

During the subsequent conversation, mostly in English, Pallmann 
decided to try an experiment. While Satu’s and Xiti’s understanding and 
use of Spanish were excellent, was it possible that a colloquial accent 
might confuse them? ‘I persisted with my experiment, continuing to 
speak in Spanish, but ringing the changes, so that at one time I spoke as 
though I were a native of Spain, the next of Peru.’ 

Their facial expressions changed as I altered my intonation. I could see their 
puzzlement reflected in their eyes. They looked at each other intently, as 
though they were listening to strange, unknown sounds .,. They seemed to 
be caught in some mental activity induced by imagined sensory impressions 
that were causing them some tension and ill-feeling. Immediately, they 
switched back into English. Thus I knew that they were not truly polyglot but 
were relying on some mechanical device... the gadget worn by Satu Ra and 
the brooch by Xiti. 5 

THE UNTOUCHABLES 

The following morning, Pallmann was wandering along the banks of the 
sacred Ganges River in Benares when he was suddenly joined by Satu Ra. 
How he had known precisely where to find Pallmann, among the throngs 
of people, was a mystery. Satu led the way in the direction of the 
Ramakrishna Monastery. ‘Because of certain primitive elements and 
castes which cling to Indian society,’ said Pallmann, ‘I was surprised to 



306 


Alien Base 


find my friend amongst these, the poorest and most miserable creatures: 
the untouchables.’ Soon, they were mixing with other castes in the 
middle of the mahabhinishkamana (‘the way to ultimate resignation’), ‘the 
vast dumping ground where people, young and old, men and women, 
who are at death’s door, are brought to await the end’. Satu began to go 
about his ministrations. 

i have never seen anybody, man or woman, professional or amateur 
welfare worker, act with such compassion and gentleness as I saw Satu Ra 
carry out his works of mercy,’ continued Pallmann. Satu headed directly 
to a dirty, crying child, huddled over the body of her mother who had just 
died. With the utmost care, Satu washed the child as best he could and 
spoke comfortingly to her. 

Shortly afterwards, Xiti, dressed in a green sari, appeared on the scene. 
She, too, was ministering to those children in need. Seeing one little girl 
covered with open sores, Xiti took out a yellow paste of some sort and 
covered the sores. ‘The effect was little short of miraculous,’ said 
Pallmann. The girl stopped crying and even managed a faint smile. ‘The 
ointment seemed to be as much a panacea as the tablets that Satu Ra had 
dispensed on the train.’ 6 

THE MOMENT OF TRUTH 

That evening, Xiti having left the scene, Satu Ra hailed a rickshaw and 
informed Pallmann that they were going to visit the ‘Children of God’, 
the name given to a pitiful, primitive crematorium on the banks of the 
Ganges. ‘1 counted almost forty funeral fires, some so dose that they were 
almost contiguous,' remarked Pallmann. ‘We could see small, tormented 
limbs dangling outside the immediate orbit of flames until the consum¬ 
ing fire broke them off. The attendants snatched up the freed arms and 
legs and threw them back into the flames as if they were feeding a garden 
fire more twigs. It was a sickening experience .. . 

‘Life to these children had meant nothing but suffering and despair. 
What else could be expected in a country afflicted by poverty and starva¬ 
tion, set in a world riddled by fear, hate and war? These are reasons why 
nameless children are burnt at night beside a majestic Indian river.’ 

In a sad and reflective mood, the two returned to the hotel. It was there 
that Pallmann came to accept Satu for what he claimed to be. 

Until that moment of truth, there were certain things that he had said that I 
had taken with the proverbial grain of salt. After the moment of truth, I was 
prepared to accept everything he said as gospel. Henceforth, as far as I was 
concerned, he, and Xiti for that matter, was always a witness of the truth. I 
don’t know what alchemy it was that brought us to the moment of truth . 
Whatever the cause, on that memorable night I accepted that Satu Ra had 
come from another planet named Itibi Ra 11, and that his people had discov- 



The Plantation 


307 


ered Earth in much the same way that Columbus had discovered the New 
World: by a deliberate voyage of exploration. 7 

FURTHER DIFFERENCES 

There was something about Satu Ra’s smile which bothered Pallmann: 
his teeth never showed. Perhaps this had something to do with the rather 
different jaw formation and the fact that his long, thin and sensitive lips 
always seemed to cover the teeth completely. Pallmann’s curiosity had 
not gone unnoticed. Satu explained that, for many thousands of years, 
men and women on his planet had lived without teeth, gradually finding 
them unnecessary. However, on Earth, they did use a type of artificial 
support that kept the shape of their mouths similar to those of humans. 
On closer inspection, Pallmann noticed that Satu and Xiti had rather 
small tongues. 

Pallmann’s wish to inspect his friends’ fingers was also granted gra¬ 
ciously. When the protective covers were removed, the differences were 
immediately apparent. 

In contrast to the feminine hand, the male finger-tips are flat and round, like 
little discs. Extremely sensitive they must be as there are no nails whatever, 
with the very rosy, fine and soft flesh extending to the very end of each finger. 
Xiti’s hands were a true masterwork of nature: pointed and extremely thin, 
very long, entirely different from her brother’s. 

Both Satu and Xiti appeared to be very amused at Pallmann’s mystifi¬ 
cation. ‘But because of their kindness and frankness they came so much 
closer to my heart,’ he added. ‘They spoke to me like real friends, telling 
me also the reason for these differences. 

‘It seems that they are able to analyse sound, and perhaps are even able 
to “hear” through the sensitive nerves of their finger-tips. Also, at later 
times, I became sure of the fact that they were using their fingers as we 
would use our tongues for tasting and exploring, specially when doing 
biological research work .. .’ 8 

THE YAVARI RIVER STORY 

Ludwig Pallmann did not see Satu or Xiti in India again. 

In Zurich, he took the peculiar ring to a jeweller, who commented that 
the pre-Columbian design and gold-work of the ‘God’ on its surface were 
unlike anything he had ever seen, and recommended that the ring should 
be shown to a specialist. ‘The diagnosis of this expert was that he believed 
this to be a masterwork of great value, belonging to one of the earliest pre- 
Columbian dynasties,’ claimed Pallmann. ‘What intrigued them to the 
point of utmost curiosity was the metal insert, which I believe to be of 
extra-terrestrial origin.’ 9 



Alien Base 


A few years went by. Pallmann was busy installing milling and pulver¬ 
izing plants in Argentina, Mexico, Colombia and Peru. While in Iquitos, 
Peru, he heard an interesting story from an Austrian tour guide, a rugged 
individual who had spent much time in remote jungle areas in that part 
of the country. ‘On the other side of the Yavari River, I saw several white 
explorers turned native,’ related the guide, describing an incident that 
had occurred while he was suffering from a fever. ‘The funniest people I 
ever met; with hands so strange, that I thought them to be from a differ¬ 
ent world.’ Pallmann pricked up his ears. 

‘They might have talked a lot of nonsense,’ the guide continued, ‘but 
they were such fine engineers. They even fixed a broken out-board pro¬ 
peller blade for me so that I could get back to the Yavari. For all their 
craziness, they were good at doctoring as well.’ Pallmann bought the 
guide a drink and pumped him for more information, The Austrian 
opened up somewhat. 

‘This fellow with the funny mouth, a legacy of some fever, I suppose, 
gave me a tablet to swallow. I felt better almost immediately. Then he 
gave me some fruit juice. That was the best fruit juice I’ve ever tasted. 
Yes, they were white folk turned native all right. I told them to give it up, 
and come back to civilization, but they refused ... I told the missionar¬ 
ies on the Brazil side of the border what I’d seen out there on the Yavari 
River. They wouldn’t believe a word I said. Made out it was the fever. 
Said no white man would dare to go into cannibal country .. .’ I0 

THE HOSPITAL VISIT 

In early 1967, Pallmann was sent to the Maison Fran^ais Hospital in 
Lima for an operation on his right kidney. Fortunately, he was allocated 
a pleasant room with a private bath on the ground floor of the hospital, 
with an inner door that led to an antechamber and thence out to a patio- 
garden. He resigned himself to a three-day wait in what was then a heat- 

On the second night, racked with pain, Pallmann reached for the bell- 
push. It was almost three in the morning. ‘My groping fingers failed to 
find the bell-push that would summon help and relief. But I did find 
something else: a hand that came from the pain-racked night and clasped 
my own. Tormented by pain as I was, I still felt a shock when I found my 
hand grasped by another slim, warm one.’ It was Xiti. 

Without a word, Xiti smiled, took the ring off Pallmann’s finger, and 
gave him one of her healing tablets. Because of his pain, he had failed to 
notice that the metal inset was glowing. A faint light reflected from Xiti’s 
talking device. Still without speaking, she ran her fingers over his fevered 
brow. The pain and fever immediately subsided, and he embraced her in 
gratitude. She stayed for the remainder of the night. 



The Plantation 


309 


As they talked, Xiti told him about- a nurse at the hospital, Maria 
Navidad, whom she had wanted to see, but had hesitated to do so for 
several reasons. It so happened that this young lady had been rescued as 
a baby by the mestizos (racially mixed people) and the Austrian tour 
guide, near the town of Pucallpa on the Ucayali River, and raised by the 
Catholic sisters who ran the hospital. Satu and Xiti knew Maria’s mother, 
whom they had rescued after she had been terribly beaten in an area near 
their first landing site. Having been healed by her rescuers, Xiti 
explained, she had been taken to their home planet. Perhaps because she 
had been unable to adjust to the different planet, she had died soon after¬ 
wards. 

Xiti predicted that Pallmann would be free of pain for six months. And 
so he was. ‘I became the miracle patient of the famous Maison Franfais 
Hospital,’ Pallmann declared. ‘When the doctors came around to put me 
on the operating table, I had already eaten a very heavy breakfast, a thing 
I had not done for almost three weeks. I had gotten out of bed, a new man 
in need of a hot and cold bath. Feeling perfectly well, I had ventured out¬ 
side and eaten in one of the little Chinese coffee-shops, the chifas, as they 
are called . . .’ 

You should have seen the raised eyebrows, the looks of disbelief among the 
medical people when, instead of being wheeled into the operating theatre, I 
told them I was going to discharge myself as cured. They could tell by just 
looking at me that 1 was infinitely better, and although they agreed to post¬ 
pone the operation, they insisted that I should remain in the hospital at least 
until the next day in order to make another series of exhaustive tests, and also 
to ensure themselves that I did not have a relapse. 

Pallmann readily consented to the proposal. For the rest of the day he 
was submitted to a battery of tests. All proved negative. 

Later that day, Pallmann asked Sister Marta at the hospital if he could 
meet Maria Navidad. The meeting was brief, and rather poignant. When 
Pallmann mentioned that he had heard about her rescue as a baby, and 
her mother, the nurse looked stunned, then tears ran down her cheeks. 
She spoke not a word, and Pallmann felt ashamed for having asked her 
for more information. 11 

AN ALIEN LIAISON? 

The following morning, Pallmann left the hospital and checked in at the 
Savoy Hotel in Lima, having been unable to find accommodation at the 
Hotel Crillon, where he had a pre-arranged meeting with Xiti at the Sky 
Room that evening. Her entrance created quite a stir. ‘Immediately, and 
because of the minute blue veil she wore,’ said Pallmann, ‘people noticed 
the subtle difference between her and “ourselves"—our people, from our 



310 


Alien Base 


planet. By this, I mean not just cultured Peruvians, or the many 
Europeans and North Americans staying at this famous first-class hotel, 
but even the less instructed bell-boys and lift operators, stared at Xiti. 
But instead of finding her embarrassed or shy, she looked at me and 
everybody else with the greatest of ease.’ Pallmann ordered drinks and 
the couple spent the rest of the night together. 

During the next few days, Pallmann began to learn more about his 
friends from ‘Itibi Ra II’. Xiti’s feeling of security, for example, was 
apparently related to the advanced spiritual and mental perceptions prac¬ 
tised by these people - what Xiti supposedly referred to in their language 
as ‘amat mayna’, or ‘science of soul’. ‘They are able to read our very 
thoughts,’ Pallmann averred, ‘and may be able to influence our thoughts 
should this be necessary because of security reasons.’ 

Xiti’s interest in and enjoyment of music were immense. When passing 
a record store in Lima, for instance, she showed delight in the rhythm of 
the Colombian cumbia. ‘Seldom have I seen a happier look on someone’s 
face as this strange woman passed the record store,’ remarked Pallmann. 

To obtain the local currency, Xiti gave Pallmann several gold ingots, 
which he exchanged at a commercial house in Union Street. Even though 
quite a few ‘adventurers’ and certain Indian natives in Bolivia, Ecuador 
and Peru still traded in gold at that time, Pallmann claimed that ‘the 
beautifully melted and carved ingots surprised the specialists’. 12 

INSIDE THE FLYING SAUCER 

Pallmann gladly accepted an invitation from Xiti to meet her brother in 
Huancayo, a town high in the Andes about 130 miles east of Lima. On 
arriving at the station, on 17 February 1967, Pallmann did not at fi rst rec¬ 
ognize Satu Ra. 'He was dressed very much like the natives, with heavy 
woollen gear. There wasn’t much difference to be noticed between his 
looks and the taxi driver whom he had charged with helping to unload all 
our baggage.’ (Xiti, Pallmann remarked, had brought with her ‘suitcases 
full of books, records, seeds, and God knows what else’.) 

Some distance outside Huancayo, the taxi driver was paid and the 
three were left by themselves. It was while they were watching the sun go 
down from a peaceful lakeside that Pallmann claims he saw his first 
‘flying saucer’. It was an awe-inspiring experience. 

‘So much has been written and talked about on the subject of uniden¬ 
tified flying objects and a great deal of money has been spent by various 
military and private research investigators,’ Pallmann explained, ‘but 
despite all this, when you actually see a flying saucer for the first time, I 
believe that not one in a million scientific investigators would be able to 
explain the fantastic feeling that I experienced.’ 

Pallmann's subsequent description of the craft reads as if it were sci- 



The Plantation 


311 


ence fiction. In many ways-more fantastic than descriptions given by 
other contactees, it is, nonetheless, fascinating, and should come as a 
challenge to critics who often find such descriptions suspicious. 

There was a soft but painful noise, or rather reverberation, as the saucer glided 
towards the edge of the lake, right to the spot where we were waiting ... As 
the noise [reduced] a few decibels from painful to ‘bearable’, the saucer hov¬ 
ered, and opened up underneath its circular surface. Like a giant crooking his 
little finger, an embarkation device, soft and gripping at the same time, 
scooped us up and deposited us in some kind of‘antiseptic reception quarter’. 

Immediately, I became aware of the biological, vegetational, cellular struc¬ 
ture - similar to soft polyethylene - embellished with exquisite designs and 
symbols. Only the flooring was a little harder, and I suppose the reason for 
this must be its mirror-like quality. Through this floor [one could see what 
looked like] a billion nerves and bloodvessels .. .' 3 

Inside the craft there was a discreet hum; the rhythm like the sound asso¬ 
ciated with low-voltage waves, or with turbines, as I thought then. Evidently, 
the reverberations I had heard and felt when first observing the flying saucer 
settle were either linked with particular manoeuvres, or were merely ex¬ 
ternalized noise. 

Pallmann says he was ‘stripped to the buff’ to take a bath. During the 
bath, he fell asleep, then woke to find himself in a very comfortable, soft 
sleeping device, suspended like a hammock, but ‘attached to many hun¬ 
dreds of fine and multi-coloured “veins" and “vessels”. This, I later was 
told, is part of a “medical computer system” (health analysis during sleep 
forming only a small part of life-preserving treatments).’ 

Xiti, who had either risen earlier or not slept at all, brought Pallmann 
a kimono-like garment to wear. ‘Breakfast’ was not to his taste. 

I found the gelatinous-looking plants from their planet impossible to eat, and 
I tried the complicated arrangement of small containers from which I was 
supposed to sip. 1 was curious about the contents of these gadgets, so I started 
to sip at random. They all had a wonderful time just laughing like children 
about my lousy behaviour. The wife of one of the astronauts showed me how 
to do it. Nevertheless, I left practically with an empty stomach. 

The Eye 

One of the most remarkable discoveries for Pallmann was the absence of 
doors, locks, keys or rooms, such as we know them (though private 
quarters are alluded to later). No mention is made of toilet arrangements. 
Everything, even the 'commanding cell’, called ‘yano’ or ‘the eye’, 
formed part of the biological structure of the craft. 

There was not one straight line, so to speak, in the whole space-craft, nor 
were the circular forms ‘exaedy’ circular. At all times, the ‘eye’ of the craft is 



312 


Alien Base 


part of this body. This centre unit of the craft was so geared with other instru¬ 
ments that its power of involvement was complete. In other words, the ‘eye 
centre unit’ is some kind of an activated memory, a transmitting and receiv¬ 
ing centre, similar to our brains ... I was able to experience later how this 
individual brain of the ‘saucer’ became part of the giant system of cosmic gen¬ 
erator-brains and, in particular, how this great individual unit had to be con¬ 
sidered a minute part of the great memory computer on the home planec 
itself. 

The Home Planet 

At all times, Pallmann was encouraged by his hosts to ask questions and 
to give them his impressions. From an ‘observation post', he was shown 
images of the home planet (in a solar system located towards the centre 
of our galaxy, he learnt later), such as methods of transportation, food¬ 
processing installations, ‘biological machinery’ and various instruments. 
‘I even listened to a concert, and invaded some of their homes,’ he 
claimed. ‘I use the word “invaded” deliberately, because the involvement 
brought about by the “eye” makes one feel as if one is actually going to 
these places; going to the concert, for example, or visiting friends in their 
own home.’ 

Everybody looked happy in this Utopian society. 'Everybody seemed 
to be smiling, young and old. There didn’t appear to be many unhealthy 
people about, but the "generator” was trained on to what they call 
“health centres”, and I saw that even patients there were smiling. 

‘Linked with the all-pervading air of happiness on Itibi Ra II was an 
atmosphere of calmness and serenity. No one seemed out of patience. 
Nobody appeared to be in a hurry . ..' 

Pallmann liked what he saw of the aliens’ architecture. ‘Most of their 
homes were built along river banks and the sides of lakes and other water¬ 
ways. Their architecture was unlike any 1 had seen on Earth, except in 
futuristic exhibitions. They delighted in dominant colours . ..’ 

The Factory Planet 

What intrigued Pallmann most about Itibi Ra II was that it was fused 
with two very small satellite planets. One of these smaller planets func¬ 
tioned as a giant biological artificial ‘heart’, pumping ‘power’ into the 
fused planet, while the other acted as a ‘factory’. The Itibi Rayans, we are 
told, separate all artificial and mechanical working machinery from their 
normal, domestic surroundings. 

Through the eye-generator I was able to peer right into the bowels of this fac¬ 
tory-planet. To me, it looked for all the world like an opened-up octopus. 
The vast number of tentacles were, I suppose, the channels and cables tap¬ 
ping the power sources ... It was from The Factory that my friends had 











The valley at the Blue John Caves, Derbyshire, where the contactee ‘Joellc’ \ 
the landing of an extraterrestrial craft in September 1963. (© Timothy Good) 
















Photos selected from the series taken by Paul Villa, 1963-6 
(Copyright claimed in 1967 by UFO International, PO Box SS2, 
Detroit, Michigan 48232) 

Photos 1-6 taken on 16 June 1963 near the town of Peralta, about IS miles 
south of Albuquerque, New Mexico. 




1. Craft above Villa’s truck. 

2. According to Villa, the craft flipped on its edge with the lower part rotating. 
























5. The craft at this point is purportedly about a quarter of a mile away from the camera. 
Note the out-of-focus foliage in the foreground, suggesting that the craft is not a small 

6. Villa’s most well-known photo, arguably the best of the series taken in 1963. The 
craft was a few hundred yards away. Although the upper, domed structure could be 
turned independendy from the lower section, it appeared to remain stationary during 
flight and the lower section alone rotated at different speeds. 






Photos 7-9 taken on 18 April 1965, about 20 miles south of Albuquerque, 
close to the bed of the Rio Grande. 


7, 8. In photo above, the lower branches of the tree at right were vibrating violently. 










It* 




and to the left of the tailgate of Villa’s truck can be seen a small cloud of 





















An aerial craft projecting 
beams of light, photographed 
by an anonymous doctor on 
23 March 1974, near 
Tavemes, Var, during a wave 
of sightings in France. 









The Laguna Cartagena, part o!' :i 
Rico, and (below) tlie El Yunq*--* 
bases are located. (© Timothy 


Wildlife Refuge in Cabo Rojo, Puerto 
rest, where many islanders believe alien 











One of the several Polaroid photos by Filiberto Caponi of a creature he encountered on 
several occasions outside his home in Ascoli Piceno Abruzzo, Italy, in 1993 (described in 
Beyond Top Secret). (© Filiberto Caponi) 


The notorious ‘chupacabras’, 
reported in the mid-1990s by 
numerous witnesses in Puerto Rico. 
This painting by Jorge Martin is 
regarded as the most accurate 
representation of these creatures, 
which reportedly were responsible 
for the deaths of hundreds of 
animals. (Jorge Martin) 








314 


Alien Base 


We shall never be able to experience what these conditions really mean, as our 
palates are not as sensitive as theirs. Having stopped eating solid food, having 
forgotten how to kill an animal and eat it, they also have entirely different 
nerves. No more war, on human beings or animals, except in self-defence. 
They have become planters, scientists, explorers, teachers, religious philo¬ 
sophers (cosmophilosophers), biologists, etc, 

TELEVISUAL COMMUNICATION AND SPORT 
During Pallmann’s third day on board the spacecraft at the plantation, he 
observed Xiti talking to her parents on a two-way communication system 
similar to a television. On touching it, however, he discovered that, just 
like the spacecraft itself, it seemed to be of a biophysical nature. The con¬ 
versation was in the Itibi Rayans’ own language, which Pallmann 
described as ‘a rather high-pitched melodic whispering, very charming 
and . . with humorous undertones’. He was also able to see Xiti’s 

parents’ home and others in the neighbourhood. ‘At one time, Xiti also 
spoke to a neighbour of her parents and the “eye-generator" had “gone" 
directly into the inside of her house, also very charmingly decorated with 
symbols similar to those I saw within the space-craft.’ 

To Pallmann’s surprise, Xiti then ‘switched channels’, as it were, to a 
sporting event. ‘I must say it was one of the hardest games I ever saw in 
my entire life.’ 

I understood that the huge amount of players, perhaps 7,000 young men, 
were engaged in a giant-size ball game, where a final selection of the most able 
and strongest also ended with the victory of the most intelligent team. To 
play this substitute for war, the young Itibi Rayans used several hundred 
computerized, electronically controlled gadgets, very similar to multi¬ 
coloured footballs. I understood that not the referee, but the different balls 
(perhaps also interconnected with each other) have to decide the game. To 
me, the whole thing looked like football on a giant chess board, played rapidly 
over a playing field of about five [square] miles. Decisions were made by those 
having reached a higher commanding status because of bravery and intelli¬ 
gent behaviour. 

The hardness and often brutal behaviour of many lower-rank players 
really surprised me. It seemed to be absolutely contrary of what I had thought 
about the Itibi Rayans so far. 1 asked Xiti about it... she explained that these 
events have prevented war and bloodshed for many thousands of years. And 
yet, these games, she said, made it possible to keep the inborn and instinctive 
fighting condition of mankind intact. There is also the genetic reason to keep 
fit, to be healthy through hardship and sporting bravery. 15 


SPACE-TIME TECHNOLOGY 

There were three spacecraft at the Mirim base, of which only one carried 
a crew. The other two were uninhabited supply craft ‘I must emphasize,’ 



The Plantation 


315 


Pallmann pointed out, ‘that only science-fiction calls space-ships “flying 
saucers”. That is a solecism of fantasy. I doubt if space-ships actually fly 
in the accepted sense of the word. They are propelled by cosmic waves.’ 
A minimum fleet of twenty-seven to thirty ships are needed for operating 
within our solar system. The power units, or the carriers, are at all times 
above the control and supply ships. It is the carriers that arrange for the 
power to be switched on or off. The three-dimensional fusion of the carriers 
accords with the cosmic condition of the third dimension itself, and this 
makes it possible to [reach] a target at a very high speed, much faster, indeed, 
than the speed of light. 

Several hundred thousand years ago, Pallmann was informed, the Itibi 
Rayans had been obliged to evacuate their dehydrating planet of origin 
(Itibi Ra), an evacuation involving several trips to and from the old planet 
to move people, animals, insects, plants, biological machines, recording 
devices, musical instruments, and so on. ‘Indeed,’ wrote Pallmann, ‘only 
the necessity to survive had forced the Itibi Rayan scientists to think 
about travelling on to another planet and to create the necessary means of 
transportation.’ Pallmann’s elaboration of these ‘necessary means’ is hard 
to follow - and harder still to swallow. 

Only because of their highly advanced understanding of all life-creating ways 
of nature were they able to create and test a series of dimensional filtering and 
prismatic-type ‘life-receiving’ space-batteries, reacting to the inter-cosmic 
forces of colour, light, temperature, time, and other cosmic waves. The Itibi 
Rayans . . , created a new, fascinating ‘interconnection’ of cosmic batteries, 
reaching the dimensional scientific ‘switch’ from ‘receiving’ to ‘sending’ cos¬ 
mic forces. In other words, instead of waves being received, activated and 
returned, they were able to move with the activated ‘returned’ waves them¬ 
selves. 

Assuming Pallmann’s story to be neither the product of a deluded 
mind nor an outright hoax, such a vague elaboration might well be due to 
his own failure to grasp what was told to him. ‘The biological structure 
of the space-craft makes it impossible - even for a technically trained man 
— to draw a blueprint,’ he noted in his diary at the time. L What makes our 
brains, our nerves, transmit orders to our bodies to move heavy weights 
. . . Yes, they tried to explain! But I do not even know how a television 
circuit works, much less shall I ever understand this .. .’ ,6 

A PARADOX 

It was implied that ‘ordinary’ human beings were as yet not conditioned 
to accept or mix freely with the Itibi Rayans. Yet, paradoxically, the local 
Indian peasants not only mixed freely with, but were employed by the 
extraterrestrials to work on their plantations. As Pallmann explained: 



316 


Alien Base 


These Indians were employed on very humdrum tasks, keeping the area free 
of insects, because, despite the protective covers, insects did manage to find 
their way into the seedlings and saplings. The Indians looked upon their 
employers as light-skinned foreigners from another part of the world. 1 doubt 
if they gave a second thought to the rather unusual chin formation of the Itibi 
Rayans. In any case, the simple Amazon Indians would not have believed that 
people could come from other planets. They would have rejected the story in 
exactly the same way as most of us would reject the idea of several men having 
been landed on the Moon, if we had not seen it on TV. 

'At first,’ Satu Ra told Pallmann, ‘the local Indians looked upon us with 
some caution. But then Xiti and I began to heal their wounds, and cure 
their sick. They soon came to accept us.’ 17 On one occasion, Pallmann 
claims to have witnessed a group of Indians alighting from a spacecraft. 

Out stepped the most audacious group of wild-looking but smiling savages 
followed by a bunch of serious Itibi Rayan explorers. There was plenty of 
excitement, but what really made me shake my head was this: these, perhaps 
the most feared man-eaters of the endless forests . . . were laughing and 
giggling like little girls. What an excursion it must have been ... 

The Itibi Rayans had known these men already since their first landing 
near Pucallpa. The amazing thing I discovered was the age of these Indians: 
all over SO years, looking as healthy and young as those Indians being only 20 
or 25. Another controversy! Had they been used as guinea-pigs by the Itibi 

LINISLAN 

Though reluctant to talk about the possible use of the Indians as guinea- 
pigs, Xiti was more forthcoming when discussing certain discoveries her 
people had made regarding ancient South American civilizations. These 
discoveries were allegedly made during advanced forms of excavation in 
certain areas, while the Indians stood guard near strategic waterways and 
swamp-passages. The Itibi Rayans had located the remains of a huge 
long-lost city, given the name of ‘Linislan’, buried beneath a layer of 
seven feet of tropical growth. There, inside a temple, they discovered a 
huge pre-Columbian symbol, which they said proved that many thou¬ 
sands of years ago another extraterrestrial civilization had first landed on 
Earth. Xiti showed Pallmann a similar symbol on one of the control pan¬ 
els of the spacecraft. 18 

A FRUITFUL TRIP 

By this time, Ludwig Pallmann was becoming increasingly concerned 
about his business affairs: a backlog of work awaited him in Lima. Yet 
so fascinating was the time he spent with the Itibi Rayans that when 
invited by them for a trip to Colombia, on 20 February 1967, he 




The Plantation 


317 


accepted immediately. 

Another thing that bothered him was how Satu and Xiti, and others of 
their race, managed to travel around various countries without some sort 
of passports. What would happen if one of their men or women was 
arrested? ‘Little did I know,’ wrote Pallmann, ‘besides the fact that Xiti 
used a perfectly imitated Argentine passport, that all Idbi Rayans know 
exactly what to do and what not to do. For instance, in many countries, 
it is useless to show a passport if that passport does not show an entry 
stamp from the airport police. 

‘On the trip to Colombia, Satu Ra decided not to use passports at all, 
but to proceed at night and only stay a very limited time and at a place 
where the chances of detection were absolutely out of the question.’ 
Shortly after 22.00, the craft departed for Colombia. As Pallmann 
described the trip: 

The extremely short criss-cross over great altitude and distance was a disap¬ 
pointment. Exactly like on the first flight near Huancayo to the Mirim River 
base, 1 did not notice, see, hear or feel anything at all. But I did observe, and 
with the utmost interest, the immediate and very clever control-craft protec¬ 
tion carried out in the darkness of what I was able to understand to be a huge 
delta swamp of the Magdalena River south of BarranquiUa, [on the Caribbean 
Sea coastline of] Colombia. 

Within seconds the space-craft had covered itself with a special liquid 
coming out of a million pores which, besides being a perfect element of cam¬ 
ouflage and natural colouring, also served as a bacteria and insect repelling 
agent. This only lasted about five to ten minutes. 

When finished, we immediately embarked in two very comfortable and 
very flat speed-boats [which] on both sides, and on the bottom, were pro¬ 
pelled by tiny and silent generators. There was no motor at all but a great 
number of air-jets, working in absolute silence. 1 figured the speed [at] about 
30 to 35 m.p.h., and the trip itself lasted well over an hour... I was only able 
to speak to Mr Satu Ra, as Xiti had not received clearance to join the party 
and all the other crew members did not carry language computers. 

The group reached BarranquiUa and found an isolated spot on the 
embankment. Most of the Itibi Rayans wanted to rest and observe the 
neighbourhood, but Satu invited PaUmann to see the night life of 
BarranquiUa, Colombia’s largest coastal town. Naturally, it was the fruit 
above all else which attracted Satu. ‘Satu Ra displayed a naivety that was 
astounding for one so astute as himself,’ wrote Pallmann, who had given 
his friend some Peruvian money to purchase samples. ‘He inspected the 
fruit, turning and prodding, but he did not buy anything. Instead, he 
offered a stall-seller money merely for the privilege of inspecting the 
stock, smiled politely, then moved on to the next stall. Each stallholder 
accepted the money with alacrity ... I suppose they looked on the money 


318 


Alien Base 


as a tip given to them by an eccentric foreigner.’ 

Pallmann, meanwhile, having been starved of ‘real’ food for several 
days, devoured a grilled half-chicken, upsetting Satu in the process. ‘I 
knew what he was thinking: that it was a crime to kill a bird just for a 
human being to eat it. At that moment, I must confess, I was out of sym¬ 
pathy with Idbi Ray an philosophy . . Meanwhile, another member of 
the crew, ‘Mr Hua’, second-in-command of Satu’s spacecraft, appeared 
on the scene, and the trio set off for another market. 

Examining a guayaba closely, Satu asked Pallmann for a detailed 
description of this, to him, unknown fruit. Having satisfied himself that 
the fruit could be cultivated, some was bought. An hour was spent look¬ 
ing for a specimen of the guayaba plant, but to no avail, so the following 
morning Pallmann went back to Barranquilla, where he was directed to 
the town of Santa Marta, across the river. Here, his search eventually 
bore fruit when he located some cuttings, which were handed to Satu at 
the rendezvous point the following night. 

During the trip, Pallmann had bought himself a new camera, with a 
view to taking some photographs of the Itibi Rayans, their plantation and 
their craft. But it was not to be. ‘As I feared, Satu Ra took a special 
interest in the camera,’ wrote Pallmann. 

He told me about ‘Amat Mayna’, the science of soul based on ancient beliefs. 
Not that my friends believe in reincarnation, but, definitely, they do not care 
for photos and pictures because of certain implications. I understood that, 
besides certain security restrictions, they simply do not care about 'their 
looks’. They are devoid of all vanity, pride or feeling of superiority . . 
During all the time, and particularly where Xiti was concerned, I never saw 
them use a mirror. 

Satu confiscated the camera until Pallmann returned to Lima a week 
later. 19 

BACK AT THE PLANTATION 

At the Mirim River plantation, Pallmann was show how the Itibi Rayan 
botanists went about their research and cultivation work. The plantation 
itself was laid out under huge green protective sheets. 

Air filters and humidifiers had been installed at strategic points so that, no 
matter what the weather, the plant biologists could always have controlled 
weather conditions inside the ‘flavour station’. The main path through the 
plantation complex separated the station into two sections, each of which was 
made self-contained by means of coloured dividing sheets that were rigged 
tree-high. 

In front of the actual biology research laboratory was a wing consisting of 
several large tents [where] many vegetable 'guinea-pigs’, which had been 
brought from Itibi Ra II, had been transplanted, and had then been used as 






The Plantation 


319 


required for grafting on to samples of Earth vegetation [in order] to obtain as 
fine a strain of individual plant life as it was possible to get by uniting the best 
of Earth types with the best of the Itibi Ra types. 

The biology research laboratory . . . was a series of interconnecting mar¬ 
quees, stretching for some 350 feet, and was some 60 feet wide. It was divided 
off into experimental bays, rather like the operating rooms of hospitals. In 
these bays ... the finest instruments were used to dissect the cells of plants: 
the veins and stems were put under close scrutiny. X-ray pictures were taken, 
not the normal plate-type X-rays but a continuous record, rather like a roll of 
film. The plant ‘surgeons’ . . . could watch on separate left- and right-hand 
panels let into the wall. On these panels, the eye-computer projected a con¬ 
tinuous report of the dissection as it proceeded. These television-type panels 
were studied throughout the entire process by special observation ‘officers’, 
who indicated their opinions to a chief scientific officer who controlled the 
actual work itself... The biologists sat at their work in the Oriental manner. 

Relaxation 

Pallmann was invited to visit the bathing tents on the plantation. The 
Itibi Rayans, he learned, bathed at least twice a day: before going to work 
and when work was finished in the late afternoon. ‘Their bathing habits 
are a combination of the Finnish and Japanese,’ claimed Pallmann. ‘The 
normal bath is like the Finnish sauna unit, and they have both wet and 
dry bath units. Because of their lack of inhibitions about nakedness, men 
and women bathe together. 

‘I noticed that Xiti, who is meticulous about her personal hygiene, was 
scrubbing furiously as if she had done filthy work in the laboratories. I 
remarked upon this, and she frowned a little. “Can you not smell?” she 
demanded . . . then she told me to my face that I had eaten meat. I 
laughed like an idiot. On two occasions I had eaten chicken in 
Barranquilla. Xiti grinned and pulled a face at me ...’ 

The domestic arrangements on board the spacecraft also drew 
Pallmann’s admiration. 

The dining quarter and ‘health’ lounges were bright with decorations. 
Lovely, soft divans and deep cushions, gay with floral patterned covers, 
invited relaxation after the day’s work. I admired the way in which the 
women, some being the wives of the astronauts, who shared similar jobs to 
the men all day, could shed their technical role during off-duty hours and 
revert to an essential feminism such as one experiences in Japan. They even 
took it upon themselves to see to the domestic side of the expedition. 20 

RELIGION AND SOCIETAL DEVELOPMENT 
Asked about their religion, or ‘cosmophilosophy’ as Pallmann called it, 
Xiti and Satu said that their people make no distinction between ‘God’ 
and ‘Nature’, referring to them (in English at least) as ‘God-Nature’. 



320 


Alien Base 


'Disregarding the laws of Nature,’ said Satu, ’is disregarding the laws of 
God, because God is Nature and Nature is God.’ 21 The value of religion, 
Pallmann was told, should depend on the ‘active role it is able to play in 
civilization’s progressive and futuristic pattern’. 

Regarding the future of our society, Satu predicted that a new social 
and political structure would be brought about within 100 years. As 
Pallmann described it: 

I was very much surprised when Satu Ra told me about a great feeling of 
friendship which shall come about over many nations on our planet because 
of a unique political situation I never believed possible. He mentioned [that] 
the whole planet Earth, within one hundred years from now, will benefit from 
the friendship he predicted between the United States and Russia. 22 

Satu Ra’s prediction about the superpowers has come to pass. Let us 
hope for the predicted era of friendship on a wider scale. 

HEALTH AND LONGEVITY 

According to the Itibi Rayans, Earth is one of a number of planets, 
referred to as ‘cancer planets’, which are particularly prone to cancer. In 
addition to the known or suspected causes, they laid the blame on our 
modem, artificial and materialistic life-style (citing the lack of cancer 
among the Amazon Indians), as well as on other, sometimes inherited 
factors, such as fear, stress and sexual repression. Added Pallmann: 

They also know that we suffer as a result of many mental disorders, besides 
our many physical disorders, like blood and respiratory disorders. They have 
seen for themselves that our stomachs, hearts and glands arc not working like 
theirs, that 80 per cent of us are suffering from some kind of constant tension 
and of what they know as . .. unnatural irregularity, leading to cancer. 22 

Satu Ra claimed to be 250 years old, measured in our terms; a modest 
age when compared with Walter Rizzi’s alien, who communicated that 
his race lived up to one hundred times that of Earth people. Compared 
with ordinary human beings, Satu would have been in his early forties. 
He expected to die sometime between the years 2210 and 2220. z+ 

Overpopulation was given as one of the main causes of misery on 
planet Earth. Satu and Xid emphasized the need for both political and 
religious leaders to impose the strictest regulations to control our present 
growth of population. 25 

LOVE AND MARRIAGE 

On Itibi Ra II, couples fall in love, marry and have children as we do, but, 
Pallmann was informed, marriages normally break up soon after the chil¬ 
dren enter an 'educational centre’ when they are about six years old. (The 





The Plantation 


321 


‘seven-year itch’, it seems, is not restricted to Earthlings.) At first 
shocked by this custom, Pallmann came to appreciate the fact that, if 
monogamy were practised on Itibi Ra II, some marriages would have to 
last for 400 years or more! Satu pointed out that, although incompatibil¬ 
ity between marriage partners was normal after the seven-year period, 
compatibility, resulting in long-term unions, did occur. Such unions did 
not require the sanction of the equivalent of a registry office ceremony, 
or even a formal exchange of vows. Satu’s current union (with a woman 
from another planet), he told Pallmann, had lasted for 90 years. 26 

Having also learned from Satu about the erotic behaviour of the Itibi 
Rayans, Pallmann had initially considered including some details in his 
book, but the publisher had advised against it. ‘Actually, all I wanted to 
do was to describe the very healthy and natural behaviour of another civ¬ 
ilization,’ he explained. 27 Yet Pallmann, too, imposed censorship. ‘There 
are matters on which I have had to maintain my privacy,’ he wrote earlier, 
seemingly contradicting his later remark. ‘As far as I am concerned, and 
especially as far as the sexual habits of the Itibi Rayans are concerned, I 
have tried to reveal exactly nothing, and I believe I do have the right to 
do this, simply because our own sexual habits are far from free.’ 28 

On 26 February 1967, Satu sadly informed Pallmann that his people had 
received orders to evacuate their plantations in South America. The fol¬ 
lowing day, he was taken back by spacecraft to the Peruvian highland lake 
where he had originally been picked up. 29 

NEWS 

Nearly two years passed. Pallmann bought a property in El Salvador, 
Central America, a lakeside fishing and hunting lodge affording magnif¬ 
icent views of the surrounding scenery, including the San Vicente vol¬ 
cano. He began writing the manuscript of a book describing his claimed 
experiences with the Itibi Rayans. ‘I had lost some of my diaries and it 
wasn’t an easy job to find dates and names. Certain places and words I 
had synchronized by sound I could not write down in “human” language 
at all,’ he explained. ‘I simply had to use similar words and sentences so 
far as the dialogue with these people is concerned.’ 30 The Itibi Rayans, he 
further explained, do not use letters or print. 31 As to use of the Egyptian 
word ‘Ra’, for example, which surprised Pallmann, this was taken as 
further evidence that the Itibi Rayans had been on Earth thousands of 
years ago. 32 

About two weeks after taking over the property, on IS January 1969, 
he felt a burning sensation from the ring Satu had given him, the inset 
flashing and gleaming. Later, having taken his small motor-boat to a 
sandy beach near the Isla del Altar, he noticed that the normally placid 



322 


Alien Base 


waters of the lake were ruffled by several huge concentric circles. ‘There 
could be but one explanation,’ he wrote. ‘Somewhere near at hand, my 
friends from Itibi Ra II had effected a landing.’ Shortly afterwards he 
encountered the figure of Satu Ra, sitting motionless on a rock. ‘He was 
inexpressibly sad. I noticed that his clothing was of a dark green, that he 
wore a broad instrument belt, on which was a much larger talking device 
than the one to which I had become accustomed when 1 had stayed with 
him.’ 

‘Where is Xiti? Is she with you?’ asked Pallmann. 

‘Xiti is dead,’ came the shocking reply, in Satu’s own language (‘Xtmsi 
Xiti Tasat ’), followed by the confirmatory translation in French and 
Spanish, the languages in which he and Pallmann normally communi¬ 
cated. Supposedly, a disaster had befallen an expedition to another 
planet, killing Xiti, Mr Hua and many other crew members aboard their 
spacecraft. The two sat talking sadly for more than an hour. 33 

Not feeling like talking to his housekeeper or the gardener, Pallmann 
drove in a daze to a doctor friend at San Pedro Nonualco, where he stayed 
the night. The following morning he was awakened by the newspaper 
boys, shouting about a flying saucer having been sighted over the capital, 
San Salvador, and the San Jacinto Hills that surrounded the lake where 
he lived. When he bought the paper, there were the banner headlines: 
‘OVNI Vuela Sobre San Salvador’. 34 As Pallman related: 

From the reports, it seemed that shortly before [Satu Ra’s] visit, the space¬ 
craft was reported over the Cerro de San Jacinto and had then continued high 
above San Marcos. The amazing thing is that the spacecraft had silently, and 
for quite a long time, stayed in an observation position directly over the 
extensive capital town of San Salvador, exposed to the vision of several hun¬ 
dred thousand people. 

Pallmann reports that one of his neighbours observed the spacecraft as 
it came down at tremendous speed and settled, as if on an air cushion, 
between the isles of Los Quemados and Los Patos, exactly midway 
between his house and the Jiboa River outlet of the huge tropical lake. 

I do not know of any person on the lake having seen the return of the space¬ 
craft, nor do I myself know on which part of the lake Satu Ra took his speed¬ 
boat in order to be picked up. Contrary to what other space-craft observers 
have described, the Itibi Rayan control craft did not show any kind of 
illumination during darkness. 35 


AN UNFINISHED STORY 

Ludwig Pallmann’s book. Cancer Planet Mission, was published in 
London in 1970. There must have been some promotion, because I recall 
that a friend heard an interview with him on BBC Radio, and there was 



The Plantation 


323 


an article about him in the Guardian. The book fell into obscurity, and is 
known only to a few UFO researchers. A planned second volume, 
describing some of his experiences in more detail, was not published. 

Some time afterwards, I visited the publisher in London, with the aim 
of tracking down Pallmann. The place was deserted and I was unable to 
obtain a forwarding address. Later, I learned that the company had gone 
into liquidation. Veteran researcher Wendelle Stevens, a former US Air 
Force pilot, was likewise unable to track down Pallmann, though he did 
come across corroboration for some of the claims. 

In 1967, Stevens was delivering several Beechcraft T-34 trainer planes 
to the Peruvian Navy, making fuel stops at the last Colombian town, the 
river port of Leticia, on the Amazon. On impulse, he hired some native 
boatmen to take him for a trip up the river to view rare orchids in the jun¬ 
gle. Remarking on the lush, dense vegetation along the bank, he asked the 
Indians why the natives made no plantations of some of the more rare 
exotic tropical fruits that grew there in abundance. ‘I was certain there 
must be a market for them,’ said Stevens. ‘It would only require a little 
organization.’ The natives replied that this might be too large a project 
for them. Then one of them remarked that he knew of some ‘Americans’, 
three or four days up-river, who were doing just that. What was more, 
the native added, he knew of a white man, a German, who had gone up 
there to look for them some months previously, but who had not 
returned. Although the Indians had never seen these Americans, they 
had heard about them from the wilder tribes farther upstream. The 
native added that the Americans had aircraft at their encampment. 

Further enquiries in Lima led Stevens to a somewhat inaccurate news¬ 
paper report about one ‘Ludwig F. Pallimann’ (tie), a German salesman 
who sold food-processing equipment and health foods to a chain of stores 
in Lima. This man, reported the newspaper, had gone up-river from 
Iquitos in the Peruvian/Brazilian border area looking for a giant arrow- 
root plant for possible hybridizing, seeking a greater yield by improving 
the strain. (This much is true: Pallmann was doing research for the 
Agricultural University of Lima at the time, to find an inexpensive high- 
protein food.) The Indians taking Pallmann up-river asked him why he 
did not go further up-stream, about another three days’ journey, where a 
party of ‘Americans’ were doing the same thing. Intrigued, Pallmann 
took up the suggestion, but found that the Indians would only take him 
another day up-river, where they would leave him with another tribe for 
the remainder of the trip. 

On arrival in the vicinity of the ‘American’ encampment, the news¬ 
paper report continues, the Indians superstitiously refused to rake 
Pallmann any further, but put him ashore and pointed him in the right 
direction. Pallmann walked to the camp, consisting of plastic-like tents. 



324 


Alien Base 


The ‘Americans’ were fair-skinned, dressed in toga-like garments and 
spoke in a strange language. Pallmann greeted them first in English, then 
Spanish and German, to no avail. Getting a limited response in French, 
he was welcomed and provided with a place to stay. 

According to the Lima report, Pallmann learned that his hosts, who 
said they came from another planet outside our solar system, named 
‘Itipura’, were hybridizing plants and other stock to be taken back there. 
These extraterrestrials were served by three streamlined disc-shaped 
flying machines. After a while, the report continues, Pallmann became 
concerned that his business associates would worry about his where¬ 
abouts. The ‘Itipurans’ offered to deliver him to his destination in one of 
their flying machines. Because of his long absence, he asked his hosts to 
take him to his ranch in the Dominican Republic instead of to Lima, and 
was transported there in 15 minutes. 36 

Stevens believes that Pallmann was covering his tracks in his interview 
with the Lima reporter. 

He had associated the location with the Peruvian town of Iquitos because 
you could never get to the plantation site from Iquitos by river, and the 
jungle there was all but impassable. He had omitted all of the earlier contacts 
with the ltibians as well as what was going on in Lima and elsewhere, prob¬ 
ably to head off possible interference for them as the operation was still 
going on . . Pallmann was not returned from the plantation to the 
Dominican Republic when he left. . . and he did not make his first contact 
with the extraterrestrials by river from Iquitos. 38 

‘I searched for Ludwig Pallmann all over South America in 1968 and 
1969, and again in 1971 and 1972,’ wrote Stevens in his introduction to a 
reprinted edition of Pallmann’s book, which he published in 1986. ‘He was 
moving around Peru in 1968 and then disappeared. I also looked for him in 
West Germany in 1977 and 1978 but failed to find any productive lead.’ 39 
Though German by birth, Pallmann is believed to be a British citizen, 
having fled to England as a young man to escape the Gestapo during the 
Second World War.' 10 My enquiries at the Passport Records Office in 
London drew a blank: there is no record of a British passport having been 
issued to a Ludwig F. Pallmann. 41 The search for him continues. 

Pallmann was the first to admit that his story is unbelievable. ‘As I read 
what I had written,’ he commented ruefully, ‘I came to the conclusion 
that all this would be in vain, because who would want to believe such a 
story? It’s a concatenation of unlikely circumstances for which I can offer 
very little explanation. 

‘I have only tried to tell what happened, and even if it should be con¬ 
sidered a waste of time, I felt it necessary to do so, because of the religious 
theme involved. It is stupid of me perhaps to expect that others should 



The Plantation 


325 


feel about this what I felt. Men will continue to be born into their 
present-day beliefs .. , 42 

‘Cancer Planet Mission may seem [to be] the product of my fantasy, 
which I try to pass on as a true story. However, much of what I relate can 
be checked. Many things may not correspond to the exact date and time 
as it happened, simply because I did not date my diary from day to day, 
and because I was overwhelmed by what happened to me. I, myself, did 
not believe this possible for a long time.'* 3 

‘Just to have known Satu Ra and his sister made me realize that none 
of us at the present time has the slightest notion of peace, real peace, so 
great was their relaxed and modest humanism, so great their contentment 
with “Time”,’ wrote Pallmann, following his initial meetings in India. 
‘They just seemed to live every hour, every minute, without being 
“Time-conscious” . . . ,+4 


NOTES 

1 Pallmann, Ludwig F., Cancer Planet Mission , The Foster Press, London, 
1970, pp. 13-20. 

2 Ibid., pp. 21-2. 

3 Readers interested in the Vedic literature about this subject should consult 
/Uieti Identities by Richard L. Thompson (1993), Govardhan Hill Pub¬ 
lishing, PO Box 1920, Alachua, Florida 32615. 

4 Pallmann, op. cit., pp. 23-9. 

5 Ibid., pp. 30-7. 

6 Ibid., pp. 40-2. 

7 Ibid., pp. 44-6. 

8 Ibid., pp. 46-7. 

9 Ibid., pp. 49-50. 

10 Ibid., pp. 63-4. 

11 Ibid., pp. 72-8. 

12 Ibid., pp. 79-82. 

13 Ibid., pp. 83-7. 

14 Ibid., pp. 88-93. 

15 Ibid., pp. 97-100. 

16 Ibid., pp. 102-6. 

17 Ibid., pp. 111-12. 

18 Ibid., pp. 116-19. 

19 Ibid., pp. 120-9. 

20 Ibid., pp. 130-3. 

21 Ibid., pp. 138-43. 





326 


Alim Base 


22 Ibid., pp. 189-90. 

23 Ibid., Postscript. 

24 Ibid., p. 170. 

25 Ibid., p. 191. 

26 Ibid., pp. 175-7. 

27 Ibid., pp. 198-9. 

28 Ibid., pp. 156-7. 

29 Ibid., pp. 141,144. 

30 Ibid., pp. 154-6. 

31 Ibid., p. 199. 

32 Ibid., p. 170. 

33 Ibid., pp. 158-65. 

34 El Diario de Hoy, Central American Press, San Salvador, 16 January 1969. 
(A facsimile of the headlines is reproduced in Pallmann, op.dt.) 

35 Pallmann, op. cit., pp. 166-9. 

36 Pallmann, Ludwig F., and Stevens, Wendellc C., UFO Contact from Ilibi- 
Ra: Cancer Planet Mission, UFO Photo Archives, PO Box 17206, Tucson, 
Arizona 85710, 1986, pp. 3-5. 

37 Ibid., p. 17. 

38 Ibid., p. 16. 

39 Ibid. 

40 Pallmann, op. cit., p. 5. 

41 Ibid., p. 156. 

42 Letter to the author from the UK Passport Agency, Passport Records 
Office, Public Record Office, Hayes, Middlesex, UB3 1RF, 18 July 1997. 

43 Pallmann, op. cit., Postscript. 

44 Ibid., p. 48. 




Chapter 16 


Perplexing Trends 


As I have discussed in my previous books, the UFO phenomenon has 
long been associated with unexplained mutilations of animals, particu¬ 
larly cattle. Although the first public reports came out in 1967, the muti¬ 
lations began in the mid-1950s, according to Lieutenant Colonel Philip J. 
Corso, who from 1954—57 served on the National Security Council’s 
Operations Coordination Board, the most sensitive executive branch of 
the United States Government. ‘Whoever went after the animals,’ says 
Corso, ‘seemed most interested in the mammary, digestive, and repro¬ 
ductive organs, especially the uteruses from cows.’ He continues: 

In many cases the eyes or throats were removed in a type of surgery in which 
the demarcation line was almost microscopically thin and the surrounding 
tissue showed that the incision had superheated and then blackened as it 
cooled 1 . . . the removal of the animal's blood - where blood had been com¬ 
pletely drained - [was] so sophisticated that there was almost no peripheral 
damage to the surrounding tissue . . . We had no medical instruments that 
even remotely approached what the aliens could do. 2 

Seldom have we had such solid evidence linking the two phenomena, 
though there are a number of cases in which circumstantial evidence is 
provided. One such is the following. 

In 1969, Wendelle Stevens delivered a C-54 transport plane to a client, 
Oscar Bowles, a wealthy Bolivian businessman to whom Stevens had 
delivered over a dozen cargo planes in the past. Bowles’s ranch was at 
Santa Rosa, where he had a meat-processing plant. Above his property, to 
the west, was a sheep herder whom Bowles knew well. According to 
Bowles, the sheep herder and two of his Indian helpers were watching the 
flock one bright day when a silent disc-shaped aircraft came out of the sky, 
gliding down gently in a curving approach until only 50 feet above them. 

The disc stopped, hovered momentarily, and flashes of white light 
emitted from its underside like electricity jumping a gap, striking the 
sheep. This happened about 30 times in quick succession, and the sheep 
fell to the ground. As Stevens relates: 

As it became apparent that the flock was the target of interest, the shepherd 
picked up a stick and, raising it, started to run toward the slowing, shiny 



328 


Alien Base 


metallic disc. With his first threatening motion of raising the club, there was 
a flash of violet light and he suddenly was unable to continue the motion. It 
was like he was immersed in molasses. He could barely move, and then very 
slowly. He could roll his eyes and look around. He saw his helpers apparently 
in the same kind of paralysis ... The stricken sheep did not move. 

As he watched, the silver disc-shaped craft, with a shiny dome on top, 
descended still more, to about five or six feet above the ground, and a trap¬ 
door with a built-in stair opened down from underneath, and two human-like 
feet started down the stair from the center of the ship. First one and then 
another emerged, and as they reached the bottom of the stair and stepped off, 
he was sure they were normal men in strange suits. 

The form-fitting suits were a bright, reflective white, of the one-piece 
coverall type, with a transparent dark helmet over the head. The beings 
wore matching white gloves and boots, and each carried what looked like 
a shiny silver fire-extinguisher in one hand, and a black nozzle on the end 
of a white hose to the bottle in the other. 

These two men walked around among the flock putting the ‘fire-extinguisher’ 
nozzle to each of the fallen sheep in mm, apparently showing little interest in 
the shepherds. They finished their task in only three or four minutes and then 
walked back and boarded the ship up the stairway. The stair retracted as die 
big, circular ship, over 30 feet in diameter, drifted higher, to about 300 to 400 
feet. From that position, there was a tremendous ‘sshhoo’ and the ship sped 
up into the blue sky at a steep angle and disappeared. 

As soon as the craft had vanished, the shepherds recovered from their 
paralysis and rushed to their flock. All 34 sheep were dead. The shepherd 
and his helpers dragged the sheep to one side to bleed them - but there 
was no blood. ‘The three men carried the carcasses to the hut and began 
to dress them out,’ continued Stevens. ‘They not only found them blood¬ 
less, they found certain organs considerably desiccated and spongy, 
including the brain, spleen and eyeballs.’ 

Although the witnesses agreed that the beings looked human, they felt 
certain that they did not originate from anywhere on Earth. 3 

AN UNIDENTIFIED FLYING BOAT 

On the morning of 27 June 1970, Aristeu Machado, his wife Maria 
Nazare, their eldest daughter Creuza, aged 23, their four younger daugh¬ 
ters, and Joao Aguiar, an official of the Brazilian Federal Police, were 
relaxing on the veranda of the family home on the Avenida Niemeyer, 
overlooking the Atlantic coast to the southwest of central Rio de Janeiro. 
Sr Aguiar noticed what he thought was a motor-boat striking the water, 
throwing up spray all around it. He drew the attention of the others to the 
‘boat’, about 700 metres from the shore. On board could be seen two 
'bathers’, who seemed to be signalling with their arms. They were wear- 



Perplexing Trends 


329 


ing shining clothing and ‘something on their heads’ and seemed to be 
‘thickish set and quite small’. 

The two persons seemed to be working on the deck of the metallic grey 
craft, which appeared to be between four and six metres in length, 
covered with a transparent cupola (see Fig. 22). While the others con¬ 
tinued watching, Sr Aguiar ran to the nearby Mar Hotel to telephone the 
harbour police for assistance. No sound could be heard from the craft, 
nor did it bob up and down like a normal boat. 

When Sr Aguiar returned about half an hour later, the ‘boat’ could still 




be seen on the sea. Shortly afterwards, it took off into the air. Dr Walter 
Biihler, one of Brazil’s most respected investigators, interviewed the wit¬ 
nesses on the day of the incident, having been alerted to the case by a 
reporter from the newspaper Didrio de Noticias, which published a report 
the following day. As Dr Biihler reported: 

Sr Aguiar informed us that when the disc took off, it did not rise straight up, 
but skimmed along for about 300 metres on the surface of the sea, throwing 
out the usual sort of bow-wave, such as we sec with our own fast motor-boats. 






330 


Alien Base 


In fact, it was only when the machine had become airborne and was moving 
away in a low arc out to sea towards the south-east that the witnesses realized 
it was not an ordinary boat, but a flying saucer. 

As the disc took off, from a point about 600 metres from the shore, 
Dona Maria Nazare noticed a hexagonal-shaped object underneath it, as 
though retracted into the craft, and several coloured lights - green, pale 
yellow, red - repeatedly flashed in the same sequence. While the disc had 
appeared metallic grey while resting on the water, it looked transparent 
once airborne. She clearly saw the two occupants sitting inside the disc. 

On the area of sea where the disc had rested, Dona Maria Nazare noticed 
a ‘white, hoop-shaped object, of the size of a trunk or a chest’, which sank 
after a while. Then it reappeared, and from it came a yellow, oval-shaped 
object, which began to move slowly towards the beach. A greenish ‘flange’ 
later separated from the main yellow body, and continued to follow it. 
About fifteen minutes later, the yellow object came to within about 120 
metres of the beach, made a right-angled turn, then headed towards the 
beach at Gavea, contrary to the prevailing current. Dona Maria decided to 
go down to the beach, where she pointed it out to a group of boys, one of 
whom began throwing stones at it, to no effect. Ten minutes later, the 
object disappeared around a rocky promontory. Twenty minutes later the 
white ‘hoop’ also headed in the direction of the Gavea beach. 

Not long after the disc had taken off, a police motor-launch from 
Copacabana Fort appeared on the scene, presumably sent out following 
Sr Aguiar’s call. ‘We do not know if its crew saw the UFO take off,’ 
reported Dr Biihler, ‘but it may be assumed that they did, for they would 
have had the UFO in view long before they reached the area from which 
it took off and where the “white hoop” remained floating. 

‘When they got there, the motor-launch stopped at a distance of about 
one kilometre from the shore. Then the witnesses saw the crew of the 
launch hoist aboard, with great difficulty, a cylindrical red object . . . 
Having done this, the motor-launch returned at high speed to its point of 
origin.’ 4 

No further details are available regarding the recovered object. 

A CALF-NAPPING 

On rare occasions, animals - particularly cattle - are said to have been 
levitated towards a hovering UFO, prior to being mutilated. Though no 
UFOs were seen at the time of the following incident, and the fate of the 
animal is unknown, it was observed rising inexplicably into the sky. The 
incident is believed to have occurred at the end of October 1970, on the 
Palma Velha ranch, about 18 kilometres from the town of Alegrete, in the 
First District of Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil. 



Perplexing Trends 


331 


At about 16.00, Pedro Trajano Machado and his 23-year-old son, 
Euripides, were carrying out veterinary treatment on some cattle, and 
had just picked one Jersey cow which had a one-month-old calf with her, 
weighing about 20 kilograms. The cow was tied up but the calf was loose, 
about five metres away from its mother. Suddenly, the cattle became dis¬ 
turbed; the tethered cow began to low, constantly turning to look at her 
calf. As Pedro turned to look at the calf, which was also bellowing, he 
could not believe his eyes: 

. . . the animal was hanging in the air, at about one metre above the ground, 
and otherwise in the normal posture (i.e. with its feet pointing downwards). 
(Pedro] shouted to his son to look, and both were now able to watch as... the 
calf began to move away parallel to the ground, still at a height of about one 
metre, in the same position as before, and bellowing as it headed towards the 
open fields . . . 

While the rest of the cattle were bellowing and lowing and churning about 
in evident fear, the calf was now moving towards the barred gate in the fence, 
which was open. Then it passed beneath the branches of some trees, towards 
the northeast, until it was now about 20 metres from its mother... still about 
one metre above the ground. But now it began to move slowly upwards, still 
with its feet pointing down. It had stopped bellowing now. According to the 
two witnesses, this slow vertical ascent lasted for about three or four minutes 
until, while still far below the cloud-ceiling, the calf became invisible. 

The calf was never found. Investigations were conducted by a team 
from the independent group GIPOVNI, headed by Victor Soares. They 
found the witnesses to be thoroughly credible; not likely to have invented 
such an unlikely tale. Although no UFOs were seen at the time, the 
Machados remarked that on a number of nights - including the date of 
the incident - they had seen Ted lights, coming on and going out’; ‘stars’ 
in the sky, moving about and stopping, ‘doing somersaults in the sky, 
either separately or in groups of three’. 5 

SUSPENDED IN TIME 

Among the assorted phenomena inextricably woven into the UFO 
mystery, that of time distortion is particularly perplexing. This phenom¬ 
enon should not be confused with missing time, which, though related, I 
regard as a separate issue. While many researchers opt for esoteric 
explanations for time distortion, my feeling is that some extraterrestrials, 
by means of highly advanced technology, are able to manipulate space 
and time. Consider the following case, translated by Gordon Creighton 
from a prominent Brazilian magazine. 

Nelson Vieira Leite, a prominent businessman and farmer from 
Itaperuna in the state of Rio de Janeiro, had spent the day on his farm, the 
Fazenda Toyota, which lay some 40 minutes by car from the town. The 



332 


Alien Base 


date: 27 May 1971. Towards sundown, while waiting for his cousin, 
Manoe) Carlos, to pick him up, Sr Leite observed a light, pale at first but 
becoming increasingly bright, then blinding, as it approached him and 
came down in a meadow, without actually touching the ground. Leite 
went over to take a closer look. 

A greenish object, ‘resembling a soup-plate upside down’, hovered less 
than a metre from the ground. Nervously approaching it, Leite had 
reached a point about IQ metres away when he suddenly found that he was 
no longer walking; that he had not in fact been walking for what seemed 
some minutes. By now, he had lost all sense of time. However much he 
tried, he could not walk. It was not a case of total paralysis, because he was 
able to wave his arms about; he was unable to walk forwards, as though an 
invisible barrier prevented him from doing so, and perhaps that is what it 
was. The craft, meanwhile, emitted a humming sound and a weaker light, 
though sufficient to illuminate the surrounding area. 

Behind him, Sr Leite heard his cousin shouting. As Sr Carlos began 
running towards him, he was struck down. ‘He was knocked right out,’ 
reported the journalist, ‘knocked out just as though he had been run over, 
or had walked into plate-glass doors.’ Carlos remained unconscious for 
two hours. 

By this point, Leite was not only frightened but also overwhelmed by 
depression as he pondered his inability to extricate himself. Gazing at the 
craft, still suspended about a metre above the ground, he noticed a 
brighter band of light around it, as though coming from portholes of 
some sort. Leite himself felt suspended - suspended in time. As the jour¬ 
nalist described it: ‘Everything was going on just as though it had been 
just like this for a long, long time. How much time actually did elapse he 
was subsequently able to estimate: about 20 minutes, at the outside. But 
at the time, to Nelson Leite, it was 20 years.’ 

The light from the disc now began to grow stronger and the hum more 
piercing, until Sr Leite was obliged to put his hands over his ears. And the 
flying saucer took off, straight up, slowly at first, then moving so rapidly that 
immediately it was no bigger than a star in the sky. 

At last, Leite was able to walk away from the spot Later, when Carlos 
had recovered consciousness, the two examined the area over which the 
craft had hovered. The long grass seemed scorched. 

‘It must have been something to do with extraterrestrial beings, people 
like us, or a bit different,’ Nelson Leite told the journalist. ‘But nothing 
beyond the bounds of what is rational.’ 6 

SINISTER SPACE CREATURES 

Itaperuna was the scene of even more disturbing encounters later in 1971; 




Perplexing Trends 


333 


encounters reflecting an increasingly sinister trend. 

On the evening on 22 September, Paulo Caetano Silveira, a 27-year-old 
mechanic, was driving home to Itaperuna from Carangola when he 
noticed a low-flying object, which turned out to be a luminous disc that 
seemed to be following him. Frightened, he stopped in Tombos and 
reported the matter to the police, who did not take it seriously. Paulo set 
off once more, only to find the object still tailing him: it was now 19.00. 

Shortly after leaving the town of Natividade, Paulo saw what at first he 
took to be a ‘black ox’ in the middle of the road, but when it turned vivid 
red, then brilliant white, he could see that it was the disc. 

Then a luminous beam shot out from it towards him, and he felt his engine 
beginning to falter. The engine died, and he found himself confronted by a 
craft a little bigger than the familiar Volkswagen car... It had small windows, 
just like an aircraft, and a door was open. Near this door were standing two 
small chubby beings about 40-50 centimetres high . . He felt his whole 
body, and especially his legs, being drawn in some mysterious way towards 
that open door. 

The creatures reminded Paulo of dwarfs, with fair complexions, slit 
eyes and flatfish heads. They were dressed in one-piece overalls of a 
bright, luminous, sky-blue colour, with long sleeves to the wrists, high 
collars, and ‘Roman helmets’ with spikes on top. Moving about like 
automata, with rigid arms and legs, they carried objects that gave off 
bright red and blue beams of light. 

Paulo reported that he felt overpowered: all energy and willpower 
drained out of him as he was ‘drawn’ towards the lights. He fought hard 
mentally, but to no avail. The creatures advanced on him and dragged 
him silently towards their craft. They seemed very strong for their size. 
Just as they got him to the door, he put up resistance, causing some 
injuries to his arms. Once inside the machine, he found it difficult to 
observe everything, owing to the dazzling white light that permeated the 
cabin, which he estimated at about three metres in diameter and 2.5 
metres high. The fittings appeared to be very simple. 

There were now a total of seven of the creatures, and they seemed to be exam¬ 
ining him silently, as though he were some rare species of animal. At no point 
did he hear any sound exchanged between them, though it was clear that they 
were in communication with each other. 

Paulo then heard an ‘infernal din’ start up, and assumed that the disc 
was in flight or in movement, at which point he became unconscious. 
Later, after what lapse of time he does not know, he heard a strange humming 
sound and was aware that they were carrying him out and were laying him 
beside the road near his car. He was apparently conscious enough to see what 
happened after this, for he says he saw the machine rise silendy into the air 



334 


Alien Base 


and that it seemed to hang there, suspended, for a brief moment, before 
shooting away . .. like a flash of lightning, and was gone from sight. 

Aftermath 

Dazed, Paulo lay beside the road, waiting for help from a passing car. The 
first person on the scene, fortuitously, was a physician, Dr Cirley Crespo, 
who summoned help from the police in Itaperuna, nine kilometres away. 
By the time the police arrived, Paulo had flagged down another passing 
car, driven by Mario Alves de Brio, who commented: ‘I was greatly 
moved. Something had obviously happened ... The man was totally dis¬ 
oriented, and in urgent need of medical attention.’ 

On arrival at the hospital in Itaperuna, Paulo was examined by Dr 
Munir Bussad, who found the patient to be in a state of severe nervous 
shock. He had an abnormally fast pulse-rate, badly scratched and bruised 
arms, his eyes were badly bloodshot and he was unable to see properly. 
The doctor, who knew Paulo personally, stated that there was no history 
of mental illness. ‘I do know,’ he added, ‘that many of the people who have 
had this sort of experience are not suffering from any kind of psychiatric 
disorder, nor do they display any signs of having any mental obsessions.’ 

Next, Paulo was taken to the police headquarters in Itaperuna, where 
he related the experience to the chief, Jose Luis Maron, and to an inspec- 
or, Gilberto Gomes. 

When interviewed by reporters five days later, Paulo Caetano 
iilveira was still not able to see properly, and from time to time he fell 
into bouts of weeping. He told reporters that although he had no clue 
as to how long he had been abducted, his watch was found to have lost 
IS minutes. 7 

Three days later, Benedito Miranda reported being levitated SO metres 
in the air by similar entities, while driving from Itaperuna to Catagueses. 
After a while, though powerless to move, he felt able to use his voice and 
shouted to be released. When the lights of an approaching car came into 
view, he found himself lowered gently to the ground. 8 

The Prefect of Itaperuna, brother of Nelson Vieira Leite, clearly felt 
sufficiently concerned about the situation, as this news report of 1 
October shows: 

The Prefect of Itaperuna, Sr Rubem Vieira Leite, is to send, next Tuesday, 
to the UFO Study Department of the Brazilian Air Force, and also to NASA, 
an extensive report on the sightings of flying saucers which have been occur¬ 
ring here for about two years past and which.are now occurring with great fre¬ 
quency; two people, Paulo Caetano Silveira and Benedito Miranda, having 
been seized and held for some time by ‘small beings’. In addition to giving a 
detailed account of all these happenings, the Prefect will also request that 
urgent measures be taken. 9 



Perplexing Trends 


335 


The Dilemma of Officialdom 

As early as 1954, a high-ranking official of the Brazilian Air Force went 
on record attesting to the reality and seriousness of the UFO situation. 
‘There has been a staggering increase in UFO sightings since the explo¬ 
sions of the atomic bombs,’ said Colonel Adil Oliveira, chief of the infor¬ 
mation service, Staff Headquarters. ‘The Brazilian Air Force has never 
been unmindful regarding this mystery.’ 10 

Yet what could the military, or the politicians, do about the situation 
in Itaperuna? Given the bizarre nature of the encounters and the rather 
sinister implications thereof, would it not be expedient to simply play 
down the situation, or ignore it altogether? ‘The widespread anxiety and 
alarm engendered by these events,’ wrote Gordon Creighton, ‘may pro¬ 
vide food for thought for those who are so ready to criticize governments 
for censoring or suppressing UFO reports.’ 11 

REJUVENATION 

Ventura Macciras, a 73-year-old caretaker, was sipping his mate (the 
national, non-alcoholic beverage) and listening to the radio near the little 
wooden shack where he lived at Tres Arroyos, in the province of Buenos 
Aires, Argentina. Beside him were his dog, his cat and her kittens. It was 
22.20 on 30 December 1972. Suddenly the radio failed and a loud hum¬ 
ming noise could be heard, ‘like the noise of angry bees, only ever sc 
much stronger'. 

As the noise grew steadily louder, Maceiras looked up and saw a 
powerful light, increasing in intensity and flooding the neighbourhood. 
Within the light could be seen an enormous object, estimated at about 20 
to 25 metres in diameter, ‘red-orange turning to purple’ in colour, 
hovering almost directly above him. Protruding tubes in the lower 
central portion emitted sparks, while around it an enormous wheel 
rotated constantly. In the brilliantly illuminated upper central part could 
be seen a spherical cabin with two small windows. At one of these win¬ 
dows appeared a being dressed in dark-grey clothing ‘made of rolls or 
cylinders joined together’ (similar to the ‘Michelin men’ described on p. 
172). From a helmet on the being’s head came a tube, passing down into 
a box on its back. 

Simultaneously, a shower of sparks shot from the underneath of the 
craft, directly in front of Maceiras, and the object tilted downwards and 
towards him, affording a better view of the interior of the cabin. Now a 
second, identical occupant could be seen, looking over the shoulder of the 
first. ‘He described the eyes of both of them as slanted [and which] looked 
fixedly, and gave an impression of depth,’ reported the principal investi¬ 
gator, Pedro Romaniuk, a former airline pilot and technical investigator 
for the Argentine Air Force’s aviation accidents board. ‘The mouth was 



336 


Alien Base 


but a thin line, and he remembered no details of nose or ears.’ 

In addition to the two small windows, there were two more windows 
on the further side, between which could be seen an emblem, consisting 
of what looked like a ‘sea-horse’ with signs or symbols to the right of it. 
Inside the cabin were what the witness described as a long panel with ‘a 
whole lot of instruments and clocks’. 

Also simultaneously with the downward tilting movement of the object, a 
powerful flash of light came from the under-part, blinding the witness 
temporarily . . . This flash of light completely enveloped the cat and then 
vanished at once. Meanwhile the humming noise was growing much louder, 
and the colour of the object was turning to bluish-green. It began to move for¬ 
ward .. . and descended still lower until it was no more than from four to six 
metres above the ground. At this point [Maceiras] was able to see that in the 
upper part of the cabin there was a wheel or ring which was spinning very fast. 

The object then moved off towards the northeast. A sulphur- or 
amica-like smell remained for a few seconds, as the object flew away at 
low altitude, its colour changing slightly to reddish, then greenish-blue. 
The whole incident had lasted for less than half an minute. 

After-Effects 

Pedro Romaniuk emphasized that Ventura Maceiras was a poor, simple 
man, scarcely able to read or write, with no television set or access to 
films. His neighbours all vouched for his honesty. In more than 60 inter¬ 
rogations that ensued - by physicians including a psychiatrist, engineers, 
police officials, the secretary to the local government office, and others - 
he never changed his story and begged not to be given any publicity. 

During the incident, Maceiras felt some tingling or vibration in his 
legs, which lasted for a couple of days. For over a week he suffered from 
a gradually worsening and eventually unbearable headache, and by the 
eighth day he was experiencing pain in the back of his neck. There were 
even more disturbing symptoms, as reported by Romaniuk: 

Eight or nine hours after the episode, he developed a most violent type of 
diarrhoea, involving about eight attacks daily. Unfortunately he did not think 
to check whether or not he was passing blood. The diarrhoea continued until 
the eighth day... accompanied for the first four days by nausea and vomiting. 

At the time of my first visit, on January 16, 1973, [Maceiras] had begun to 
notice that he was losing hair abnormally, for at one pull he would be losing 
between 170 and 200 hairs. He did this several times, in the presence of inves¬ 
tigators, and it was evident to everybody that despite his 73 years he had 
abundant hair. 

From the 14th day on, several small red pruriginous pustules appeared on 
the back of his neck, so that he was constandy scratching them... I examined 
him and found some ten of these swollen pustules. 



Perplexing Trends 


337 


After his experience, [he] developed a marked difficulty in speaking, 
having trouble in moving his tongue . . . both his eyes watered constantly 
[and] very thin filaments, about three centimetres in length, almost capillary, 
also came from the eyes. This symptom finally vanished completely on the 
fifth day. 

The tops of the many eucalyptus trees that surrounded the site were 
scorched or completely burnt. According to the National Atomic Power 
Commission, no traces of radioactivity were found, though it did not 
issue a written report. 

Although the dog and kittens were unaffected, the mother-cat which 
had received the full force of the flash of light was nowhere to be found 
afterwards, and she did not return until 48 days later, her back showing 
scorch marks. 

In spite of Maceiras’s alarming symptoms, he made a complete recovery, 
though there were later remarkable developments. He found that he had 
regained strength to the extent that he could lift heavy weights that hith¬ 
erto would not have been possible for him. 12 That was not all. One night in 
February 1973, Maceiras claims to have had a repeat visit. There was no 
craft this time, but two beings ‘appeared’ to him, one of whom approached, 
smiling, and greeted him. Between 1.75 and 1.8 metres in height, the being 
had small, round ears, ‘slit’ eyes, a small, flattened nose, and very short, 
very fine thin hair. Communication was telepathic. 

A great deal of information and imagery was imparted to the witness. 
Much of it seems incomprehensible, even ludicrous, but some is inter¬ 
esting. The aliens communicated that they came from our galaxy, giving 
what seem rather silly names for their city, planet and ‘empire’. Here fol¬ 
low some excerpts from those communications supposedly relating to the 
propulsion of the craft, and the purpose of the visits: 

The manner in which they function is ... as yet unknown to the people of 
Earth who, if they had it, would use it for making war. Their speeds are very 
variable, but they can attain limits that to you are inconceivable. The metal of 
which they are made is... a mineral unknown to you, which, once it has been 
moulded in the shape of the spacecraft, is indestructible, cannot be melted 
down again, and can be projected through space in the form of‘energy’. The 
energies of these craft are electromagnetic, and are obtained from the atmo¬ 
sphere (the lower and upper atmosphere) of each planet. 

We are visiting you because you are causing atomic explosions which are 
having a great effect on the Sun, which may suffer damage as a result. . . 
Upon your planet there are mighty seismic movements and earthquakes com¬ 
ing soon, which will destroy part of the planet. 

Regardless of the validity of the communications, the fact remains that 
Maceiras, though barely educated, began talking to the investigators 
about philosophical, theological and astronomical concepts well beyond 



338 


Alien Base 


his comprehension, even occasionally breaking into an unknown tongue. 
‘He mentions big figures in miles, and in a matter of seconds converts 
them to kilometres,’ commented Romaniuk, adding that not all the infor¬ 
mation given out by the witness would be disclosed at once, the better to 
obtain possible corroboration from other sources. 13 

Researcher Jane Thomas Guma, who translated Pedro Romaniuk’s 
reports, believes that by comparing some of the details of the story with 
other ‘incredible’ or ‘crazy’ contactee cases, progress might be made. 
‘Maybe corroborating details would be found,’ she explained, ‘which 
would help us fit together a few more pieces of this immense jigsaw 
puzzle.’ 1 * 

UNDERSEA BASES OFF VENEZUELA AND ARGENTINA? 

In the latter part of March 1973, thousands of witnesses reported seeing 
unusual objects either entering or emerging from the Caribbean Sea on 
the north coast of Venezuela. This led to a widespread conviction among 
the local populace that an alien base was located there. 

At 16.00 on 22 March, two flying objects approached at high speed 
from the sea, veered sharply and passed over the area between Naiguata 
and Carenero, then came to a halt at an altitude of around 200 metres over 
the town of La Sabanamore, where they were witnessed by more than 
3,000 people. Alerted by callers, the police observed the objects. After 
hovering for between five and ten minutes, the objects separated and 
headed off in different directions. 

A few days later, a night-watchman told the press about his sighting of 
several orange lights, tubular in shape, ‘like our rockets’, which rose up 
out of the sea and vanished into the sky. Other, similar reports followed, 
many of them from the vicinity of Maiquetia International Airport, 
Caracas. On the night of 28 March, Armando Silva and his wife saw two 
bluish objects flying high above their country house, which overlooks the 
seashore near Carayaca. The following night, awakened by a sensation of 
tremendous heat, Sra Silva went to the balcony and saw: 

two long blue flying things like capsules, not very big; they, were the same as 
we had seen the previous evening. They were of a vivid blue colour, and so 
close that I am absolutely sure of what I saw. When they came nearer to the 
shore they shone as brightly as the sun. One of them dropped into the sea, 
submerged, and then came out again. The second one also dropped into the 
sea, lay still awhile, and then moved nearer to the first one. 

The sighting lasted about 15 minutes, ending when both objects took 
off from the water and vanished at phenomenal speed. Afterwards, the 
temperature in the house returned to normal. Sr Silva claimed that, while 
his wife watched from the balcony, he went outside and was startled to 



Perplexing Trends 


339 


see, at one of the small windows on one of the objects, a figure like that of 
a five-year-old child, but with a head that looked like a gourd. He took 
fright and ran back to the house. 15 

Southern Argentina 

After years of research, the Argentine Society for the Investigation of 
Unusual Phenomena announced in 1973 that machines from another 
world had established undersea bases in the gulfs of San Marias and San 
Jorge, in the coastal waters of southern Argentina. By the early 1960s, 
flying saucer sightings had become so frequent along the coast of 
Patagonia that they no longer caused surprise, the Society stated. The 
most convincing sighting to support the hypothesis occurred on 14 
August 1968, when 100 witnesses observed the trajectory, covering a dis¬ 
tance of 700 kilometres, of five extremely luminous ellipsoid objects 
which rose up out of the Gulf of San Marias and then submerged again 
in the Gulf of San Jorge. 16 

ON THE PERUVIAN CENTRAL HIGHWAY 
‘I never thought I would see a flying saucer, much less photograph one,’ 
said Lima architect Hugo Luyo Vega, following the sighting of an 
unknown flying machine, identical to George Adamski’s ‘scoutcraft’, 
which Vega photographed on 19 October 1973 (see plates). 

On the day in question, Vega had taken a client into the Lima coun¬ 
tryside in search of a home site. They had driven about 54 miles inland 
along the Rimac River when they took a break near a valley surrounded 
by tall hills. Suddenly, Vega told reporters, ‘my client, obviously excited, 
told me he saw a shining object in the bottom of the valley that was 
advancing towards us extremely slowly’. 

The car was not far away. I ran back for my camera, because in that fraction 
of a second I thought I, too, had seen something interesting. When I pointed 
my [Polaroid] camera and took the picture, the object was less than 50 yards 
away from us and about 20 yards off the ground. Suddenly, the object 
changed direction, headed toward the east and increased its speed. It rose off 
the ground as if trying to avoid some high-tension wires that came down from 
the top of one of the hills and crossed the valley, and disappeared from view. 

It was of the colour of burnished silver [and] shaped like an overturned 
. soup plate with a cupola on top. At the very top of the cupola, there was a 
round object giving off a fixed, sky-blue light. Lower on the cupola, we could 
see a row of small windows like port-holes in a ship. 

On the bottom of the craft was what appeared to be ‘the propulsive 
force of the object... a dark red throbbing light that was aimed toward 
the ground from a sort of turbine in the middle of the upside-down plate. 
Near the turbine-like part, we could see protuberances like half-eggs.’ 



340 


Alien Base 


The architect said that only about 30 seconds elapsed from the time 
they spotted the object until it disappeared. 17 

‘For a moment 1 didn’t actually think the picture would come out all 
right, for I don’t consider myself all that good a photographer, and 1 was 
greatly surprised when I saw that it had come out,’ Vega continued. ‘All 
the photo showed was the thing’s shape, but at any rate this little piece of 
evidence is enough to prove that it was a real “UFO” and not an inven¬ 
tion of my mind.’ 

It took the witnesses some 20 minutes to recover from their astonish¬ 
ment. Vega was reluctant to disclose the identity of his client. ‘He is a 
wealthy man who prefers no publicity,’ he explained. 1 * 

AN INTRUSION OVER MANZANO LABORATORY 
In Beyond Top Secret, I reported on the 1980 series of sightings (including 
a reported landing) of unknown flying objects in the vicinity of the 
Manzano Weapons Storage Area, at Kirtland Air Force Base, 
Albuquerque, New Mexico. These sightings are confirmed officially in 
several declassified Air Force documents. Major Ernest Edwards, USAF 
(Retired), who had been in charge of security at Manzano, confirmed the 
content of these reports and pointed out to me in person where the in¬ 
cidents had occurred. 19 Another interesting sighting, investigated by 
R. C. Hecker of the Aerial Phenomena Research Organization (APRO), 
occurred in 1973. 

At 21.45 on 6 November, an air policeman spotted a large, glowing 
object hovering above Plant No. 3 (nuclear weapons inspection facility) 
of the Manzano Laboratory area, Kirtland Air Force Base East. The 
object was described as shaped like an oblate spheroid, 150 feet in diam¬ 
eter, golden in colour, and absolutely silent as it hovered at about 100 
feet. ‘The nine other air policemen on duty in that area were alerted to 
the presence of the intruder,’ reported Hecker. 

While the other air policemen moved into positions affording views of the 
object, a call was put through to Kirtland East for assistance. According to my 
informant (one of the air policemen who saw the UFO), four interceptors (F- 
101 Voodoos) of the 150th Fighter Group, New Mexico Air National Guard, 
were scrambled to intercept the object. As the interceptors grouped in the 
skies over Kirtland AFB West, the object began moving in an easterly direc¬ 
tion and passed out of sight over the Manzano Mountains at treetop level 
(below the radar horizon). By the time the jets had arrived on the scene, the 
object had vanished. 

‘When I interviewed [my informant] approximately one week after the 
incident,’ continued Hecker, ‘he said that military officials were upset 
with the incident. He requested that I did not identify the source of my 
information due to immediate censoring of the report. He said that offi- 



Perplexing Trends 


341 


dally, the sighting had not occurred; there were no references to it in 
intelligence briefs (which he had access to) in succeeding days.’ 20 

INTERCEPTION OVER BOLIVIA 

Two days after the preceding incident, on the afternoon of 8 November 
1973, a peculiar, top-shaped flying craft was observed by the crew of a 
Lloyd Bolivian Airlines plane as it approached the El Alto International 
Airport at La Paz, Bolivia. When first seen, the luminous object was 
hovering at some 12,000 metres over the snow-capped Illimani Mountain 
which overlooks the city. There were hundreds of witnesses. 

Unable to obtain identification of, or to communicate with the strange 
craft, air traffic controllers contacted the commander of the Air Force Air 
Pursuit Group based at El Alto, Major Norberto Salomon, who at that 
moment was on a training flight. Heading towards the target at supersonic 
speed in his F-100 Super Sabre, Salomon reported that the stationary 
object was shaped like a top, on the sides of which could be seen what looked 
like small windows. When the jet approached to a distance of2,000 metres, 
the object took off. ‘When I had managed to approach up to that distance,’ 
said Major Salomon, ‘it began to slip away at an incredible speed.’ He gave 
pursuit, but in a sudden manoeuvre the object reverted to its original 
hovering position, before disappearing vertically at fantastic speed. 21 

THE RESCUED EARTHMAN 

One of the stranger stories to emerge from the plethora of incidents 
reported from Puerto Rico and the Dominican Republic in 1972 is the 
following, which appears here as it did in a Puerto Rican newspaper at the 
time: 

It is 9.00 o'clock in the morning. On a deserted road near San Cristobal 
[Dominican Republic] a man appears and flags down a car. The driver, an 
insurance company director whom we shall call X.X., slows down and pulls 
up. The man approaches. He is wearing a sort of light-green overall with a 
shiny glint to it. The garment covers his feet. He is wearing no shoes, no 
gloves, and has no pockets, no weapons, no insignia. It is noted that he is 
wearing a sort of watch on his left wrist. This mysterious person asks X.X.: 
‘Don’t you know me?’ 

‘No,’ says X.X. 

‘My name is F-M-,' says the man. (This is the name of a person 

well-known in Santo Domingo [the capital], who disappeared mysteriously 
in the sea about 15 years ago.) ‘It was thought that 1 was drowned along with 
two other people. But I was rescued by a modern machine.’ 

X.X.: ‘By a helicopter?’ 

F.M.: ‘No. Supposedly a module, that is to say, what you folk call a UFO. 
I was rescued by those two people (he points towards two companions a cer- 



342 


Alien Base 


Cain distance away) because of my knowledge of radio techniques and my 
intelligence.’ 

The two people mentioned are over six feet high, slim, and dressed in 
identical fashion to F.M. Their hair is short and brown, and their skin a light 
colour, like that of the Chinese. They remain silent, standing there with arms 
crossed, observing the scene. 

F.M. draws the attention of X.X. to the machine in which they have come. 
It is of the size of an automobile, has the shape of an American football, and 
its surface is nickelled. 

X.X.: 'What are they doing here?’ 

F.M.: 'Supposedly investigating.’ 

X.X.: 'What sort of investigating?’ 

F.M.: ‘Investigating.’ 

X.X.: ‘From where do they come?’ 

F.M.: ‘Supposedly from Venus.’ 

The stranger adds that they are gready interested in the Milwaukee Depth. 
Then F.M. says: 'Step back. We are about to leave.’ 

The dialogue has lasted some five minutes. Just as the three individuals are 
about to depart, F.M. turns round and tells X.X. not to worry if his car won’t 
start at once. He says everything will return to normality. 22 

I decided to make enquiries about this case. From Jorge Martin, Puerto 
Rico’s leading investigator, I learned that the incident allegedly took place 
on 22 September 1972. ‘X.X.’ is Virgilio G6mez Contreras, a sales man¬ 
ager of an insurance company, while ‘F.M.’ is Freddie Miller, one of the 
pioneers of television broadcasting in the Dominican Republic. 23 

The reference to the Milwaukee Depth is interesting, for several rea¬ 
sons. Firstly, this is the deepest part (9,200 metres, or 30,183 feet) of the 
Puerto Rico Trench, which lies immediately north of the island. 
Secondly, many residents of Puerto Rico believe that at least one alien base 
exists on the island, and perhaps in the depths of the Trench, since so 
many observations have been made of objects entering or leaving the sea 
there. Thirdly, I have learned from a well-connected source that certain 
extraterrestrials have a number of underground and undersea bases on our 
planet, one of which is in the Caribbean area. Furthermore, plate tectonics 
(the study of Earth’s geology based on the concept of moving ‘plates’ 
forming its structure) was mentioned by my source as an item of interest 
on the alien agenda; in particular, tectonic plates beneath our oceans. 
Finally, this is not the only story alleging alien liaison with Earth people. 

NOTES 

1 Corso, Col. Philip J., with Bimes, William J., The Day After Roswell , Pocket 
Books, New York and London, 1997, pp. 182-3. 

2 Ibid., p. 181. 

3 Pallmann, Ludwig F., and Stevens, Wendelle C., UFO Contact from Ilihi- 



Perplexing Trends 


343 


Pa: Cancer Planet Mission, UFO Photo Archives, PO Box 17206, Tucson, 
Arizona 85710, 1986, pp. 6-8. 

4 Biihler, Dr Walter, ‘UFO on the Sea near Rio’, translated by Gordon 
Creighton, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 17, no. 3, May-June 1971, pp. 3—7. 

5 Biihler, Dr Walter, ‘More Teleportations and Levitations’, translated by 
Gordon Creighton, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 19, no. 1, January-February 
1973, pp. 28-9. 

6 Creighton, Gordon, ‘Itaperuna Again’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 18, no. 2, 
March-April 1972, pp. 13-14, translated from Domingo Ilustrado, Rio de 
Janeiro, 17 October 1971. 

7 Creighton, Gordon, ‘Uproar in Brazil’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 17, no. 6, 
pp. 24-7, translated from several Brazilian newspapers, including 0 Dia, 
Rio de Janeiro, 10 October 1971. 

8 Ibid., p. 26. 

9 Ibid., p. 28, translated from 0 Dia, 1 October 1971. 

10 O Cruzeiro (special issue on flying saucers), 1954, translated by Gordon 
Creighton, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 17, no. 3, May-June 1971, p. 7. 

11 Creighton, ‘Uproar in Brazil’, p.24. 

12 Romaniuk, Pedro, ‘Rejuvenation Follows Close Encounter with UFO’, 
translated by Jane Thomas, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 19, no. 4, July- 
August 1973, pp. 10-14. 

13 Romaniuk, Pedro, ‘The Extraordinary Case of Rejuvenation’, translated by 
Gordon Creighton, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 19, no. 5, September- 
October 1973, pp. 14-15. 

14 Thomas, Jane, ‘The Contactee of Tres Arroyos: Some Thoughts’, Flying 
Saucer Review, vol. 19, no. 5, Scptember-October 1973, p. 16. 

15 Creighton , Gordon, ‘Underwater UFO Base off Venezuela?’, Flying Saucer 
Review, vol. 21, no. 1, published June 1975, pp. 9-13, 

16 La Nazione, Italy, 29 July 1973, translated by Mary Boyd, Flying Saucer 
Review, vol. 19, no. 6, November—December 1973, p. 29. 

17 United Press International (UPI), Lima, 22 October 1973. 

18 Creighton, Gordon, ‘George Adamski Still Casts his Shadow', Flying Saucer 
Review Case Histories, supplement no. 18, February 1974, p. 12, translated 
from El Comercio, Lima, 23 October 1973. 

19 Good, Timothy, Beyond Top Secret: The Worldwide UFO Security Threat, 
Sidgwick & Jackson, London, 1996, pp. 381-2, translated from El Comercio, 
Lima, 25 October 1973. 

20 Hecker, R.C., ‘New Mexico Reports’, The APRO Bulletin, vol. 23, no. 2, 
September-October 1974, p. 5. 

21 Associated Press (AP), La Paz, Bolivia, 9 November 1973, translated by Bill 
Armstrong from La Nueva Provincia, 10 November 1973, published in 
Skylook, Mutual UFO Network, no. 82, September 1974, p. 17. 

22 Freixedo, Salvador, ‘UFOs over the Caribbean’, translated by Gordon 
Creighton, Flying Saucer Review Case Histories, supplement no. 14, April 
1973, pp. 9-10, 12. 

23 Interview with the author, 22 May 1997. 



Chapter 17 


Disquieting Developments 


Australia’s harsh, remote Sturt Desert, covering the borders of South 
Australia, New South Wales and Queensland, was reportedly the scene 
of a bizarre, disquieting encounter early in January 1974. The witness, 
‘Ben’, an ornithologist from Adelaide and the author of several books on 
that subject, was with a lady companion, searching for the fossils that 
abound in that desert Their exact location, a place called Clifton Bore, is 
in South Australia, about 250 miles north-northwest of Broken Hill, New 
South Wales. 

At around 13.30, Ben was over a mile away from his station wagon. He 
had asked his companion, who was unfamiliar with the terrain, to keep the 
car in sight at all times. It was at this point that Ben felt he was being 
watched. Suddenly, two small beings, about a metre in height, approached 
him. As Kevin McNeil, author of an article on the case, wrote: 

These beings were humanoid, indeed human-looking in many respects. They 
appeared to be males, with short, average-cut hair styles,.. dressed in a skin¬ 
tight, silvery covering, not unlike a diver’s suit. The clothing appeared to be 
seamless. Their faces were normal, the colouring like a very light suntan; 
their heads, however, were elongated at the rear . . . Their arms were con¬ 
siderably shorter than a comparable human’s. 

The beings spoke in a rapid, unintelligible language. Though alarmed, 
Ben did not feel threatened; when they beckoned him to follow them, he 
did so. About 50 feet away appeared a silver-coloured object, which he 
had not seen before. Shaped like a ‘hot dog roll’, it had no visible seams, 
doors, windows or protrusions. By Ben’s estimate, it was about 25 feet 
long and four feet high. A doorway opened at the centre of the craft, and 
the beings motioned him to enter. What he encountered inside left him 
totally confounded. As he bent down and stepped inside, he found to his 
astonishment that the interior was vast. ‘You could have fitted a full-sized 
battleship inside,’ he told the investigator. ‘How can this happen? It was 
25 feet long and four feet high, I know that -1 could see over the top - 
but inside, it was enormous .. space meant nothing.’ 

Inside were 20 or so similar beings, at least four of whom were females, 
with longer hair. All seemed to be about the same age, with no facial age- 



Disquieting Developments 


345 


ing lines: it was as if they grew to about one metre tall, and about twenty- 
five years of age, then stopped growing and ageing. 

Rejection 

The alien beings offered Ben a drink from a silver metallic tumbler. 
Though afraid to drink it, he was more afraid of the consequences if he 
refused. After taking the drink, he passed out. Asked later to describe the 
taste, he was unable to relate it to any with which he was acquainted. 

On recovering consciousness, he found himself lying on the floor of the 
craft. The two aliens were still near him, and somehow he felt that he had 
been ‘rejected’. He reflected that perhaps this was due to his age (he was 
38 at the time) or an illness from which he was then suffering. (If this was 
the case, an interesting parallel can be drawn with the abduction of Alfred 
Burtoo in Aldershot, England, in 1983. As described in Beyond Top 
Secret , Burtoo was rejected by the small-sized aliens, who, having exam¬ 
ined him, said he was ‘too old and infirm’ for their purpose. 1 Burtoo, at 
the time, was 40 years older than Ben.) 

The Interior 

Although the aliens continued talking among themselves, Ben felt, tele- 
pathically, that he ‘knew’ what was going on. ‘He felt no hostility directed 
at him,' reported McNeil, ‘and apart from his two “guardians”, the other 
crew members paid him no attention.’ 

These crew members were walking around, talking among themselves 
switching switches on and off. There were seven or eight TV screens, 
showing interior and exterior scenes, and one that was showing what 
appeared to be motors of some kind, although he could not see them 
physically himself. There was also a large, mirror-like screen on the wall, 
with dots, Catherine-wheel-shaped images (perhaps spiral galaxies?) and 
some strange images and symbols that he could not understand. 

Together with his ‘guards’, Ben walked around the interior. The floor 
surface was of a shiny metallic substance that was neither hard nor slip¬ 
pery. The atmosphere inside was normal; neither he nor the aliens 
required breathing apparatus. Ben did not know how, nor could he 
understand it, but he felt that the aliens themselves were able to get from 
one place to another by means of thought alone. 

A Shock 

Ben was profoundly shocked by what he saw next: two human female 
children; one appearing to be 12 or 13 years old, the other eight or nine 
years old. Both were in a cage-like structure. 

Ben, the father of five children, became very emotional on the tape at this 
point [and] was unable to describe the ‘cage’ properly... He stated that it was 



346 


Alien Base 


‘neat’ and that the two girls seemed to be in some type of trance. They did not 
appear to comprehend what was going on around them. They had plenty of 
room inside this ‘cage’, but were not moving, just standing there. Ben did not 
know if they could see him or not; they made no sign. They were European 
(that is, white) and were dressed normally. The aliens, walking around, doing 
their chores aboard the craft, paid absolutely no attention to the girls. 

Ben felt that the aliens planned to take the girls with them to where the 
aliens had come from, but he felt he had been rejected because he was of 
no use to them. 

A Problem of Contact 

Ben became aware of a buzzing sound, like motors of some sort, though 
he could not see the source of the noise. With the opened doorway now 
before him, he took his chance. Stepping out of the craft, he found him¬ 
self back in the desert. He walked away and was not stopped. 

On returning to the car and his companion, Ben learned that an hour 
and a half had passed since he began looking for fossils. ‘He wrote down 
what happened to him within one hour of returning,’ said McNeil. 
‘During his interview he was constantly referring to these notes. He was 
mostly disturbed about the children. 

‘Did this happen? I believe it is possible that it did, due to the emotion 
and detail supplied by Ben,’ commented McNeil. ‘It is, unfortunately, to 
be expected that the sceptics and “professional” UFO debunkers should 
jump up and down pouring scorn and vitriolic hyperbole on the alleged 
witness to close contact activity.’ 

UFOs are constantly ignoring scientific protestations of their non-existence 
and are continually returning, from wherever they come from, to the earth we 
know and think we understand . . . objective, scientific investigation could 
enhance Man’s knowledge of himself, his world, and the universe he lives in. J 


MAYDAY! 

‘Mexico Centre from X-Ray Alpha Uniform. Mayday! Mayday!’ 

The young pilot’s voice was desperate as he contacted Mexico City’s 
Benito Juarez International Airport control tower. It was 12.15 on 3 May 
1975. 

‘Come in, X-Ray Alpha Uniform.’ 

‘My aircraft is out of control... I have three unidentified objects flying 
around me; one came under my aircraft and hit it. The landing gear is 
locked in and the controls won’t release them. My position -1 am on the 
Radial 004 from the VOR [VHF Omnidirectional Range] Teques- 
quitengo -1 am not controlling the plane - Mexico Centre, can you hear 
me?’ 



Disquieting Developments 347 

‘Taken note, X-Ray Alpha Uniform ... We are contacting [appropri¬ 
ate] authorities.’ 

Carlos de los Santos Montiel, the 23-year-old pilot, was flying in his 
Piper PA-24 Comanche (registration XB-XAU) from Zihuatenajo, State 
of Guerrero, to Mexico City, a distance of some 180 miles, when, he 
claims, an object, about 10 feet in diameter, shaped like two plates joined 
together with a small cupola on top (see Fig. 23), positioned itself just 
above his starboard wing. A glance to the left revealed another object just 
above the port wing. 



Fig. 23. A sketch of one of the three objects. 

‘I was petrified, after I saw a third object which seemed about to col¬ 
lide head-on with the windshield,’ Carlos told airport officials. ‘But it 
went beneath the aircraft and I heard a strange noise from below as 
though it had collided with the underside of the plane.’ 

The Piper’s airspeed dropped from 140 to 120 nautical miles per hour. 
Carlos tried banking to the left in an attempt to ‘bump’ the object away 
from his plane, but the controls were frozen. He then tried lowering the 
landing gear, though to no avail. The Mexico control tower contacted 
Ignacio Silva la Mora, Carlos’s uncle, an aircraft expert, who talked with 
Carlos on the radio to analyse the problem and assist with landing 
preparations. 

By the time Carlos had reached the Ajusco radio beacon, he found that 
his aircraft had risen from 15,000 to 15,800 feet. At this point, the objects 
left, one by one, heading in the direction of the Popocatepetl and 
Ixtaccihuatl volcanoes. Control of the aircraft was regained. Meanwhile, 
at Mexico City International Airport, runways were closed and prepara¬ 
tions made for an emergency landing. After 40 minutes of circling, Carlos 
managed to lower the undercarriage after adjustments to the control lever 
with a screwdriver, and the plane landed safely on a grassy area between 
two runways. 

Immediately, Carlos was taken to the airport clinic, where he was 
examined and pronounced fit. Three days later the airport’s chief of the 
Aviation Medicine Department, Dr Luis Amezcua, completing neuro¬ 
logical, physical and psychiatric tests, inferred that Carlos might have 



348 


Alien Base 


been hallucinating as a result of low blood sugar (hypoglycaemia), 
because he had not eaten prior to the incident since 20.00 the previous 
night. It was also inferred, by a chief inspector from the Civil Aviation 
Directorate, that Carlos may have hallucinated because he had been 
flying too high without oxygen. The latter hypothesis fails to account for 
the radar evidence. 

Radar Confirmation 

According to Julio lnterian Diaz, Airport Terminal Radar Controller, the 
blip of Carlos’s plane — the only one in the sector at that time — was seen 
on radar when it was 43 miles from the Mexico City Airport. Radar 
registered another aircraft going in a different direction from Carlos’s 
plane, and which executed a 270-degree turn in a radius of three or four 
miles at a speed of 450-500 nautical m.p.h. 3 ‘Normally a plane moving at 
that speed needs eight to ten miles to make a turn like that,’ air traffic 
controller Emilio Estanol told reporters. ‘In my seventeen years as an air 
traffic controller I’ve never seen anything like that.’ 4 

Men in Black 

Carlos de los Santos Montiel’s story received extensive coverage in the 
Mexican media. When Pedro Ferriz, the well-known television person¬ 
ality and ufologist, invited Carlos to appear on his programme, the 
rather retiring young pilot reluctantly agreed. As Carlos drove down the 
freeway on his way to the television studio, a black Ford Galaxy pulled 
in front of him. ‘Through the rear-view mirror he could see an identical 
car just behind him,’ reported Jerome Clark, a leading American 
researcher. 

Both vehicles looked brand new, almost as if they were being driven for the 
first time. The cars started to crowd him and soon Carlos’ car had been forced 
over to the side of the road. Alarmed, he stopped his vehicle and was about to 
get out when the Galaxies also pulled over and four tall, broad-shouldered 
men jumped out 

One of the men put his hands on the door as if to prevent Carlos from 
getting out. ‘Look, boy,’ he said, in a rapid, rather mechanical-sounding 
Spanish, ‘if you value your life and that of your family too, don’t talk any 
more about this sighting of yours.’ Carlos was too taken aback to respond. 

The men, dressed in black suits - traditional garb since the 1950s for the 
so-called ‘men in black’ (MIBs), who have often been reported to threaten 
UFO witnesses - were described as ‘Scandinavian’ in appearance, with 
unusually pale skin. They returned to their cars and disappeared in the 
traffic. Intimidated, Carlos went straight back home. Later, he told Ferriz 
about the incident, who managed to assure him that nothing would come 



Disquieting Developments 


349 


of it; that such threats by the MIBs had proved to be empty in other cases. 
Reluctantly, Carlos agreed to reschedule the interview. 

One month later, Carlos met Dr Allen Hynek, the distinguished UFO 
researcher and former consultant to Project Blue Book, who was travel¬ 
ling in Mexico at the time. At an initial meeting, Hynek invited Carlos for 
breakfast the following morning to discuss details of his aerial encounter. 
At 06.00, Carlos left his house and drove to the Mexicana Airlines office, 
where he had applied for a job as a pilot, then proceeded to Hynek’s hotel. 
As he climbed up the steps he was approached by one of the men who had 
threatened him a month earlier. ‘You were already warned once,’ the man 
said. ‘You are not to talk about your experience.’ ' 

‘All I did was accept an invitation,’ said Carlos. ‘Dr Hynek wants to 
know what I saw and I thought that maybe 1 could understand it better 
myself if I talked with him.’ 

‘Look, I don’t want you to make problems for yourself,’ snapped die 
man, pushing Carlos back several feet. ‘And why did you leave your 
house at six this morning? Do you work for Mexicana Airlines? Get out 
of here — and don’t come back!’ Carlos obeyed. 

That was Carlos’s last encounter with the mysterious men in black. 
‘They were very strange,’ he told Jerome Clark and Richard Heiden two 
years later. ‘They were huge, taller than Mexicans are, and they were so 
white. But the strangest thing of all is that all the while they were in my 
presence I never saw them blink.’ 5 

Disturbing though this story is, Carlos at least lived to tell the tale. As 
described in Beyond Top Secret, another young pilot, Frederick Valentich, 
disappeared for ever following his encounter with an unknown flying 
machine during a flight from Melbourne to Tasmania, in October 1978. 6 

A REPAIR STOP IN LEEDS 

Jan Siedlecki, bom in Poland in 1919, came to live in England during the 
Second World War. He does not recall the precise date of his alleged 
encounter with an alien vehicle that landed near a housing estate in a sub¬ 
urb of Leeds, England, but believes it was during the summer of 1976. 

At the time of the incident, Siedlecki was working overtime at 
Brydon’s Garage, Cross Gates. It was about 01.00 on a hot, humid night 
when he put down his tools, walked the short distance home and retired 
to bed. Suddenly, a brilliant white glow flooded the bedroom. Thinking 
the garage might have caught fire, Jan jumped out of bed. What he saw 
was a strange craft, hovering around 10 to 15 feet off the ground, wob¬ 
bling, as if trying to land. The craft was saucer-shaped, of a glistening 
deep-blue colour. Jan put on his shirt, trousers and slippers, and headed 
outside. The time was now 02.00. 

Jan dashed across York Road (a dual carriageway) then hid behind a 



350 


Alien Base 


fence to watch the strange machine as it hovered above a large expanse of 
grass, about 75 yards away, which backed on to a large housing estate. 
‘Jan watched very carefully as the object finally managed to rest on the 



Fig. 24. Drawings by investigator Mark Birdsall, projected from Jan Siedleckfs 
own sketches. (A) How the ‘turbine 7 underneath the craft appeared, and (B) one of 
the inverted mushroom-shaped landing legs. 


ground,’ reported researcher Mark Ian Birdsall, who headed an investi¬ 
gation by the Yorkshire UFO Society (now Quest International). ‘There 
had been complete silence and the witness was still looking around to see 
if there were any other people or cars passing. He then looked carefully 
at the underside of the object. He could now see three “legs” which sup¬ 
ported the object. At this point he was very frightened.’ 

A few seconds later, Jan observed a tube descend from the central underside 
of the object, which he says was a few feet wide, and which reached the 
ground. Although the entire object was dark, an unusual glow was pouring 
from the underside, which he thought strange. 'On one side there was total 



Disquieting Developments 351 

darkness, and on the other an intense glow; you could have cut the two with 
a pencil,’ he remarked. 

The Humanoids 

Suddenly, the tube opened like a book'. Two humanoid figures, approx¬ 
imately four feet tall, walked from the tube and stood in front of the 
object. Noticing Jan, who had positioned himself nearer the object, they 
beckoned him to come closer. As he walked slowly towards them, he 
heard a conversation taking place, but could not understand the lan¬ 
guage. Jan stood in front of the figures, who were wearing one-piece suits 
of a yellow-orange colour, and a kind of helmet with a darkened visor 
over the face area. They wore mittens on their hands, so he could not see 
any fingers, and some kind of boots or shoes which appeared to be inte¬ 
gral to the suit. 

At this point, Jan noticed a panel with a series of square-shaped 
‘switches’ and circular buttons on the chest of each humanoid (see Fig. 



Fig. 25. Mark Birdsall's drawing of the humanoids, based on Jan Siedlecki’s 
description. 

25). When the humanoids began adjusting these, Jan was surprised to 
hear them speak recognizably. ‘We are in trouble with ship, we will have 
to make repairs before we leave,’ they said. ‘We apologize for the intru¬ 
sion. As soon as repaired, we go.’ The tone of the voices sounded ‘tinny’, 
like a ten-year-old boy speaking. The switches and knobs were operated 



352 


Alien Base 


only when the beings conversed with Jan, so he assumed they were trans¬ 
lating devices. 

Frightened, Jan asked the men how their ship worked. ‘If you want to 
come, come. We go inside now,’ they replied. ‘The lift will come down 
for you if you want to come.' Jan watched as the doors silently closed and 
the tube moved rapidly upwards. A few seconds later, the tube dropped 
down once more. As he bent down to walk underneath the hull, which 
was about five feet off the ground, he noticed two rows of what looked 
like small rotor-blades rotating very slowly; one clockwise and the other 
counter-clockwise (see Fig. 24). 

Inside 

Siedlecki was perspiring as he entered the tube, which was glowing in a 
pale-blue colour. The doors closed ‘like a book’; to his surprise, he could 
now stand straight. The doors opened out into a metal ‘cabin’. Standing 
on a shiny surface, he immediately became aware of a smell as of‘rotting 
grass’. The two humanoids led him up a sloping ramp that spiralled 
around what he took to be the ship’s inner perimeter, then into a room 
they referred to as the ‘cooling system’. 

Around the edge of this room lay a two-foot-wide channel of flowing 

rater, with some kind of gieen grass, about two feet high, growing out of 

.Ashe moved with the men to another room or compartment, Jan asked 

iem how the ship flew. There was no reply, but he had the impression 
chat they were on the point of showing him the ‘engine room’. ‘How fast 
does the ship fly?’ he asked. ‘B13,’ came the cryptic reply. Then another 
door opened. Peering into the semi-light compartment, he noticed in a 
far corner four or five crouched figures, with their heads in between their 
hands and knees. Unlike the other two humanoids, they were dressed in 
black one-piece suits, with no helmets, and had brown hair. The figures 
were gathered beside a circular pool containing a black, bubbling, oil-like 
substance, from which flashes of red light darted into the air. 

As reported in many other contacts, the lighting source itself could not 
be discerned. ‘There were no visible lighting points,’Jan explained. ‘The 
light inside the ship was constant; an unusual yellowish-orange light 
coming from all the panels. There were no windows or visible openings.’ 
Gazing towards the ‘ceiling’, Jan saw what he thought was the central 
dome of the ship. Then, a football-sized ball of orange light (which could 
have been a probe) darted around the room in stops and starts. ‘At this 
point, he heard many footsteps, as if there was panic,’ Birdsall reported. 
‘One of the men very politely informed Jan that he would have to leave, 
explaining that they had got a “space-bug”. Jan was ushered down the 
spiralling staircase and into the tube. When Jan was inside, the man said, 
“When you get out, run!” ’ The door opened and Jan ran quickly back to 



Disquieting Developments 


353 


his former position behind the fence. 

A Noisy Departure 

Now sweating profusely, Jan stared at the craft. No windows or lights 
could be discerned, only the dark blue of the object and the intense glow 
emanating from its underside. Suddenly, he heard a loud, high-pitched 
whistling sound. 

The front portion of the object tilted forward like a helicopter and remained 
stationary for a few seconds. The object was now clear of the ground. The 
tripods and tube lifted inside the object, the whistling intensified, then the 
object shot away at an angle of 45 degrees into the sky, taking only three or 
four seconds to reach the thick cloud cover. Jan still managed to see the object 
for a while after it had broken through the clouds, with red ‘fire’ pouring out 
from its underside. Just before it hit the clouds, there was a terrible noise; the 
whistling grew louder and louder. ‘It must have been heard by the whole 
area,’ he said. 

Jan remained in position for a while, then walked carefully over to the 
landing site. He noticed that the grass, as well as the ambient tempera¬ 
ture, was very warm. The whole incident lasted between 20 and 25 
minutes. Arriving home, he washed, returned to the bedroom and told 
his wife what had happened. She did not believe him. 

Discussion 

Jan and the investigators remained puzzled by the fact that, although the 
object reportedly landed near a dual carriageway and a housing estate, it 
was neither seen nor heard by any neighbours; at least, none reported the 
incident. ‘When I was running towards the ship,’Jan told the investiga¬ 
tors, ‘1 was constantly looking for other people and cars.’ 7 That a dark 
object was not observed by others is not surprising, though the noise 
should have been heard, but lack of supportive testimony does not itself 
negate the event. One explanation might be that the occupants of the 
craft were able to exert some sort of‘influence’ over the surrounding area; 
an explanation given by aliens to several other contactees and abductees. 

There is an interesting parallel with Jan’s case in the encounters of Ben 
and some others. Jan estimated the diameter of the object to be about 20 
feet and its height about 10 feet. He said that he walked up three levels, 
and on each floor was able to stand upright; since he is five feet six inches 
tall, one could assume the height of the craft to have been well over 10 
feet. In an attempt to rationalize this inconsistency, Jan explained that the 
seven or so steps up to each level sloped very gradually. That still would 
not explain it, in my view. Jan himself admitted that the object appeared 
much larger on the inside than it looked when he was on the outside. ‘It 
could quite easily accommodate 20 or 30 persons,’ he added. 



3S4 


Alien Base 


Grass at the landing site died soon after the incident, and Jan said it 
was four years later before even weeds would grow there. 

Friends, neighbours and an employee testified to Siedlecki’s integrity, 
as did the investigators. ‘I believe Jan and the case to be genuine,’ con¬ 
cluded investigator William Tree. ‘The description of the inside of the 
object is so bizarre. Jan never altered his story, although he himself knew 
the data were unbelievable.’ 8 In 1986, 10 years or so after the alleged in¬ 
cident, I was introduced to Jan by Mark Birdsall. He seemed a believable 
witness, still emotionally affected by his unbelievable encounter, with no 
hidden agenda nor ulterior motive. He died in 1992. 

AN ATLANTIC ENCOUNTER 

It was 23.40 on 22 December 1977. Captain Walt Hammel and co-pilot 
‘Slim’ Dickson (pseudonyms) were flying in a Trans World Airlines 
(TWA) plane about 600 miles out over the Atlantic at 21,000 feet, bound 
for Boston’s Logan International Airport. ‘The weather was clear except 
for some widely scattered clouds beneath us,’ Hammel related to investi¬ 
gator Donald Todd, the day after this incident. ‘We had just been having 
a cup of coffee and Slim had set his cup on the panel next to his right 
elbow. As he put the cup down, he glanced out to what would be between 
one and two o’clock, and suddenly he grabs me by the arm.’ 

Reflexively I swiveled my head to look at him and caught this dazzle of 
twinkling lights coming at us from the starboard side, just ahead, and appear¬ 
ing maybe about SO feet below. Instantly Slim and I realized that whatever the 
thing was, it was moving in a hurry, that it was entirely too close, and 
appeared to be about to cross in front of, or about to collide with us. And it 
was huge! 

I slammed on some power, hauled the nose up and prayed we’d go over the 
top of that thing. Just as we started to climb, this thing swept straight up, did 
an impossible right-angle tum and begins to pace us. I don't see how anything 
could have executed a maneuver like that - I mean almost a simultaneous 
two-directional tum - up and to the right, not to mention coming to damned 
near a dead stop. 

We couldn’t detect any sound, any prop or jet wash, nor see any exhaust. 
It just kept flashing a lot of lights around the middle. Once we leveled off 
again, the thing stayed just ahead of us off to our right and we had a chance 
to observe it. We couldn’t see any hard outline or shape to it, but you could 
tell it was almost circular because of the lights [which] were mostly white ... 
There was a red blinking light on top of the thing with all those twinkling, sil¬ 
very-white lights on around the middle... A little later the thing rose up and 
there was another red blinking light on the bottom of it ... It looked as if 
about every dozen or so lights around the middle, there was a reddish-purple 
one, and in between them, there was a blue one. But they were all blinking off 
and on intermittently 



Disquieting Developments 


355 


I don’t mind telling you I was nervous as hell, and Slim, he was chalk white 
and scared stiff. It suddenly occurred to me, what if the passengers are watch¬ 
ing that thing? What am 1 going to tell them? I didn’t want panic back there, 
so 1 buzzed the stewardess... evidently none of the passengers had spotted it. 
The object may just have been far enough forward to be out of their sight line. 

Further Developments 

‘While we were watching the UFO, suddenly this other glowing thing 
drops out from underneath it [that] looked like a neon-green smoke ring,’ 
continued Hammel. ‘It dropped away from the larger UFO down toward 
the water, and submerged.’ 

We saw the glowing green circle of water where it went in, and then the glow 
disappeared. Seconds later, two more green rings dropped out. The second 
one dropped away and submerged like the first one, but the third one 
dropped down and then shot straight ahead to disappear toward the coast. 

Slim and I finally came to the conclusion that the big one must have been 
all of 100 feet across, or maybe even more. By comparison, the smaller ones 
looked like they might have been 20 feet across. I guess the big UFO paced 
us for about 20 minutes, then all of a sudden the lights around the middle 
began going out in clusters - not in banks of say, six or eight in a row, bur six 
or eight separate, individual lights at the same time .. . The top and bottom 
blinking red lights went out too, with only scattered blue lights around the 
middle still blinking. 

As our eyes became accustomed to the dark again, we could faintly sec the 
silhouette of [what looked] like two inverted shallow soup bowls put together. 
Then very faintly, just above the mid-lateral line, we could seea soft subdued 
green glow emanating from what appeared to be trapezoidal-shaped windows 
. . . wider at the bottom than at the top. Just about the time our eyes got 
focused on the windows, the thing assumed an overall bluish corona. Then it 
took off straight ahead ... leaving nothing in front of us but a blue streak in 
the sky. It was positively the damnedest thing I’ve ever seen. When we finally 
came in to Logan, we must have hit the runway half a dozen times . .. 

'After a previous encounter reported to the FAA [Federal Aviation 
Administration], and upon ensuing company and other authoritative 
harassment,’ explained Donald Todd, ‘[Hammel] has sworn never to 
report another UFO encounter. Fortunately, he has confidence in [my] 
discretion.’ 9 

In several interesting respects, the TWA case brings to mind the 
Atlantic encounter reported by US Navy aircrew in 1951 (see pp. 86—9). 

I must stress that the professional and personal mentality and sense of 
responsibility that characterizes the behaviour and attitudes of aircraft 
pilots and other crew members, in particular those transporting passen¬ 
gers, precludes the likelihood of contriving a UFO report for gaining 
attention, or for entertainment. 



356 


Alien Base 


THE ‘CHUPA-CHUPA’ EPIDEMIC 

Since 1946, Brazil has been the source of many alarming reports about 
alien activity, perhaps owing to its many inaccessible areas where the 
entities can carry out their agenda with impunity. In 1977, remote areas 
of the states of Para and Maranhao were plagued by what the local people 
called the ‘vampire light’ or luz chupa-chupa. The Brazilian Air Force 
sent in teams of investigators from the First Air Zone Command 
(1 COMAR), and at least one incident attracted an investigation by 
Brazilian Naval Intelligence. 10 

Bob Pratt, a respected American journalist who has travelled exten¬ 
sively in northeast Brazil researching the chupa-chupas and who is the 
author of an important book on disturbing encounters in northeast 
Brazil," learned that UFOs were seen almost every night from April to 
July 1977 in the area of the town of Pinheiro. The Mayor, Manoel Paiva, 
told Pratt that he estimated that as many as 50,000 people had witnessed 
sightings. Typically, a big ball of fire would descend and then hover 300 
to 400 metres above the town. Some said it hurt their eyes to look at it, 
others claimed it made them feel sick. Fishermen and farmers reported 
being chased or injured by the objects. Invariably, the ‘ball of fire’ seemed 
attracted by other light of any kind. 12 

An Alien Environment 

At 01.00 on 10 July 1977, Jose Bencdito Bogea, a prosperous chicken 
farmer who lived six kilometres from Pinheiro, was walking into town to 
catch a bus to Sao Luis. The night was very dark. ‘Suddenly, a bright, 
greenish-blue light appeared in the sky and chased me for about 200 
metres,’ he told Pratt. 

Then it circled over a bush in front of me and stayed there, three or four 
metres above the ground, for just a fraction of a second. I could see a V- 
shaped thing 15 to 20 metres long, with a beam of orange light going down to 
the ground. I raised my arm and shone my flashlight at it, and in an instant I 
saw a bright flash of light. It knocked me down, and I felt like I’d had an elec¬ 
trical shock. Then I passed out. 

On recovering consciousness, Bogea says he found himself in a strange 
‘city’, with wide avenues and beautiful gardens. ‘I looked for the sun, but 
I didn’t see it,’ he said. ‘I didn’t see any sky at all, just empty space.’ 
Bogea saw many people in the city, all looking very much alike; about 30 
years old, five feet tall, slender, and nearly all dressed in grey and brown 
clothes; long gowns for the women and tunics and trousers for the men. 
‘They looked like us,’ Bogea elaborated. ‘Most were light-skinned and 
had eyes of different colours: blue, brown. The women were pretty and 
had long blond hair. All the men had short hair, beards and mustaches.’ 



Disquieting Developments 


357 


Although the people seemed to be talking to each other, Bogea heard 
nothing. After having been observed for a while in a large room, he was 
allowed to leave, though he was followed. In one area, he encountered 
what looked like small transportation devices; in another, about 20 disc¬ 
shaped objects, though none like the V- or triangular-shaped craft that 
had brought him to the city. Eventually, Bogea was motioned to enter one 
of the smaller ‘transporters’, at which point he again became uncon¬ 
scious. 

He next awoke at 08.30 and found himself beside a highway near the 
port of Itaqui, eight miles west of Sao Luis, more than 70 miles from 
where he had been abducted. Suffering from terrible pain in his lower 
back and his right side, he managed to hitch a ride home. For eight days, 
he had no appetite, and for many weeks he was obliged to use a cane to 
walk. Nevertheless, there was one dramatic benefit from the encounter. 
At the time of the abduction, he had been wearing strong eyeglasses. ‘But 
it wasn’t until I got home the next day that I realized I’d lost them. Since 
then I haven’t needed to wear glasses anymore . . .’ 13 

‘Camburoes’ 

Weird, cylindrical-shaped objects, called camburoes by local people, typ¬ 
ically emitting powerful beams of light that swept across terrains, were 
encountered frequently by farmers and fishermen during the chupa- 
chupa ‘epidemic’ in Brazil. In July that year, another frightening 
encounter was reported by Joao dc Brito of Vila de Piria, in the vicinity 
of the River Gurupi. As a friend related: 

It was 11.00 p.m., and he was sitting quietly in a hide among thick bushes, 
awaiting game. An animal appeared, but suddenly something flying in the sky 
threw down a beam of light on to the animal, which made off. Joao himself 
couldn't escape. He felt the light bearing down on his body and felt his 
strength being sucked out of him, and was sure he was going to die. The 
flying thing was shaped like a cylinder, and he could hear voices coming from 
it, in an unknown language. The thing went away then, but it left him pow¬ 
erless [and] he ended up in hospital. 

By this time, few dared venture outdoors at night. ‘It is important to 
note,' emphasized Dr Daniel Rebisso Giese, author of a seminal book on 
the chupa-chupa phenomenon, ‘that many local folk felt sure that the 
UFOs came up out of the sea, because they had been seen quite often 
doing precisely that and coming and shining down their beams on to 
boats or on to villages.’ 14 

The Woman in black 

Dr Rebisso Giese refers to fascinating stories, originating in the town of 



358 


Alien Base 


Bragan^a, Para, of encounters with the so-called ‘Fish Woman’, thought 
to be connected with the chupa-chupas, in July 1977. Described as fair- 
haired and fair-skinned, the young woman was believed by some to live 
alone on Cajueiro, a little island near Augusto Correa. Local people were 
bemused by the fact that she frequently bought large quantities of fish at 
the local market — usually 100 or 200 kilos a time - presumably, it was 
surmised, for the consumption of the ‘extraterrestrials’. 

Rumours prevailed. Fishermen who ventured near Cajueiro claimed 
to have seen the fish woman ‘walking on the water’, and peculiar lights 
were often seen near her cabin. One witness, Margarida, claims to have 
had a brief conversation with the woman. As Rebisso Giese reports: 
Walking one day along a lonely road, she suddenly came face to face with a 
pretty woman, dressed entirely in black, whom she recognized as the ‘Fish 
Woman’. The latter was wearing a blouse with tight-fitting sleeves right 
down to the wrists, and her hands were encased in gloves. Enhanced by her 
long blonde hair, her face seemed to probe into Margarida’s very soul. The 
woman asked Margarida what she did, and how many children she had, and 
. . was she not afraid to walk alone in that place? And then, suddenly, she 
vanished from sight as though by magic! Shaken and perplexed, Margarida 
went home, with a severe headache. 

Following coverage of these reports in newspapers in Belem, 15 officers 
of both Brazil’s Air Force and Navy intelligence services arrived in the 
area and began making enquiries about the fish woman. Apparently, little 
more was ascertained, beyond the discovery of an envelope in her now 
abandoned cabin. The envelope, mailed from France, was simply 
addressed to ‘Elizabeth’. ‘In the opinion of many folk,’ wrote Giese, 'she 
was connected with the UFOs, for when they vanished from the area, she 
vanished too.’ Furthermore, according to Dr W. Cecim Carvalho, a 
physician working in that part of Brazil, there had been occasions when 
‘beautiful white women with fair hair’ had been seen aboard the UFOs. 16 

The Curtain of Silence 

The craft reported at this time appeared to witnesses in different shapes 
and sizes; often shaped like helicopters or ray fish. Beams of light which 
emitted from them were capable of penetrating solid matter, such as the 
roofs of houses, and of targeting and paralysing people. By October 1977, 
the populace was thoroughly alarmed, particularly in Vigia, as this news 
report confirms: 

Mayor Jose Ildone of Vigia will today be sending to the Regional 
Headquarters of both the Army and the Air Force, in Belem, an extensive 
account of what is happening in Vigia, Santa Antonio do Taua and, in par¬ 
ticular, an account of the terror being experienced by the people of 



Disquieting Developments 


3S9 


Umbituba. The decision to do this was taken after the mayor had discussed 

the matter with Vigia’s Chief of Police, Alceu Marcilio de Souza. 17 

As sometimes perhaps exaggerated stories about the chupa-chupas 
proliferated, so the newspaper reports in Amazonia became correspond¬ 
ingly less objective. In due course, a curtain of silence descended on the 
matter. 18 The chupa-chupas, however, remained active in northeast 
Brazil. 

SHOCKING ENCOUNTERS 

In Alien Liaison , I alluded to the case of Luis Fernandes Barroso, a once 
prosperous businessman and rancher from Quixada, in the state of Ceara, 
Brazil, who on 23 April 1976 was struck by a beam of light from a hover¬ 
ing aerial object. He did not recall what happened after that. Barroso suf¬ 
fered nausea, diarrhoea, headaches and vomiting. Psychiatrists and other 
physicians who examined him concluded that he had a brain lesion. His 
speech deteriorated, and three months later his hair turned white. Six 
months later, he lost all his mental faculties and his behaviour regressed 
to that of an infant. 

The case was investigated by Bob Pratt, who provided many additional 
details in a 1990 report 1 published. Barroso had been examined first in 
Quixada by Dr Antonio Moreira Meghales, who later sent him to 
Fortaleza, where he was examined by a dozen psychiatrists and psycho¬ 
logists. After a lengthy stay in hospital, he was sent home. Nothing more 
could be done for him. Together with Dr Meghales and the principal 
investigators, Reginaldo Athayde and Jose Jean Alen^ar, Bob went to 
visit Barroso’s home, where he remained in the care of a nurse. 'He sits 
all day in a chair, staring, occasionally moving his eyes but apparently 
seeing nothing,’ wrote Bob. ‘He reacts to no stimuli, except that when 
someone takes a photo of him with a strobe light, as I did, he screams 
when he sees the flash.’ 19 

Although we shall probably never learn what happened to Barroso, the 
inference is that he was abducted. He died in 1993, unrecovered from his 
sad state. 

On 24 March 1978, a 16-year-old boy named Luis Carlos Serra disap¬ 
peared in his home town of Penalva, nearly 200 kilometres southwest of 
Sao Luis, Brazil. He did not turn up until three days later, when a fish¬ 
erman discovered him lying dazed in the forest, unable to stand up. He 
was taken to the local hospital and examined by Dr Linda Macieira, who 
later told Bob Pratt that the boy was completely dumb and had muscle 
contractions. That was not all, as Pratt reports: 

Four of his teeth were missing. Two had simply been broken off, and one had 

been extracted completely .. . Luis also had a full head of hair before this 



360 


Alien Base 


happened, but when Dr Madeira examined him he appeared to be bald. At 
first she thought his head had been shaved. On closer examination, however, 
she discovered that his hair had been burned off. The scalp was not burned, 
but the top of his ears were, very slightly, like sunburn. Luis seemed to be 
paralysed. Dr Madeira tried to move his arms and legs but could not. She 
pricked his arms and legs ... to test his reactions, but there was none at all. 
He went nine days without eating or drinking anything, and had to be fed 
intravenously [and] cathcterized. 

Several days later, Luis was flown to a larger hospital, in Sao Luis, 
where he was examined by more than half a dozen doctors, none of whom 
was able to say what had happened to him. Three days later, Luis began 
to come out of his paralysis. Still unable to talk, he motioned for pencil 
and paper and wrote down his story. 

He had been gathering guava fruit just inside the forest at noon on 
Good Friday when he heard a loud sound like a car horn above him. 
Looking up, he saw a light, brighter than the sun, just above the trees, 
which hurt his eyes. Suddenly, something made him fall flat on his back 
and he was unable to move anything except his eyes. He lay there for 
some time then began to rise into the air, although he neither saw nor felt 
anything that could have levitated him. As he rose, he could see a round 
object above the trees, with four spheres on the bottom, one of which was 
illuminated. 20 

‘When I got high enough,’ Luis told Bob later, ‘I could see a dome on 
top and three windows that went all the way around the dome. Only one 
window was open, and I just entered it head first. It was about a metre 
square. When I got inside, I fell down on the floor, but not hard.’ 21 Inside 
the craft were three small beings, only a metre tall, their faces obscured 
by helmets and visors. They were moving around, talking in a loud, 
incomprehensible language, paying no attention to Luis. 

Soon there came a rumbling sound and Luis felt the machine moving. 
He was taken to a ‘strange land’ with no sky or trees - just tall grass. Next, 
he was floated out of the machine and placed on a flat stone or table. 22 ‘I was 
still paralysed,’ he said. ‘Then these little people came to me and put a tube 
in my nose. It didn’t hurt. Then they put a transparent ball in my mouth, 
and the liquid just went down my throat very quickly. I fell asleep then, and 
I don’t know what happened after that until 1 woke up in the jungle.’ 23 

In his definitive book, UFO Danger Zone , subtitled ‘Terror and Death 
in Brazil - Where Next?’, as well as in the report I published, Bob Pratt 
relates many more disturbing, sometimes shocking encounters in north¬ 
east Brazil, including apparently UFO-related deaths. Jacques Vallee 
(who wrote the foreword to Pratt’s book) has himself visited Brazil and 
spoken with some of the witnesses, whom he found credible, despite their 
incredible experiences. 24 



Disquieting Developments 


361 


'Wherever they come from, some UFO beings may be kind and well- 
intentioned, but others definitely are not,’ states Bob Pratt. ‘UFOs may 
or may not be significant to mankind in the long run, but until we find 
out, we should treat them with the greatest of caution . . .’ 2S 


NOTES 

1 Good, Timothy, Beyond Top Secret: The Worldwide UFO Security Threat , 
Sidgwick & Jackson, London, 1996, pp. 87-93. 

2 McNeil, Kevin, 'The Clifton Bore Incident’- Article supplied to the author. 

3 ‘UFOs Escort Mexican Aircraft’, TheAPRO Bulletin, vol. 24, no. 2, August 
1975, pp. 1-3. 

4 Clark, Jerome, ‘Carlos de Los Santos and the Men in Black’, Flying Saucer 
Review, vol. 24, no. 4, July-August 1978, pp. 8-9. 

5 Ibid. 

6 Good, op. cit., pp. 168-78. 

7 Private report bv Mark Birdsall, William Tree and Peter Swallow, 
Yorkshire UFO Society, Leeds, 1984. 

8 Ibid. 

9 Todd, Donald R., ‘Underwater UFO with “Mother Ship" ’, The AFRO 
Bulletin , vol. 26, no. 10, April 1978, pp. 5-6. 

10 Giese, Dr Daniel Rcbisso, ‘Extraterrestrial Vampires in the Amazon Region 
of Brazil’, Flying Saucer Review, vol. 39, no. 3, autumn 1994, p. 8. 

11 Pratt, Bob, UFO Danger Zone: Terror and Death in Brazil - Where Next?, 
Horus House Press, PO Box 55185, Madison, Wisconsin 53705, 1996. 

12 Pratt, Bob, ‘Disturbing Encounters in North-East Brazil’, The UFO Report 
1991, ed. Timothy Good, Sidgwick &Jackson, London, 1990, p. 106. 

13 Pratt, UFO Danger Zone, pp. 100-8. 

14 Giese, op. cit., p. 9. 

15 O Liberal, Belem, 10 July 1977; A Provincia Do Para, Belem, 11 July 1977. 

16 Giese, op. cit., p. 10. 

17 A Provincia Do Pari, 22 October 1977. 

18 Giese, op. cit., p. 13. 

19 Pratt,‘Disturbing Encounters in North-East Brazil’, pp. 117-18. 

20 Ibid., pp. 114-16. 

21 Pratt, UFO Danger Zone p. 112. 

22 Pratt, ‘Disturbing Encounters in North-East Brazil’, p. 116. 

23 Pratt, UFO Danger Zone, p. 114. 

24 Vallee, Jacques, Confrontations: A Scientist's Search for Alien Contact, 
Ballantine Books, New York, 1990. 

25 Pratt, ‘Disturbing Encounters in North-East Brazil’, pp. 102, 124. 



Chapter 18 


Beyond Belief 


Though encounters with the proverbial and ridicule-prone ‘little green 
men’ are rare, there are reports by reliable witnesses which warrant our 
attention. Such is the case in the following report from Poland, an in¬ 
cident that occurred in the village of Emilcin, 140 kilometres southeast of 
Warsaw, on the morning of 10 May 1978. 

At about 08.00, Jan Wolski, a 71-year-old farmer, was passing through 
a forest in his horse-drawn cart when he noticed two individuals ahead, 
walking in the same direction, but with ‘supple jumps’ like ‘divers on the 
sea bed’. When one of them approached a muddy patch, his feet seemed 
to ‘slide’ across the mud, as reported in a number of other cases. When 
Wolski caught up with the ‘hunters’, for that is what he took them to be, 
they walked alongside the horse and cart for a while then jumped aboard 
and sat down gently, one at each side, gesturing to Wolski to carry on. 
(The added weight caused the mare to exert extra effort.) Wolski drove 
on while the ‘hunters’ exchanged some words in an incomprehensible 
tongue. Shortly, as the cart approached a clearing in the forest, a strange, 
almost ‘transparent white’ object could be seen, hanging in the air about 
70 metres away, emitting a faint humming sound. 

A Novel Contraption 

Insofar as I am aware, the shape of that object was like none ever 
reported. Described by Wolski as ‘like a short bus, but with a roof like a 
barn’, it was about five metres in length, three metres in width, and about 
2.5 metres in height It shone, as if nickel-plated. No windows were seen. 
As investigators reported: 

At its four comers, and half-way up, it had on the outside ‘barrels’ with black 
vertical rods running through them and carrying what looked like spirals 
rather reminiscent of corkscrews [see Fig. 26]. These black rods were rotat¬ 
ing very fast. Their diameter was ... around 30 centimetres. As for the ‘bar¬ 
rels’, their approximate dimensions were: height, about one metre; diameter, 
possibly 80 centimetres. The length of the black rods may have been about 
1.5 metres. 

The ‘corkscrews’ emitted a range of colours, and the ‘barrels’ seemed 



Beyond Belief 


363 



to have been the source of the humming. When closer to the object, 
Wolski said the sound was like that of bumble-bees in flight. As though 
cast in one piece, the craft’s surface was smooth, stainless and seamless. 
At a height of some SO centimetres from the ground was suspended a 
‘lift’, held by four thin cables attached above the entrance to the craft, 
which had descended as the trio approached. Stepping on to the plat¬ 
form, one of the entities invited Wolski aboard, gesturing to him that he 
should grasp the cables. After rising rapidly, the ‘lift’ stopped in front of 
an Opening and Wolski was motioned inside. 

Stepping into the object, Wolski paused, bracing himself with his right hand 
against the entrance. Inside the chamber, the walls of which were almost 
black, were two more beings identical with the first two... The chamber was 
rectangular. There was no internal lighting other than the daylight from the 
open door. The walls, floor, and ceiling were a greyish black - the same colour 
as the overalls of the occupants. The floor was shining, ‘as though polished'. 
The walls were smooth and hard to the touch, and made of a material resem¬ 
bling glass. Against the four walls there were seats, each fastened by two black 
cables. 

No apparatus was seen inside the contraption, with the exception of two 
black ‘tubes’ that ran from one gable wall to the other and two holes, about 
30 centimetres apart, into each of which one of the entities inserted 
alternately a smallish black ‘rod’. From floor to ceiling, the height was 




364 


Alien Base 



Fig. 27. An artist’s impression of one of the alien beings encountered by Jan 
Wolski. (WKPiB UFO Klub Mozatka) 

about 1.8 metres. On the floor of this cabin were about ten crows or rooks, 
which seemed to be paralysed, though they could move their heads and 
eyes. 

The Beings 

The four identical beings, of indeterminate sex, were about 1.4 to 1.5 
metres tall and had delicate, slim figures. They were dressed in tight* 
fitting, flexible one-piece suits of a greyish-black rubber-like material, 
covering the entire body except the face and hands. No pockets, belt or 
fasteners were seen. Their legs seemed thicker than those of normal men, 
and from the way these curved when the beings sat in the cart with their 
legs hanging down, they looked like prehensile limbs. A ‘hump’ was 
visible on the shoulders, as though something was contained under the 
suits. The slim, greenish-coloured hands had five fingers, between which 
were fine membranes, except for the gap between thumb and forefinger. 

Their heads were relatively large, with faces of an olive-green or 
greenish-brown hue, having high cheek-bones that gave them an Asiatic 
appearance. 

The eyes, almond-shaped, very long, were dark, and, according to [one 
report], had nothing corresponding to what we call the white of the eye. In 
the place of the nose, there was only a slight protuberance with two small ver¬ 
tical openings... but according to [another report] the nose was straight. The 
mouth was straight, and thin . .. They had no lips. Their teeth were white. 
No hair was visible on the face. 




Beyond Belief 


365 


When the beings smiled, the mouth twisted to one side with the effect of 
a grimace. Their speech was rapid and delicate. Wolski felt no fear in their 
presence; indeed, their polite, gentle manner inspired his confidence. 

A Physical Examination 

The beings indicated to Wolski that he should take off his clothes, and 
one of them helped him undo his shirt buttons. Facing him less than two 
metres away, one of the beings held in each hand a grey disc-shaped 
object that seemed to be attached to the hand by something like a suction- 
pad. The discs were vibrating and emitting a dull humming sound. 
Wolski was positioned with one side facing towards the entity holding the 
discs, then with his back towards him, and finally with the other side. 
Each time, Wolski’s arms were raised alternately by the entities, whose 
fingers were very cold. He believed that when the discs were being moved 
around, he was being ‘photographed’. During the process, he smelled an 
odour similar to that of burning sulphur; a smell that lingered in his 
clothing for days afterwards. 

Wolski’s clothes were also examined by the beings. Then, after look¬ 
ing inside his mouth, they motioned for him to get dressed. When ready, 
he was shown the way out. Wolski doffed his hat, bowed, and said good¬ 
bye. The beings bowed likewise, smiling. The same lift took him back 
almost to ground level, so that he was obliged to jump down a short way. 

Corroborative Evidence 

Reaching his horse and cart, Wolski turned round to look at the contrap¬ 
tion. Two or three of the beings were watching him from the entrance. 
He did not see them leave. Once he was inside the cart, the mare galloped 
towards home. There, ten minutes later, he told his family all about the 
experience, then he lay down to recover for a few hours. His family and 
some neighbours headed for the site, but the object was not there. Traces 
were found; however, these included relatively long, almost rectangular 
footprints, uprooted stalks and broken ears of maize, twigs and small 
branches pulled from trees, evidence of soil samples having been taken - 
and black feathers. 

At a farmhouse 800 metres from the scene of Wolski’s encounter, a 
mother was preparing a meal as her children, Adas (aged six) and 
Agnieszka (four), played outside. Between 08.00 and 09.00, the mother 
heard a noise like thunder, though seeming to come from the ground. 
Shortly afterwards, Adas came in to say that he had seen an aircraft like 
‘a little house’, or a ‘big box’, fly low over the barn, coming from (it was 
later determined) the direction of the landing site where Wolski had 
been, then vanish vertically with a sound like thunder. Adas said that the 
object was flying with one of its smallest ‘walls’ to the front, in which was 



366 


Alien Base 


a square window with rounded corners, through which he saw a pilot. On 
the edges of the wall, he said, were moving black rods, like the feelers of 
a snaiL 

The first investigators, Witold Wawrzonek and Dr Zbigniew Bolnar, 
found the witness truthful, forthright and sound mentally and physically. 
Yet another investigator, Dr Kietlinski, a psychologist, also found 
Wolski to be honest A devout Catholic, Wolski swore to God the 
veracity of his testimony. 

Like the British abductee, Alfred Burtoo, Jan Wolski believed that the 
creatures were foreigners from Earth, such as Chinese. He attributed 
their green skin colour to make-up, or masks! 1 

Those familiar with the numerous publications, personal accounts and 
memories about abductions, wherein, predominantly, grey-coloured 
beings with huge wrap-around almond-shaped eyes, slit mouths and only 
nostrils for noses - the so-called ‘Greys’ - are described repeatedly, will 
have been alerted by the partial similarity of Wolski’s entity to the Greys, 
perhaps wondering why more of these have not featured in this book. 
The fact of the matter is that the overwhelming majority of reports of the 
typical Greys (there are variations) did not appear in print until the late 
1970s. There are earlier reports, such as the case of Carroll Watts (see 
Chapter 14), whose ‘white or very light grey’ beings had wrap-around 
eyes of varying colours, small slits in a nose-type bone structure, and ‘a 
straight line with very thin lips’ for a mouth, and of course the famous 
Barney and Betty Hill case of 1961, but such cases are the exception 
rather than the rule; even then, certain differences are evident. 

CONTRASTING ITALIAN ENCOUNTERS 
Giorgio Filiputti, a 47-year-old railway employee from San Giorgio di 
Nogaro, in the northeastern Italian province of Udine, was fishing in the 
River Como at Mclaria, at about 15.30 on 18 September 1978, when he 
heard a piercing whistle, like ‘something scything through the air’. A few 
minutes later, having decided to give up fishing because of the wind, he 
walked up to the embankment. 

No sooner had he reached the top than he was alarmed to see an 
unusual disc-shaped object standing on a small dry mudflat no more than 
20 metres away. As Filiputti related to investigator Antonio Chiumiento: 
It was four or five metres wide and it had a cupola on top [and] was supported 
on three thick legs about 1.5 metres high. These latter seemed to be divided 
into two parts, almost cylindrical in shape, the upper part having a greater 
diameter than the lower ... I had the impression that they consisted of two 
tubes, one sliding into the other [which] terminated in flat ‘plates’. The object 
was totally smooth, without windows or portholes [and] seemed to be made 
of a metal of a brassy or yellowish colour which shone in the sunlight. 



Beyond Belief 


367 



Fig. 28. The craft and its occupant encountered 
by Giorgio Filiputti, near San Giorgio di 
Nogaro, Italy, in September 1978. These 
illustrations were made by Ugo Furlan after 
lengthy discussions with the witness. 



‘A Sort of Asian Pygmy’ 

‘Then, almost immediately,’ Filiputti continued, ‘I saw someone appear, 
from right behind the cupola, who was walking on the rim of the disc. My 
first thought for a moment was [that he hadj the physical appearance of 
the inhabitants of certain Asian countries.’ 

His height was maybe about 1.30 metres [and] he was wearing a completely 
tight-fitting overall, of the colour and brightness of silver, which flashed and 
sparkled vividly in the sunlight, and which left only the front part of the head, 
from the forehead to the chin, exposed. On his feet he had boots of the height 
of those worn by paratroopers and of a smoky black colour [and] his hands 
were clad in white gloves [see Fig. 28]. 

His face, dark-bronzed, had almond-shaped eyes extending back towards 
where his ears would be - which I did not see because that part of the head 



368 


Alien Base 


was covered by the overall. Nose and mouth were quite normal. From the 
moment that I observed him, particularly his eyes, I could see that these were 
wide open, with pupils that appeared to me to be a bit bigger and a bit more 
protruding than those of certain inhabitants of the Orient... the single-piece 
garment this being was wearing looked as though fashioned entirely of‘fish- 
scales', and he was wearing, approximately at waist-level, two containers of 
the same colour as his boots. 

'When I caught sight of that “sort of Asian pygmy’’, I was overcome 
by a profound emotional disturbance due partly to stupefaction and 
partly to fear,’ continued Filiputti. 'He too appeared to be gripped either 
by surprise and bewilderment [or] unease at seeing me, as if it had been 
completely unexpected for him.’ 

A Quick Repair Job 

Becoming aware of Filiputti, the being halted temporarily then con¬ 
tinued walking, in a rapid and agile manner, around the rim of the saucer. 
Finally he halted, stooped down slightly, and touched something stick¬ 
ing out near the base of the cupola. The gadget looked like ‘a sort of half¬ 
moon or horse-shoe . . . something semi-circular’. 

The individual kept on touching it with his hands for about three or four 
minutes, and all the while that he was doing this he kept repeatedly fixing his 
eyes on me... maybe to make sure that, while he was carrying out his task, I 
hadn’t managed to get closer to the craft... in my opinion there was almost 
certainly something wrong with the craft, and this operation was being car¬ 
ried out by him to repair it. .. 

Then, having finished his task, he glanced again in my direction for the 
umpteenth time and, following the same route as before, vanished from my 
sight behind the cupola and into the cabin, which no doubt was contained in 
the main body of the craft, though not visible to me. 

A Loud Lift-Off 

A few seconds later I heard a very loud rumbling noise, like a deafening clap 
of thunder, and then a very piercing whistle, both coming from beneath the 
object, which began to rise vertically. It went straight up, and slowly. As it 
rose vertically, I was in a position to see its under-part. It was hemispherical 
and its external surface looked ... like a lozenge-patterned grid. The landing 
gear was withdrawn into the craft almost immediately after the take-off. .. 
Underneath I saw a bluish ... tongue of flame about 60 centimetres long, of 
the same colour as burning kitchen gas. Then, when it had got to a height of 
about 10 metres, the contraption quickly turned on edge, so that for roughly 
a few seconds I was able to observe it in narrow profile. It went off towards 
the southwest at a tremendous speed . . . and very rapidly appeared like a 
glowing ball. It was totally out of sight in a few seconds. 



Beyond Belief 


369 


Imprints from the landing gear, about 50 centimetres in diameter, 
three centimetres deep, and spaced between two and three metres apart, 
could clearly be seen at the landing site. 2 

Like Alfred Burtoo and Jan Wolski, Giorgio Filiputti was convinced 
that what he had seen was not extraterrestrial in origin, but a highly 
advanced secret aircraft, perhaps built by an Asian power. 

Grotesque Goblins 

It was shortly before noon on 24 November 1978. Sixty-one-year-old 
Angelo D’Ambros, of Gallio, in the northeastern Italian province of 
Vicenza, was gathering firewood near Gastagh. Suddenly, he noticed two 
ghastly-looking creatures watching him, suspended in the air some 40 
centimetres above the ground. 

One of the creatures was about 1.2 metres in height, the other a little 
shorter. ‘They were extremely thin, and had a yellowish skin that was 
stretched so tightly that he could see great veins standing out on the head 
and hands of the bigger creature,’ reported Antonio Chiumiento. 

Their heads were large and elongated, like pears, smooth and bald, with enor¬ 
mous ears that rose straight up and ended in a point. They had great white 
eyes, sunken and without eyelids, set above a nose of pronounced dimensions 
which almost reached down beyond the lower lip, the latter being pretty fleshy, 
and large mouths displaying, at their extremities, two long, pointed ‘tusks’. 
From immediately below the knee right up to the neck, the two creatures 
appeared to be clad in dark, very closely-fitting overalls, which also covered the 
arms as far as the wrists, leaving the hands and the rest of the legs and the feet 
uncovered. The hands and feet were of a remarkable size and out of proportion 
to the rest of the body, with extremely long fingers and long nails. 

As though gliding, the smaller of the creatures began moving back and 
forth rapidly, to either side of D’Ambros, without moving its long feet. 
After shouting for help at the top of his voice, the witness asked them 
who they were and what they wanted of him, to which the smaller crea¬ 
ture responded unintelligibly, though it was clear what they wanted - 
D’Ambros’s machete. A struggle ensued, with the witness fending off the 
taller creature, who repeatedly grabbed hold of the machete. On two 
occasions, D’Ambros felt an electric shock go up his arm. Managing to 
get hold of a large branch he had cut, the witness threatened the 
grotesque goblins with it, whereupon they scurried off. D’Ambros 
chased them to a nearby clearing, where their saucer was parked. 

It was disc-shaped, estimated to be four metres wide and two metres 
high at the centre, with four aluminium-coloured landing legs that had 
apparently sunk into the ground a little. It appeared brightly coloured on 
the upper section, including the cupola, but blue on the lower half, with 
a white band around the centre. Immediately, D’Ambros saw one of the 



370 


Alien Base 




Fig. 29. The craft and creature seen at Gastagh, Italy, by Signor Angelo 
D’Ambros. Sketch by Ugo Furlan, based on discussions with the witness. 

goblins’ long hands closing a sort of trap-door, located in the dome, and 
a few seconds later the disc took off at an angle, silently and at phenom¬ 
enal speed, emitting a burst of red ‘flame’. 3 

These goblins resemble in some respects the creatures who terrorized 
the Sutton family near Hopkinsville, Kentucky, in 1955 (see pp. 174-5), 
though in that case, aggressive behaviour was not displayed. Again, it is 
the wide variety of entities and craft types and configurations, though of 
the same basic kinds, that will be surprising to first-time as well as to 
expert readers. 

A LUFTHANSA ENCOUNTER OVER NEWFOUNDLAND 
In 1994, Captain Werner Utter, for many years the chief pilot of 
Lufthansa, revealed that he had witnessed unknown flying craft on three 
occasions, the second of which took place while he was flying at 30,000 
feet over the Atlantic, off the coast of Newfoundland, on 21 November 
1978, at 09.55 GMT. 



Beyond Belief 


371 


‘It seems we have a flying saucer in sight, very bright, beaming rays, 
sometimes red, sometimes violet,’ Utter reported to air traffic con¬ 
trollers. ‘It looks like a spider.’ 

The object, estimated to be 20 to 30 metres in diameter and about a 
mile in front of the Boeing 747, was also reported by the crew of a Trans 
World Airlines plane. 

A few years later. Captain Utter and his crew witnessed a gigantic 
cigar-shaped object, while flying over the United Kingdom. 4 

Craft with spidery appendages have been observed elsewhere: for 
instance, on 10 September 1976, Bill Pecha saw a domed, circular ‘glow¬ 
ing thing’, about ISO feet across, above his house near Colusa, California. 
On each side hung two pincer-like appendages about eight feet long and 
six wavy, motionless ‘cables’, with frayed ends, also hanging down. The 
craft, and some attendant objects, caused a major power blackout in the 
area. 5 

A RESEARCH AND STUDY MISSION 

‘Yes, it was true,’ said Jesus Antunes Moreira to Dr Walter Biihlcr, ‘I 
really did see a flying saucer and I talked with its crew.’ 

Dr Biihler, a physician, and one of Brazil’s leading UFO researchers 
(who died in 1996), listened intently. It had taken him a long while to track 
down Moreira, who at the time of his experience, on 6 December 1978, 
was a security guard at the Marimbonda Hydroelectric Plant near the 
town of Fronteira, bordering the states of Minas Gerais and Sao Paulo. 

‘It was a bit after 8.30 p.m.,’ began Moreira, ‘and I was up in the guard¬ 
house, right on top of the dam, because it was raining at the time, and 1 
was anxious to keep dry. Suddenly I noticed that something was lighting 
up the surface of the water in the dam. My curiosity aroused, I stepped 
out of the guard-house and went to see what it could be, and found myself 
looking at an object which was slightly above the level of the horizon, 
about 200 metres from me, and crossing the Rio Grande,’ 

It was coming in my direction, and when it got closer, I could make out that 
it was a space-craft about five metres wide and three metres high, white in 
colour, and emitting a certain amount of luminosity. It looked as though it 
was about to land on top of the dam, maybe right by the power-house ... it 
wasn’t making the slightest noise. 

Getting more and more curious, I started walking along the top of the con¬ 
creted part of the dam, but the craft went past where I was and then moved 
to the earthen part of the dam, about 1.5 metres from the foot of it I was now 
able to see that its colour was not white, but a light grey. It had a door about 
two metres high, with a little window in the upper part of it, and it had a sort 
of platform running right round it. 

By now it was only about seven metres from me. Then the little window 




372 


Alien Base 


opened, and in it there appeared a face in many respects very like a human 
face. Then the main door opened, and from it came three beings dressed in 
blue overalls with a metallic sheen. They were all very tall - two metres 
maybe - and with quite long, black, smooth hair. 

The men addressed the security guard in an unknown tongue. Moreira 
responded that he would go and fetch someone who perhaps could speak 
their language. ‘You see,’ he explained, ‘I was still thinking that maybe - 
who knows? - they might be some foreign engineers. When I said I would 
go to one of the telephones that are strung out along the 300-metre-wide 
top of the dam, one of them gestured to me to step back. 

‘At this stage, I began to get scared, and I felt for my revolver, [with] 
the idea of firing a warning shot should it be necessary. And indeed I did 
try to shoot, but the revolver jammed, and would not fire.’ 

At that point, one of them went inside the machine and came out with a black 
box, about the size of a shoe-box, and handed it to one of the others, who was 
the one that had the longest hair. I noticed that all of them were wearing rose- 
coloured gloves, which were luminous, like their blue overalls. From then on, 
I was able to understand perfectly what they were saying to me, in 
Portuguese. They asked me if I was scared, and told me to keep calm, because 
they said they had no intention of doing me any harm. When I asked them 
what they wanted, and where they came from, they said they were on a 
‘research and study mission’, and that, if I remained calm, I would soon know 
all about it. 

When one of the cosmonauts began gathering some stones with a kind 
of grab at the end of a line, Moreira objected. ‘That was enough for them 
to put away the box and, without the slightest show of dissatisfaction or 
displeasure, re-enter their craft.’ 6 

This is one of a number of cases I have cited in which the aliens seem 
to be on a research trip that involves collecting Earth's rock and soil 
samples. I do not find this surprising: currently, that is what NASA’s 
Pathfinder mission to Mars is doing and also what its Apollo missions to 
the Moon did just over a quarter-century ago as a primary mission - to 
collect and analyse rock and soil samples. 


AN ABDUCTION IN ARGENTINA 

Thirty-four-year-old Julio Platner opened the front door of his house on 
the prairie ranch where he worked, some 15 kilometres from Winifreda, 
in the Province of La Pampa, Argentina. It was about 19.30 on 9 August 
1983. Noticing a bright light approaching, he investigated, As he pulled 
up and got out of his van, the light he had seen suddenly came straight at 
him, blinding and paralysing him. 7 

•It was as if a lorry were coming towards me,’ he explained to reporters 



Beyond Belief 


373 


the following day, still disturbed by his encounter. ‘I covered my head 
with my arms and after that, I do not remember anything until I awoke 
inside a room.’ 8 (In other reports, it is stated that Julio first saw some 
small beings, then suddenly found himself, with his van, inside a room.) 9 
When I awoke, I found myself lying on an ‘operating table’ and I discovered 
four ‘beings’ around me. Two were beside me at the top of the table, one 
clasping my shoulder with his hand (I saw him but 1 did not feel his hand). In 
front of me, about two metres away, there were two more beings, a man and 
a woman. I moved my lips asking where I was and what they wanted, but no 
sound came out. Nevertheless, they seemed to understand me and answered 
mentally: ‘Don’t be afraid. We would not harm you. What you are experi¬ 
encing now has happened to thousands of people before. You can reveal it if 
you wish. Some will believe you and others will not.' 10 

Platner was then undressed. 11 ‘I felt very calm and comfortable,’ he 
continued. ‘The temperature inside was quite pleasant. 1 was not afraid. 
I looked around and gathered as many details as possible.’ 

Once the woman came close to me and put her hand on my wrist, but I did 
not feel it. Then they put a strange artifact on my left arm, with some kind of 
tube, 30 centimetres long, half rigid and half flexible, and they took some 
blood. They did not use any rubber band or needle, but I could see how my 
blood raised inside the tube up to the middle, when they stopped. I tried to 
touch the being at my back, but I struck something like glass. I tried to stand 
up and my forehead struck [more] glass, as if I were inside a glass cube. 

Platner described the room in which he found himself as spherically 
shaped, windowless, about three metres in diameter, with walls of a soft 
beige colour. Though well lighted, no source of light could be discerned. 
The only fittings were the examination table on which he lay and a type 
of glass ‘bookcase’ that glowed. After 15 to 20 minutes, Platner was 
ordered to stand up, which he managed to do without touching the 
‘glass’. 12 

‘They took all my valuables off me, but gave them back afterwards, 1 
said Platner. ‘After that, I don’t remember anything more, until I came 
to again and found that I had been lying asleep on top of my van, on a 
rural road leading to Villa Mirasol.’ 13 


The Humanoids 

‘They were humans,’ insisted Platner. ‘His body had human shape from 
neck to feet, which were like boots. Their five-fingered hands seemed to 
be covered by gloves. But there were no boots .. . They had no uniform, 
or their own skin was their uniform, close-fitting, without holes or seams, 
all in one piece including face and head, like rubber.’ 



374 


Alien Base 


The head was different from ours; hairless, short nose, small mouth and ears 
flatter against the side of the head. The most alien feature was their eyes; cir¬ 
cular, without eyelashes and bulging out of the face, with a small protuber¬ 
ance in its middle. They were about 1.65 or 1.70 metres tall... The ‘woman’ 
was exactly like the men, with greyish, whitish or greenish skin or uniform, 
but 1 think she was a woman because she had female shapes (breasts) and she 
was quite thin. They showed no emotions, made no face movements except 
with their lips (but without noise). Sometimes they seemed like robots. 

Corroboration 

Some employees of the Argentine National Telecommunications Board 
told reporters that the telegraphic link between Winifreda and the nearby 
town of Eduardo Castex was interrupted in precisely the same area, and 
at the same time, as Platner’s abduction. Furthermore, two of Platner’s 
neighbours said that the pictures on their TV sets disappeared for several 
minutes, also at the same time. Horses in a nearby paddock seemed 
unusually disturbed: the following day they were found on another part 
of the estate and it took a lot of effort to return them to their normal 
grazing area. 

Platner had an excellent reputation locally, and most people believed 
him. His physician, Dr Adolfo Pizarro, showed the press marks on 
Platner’s right wrist and elbow where blood had apparently been 
extracted, one of which was right on a vein. 14 

Julio Platner’s encounter took place three nights before that of Alfred 
Burtoo, who was abducted in Aldershot, England. There were interest¬ 
ing similarities, and because we may be certain that neither witness was 
aware of the other’s story, it is worth putting those similarities on the 
record. Initially, Burtoo was attracted by a brilliant light as he was fish¬ 
ing beside the Basingstoke Canal in the small hours of 12 August 1983. 
He was then approached by two small beings and escorted into a craft 
parked on the canal towpath. Two other, similar beings were on board. 
As in Platner’s case, all four beings were of the same size, dressed in pale- 
green one-piece coveralls that covered the hands and feet, and which 
appeared to be moulded on to their thin bodies - ‘like plastic’, Burtoo 
told me. No facial features could be discerned, unfortunately, because 
these were covered by visors. 15 

Burtoo’s abduction was recalled consciously, and though Platner 
blacked out at the moments when he was taken on board and released from 
the craft, he recalled most of the event without recourse to hypnosis. 

MADAME X AND THE HANDSOME HUMANOIDS 

In the stereotypical abduction scenario, small bug-eyed beings appear in 

witnesses’ bedrooms prior to beaming them aboard their spacecraft. In 



Beyond Belief 


375 


the following case, four beings appeared suddenly in a witness’s bedroom 
- but they were neither small nor bug-eyed; neither did they abduct the 
witness. 

Mme X was asleep in her bedroom near Sospel, 20 kilometres north¬ 
east of Nice, France. It was 02.00 on 30 April 1983. Awakening, she saw 
a red football-sized object. She tried unsuccessfully to awaken her hus¬ 
band beside her. The light then vanished; she assumed it was ‘ball-light¬ 
ning’. Mme X arose and went to an adjoining room to open the window. 
When she returned, she was startled by the sight of four quasi-human 
beings, about 1.75 metres in height. They were of a very athletic gait, 
with long, pale faces and long thin noses and mouths. The eyes were very 
elongated, with blue irises. Most surprising was the position of the 
pupils: rather than centred, they were close to the inner corner of the eye, 
giving them a ‘cross-eyed’ appearance. They had blond eyebrows, In 
spite of their peculiar features, Mme X thought they were handsome. 



Fig. 30. Sketch by ‘Madame X’ of the craft and one of its quasi-human occupants. 

(Lumieres Dans La NuU) 

There was another marked difference from normal human beings. 
‘Whereas all humans have a recess or indentation at the point where the 
nose is joined to the forehead, this was, she said, non-existent in them,’ 
reported Marc Tolosano, one of the investigators. ‘Neither did they pos¬ 
sess the little vertical furrow which we all have between our nose and our 
mouth. They did have teeth.’ 

She did not see their hair, for their heads were covered by litde skull-caps like 
those of frogmen, but with this difference: [they] were not part of the whole 




376 


Alien Bose 


one-piece suit, and merely covered the entire skull and ears. [They] were 
wearing small bars, coloured green and yellow, ‘like badges of rank’... Their 
hands, gloveless, were soft and delicate and a little larger than normal human 
hands. 

Although Mme X was not afraid, she made another attempt to waken 
her husband. It is useless,’ said one of the men, who seemed to be the 
leader, speaking in normal French. The German shepherd dogs, nor¬ 
mally aggressive towards strangers, cowered under the bed. In reply to 
the witness’s question as to whether they spoke other languages, they said 
they knew all the languages on Earth. Calmly, Mme X invited the 
strangers to be seated. 

‘Do you know who we are?’ enquired the leader. 

‘You’re robots!’ she replied. Smiling, the leader stretched out his hand 
for her to feel. 

‘Then,’ she said, noticing the soft texture of their skin, ‘you are 
extraterrestrials’, to which they responded in the affirmative. 

All the while, Mme X experienced difficulty in thinking and formulat¬ 
ing questions. It was, she said, as if her will-power had been 'slowed 
down’. 


Projected Images of Earth’s History 

The entities suddenly rose from their seats, explaining that they wanted 
to show her how familiar they were with Earth’s history. Following them 
outside, she was surprised to see other, similar beings in the courtyard. 
The first four inspected the courtyard. ‘Here it’s fine,’ they announced. 
‘We arc going to make a projection for you.’ 

Curiously, although a thick fog had developed, and it was chilly in 
Sospel at that time of year, Mme X did not feel cold. Now joined by three 
other quasi-humans, holding black spheres in their hands, she and the 
others watched as predominantly sepia-coloured images, about three 
metres high, were projected on to the fog without any visible beams of 
light emitting from the spheres. The ‘film’, which ran from prehistory to 
the Second World War, retraced our wars, sometimes stopping at indi¬ 
vidual ‘frames’. Mme X told them she was uninterested in wars, to which 
they responded that armed conflicts were all humans knew about, and 
that they themselves only knew this planet in that light. 

Further Discussion - and Departure 

When the show had finished, Mme X returned to the house, accom¬ 
panied by the beings. Her husband was still asleep, and the dogs 
remained quiet. She asked some questions on matters that she felt would 
be of interest to scientists: about time, distances in space, and so on. To 



Beyond Belief 


377 


each question they replied that she would not be able to understand. 
When she asked why the visitors were all men, they replied that some¬ 
times women did accompany them, though not on this occasion. 

Despite her difficulty in communicating, Mme X felt quite at ease with 
her guests, and invited them to eat, drink - or even to smoke, if they 
wished! They smiled but declined courteously, promising that they 
would dine with her during their next visit, six months later (a promise 
not kept). Meanwhile, some of the visitors glanced out of a window, as if 
to check that everything was all right. 

At 04.00, the strangers decided it was time to leave. ‘They rose, shook 
Mme X by the hand, and she accompanied them to the door,’ reported 
Tolosano. 

She then perceived a long, dark-coloured oval object, about IS metres or so 
in length. She could see a door in it, and inside, through the door, a diffused 
light. The fog was still there, everywhere around. The distance from the 
house to the craft was only about 30 metres. From the entrance of the craft 
came a gangway, and, after walking across the corrugated-iron roof of a shed, 
the entities went up onto this gangway . . . Mme X never saw the under-part 
of the craft at any moment, as it was hidden by the dense fog and by an inter¬ 
vening plank. 

The craft then flew away, emitting a faint whistling noise. When she 
returned to bed, Mme X’s heart began to pound violently and ‘she was 
seized with an indescribable panic’, despite having maintained her com¬ 
posure throughout the encounter. 16 Was this a delayed reaction to what 
would normally have been an alarming experience? Almost certainly. 
There have been a number of cases where the composure of witnesses 
seems induced by the aliens. 

Mme X wondered whether or not she should contact the local priest 
and the Gendarmerie, but decided to tell no o